CS1000 Software Input Output Reference

Add to my manuals
1240 Pages

advertisement

CS1000 Software Input Output Reference | Manualzz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Software Input Output Reference —

Administration

7.0

NN43001-611, 04.05

April 2011

© 2011 Avaya Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Notice

While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya assumes no liability for any errors. Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes.

Documentation disclaimer

“Documentation” means information published by Avaya in varying mediums which may include product information, operating instructions and performance specifications that Avaya generally makes available to users of its products. Documentation does not include marketing materials. Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to the original published version of documentation unless such modifications, additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. End User agrees to indemnify and hold harmless

Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this documentation, to the extent made by End User.

Link disclaimer

Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation provided by Avaya.

Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information, statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered within them.

Avaya does not guarantee that these links will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages.

Warranty

Avaya provides a limited warranty on its Hardware and Software

(“Product(s)”). Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this Product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the

Avaya Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com

. Please note that if you acquired the Product(s) from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada, the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya.

Licenses

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA

WEBSITE, HTTP://SUPPORT.AVAYA.COM/LICENSEINFO/ ARE

APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS, USES AND/OR

INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE, PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC.,

ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE, OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER

(AS APPLICABLE) UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH

AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER. UNLESS

OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING, AVAYA DOES

NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED

FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA, AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN

AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER; AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT

TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE

USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE. BY

INSTALLING, DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, OR

AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO, YOU, ON BEHALF OF

YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHOM YOU ARE INSTALLING,

DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE (HEREINAFTER

REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS “YOU” AND “END USER”),

AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A

BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC. OR THE

APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE ( “AVAYA”).

Copyright

Except where expressly stated otherwise, no use should be made of materials on this site, the Documentation, Software, or Hardware provided by Avaya. All content on this site, the documentation and the

Product provided by Avaya including the selection, arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases. You may not modify, copy, reproduce, republish, upload, post, transmit or distribute in any way any content, in whole or in part, including any code and software unless expressly authorized by Avaya. Unauthorized reproduction, transmission, dissemination, storage, and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal, as well as a civil offense under the applicable law.

Third-party components

Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements (“Third

Party Components”), which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product (“Third Party Terms”).

Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code (for those

Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code), and identifying the copyright holders of the Third Party Components and the

Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support

Web site: http://support.avaya.com/Copyright .

Preventing Toll Fraud

“Toll fraud” is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, a person who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf). Be aware that there can be a risk of Toll Fraud associated with your system and that, if Toll Fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.

Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention

If you suspect that you are being victimized by Toll Fraud and you need technical assistance or support, call Technical Service Center Toll

Fraud Intervention Hotline at +1-800-643-2353 for the United States and Canada. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya

Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com

. Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to: [email protected].

Trademarks

The trademarks, logos and service marks (“Marks”) displayed in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya, its affiliates, or other third parties. Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party which may own the Mark.

Nothing contained in this site, the Documentation and Product(s) should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party.

Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc.

All non-Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners, and “Linux” is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.

Downloading Documentation

For the most current versions of Documentation, see the Avaya

Support Web site: http://support.avaya.com

.

Contact Avaya Support

Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your Product. The support telephone number is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://support.avaya.com

.

2 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Contents

Chapter 1: New in this release...............................................................................................15

Other changes.................................................................................................................................................15

Revision History......................................................................................................................................15

Chapter 2: Introduction...........................................................................................................21

Note about legacy products and releases.......................................................................................................21

Subject............................................................................................................................................................21

Format and structure..............................................................................................................................21

The Prompts and responses table..........................................................................................................22

The Alphabetical list of prompts table.....................................................................................................22

Feature Packages..................................................................................................................................23

Applicable systems.........................................................................................................................................24

System migration....................................................................................................................................24

Intended audience...........................................................................................................................................25

Conventions....................................................................................................................................................25

Terminology............................................................................................................................................25

Notational conventions...........................................................................................................................25

Related information.........................................................................................................................................27

NTPs.......................................................................................................................................................27

Online.....................................................................................................................................................27

CD-ROM.................................................................................................................................................27

Chapter 3: How to get help.....................................................................................................29

Getting help from the Nortel web site..............................................................................................................29

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.....................................................................29

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code.................................................................30

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller........................................................................................30

Chapter 4: Communicating with the system.........................................................................31

Accessing the system.....................................................................................................................................31

Logging in and out..................................................................................................................................31

Local and remote access........................................................................................................................32

HOST mode access...............................................................................................................................32

PDT and OAM commands for SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)........................................................33

Line mode interface log in procedure.....................................................................................................33

Access through the maintenance telephone..........................................................................................34

Accessing Meridian Mail.........................................................................................................................36

Preview of overlay content..............................................................................................................................36

System memory and disk space.....................................................................................................................37

Legend:...................................................................................................................................................37

Low memory and disk warnings.............................................................................................................38

System Lookup messages..............................................................................................................................38

Multi-User Login..............................................................................................................................................39

Maintenance display codes.............................................................................................................................40

Time and date of fault......................................................................................................................................40

Chapter 5: Alphabetical list of packages..............................................................................41

Chapter 6: Numerical list of packages..................................................................................53

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 3

Chapter 7: Overlay loader and Multi-User Login..................................................................65

Overlay loader.................................................................................................................................................65

Overlay loader commands..............................................................................................................................65

Multi-User Login commands...........................................................................................................................66

Multi-User commands.............................................................................................................................66

Chapter 8: LD 02: Traffic.........................................................................................................69

Basic commands.............................................................................................................................................69

How to use traffic commands..........................................................................................................................71

Set traffic report schedules.....................................................................................................................72

Set system ID.........................................................................................................................................73

System reports.......................................................................................................................................73

Customer reports....................................................................................................................................74

Network reports......................................................................................................................................74

Set customer for feature key usage measurement.................................................................................75

Stop printing of title, date and time.........................................................................................................75

Set traffic measurement on selected terminals......................................................................................75

Set blocking probability for Line Load Control (LLC)..............................................................................76

Set time and date...................................................................................................................................76

Set daily time adjustment.......................................................................................................................77

Set and print Daylight Savings Time.......................................................................................................77

Set thresholds.........................................................................................................................................78

Perform threshold tests on last reports...................................................................................................79

Print last reports.....................................................................................................................................79

Print alarm and exception filter summary........................................................................................................80

Chapter 9: LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration........................................81

Linked Overlay programs................................................................................................................................81

Prompts and responses..................................................................................................................................82

Contents.................................................................................................................................................82

Prompts and responses by task......................................................................................................................85

Add a telephone.....................................................................................................................................85

Copy a set..............................................................................................................................................88

Easy change...........................................................................................................................................89

Remove a telephone..............................................................................................................................89

Move a telephone...................................................................................................................................90

Alphabetical list of prompts.............................................................................................................................90

Chapter 10: LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration........................................................129

Linked Overlay programs..............................................................................................................................129

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................130

Contents...............................................................................................................................................130

Prompts and responses by task....................................................................................................................136

Add a voice telephone..........................................................................................................................136

Add a data telephone...........................................................................................................................140

Copy a telephone.................................................................................................................................144

Easy change.........................................................................................................................................146

Move a telephone.................................................................................................................................146

Remove a telephone............................................................................................................................146

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................147

Chapter 11: LD 12: Attendant Consoles..............................................................................221

4 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................221

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................222

Chapter 12: LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and

Receivers................................................................................................................................233

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................233

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................234

Chapter 13: LD 14: Trunk Data Block..................................................................................239

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................239

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................242

Chapter 14: LD 15: Customer Data Block...........................................................................267

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................267

Contents...............................................................................................................................................267

Customer data block.............................................................................................................................268

Default Customer Data Block...............................................................................................................270

Data Block: AML (Application Module Link)..................................................................................................272

Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)......................................................................................273

Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles)..........................................................................................................274

Data Block: AWU (Automatic Wake Up Data)...............................................................................................276

Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)................................................................................277

Data Block: CCS (Controlled Class of Service)............................................................................................278

Data Block: CDR (Call Detail Recording)......................................................................................................278

Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)................................................................................................279

Data Block: FFC (Flexible Feature Codes)...................................................................................................280

Data Block: FTR (Features and options).......................................................................................................280

Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management).................................................................................................285

Data Block: ICP (Intercept Computer Update)..............................................................................................286

Data Block: IMS (Integrated Message Service)............................................................................................286

Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments).........................................................................................................287

Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers)................................................................................................289

Data Block: MON (Set-based Monitoring).....................................................................................................290

Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations)...................................................................................................291

Data Block: NET (Networking)......................................................................................................................292

Data Block: NIT (Night Service)....................................................................................................................295

Data Block: OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security).................................................................................................296

Data Block: PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering)..................................................................................................296

Data Block: PWD (Password).......................................................................................................................297

Data Block: RDR (Call Redirection)..............................................................................................................297

Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement) ................................................................................299

Data block: SLS (SIP Line Services).............................................................................................................300

Data Block: TIM (Timers)..............................................................................................................................300

Data Block: TST (Test lines)..........................................................................................................................301

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................302

Chapter 15: LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance.............................379

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................379

Contents...............................................................................................................................................379

RDB: Route data block.........................................................................................................................380

ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block...................................................................................396

SCH: ATM Schedules data block.........................................................................................................397

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 5

Meridian 911 Route data block.............................................................................................................397

NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block........................................................398

Release Mechanism Options................................................................................................................398

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................399

Chapter 16: LD 17: Configuration Record 1........................................................................479

Notes on ISDN configuration.........................................................................................................................479

D-Channel Expansion...........................................................................................................................480

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................480

Configuration record 1..........................................................................................................................480

Gate Opener: ADAN (Action Device and Number)...............................................................................481

Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)...........................................................................................488

Gate Opener: CEQU (Common Equipment)........................................................................................488

Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)...............................................................................490

Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay)..............................................................................................................491

Gate Opener: PARM (System Parameters)..........................................................................................491

Gate Opener: PWD (Password)...........................................................................................................495

Gate Opener: VAS (Value Added Server).............................................................................................496

ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values.....................................................................................................498

HRLR / HTLR Offsets and Values.................................................................................................................499

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................500

Chapter 17: LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and

Hotline....................................................................................................................................577

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................577

Contents...............................................................................................................................................577

Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records......................................................................578

Configure Group Call lists.....................................................................................................................578

Configure Speed Call lists....................................................................................................................579

Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list..................................................................................579

Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists.......................................................................................................580

Configure Special Service List..............................................................................................................580

Move from one group or list to another.................................................................................................581

Configure Group Hunt..........................................................................................................................581

Configure ABCD data block..................................................................................................................582

Flexible feature code information..................................................................................................................583

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................585

Chapter 18: LD 19: Code Restriction...................................................................................593

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................593

Contents...............................................................................................................................................593

ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block.................................................................................593

CRB: Code Restriction data block........................................................................................................594

FGDB: Feature Group D data block.....................................................................................................594

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................595

Chapter 19: LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide.........................................................................603

Chapter 20: LD 20: Print Routine 1......................................................................................607

Data Access Card (NT7D16)........................................................................................................................607

Templates.............................................................................................................................................607

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP).................................................................................607

6 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Linked Overlay programs.....................................................................................................................608

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................608

Alphabetical list of print reports.....................................................................................................................610

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data..........................................................................................610

Analog set (500 and PBX) data............................................................................................................610

Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data........................................................................................611

Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data..........................................................................611

Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business...........................................................................612

Communication Set (BCS) data...........................................................................................................612

Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data..............................................................................................613

Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital .............................................................613

Class Modem unit data.........................................................................................................................613

Calling Line ID Verification data............................................................................................................614

Data access card (DAC) data...............................................................................................................614

Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data............................................................................................................615

Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data..............................................................................................615

Digital Communications Set data.........................................................................................................616

Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data.....................................................................................616

Digitone Receiver (DTR) data..............................................................................................................616

Directory number (DNB) data...............................................................................................................617

Directory number (DNB) range data.....................................................................................................617

Directory number (DNB) selection........................................................................................................618

Group Call (GRP) data.........................................................................................................................618

Hot Line List (HTL) data.......................................................................................................................618

Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data.....................................................................................................619

IP Phone Model (ISET) data.................................................................................................................619

Mobile Extension (MOBX) data............................................................................................................620

Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data............................................................620

Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data...............................................................................621

Power (PWR) data................................................................................................................................621

Pretranslation (PRE) data.....................................................................................................................621

Special Service List (SSL) data............................................................................................................622

Speed call lists (SCL) data...................................................................................................................622

Tandem Connection (TCON) data........................................................................................................622

Template (TEM) data............................................................................................................................622

Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks............................................................623

Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data............................................................................................624

Tone Detector (TDET) data..................................................................................................................624

Trunk data: All Trunks...........................................................................................................................625

Trunk data: Specific Trunk types..........................................................................................................625

Universal Extension (UEXT) data.........................................................................................................626

Unused Card (LUC) data......................................................................................................................627

Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data...............................................................................................627

Unused Units (LUU) data.....................................................................................................................627

Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data................................................................................628

Voice Mailbox (VMB) data....................................................................................................................629

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................629

Chapter 21: LD 21: Print Routine 2......................................................................................645

Set Relocation data.......................................................................................................................................645

Input Processing...................................................................................................................................645

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 7

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................646

Alphabetical list of print reports.....................................................................................................................646

Application Module Link (AML) data.....................................................................................................646

Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15...........................................................................................647

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data.........................................................................................647

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data..................................................................................647

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data............................................................................648

Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data..........................................................................................................648

Call Detail Recording (CDR) data.........................................................................................................648

Call Redirection (RDR) data.................................................................................................................648

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data...........................................................................................649

Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key..........................................................................................649

Code Restriction (CRB) data................................................................................................................649

Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data...............................................................................................649

Customer data block (CDB)..................................................................................................................650

Features and options (FTR) data.........................................................................................................650

Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data...................................................................................................650

Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data......................................................................................................651

Hospitality Management (HSP) data....................................................................................................651

Integrated Message Service (IMS) data...............................................................................................651

Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data.................................................................................................651

Intercept Treatments (INT) data...........................................................................................................652

ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data...........................................................................................................652

Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data..................................................................................................652

Multi-Party Operations (MPO) data......................................................................................................652

Networking (NET) data.........................................................................................................................653

Night Service (NIT) data.......................................................................................................................653

Off Hook Alarm Security (OAS) data....................................................................................................653

Password (PWD) data..........................................................................................................................653

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) data....................................................................................................654

Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA) data..................................................................................654

Route Data Block (RDB).......................................................................................................................654

Set Relocation (SRDT) data.................................................................................................................655

Test lines (TST) data............................................................................................................................655

Timers (TIM) data.................................................................................................................................655

Trunk Members (LTM) data..................................................................................................................655

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................656

Chapter 22: LD 22: Print Routine 3......................................................................................661

Audit trail for Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW)........................................................................................661

Packages equipped..............................................................................................................................661

Issue and release.................................................................................................................................661

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................662

Audit trail (AUDT) data.........................................................................................................................662

Common Equipment (CEQU) data.......................................................................................................663

Configuration Record (CFN) data.........................................................................................................663

Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems..........................................................................................663

History File (VHST) data.......................................................................................................................663

Input/output device (ADAN) data..........................................................................................................664

Integrated Message Service (IMA) data...............................................................................................664

Issue and Release (ISS).......................................................................................................................665

8 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Meridian Modular Telephone (ATRN) data...........................................................................................665

Overlay area (OVLY) data....................................................................................................................665

Package (PKG) information..................................................................................................................665

Password (PWD) data..........................................................................................................................666

Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data...........................................................................................666

System Limits (SLT) data.....................................................................................................................666

System Loop Limit (SLL) data..............................................................................................................666

System Parameters (PARM) data........................................................................................................667

System Patch (ISSP) data....................................................................................................................667

Tape ID (TID) data................................................................................................................................667

Value Added Server (VAS) data...........................................................................................................667

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................668

Chapter 23: LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center677

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................677

Contents...............................................................................................................................................677

Prompts and responses by data block..........................................................................................................681

ACD or SCB: Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-D) or Schedule data block.........................................681

ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue Assignment prompts) .....................682

CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer Controlled Routing)................................682

NACD: Network ACD data block..........................................................................................................684

OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table...................................................................................684

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................684

Chapter 24: LD 24: Direct Inward System Access..............................................................709

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................709

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) data block..................................................................................709

Emergency Services Access (ESA) data block....................................................................................710

Mobile Service Access (MSA) data block.............................................................................................711

Alphabetical list of prompts............................................................................................................................711

Chapter 25: LD 25: Move Data Blocks.................................................................................717

Move and swap rules....................................................................................................................................717

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................717

Move and swap rules....................................................................................................................................718

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................719

Chapter 26: LD 26: Group Do Not Disturb...........................................................................723

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................723

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................723

Chapter 27: LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration................................725

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................725

BRSC: Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator data block.........................................................................725

CARD: SILC/UILC card data block.......................................................................................................726

DNAT: Data Network Address Tables data block..................................................................................727

DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIL).....................................................................727

DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIT or BRIE).......................................................728

LAPB: Link Access Procedure - Balanced data block..........................................................................729

MISP: Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block..................................................................730

PVC: Permanent virtual circuit connections data block........................................................................731

PROT or LAPD: Protocol or Link Access Protocol data block..............................................................732

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 9

TSP: Terminal Service Profile data block.............................................................................................732

X25P: X25P packet protocol parameters data block............................................................................734

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................734

Chapter 28: LD 28: Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification......................755

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................755

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................755

Chapter 29: LD 29: Memory Management...........................................................................757

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................757

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................758

Chapter 30: LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion......765

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................765

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................766

Chapter 31: LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation....................................771

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................771

Call Park data.......................................................................................................................................771

Meridian Modular Telephone ID change during relocation...................................................................771

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................772

Chapter 32: LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment.............................................775

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................775

Contents...............................................................................................................................................775

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold).............................................................775

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)..................................................................776

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold).................................................................777

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer)......................................................777

Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block..............................................................778

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................778

Chapter 33: LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences..............................................................781

What are tones and cadences?....................................................................................................................781

Flexible Tone and Cadence (FTC) tables......................................................................................................781

Master Cadence (MCAD) table.....................................................................................................................781

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table..................................................................................................................782

TDS and NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards...........................................................................................784

Time interval for Call Forward.......................................................................................................................784

Installing FTC................................................................................................................................................784

Intrusion Tone Note for Small Systems................................................................................................786

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................787

Contents...............................................................................................................................................787

AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block ..................................................................................787

DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block...................................................................788

FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block..................................................................................................789

FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block....................................................................................789

FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block....................................................................................789

MCAD: Master cadence data block......................................................................................................795

RART: Route Access Restriction table data block................................................................................796

RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block.................................................................................796

TBAR: Trunk Barring data block...........................................................................................................796

10 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Print a customer defined route ART course......................................................................................... 797

Default Master Cadence (MCAD) tables..............................................................................................797

Master Cadence (MCAD) table for Japan............................................................................................ 798

Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables....................................................................................................798

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table for Japan.........................................................................................800

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 800

Chapter 34: LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes........................................................................ 817

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 817

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 823

Chapter 35: LD 58: Radio Paging.........................................................................................833

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 833

Contents...............................................................................................................................................833

RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block.....................................................................................833

RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block.........................................................................................834

RPS: Radio Paging System data block................................................................................................835

TBL: Translation Table access data block............................................................................................835

Alphabetical List of Prompts..........................................................................................................................836

Chapter 36: LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface..........................................................................841

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 841

Contents...............................................................................................................................................841

Prompts and responses by data block..........................................................................................................842

DDB: Digital data block.........................................................................................................................842

PRI2 data block ( LPTI)........................................................................................................................844

DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI).............................................................................................................846

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI).................................................................................................847

Prompts and responses for setting pad values.............................................................................................849

Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package 167)........................................... 849

Signaling category assignment and modification..........................................................................................854

What can be entered for the abcd response?...................................................................................... 854

How to tell if the signal is pulsing, pulsed or steady?...........................................................................855

How to determine signal direction?...................................................................................................... 855

How to tell if the prompt incoming or outgoing, or both........................................................................856

A note about JDMI................................................................................................................................856

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category..................................................................................856

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 862

Chapter 37: LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link.................................897

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 897

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 898

Chapter 38: LD 79: Virtual Network Service........................................................................905

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 905

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 905

Chapter 39: LD 81: Features and Station Print...................................................................907

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................ 907

Alphabetical list of prompts........................................................................................................................... 908

Chapter 40: LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group.................................. 927

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 11

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................927

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................928

Chapter 41: LD 83: Terminal Number Sort and Print..........................................................931

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................931

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................931

Chapter 42: LD 84, 85: Set Designation Entry (ODAS).......................................................933

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................933

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................933

Chapter 43: LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1...........................................................935

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................935

Contents...............................................................................................................................................935

FEAT equal to CMDB (flexible CLID manipulation)..............................................................................935

FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation)..............................................................................................937

FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network).............................................................................937

FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion).................................................................................939

FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)................................................................................939

FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)...........................................................................................................940

FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier)...................................................................................941

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................942

Chapter 44: LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2...........................................................955

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................955

Contents...............................................................................................................................................955

CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)...........................................................................................................955

FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)...................................................................................................956

FSNS (Free Special Number Screening).............................................................................................957

NCTL (Network Control).......................................................................................................................957

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................958

Chapter 45: LD 88: Authorization Code...............................................................................965

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................965

Contents...............................................................................................................................................965

AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block .....................................................................965

AUT: Authcode entries data block........................................................................................................966

SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block...................................................................................967

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................967

Chapter 46: LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3...........................................................973

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................973

Contents...............................................................................................................................................973

HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only)...................................................................................973

HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block................................................................................974

LOC: Location code data block (NARS only).......................................................................................974

NPA: Number Plan area code data block.............................................................................................975

NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block..........................................................................................976

NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block.................................................................................976

SPN: Special Number Translation data block.......................................................................................977

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................978

Chapter 47: LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service.............................................................................989

12 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses................................................................................................................................989

Alphabetical list of prompts...........................................................................................................................991

Chapter 48: LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling.....................................................................999

Contents........................................................................................................................................................999

Prompts and responses..............................................................................................................................1000

Alphabetical list of prompts.........................................................................................................................1015

Chapter 49: LD 95: Call Party Name Display.....................................................................1019

Prompts and responses..............................................................................................................................1019

Contents.............................................................................................................................................1019

Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND).....................................................................1019

Add Calling Party Name Display name..............................................................................................1020

Change Calling Party Name Display name........................................................................................1021

Remove Calling Party Name Display name.......................................................................................1021

Print Calling Party Name Display data and names.............................................................................1022

Alphabetical list of prompts.........................................................................................................................1023

Chapter 50: LD 97: Configuration Record 2......................................................................1029

Prompts and responses..............................................................................................................................1029

Contents.............................................................................................................................................1029

BTD: Busy Tone Detection data block................................................................................................1030

DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block..............................................................................1030

DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block.................................................................................1031

FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets................................................................................................1031

FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block......................................................................................1033

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block...................................................................................................1033

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED)..........................................................1034

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)............................................................1034

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)..........................................................1034

SUPL: Superloop parameters data block...........................................................................................1035

SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card..............................................................................1036

SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment........................................................................1037

XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block......................................................1038

XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block......................................................................1038

Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves...................................................................1039

Alphabetical list of prompts.........................................................................................................................1039

Chapter 51: LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management....................................................1067

Command format........................................................................................................................................1067

Alarm Management capability.....................................................................................................................1068

Feature packaging..............................................................................................................................1068

The Event Collector............................................................................................................................1068

The Event Server................................................................................................................................1068

Wildcards............................................................................................................................................1069

Escalation and suppression thresholds..............................................................................................1070

TTY output format of events...............................................................................................................1070

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol...........................................................................................................1072

How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol.....................................................................1072

Command descriptions...............................................................................................................................1075

Object descriptions......................................................................................................................................1075

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S.......................................................................................1076

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 13

Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used....................................................................1077

Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration - Call Server only......................1077

Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S...............................................................1078

Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S...............................................................1080

Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports....................................................................................................1082

IP command descriptions............................................................................................................................1083

NTP Command descriptions.......................................................................................................................1095

Alphabetical list of Administration commands.............................................................................................1096

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands...............................................................................................1188

Chapter 52: Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data......1205

Index.....................................................................................................................................1209

14 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 1: New in this release

This document is up-issued to support CS 1000 Release 7.0.

Other changes

Revision History

April 2011 Standard 04.05. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 7.0. Added SCHD for GRDRC.

March 2011 Standard 04.04. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made in LD 57 to reduce the number user access codes from 100 to 99 that can be entered at a time for one or more different codes (with the exception of PLDN). After entering 99 user access codes, SCH8891 is output..

August 2010 Standard 04.03. This document is up-issued to reflect changes made in LD 97 IPMG_TYP0 and IPMG_TYP1 prompts and the Alphabetical list of commands for CR Q02166989.

July 2010 Standard 04.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 7.0.

June 2010 Standard 04.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 7.0.

September 2009 Standard 03.07. This document is up-issued to support MG 1010.

August 2009 Standard 03.06. This document is up-issued to update the table LD 73:

Digital Trunk Interface and LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1.

August 2009 Standard 03.05. This document is up-issued to update the PPID prompt in table LD 14: Trunk Data Block.

August 2009 Standard 03.04. This document is up-issued to update the DNSZ prompt in chapter LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special

Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline.

June 2009 Standard 03.03. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 6.0.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 15

New in this release

May 2009 Standard 03.02. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 6.0.

May 2009 Standard 03.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication

Server 1000 Release 6.0.

January 2009 Standard 02.14. This document is up-issued to add CLS responses to overlays 10 and 11.

January 2009 Standard 02.13. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• In LD 24, updated the prompts CUST and ENTR in the ESA data block section.

• In LD 17, updated the prompts CSQI and CSQO.

January 2009 Standard 02.12. Up-issued to reflect changes in sections LD 16 and

Alphabetical list of prompts.

December 2008 Standard 02.11. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD 11, updated the prompt MLNG in the section Prompts and responses by task.

December 2008 Standard 02.10. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• In LD 11, updated the Package/Release column for the DANI and

DORG prompts to indicate basic-5.00

• In LD 16, updated the commands STIP TN Iscu, CLID, CHG

SNMP_SYSNAME and NDP in the section Alphabetical List of

Commands

• In LD 17, updated the prompt VSID in the section Configuration

Record 1

• In LD 49, updated the section prompts and responses

• In LD 97, updated the section Configuration Record 2

• In LD 117, updated the section commands and description

• Updated to reflect changes in technical content for IP Phones

6120/6140

• Modified numerous sections for CHG, PRT, EXPORT and OUT.

September 2008 Standard 02.09. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• In LD 11 table, Updated Digital Telephone Administration

• In LD 86 table, Updated Electronic Switched Network1

• Updated Alphabetical List of Prompts

May 2008 Standard 02.08. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

May 2008 Standard 02.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD 10, updated CLS prompt to include AGRA/AGRD response.

16 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Other changes

April 2008 Standard 02.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD 73, updated description of MGCLK command and added example of removing an IPMG Clock Controller from a particular

IPMG.

April 2008 Standard 02.05. Up-issued to correct various editing issues.

March 2008 Standard 02.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• In LD 11, updated PCAG and PCAM prompts to support Interop with

Microsoft OCS2007 in CS 1000 Release 5.0.

• In LD 15, updated responses and descriptions for FLSH, DIDT, and

DIND prompts.

• In LD 117, added GRNS command and description

January 2008 Standard 02.03. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• In LD57, removed MFAC (Mobile Feature Activation Code) prompt.

• In LD15, added MFAC (Mobile Feature Activation Code) prompt.

• In LD11,

- updated the list of valid responses for the UXTY prompt

• added TLSV (Telephony Services)

• added SIPN (Nortel SIP Line)

• added SIP3 (Third Party SIP Line)

• removed CNVO (Converged Office Line)

• removed SIPL (SIP Line)

- removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE and NEWTYPE prompts

• In LD20, removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE and FOR prompts

• In LD83, removed "1240" as a valid response for the TYPE prompt

• In LD117:

- in STIP TYPE command, removed "1240" as an argument

- added CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description

- in CHG ADMIN_COMM command, changed indicated value for

DEFAULT(1) from "Public" to “admingroup1”

- in PRT SEL command removed "ALL" as an argument (Category) and indicated that ALL is the default when no Category argument is specified

- added PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM command with arguments and description

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 17

New in this release

- added TEST ALARM command with arguments and description

December 2007 Standard 02.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD57, flexible feature code mnemonic MTRA changed to mnemonic

MTRN.

December 2007 Standard 02.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000

Release 5.5.

November 2007 Standard 01.08. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD11, updated description for HFA/HFD class of service to indicate that HFA is required for ACD agent digital telephones and applicable IP

Phones.

November 2007 Standard 01.07. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

In LD117, syntax of SYNC NTP command argument changed from

BKGD to BACKGROUND. In LD23 default setting for HOML prompt changed from YES to NO.

October 2007 Standard 01.06. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

July 2007 Standard 01.05. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

June 2007 Standard 01.04. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

June 2007 Standard 01.03. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

June 2007 Standard 01.02. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

May 2007 Standard 01.01. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000

Release 5.0.

This document contains information previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired: Software Input/Output

Administration (553-3001-311) .

December 2006 Standard 17.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• LD10/11 - Last Number Redial Size (LNRS) inserted missing value

20.

• LD23 - Night Call Forward (NCFW) amended to specify will not exit overlay with package OPAO enabled.

• LD56 - Log In Mode Tone (LIMT) Note added to use default values for

A-Law configuration.

• LD81 - Features (FEAT) removed individual IP Phones

(2002/2004/2050) and added global ISET subprompt.

• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) ISM and subprompts TNS through KEY3 removed.

• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) FDLC prompt removed.

• LD97 - System parameters for Peripheral Equipment (SYSP) FNUM prompt modified.

October 2006 Standard 16.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

18 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Other changes

• LD02 - Set Time of Day y = 0-25 second adjustment.

• LD10/11 - MIND change of wording.

• LD14/16/17 - DES, change of description to include spaces.

• LD17 - MSCL 0-8191.

• LD17 - MWI amend to include Virtual Dchannels.

• LD17 - PMCR 5-1023.

• LD20/22/27/81/82/83 - NACT YES response description amended.

• LD23 - ICDD prompt added.

• LD27 - APP = BRI references removed.

• LD74 - CNTR to include new prompts.

• PKGBYNUM FXS added pkg 152.

July 2006 Standard 15.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• LD17 - NCR: Increase minimum Call Registers to 80 and modify system types.

• LD117 - ZDST: Note concerning last week of the month value = 5.

• LD117 - SHELLS: Warning concerning disabling shells.

January 2006 Standard 14.00. Up-issued to reflect changes in technical content.

• Addition of package 408, Multimedia Systems Convergence

(MS_CONV).

• LD11 - Addition of CLS response Remote Call Control (T87D)/

T87A.

• LD73 - Correction of comments for BIPV prompt.

August 2005 Standard 13.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000

Release 4.5.

September 2004 Standard 12.00. Up-issued to support Communication Server 1000

Release 4.0.

October 2003 Standard 11.00. Up-issued to support Succession 3.0.

November 2002 Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content changes for Meridian 1

Release 25.4x and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise

1000, Release 2.0.

January 2002 Standard 9.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 25.40.

December 2000 Standard 8.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 25.3x.

Now contains information on Small System IP Expansion.

April 2000 Standard 7.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 25.0x.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 19

New in this release

Document changes include:

• removal of redundant content.

• removal of references to equipment types, except Options 11C, 51C,

61C and 81C.

• removal of references to previous software releases.

June 1999 Standard 6.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 24.2x.

March 1999 Standard 5.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 24.0x.

October 1997 Standard 4.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 23.0x.

April 1996 Standard 3.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 22.0x.

December 1995 Standard 2.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 21.1x.

July 1995 Standard 1.00. Up-issued to reflect updates and changes required for

X11 Release 21.0x.

This document has the new NTP number 553-3001-311 and replaces

NTP 553-2311-311.

20 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 2: Introduction

This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area.

Note about legacy products and releases

This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 6.0 software. For more information about legacy products and releases, click the Technical Support link under Support & Training on the

Nortel home page: http://www.avaya.com

Subject

The system uses a prompt-response system for switch configuration and alteration. When the data administrator loads an Administration Overlay into memory on a Terminal, the switch outputs a prompt. The data administrator can then type a response to answer that prompt. If the response is valid, the program outputs the next prompt. If the response is invalid, an

SCHxxxx message is output.

To configure or change a feature, the data administrator may have to respond specifically to several prompts. This Data Administration NTP documents input and output in CS 1000 systems. (The term "overlay" is synonymous with the terms "load" and "overlay program".)

Format and structure

This NTP presents only data administration overlays and text supplementary to these overlays.

Overlay programs are identified by LD XX or XXX where XX or XXX is the load number.

Administration overlays are arranged in numerical order and appear in this NTP as separate modules.

Two general table types appear in each Load. The first table type is the Prompts and responses table. It appears at the front of each load and often follows introductory text. The second general table concludes each Administration Load and is titled Alphabetical list of prompts.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 21

Introduction

The Prompts and responses table

Many Prompts and responses tables present a complete list of an overlays prompts. When this is the case, they are simply titled Prompts and responses. Other Prompts and responses tables present only a subset of an overlays prompts. These tables present a list of prompts associated with a given data block, task, or feature.

In some Overlays, the complete prompt list as well as several prompt sublists are presented in a Prompts and responsessection. Overlays which feature multiple Prompts and responses tables begin with a Contents box to help you find a particular prompt listing.

All Prompts and responses tables list prompts in the order in which they are output in each overlay. Acceptable responses or response variables are listed beside each prompt. A brief explanation of the prompt is provided in a Comment column. Subprompts (prompts which are indented with a hyphen) also appear in the Prompts and responses table. To have subprompts appear on the TTY, the data administrator must enter specific responses at the previous nonindented prompt. Shown below is an excerpt from a Prompts and responses table.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

TN

CDEN

Response aaa aaa l s c u

SD, DD

Comment

Request

Type of data block

Terminal Number

Card Density

Note that in a Prompts and responses table:

1. Responses are often left as generic variables.

2. The comment entry is typically brief and explains the prompt.

The Alphabetical list of prompts table

This table provides a more detailed description of a response. Shown below is an excerpt from

Overlay 14 Alphabetical list of prompts table:

Prompt Response

REQ

Comment Package

Release

basic-1

CHG

END

Request

Change existing data

Exit overlay program

22 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Subject

Prompt Response

TN l ch

Comment Package

Release

Terminal Number for digital trunks when TYPE =

RDC or VDC: l = 0-159, Large System l = 0, 4, 8 - 252,

CS 1000E l = 0-255: loops, Systems with

Fibre Network Fabric basic-4.0

fnf-25

• l = 1-9 Option 11C l = 1-9, 11-19, 21-29,

31-39, 41-49, Option 11C with Survivable

IP

• ch = channel 1-24 for 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI or

1-30 for 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.

sipe-25 basic-1.0

basic-4.0

Note that in an Alphabetical list of prompts table:

1. Responses are actual alternatives and not generic variables.

2. The comment entry is often expansive and may explain the prompt, the response, or both.

3. The package and release column provides the mnemonic of the package that must be equipped on the switch to receive this prompt. (In this example, the "basic" package must be equipped to view REQ.) The number following the hyphen ("1" in this example) denotes the Release of software in which the package was made available. When there are two or more entries in the package and release column for a prompt, the Comment column provides clarification. In the example, the prompt

TN has multiple entries for package and release. The Large System opposite the

"fnf-25" entry in the Package Release column indicates that the Fibre Network

Fabric package does not apply for other systems.

Feature Packages

A listing of Feature Packages appears twice in this NTP. An alphabetical listing (sorted by

Package mnemonic) of Feature Packages can be found on

Alphabetical list of packages on

page 41. A numerical listing (sorted by Package number) of Feature Packages can be found on

Numerical list of packages on page 53.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 23

Introduction

Applicable systems

This document applies to the following systems:

• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)

• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)

• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)

• Meridian 1 PBX 61C

• Meridian 1 PBX 81C

Note:

When upgrading software, memory upgrades can be required on the Signaling Server, the

Call Server, or both.

System migration

When particular Meridian 1systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Rel. 6.0 software and

configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000 systems. Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems on page 24 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an

upgrade path to a CS 1000 system.

Table 1: Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems

This Meridian 1 system...

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis

Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet

Meridian 1 PBX 61C

Meridian 1 PBX 81C

Maps to this CS 1000M system

CS 1000E

CS 1000E

CS 1000M Single Group

CS 1000M Multi Group

For more information, see one or more of the following NTPs:

CS 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Upgrades Overview, NN43021-458

Communication Server 1000E Upgrades, NN43041-458

Communication Server 1000E Upgrade - Hardware Upgrade Procedures , NN43041-464

24 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Intended audience

Intended audience

This document is intended for individuals responsible for the maintenance of CS 1000 and

Meridian 1 systems.

Conventions

Terminology

In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as "system":

• Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E)

• Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M)

• Meridian 1

The following systems are referred to generically as "Large System":

• Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG)

• Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG)

• Meridian 1 PBX 61C

• Meridian 1 PBX 81C

Notational conventions

• Both upper and lower case are used in this book to distinguish between Prompts,

Commands, and Variables.

• Lowercase variables are used in this book to represent many possible responses. The following table lists a few key variables which appear throughout this NTP.

# x

Variable

a

Meaning

Alphabetic characters

Alphanumeric characters

Numeric characters

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 25

Introduction

c c (u) c u c 0 0 u dn hh mm loop l s c (u) l s c u

Customer Number

Small System, MG 1000B, and Terminal Number (TN) Card, Unit; where unit is optional

Small System, MG 1000B, and Terminal Number (TN) Card and Unit

Terminal Number (TN) for Small System, MG 1000B, A TN consists of a card, two filler digits, and a unit.

Directory Number (DN)

Hours (0 - 23) and Minutes (00 - 59)

Network Loop Number (0-159)

Large System and CS 1000E System Terminal Number (TN), Loop, Shelf,

Card, Unit; where unit is optional

Large System and CS 1000E System Terminal Number (TN) (loop, shelf, card, and unit number)

Month (JAN - DEC) when used in a date.

Numeric characters

Numeric value of set number of digits

Numeric value of several digits

Year (00 - 99), Month (1 - 12) and Day (1 - 31)

mmm nnn xxx xxx x...x

yy mm dd

• <CR> denotes that the carriage return key is to be depressed without inputting any data.

The carriage return leaves the existing value unchanged, or enters the default value if there is no existing value.

• <space> denotes that the space bar is to be depressed instead of <CR>.

• <value> denotes a variable value, generally for a prompt response.

• For example, <NIPN> is the value responded to the NIPN prompt and <min> is a minimum value.

• Default values are shown in parentheses.

• A range of numbers is denoted by giving the lower and upper limits of the range. For example, given the range 0 - (2) - 3, the user may manually enter 0, 1, 2, or 3, or carriage return (press <CR>) to enter the default of 2.

• Default values are shown in brackets in the response column where applicable. Pressing

<CR> enters the default.

• Where applicable, precede an entry with an X to delete that entry or set your entry to default value.

26 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Related information

Related information

This section lists information sources that relate to this document.

NTPs

The following NTPs are referenced in this document:

Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 (contains information about features and the testing of features and services for telephones and attendant (ATT) consoles)

Software Input Output Reference - Maintenance, NN43001-711 (contains information about Maintenance overlay programs)

Software Input Output Reference - System Messages, NN43001-712 (contains information about system error messages)

Online

To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation link under Support on the Nortel home page: http://www.avaya.com

CD-ROM

To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel Networks customer representative.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 27

Introduction

28 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 3: How to get help

This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support web site: http://www.nortel.com/support

This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:

• download software, documentation, and product bulletins

• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues

• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment

• open and manage technical support cases

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions

Center

If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the telephone from a Nortel

Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone number for your region: http://www.nortel.com/callus

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 29

How to get help

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing

Code

To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express Routing Code

(ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service. To locate the

ERC for your product or service, go to: http://www.nortel.com/erc

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.

30 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 4: Communicating with the system

To communicate with the system, the following input/output devices at either on-site (local) or remote locations are required:

• TTY or VDT terminal as an input/output device

• RS-232-C compatible printer as an output only device

• Maintenance telephone set as an input only device

• Element Manager for CS 1000

• Telephony Manager (TM)

• rlogin over Ethernet/LAN/WAN

The input/output system can operate with terminals having the following characteristics:

• Interface: RS-232-C

• Code: ASCII

• Speed: 110, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19,200 baud

• Loop Current: 20 mA

Accessing the system

Logging in and out

When you access the system through a system terminal, a login procedure is required (refer to Procedure 1). All system passwords are initially set as 0000, but you can change passwords through the Configuration Record (LD 17). See also "Limited Access to Overlays" in the

Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106.

• Level 1 password. This general password is used in the log in sequence to provide general access to the system by service personnel. Once the system is accessed, the service personnel may then perform any necessary administration or maintenance tasks.

• Level 2 password. This administrative password is known and used by only the data administration manager. The password is used to protect the system configuration record and is required when using LD 17 to change either the general or the administrative passwords.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 31

Communicating with the system

Local and remote access

Input/output terminals may operate either locally or remotely. However, data modems are required for terminals located more than 50 feet (15 meters) from the central control interface.

Both local and remote terminals interface with the system through Serial Data Interface (SDI) packs.

Many devices can be installed at local and remote locations. When a system terminal is installed locally, it is connected directly to a SDI Card. When a system terminal is installed at a remote location, modems (or data sets) and a telephone line are required between the

terminal and the SDI card. Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal on

page 32, shows typical system terminal configurations.

Multiple devices can simultaneously communicate with the Meridian 1 if Multi User Login is enabled. Refer to the System Management Reference, NN43001-600 for details regarding the

Multi User Login Feature.

Figure 1: Local and remote access to a system terminal

HOST mode access

A system terminal is connected through an SDI port. SDI ports are defined in LD 17 and can be configured for different types of outputs. For example, one terminal can be defined for traffic reports, another for maintenance messages. Two ports can be defined for the same output.

32 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Accessing the system

It is possible to log in as a HOST. When in the HOST mode, the outputs defined for the port are output only to that port. This is useful for applications which require high speed ports. Once the HOST port has logged out, the outputs to the other ports are restored.

To configure a system terminal, see the "System and limited access passwords" in the configuration record (LD 17). See also OVL403 and OVL404 messages, which are output to the ports affected by a HOST log in.

PDT and OAM commands for SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)

SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is a network protocol that provides confidentiality and integrity to data (such as files or commands) transmitted between an SFTP client and a server.

When you upgrade to CS 1000 Release 6.0 from older CS 1000 releases, the SFTP client is enabled by default. For more information on SFTP, refer to Signaling Server IP Line

Applications Fundamentals, NN43001-125.

To use the SFTP client, enable the client by running either LD 117 or OAM commands. For

more information on LD 117 commands, refer to LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management on

page 1067

The commands to enable or disable FTP and SFTP transfers in the system are provided exclusively on the OAM and PDT2 shells, and only users with PWD2 rights can execute them.

The OAM and PDT commands for SFTP are listed below:

• disInsecureTransfers: Disables all insecure FTP transfers in the system.

• enlInsecureTransfers: Enables all insecure FTP transfers in the system.

• disSecureTransfers: Disables all insecure SFTP transfers in the system.

• enlSecureTransfers: Enables all insecure SFTP transfers in the system.

• statInsecureTransfers: Shows whether insecure transfer access is enabled or disabled.

• statSecureTransfers: Shows whether secure transfer access is enabled or disabled.

• joinSecDomain: Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server.

• leaveSecDomain: Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device.

• statSecDomain: Display the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint.

Line mode interface log in procedure

The Overlay Loader offers a Line Mode interface. With Line Mode enabled (LON), the backspace can be used to edit input. The entered information (responses, for example) is not processed until the <CR> is entered. When the Line Mode is disabled (LOF), the system terminal interface processes information as it is entered.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 33

Communicating with the system

Note:

Line Mode interface requires the setting: seven data bits, space parity and one stop bit.

The Serial Data Interface (SDI) application on the Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card offers the Line Mode Editing (LME) function. With the LME function enabled (FUNC=LME), the backspace can be used to edit input. The LME function is supported only on VT200 type terminals running EM200 emulation mode.

Logging in and out

1. Press <CR>

• If the response is: OVL111 nn TTY or OVL111 nn SL-1

• That means: Someone else is logged into the system. When they have logged off, press <CR> and go to Step 2.

• If the response is: OVL111 nn IDLE or OVL111 nn BACKGROUND

• That means: You are ready to log into the system. Go to Step 2.

• If the response is: OVL000 >

That means: This is the program identifier which indicates that you are have already logged into the system. Go to Step 4.

2. Enter: LOGI , and then press <CR>

The normal response is: PASS?

If there is any other response, refer to the message text in the System Error

Messages NTP.

3. Enter: Level 1 or Level 2 password and press <CR>.

If the password is correct, the system responds with the prompt: >

4. Load a program by entering: LD XXX where XXX represents the overlay program number).

5. Perform tasks

6. End the program by entering: END or ****

7. Always end the log in session with: LOGO

The background routines are then loaded automatically.

Access through the maintenance telephone

A telephone functions as a maintenance telephone when you define the class-of-service as

MTA (maintenance telephone allowed) in the Multi-line Telephone Administration program (LD

11). You can use a maintenance telephone to send commands to the system, but you can use only a subset of the commands that can be entered from a system terminal.

34 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Accessing the system

You can test tones and outpulsing through the maintenance telephone. Specific commands for those tests are given in the Tone and Digit Switch and Digitone Receiver Diagnostic (LD

34).

To access the system using the maintenance telephone, see Procedure 2. To enter commands, press the keys that correspond to the letters and numbers of the command (for example, to enter LD 42 return, key in 53#42##).

Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad on

page 35 shows the translation from a keyboard to a dial pad.

The following overlays (LDs) ARE accessible from a maintenance telephone: 30, 32, 33, 34,

36, 37, 38, 42, 43, 45, 46, 60, 61, and 62

The following overlays (LDs) ARE NOT accessible from a maintenance telephone: 31, 40, 48,

77, 80, 92, 96, 135, 37

Note:

To use the maintenance telephone, the loop for that telephone must be operating.

Table 2: Translation from keyboard to dial pad

M

P, Q

T

W

G

J

A

D

U

X

N

R

H

K

B

E

Keyboard

O

S

V

Y, Z

I

L

C

F

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

Space or #

Return

*

Dial pad

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

#

##

8

9

*

Note:

There is no equivalent for Q or Z on a dial pad.

Accessing through the maintenance telephone

1. Press the prime DN key.

2. Place the phone in maintenance mode by entering: xxxx91

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 35

Communicating with the system

Where: "xxxx" is the customer Special Prefix (SPRE) number. It is defined in the

Customer Data Block and can be printed using LD 21. The SPRE number is typically

"1" (which means you would enter 191).

3. Check for busy tone by entering "return": ##

• If there is no busy tone, go to Step 4.

• If there is a busy tone, a program is active. To end an active program and access the system enter: ****

4. Load a program by entering: 53#xx##

Where: "xx" represents the number of the overlay program

5. Perform tasks.

6. To exit the program and return the telephone to call processing mode, enter: ****

Background routines are then loaded automatically.

Accessing Meridian Mail

You can use a Small System to access Meridian Mail Administration & Maintenance through a shared terminal on the Small System. To access the Meridian Mail system, log in and enter:

AX. To exit from Meridian Mail, press the Control key and the closed square bracket ( ] ) simultaneously.

Preview of overlay content

System information, call information, features and services are all controlled by overlays (LDs).

Data blocks are used to control this information. Listed below are some of the items accessible through the overlays.

Type

Terminal Number data block

Customer data block

Overlay(s) Item

10, 11, 12, 14 • busy lamp field • Class of Service (CLS)

• feature access and requirements • key assignments • route assignment

• telephone features (# of key strips, data modules) • telephone type • trunk access

• trunk type

15 • attendant console information • customer number • feature access codes • incoming call identification • intercept options

• Listed Directory Number (LDN) • night service • Recorded Announcement (RAN)

36 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

System memory and disk space

Type

Route data block

Configuration data block

Overlay(s)

16

17

Item

• access codes • Call Detail Recording

(CDR) information • code restrictions

• network trunk features • route number

• trunk route type • trunking features

(timers, starting arrangements)

• input/output devices • memory location

• network loop usage • number of memory modules • number of network loops

• system parameters (call register, buffer sizes, traffic)

System memory and disk space

The following memory information is output when an administration program is loaded. This information is used to plan the addition of new features, such as speed call lists, which require memory and disk space.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): pppppp USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrrr or (depending on the total amount of memory)

MEM AVAIL: (U-ppppp1 P-ppppp2): USED: qqqqqq TOT: rrrrr

DISK RECS AVAIL: xxxxx, for Small Systems

DISK SPACE NEEDED: nnnnn KBYTES, for Large Systems

Legend:

Element

ppppp1 ppppp2 ppppp qqqqq rrrrrr xxxxx nnnnn

Definition

Amount of unprotected memory available for use (in words)

Amount of protected memory available for use (in words)

Total memory available for use (ppppp1 + ppppp2) (in words)

Total amount of memory used (in words)

Total amount of memory (in words)

Records available for storage of additional data (Small

Systems)

Records available for storage of additional data (Large

Systems)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 37

Communicating with the system

Low memory and disk warnings

If the amount of memory or disk space is low, the following messages are output on the systems.

WARNING: LOW MEMORY WARNING: LOW DISK WARNING: LOW MEMORY/DISK

Note:

The LOW DISK messages are not displayed after sysload and until a data dump is performed.

Warning:

When the LOW MEMORY, LOW DISK, or LOW MEMORY/DISK messages appear, avoid performing further administration changes which require more memory and disk space.

These changes can be lost during the next data dump.

When low memory or disk problems occur, a review of system memory is recommended.

Memory can be reclaimed by removing unused features. For example, the system may have speed call lists which are no longer used and can be removed.

Depending on the data storage type required (such as protected/ unprotected), it can be necessary to perform an initialize or sysload to access the reclaimed data store space.

A disk record stores approximately 500 words of protected data store. A single 3.5 inch high density floppy disk can hold a maximum of 1425 records.

When the software detects that more than one floppy disk is required, the data is compressed during the backup, thereby reducing the number of disks required.

System Lookup messages

On systems equipped with System Errors and Events Lookup package 245, it is possible to display system messages on screen. Specific system messages may then be viewed on screen if the user enters ERR followed by the desired system error code and <CR>. The following example shows the data entries necessary to view error message SCH946:

• Login to switch

• PASS (Enter only your password)

• ERR SCH946<CR>(The user must type "ERR SCH946" and press return)

The screen displays the error message corresponding to SCH946. In this case, that message is:

Invalid User Type

38 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Multi-User Login

For further information about system messages refer to the Software Input Output Reference

- System Messages, NN43001-712.

Multi-User Login

Meridian 1 Multi-User Login (MULTI_USER) (package 242) enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlays simultaneously. These users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The multi-user capability increases the efficiency of technicians by enabling them to perform tasks in parallel. To facilitate this operating environment, Multi-User

Login includes significant functionality:

• Database conflict prevention

• Additional user commands

• TTY log files

• TTY directed I/O

With multiple overlays operating concurrently, there is the potential for a database conflict if two or more overlays attempt to modify the same data structure. Multi-User Login software prevents such conflicts. When a user requests that an overlay be loaded, the software determines if it poses a potential conflict with an overlay that is already executing. If no conflict exists, the requested overlay is loaded. If a conflict does exist, the system issues the following message:

OVL429-OVERLAY CONFLICT

The user can try again later, or try to load a different overlay.

Multi-User Login also introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the ability to:

• communicate with other users

• determine who is logged into the system

• halt and resume background and midnight routines

• initiate and terminate terminal monitoring

• change printer output assignment

Note:

For complete feature information about Multi-User Login, consult the Overlay Loader and

Multi-User Login section in this NTP.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 39

Communicating with the system

Maintenance display codes

Maintenance displays are located on the faceplate of certain circuit cards. A maintenance display code is a one-, two-, or three-digit alphanumeric code which can indicate the status of the system and identify faulty equipment. For a detailed definition of these codes, see the section titled "HEX" in the System Error Messages NTP.

Time and date of fault

The system identifies the time that faults are detected. When a diagnostic message is output, a timestamp is output within 15 minutes. The format is:

TIMxxx hh:mm dd/mm/yy CPU x

Where: xxx is the system ID

The time, date, and system ID are set in LD 2.

40 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 5: Alphabetical list of packages

The following list is a comprehensive alphabetical list of packages that can be equipped on Meridian 1 or

CS 1000S systems. For a numerical list of available packages, refer to the section titled Numerical list of packages on page 53.

AA

AAA

AAB

ABCD

ACDA

ACDB

Mnemonic

ACDC

ACDD

ACDE

ACLI

ACNT

ACRL

ADMINSET

ADSP

AFNA

AINS

ALRM_FILTER

ANI

ANIR

AOP

APL

ARDL

ARFW

ARIE

Feature Name

Attendant Administration

Attendant Alternative Answering

Automatic Answerback

16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone

Automatic Call Distribution, Package A

Automatic Call Distribution, Package B

Automatic Call Distribution Package C

Automatic Call Distribution Package D

ACD/CDN Expansion

Analog Calling Line Identification

Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code

AC15 Recall

Set Based Administration

ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect

Supervision

Attendant Forward No Answer

Automatic Installation

Alarm Filtering

Automatic Number Identification

ANI Route Selection

Attendant Overflow Position

Auxiliary Processor Link

Automatic Redial

Attendant Remote Call Forward

Aries Digital Sets

13

56

109

304

134

200

243

12

253

170

42

50

388

349

155

236

256

289

Number Release

54 1

174 15

47

144

45

41

1

14

1

1

1

2

25.4

24

13

20

21

23

10

22

1

1

14

16

19

1

20

14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 41

Alphabetical list of packages

ATAN

Mnemonic

ATM

ATX

AUXS

AWU

BACD

BARS

BASIC

BAUT

BGD

BKI

BNE

BQUE

BRI

BRIL

BRIT

BRTE

BTD

CAB

CALL ID

CASM

CASR

CBC

CCB

CCDR

CCOS

ZBD_PACKAGE

CDP

CDIR

CDR

CDRE

Feature Name

Attendant Announcement

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Autodial Tandem Transfer

Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary

Security

Automatic Wake-Up

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Basic Call Processing

Basic Authorization Code

Background Terminal

Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer

Business Network Express

Basic Queuing

Basic Rate Interface

BRI line application

ISDN BRI Trunk Access

Basic Routing

Busy Tone Detection Tone

Charge Account/Authorization Code

Call ID (for AML applications)

Centralized Attendant Services (Main)

Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)

Call-by-Call Service

Collect Call Blocking

Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording

Controlled Class Of Service

Zone Based Dialing

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Corporate Directory

Call Detail Recording

Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit)

Number Release

384 25.4

84 7

258

114

20

12

21

13

7

6.0

1

1

1

1

19

13

18

1

21

1

18

18

10

1

25

1

1

1

10

1

290

118

81

420

59

381

4

151

233

14

294

24

247

26

27

117

99

127

367

28

216

235

102

40

57

0

25

1

13

42 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Mnemonic

CDRQ

CDRX

CHG

CHINA

CHTL

CISMFS

CPRK

CPRKNET

CSL

CTY

CUST

CWNT

DASS2

DBA

DCON

DCP

DDSP

DHLD

DI

CIST

CNAME

CNUMB

COOP

CORENET

CDIR

CPCI

CPGS

CPIO

CPND

CPP

CPP_CNI

Feature Name

ACD CDR Queue Record

Call Detail Recording Enhancement

Charge Account for CDR

China Attendant Monitor Package

China Toll Package

Commonwealth of Independent States

Multifrequency Shuttle Signalling

Commonwealth of Independent States - Trunk

Calling Name Delivery

Calling Number Delivery

Console Operations

Core Network Module

Corporate Directory

Called Party Control on Internal Calls

Console Presentation Group

Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81C)

Calling Party Name Display

Calling Party Privacy

CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine

Call Park

Call Park Networkwide

Command Status Link

Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal

Multiple-Customer Operation

Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)

Digital Access Signaling System 2

Data Buffering and Access

M2250 Attendant Console

Directed Call Pickup

Digit Display

Deluxe Hold

Dial Intercom

140

115

19

71

21

33

306

77

5

2

225

124

351

310

172

298

95

301

368

221

333

332

169

299

381

Number Release

83 3

259 20

23

285

292

326

1

21

21

23

15

12

1

4

1

19

16

24

8

1

2

22

1

10

21

25

22

15

21

14

21

25

21

23

23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 43

ECCS

ECT

EDRG

EES

EMUS

ENS

DRNG

DSET

DTI2

DTD

DTOT

EAR

EOVF

ESA

ESA_CLMP

DISA

DKS

DLDN

Mnemonic

DLT2

DMWI

DNDG

DNDI

DNIS

DNWK

DNXP

DPNA

DPNSS189I

DPNSS

DPNSS_ES

ESA_SUPP

ETSI_SS

Alphabetical list of packages

Feature Name

Direct Inward System Access

Digit Key Signaling

Departmental Listed Directory Number

M2317 Digital Sets

DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication

Do-Not-Disturb, Group

Do-Not-Disturb, Individual

Dialed Number Identification System

DPNSS Network Services

Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit)

Direct Private Network Access

Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway

Digital Private Network Signaling System 1

DPNSS Enhanced Services

Distinctive Ringing

M2000 Digital Sets

2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface

Dial Tone Detector

DID to Tie (Japan only)

Enhanced ACD Routing

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service

Enhanced Call Trace

Executive Distinctive Ringing

End-To-End Signaling

Enhanced Music

Enhanced Night Service

ACD Enhanced Overflow

Emergency Services Access

Emergency Services Access Calling Number

Mapping

Emergency Services Access Supplementary

Euro Supplementary service

173

215

185

10

119

133

74

88

129

138

176

214

178

329

331

9

98

231

150

250

284

123

288

Number Release

22 1

180 1

76

91

325

16

5

9

23

1

13

21

20

16

21

1

10

16

1

12

20

15

18

16

15

23

23

10

16

17

4/9

7

10

330

323

23

22

44 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

EURO

Mnemonic

Extended MGP

Resources

FAXS

FCC 68

FCA

FCBQ

FCDR

FDID

FFC

FFCSF

FGD

FIBN

Euro ISDN

Feature Name

Extended Media Gateway PRI Resources

HiMail Fax Server

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Forced Charge Account

Flexible Call Back Queuing

New Format CDR

Flexible DID

Flexible Feature Codes

FMCL

FNP

FRTA

FTC

FTDS

FXS

Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)

Feature Group D

Fiber Network

Converged Mobile Users

Flexible Numbering Plan

French Type Approval

GCM

GRP

GRPRIM

GRSEC

GPRI

GCM

H323_VTRK

HA

Flexible Tones and Cadences

Fast Tone and Digit Switch

Flexible Services Package

General Call Monitor

Group Call

Geographic Redundancy Primary system

Geographic Redundancy Secondary system

International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway

Global Call Monitoring

H.323 Virtual Trunk

High availability

HIGH_SCALABILITY HighScalability package

HIST History File

HOSP Hospitality Management

HOT

HSE

Enhanced Hot Line

Hospitality Screen Enhancement

Number Release

261 20

418 5.5

344

399

410

421

55

166

70

208

125

87

152

344

48

404

405

167

198

158

365

414

160

197

195

223

52

61

234

362

139

7.0

1

16

24

3.0

5.0

4/10

17

24

1

4.0

4.0

18

16

7

25

5.5

14

15

15

17

25

18

24

15

18

17

1

1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 45

Alphabetical list of packages

JPN

JTDS

JTTC

KD3

LAPW

L1MF

LLC

LMAN

LNK

HVS

IAP3P

Mnemonic

ICDR

ICON_PACKAGE

ICP

IDA

IDC

IEC

IMS

INBD

INTR

IPEX

Feature Name

Meridian Hospitality Voice Service

Integrated Services Digital Network Application

Module Link for Third Party Vendors

Internal CDR

M3900 Full Icon Support

Intercept Computer Interface

Integrated Digital Access

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Inter-Exchange Carrier

Integrated Message System UST and UMG are part of IMS Package.

International nB+D

Intercept Treatment

IP Expansion

IPMEDIA_SERVICES IP Media Services

IPMG IP Media Gateway

IPRA International Primary Rate Access

ISDN

ISDN INTL SUP

ISL

ISPC

IVR

JDMI

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN Supplementary Features

ISDN signaling Link

ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection

Hold in Queue for IVR

Japan Digital Multiplex Interface

Japan Central Office Trunks

Japan Tone and Digit Switch

Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee

Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface

Limited Access to Overlays

X08 to X11 Gateway

Line Load Control

Automatic Call Distribution Load Management (C2)

ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor

Number Release

179 16

153 13

108

397

143

122

113

149

35

97

171

335

252

164

188

105

43

51

145

161

147

313

218

136

255

11

295

422

403

202

12

13

2

10

3.0

10

16

20

16

15

9

14

23

10

1

2

22

18

14

13

14

13

7.0

4.0

15

20

1

3.0

46 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

LNR

LOCX

Mnemonic

LSCM

Feature Name

Last Number Redial

Location Code Expansion

Local Steering Code Modifications

LSEL Automatic Line Selection

M3900_PROD_ENH M3900 Phase III Productivity Enhancement

M3900_RGA_PROG M3900 Ring Again

M911 ENH

MAID

MASTER

M911 Enhancement Display

Maid Identification

Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side

MAT

MC32

MCBQ

MCMO

MCT

MED_LANG

MEET

MFC

MAT 5.0

Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity

Network callback Queuing

Meridian 1 Companion Option

Malicious Call Trace

M3904 Mediterranean Language group

MCDN End to End Transparency

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling

MFE

MINT

MLIO

MLM

MLMS: Brazilian

Meridian Link Modular Server

Meridian Link Modular Server: Brazilian

MLMS: Chinese (PRC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (PRC)

MLMS: Chinese

(ROC)

MLMS: Dainish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (ROC)

Meridian Link Modular Server: Dainish

MLMS: Dutch

MLMS: Finnish

MLMS: Canadian

French

MLMS: European

French

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel

Message Intercept

Multi-Language I/O Package

Meridian Link Modular Server: Dutch

Meridian Link Modular Server: Finnish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Canadian French

Meridian Link Modular Server: European French

395

348

128

135

163

211

209

264

265

266

249

210

309

296

350

38

240

107

Number Release

90 8

400 4.0

137

72

386

396

10

4

25.4

3.0

22

24

2

19

10

25

17

22

10

15

16

3.0

24

9

16

20

20

20

267

268

269

270

20

20

20

20

271 20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 47

Alphabetical list of packages

MS_CONV

MSB

MSDL

MSDL SDI

MSDL STA

MSMN

MULTI_USER

MUS

MUSBRD

MWC

MWI

M911

NACD

NARS

NAS

MLWU

MOBX

MPH

MPO

MQA

MR

Mnemonic

MLMS: German

MLMS: Italian

MLMS: Japanese

MLMS: Korean

MLMS: Norwegian

MLMS: Russian

MLMS: European

Spanish

MLMS: Latin Am.

Spanish

MLMS: Swedish

Feature Name

Meridian Link Modular Server: German

Meridian Link Modular Server: Italian

Meridian Link Modular Server: Japanese

Meridian Link Modular Server: Korean

Meridian Link Modular Server: Norwegian

Meridian Link Modular Server: Russian

Meridian Link Modular Server: European Spanish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Latin American

Spanish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Swedish

Multi-Language Wake Up

Mobile Extensions

Meridian 1 Packet Handler

Multi-Party Operations

Multiple Queue Assignment

PPM/Message Registration

Multimedia Systems Convergence

Make Set Busy

Multipurpose Serial Data Link

MSDL Serial Data Interface

MSDL Single Terminal Access

Mobility Networking

Multi-User Login

Music

Music Broadcast

Message Waiting Center

Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS

Meridian 911

Network Automatic Call Distribution

Network Alternate Route Selection

Network Attendant Service

Number Release

272 20

273 20

274

275

276

277

278

20

20

20

20

20

279 20

242

44

328

46

219

224

207

58

159

408

17

222

227

228

370

280

206

412

248

141

297

101

1

19

19

19

1

23

15

1

20

4.50

1

18

19

19

25

20

21

10

20

16

5.5

19

48 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

NAUT

Mnemonic

NCOS

NFCR

NGCC

NGEN

NI2

NI-2 CBC

NI-2 Name

NMCE

NMS

NSC

NSIG

NTRF

NTWK

NXFR

OAS

ODAS

OHOL

OHQ

OOD

OPAO

OPCB

OPEN ALARM

OPTF

ORC_RVQ

OVLP

PAGENET

PAGT

PBXI

PCA

PEMD

Feature Name

Network Authorization Code

Network Class Of Service

New Flexible Code Restriction

Nortel Symposium Call Center

Next Generation Connectivity

North America National ISDN Class II Equipment

NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection

NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service

NGenR2/Meridian Communications Exchange

Connectivity

Network Message Services

Network Speed Call

Network Signaling

Network Traffic Measurements

Advanced ISDN Network Services

Network Call Transfer

Observe Agent Security

Office Data Administration System

On Hold On Loudspeaker

Off-Hook Queuing

Optional Outpulsing Delay

Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)

Operator Call Back (China #1)

Open Alarms

Optional Features

Remote Virtual Queueing

Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)

Call Page Networkwide

Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent

1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface

Personal Call Assistant

Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colisée)

Number Release

63 1

32 1

49

311

324

291

2

22

22

21

334

385

364

23

25.4

24

394

20

196

62

79

104

126

315

175

39

37

29

148

67

1

192

184

307

116

75

398

232

3.0

1

20

1

5

1

13

3

16

2

2

22

12

5

3.0

18

14

22

1

18

15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 49

Alphabetical list of packages

RPA

RUCM

RVQ

SACP

SAMM

SAR

RAN

RANBRD

RCK

REMOTE_IPE

RMS

ROA

PHTN

Mnemonic

PLDN

PLUGIN

PMSI

PONW

POVR

PQUE

PRA

PRI2

PVQM

PXLT

QSIG

QSIG GF

QSIG SS

SBO

SCC

SCDR

SCI

SCMP

Feature Name

Phantom TN

Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL

Plug-In

Property Management System Interface

Priority Network Override

Priority Override/Forced Camp-On

Network Priority Queuing

Primary Rate Access (CO)

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface

Proactive Voice Quality Management

Pretranslation

Q reference signaling point Interface

QSIG Generic Functional protocol

QSIG Supplementary service

Recorded Announcement

Recorded Announcement Broadcast

Ringing Change Key

Remote IPE

Room Status

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Radio Paging

Russian Call Monitoring

Remote Virtual Queuing

Semi-Automatic Camp-On

Stand-alone Meridian Mail

Scheduled Access Restrictions

Branch Office

Tone Detector Special Common Carrier

Station Activity Records

Station Category Indication

Station Camp-On

187

353

192

181

262

162

7

327

193

286

100

36

60

146

154

401

92

263

305

316

Number Release

254 20

120 15

366

103

389

186

24

10

25.4

20

4.0

8

20

22

22

1

13

14

1

23

15

390

66

251

80

121

2.0

7

20

15

20

20

7

20

10

2

15

24

18

50 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

SECL

Mnemonic

SIP

SIP_LINES

SIPL_NORTEL

SIPL_3RDPARTY

SLP

SMS

SNR

SOFTSWITCH

SR

SSAU

SS5

SS25

SSC

TAD

TATO

TBAR

TDET

TENS

TFM

STA

STS

SUPP

SUPV

SVCT

SYS_MSG_LKUP

THF

TLSV

TMON

TOF

TSET

Feature Name

Series Call

SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop

SIP Line Services

Nortel SIP Lines

Third Party SIP Lines

Station Loop Preemption

Short Message Service

Stored Number Redial

Soft Switch

Set Relocation

Station Specific Authorization Codes

500 Set Dial Access to Features

2500 Set Features

System Speed Call

Single Term Access

Set to Set Messaging

International Supplementary Features

Supervisory Attendant Console

Supervisory Console Tones

System Errors and Events Lookup

Time and Date

Trunk AntiTromboning

Trunk Barring

Tone Detector

Multiple-Tenant Service

Trunk Failure Monitor

Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)

Telephony Services

Traffic Monitoring

Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow Queuing

M3000 Digital Sets

8

312

132

65

86

182

228

380

131

93

189

245

346

64

402

53

229

73

18

34

Number Release

191 15

406 4.0

417

415

416

106

6.0

5.5

5.5

10

4

1

1

19

2

24

3

4.0

8

20

19

1

19

25

9

157

413

168

111

89

20

7

7

15

14

5.5

10

7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 51

Alphabetical list of packages

TVS

TWR1

Mnemonic

UIGW

UK

UUI

VAWU

VMBA

VIR_OFF_ENH

VIRTUAL_OFFICE

VNS

VO

VOE

XCT0

XCT1

XPE

ZCAC

Feature Name

Trunk Verification from Station

Taiwan R1

Universal ISDN Gateways

United Kingdom

Call Center Transfer Connect

VIP Auto Wake Up

Voice Mailbox Administration

M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement

Virtual Office

Virtual Network Services

Virtual Office

Virtual Office Enhancement

M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS

M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)

Meridian 1 XPE

Zone Call Admission Control

246

387

382

183

382

387

204

205

203

407

Number Release

110 9.32

347 24

283

190

393

212

20

16

3.0

17

19

25.4

25

16

3.0

3.0

15

15

15

4.50

52 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 6: Numerical list of packages

The following list is a comprehensive numerical list of available packages that can be equipped on Meridian

1and CS 1000systems. For an alphabetical list of packages, see Alphabetical list of packages

on page

41.

20

21

22

17

18

19

23

24

25

26

11

12

13

14

16

8

9

10

4

5

7

0

1

2

Number

MSB

SS25

DDSP

ODAS

DI

DISA

CHG

CAB

BAUT

CASM

TAD

DNDI

EES

INTR

ANI

ANIR

BRTE

DNDG

BASIC

Mnemonic

OPTF

CUST

CDR

CTY

RAN

Name

Basic Call Processing

Optional Features

Multi-Customer Operation

Call Detail Recording, Teletype Terminal

Call Detail Recording, Teletype Terminal

Recorded Announcement

Time and Date

Do Not Disturb Individual

End-to-End Signaling

Intercept Treatment

Automatic Number Identification

Automatic Number Identification, Route Selection

Basic Routing

Do Not Disturb Group

Make Set Busy

Special Service for 2500 Sets

Digit Display

Office Data Administration System

Dial Intercom

Direct Inward System Access

Charge Account for CDR

Charge Account/Authorization code

Basic Authorization code

Centralized Attendant Service (Main)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 53

Numerical list of packages

55

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

40

29

32

33

27

Number

28

34

35

CASR

Mnemonic

BQUE

NTRF

NCOS

CPRK

SSC

IMS

AAB

GRP

NFCR

ACDD

LNK

FCA

SR

AA

HIST

AOP

BARS

NARS

CDP

ROA

NSIG

MCBQ

NSC

BACD

ACDB

ACDC

LMAN

MUS

ACDA

MWC

Name

Centralized Attendant Service (Remote)

Basic Queuing

Network Traffic must have NWK packages.

Network Class of Service

Call Park

System Speed Call

Integrated Message Services. UST and UMG are part of the

IMS package.

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Network Signaling

Network Call Back Queuing

Network Speed Call

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

Automatic Call Distribution, Package B

Automatic Call Distribution, Package C

Automatic Call Distribution, Load Management Reports

Music

Automatic Call Distribution, Package A

Message Waiting Center

Automatic Answerback

Group call

New Flexible Code Restriction

Automatic Call Distribution, Package D

ACDD, Auxiliary Link Processor

Forced Charge Account

Set Relocation

Attendant Administration

History File

Attendant Overflow Position

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Network Alternate Route Selection

Coordinated Dialing Plan

54 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

CCOS

CDRQ

ATM

TENS

FTDS

DSET

DRNG

PBXI

DLDN

CSL

OOD

SCI

SCC

NXFR

ATVN

ACDR

HOT

DHLD

LSEL

SS5

PQUE

Mnemonic

FCBQ

OHQ

NAUT

SNR

TDET

TSET

LNR

DLT2

PXLT

SUPV

86

87

88

81

83

84

77

79

80

74

75

76

89

90

91

92

93

69

70

71

72

73

66

67

68

62

63

64

65

60

Number

61

Network Priority Queuing

Flexible Call Back Queuing

Name

Off-Hook Queuing

Network Authorization code

Stored Number Redial

Tone Detector

Tone Detector Special Common Carrier

Network Call Transfer

Autovon

Autovon Call Detail Queue Call Restore

Enhanced Hot Line

Deluxe Hold

Automatic Line Selection

500 Set Dial Access to Features

Distinctive Ringing

1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface

Departmental Listed Directory Number

Command Status Link

Optional Outpulsing Delay

Station Category Information

Controlled Class of Service

ACD CDR Queue Record

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Multi-Tenant Service

Fast Tone and Digit Switch

M2000 Digital Sets

M3000 Digital Sets

Last Number Redial

M2317 Digital Sets

Pretranslation

Supervisory Console

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 55

Numerical list of packages

PAGT

CBC

CCDR

EMUS

PLDN

SCMP

TVS

TOF

NKL

IDC

AUXS

DCP

AWU

PMSI

OPAO

LLC

SLP

MCT

ICDR

APL

CPND

Mnemonic

JPN

DNIS

BGD

RMS

MR

IDA

DPNSS

DASS2

FTC

OPCB

116

117

118

119

120

121

110

111

112

113

114

115

122

123

124

125

126

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

95

Number

97

98

99

100

101

Name

Calling Party Name Display

Japan Central Office Trunks

Dialed Number Identification System

Background Terminal

Room Status

PPM / Message Registration

Automatic Wake Up

Property Management System Interface

Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)

Line Load Control

Station Loop Pre-emption

Malicious Call Trace

Internal CDR

Auxiliary Processor Link

Trunk Verification from Station

Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow Queuing

Notification Key Lamps

Incoming Digit Conversion

Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary Security

Directed Call Pickup

Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent

Call by Call Service

Calling Line Identification in Call Detail Recording

Enhanced Music

Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL

Station Camp-On

Integrated Digital Access. COMDT is part of IDA Package

Digital Private Network Signaling System 1

Digital Access Signaling System 2

Flexible Tones and Cadences

Operator Call Back (China #1)

56 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IEC

DNXP

CDRE

FXS

IAP3P

PRI2

ICP

ABCD

ISDN

PRA

ISL

NTWK

AFNA

MFE

JDMI

LSCM

DTD

FFC

DCON

MPO

BKI

MFC

DTI2

SUPP

TBAR

ENS

Mnemonic

ACNT

THF

FGD

NAS

FNP

149

150

151

152

153

154

143

144

145

146

147

148

155

157

158

159

160

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

Number

127

128

129

131

132

133

Name

Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling

2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface

International Supplementary Features

Trunk Barring

Enhanced Night Service

Attendant Forward No Answer

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel

Japan Digital Multiplex Interface

Local Steering Code Modification

Dial Tone Detection

Flexible Feature Codes

M2250 Attendant Console

Multi-Party Operations

Intercept Computer Interface

16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone

Integrated Services Digital Network

Primary Rate Access (CO)

ISDN Signaling Link

Advanced ISDN Network Services

Inter-Exchange Carrier

DN Expansion (7 digit)

CDR Expansion (7 digit)

Flexible Services Package

ISDN AP for 3rd Party Vendors

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface

Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code

Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)

Feature Group D

Network Attendant Service

Flexible Numbering Plan

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 57

Numerical list of packages

TFM

VNS

OVLP

EDRG

POVR

RPA

NMS

DTOT

EOVF

HVS

DKS

SACP

GPRI

TMON

COOP

ARIE

JTDS

CPGS

ECCS

AAA

Mnemonic

ISDN INTL SUP

SAR

MINT

LAPW

RPE2

HOSP

L1MF

SVCT

UK

SECL

ORC_RVQ

182

183

184

185

186

187

175

176

178

179

180

181

188

189

190

191

192

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

Number

161

162

163

164

165

166

Name

ISDN Supplementary Features

Scheduled Access Restrictions

Message Intercept

Limited Access to Overlays

2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Hospitality Management

International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway

Traffic Monitoring

Console Operations

Aries Digital Sets

Japan Tone and Digit Switch

Console Presentation Groups

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service

Attendant Alternative Answering

Network Message Services

DID To Tie (Japan only)

ACD Enhanced Overflow

Meridian Hospitality Voice Service

Digit Key Signaling

Semi-Automatic Camp-On

Trunk Failure Monitor

Virtual Network Services

Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)

Executive Distinctive Ringing

Priority Override/Forced Camp-On

Radio Paging

X08 to X11 Gateway

Supervisory Console Tones

United Kingdom

Series Call

Remote Virtual Queuing

58 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

MAID

MLIO

VAWU

EAR

ECT

BRI

IVR

MWI

CIST

MSDL

FCC 68

M911

IPRA

XPE

XCT0

XCT1

MLWU

NACD

HSE

MLM

RCK

FAXS

OHOL

Mnemonic

FRTA

FFCSF

AINS

CWNT

MSDL SDI

MSDL STA

SSAU

DNWK

218

219

221

222

223

224

210

211

212

214

215

216

225

227

228

229

231

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

Number

193

195

196

197

198

200

Name

Ringing Change Key

HiMail Fax Server

On-Hold On-Loudspeaker

French Type Approval

Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)

Automatic Installation

International Primary Rate Access (CO)

Meridian 1 XPE

M1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS

M1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)

Multi Language Wake Up

Network Automatic Call Distribution

Hospitality Screen Enhancement

Meridian Link Modular Server

Maid Identification

Multi Language Input/Output

VIP Automatic Wake Up

Enhanced ACD Routing

Enhanced Call Trace

Basic Rate Interface

Hold in queue for IVR

Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS

Commonwealth of Independent States -Trunk

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Meridian 911

Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)

MSDL Serial Data Interface

Single Terminal Access

Station Specific Authorization Codes

DPNSS Network Services

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 59

Numerical list of packages

257

258

259

261

262

263

251

252

253

254

255

256

264

265

266

267

268

242

243

245

246

247

248

249

250

Number

232

233

234

235

236

240

EQA

ATX

CDRX

EURO

SAMM

QSIG

SCDR

KD3

ARFW

PHTN

INBD

ADMINSET

PEMD

Mnemonic

BRIT

FCDR

BRIL

ACRL

MCMO

MULTI_USER

ALRM_FILTER

SYS_MSG_LKUP

VMBA

CALL ID

MPH

M911 EHN

DPNA

Pulsed E & M (Indonesia, French Colisée)

ISDN BRI Trunk Access

New Format CDR

BRI line application

AC15 Recall

Station Activity Records

Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface

Attendant Remote Call Forward

Phantom TN

International nB+D

Set Based Administration

Equal Access

Autodial Tandem Transfer

Enhanced Call Detail Recording

EuroISDN

Standalone Meridian Mail

QSIG Interface

Name

Meridian 1 Companion Option

Multi-User Login

Alarm Filtering

System Errors and Events Lookup (Option 81C)

Voice Mailbox Administration

Call ID (for AML applications)

Meridian1 Packet Handler

M911 Enhancement Display

Direct Private Network Access

MLMS: Brazilian Meridian Link Modular Server: Brazilian

MLMS: Chinese (PRC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (PRC)

MLMS: Chinese (ROC) Meridian Link Modular Server: Chinese (ROC)

MLMS: Dainish

MLMS: Dutch

Meridian Link Modular Server: Dainish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Dutch

60 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

288

289

290

291

292

294

280

283

284

285

286

295

296

297

298

299

301

304

Number

269

270

271

NI2

CHTL

BTD

IPEX

MAT

MQA

UIGW

DPNSS 189I

CHINA

REMOTE_IPE

DPNSS_ES

ADSP

CCB

CPIO

CORENET

CPP

ARDL

Mnemonic

MLMS: Finnish

MLMS: Canadian

French

MLMS: European

French

MLMS: German

MLMS: Italian

MLMS: Japanese

MLMS: Korean

MLMS: Norwegian

MLMS: Russian

MLMS: European

Spanish

MLMS: Latin Am.

Spanish

MLMS: Swedish

Name

Meridian Link Modular Server: Finnish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Canadian French

Meridian Link Modular Server: European French

Meridian Link Modular Server: German

Meridian Link Modular Server: Italian

Meridian Link Modular Server: Japanese

Meridian Link Modular Server: Korean

Meridian Link Modular Server: Norwegian

Meridian Link Modular Server: Russian

Meridian Link Modular Server: European Spanish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Latin American Spanish

Meridian Link Modular Server: Swedish

Universal ISDN Gateways

Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway

China Attendant Monitor Package

Remote IPE

DPNSS Enhanced Services

ACD Night Call Forward without Disconnect Supervision

Collect Call Blocking

North American National ISDN Class II Equipment

China Toll Package

Busy Tone Detection

IP Expansion

MAT 5.0

Multiple Queue Assignment

Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81C)

Core Network Module

Calling Party Privacy

Automatic Redial

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 61

Numerical list of packages

334

335

344

346

347

348

349

350

327

328

329

330

331

332

333

311

312

313

315

316

321

323

324

325

326

Number

305

306

307

308

309

310

Mnemonic

QSIG GF

CPRKNET

PAGENET

PTU

MASTER

CPCI

NGCC

TATO

ISPC

OPEN ALARM

QSIG SS

QTN

ETSI_SS

NGEN

DMWI

CISMFS

RANBRD

MUSBRD

ESA

ESA_SUPP

ESA_CLMP

CNUMB

CNAME

NI-2 CBC

JTTC

GCM

SMS

TWR1

MEET

ACLI

MC32

Name

QSIG Generic Functional protocol

Call Park Networkwide

Call Page Networkwide

Preference Trunk Usage

Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side

Called Party Control on Internal Calls

Nortel Symposium Call Center

Trunk Anti Tromboning

ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection

Open Alarms

QSIG Supplementary service

Euro Supplementary service

Next Generation Connectivity

DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication

Commonwealth of Independent States Multifrequency

Shuttle Signalling

Recorded Announcement Broadcast

Music Broadcast

Emergency Services Access

Emergency Services Access Supplementary

Emergency Services Access Calling Number Mapping

Calling Number Delivery

Calling Name Delivery

NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection

Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee

General Call Monitoring

Short Message Service

Taiwan R1

MCDN End to End Transparency

Analog Calling Line Identification

Meridian Companion Enhanced Capacity

62 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

DBA

RUCM

Mnemonic

FDID

NMCE

FIBN

PLUGIN

BNE

CPP_CNI

MSMN

STS

CDIR

VIRTUAL_OFFICE

ATAN

NI-2 Name

M3900_PROD_ENH

VIR_OFF_ENH

ACDE

PONW

SBO

UUI

OAS

MED_LANG

M3900_RGA_PROG

ICON_PACKAGE

PCA

H323_VTRK

LOCX

PVQM

SOFTSWITCH

IPMG

GRPRIM

394

395

396

397

398

399

386

387

388

389

390

393

400

401

402

403

404

367

368

370

380

381

382

384

385

Number

351

353

362

364

365

366

Data Buffering and Access

Name

Russian Call Monitoring

Flexible DID

NGenR2/Meridian Communications Exchange Connectivity

Fiber Network

Plug-In

Business Network Express

CP Pentium Backplane for Intel Machine

Mobility Networking

Set to Set Messaging

Corporate Directory

Virtual Office

Attendant Announcement

NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service

M3900 Phase III Productivity Enhancement

M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement

ACD/CDN Expansion

Priority Network Override

Branch Office

Call Center Transfer Connect

Observe Agent Security

M3904 Mediterranean Language group

M3900 Ring Again

M3900 Full Icon Support

Personal Call Assistant

H.323 Virtual Trunk

Location Code Expansion

Proactive Voice Quality Management

Soft Switch

IP Media Gateway

Geographic Redundancy Primary system

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 63

Numerical list of packages

413

414

415

416

417

418

Number

405

406

407

408

410

412

420

421

422

Mnemonic

GRSEC

SIP

ZCAC

MS_CONV

HA

MOBX

TLSV

FMCL

SIPL_NORTEL

SIPL_3RDPARTY

SIP_LINES

Extended MGP

Resources

Geographic Redundancy Secondary system

SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop

Call Admission Control

Name

Multimedia Systems Convergence

High Availability

Mobile Extensions

Telephony Services

Converged Mobile Users

Nortel SIP Lines

Third Party SIP Lines

SIP Line Services

Extended Media Gateway PRI Resources

ZBD_PACKAGE Zone Based Dialing

HIGH_SCALABILITY HighScalability software package

IPMEDIA_SERVICES IP Media Services

64 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 7: Overlay loader and Multi-User

Login

Overlay loader

The Overlay loader becomes active after the login sequence and password, and then accepts input commands from the Serial Data Interface Terminals (SDI) after the ">" prompt (after login but with no overlay executing).

Overlay loader commands

The Overlay loader commands are as follows:

DIST

Command

ENLT

ERR x..x

FDLC

LD xxx

LD xx D

LOF

Description

Disable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.

Enable the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.

Specific system messages are displayed (package 245 required).

Where: x..x = specific error type and number (ex. ERR SCH1001)

Cancels or stop the system wide download for M39xx units

Load overlay program into the overlay area, and then the loaded program assumes control.

Where: xxx = number of the desired overlay program.

Load overlay programs from disk into the overlay area, even if the program resides in cache memory.

Where:

• xx = number of the desired overlay.

• D = entered as part of command to specify the active disk.

Disable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit).

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 65

Overlay loader and Multi-User Login

STAT

****

Command

LOGO

LON

Description

Exit overlay loader and Log-off the system.

Enable Line Mode interface (TTY setup: 7 data bits, space parity, 1 stop bit).

Print the status of the tape interface or the MSI, FDU, MDU card.

Aborts the current overlay program, allowing another overlay program to be loaded into the overlay area.

Multi-User Login commands

Multi-User Login enables up to five users to log in, load, and execute overlay programs simultaneously. These five users are in addition to an attendant console or maintenance terminal. The Multi-User capability also introduces several user commands. With these commands, the user has the ability to:

• determine who is logged into the system

• communicate with other connected users

• halt and resume background and midnight routines

• initiate and terminate terminal monitoring

• change printer output assignment

Note:

MULTI_USER must be enabled in LD 17.

Multi-User commands

A user can issue any of the commands listed in the following table from Overlay loader or from any position within an overlay. Precede the command with an exclamation point (!) to issue a command from within an overlay.

For example, to issue the WHO command from within an overlay, type:

!

>WHO

> <CR> takes user back to the same position in current overlay

66 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

WHO

Command

SEND xx

SEND ALL

SEND OFF

SEND ON

FORC xx

HALT

HALT OFF

MON xx

MON OFF

SPRT xx

SPRT OFF

Multi-User Login commands

Description

Displays user name, port ID, and overlay loaded for each logged-in terminal, as well as the user's MON and SPRT commands (see below).

Sends a message to logged-in terminal xx. When the system responds with a "SEND MSG:" prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file.

Sends a message to all logged-in terminals. When the system responds with a "SEND MSG:" prompt, enter the message text yy...yy (up to 80 characters). The text of a message is considered private and therefore is not written to any log file.

Prevents messages sent by other terminals from appearing at the user's terminal.

Enables messages sent by other terminals to appear at the user's terminal.

Forces terminal xx to log off (the requesting user must log in with

LAPW or a level 2 password).

Stops background and midnight routines during a login session.

Resumes halted background and midnight routines.

Initiates monitoring for terminal xx (the requesting user must log in with LAPW or a level 2 password). The monitored terminal receives a message at the beginning and end of the monitored period.

Turns off the monitor function.

Assigns printer output to port xx.

Resets printer output assignment.

Note:

For complete feature information about Multi-User Login, consult the System Management

Reference, NN43001-600.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 67

Overlay loader and Multi-User Login

68 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 8: LD 02: Traffic

Basic commands

Command

ASUM

ASUM A

ASUM E

BWTM

CITM

COPC C R R

COPN C R R

COPS R R

FWTM

IDLT 0

IDLT 1

INVC C R R ...

INVN C R R ...

INVS R R ...

ITHC C TH

ITHS TH

Description

Print Alarm/Exception summary

Print all the alarms that have at least one occurrence

Print all the alarms that have escalated

Set the date and time for the clock to move backward

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Clear Individual Traffic Measurement from TNs

Clear one or more customer report types

Clear one or more network report types

Clear one or more system report types

Set the date and time for the clock to move forward

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

No title is printed unless further data is also printed

The title is always printed

Print one or more of the last customer reports

Print one or more of the last network reports

Print one or more of last system reports

Perform threshold tests on customer reports

Perform threshold tests on system reports

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 69

LD 02: Traffic

Command

SCFT C

SCTL X

SDTA X X Y

SDST

SITM

SLLC X

SOPC C R R

SOPN C R R

SOPS R R

SSHC C

SSHS

SSID SID

STAD

STHC C TH TV

STHS TH TV

TCFT

TDST

Description

Set the customer to be measured for feature key usage

Set blocking probability

Set the time of day adjustment

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Enable or disable the automatic daylight savings time adjustment

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Set Individual Traffic Measurement on terminals

Activate Line Load Control at Level X

Set one or more customer report types

Set one or more network report types

Set one or more system report types

Set customer report schedule

Set system report schedule

Change the system ID number

Set the time and date

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Set the customer thresholds

Set the system thresholds

Print current customer being measured for feature key usage

Query the daylight savings time adjustment information

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications

70 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

TITM

TLLC

TOPC C

TOPN C

TOPS

TSHC C

TSHS

TSID

TTAD

TTHC C TH

TTHS TH

TDTA X

Command

How to use traffic commands

Description

co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Print the current time of day adjustment

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Time of Day is controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Print the current TNs with Individual Traffic Measurement set

Print current LLC level and blocking probability

Print the current customer report types

Print the current network report types

Print the current system report types

Print current customer report schedule

Print current system report schedule

Print the current system ID number

Print the current time and date

Print the current customer thresholds

Print the current system thresholds

How to use traffic commands

The Traffic Control program is used to set traffic options, system ID, date and time. The conventions used to describe the traffic commands are:

• data entered by the user is shown in upper case, data output by the system is shown in lower case

• a period (.) prompt indicates that the system is ready to receive a new command

• a double dash (--) indicates that the system is ready to receive data

• a <CR> indicates that the return key should be pressed

Note:

The message TFC000 output on your switch indicates that the traffic program is running.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 71

LD 02: Traffic

Set traffic report schedules

To print current customer report schedule:

TSHC C sd sm ed em sh eh so d d ...

To print current system report schedule:

TSHS sd sm ed em sh eh so d d ...

To set customer report schedule:

SSHC C sd sm ed em -- SD SM ED EM sh eh so -- SH EH SO d d ... -- D D ...<CR>

To set system report schedule:

SSHS sd sm ed em -- SD SM ED EM sh eh so -- SH EH SO d d ... -- D D ...<CR>

Legend

C = customer number

D = day of the week:

1 = Sunday 2 = Monday 3 = Tuesday 4 = Wednesday 5 = Thursday 6 = Friday

7 = Saturday

ED = end day (1-31)

EH = end hour (0-23)

EM = end month (1-12)

SD = start day (1-31)

SH = start hour (0-23)

SM = start month (1-12)

SO = schedule options:

0 = no traffic scheduled 1 = hourly on the hour 2 = hourly on the half-hour 3 = every half-hour

Example

To change the system reports schedule:

SSHS 25 4 16 7 -- 1 10 1 12 12 21 2 -- 0 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 -- 1 7<CR>

Old schedule start time: April 25 at 12 noon end time: July 16 at 9 P.M. frequency: hourly on the half-hour (SO = 2) days of the week: Monday to Friday

New schedule

72 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to use traffic commands start time: October 1 at 12 midnight end time: December 1 at 11 P.M.

frequency: hourly on the hour (SO = 1) days of the week: Sunday and

Saturday

Note:

In order to obtain traffic reports at the scheduled intervals, the output device must have prompt USER = TRF in (LD 17). If TRF is not defined for any device, reports are still generated to allow the printing of the last reports.

Note:

Half hour start and end times are not possible.

Set system ID

Each Meridian 1 system has a unique system ID number (SID) selected from 0000 to 9999.

The 4-digit ID number can be printed or set by the following commands.

To print the current SID: TSID sid

To change the SID: SSID sid -- SID

System reports

To print the current report types: TOPS r r ...

To set one or more report types: SOPS r r ... -- R R ...<CR>

To clear one or more report types: COPS r r ... -- R R ...<CR>

Legend

R is traffic report type:

1 = networks 2 = service loops 3 = dial tone delay 4 = processor load 5 = measurement on selected terminals 7 = junctor group traffic 8 = CSL and AML links 9 = D-channel 10 = ISDN GF Transport 11 = MISP traffic 12 = MISP Dchannel management 13 = MISP messaging 14 = ISDN BRI trunk DSL system report 15 = MPH traffic 16 = IP Phone Zone traffic report

Note:

To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 73

LD 02: Traffic

Note:

If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system.

Customer reports

To print the current report types: TOPC C r r ...

To set one or more report types: SOPC C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>

To clear one or more report types: COPC C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>

Legend

C = customer number

R is traffic report type:

1 = networks 2 = trunks 3 = customer console measurements 4 = individual console measurement 5 = feature key usage 6 = Radio Paging 7 = Call Park 8

= messaging and Auxiliary Processor links 9 = Network Attendant Service 10 =

ISPC links establishment 11 = use of broadcasting routes 12 = call blocking due to lack of DSP resource

Note:

To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.

Note:

If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system. For report 5, see "Set customer for feature key usage measurement".

Network reports

To print the current report types: TOPN C r r ...

To set one or more report types: SOPN C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>

To clear one or more report types: COPN C r r ... -- R R ....<CR>

Legend

C = customer number

R is traffic report type:

74 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to use traffic commands

1 = route list measurements 2 = network class of service measurements 3 = incoming trunk group measurements

Note:

To use the print command enter a space (not a carriage return) after the customer number.

Note:

If no reports are currently set, NIL is output by the system.

Set customer for feature key usage measurement

To print current customer being measured: TCFT c

To set the customer to be measured: SCFT c -- C

Note:

Where C is the customer number. Only one customer can have feature measurement set at a time.

Stop printing of title, date and time

It is possible to suppress the printing of the title (TFS000), date and time in cases where traffic measurement is scheduled but no other data is printed. The command format is:

IDLT 0,1

0 = no title is printed unless further data is also printed 1 = the title is always printed

Set traffic measurement on selected terminals

These commands are used to print, set and clear the Individual Traffic Measurement (ITM) class of service for given terminal numbers for traffic report TFS005. Telephones, trunks and

DTI channels can have this class of service. Terminals with ITM set are included in the groups for which Line Traffic Measurements are recorded.

Note:

Do not use these commands on superloops or octal density cards (NT8D02, NT8D03,

NT8D09, NT8D14, or NT8D16).

To print the current TNs with ITM set: TITM

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 75

LD 02: Traffic

TITM shelf 4 0 (all units on loop 4 shelf 0 have ITM set) loop 5 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1 (unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 13 2 1 (all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18 (loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set)

To set ITM on terminals: SITM

SITM (prints current settings) shelf 4 1 (current settings) loop 05 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1 (unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 13 2 1(all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18(only loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set) -- 7(set ITM on all units on this loop) -- 6

1(set ITM on all units this shelf, or on channel 1) -- 8 1 1(set ITM on all units on this card) -- 8

1 1 1(set ITM on this unit) -- 30 18(set ITM on this loop 30 channel 18) -- <CR>(stop "--" prompt)

To clear line traffic TNs: CITM (the ITM class of service is removed from all units)

CITM (print current settings) shelf 4 1 (all units on loop 4 shelf 1 have ITM set) loop 05 (all units on loop 5 have ITM set) tn 11 3 4 1(unit on TN 11 3 4 1 has ITM set) card 19 1 1(all units on card 13 2 1 has ITM set) chnl 34 18 (only loop 34 channel 18 has ITM set) -- 4 1(clear ITM on all units on this loop 4 shelf 1) -- 5 (clear ITM on all units on this loop) -- 11 3 4 1(clear ITM on this unit) -- 19 1 1(clear ITM on all units on this card) -- 34 18(clear ITM on this loop 34 channel

18) -- <CR>(stop "--" prompt)

To clear line traffic TNs: CITM (the ITM class of service is removed from all units)

Set blocking probability for Line Load Control (LLC)

To print current LLC level and blocking probability: TLLC

To set blocking probability: SCTL X aaa

To activate Line Load Control at level X: SLLC X

Legend x = F, S or T (for LLC level F, S, or T) aaa = blocking probability in %

Set time and date

To print the current time and date: TTAD day-of-week day month year hour minute second

TTAD WED 24 11 1976 15 41 49

To set the time and date: STAD DAY MONTH YEAR HOUR MINUTE SECOND

STAD 24 11 1976 15 41 49

Note:

Except for the year, the other entries in the time of day output are 2-digit numbers. The year can be any year from 1901 to 2099 inclusive. It can be input as a full 4-digit field or as a 2digit short form. The 2-digit short form is assumed to be in the range 1976 to 2075 and the appropriate addition is made when calculating the day-of-week and leap years.

76 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to use traffic commands

Note:

Only a user having SEC_ADMIN privilege can change the system time and date. This is to prevent date and time based system attacks.

Warning:

Changing the time on the CS 1000 can impact devices and ELAN applications that derive their time from the CS 1000 system. You need to consider the implications of an incorrect time and date change before implementing the change.

Set daily time adjustment

The time of day can be adjusted during the midnight routines to compensate for a fast or slow system clock.

To print the current adjustment: TDTA X y

To set the adjustment: SDTA X y -- X Y

Legend x = 0 (negative increment) or 1 (positive increment) y = 0-25 second adjustment in increments of 100 ms

Set and print Daylight Savings Time

The daylight savings time adjustment can be programmed to take place automatically. You can set the date to change to daylight savings, and to return to standard time. This information can be queried at any time.

The following commands are accepted by this program for this capability. The system clock

MUST ALREADY be set for the daylight savings time to be updated. This information survives sysload:

• FWTM = Set the date and time for the clock to move forward.

• BWTM = Set the date and time for the clock to move backward.

• SDST = Enable or disable the automatic change.

• TDST = Query the change information.

Note:

These commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 77

LD 02: Traffic

Note:

To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

To implement these commands, use the following:

• FWTM <month> <week> <day> <hour> month = 1-(4)-12 [January-December] week = (1)-5, L [1st-5th, L is the last week of the month] day = (1)-7 [Sunday-Saturday] hour = 1-(2)-22 [Midnight-11:00 pm]

• BWTM <month> <week> <day> <hour> month = 1-(10)-12 [January-December] week = (1)-5, L [1st-5th, L is the last week of the month] day = (1)-7 [Sunday-Saturday] hour = 1-(2)-22 [Midnight-11:00 pm]

• SDST ON, (OFF)

ON enables the automatic change capability OFF disables the automatic change capability

• TDST <CR>

The output reflects the input format to indicate the change information.

Set thresholds

To print the current system thresholds: TTHS TH tv

To set the system thresholds: STHS TH tv -- TV

The system thresholds (TH) and range of values (TV) are:

1 = dial tone speed (range 0.00% to 99.9%) 2 = loop traffic (range 000 to 999 CCS) 3 = junctor group traffic (range 0000 to 9999 CCS) 4 = superloop traffic (range 0000 to 9999 CCS) 5 = zone bandwidth (range 000 to 999)

To print the current customer thresholds: TTHC C TH tv

To set the customer thresholds: STHC C TH tv -- TV

Legend

The thresholds (TC) and range of values (TV) for customer C are:

1 = incoming matching loss (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 2 = outgoing matching loss (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 3 = average Speed of Answer (TV range 00.0

to 99.9 seconds) 4 = percent All Trunks Busy (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%) 5 = percent OHQ Overflow (TV range 00.0% to 99.9%)

78 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to use traffic commands

Perform threshold tests on last reports

To perform threshold tests on customer reports: ITHC C TH

Legend

C = customer number

TH is the threshold type:

1 = incoming matching loss 2 = outgoing matching loss 3 = average speed of answer 4 = percent all trunks busy 5 = percent OHQ overflow

To perform threshold tests on system reports: ITHS TH

Legend

TH is the threshold type:

1 = dial tone speed 2 = loop traffic 3 = junctor group traffic 4 = superloop traffic

Note:

When a threshold test passes, OK is output.

Print last reports

The last traffic reports can be printed or tested against threshold values. Data accumulating for the next reports is not accessible.

To print one or more of the last customer reports: INVC C R R ...

Legend

C = customer number

R is traffic report type:

1 = networks 2 = trunks 3 = customer console measurements 4 = individual console measurement 5 = feature key usage 6 = Radio Paging 7 = Call Park 8

= messaging and auxiliary processor links 9 = Network Attendant Service 10 =

ISPC links establishment 11 = usage of broadcasting routes 12 = call blocking due to lack of DSP resource

To print one or more of the last network reports: INVN C R R ...

Legend

C = customer number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 79

LD 02: Traffic

R is traffic report type:

1 = route list measurements 2 = network class of service measurements 3 = incoming trunk group measurements

To print one or more of last system reports: INVS R R ...

Legend

R is traffic report type:

1 = networks (per loop) 2 = services 3 = dial tone delay 4 = processor load 5 = selected terminals 7 = junctor group traffic 8 = CSL and ISDN/AP links 9 = Dchannel 10 = ISDN GF Transport 11 = MISP traffic 12 = MISP D-channel management 13 = MISP messaging 14 = ISDN BRI trunk DSL system report

15 = MPH traffic 16 = IP Phone Zone traffic report

Print alarm and exception filter summary

Alarms status summaries can be printed by this overlay. The alarms printed by this overlay are discussed in the System Management Reference, NN43001-600.

Enter any of the following commands at the dot (.) prompt.

Command

ASUM

ASUM A

ASUM E

Description

Print Alarm/Exception summary

Print all the alarms that have at least one occurrence

Print all the alarms that have escalated

Release alrm_filter-19 alrm_filter-21 alrm_filter-21

80 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 9: LD 10: Analog (500/2500)

Telephone Administration

This Overlay program allows data blocks for the 500/2500, DTMF type telephones and Displayphone

1000/220 to be created or modified.

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:

>ld 10

PBX000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED U P: xxxxxx xxxxxx TOT: xxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS

AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ACD AGENTS AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ANALOGUE

TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx AST AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx ANALOGUE

TELEPHONES AVAIL : xxxxUSED: xx TOT: xxxx AST AVAIL: xxxxUSED: XX TOT: xxxx WIRELESS

TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx WIRELESS VISITORS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx

CLASS TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx DATA PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx PHANTOM PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx

If a License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License is not printed.

This does not apply for the TNs License.

The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk(**) as valid input to a number of prompts. Usually an asterisk is part of a dialed number. If this package is not equipped, inputting an asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt; inputting two asterisks causes a restart of the Overlay at REQ.

Linked Overlay programs

Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a phone without having to exit one Overlay and load another.

The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:

1. a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or

2. an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 81

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by task:

Add a telephone on page 85

Copy a set

on page 88

Easy change

on page 89

Remove a telephone

on page 89

Move a telephone on page 90

Prompt

REQ:

DMC

TYPE:

MODL

CFTN

SFMT a...a

TN l s c u

DELETE_VMB (YES) NO

ECHG (NO) YES

- ITEM

TOTN

CDEN

DES

CUST aaaa yyy l s c u aa d...d

xx

Response

a...a

l s c a...a

1-127 l s c u

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on Request)

DECT Mobility Controller Location

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE:)

Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG

1000B, and MG 1000T

Copy From Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Select format for copy command (a...a = TNDN, TN,

DN, or AUTO)

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Delete Voice Mailbox

Easy Change

Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic; yyy = its new value)

To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

Customer number

82 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- VSIT

- HMDN

DIG

DN

(NO) YES x..x

0-2045 0-99 x..x yyyy

- MARP (NO) YES

- - CPND_LANG aaa aaaa,bbbb xx

- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb

- VMB

- - VMB_COS

- -

SECOND_DN

- - THIRD_DN x...x

- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES

AST

Prompt

NUMZONE

ERL

WRLS

- WTYP

- MWUN

- DMC

- INDX

- - NAME

- - XPLN

- ANIE

IAPG

HUNT

Response

0-1023

(0)-65535

(NO) YES aaaa

(16) 32 l s c

0-509 aaa

0-127 x...x

(0)-n

(NO) YES

(0)-15 x...x

Comment

Numbering zone.

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,

ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.

TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone

Meridian Companion Mobility Option

Maximum number of Wireless Units

DECT Mobility Controller Location

DECT Mobility Controller index to map hand set to

Virtual TN

Visiting DECT Handset 4060

Home Directory Number

Dial Intercom Group number and Member number

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Calling Party Name Display Language (aa = (ROM) or

KAT)

Calling Party Name Display Name

Expected name length

Display Format for Calling Party Name Display

Voice Mailbox (aaa = NEW, CHG, or OUT)

Voice Mailbox Class Of Service

Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password

Automatic Number Identification Entry

Associate Set assignment

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group

Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 83

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

TGAR

LDN

NCOS

RNPG

XLST

SCPW

SGRP

CRCS

ELKP

SFLT

- SFDN

CAC

CAC_CIS

CAC_MFC

CLS

MAUT

- SPWD

- AUTH

RCO

DCLP

ICT

LNRS

TEN

OHID

HDID

PLEV

SCI

0-(2)-7

(0)-7

FCAR (NO) YES

MLWU_LANG (0)-5

PLEV 0-(2)-7

(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx

(0)-2

0-159

0-<NIPN>

4-(16)-31

1-51

(0)-9

(0)-9 xx

Response

a...a

(0)-99

(0)-4095

(0)-254 xxxx

(0)-999

0-7 x...x

a...a

xxxx

(0)-10

0-(3)-9

(0)-10 a...a

Comment

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Departmental Listed DN (a...a = (NO), 0-3, or 0-5)

Network Class Of Service group number

Ringing Number Pickup Group

Pretranslation group with which this station is associated

Station Control Password

Scheduled Access Restriction group number

Code Restriction Block

Electronic Lock Password

Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

Category Code for outgoing CNI of MFC trunks

CIS ANI Category Code

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service options (see Alphabetical list of prompts

on page 90)

Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone

Secure data password

Authorization code

Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer

Dealer Conference Loop

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Last Number Redial Size

Tenant Number

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN Index defined in LD 15

Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect Index defined in LD 15

Priority Level

Station Category Indication priority level

Forced Charge Account Restriction

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service

Priority Level

84 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

Prompt

SPID

PRI

AACD

ARTO

ADAY

AHOL

FTR

TIMP

BIMP

Response

x...x

(1)-48

(NO) YES

(0)-3

(0)-3

(0)-3 a...a x...x

xxx a...a

Comment

Supervisor Position ID

Priority level for ACD Agent

AST ACD telephone

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15

Feature name and related data (FTR responses begin on FTR)

Termination Impedance for XOPS unit (xxx = (600) or

900)

Balance Impedance for XOPS unit (a...a = 600, 900,

3COM, or 3CM2)

Prompts and responses by task

Add a telephone

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

MODL

TN

CDEN

DES

CUST

NUMZONE

ERL

Response

NEW a...a

1-127 l s c u aa d...d

xx

0-1023

(0)-65535

Comment

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE:)

Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG

1000B, and MG 1000T

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined for TN on )

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0, ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 85

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

DIG

DN

Prompt

WRLS

- WTYP

- MWUN

- DMC

- INDX

- VSIT

- HMDN

- MARP

- CPND

Response

(NO) YES aaaa

(16) 32 l s c

0-509

(NO) YES x..x

0-2045 0-99

Comment

TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone

Meridian Companion Mobility Option

Maximum number of Wireless Units

DECT Mobility Controller Location

DECT Mobility Controller index to map hand set to Virtual

TN

Visiting DECT Handset 4060

Home Directory Number x..x yyyy

(NO) YES aaa

- - CPND_LAN aaa

- - NAME

- - XPLN aaaa,bbbb xx

- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb

- VMB aaa

- - VMB_COS 0-127

- -

SECOND_DN x...x

- - THIRD_DN x...x

- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES

- ANIE

AST

IAPG

HUNT

TGAR

LDN

NCOS

RNPG

(0)-n

(NO) YES

(0)-15 x...x

xx aaa

(0)-99

(0)-4095

Dial Intercom Group number and Member number

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Calling Party Name Display

Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or

KAT)

Calling Party Name Display Name

Expected name length

Display Format for Calling Party Name Display

Voice Mailbox (aaa = NEW, CHG or OUT)

Voice Mailbox Class Of Service

Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password

Automatic Number Identification Entry

Associate Set assignment

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group

Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Departmental Listed DN (aaa = (NO), 0-3, or 0-5)

Network Class of Service group number

Ringing Number Pickup Group

86 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

Prompt

XLST

SCPW

SGRP

CRCS

ELKP

SFLT

- SFDN

CAC

CAC_CIS

CAC_MFC

CLS

CSDN

MAUT

- SPWD

- AUTH

RCO

DCLP

ICT

LNRS

TEN

OHID

HDID

SCI

Response

(0)-254 xxxx

(0)-999

0-7 x...x

aaa xxxx

(0)-10

0-(3)-9

(0)-10 a...a

x..x

(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx

(0)-2

0-159

0-<NIPN>

4-(16)-31

1-51

(0)-9

(0)-9

FCAR (NO) YES

MLWU_LANG (0)-5

PLEV

SPID

PRI

(0)-7

0-(2)-7 x...x

(1)-48

Comment

Pretranslation group with which this station is associated

Station Control Password

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

Code Restriction Block

Electronic Lock Password

Secretarial Filtering (aaa = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

Category Code for outgoing CNI of MFC trunks

CIS ANI Category Code

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service options (see

Alphabetical list of prompts

on page 90)

Converged Service Directory Number Converged

Desktop Service Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23. CSDN is prompted only if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO. NULL response is not accepted.

Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone

Secure Data Password

Authorization code

Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer

Dealer Conference Loop

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Last Number Redial Size

Tenant Number

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN Index defined in LD 15

Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect Index defined in LD 15

Station Category Indication priority level

Forced Charge Account Restriction

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service

Priority Level

Supervisor Position ID

Priority level for ACD Agent

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 87

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

AACD

ARTO

ADAY

AHOL

FTR

TIMP

BIMP

Response

(NO) YES

(0)-3

(0)-3

(0)-3 a...a x...x

xxx a...a

Comment

AST ACD telephone

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15

Feature name and related data (FTR options begin on

FTR)

Termination Impedance for XOPS unit (xxx = (600) or

900)

Balance Impedance for XOPS unit (a...a = 600, 900,

3COM, or 3CM2)

Copy a set

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CFTN

SFMT

- TN

- DN

- POS

- TN

- DN

- POS

Response

CPY 1-32 Request = CPY x a...a

Type of data block l s c u aaaa

Comment

Copy from Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Select Format. You may respond to SFMT with: AUTO,

TNDN, TN or DN. Subprompts follow each of these responses as follows:

AUTO l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx

TNDN l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx

The system provides the new TNs, DNs and ACD position

ID for ACD telephones.

TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

ACD position ID

Manual selection of TNs, DNs and ACD position IDs for

ACD telephones. TN, DN and are prompted -n- times as defined by the CPY command.

TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

ACD position ID

88 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

- DN

- POS

- TN

- TN

- DN

- POS

Prompt Response

TN x..x yyyy xxxx l s c u

DN l s c u x..x yyyy xxxx

Comment

New DNs and ACD position IDs for ACD telephones are provided by the system. TN is prompted -n- times as defined in the CPY command.

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

ACD position ID

TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )

The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN and ACD position ID for ACD telephones. DN and/or POS are prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.

TN of new set (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

ACD position ID

Easy change

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

MODL

TN

ECHG

ITEM

Response

CHG a...a

1-127 l s c u

YES aaaa yyy

Comment

Request = CHG

Type of data block

Model number for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Easy Change

Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic; yyy = its new value)

Remove a telephone

When removing more than one telephone at a time, you are prompted for the starting TN. The next consecutive assigned TNs are removed.

Prompt

REQ:

Response

OUT 1-32 Request = OUT x

Comment

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 89

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

TYPE:

Response

a...a

Type of data block

Comment

TN l s c u Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

DELETE_VMB (YES) NO Delete Voice Mailbox

Move a telephone

Telephones with mixed directory numbers can be moved only to a TN on the same loop unless the prompt MLDN = YES in LD 17.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

TOTN

Response

MOV a...a

l s c u l s c u

Comment

Request = MOV

Type of data block

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on To

Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AACD

ADAY

Response

(NO) YES

(0)-3

AHOL (0)-3

Comment

Associate set (AST) ACD telephone

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15

Prompted if CLS = RBDA

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15

Prompted if CLS = RBHA

Pack/Rel

ism-17 basic-24 basic-24

ANIE (0)-n ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.

If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set. The old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.

If ANIE is of 1-N: cist-24

• If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place; the components of the ANI message are

90 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ARTO

AST

AUTH

BIMP

CAC

Response Comment

retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer

Data Block, if configured.

• If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC = NO for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place; the old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.

(0)-3

(NO) YES n xxxx

600

900

3COM

3CM2

(0)-10

CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9

Pack/Rel

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection, defined in the customer data block. Prompted if CLS = RTDA.

basic-22

Associate Set assignment For sets associated with ISDN Applications

Protocol features.

iap3-12

Authorization code. Where:

• n = number (1-6) of assigned authorization code

• xxxx = assigned authorization code (Any customer authorization code assigned in

LD 88 is valid.) ssau-19

AUTH is prompted when CLS = AUTR

(Class of Service = Authorization code required).

Balance Impedance for Enhanced Off-

Premise Station (XOPS) unit

600 ohms. This is the default, except when

CLS = OPS.

900 ohms

3 component

3 component 2. This is the default if CLS

= OPS basic-20

Category code

Category Code range for outgoing CNI of

MFC trunks when Multifrequency

Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128 is equipped.

mfc-14

CIS ANI Category Access Code cist-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 91

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

CAC_MFC

Response

(0)-10

Comment

MFC CNI Category Access Code

CDEN

CFTN

Pack/Rel

cist-24

SD DD 4D 8D Single Density Card Double Density Card

Quadruple Density Card Octal Density

Card

XOPS cards are configured as DD on superloops or Small Systems, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B, and MG 1000T.

If REQ=NEW and the loop is a superloop, the default is 4D. If REQ=NEW and the

XOPS card is to be configured on the loop, set CDEN to DD. If REQ=CHG, the card density is not changed.

basic-7

Note:

If a QPC192 (off-premises extension) card is configured in superloop, the response for CDEN should be

Quadruple Density.

l s c u c u

Copy From Terminal Number. Prompted if

REQ = CPY.

For Large System

For CS 1000E

For Small System

For CS 1000S, MG 1000B, MG 1000T

Use this TN as a template for the new sets.

Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new telephones.

basic-12 basic-4.00

basic-16 basic-4.00

CLS

(CTD)

UNR

CUN

Class of Service options

The following CLS assignments determine the calling options and features available to an analog telephone. Defaults are shown in parentheses. Enter each nondefault option required, separated by a space.

basic-1 basic-1 Access Restrictions

Conditionally Toll Denied (default)

Unrestricted

Conditionally Unrestricted.

92 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TLD

SRE

FRE

FR1

FR2

Comment

Toll Denied.

Semi-Restricted.

Fully Restricted.

Fully Restricted 1.

Fully Restricted 2.

(ABDD)

ABDA

(AGRD)

AGRA

(AGTD)

Pack/Rel

Abandoned call record and time to answer denied fcdr-18

Abandoned call record and time to answer allowed

Agent Greeting Denied

Agent Greeting Allowed fxs-25

AGTA

(ALCA)

ALCB

(ARHD)

ARHA

ACD services for 500/2500 type telephones denied

ACD services for 500/2500 type telephones allowed

An AGTA entry is not validated if you do not define ACD in the same pass through this overlay.

phtn-20 cdr-18 ALC loss plan class A port type

ALC loss plan class B port type

Audible Reminder of Held Call Denied

Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed basic-14

(ASCD)

ASCA

(AUTU)

AUTD

AUTR

Alarm Security Denied

Alarm Security Allowed

Mutually exclusive with Three-Party

Service Allowed (TSA) ohas-18

Unrestricted Authcode

Denied Authcode

Restricted Authcode

When the CLS is changed from AUTR to either AUTU or AUTD, all previous telephone authorization code information is removed. Must have Station Specific ssau-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 93

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Authorization Codes (SSAU) package

229.

(BNRD)

BNRA

(C6D)

C6A

Busy Number Redial Denied

Busy Number Redial Allowed

Must have ADL configured and Flexible

Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.

Six-Party Conference Denied

Six-Party Conference Allowed

C6A requires Transfer Allowed (XFA)

Class of Service.

(CCBD)

CCBA

(CCSD)

CCSA

Pack/Rel

ffc-21 basic-10

Collect Call Blocking Denied (permits a set to accept collect calls) ccb-21

Collect Call Blocking Allowed (prevents a set from accepting collect calls)

Must have Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290.

Controlled Class of Service Denied

Controlled Class of Service Allowed

CCSA is required for the Electronic Lock feature. See the Flexible Feature Codes section in the Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106. Must have

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81.

phtn-20

(ZBDD)

ZBDA

(ZBDR)

ZBDV

ZBDO

(CFHD)

CFHA

ZBDD denies record generation

ZBDA generates external station activity records for the set emct-20

Converged Desktop Multimedia

Restricted (default)

Converged Desktop Multimedia and Voice

Converged Desktop Multimedia Only sip-4.00

Call Forward/HUNT Override Denied

Call Forward/HUNT Override Allowed cfho-20

94 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(CFTD)

CFTA

Comment

Call Forward by Call Type Denied

Call Forward by Call Type Allowed

Call Forward by Call Type enhances Hunt and Call Forward No Answer. CFTA requires Hunting Allowed (HTA) and/or

Call Forward Allowed (FNA) Class of

Service.

Pack/Rel

opft-10

(CFXD)

CFXA

Call Forward All Calls to external DN

Denied.

Call Forward All Calls to external DN

Allowed

Examples of external DNs are:

• Route Access Code

• ESN Access Code

• CDP Distant Steering Code

When Denied, a call can be forwarded to only the following internal DNs:

• Single or multi-line telephone

• Attendant DN or CAS local attendant DN

• Listed DN as defined in LD 15

• Message center DN where MWC = YES optf-19

(CLBD)

CLBA

(CLTD)

CLTA

(CNAD)

CNAA

Deactivate Calling Party Number and

Name per-line blocking

Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking

The user may still request CPP by dialing the CPP code.

cpp-21 pra-17 Network Call Trace from this telephone

Denied.

Network Call Trace from this telephone

Allowed

CLASS Calling Name Denied.

CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data

Format Allowed.

cname-23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 95

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

CPFD

(CPTA)

CPTD

(CRD)

CRA

(CROD)

CROA

(CWD)

CWA

Response

(CNDD)

CNDA

(CNID)

CNIA

(CNUD)

CNUA

CNUS

(CPFA)

Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

CNUD/CNUD/CNUS/CNAD/CNAA are not a valid input for a Dial Intercom

Group (DIG) set.

Call Number Display Denied.

Call Number Display Allowed

The user can see calling or called name associated with the number dialed if

CPND is set up for the customer associated with the portable personal telephone. Allowed if WRLS = YES.

mcmo-20

Call Number Information Denied

Call Number Information Allowed bgd-10

CLASS Calling Number Delivery Denied.

cnumb-23

CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data

Format Allowed.

CLASS Calling Number Single Data

Format Allowed.

Forced Camp-On from another set

Allowed

Forced Camp-On from another set Denied scmp-15

Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed scmp-15

Forced Camp-On to another set Denied

Continuous Ring Denied

Continuous Ring Allowed scmp-15

Calling Line Restriction Override Denied

Calling Line Restriction Override Allowed

Call Waiting Denied

Call Waiting Allowed

The telephone should also have CLS =

HTD (Hunting Denied) because hunting takes precedence.

basic-1

96 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(CWND)

CWNA

Comment

Call Waiting Notification Denied

Call Waiting Notification Allowed

Must have Call Waiting Notification

(CWNT) package 225.

(DDGA)

DDGD

(DNAA)

DNAD

(DNDY)

DNDN

DN display on other set Allowed.

DN display on other set Denied

Pack/Rel

cwnt-19 dpd-21

DN of set is used in 3WT ANI messages.

cist-21

Outgoing 3WT route is used as DN in 3WT

ANI messages.

Must have Commonwealth of Independent

States (CIST) package 221.

Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification without called party's number and name.

qsigss-23

(DNO3)

DNO1

DNO2

(DTN)

DIP

MNL

(DPUD)

DPUA

Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification Option without notification.

Diversion Notification Option without diverted-to party's number and name.

qsigss-23

Digitone. DTN is used for 2500, UNITY and digitone telephones.

Dial Pulse. DIP is used for 500, rotary and dial pulse telephones.

Manual service. MNL is used for manual service to the attendant and Flexible Hot

Line basic-20

DN Pickup Denied

DN Pickup Allowed

DN Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero (RNPG = 0). Must have

Directed Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.

dcp-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 97

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

(DSH)

DLO

Comment

Digital Short telephone

Digital Long telephone

Select DLO for line lengths of 2 km or 1.2

miles or more.

Must have Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.

Pack/Rel

ida-16

(EHTD)

EHTA

(EXR0)

EXR1

EXR2

EXR3

EXR4

(FAXD)

FAXA

Enhanced Hot Line Denied

Enhanced Hot Line Allowed

Cannot be assigned with LLC1, LLC2,

LLC3, LNA, MNL or Permanent Hold feature.

phtn-20

Executive Distinctive Ringing Off 0

Executive Distinctive Ringing On 1

Executive Distinctive Ringing On 2

Executive Distinctive Ringing On 3

Eecutive Distinctive Ringing On 4

The digit indicates which of the four distinctive ringing tones and cadences defined in LD 56 is to be used. Must have

Executive Distinctive Ringing (EDRG) package 185.

edrg-16

Fax denied.

Fax allowed. ISDN call is generated with

3.1 KHz Bearer Capability. Set is a modem or a FAX machine.

euro-22

(FBD)

FBA

(FDSD)

Call Forward Busy Denied

Call Forward Busy Allowed

Call Forward Busy Allowed sends DID calls which encounter a busy condition to the attendant. Call Forward Busy should have Hunting and Call Waiting Denied or

CLS = HTD and CWD, because Hunting and Call Waiting take precedence over

FBA.

basic-1

Force Disconnect Denied ponw-25.4

98 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

FDSA

Comment

Force Disconnect Allowed

(FEDA)

FEDD

(FND)

FNA

(FTTC)

Far End Disconnect Allowed for Digital

Cordless Set.

Far End Disconnect Denied for Digital

Cordless Set.

Call Forward No answer Denied

Call Forward No answer Allowed

FTTR

FTTU

(GPUD)

GPUA

Pack/Rel

mc32-25 basic-1

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Conditional creates trunk to trunk connections for supervised Conference.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Restricted denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Unrestricted creates trunk to trunk connections for both Conference and

Transfer.

basic-23

Group Pickup Denied

Group Pickup Allowed

Group Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero. Must have Directed Call

Pickup (DCP) package 115.

dcp-12

(HBTD)

HBTA

(HSPD)

HSPA

(HTD)

Hunt By call Type Denied

Hunt By call Type Allowed basic-10

Hospitality Denied. HSPD is for administration sets.

Hospitality Allowed. HSPA is for room sets.

For HSPA, you must also enter CLS =

CCSA and CLS = MRA. HSPA CLS cannot be entered for a set with transfer or conference capability. This feature is used for Hospitality Management.

hvs-16

Hunting Denied basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 99

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

HTA Hunting Allowed

Comment

(IAMD)

IAMA

ICP Answering Machine Denied

ICP Answering Machine Allowed

This features allows a 2500 set to be a channel in the Intercept Computer

Interface (ICP) Answering Machine.

(ICDD)

ICDA

(IRGD)

IRGA

(LDTD)

LDTA

(LLCN)

LLC1

LLC2

LLC3

(LND)

LNA

Internal Call Detail Recording Denied

Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed

Interrogation set Denied for intercept computer

Interrogation set Allowed for intercept computer

Line Disconnect Tone Denied

Line Disconnect Tone Allowed

Line Load Control off

Line Load Control Class 1

Line Load Control Class 2

Line Load Control Class 3

(LPD)

LPA

(LPR)

HPR

Pack/Rel

icp-16 icdr-10 icp-14 basic-17 llc-13

Last Number Redial Denied

Last Number Redial Allowed

Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15 lnr-8

Message Waiting Lamp Denied

Message Waiting Lamp Allowed

If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line card, that port should be defined as LPD. With LPA the modem can be damaged by the message waiting lamp voltage 150 V.

phtn-20

Low Priority station

High Priority station

High Priority places this set or trunk at the top of the dial tone queue.

povr-1

100 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(MBXD)

MBXA

Comment Pack/Rel

Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind

Transfer Denied. When CLS = MBXD, blind transfers occur with mis-operation treatment.

Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind

Transfer Allowed. When CLS = MBXA, blind transfers occur without mis-operation treatment. To configure CLS = MBXA, CLS must first be defined as TSA or XFA.

Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package

141 must be equipped to enter MBXD or

MBXA.

mpo-21

MCDA

(MCDD)

(MCRD)

MCRA

(MCTD)

MCTA

Microsoft Converged Desktop Allowed.

Package MS_CONV (408) is required for

MCDA.

Microsoft Converged Desktop Denied

Multiple Call Arrangement Denied

Multiple Call Arrangement Allowed basic-15

(MIND)

MINA

(MPTD)

MPTA

(MRD)

MRA

Malicious Call Trace Denied

Malicious Call Trace Allowed

The TRC key must be removed before changing MCTA to MCTD. MCT is applied on a TN basis.

mct-10 mr-15 Message Intercept Denied

Message Intercept Allowed

Modem Pass Through Denied

Modem Pass Through Allowed

Message Registration Denied

Message Registration Allowed basic-5.50

mr-10

(MWD)

MWA

(NAMA)

NAMD

Message Waiting Denied

Message Waiting Allowed

Name display Allowed

Name display Denied mwc-1 dpd-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 101

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

(NOVD)

NOVA

Comment

Network Override/Breakin Denied

Network Override/Breakin Allowed

(NRCD)

NRCA

(NROD)

NROA

Pack/Rel

ponw-25.4

Night Restriction for forced Camp-On

Denied

Night Restriction for forced Camp-On

Allowed If night restriction is allowed, then forced Camp-On for this set is allowed only during night service .

povr-16

Night Restriction for Priority Override

Denied

Night Restriction for Priority Override

Allowed If night restriction is allowed, then

Priority Override for this set is allowed during night service only.

povr-16

(NRWD)

NRWA

(OCBD)

OCBA

Night Restriction for Call Waiting Denied povr-16

Night Restriction for Call Waiting Allowed

If Night Restriction is allowed, then Call

Waiting for this set is allowed during night service only.

ccb-21 Outgoing Call Barring Denied

Outgoing Call Barring Allowed

Must have FFC and NFCR packages.

(ONP)

OPX

OPS

ONS

(OVDD)

OVDA

On-Premises extension

Off-Premises extension

Supported by QPC192 only.

basic-1

Off-Premises Station (default if CDEN is

DD)

On-Premises Station (default for all others) xpe-20

Override Denied

Override Allowed

Must have Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 ffc-15

102 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

OKCH

PKCH

Comment

Originating Key DN of ACD agent set is charged for a call. Dialing from non prime key: When an external call is set up from a digital set with multiple DNs programmed using any key other than the

Prime DN key the Meridian 1 outputs a

CDR N-record at the end of the call. The

ORIG-ID field of the N-record holds the value of the Prime Key DN.

Enhancement: A new class-of-service

(CLS) is provided for digital sets. When the

CLS is OKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the

N-record will contain the actual originating

DN.

Prime key DN of ACD agent set is charged for the call. When the CLS is PKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the Prime DN. PKCH is the default setting.

(PCWD)

PCWA

Note:

Calls from an ordinary set are not affected by this CLS.

Deny Precedence Call Waiting.

Allow Precedence Call Waiting

Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package. Requires PRMA class of service.

atvn

Pack/Rel

(PGND)

PGNA

(PHTD

PHTA

(PRMD)

PRMA

Deny PAGENET access

Allow PAGENET access

Requires PAGENET package 307.

Deny Precedence Hunting

Allow Precedence Hunting

Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package. Requires HTA and PRMA class of service.

Deny Preemption

Allow Preemption pagenet-22 atvn

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 103

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Allowed only if Station Loop Preemption

(SLP) is equipped. Requires Warning

Tone Allowed (WTA) class of service.

(PRSD)

PRSA

(PUD)

PUA

Priority Call Pickup Station Denied

Priority Call Pickup Station Allowed

Pack/Rel

povr-15

Call Pickup Denied

Call Pickup Allowed

Default changes to PUA if Ringing Number

Pickup Group (RNPG) is defined. Call

Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero or RNPG = 0.

grp-1

(RBDD)

RBDA

(RBHD)

RBHA

(RCC)

UCC

(RMMD)

RMMA

RMMO

(RTDD)

RTDA

(SDND)

SDNA

(SFD)

SFA

Redirection By Day Denied

Redirection By Day Allowed

Redirection By Holiday Denied

Redirection By Holiday Allowed basic-24 basic-24

Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls fca-10

Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls

Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied vmba-24

Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed

Allow Remote Monitoring of Messages and to Override, if it is being already monitored

Call Redirection by Time of day denied

Call Redirection by Time of day allowed

If CLS = RTDD, AFD/AHNT/AEFD/AEHT is removed, and ARTO is reset to zero.

basic-22 basic-5.50

Phantom DN as SDN denied.

Phantom DN as SDN allowed.

Second Level CFNA Denied

Second Level CFNA Allowed

SFA requires FNA Class of Service.

basic-10

104 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(SHL)

LOL

Comment

Short line Class of Service

Long line Class of Service (default if CLS

= OPS)

Enter ALC Loss Plan Class of Service to be used for determining the Loss Plan

Classification for this unit. If neither SHL or

LOL is specified for a NEW unit, then SHL is set as the default.

Pack/Rel

xops-20

(SLKD)

SLKA

(SMSD)

SMSA

(SMWD)

Scheduled Electronic Lock Denied

Scheduled Electronic Lock Allowed

Standalone Mail Server Denied

Standalone Mail Server Allowed sar-20 samm-20 vmba-24

SMWA

(SPKD)

SPKA

Extended Message Waiting Indication

Denied.

Extended Message Waiting Indication

Allowed.

Speaker Denied

Speaker Allowed

Must have On-Hold on Loudspeaker

(OHOL) package 196.

ohol-15

(SWD)

SWA

(TEND)

TENA

(T87D)

T87A

(THFD)

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed

Enhances Call Waiting Allowed. Must have CLS = CWA. Must also have CLS =

HTD, because hunting takes precedence over Station-to-Station Call Waiting.

basic-8 tens-7 Tenant Service Denied

Tenant Service Allowed

Deny Remote Call Control

Allow Remote Call Control ms_conv-4.50

Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash on this set denied thf-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 105

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

THFA

Comment

Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash on this set allowed

TSA

Pack/Rel

Three-Party Service allowed

TSA is mutually exclusive with ASCA and

XFA. If TSA is requested and XFA is currently set, then XFA is changed to XFD mpo-20

(TVD)

TVA

(UDI)

RDI

(ULAD)

ULAA

Trunk Verification from station Denied

Trunk Verification from station Allowed tvs-10

Station is not restricted from receiving DID calls supp-10

Station is restricted from receiving DID calls

Set Based Administration User Access

Denied

Set Based Administration User Access

Allowed adminset-21

(USMD)

USMA

(USRD)

USRA

(WTA)

WTD

(XFD)

XFA

XFR

Meridian 911 position Denied

Meridian 911 position Allowed

Must have Meridian 911 (M911) package

224 m911-19

User Selectable Call Redirection Denied uscr-19

User Selectable Call Redirection Allowed

Warning Tone Allowed

Warning Tone Denied basic-1

Call Transfer Denied

Call Transfer Allowed

Call Transfer Restricted

TSA is mutually exclusive with XFA. If TSA is requested and XFA is currently set, then

XFA is changed to XFD. The most recently entered CLS overwrites the prior CLS of the same category. Note that one can specify XFR instead of XFD.

basic-1

106 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(XHD)

XHA

Comment

Exclusive Hold Denied

Exclusive Hold Allowed

(XRD)

XRA

Pack/Rel

dhld-4

Ring Again Denied

Ring Again Allowed

Must have CLS= XFA. RANA can be activated if OPT = RNA in LD 15. When

OPT = RND in LD 15, all sets with CLS =

XRA can activate only Ring Again Busy.

optf-1

CPND

CPND_LANG

CRCS

CSDN

NEW

CHG

OUT

(ROM)

KAT

0-7 x..x

Calling Party Name Display

Add data block

Change existing data block

Remove existing data block

Must have CPND data block defined in LD

95.

cpnd-19

Calling Party Name Display Language

Roman

Katakana

CPND_LANG applies when FTR = CPND.

CPND_LANG appears only when Multi-

Language I/O (MLIO) package 211 is equipped.

cpnd-19

Code Restriction Block nfcr-2

CUST

DCLP xx

0-159

Converged Service Directory Number

Converged Desktop Service

Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23.

CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO

NULL response is not accepted sip-4.00

Customer number associated with this set as defined in LD 15.

cust-1

Dealer Conference Loop ohol-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 107

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

DELETE_VMB

(YES)

DES

Response Comment

DCLP input defines the conference loop assigned to the unit. The loop should be in the same group as the unit.

NO d...d

Delete Voice Mailbox

Remove the Voice Mailbox from the

Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail

Remove the Voice Mailbox from the

Meridian 1

Prompted if REQ = OUT and TN has an associated Voice Mailbox. Allowed if the

DN is either a single appearance or a multiple appearance DN on a single TN.

ODAS Station Designator

Enter a 1-6 alphanumeric character representing an Office Data

Administration System (ODAS) Station

Designator.

Pack/Rel

vmba-19 odas-1

DIG 0-2045 0-99 Dial Intercom Group (DIG) number and

Dial Intercom Member (DIM) numbers.

The value entered for the member number cannot be equal to the SPRE code. In the case of double-digit values, the first digit cannot be the same as the SPRE code.

For example, if SPRE = 1, the member number cannot be 10, 11...19.

Single line telephones assigned as Dial

Intercom sets can only make calls within their own dial intercom groups. No DN can be assigned to them.

If any member in the group has a two digit member number, all members have a two digit number. The system enters leading zeros.

Must have maximum number of Dial

Intercom Groups (DGRP) defined in LD

15.

di-1

DISPLAY_FMT

(FIRST,

LAST)

Display Format for CPND name can be input as FIRST To view names as

John Doe cpnd-19

108 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

LAST, FIRST can be input as Last To view names as Doe

John

DMC

DN

ECHG l s c l s c c c c x..x yyyy

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Digital Enhanced Cordless

Telecommunication (DECT) Mobility

Controller Location

Format for Large System

Format for CS 1000E

Format for Small System

Format for CS 1000S

Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T mc32-25 basic-4.00

basic-1 basic-4.00

Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry (yyyy)

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. DN is not prompted for

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T Model sets or if DIG is defined.

Range for CLID table entry is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)

If the new DN entered already exists, one of the following messages is output when the TNB is updated: basic-1

• MIX (DN entered already appears on another set)

• PVR (DN is a Private Line number)

• HNT (DN exists and is defined as

Hunting Allowed)

• FNA (DN exists and has Forward No

Answer)

Before the DN can be modified, the station

DN must be removed from all Group Hunt lists in which it is a member.

ISDN is not required for Calling Line

Identification entry.

Easy Change. Prompted when REQ =

CHG.

basic-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 109

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

ELKP

ERL

Response Comment

This allows change to any prompt in this program without toggling through all the prompts.

x...x

<CR>

(0)-65535

X

Pack/Rel

Electronic Lock Password

Prompted with the Flexible Feature Codes

(FFC) package 139. Password length is one to 15 digits, and is set in LD 15.

ffc-14

Emergency Response Location.

Enter no value to make this TN Auto

Update.

Enter a value to statically configure this TN

(Manual Update).

Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.

basic-5.00

FCTB

FTR FTR

Feature Control Bitmap.

Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature

Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

Enter the feature name and related data.

ss25-1

Precede feature mnemonic with X to remove it from the allowed features for the telephone. Prompted with Special Service for 2500 sets (SS25) package 18.

ACD x...x yyyy

The ACD DN and the ACD position (POS

ID)

The ACD queue must be set in LD 23. ACD can be up to 4 digits; up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

An ACD entry is only allowed if you have already defined CLS = AGTA in the same pass through this overlay.

ism-16

110 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADL nn x..x

Auto Dial

Comment

Auto Dial cannot be configured if Hot Line is defined.

nn = number of digits, up to 31 maximum in Auto Dial DN x..x = Auto Dial DN

Auto Dial is required for BNRA

Must have Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.

Pack/Rel

ffc-15

AEFD y...y

basic-22

AEHT y...y

Alternate External Flexible Call Forward

DN, up to 13 digits.

Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or

CFTD.

Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.

Alternate External Hunt DN, up to 13 digits.

Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or

CFTD.

Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.

basic-22

AFD y...y

AHNT y...y

CFW nn

Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN, up to

13 digits.

Remove by setting CLS = RTDD

Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.

basic-22

Alternate Hunt DN, up to 13 digits.

Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.

Where yyyy = Alternate Redirection DN.

basic-22

Call Forward all calls.

Where: nn = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN; it must be large enough to hold the customer Reply DN.

• When the Enhanced System Access feature is configured, valid entries are 4,

8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Numbers ss25-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 111

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

between 4 and 31 are rounded up to the next valid number.

• When the Enhanced System Access feature is not configured, valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-23.

Pack/Rel

CPND

DCFW nn x...x

Default Call Forward

Where: nn = maximum number of digits in the DCFW DN.

supp-10

Valid entries for nn are: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24,

28, 31.

Where: x...x = Default Call Forward DN.

EFD x...x

Call Party Name Display, name assignment allowed

Response required only if Background

Terminal or PMSI is used to configure names. Response is not required if CPND is programmed in LD 95.

cpnd-10

EHT x...x

External Flexible call forward DN (a Group

Hunt pilot DN can be entered) basic-10

This is the DN to which external no answer calls are routed when Class of Service is

Call Forward by Call Type allowed (CLS =

CFTA). Must also have CLS = FNA.

EFD is only used if one of the following customer options are defined in LD 15:

• FNAD = FDN

• FNAT = FDN

• FNAL = FDN

Listed DNs, Departmental Listed DNs and prime DNs are accepted as valid input.

EFDs can be up to 13 digits.

External Hunt DN

This is the DN to which external busy calls

Hunt when Class of Service is Call

Forward by Call Type allowed (CLS =

CFTA). Must also have CLS = HTA.

basic-10

112 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Listed DNs, Departmental Listed DNs and prime DNs are accepted as valid input. A

Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered with up to:

• 4 digits without DNXP package 150

• 7 digits with DNXP package 150

• 13 digits for Network Call Redirection

FAXS x...x

FDN x...x

Pack/Rel

Facsimile server and command sequence faxs-18

The command sequence includes the following:

• Wx = waiting time of 0 to 9 seconds

• Cxxx = control command digits

• Oxxxx = originating or designated fax

DN

• D = the called fax DN

For HiMail server, if the designated fax DN is 1234:

FTR FAXS W6 O1234 C#10* D C## W4, or

FTR FAXS W6 O1234 C#20* D C## W4

For Phi-Net server, if the designated fax

DN is 1234:

FTR FAXS W4 C30 O1234 C*0 D C#

The facsimile server TNs must have

Digitone (DTN) Class of Service and cannot have FNA, CWA, or FBA Class of

Service, or FTR CFW feature.

Use the HUNT feature to define the DN of the next port on the facsimile server.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer

The DN cannot be an LDN

A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered of up to: basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 113

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

• 4 digits without DNXP package 150

• 7 digits with DNXP package 150

• 13 digits for Network Call Redirection

FDN is used for internal calls, if CLS is

CFTA and FNA.

FDN is used for all calls if CLS is CFTD and FNA.

FDN requires that CLS = MWA or FNA.

FDN is only used if one or more of the following customer options are defined in

LD 15:

• FNAD = FDN

• FNAT = FDN

• FNAL = FDN

Pack/Rel

HOT Small System Model set

Direct entry for Hotline Model set.

Automatic termination DN is 8 digits.

CS 1000S Model set hot-16 basic-1.0

HOT D nn x...x

Direct entry for one way Enhanced Hot

Line. Where:

• nn = up to 31 digits maximum in Target

DN

• x...x = Terminating DN

CLS = EHTA and DIP or DTN hot-10

HOT D nn x...x yyyy

Direct entry for two way Enhanced Hot

Line. Where:

• nn = up to 31 digits maximum in Target

DN

• x...x = Terminating DN

• yyyy = optional two way Hot Line DN.

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 hot-10

114 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

CLS = EHTA and DIP or DTN.

Pack/Rel

HOT nn x..x

Flexible Hot Line.

Where: nn = up to 31 digits maximum in

Target DN and x..x = Terminating DN.

Flexible Hot Line requires that CLS =

MNL.

HOT L bbb One way list entry for Enhanced Hot Line hot-10

Where: bbb = list entry position from Hot

Line list in LD 18.

The Hot Line list NCOS overrides the set

NCOS.

Enhanced Hot Line requires CLS = EHTA,

LLCN, PHTD and DIP or DTN. To remove

Hot Line DN, change CLS EHTA to

EHTD.

Hot Line DNs can be programmed with * as operands only if OPAO is enabled.

HOT L bbb x...x

ICF x...x

Two way list entry for Enhanced Hot Line.

Where: hot-10

• bbb = list entry position

• xxxx = optional two way Hot Line DN.

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

Enhanced Hot Line requires CLS = EHTA,

LLCN, PHTD and DIP or DTN. To remove

Hot Line DN, change CLS EHTA to

EHTD.

Hot Line DNs can be programmed with * as operands only if OPAO is enabled.

Internal Call Forward and Forward DN length.

Valid entries for x...x are: any integer in the range of (4)-31.

icf-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 115

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

ISP 1-(75)-255

Comment

Enable hook flash disconnect supervision with flash timer in 10 milliseconds units. If the numeric parameter is not entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 75 (750 ms). Otherwise, it does not change.

Pack/Rel

basic-21

OSP (1)

OSP 2

Enable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with absolute and assumed answer indication.

Enable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with absolute answer indication only.

If the numeric parameter is not entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 1. Otherwise, it does not change.

basic-21

PEP xxxxx

PHD

Apply PEP number xxxxx to this set. PEP number xxxxx is an X21 maintenance PEP which is available from the Meridian PEP

Library. PEP xxxxx uses this feature as a

'trigger' to execute certain code.

basic-4.50

Permanent Hold. Allowed with CLS =

XFA.

basic-1

RDL nn Stored Number Redial

Where: nn = DN length 4, 8, 12, (16), 24,

28, 31. Numbers between 5 and 30 are rounded up to the next valid number.

Allowed with CLS = XFA.

snr-3 optf-1 SCC 0-8190 Speed Call Controller list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.

SCU 0-8190 Speed Call User list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.

optf-1

SSU 0-4095 System Speed call User list number The speed call list must be defined in LD 18.

ssc-2

XISP Disable hook flash disconnect supervision

116 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

XOSP

Comment

Disable battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision

HDID (0)-9

Pack/Rel

Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect

Index defined in LD 15 basic-24

HMDN x..x

HUNT

IAPG

ICT

INDX x...x

(0)-15

0-<NIPN>

0-509

Home Directory Number Sets the DN as a valid MCDN network DN msmn-32

Hunt DN of the next station in the Hunt chain

A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered of up to:

• 4 digits without DNXP package 150

• 13 digits with DNXP package 150

Precede with X to remove.

With Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type, this is the Hunt DN for:

• internal calls if CLS = CFTA, or

• all busy calls if CLS = CFTD

A Control Directory Number (CDN) can be defined as a Hunt DN for both physical and phantom 500/2500 sets. When a CDN is configured in this way, a call which comes to a busy DN can be Hunting or Call

Forward Busy to a CDN.

basic-1

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message

(USM) group aml-16

Assign Associate (AST) telephones to an

USM group defined in LD 15. These groups determine which status messages are sent to the host computer for an AST telephone. The default Group 0 sends no messages, while Group 1 sends all messages.

aml-16 icp-16 Intercept Computer Terminal or Printer

Number The Number of Intercept

Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.

DECT Mobility Controller index Maps hand set to Virtual TN mc32-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 117

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

ITEM

Response

aaaa yyy

Comment Pack/Rel

Change any prompt Respond with the desired program mnemonic (aaaa) and its new value (yyy). ITEM is reprompted until only a carriage return <CR> is entered.

basic-12

KEEP_MSGS

(NO) YES

LDN (NO) 0-5 vmba-19

Keep Messages Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password

Departmental Listed Directory Number is not activated for this set Departmental

Listed Directory Number (LDN) as defined in LD 15 dldn-5

LNRS

MARP

MAUT

4-(16)-31

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

MLWU_LANG

(0)

1

2

3

4

5

Last Number Redial Size

Enter the maximum number of digits that can be stored. Valid entries are 4, 8, 12,

(16), 20,24, 28, 31. Invalid entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.

Prompted if CLS = LNA.

lnr-8

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Use TN as the Multiple Appearance DN

Redirection Prime. The MARP prompt, or

MARP information, is given only when assigning a DN.

Modify assigned authorization codes for this telephone Prompted with Station

Specific Authorization Codes (SSAU) package 229 and CLS = AUTR.

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up service. Prompted with Multi-Language

Wake Up (MLWU) package 206. This entry defines the language presented for the

Automatic Wake Up recorded announcement (RAN) for language 0 through 5 as follows: basic-18 ssau-19 mlwu-19

See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15

See LA11/LA12 in LD 15

See LA21/LA22 in LD 15

See LA31/LA32 in LD 15

See LA41/LA42 in LD 15

See LA51/LA52 in LD 15

118 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

X

Response

Remove entry

Comment

MODL 1-127

MWUN

NAME

(16) 32 aaaa,bbbb aaaa aaaa,

,bbbb

Pack/Rel

Model number

Prompted for Small System and CS 1000S

Model sets.

Prompted for CS 1000S Model sets.

basic-16 basic-1

Maximum number of Wireless Units

Standard line card = 16 Octal line card =

32 mc32-24

Calling Party Name Display Name First name comma Last name.

For example, John Doe is entered as

John,Doe. The first single comma is treated as the delimiter. Up to 27 characters (including the comma) can be input. The last occurrence of the first comma group serves as the name delimiter and is translated into a space between the first and last name.

When the delimiter is omitted, the input is stored as a first name.

When the delimiter follows the input, the input is stored as the first name.

When the delimiter precedes the input, the input is stored as a last name.

cpnd-21

NCOS

(0)-3

(0)-7

(0)-15

(0)-99

NUMZON

E

0-1023

OHID (0)-9

Network Class of Service group number ncos-2

CDP

BARS or NFCR

NARS

Network Class of Service group number

Numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index

Enter the index number 0-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompt ODNx. When a dial tone or interdigit timeout occurs on a set with Alarm Security Allowed (ASCA) basic-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 119

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

PLEV

POS

Response Comment

Class of Service, the set is intercepted to a predefined DN.

0-(2)-7 xxxx

Pack/Rel

Priority Level

Where: 2 = set can override sets of level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of level 2-7. Prompted with Priority Override/

Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or

Enhanced DPNSS1 Services

(DPNSS_ES) package 288.

povr-20

ACD position ID. Prompted when SFMT =

AUTO, TNDN, TN or DN.

basic-12

PRI (1)-48

RCO

REQ:

(0)-2

?

CHG

CDCS

CPY n

END

MOV

Priority level for ACD Agent. The agent with the lowest number assigned has the highest priority and is the first ACD agent to receive calls. (Priority 1 has the highest priority level) pagt-16

PRI is prompted if Automatic Call

Distribution, Priority Agent package 116 is equipped and CLS = AGTA.

Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No

Answer Prompted when CLS = FNA or

MWA (or both).

uscr-19

Request

To get a list of valid responses

Change existing data block

Convert Digital Communication Set basic-1 mc32-25

Note:

The CDCS command can also be used on MCMO type telephones

Copy or create 1 to 32 new station data block or blocks automatically from the specified station data block. Not valid for

Option11 Models.

Exit Overlay program

Move data block from one TN to another.

MOV command can be used to move analogue "IPE" telephones from one loop, shelf, card, unit to another lscu with the basic-25.4

120 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NEW X

OUT X

Comment

following restrictions (includes moves across Superloops):

-ACD sets must not be moved. Remove

(out) data and re-enter at destination.

-Telephones with mixed directory numbers can only be moved to a TN on the same loop; unless the prompt MLDN = Yes in LD

17.

-Cannot be used for Small System and CS

1000S Model sets

MOV command can be used to move analogue "EPE" telephones from one unit or card to another, but does not support moving these phones across shelves or loops.

Add new data block or blocks Follow NEW with a value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive telephone data block or blocks.

Remove data block or blocks Follow OUT with a value of 1-255 to remove that number of consecutive telephones.

The following is a list of valid responses.

For further information, consult the appropriate Overlay program.

LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC

DISI DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS

DSXP ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN

ENLS ENLU ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU

LBSY LDIS LIDL LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT

SUPL TRK XNTT XPCT XPEC

LD 20: LTN LUC LUDU LUU LUVU PRT

LD 10: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT

RNPG (0)-255

(0)-4095

SCI (0)-7

Ringing Number Pickup Group

Ringing Number Pickup Group with

Capacity Expansion

To remove a telephone from a group, enter

0 in response to the RNPG prompt.

grp-1 grp-1

Station Category Indication priority level

The Station Category number 1 to 7 must sci-7

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 121

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

SCPW

Response Comment

be defined as attendant console Incoming

Call Indicator in LD 15 prompt ICI = CA1-

CA7.

xxxx

Pack/Rel

Station Control Password

The Station Control password is used for the Electronic Lock and Remote Call

Forward features. This entry must equal the Station Control Password Length

(SCPL) as defined in LD 15.

Not prompted if SCPL = 0. See Flexible

Feature Codes in Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106

ffc-15

SECOND_DN x...x

SFDN

SFLT

SFMT

X xxxx

(NO)

BOSS

SEC

TNDN vmba-19

Second Directory Number sharing the

Voice Mailbox. This number can be up to

4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150.

Enter the letter "X" to delete the second directory number

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set SFDN is prompted if SFLT = BOSS.

ftcsf-15

Secretarial Filtering

Assign no designation to telephone

Designate telephone as a Boss set

Designate telephone as a Secretary set

(NO), SEC and <CR> takes you to the next prompt.

SFLT is prompted with Boss Secretary

Filtering (FTCSF) package 198.

ftcsf-15

Select Format for the copy command

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The POS prompt appears if

CLS = AGTA.

Manual selection of TNs, DNs and ACD position IDs for ACD telephones. TN, DN basic-12

122 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TN

DN

AUTO

Comment

and POS are prompted -n- times as defined by the CPY command.

The new DNs and ACD position IDs for

ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting

DN, ACD position ID and each TN. TN is prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.

The new TNs are provided by the system.

You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN and ACD position ID for ACD telephones. DN and/or POS are prompted n times as defined in the CPY command.

The new TNs, DNs and ACD position ID for ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting

TN, DN and ACD position ID.

SGRP (0)-999

SPID

SPWD

TEN x...x

xxxx

1-51

Pack/Rel

Scheduled Access Restriction Group

Number

Prompted with Schedule Access

Restrictions (SAR) package 162. The group must be defined in LD 88.

sar-15

Supervisor Position ID

This input assigns an agent to a supervisor when agent lamps are not assigned on the supervisor telephone.

acdb-1

This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150. However, ISDN applications can accept up to 13 digits.

Prompted for ACD packages B, C and D when CLS = AGTA.

ssau-19 Secure Data Password Prompted if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security codes do not print when PRT is requested.

Multi-Tenant Number Enter the Multi-

Tenant number for this telephone.

Prompted with Multiple-Tenant Service tens-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 123

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

TGAR

THIRD_DN

Response Comment

(TENS) package 86 and Tenant Service enabled.

0-(1)-31 x...x

X

Pack/Rel

Trunk Group Access Restriction The default of (1) automatically blocks direct access basic-1

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third Directory Number. This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Deletes the third directory number vmba-19

TIMP

TN

(600)

900 l s c u

Termination Impedance for XOPS unit

600 ohms

900 ohms

The following combinations of TIMP/BIMP are valid: basic-20

• 600/600

• 900/900

• 600/3COM

• 900/3COM

• 600/3CM2

• 900/3CM2

These are equivalent to the TIMP/BIMP prompts in LD 14 for the EXUT card. TIMP is prompted if the specified TN is configured on an XOPS card (DD card on a superloop). If the response to TIMP uniquely describes the TIMP/BIMP combination, then BIMP is not prompted.

Terminal Number The TN defines the location of the telephone. TN appears when REQ = NEW, CHG, MOV or OUT.

Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Where l = basic-1

124 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

l s c u c u

Comment

• 0-159: loops, superloops which are multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0

• 0-255: loops, Systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

Where s =

Pack/Rel

fnf-25

• 0-3: IPE shelves on loops defined TERM in LD 17

• 0-1: IPE shelves on loops defined TERD in LD 17 and superloops

• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined TERQ in

LD 17

Where c =

• 1-10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops

• 0-15: IPE cards of superloops

Where u =

• 0-3: single density units

• 0-7: double density units

• 0-15: quad density units

Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, -

252: superloop number in multiples of 4

Where s = basic-4.00

basic-6.00

• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop

• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop

Where c = basic-5.00

basic-6.00

• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop

• 1-10: cabinet on superloop

• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop

Where u = 0-31

Format for Small System, where:c u = card, unit basic-16

• c = 1-50

• u = 0-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 125

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

c u c u

Comment

Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit

Pack/Rel

basic-1.0

• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

• u = 0-31

Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit basic-4.00

• c = 0-4, 7-10

• u = 0-31

Format for MG 1000B Cabinet, where: c = card and u = unit

• c = 0-10

• u = 0-31

TOTN c u

l s c u l s c u c u c u c u

Note:

For converted Small Systems only, the

Meridian Mail card must be installed in slot 10 if Meridian Mail is to be supported.

Format for MG 1000T, where:

• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37-

44, 47-50

• u = 0-31 basic-4.00

To Terminal Number. Prompted when

REQ = MOV

Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit basic-1

Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small

System Model sets.

basic-4.00

basic-16

Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit

Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit To Terminal

Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV.

basic-1.0

basic-4.00

126 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TYPE:

Response

TYPE:

?

500

500 M

CARD

CARDSLT

DCS

OOSSLT

Comment

Type of data block.

To get a list of valid responses

500/2500 telephone data block

500/2500 Model telephone data block for

Small System and CS 1000S

500/2500 card block for Automatic Set

Relocation (ASR)

Single-line telephone line card

Digital Cordless Set

Out-of-Service Single Line Terminal unit

Pack/Rel

basic-20 mc32-25 vmba-19 VMB NEW

CHG

OUT

VMB_COS

0-127

VSIT (NO) YES

Add Voice Mailbox

Change Voice Mailbox

Remove Voice Mailbox

Voice Mailbox Class of Service

Visiting DECT Handset 4060 Determines the difference between a local handset and a visiting handset.

vmba-19 msmn-32

WRLS (NO) YES

WTYP

XLST

(MCMO)

DECT

(0)-254

TN corresponds to a portable personal telephone. Must have Meridian 1

Companion Option (MCMO) package

240.

Note:

Additional units configured on either the

MCMO or DECT card requires identical entries for WRLS, WTYP and MWUN prompts.

mcmo-20

Meridian Companion Mobility Option

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephone mcmo-23

Pretranslation group associated with this station If the user wants to use a 16-button

DTMF ABCD set as a call forward destination station to deactivate the call forward all calls function, then XLST must pxlt-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 127

LD 10: Analog (500/2500) Telephone Administration

Prompt

XPLN xx

Response Comment

be set equal to the table number defined in LD 18.

Pack/Rel

Expected name length (this value should be set to a sufficient length for current and future names for that DN)

When REQ=NEW, the XPLN prompt defines the maximum name length for that particular DN or DIG. The XPLN for a DN cannot be changed without deleting that name entry.

XPLN must range from the actual length of the name string to MXLN, or defaults to

DFLN.

cpnd-19

128 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 10: LD 11: Digital Telephone

Administration

This Overlay program allows data blocks for Displayphone 1200, M1000 series, M2000 series, M3000 digital telephones, and IP Phones to be created or modified.

When the Overlay is loaded, the available system memory, disk records, and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:

>ld 11

SL1000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED U P: xxxxxx xxxxxx TOT: xxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS

AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx INTERNET TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xxx TOT: xxxx ACD

AGENTS AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx AST AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx DIGITAL

TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx WIRELESS TELEPHONES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx DATA PORTS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx

If a License limit is set to the value 32767 (maximum), then the information for that License is not output.

This does not apply for the TNs License.

The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL (PLDN) package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk (**) as a valid input to a number of prompts. Usually the asterisk is part of a dialed number. Without this package, inputting one asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt; inputting two asterisks causes the system to restart the Overlay at the REQ prompt.

Linked Overlay programs

Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load another.

The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:

• a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or

• an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 129

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by task:

Add a voice telephone

on page 136

Add a data telephone

on page 140

Copy a telephone

on page 144

Easy change

on page 146

Move a telephone on page 146

Remove a telephone

on page 146

MODL

CFTN

SFMT

TN

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

ECHG

- ITEM

Response

a...a

a...a

1-127 l s c u c u a...a

l s c u c u

DELETE_VMB (YES) NO

NEWTYP

PROCEED a...a

YES (NO)

(NO) YES aaaa yyy

Comment

Request

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)

Model number for small systems and CS 1000S

Copy From Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal

Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Select Format (a...a = TNDN, TN, DN, or AUTO)

Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The

TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Delete Voice Mailbox

Specifies the TN_TYPE to convert to. (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)

Confirm that the system administrator is aware that the feature is lost and still wants to perform the conversion.

Anything typed except YES implies NO.

Easy Change

Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic ; yyy = its new value)

130 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

TOTN

CDEN

DES

CTYP

CUST

NUMZONE

UXTY

MCCL

SIPU

SUPR

NDID

UXID

NUID

NHTN

BUID

MOTN

Response

l s c u c u aa d...d

0-1023 xxxx x y z u

Comment

To Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.

The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Universal Extension type.

x...x

Number of clients per supported SIP Line type for a

Universal Extension designated as SIP Line.

Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.

SIP Line user id.

Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.

(NO) YES xxxx

SIP Line super user.

Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.

The SIP Lines Gateway (SLG) node identifier.

Package 417 (SIP Lines Services) must be equipped.

<CLID> aaaa l s c u

0000 x...x

<CR> l s c u

Calling Line ID of the Universal Extension.

Network User ID for dialable home system DN. Applies to IP Phones.

Network User Id. Enter X to delete.

Network Home system TN.

Format for CS 1000M Large System and CS

1000Esystem, Where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.

Reserved TN to indicate the Network Home is a CS

2100 system. Do not use if the Network Home is a CS

1000 system.

dialable DN, Main Office user id

Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the

Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS

1000E

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 131

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

MPHI

KLS

AOM

KBA

DBA

DSPL

DSPT

ZONE

KEM

KEY

PAGEOFST

KEMOFST

LANG

ERL

ECL

VSIT

HMDN

FDN

TGAR

Response

0000

(NO) YES

1-7

0-2

(0)-2

(0)-1

(0)-500

(0)-2 x...x

Comment

Reserved TN to indicate the Main Office is a CS 2100 system. It must not be used if the Main Office is a CS

1000 system.

Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH Interface

Number of Key/Lamp Strips

Number of Add-on Modules

Key-Based Accessory

Display-Based Accessory

Length (in characters) of portable display

Type of portable display

Zone Number to which Nortel Networks IP Phone

2002, IP Phone 2004, and IP SoftPhone 2050 set belongs

(0)-4 Number of IP Phone Key Expansion Units (KEM) to configure.

xx aaa yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Telephone function key assignments

Function key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone. KEY is prompted until a

<CR>

is entered.

<Page>

<KeyOffset>

<KEM>

<KeyOffset> a

<CR> 0-65535

X

(0)-65535

(NO) YES x...x

x...x

xx

Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that support Paging and have a specific number of KEMs configured.

Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that do not support Paging and have a specific number of IP

Phone KEMs configured.

Language choice

Emergency Response Location

Home Emergency Call List

Visitor

Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.

Flexible CFNA DN

Trunk Group Access Restriction

132 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

ARTO

ADAY

AHOL

AFD

AHNT

AEFD

AEHT

MAUT

- SPWD

- AUTH

RCO

ICT

EFD

LDN

Prompt

NCOS

RNPG

SSU

XLST

SCPW

SGRP

ELKP

SFLT

- SFDN

CAC

CAC_CIS

CAC_MFC

CLS

CSDN

(0)-3

(0)-3

(0)-3 x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx

(0)-2

0-<NIPN> x...x

x...x

a...a

xxxx

(0)-10

0-(3)-9

(0)-10 a...a

Response

aaa

(0)-99

(0)-4095

0-4095

(0)-7 xxxx

(0)-999 x..x

Comment

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15

Network Class of Service group

Ringing Number Pickup Group

System Speed call list number

Pretranslation group associated with this station

Station Control Password

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)

Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks

CIS ANI category code

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of

Service options)

Converged Service Directory Number Converged

Desktop Service Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in LD 23. CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as ZBDV or ZBDO. NULL response is not accepted.

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15

Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate Hunt DN

Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate External Hunt DN

Modify authorization codes for this telephone

Secure Data Password

Authorization code

Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Flexible CFNA DN for External calls

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 133

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

- DTR

- DUP

- HOT

- AUT

- AUTB

- BAUD

- DCD

- PRM

SCI

TOV

DTAO

PSEL

OPE

- PSDS

- TRAN

- PAR

- VLL

- MOD

- INT

- CLK

- DEM

- DLNG

- KBD

Prompt

HUNT

EHT

LHK

LNRS

TEN

OHID

FSVC

(0)-7

(0)-(0)-23 a...a

a...a

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

a...a

(OFF) ON aaaa

(OFF) ON

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

0-(7)-10

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

(OFF) ON

(NO) YES

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON aaa aaa

Response

x...x

x...x

(0)-69

4-(16)-31

1-511

(0)-9

(0)-9

(ON) OFF

Comment

Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain

External Hunt DN

Last Hunt Key number limit

Last Number Redial Size

Tenant number

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.

Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index

Station Category Indication priority level

Timeout Value for the data port

Data Option (a...a = (MPDA) or MCA)

Protocol Selection (a...a = (DMDM) or TLNK)

Change data port Operating Parameters

Public Switched Data Service option

Port Transmission type (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)

Parity (a...a = (SPACE), EVEN, ODD, or MARK)

Data Terminal Ready settings

Duplex (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)

Hotline

Auto-answer

Auto Baud rate

Baud rate index for the data port

Dynamic Carrier Detect

Prompt for terminal or host mode

Virtual Leased Line

Mode

Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking

Clock

Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)

Language preference for DAC prompts (aaa = (ENG) or FRN)

Keyboard Dialing

134 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

DTMK

DNDR

DCFW

KEY

- MARP

- CPND

Prompt

- V25

- HDLC

- RTS

- WIRE

- PBDO

LPK

PLEV

FCAR

LTN

SPID

AST

IAPG

ITNA

DGRP

PRI

LANG

MLNG

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(ON) OFF

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON

(0)-69

0-(2)-7

(NO) YES

1-253 0-15 x...x

xx yy

(0)-15

(NO) YES

(1)-5

(1)-32 a

MLWU_LANG a a...a

x...x

(0)-120 x...x

xx aaa yyyy zz..z

(NO) YES aaa

Comment

V.25 bis option (synchronous mode only)

High Level Data Link Control

Request To Send (applies only to asynchronous mode)

Wire test

Port Busy when DTR off

Line Preference Key

Priority Level

Forced Charge Account Restricted

Logical TN and AUX link number

ACD Supervisor Position ID DN

Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group

Idle TN for the Third Party Application

Device Group

Priority level for ACD agent

Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls

(a = (0)-5 or X)

Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls

(a = (0)-5 or X)

Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,

M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001, I2002,

I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:

• <CR> no change

• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,

POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.

Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN

Directory Number Delayed Ringing in seconds

Default Call Forward DN

Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Calling Party Name Display

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 135

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

- - CPND_LANG aaa

- - NAME

- - XPLN

- - DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb

- VMB aaa

- - VMB_COS 0-127

- -

SECOND_DN x...x

- - THIRD_DN x...x

- - KEEP_MSGS (NO) YES

- ANIE

- DNRO

- DNRI aaaa,bbbb xx

(0)-n

(0)-4

(0)-4

Comment

Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Calling Party Name Display name

Expected Name Length

Display Format for CPND name

Voice Mailbox

Voice Mailbox Class of Service

Second DN sharing the voice mailbox

Third DN sharing the voice mailbox

Preserve Meridian Mail messages and current password

ANI entry

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls

Prompts and responses by task

Add a voice telephone

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

MODL

TN

CDEN

DES

Response

NEW a...a

1-127 l s c u c u aa d...d

Comment

Request = NEW

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)

Model number for small systems and CS 1000S

Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.

The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

136 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

FDN

TGAR

LDN

NCOS

RNPG

SSU

XLST

SCPW

SGRP

ELKP

Prompt

CTYP

CUST

BUID

MOTN

MPHI

KLS

AOM

KBA

DSPL

DSPT

ZONE

NUMZONE

LANG

ERL

VSIT

HMDN xx aaa

(0)-99

(0)-4095

0-4095

(0)-7 xxxx

(0)-999 x...x

Response

(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx x...x

Customer number

Comment

dialable DN, Main Office user id

<CR> l s c u

(NO) YES

1-7

0-2

(0)-2

(0)-500

(NO) YES x...x

Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the

Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS

1000E.

Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface

(0)-2 Type of portable display

0–255 0–8000 Zone Number which IP Phone 2004 set belongs

0-1023 a

(0)-65535

Number of Key/Lamp Strips

Number of Add-on Modules

Key-Based Accessory

Length (in characters) of portable display

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Language choice

Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,

ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.

Visitor x...x

Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.

Flexible CFNA DN

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15

Network Class of Service group

Ringing Number Pickup Group

System Speed Call list number

Pretranslation group associated with this station

Station Control Password

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 137

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

FSVC

SCI

LPK

PLEV

FCAR

MAUT

- SPWD

- AUTH

RCO

ICT

EFD

HUNT

EHT

ARTO

ADAY

AHOL

AFD

AHNT

AEFD

AEHT

LHK

LNRS

TEN

OHID

Prompt

SFLT

- SFDN

CAC

CAC_CIS

CAC_MFC

CLS

Response

a...a

xxxx

(0)-10

0-(3)-9

(0)-10 aaaa

(0)-3

(0)-3

(0)-3 x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

(NO) YES xxxx n xxxx

(0)-2

0-<NIPN> x...x

x...x

x...x

(0)-69

4-(16)-31

1-511

(0)-9

(0)-9

(0)-7

(0)-69

0-(2)-7

(NO) YES

Comment

Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks

CIS ANI category code

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of

Service options)

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD 15

Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate Hunt DN

Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate External Hunt DN

Modify authorization codes for this telephone

Secure Data Password

Authorization code

Ringing Cycle Option for Call Forward No Answer

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Flexible CFNA DN for External calls

Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain

External Hunt DN

Last Hunt Key number limit

Last Number Redial Size

Tenant number

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.

Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index

Station Category Indication priority level

Line Preference Key

Priority Level

Forced Charge Account Restricted

138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

LTN

DTMK

DNDR

DCFW

KEY

Prompt

SPID

AST

IAPG

ITNA

DGRP

PRI

MLNG

- MARP

- CPND

Response

1-253 0-15 x...x

xx yy

(0)-15

(NO) YES

(1)-5

(1)-32

LANG (0)-5 X

MLWU_LANG a a...a

Comment

Logical TN and AUX link number

ACD Supervisor Position ID DN

Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group

Idle TN for the Third Party Application

Device Group

Priority level for ACD agent

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls

Language choice for Automatic Wakeup (AWU) calls

(a = (0)-5 or X)

Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,

M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001,

I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:

• <CR> no change

• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,

POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.

x...x

(0)-120 x...x

Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN

Directory Number Delayed Ringing (in seconds)

Default Call Forward DN xx aaa yyyy zz..z Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)

(NO) YES Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime aaa Calling Party Name Display (aaa = NEW, CHG or

OUT)

- - CPND_LANG aaa Calling Party Name Display Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Calling Party Name Display name

Expected Name Length

- - NAME aaaa,bbbb

- - XPLN

- - DISPLAY_FMT xx

- VMB

- - VMB_COS aaaa,bbbb aaa

0-127

Display Format for CPND name

Voice Mailbox

Voice Mailbox Class of Service

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 139

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

- - SECOND_DN

Response

x...x

- - THIRD_DN x...x

- - KEEP_MSGS

(NO) YES

- ANIE

- DNRO

- DNRI

(0)-n

(0)-4

(0)-4

Comment

Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password

ANI entry

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls

Add a data telephone

The following prompts apply to only M2006, M2008, M2216, M2616 data ports (MPDA), DAC card units and Meridian Communications Adapters (MCA).

All operating parameter information is stored in the MPDA. If the hardware does not exist, the parameter information is lost. The hardware must be connected before configuring the operating parameters in this program. In the event that the parameters are lost, it is possible to enter the data through the data adapter. It is not necessary to re-enter the program.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

DES

CTYP

CUST

NUMZONE

BUID

MOTN

Response

NEW a...a

l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.

The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D) aa d...d

Office Data Administration System Station Designator

(XDLC) EDLC Card type xx

0-1023

Comment

Request = NEW

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) x...x

<CR> l s c u

Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

disable DN, Main Office user id

Main Office TN Accept default when CS 1000S is the

Main Office When main office is a Large System or CS

1000E.

140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

ARTO

AFD

AHNT

AEFD

AEHT

MAUT

- SPWD

FDN

TGAR

LDN

NCOS

RNPG

SSU

XLST

SCPW

SGRP

ELKP

SFLT

- SFDN

CAC

CAC_CIS

CAC_MFC

CLS

Prompt

MPHI

KLS

AOM

KBA

ZONE

LANG

ERL

(0)-999 x...x

a...a

xxxx

(0)-10

0-(3)-9

(0)-10 aaaa x...x

xx aaa

(0)-99

(0)-4095

0-4095

(0)-7 xxxx

Response

(NO) YES

1-7

0-2

Comment

Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface

Number of Key/Lamp Strips

Number of Add-on Modules

(0)-2 Key-Based Accessory

0–255 0–8000 Zone Number which IP Phone 2004 set belongs a

(0)-65535

Language choice

Current Emergency Response Location. If ERL = 0,

ESA call processing uses ESA Data Block (LD 24) parameters.

Flexible CFNA DN

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD 15

Network Class of Service group

Ringing Number Pickup Group

System Speed call list number

Pretranslation group associated with this station

Station Control Password

(0)-3 x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

(NO) YES xxxx

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

Electronic Lock Password (1-15 digits)

Secretarial Filtering (a...a = (NO), BOSS, or SEC)

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

Category Code for CNI of MFC trunks

CIS ANI category code

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service (CLS responses begin on Class of

Service options)

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection

Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate Hunt DN

Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN

Alternate External Hunt DN

Modify authorization codes for this telephone

Secure Data Password

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 141

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

- KBD

- V25

- HDLC

- RTS

EFD

HUNT

- BAUD

- DCD

- PRM

- VLL

- MOD

- INT

- CLK

- DEM

- DLNG

- PSDS

- TRAN

- PAR

- DTR

- DUP

- HOT

- AUT

- AUTB

Prompt

- AUTH

RCO

ICT

TOV

DTAO

PSEL

OPE

0-(7)-10

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

(OFF) ON

(NO) YES

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON aaa aaa

Response

n xxxx

(0)-2

0-<NIPN>

(0)-3 a...a

a...a

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

a...a

(OFF) ON aaaa

(OFF) ON

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

(ON) OFF

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(ON) OFF x...x

x...x

Comment

Authorization code

Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Timeout Value for the Data port

Data Option (a...a = (MPDA) or MCA)

Protocol Selection (a...a = (DMDM) or TLNK)

Change data port Operating Parameters

Public Switched Data Service option

Port Transmission type (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)

Parity (a...a = (SPACE), EVEN, ODD, or MARK)

Data Terminal Ready settings

Duplex (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)

Hotline

Auto Answer

Auto Baud rate

Baud rate index for the data port

Dynamic Carrier Detect

Prompt for terminal or host mode

Virtual Leased Line

Mode

Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking

Clock

Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)

Language preference for DAC prompts (aaa = (ENG) or FRN)

Keyboard Dialing

V.25 bis option, synchronous mode only

High Level Data Link Control

Request To Send (applies to asynchronous mode only)

Flexible CFNA DN for External calls

Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain

142 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

FSVC

SCI

WIRE

PBDO

LPK

PLEV

FCAR

LTN

SPID

AST

EHT

LHK

TEN

Prompt

LNRS

OHID

IAPG

ITNA

DGRP

PRI

DTMK

DNDR

DCFW

Response

x...x

(0)-69

4-(16)-31

1-511

(0)-9

(0)-9

(0)-7

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON

(0)-69

0-(2)-7

(NO) YES

1-253 0-15 x...x

xx yy

(0)-15

(NO) YES

(1)-5

(1)-32

LANG (0)-5 X

MLWU_LANG aaaa,bbbb

MLNG a...a

x...x

(0)-120 x...x

Comment

External Hunt DN

Last Hunt Key number limit

Last Number Redial Size

Tenant number

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.

Forced Out of Service Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index

Station Category Indication priority level

Wire test

Port Busy when DTR off

Line Preference Key

Priority Level

Forced Charge Account Restricted

Logical TN and AUX link number

ACD Supervisor Position ID DN

Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications

Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message (USM) group

Idle TN for the Third Party Application

Device Group

Priority level for ACD agent

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls

Language choice for Automatic Wake Up (AWU) calls

Language selection for the M3902, M3903, M3904,

M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140, I1150, I2001,

I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:

• <CR> no change

• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR, SWE, DAN,

POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP, RUS, LAT, TUR.

Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/data TN

Directory Number Delayed Ringing (in seconds)

Default Call Forward DN

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 143

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

KEY

Prompt

- MARP

- CPND

- -CPND_LANG

Response Comment

xx aaa yyyy zz..z Telephone function key assignments (KEY responses begin on basic-1)

(NO) YES aaa aaa

- - NAME

- - XPLN

- -DISPLAY_FMT aaaa,bbbb xx aaa

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Calling Party Name Display

Calling Party Name Display Language

Calling Party Name Display name

Expected NameLength

Display Format for CPND name

Voice Mailbox

Voice Mailbox Class of Service

- VMB

- - VMB_COS

- -SECOND_DN aaa

0-127 x...x

- - THIRD_DN x...x

- -KEEP_MSGS

(NO) YES

Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password

Copy a telephone

ACD supervisory telephones cannot be copied. Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new telephones.

Mobile Extension telephones cannot be copied (TYPE = UEXT).

Prompt Response

REQ: CPY n

TYPE:

CFTN

Request = CPY n

Comment

a...a

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Copy From Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number.

The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

SFMT aaaa Select Format. You may respond to SFMT with: AUTO, TNDN,

TN or DN. Subprompts follow each of these responses as follows:

144 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by task

Prompt

- TN

- DN

- POS

Response

AUTO xxxx

TNDN

Comment

The system provides the new DNs or position IDs (for ACD telephones) and TNs by automatically selecting consecutive unused DNs or ACD position IDs and TNs.

l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x...x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one)

ACD position ID of new set

Manual selection of DNs or ACD position IDs and TNs. You are prompted for the DN or ACD position ID and TN of each new telephone.

- TN

- DN

- POS l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx

TN

ACD Position ID of new set

The new DNs or ACD Position IDs are provided by the system.

You are prompted for the starting DN or ACD Position ID and each TN. TN is prompted -n- times as defined in the CPY command.

- TN

- DN

- POS

- TN

- DN

- POS l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx

DN

ACD Position ID of new set

The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN or ACD Position ID.

l s c u c u TN of new set (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.) x..x yyyy Directory Number and CLID table entry (Range is (0)-value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus one) xxxx ACD Position ID of new set

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 145

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Easy change

Prompt Response

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

ECHG

ITEM

CHG a...a

Comment

Request = CHG

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

YES Easy Change aaaa bbbb Item (aaaa = Program mnemonic ; yyy = its new value)

Move a telephone

If moving a voice unit with an associated data unit, the data unit must also be moved. On

NT8D02 Digital Line Card, both voice and data TNs can be moved by entering MOV PAIR in response to the REQ prompt.

Prompt Response

REQ: a...a

TYPE:

TN

Comment

Request = MOV or MOV PAIR a...a

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block) l s c u c u Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

TOTN l s c u c u To Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Remove a telephone

Before removing an ACD agent telephone, first remove the associated AGT key on the supervisor's telephone.

Prompt Response

REQ: OUT

TYPE: a...a

Comment

Request = OUT

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)

146 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TN l s c u cu

Comment

Terminal Number (as defined on Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ADAY

Response

(0)-3

Comment

Alternate Days as defined in LD 15 Prompted if CLS = RBDA

Pack/Rel

basic-24

AEFD

AEHT

AFD

AHNT

AHOL

ANIE x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

(0)-3

(0)-n

Alternate External Flexible Call Forward DN.

Remove by setting CLS = RTDD or CFTD.

Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22

Alternate External Hunt DN. Remove by setting

CLS = RTDD or CFTD.

Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22

Alternate Flexible Call Forward DN. Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.

Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22

Alternate Hunt DN. Remove by setting CLS =

RTDD.

Alternate Redirection DN (up to 13 digits) basic-22

Alternate Redirection Holiday as defined in LD

15 Prompted if CLS = RBHA basic-24

ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.

If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set.

The old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.

If ANIE is of 1-N: cist-24

• If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 147

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

AOM

ARTO

AST

AUT

AUTB

AUTH

BAUD

Response Comment

retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer

Data Block, if configured.

• If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if

ANIC = NO for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.

Pack/Rel

0-2

(0)-3

Number of Add-on Modules. AOM appears if

TYPE = M2216 or M2616.

arie-14

Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection, defined in the customer data block.

ARTO is prompted if CLS = RTDA.

basic-22

(ON)

OFF

(ON)

OFF xx yy Associate Set Assignment for Meridian Link applications

A maximum of two DN keys, xx and yy, can be controlled by the host computer. Precede with

X to delete.

iap3p-12 xx xx xx xx If PKG 411 is equipped, a maximum of four DN keys can be controlled by the host computer.

basic-7.00

Enable Auto-Answer

Do not enable Auto-Answer arie-14

Auto Baud rate enabled

Auto Baud rate disabled

AUTB is prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422 and if HOT = OFF.

dac-16 n xxxx Authorization code. Where:

• n = the number of the assigned authorization code (1-6)

• xxxx = assigned authorization code (Any authorization code assigned in LD 88 is valid).

AUTH appears when CLS = Authorization

Code Required (AUTR).

ssau-19

Baud rate mcu/arie-19

148 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

BUID

Response

0-(7)-8

0-(7)-10

0-(11)-12

Comment

Baud rate index for the data port for data port on M2006, M2008, M2216 and M2616 telephones and Data Access Card.

Baud rate index for the data port for

M3901,M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905 telephones.

The following values apply to:

• MPDA-1

• MCA with DTAO = MPDA and TRAN = ASYN

• MCA with DTAO = MCA

• TYPE = MCU and TRAN = ASYN

Where: 0 = 110, 1 = 150, 2 = 300, 3 = 600, 4 =

1200, 5 = 2400, 6 = 4800, (7) = 9600, 8 =

19,200, 9=28,800, and 10=33,600.

The following values apply to:

• MCA with DTAO = MPDA, with MCA hardware

• TRAN = SYN, MCA with TRAN = SYN

• MCA with DTAO = MCA

Where: 0 = 1200, 1 = 2400, 2 = 3600, 3 = 4800,

4 = 7200, 5 = 9600, 6 = 14,400, 7 = 19,200, 8

= 38,400, 9 = 40,800, 10 = 48,000, (11) =

56,000, and 12 = 64,000.

With DAC, BAUD is only prompted if AUTB

(Auto Baud Rate) = OFF.

Pack/Rel

basic-24 x...x

Dialable DN, Main Office user id For CS 1000S sbo-2

Enter X to delete

CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9

CAC_MFC (0)-10

CDEN SD

DD

4D

8D

CIS ANI Category Access Code

MFC CNI Category Access Code

Single Card Density

Double Card Density

Quadruple Card Density

Octal Card Density cist-24 cist-24 basic-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 149

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

CFTN

CLK

CLS c u c u c u c u

Response Comment

CDEN defaults to the density of the network loop. CDEN is not prompted for Small System and CS 1000S Model sets or superloops.

l s c u

(OFF)

ON

Pack/Rel

Copy From Terminal Number

General TN format

Large System format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit CS 1000E format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit basic-12 basic-4.00

c u = card, unit

Small System

CS 1000S

MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

Use this TN as a template for new sets. ACD supervisory sets cannot be copied. Associate set (AST) assignments are not copied to the new sets.

With the introduction of Phantom TNs, the system checks to be sure that TNs are not moved or copied from phantom TNs to non-

Phantom TNs or visa versa.

CFTN appears if REQ = CPY.

basic-1 basic-4.00

Clock off

Clock on arie-14

(CTD)

UNR

CUN

TLD

SRE

FRE

Class of Service options

The following CLS assignments determine the calling options and features available to the telephone. Defaults are shown in parentheses.

Enter each non-default option required, separated by a space.

Access Restrictions

Conditionally Toll Denied (default)

Unrestricted

Conditionally Unrestricted.

Toll Denied.

Semi-Restricted.

Fully Restricted.

basic-1 basic-1

150 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

FR1

FR2

Fully Restricted 1.

Comment

Fully Restricted 2.

(AAD)

AAA

(ABDD)

ABDA

ADD

DDS

NDD

TDD

Automatic Answerback Denied

Automatic Answerback Allowed

Automatic Answerback can be used on M2317,

M2616, and IP Phones with handsfree capability. A special hardware kit is required for

Companion 4 speakerphones.

Automatic Answerback must have CLS = HFA for M2616, and IP Phones (excluding IP Phone

2001). CLS AAA or AAK keys are not allowed for M2317 and IP Phone 2001 TNs.

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Denied

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Allowed

Digit Display

Automatic Digit Display, default for M2008,

M2216, M2317, M2616, and M3000.

Delay Display, display activates after call is answered

No Digit Display, default for M2006

Tandem Digit Display. Automatic set display feature, TDD Class of Service is default for

M3902, M3903, M3904, and M3905, and applicable to all Meridian 1 proprietary sets except for the M2006 which does not have display capability.

Pack/Rel

aab-10 fcdr-18 ddsp-1

(AGN)

SPV

(AGRD)

Note:

Manufacturer discontinued sets, such as the

M2317 and the SL1, can be configured with

TDD Class of Service however, may not have full functionality of the Automatic Set

Display feature.

ACD Agent

ACD Supervisor

Agent Greeting Denied fxs-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 151

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

AGRA

Comment

Agent Greeting Allowed

(AHD)

AHA

(ARHD)

ARHA

(ASCD)

ASCA

(AUTU)

AUTD

AUTR

(BFED)

BFEA

(BUZZ)

RNGI

RNGB

Automatic Hold Denied

Automatic Hold Allowed

Audible Reminder of Held Call Denied

Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed

Pack/Rel

supp-10 basic-14

Alarm Security Denied

Alarm Security Allowed ohas-18

Unrestricted Authorization code Class of

Service

Denied Authorization code Class of Service

Restricted Authorization code Class of Service

When the CLS is changed from AUTR to AUTU or AUTD, all previous telephone authorization code information is removed. This Class of

Service is valid only when Station Specific

Authorization Codes (SSAU) package 229 is equipped.

ssau-19

Boss Secretary Feature Enhancement Denied ffcsf-24

Boss Secretary Feature Enhancement Allowed

Buzz

Apply ringing when idle but off hook

Apply ringing when idle but off hook or busy on the other line basic-24

(CCBD)

CCBA

(CCSD)

CCSA

Collect Call Blocking Denied (permits a set to accept collect calls)

Collect Call Blocking Allowed (prevents a set from accepting collect calls

Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is required.

ccb-21

Controlled Class of Service Denied

Controlled Class of Service Allowed ccos-7

152 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ZBDV

ZBDO

(CFHD)

CFHA

(CFTD)

CFTA

Response Comment

CCSA is required for the Electronic Lock feature. Must have Controlled Class of Service

(CCOS) package 81.

(CDCA)

CDCD

ZBDA

(ZBDD)

(ZBDR)

Conferee Display Count Allowed.

Conferee Display Count Denied.

Pack/Rel

ZBDA allows external station activity records to be generated for the set

ZBDD denies external station activity records to be generated for the set

ZBDA emct-20

Converged Desktop Multimedia Restricted

(default)

Converged Desktop Multimedia and Voice

Converged Desktop Multimedia Only

Call Forward Hunt Override Denied

Call Forward Hunt Override Allowed basic-23 sip-4.00

cfho-20

(CFXD)

CFXA

Call Forward by Call Type Denied

Call Forward by Call Type Allowed

If response is CFTA, you must also designate

HTA, FNA or both.

optf-10

Call Forward All Calls to External DN Denied optf-19

Call Forward All Calls to External DN Allowed

Examples of external DNs are:

• Route Access Code

• ESN Access Code

• CDP Distant Steering Code

When denied, a call can only be forwarded to the following internal DNs:

• Single or multi-line telephone

• Attendant DN or CAS local attendant DN

• Listed DN as defined in LD 15

• Message Center DN where MWC = YES

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 153

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

(CLBD)

CLBA

Comment

Deactivate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking

Activate Calling Party Number and Name perline blocking

The user may still request CPP by dialing the

CPP code.

Pack/Rel

cpp-21

(CLTD)

CLTA

(CMSD)

CMSA

(CNDD)

CNDA

(CNID)

CNIA

(CNTD)

CNTA

Network Call Trace from this telephone Denied pra-17

Network Call Trace from this telephone Allowed

Command and Status link Denied

Command and Status link Allowed

CMSA is not supported by M2317, and

M3000.

Call Party Name Display Denied

Call Party Name Display Allowed

CNDA allows user names to be displayed on the telephone's digit display.

Call Number Information Denied

Call Number Information Allowed csl-8 cpnd-10 bgd-10 nacd-15

(CPFA)

CPFD

(CPTA)

CPTD

(CROD)

CROA

(CRPD)

CRPA

Network ACD Countdown Denied

Network ACD Countdown Allowed

Only allowed on ACD agent telephones.

Forced Camp-On from another set Allowed

Forced Camp-On from another set Denied

Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed.

CPTA is the default for VCE TNs.

Forced Camp-On to another set Denied

Calling Line Restriction Override Denied

Calling Line Restriction Override Allowed

Corporate Directory Denied

Corporate Directory Allowed

Only applies for M3903 and M3904 units.

scmp-15 scmp-15 arie-25

154 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(DAPA)

DAPD

Comment

Display Access Prefix Allowed

Display Access Prefix Denied

(DDGA)

DDGD

(DELD)

DELA

(DNAA)

DNAD

Pack/Rel

isdn-24

DN Display on other set Allowed

DN Display on other set Denied dpd-21

Dealer Denied

Dealer Allowed

Must have On-Hold On Loudspeaker (OHOL) package 196.

ohol-20

DN of the key that makes the call used in ANI messages.

Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route ANDN used as

DN in ANI messages

Must have Commonwealth of Independent

States Trunk Interface (CIST) package 221.

cist-21

(DNDD)

DNDA

(DNDY)

DNDN

(DNO3)

DNO1

DNO2

Dialed Name Display Denied

Dialed Name Display Allowed

DNDA allows the display of the originally dialed

DN's names on redirected calls. Name display applies to M2317, M3000 or Meridian Modular telephones with displays.

Must have Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95. Must also have CLS = CNDA. CLS is not DTA.

cpnd-13

Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification without called party's number and name notification.

qsig ss-23

Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification Option without notification.

Diversion Notification Option without divertedto party's number and name.

qsig ss-23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 155

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

(DOS)

AOS

Comment

ACD Supervisory Set Denied observation of other supervisory sets

ACD Supervisory Set Allowed observation of other supervisory sets

Must have CLS = SPV.

(DPUD)

DPUA

(DRDD)

DRDA

(DRG1)

DRG2

DRG3

DRG4

DRG3

DRG4

(DSX)

DSI

DVLA

DVLD

(ELD)

DN Pickup Denied

DN Pickup Allowed

Pack/Rel

acdb-1 dcp-12

Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number

Denied.

Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number

Allowed.

Digital telephone distinctive ringing

High fast tone, frequency 667 Hz/500 Hz, warble rate 10.4 Hz

High slow tone, frequency 667 Hz/ 500 Hz, warble rate 2.6 Hz

Low fast tone, frequency 333 Hz/ 250 Hz, warble rate 10.4 Hz

Low slow tone, frequency 333 Hz/ 250 Hz, warble rate 2.6 Hz

DRG3 and DRG4 distinctive ringing for M2006 and M2008 telephones are different.

Low fast tone, frequency 1600/ 2000 Hz, warble rate 10.0 Hz

Low slow tone, frequency 1600/ 2000 Hz, warble rate 2.5 Hz edrg-24 drng-7

Data Service access or IS Server TN Denied cls-8

Data Service access or IS Server TN Allowed

CLS is automatically set to DTA.

Default Virtual Office Logout Allowed

Default Virtual Office Logout Denied (default)

(IP Phone in Virtual Office logout state by default. Can only be used for Virtual Office login)

Erase lists Denied basic-7.00

basic-7.00

basic-25.4

156 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ELA

Comment

Erase lists Allowed

(ELMA)

ELMD

(EXR0)

EXR1

EXR2

EXR3

EXR4

Pack/Rel

Early media Allowed

Early media Denied basic-6.50

Executive Distinctive Ringing Off (0)

Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 1

Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 2

Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 3

Executive Distinctive Ringing Tone 4

The digit indicates which of the four distinctive ringing tones and cadences defined in LD 56 is to be used. Executive Distinctive Ringing

(EDRG) package 185 is required. Must have

(DRDD) class of service.

edrg-16

(FBD)

FBA

(FDSD)

FDSA

(FICD)

FICA

(FITD)

FITA

(FLXD)

FLXA

Call Forward Busy Denied

Call Forward Busy Allowed

This feature sends DID calls encountering a busy condition to the attendant. Call Forward

Busy should have Hunting and Call Waiting denied, CLS = HTD and CWD, because

Hunting and Call Waiting take precedence over

FBA.

basic-1 ponw-25.4

Force Disconnect Denied

Force Disconnect Allowed

Forward Intercom Calls Denied

Forward Intercom Calls Allowed basic-21

Flexible Incoming Tones Denied

Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed

For Digital sets OPT must be DBA in LD 15.

basic-14

Flexible voice/data Denied

Flexible voice/data Allowed

FLXA is only allowed for Aries sets.

By entering FLXA, you may configure dynamic voice/data TNs by assigning VCE to the upper basic-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 157

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

(FND)

FNA

(FRA)

FRU

FRD

(FRN)

Response Comment

TN (unit 16-31) and DTA to the lower TN (unit

0-15). You also have the option of designating a SCR key as DTM (data mode).

Warning: If connecting the Aries set only to the

TCM loop, this option should not be specified.

External equipment which can use this capability should be connected.

Warning: When changing from CLS DTA to

CLS VCE, CLS WTA should also be assigned to avoid conflict with CLS CPTA. CLS CPTA is the default for VCE TNs.

ENG

(FTTC)

Call Forward No Answer Denied

Call Forward No Answer Allowed

Flexible Registration Allowed

Flexible Registration Upgrade

Flexible Registration Denied

French language display

English language display

For M2317 alphanumeric display sets.

FTTR

FTTU

Pack/Rel

basic-1 dlt2-12

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Conditional allows trunk to trunk connections for supervised Conference.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted denies trunk to trunk connections for Transfer and unsupervised Conference.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Unrestricted allows trunk to trunk connections for both Conference and Transfer.

basic-23

Flexible Services Port fxs-25 FXSP

(GPUD)

GPUA

(GRLD)

GRLA

Group Pickup Denied

Group Pickup Allowed

Group Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero, RNPG = 0.

dcp-12

Group Listening Denied

Group Listening Allowed basic-24

158 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

For M3902, M3903, M3904 sets.

(HBTD)

HBTA

(HFD)

HFA

Hunt By Call Type Denied

Hunt By Call Type Allowed

Pack/Rel

basic-10

Handsfree Denied

Handsfree Allowed

Available for M2008, M2616, M3902, M3903,

M3904, all IP Phones (except IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 1110), and IP SoftPhone 2050 telephones. Handsfree capability on all other telephones is a function of the hardware and does not require HFA Class of Service to operate.

ACD agent digital telephones and IP Phones

(except IP Phone 2001 and IP Phone 1110) must have CLS=HFA.

Available for IP Phones 1210, 1220, and 1230

(assigned by default).

arie-14 basic-5.50

(HSPD)

HSPA

(HTD)

HTA

(ICDD)

ICDA

(ICRD)

ICRA

Hospitality Denied, used for Hospitality

Management

HSPD is for administration sets.

Hospitality Allowed, used for Hospitality

Management

HSPA is for room sets. For HSPA, you must also enter CLS = CCSA and CLS = MRA. HSPA

CLS cannot be entered for a set with transfer or conference capability. Prime DN must be single appearance, single call ringing or nonringing.

hvs-16 basic-1 Hunting Denied

Hunting Allowed

Internal Call Detail Recording Denied

Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed

IP Phone Call Recording Denied

IP Phone Call Recording Allowed icdr-10 basic-4.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 159

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

(IMD)

IMA

Comment

Integrated Messaging Service Attendant

Denied

Integrated Messaging Service Attendant

Allowed

(IPND)

IPNA

(IRD)

IRA

(KEM4)

(LLCN)

LLC1

LLC2

LLC3

(LMPN)

LMPX

Intercept Position Denied

Intercept Position Allowed

Incoming Ringing Line Preference Denied

Incoming Ringing Line Preference Allowed

Pack/Rel

ims-2 icp-10 lsel-4

IP Phone 1200 Series Key Expansion Module

Allows the definition of extra function keys on

IP Phone 1200 Series KEMs attached to IP

Phones 1220 and 1230.

Only applicable to IP Phones 1220 and 1230.

Assigned by default and can not be changed.

basic-5.50

llc-10 Line Load Control off

Class 1

Class 2

Class 3

Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN

Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN and non-PDNs vmba-24

(LND)

LNA

(LPR)

HPR

(LVXD)

LVXA

Last Number Redial Denied

Last Number Redial Allowed

Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15.

lnr-8

Low Priority Station

High Priority Station

High Priority places this set or trunk at the top of the dial tone queue.

povr-16

LOGIVOX Class of Service Denied

LOGIVOX Class of Service Allowed supp-10

160 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MCBY

MCBN

Comment

Set linked to a MICB line card.

Set linked to a non-MICB line card.

MCDA

(MCDD)

(MCTD)

MCTA

(MIND)

MINA

MMA

(MOAD)

MOAA

(MRD)

MRA

(MSID)

MSIA

(MSNV)

Microsoft Converged Desktop Allowed.

Package MS_CONV (408) is required for

MCDA.

Microsoft Converged Desktop Denied

Malicious Call Trace Denied

Malicious Call Trace Allowed

The TRC key must be removed before changing MCTA to MCTD. MCT is applied on a

TN basis.

mct-10 mr-15 Message Intercept Denied

Message Intercept Allowed

Multimedia Allowed

Mute on Answer Denied

Mute on Answer Allowed ngen-24 fxs-25

Message Registration Denied

Message Registration Allowed

Make Set Busy Improvement Denied

Make Set Busy Improvement Allowed

Pack/Rel

basic-25 mr-10 msb-24

MSBT

MSAW

(MTD)

MTA

Media Security Never: Default setting for all users. Implies that there is no attempt to secure either incoming or outgoing calls.

Media Security Best Effort, Best effort security is attempted for both call originations and terminations.

Media Security Always: strict security option, no incoming or outgoing calls are completed without encryption.

basic-5.00

Maintenance Telephone Denied

Maintenance Telephone Allowed basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 161

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

MUTA

MUTD

(MWD)

MWA

MWTA

MWTD

Comment

Mute key functionality allowed on IP Phone

(default)

Mute key functionality denied on IP Phone

(these are applicable only to IP phones with a

Mute key)

Message Waiting Denied

Message Waiting Allowed

If CLS = MWA and there is no Message Waiting

Key (MWK) defined, then the red Message

Waiting LED lights to indicate Message Waiting notification.

Message Waiting Tone allowed

Message Waiting Tone denied (default)

(applicable for IP Phones only)

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

basic-7.00

mwc-1 basic-7.00

basic-7.00

basic-21 (NAID)

NAIA

(NAMA)

NAMD

No Answer Indication Denied

No Answer Indication Allowed

Name Display on other set Allowed

Name Display on other set Denied dpd-21

(NOVD)

NOVA

(NID)

NIA

(NRCD)

NRCA

(NROD)

NROA

(NRWD)

Network Override/Breakin Denied

Network Override/Breakin Allowed pomw-25.4

Non-ringing Incoming Line Preference Denied lsel-4

Non-ringing Incoming Line Preference Allowed

Night Restriction for Forced Campon Denied povr-16

Night Restriction for Forced Campon Allowed

If Night Restriction is allowed, then Forced

Campon for this set is allowed during Night

Service only.

Night Restriction for Priority Override Denied povr-16

Night Restriction for Priority Override Allowed

If Night Restriction is allowed then Priority

Override for this set is allowed during Night

Service only.

Night Restriction for Call Waiting Denied povr-16

162 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NRWA

Comment

Night Restriction for Call Waiting Allowed

If Night Restriction is allowed Call Waiting for this set is permitted during Night Service only.

(OBPD)

OBPA

(OCBD)

OCBA

(OLD)

OLA

(ONDD)

ONDA

(OUSD)

OUSA

OKCH

Observe Password Disabled

Observe Password Allowed

Outgoing Call Barring Denied

Outgoing Call Barring Allowed

Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 and New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) package 49 are required.

Outgoing Line Preference Denied

Outgoing Line Preference Allowed

One Number Delivery Denied for a portable

One Number Delivery Allowed for a portable

(PKCH)

(PCWD)

Pack/Rel

oas-3.0

ccb-21 lsel-4 basic-22

Observe using SCL Denied

Observe using SCL Allowed oas-3.0

Originating Key DN of ACD agent set is charged for a call. Dialing from non prime key:

When an external call is set up from a digital set with multiple DNs programmed using any key other than the Prime DN key the Meridian 1 outputs a CDR N-record at the end of the call.

The ORIG-ID field of the N-record holds the value of the Prime Key DN.

Enhancement: A new class-of-service (CLS) is provided for digital sets. When the CLS is

OKCH then the ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the actual originating DN.

Prime key DN of ACD agent set is charged for the call. When the CLS is PKCH then the

ORIG-ID field of the N-record will contain the

Prime DN. PKCH is the default setting.

Note:

Calls from an ordinary set are not affected by this CLS.

Deny Precedence Call Waiting.

atvn

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 163

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

PCWA

Comment

Allow Precedence Call Waiting.

Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.

Requires PRMA class of service.

(PGND)

PGNA

(PHTD)

PHTA

Pack/Rel

Deny PAGENET access

Allow PAGENET access

PGND/A allowed if PAGENET package 307 is equipped.

pagenet-22

Deny Precedence Hunting

Allow Precedence Hunting

Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.

Requires HTA and PRMA class of service.

atvn

(PRMD)

PRMA

(POD)

POA

(PRSD)

PRSA

(PUD)

PUA

(RBDD)

Deny Preemption

Allow Preemption

Requires Station Loop Preemption (SLP) package.

Requires Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) class of service.

atvn basic-5 Privacy Override Denied

Privacy Override Allowed

The Privacy Optional feature is used with multiple appearance DNs.

Priority Call Pickup Denied

Priority Call Pickup Allowed povr-15

Call Pickup Denied

Call Pickup Allowed

Default changes to PUA if Ringing Number

Pickup Group (RNPG) is defined. Call Pickup is not allowed on telephones in group zero or

RNPG = 0.

grp-1

Redirection By Day Denied basic-24

164 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

RBDA

Comment

Redirection By Day Allowed

(RCC)

UCC

(RBHD)

RBHA

(RCBD)

RCBA

(RDLA)

RDLD

(RECD)

RECA

(RLFD)

RLFA

(RMMD)

RMMA

RMMO

Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls

Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls

Redirection By Holiday Denied

Redirection By Holiday Allowed

Recall to Boss Denied

Recall to Boss Allowed

Automatic Redial Allowed

Automatic Redial Denied

Call Recording Denied

Call Recording Allowed

Reversed Lamp Flash Denied

Reversed Lamp Flash Allowed

LOGIVOX must be assigned RLFA.

Pack/Rel

fca-10 basic-24 bfs-24 ardl-22 basic-7.00

supp-10

Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied

Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed

Allow Remote Monitoring of Messages and to

Override, if it is being already monitored vmba-24

(RTDD)

RTDA

(SBMD)

SBMA

(SFD)

SFA

(SMWD)

SMWA

Call Redirection by Time of day denied

Call Redirection by Time of day allowed

Set-based Music on Hold denied

Set-based Music on Hold allowed basic-22 basic-7.00

basic-7.00

basic-10 Second level CFNA Denied

Second level CFNA Allowed

SFA requires the FNA Class of Service.

Extended Message Waiting Indication Denied mw-24

Extended Message Waiting Indication Allowed

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 165

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Only applies for M3903, M3904 and M3905 units.

(STSD)

STSA

(SWD)

SWA

Set-to-Set Messaging Denied

Set-to-Set Messaging Allowed

Only applies for M3903 and M3904 units.

Pack/Rel

arie-25

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed

A Call Waiting key or CWT must be defined.

Must have CLS = HTD because hunting takes precedence.

basic-8

(TEND)

TENA

(T87D)

T87A

(ULAD)

ULAA

(UDI)

RDI

(USMD)

USMA

(USRD)

USRA

(VOLA)

Tenant Service Denied

Tenant Service Allowed

Deny Remote Call Control tens-7 ms_conv-4.5

0

Allow Remote Call Control

Class of Service ZBDV and T87A are mutually exclusive with Converged Office.

Deny access to Set Based Administration

Allow access to Set Based Administration

Must have Set Based Administration

(ADMINSET) package 256.

Station is (not) restricted from receiving DID calls.

Station is restricted from receiving DID calls.

adminset-21 supp-10

Meridian 911 position denied

Meridian 911 position allowed

Must have Meridian 911 (M911) package 224.

m911-19 uscr-19 User Selectable Call Redirection Denied

User Selectable Call Redirection Allowed

Allow Virtual Office operation from this TN

For CS 1000S sbo-2

166 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

VOLD

Comment

Deny Virtual Office operation from this TN

For CS 1000S

(VOUD)

VOUA

Pack/Rel

sbo-2

Deny Virtual Office login onto this TN using other phone (destination of Virtual Office login)

Allow Virtual Office login onto this TN using other phone (destination of Virtual Office login) sbo-2 sbo-2

(VCE)

DTA

Voice Terminal

Data Terminal

VCE is used for voice TNs. DTA is used for data.

For 8 port Digital Line Cards, VCE for units 0-7 and DTA for units 8-15.

For 16 port Digital Line Cards, VCE for units

0-15 and DTA for units 16-31.

For 24 port Digital Line Card, VCE for units 0-23 and DTA is for units 24-31.

basic-5

CPND

(VMD)

VMA

(WTA)

WTD

(XHD)

XHA

NEW

OUT

CHG

Note:

24 port Digital Line Card not supported on small system and CS 1000S.

Server Voice Messaging Denied

Server Voice Messaging Allowed

Warning Tone Allowed

Warning Tone Denied

Exclusive Hold Denied

Exclusive Hold Allowed cls-8 basic-1 dhld-4

Calling Party Name Display

New CPND entry

Delete CPND entry

Change CPND entry

Must have Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 and CPND data block defined in

LD 95.

cpnd-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 167

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

CPND_LANG

Response

(ROM)

KAT

Comment

Calling Party Name Display Language

Roman

Katakana

CSDN x..x

CTYP (XDLC)

EDLC

Pack/Rel

cpnd-19

Converged Service Directory Number

Converged Desktop Service

Control Directory Number (CDN) configured in

LD 23

CSDN is only prompted if CLS is defined as

ZBDV or ZBDO.

NULL response is not accepted.

sip-4.00

Card type is 16 port DLC

Card type is 24 port DLCVCE/DTA

EDLC not supported on Small Systems and CS

1000S.

basic-25

CUST xx

DANI

DBA

(NO) YES

(0)-1

Customer number associated with this set as defined in LD 15 basic-1

The CLID or ANI information of the originating caller is displayed on the terminating telephone during transfer or conference. If set to No, there is no change and the CLID information of the transferring telephone is displayed on the terminating telephone.

basic-5.00

Display-Based Accessory arie-25

DCD

DCFW

(ON)

OFF x...x

Note:

The Key-Based Accessory (KBA) and

Display-Based Accessory (DBA) are mutually exclusive.

Dynamic Carrier Detect

Enable Dynamic CD

Carrier Detect starts as inactive and follows the state of the call. With DAC, DCD is only prompted if TYPE = R232.

arie-14

Default Call Forward DN. Prompted for Virtual

Terminals only.

arie-25

168 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

x...x = Default Call Forward DN where calls are to be forwarded. Maximum of 31 digits allowed.

Precede with X to remove.

DELETE_VMB

(YES)

DEM

DES

NO

(DCE)

DTE d...d

Pack/Rel

Delete Voice Mailbox

Remove the Voice Mailbox from the Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail

Remove the Voice Mailbox from the Meridian 1

DELETE_VMB is prompted if REQ = OUT and

TN has an associated Voice Mailbox.

DELETE_VMB is allowed if the DN is a single appearance or multiple appearance DN on a single TN.

vmba-19 dac-16 Data Equipment Mode. Prompted if TYPE =

R232.

Data Carrier Equipment

Data Terminal Equipment

ODAS Station Designator

Enter a 1-6 alphanumeric character representing an Office Data Administration

System (ODAS) Station Designator.

odas-1

DGRP (1)-5 Device Group

DGRP designates an AST BCS set into a specific device group. It is recommended that an AST phantom (BCS) TN should be a nondisplay BCS set. An AST BCS set of a phantom loop cannot be an ACD set.

basic-20 cpnd-19 DISPLAY_FMT

(FIRST,LAST)

Display Format for CPND name can be input as FIRST

To view names as John Doe

LAST,FIRST can be input as LAST

To view names as Doe John

DLNG Language preference for the DAC prompts.

dac-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 169

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

DN

Response

(ENG)

FRN

Comment

English

French

Prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422.

x..x yyyy

DNAN (DNAA)

DNAD

Pack/Rel

Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry

(yyyy)

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. DN is not prompted for Small System and

CS 1000S Model sets or if DIG is defined.

Range for CLID table entry is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)] basic-12

Customer Attendant DN (ATDN) + Attendant

Number (ANUM) are used as ANI DN in 3WT

ANI messages.

ANDN of outgoing 3WT route is used as ANI

DN in 3WT ANI messages.

Prompted with Commonwealth of Independent

States (CIST) package 221.

cist-21

DNDR (0)-120

DNRI

DNRO

DSPL

DSPT

DTAO

(0)-4

(0)-4

(0)-500

(0)-2

Delay Value in seconds.

A DNDR value of 0 disables this feature. If the

DNDR value is an odd number, then it is incremented to the next even number.

basic-21

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Incoming calls

The index NDR1-4 BCS is defined in LD 56 edrg-24

Distinctive Number Ringing index for Outgoing calls

The index NDR1-4 BCS is defined in LD 56 edrg-24

Length of portable display (in characters).

basic-22

Type of portable display: 0 = display is numeric

1 = display is alphabetic 2 = display is alphanumeric basic-22

Data Option, not prompted if TYPE = MCU.

arie-18

170 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DTMK

Response

(MPDA)

MCA

Comment

Software for Meridian Programmable Data

Adapter

Software for Meridian Communications

Adapter

The DTAO prompt determines the downloaded data, system, and operating parameters.

x...x

<CR>

Pack/Rel

Data Mode Key number for a dynamic voice/ data TN.

DTMK is prompted if the TN has both CLS =

VCE and CLS = FLXA. There can be only one data mode key per TN. Any response to DTMK overwrites a previous setting.

When changing from CLS = DTA to CLS = VCE,

CLS = WTA should also be assigned to avoid conflict with CLS = CPTA.

Where x...x = number of the SCR/SCN key to be designated as the data mode key. This cannot be key 00.

No data mode key. TN is not a dynamic voice/ data TN.

basic-22

DTR

DUP

ECHG

(OFF)

ON

(FULL)

HALF

(NO) YES

Data Terminal Ready settings

Dynamic DTR

Forced DTR, force the data port to always be ready for transmission.

With the Data Access Card (DAC). DTR is prompted if TYPE = R232.

arie-14 arie-14 Full Duplex

Half Duplex

Easy Change

This allows change to any prompt in this program without having to <CR> through all unrelated prompts. ECHG is prompted when

REQ = CHG.

basic-12

ECL

EFD

(0)-65535 x...x

Home Emergency Call List

Flexible CFNA DN for External calls optf-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 171

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

EHT

ELKP

ERL

Response Comment

EFD is the DN to which external calls are routed when there is no answer, if one of the following customer options is defined in LD 15:

• FNAD = FDN

• FNAT = FDN

• FNAL = FDN

A Group Hunt DN can be entered.

The DN can be up to 4 digits without Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150, or

13 digits with DNXP package 150.

Call Forward by Call Type Allowed and Forward

No Answer must be defined as the Class of

Service (CLS = CFTA and FNA). LDNs,

DLDNs, and Prime DNs is accepted as valid input.

x...x

000 x...x

Pack/Rel

External Hunt DN

EHT is the DN hunted for by external busy calls when: basic-10

• Class of Service is Call Forward by Call Type

Allowed (CFTA) and Hunting Allowed (HTA)

• the LD 15 prompt FNAD, FNAT, or FNAL =

HNT

A Group Hunt DN can be entered.

This DN can be up to 4 digits without Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 or 13 digits with DNXP package 150.

LDNs, DLDNs, and Prime DNs are accepted as valid input. To remove EFD or EHT DNs, change CFTA Class of Service to CFTD.

Prompted when CFTA is defined.

Short Hunt for external calls

Electronic Lock Password. Length is 1-15 digits ffc-15

<CR>

0-65535

Current Emergency Response Location

Enter no value to make this TN Auto Update..

Enter a value to statically configure this TN

(Manual Update).

basic-5.00

172 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

X

Response Comment

Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.

FCAR

FCTB

FDN

(NO)

YES x...x

Pack/Rel

Forced Charge Account Restricted

Must use Forced Charge Account

Restricted from using Forced Charge Account

Prompted if FCAF = YES in LD 15 and CLS =

TLD, CUN or CTD.

chg-1

Feature Control Bitmap

Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature

Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of

SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN.

A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

Flexible CFNA DN

FDN is used for internal calls, if CLS is CFTA and FNA. FDN is used for all calls if CLS is

CFTD and FNA.

FDN can be up to 4 digits without Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 or 13 digits with DNXP package 150.

A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. Precede with X to delete.

FDN requires CLS = MWA or FNA. FDN is only used if one or more of the following customer options are defined in LD 15: optf-1

• FNAD = FDN

• FNAT = FDN

• FNAL = FDN

FSVC (0)-9 Forced Out-of-Service Off-Hook Alarm

Security DN index.

When Forced Out-of-Service condition occurs on a digital telephone with Alarm Security

Allowed (ASCA) Class of Service, the telephone is intercepted to a predefined DN.

Enter the index number (0)-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompts ODN 0-9. ODN is the basic-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 173

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

HDLC

HMDN

HOT

HUNT

Response Comment

acronym for Change Off-Hook Alarm Security

Directory Number options (OHAS DN).

(NO) YES x...x

Pack/Rel

High Level Data Link Control

Prompted if V25 = YES.

arie-18

Home Directory number; a NARS DN up to 13 digits long. HMDN consists of an access code and other codes, depending on the dialing plan used. This prompt is used only if VSIT is YES.

MSMN-370

(OFF)

ON x...x

000

Hotline

Hotline is inactive for data port.

Enables Hotline for data port.

If HOT = ON, Auto Baud is forced OFF for the

Data Access Card.

arie-14

Hunt DN of next station in hunt chain

This Hunt DN can be up to 4 digits without

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150 or 13 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to delete.

Short Hunting

A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.

AControl Directory Number (CDN) can be defined as a Hunt DN for both physical and phantom 500/2500 sets. When a CDN is configured in this way, a call which comes to a busy DN can be Hunting or Call Forward Busy to a CDN.

With Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type, this is the Hunt DN for: basic-10

• internal calls if CLS = CFTA, or

• for all busy calls if CLS = CFTD

IAPG 0-9 (0)-15 Meridian Link Unsolicited Status Message

(USM) group

IAPG assigns AST DNs to a status message group defined in LD 15. These groups determine which status messages are sent for aml-16

174 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ICT

INT

ITEM

Response Comment

an AST set. The default Group 0 sends no messages, while Group 1 sends all messages.

0-<NIPN>

ON

(OFF)

Pack/Rel

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number icp-16

Number of Intercept Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.

arie-14 Meridian 1/SL-100 Interworking

Enable Meridian 1 and SL-100 interworking

Do not enable Meridian 1 and SL-100 interworking aaaa yyy

ITNA

KBA

<CR>

(NO)

YES

(0)

1

Respond with the desired program mnemonic

(aaaa) and its new value (yyy).

ITEM is reprompted until only a <CR> is entered. For example:

REQ CHG

TYPE SL1

TN lll ss cc uu

ECHG YES

ITEM KEY 07 ADL

KEY <CR> (KEY is prompted until <CR> is entered.)

ITEM <CR>

REQ

Return to REQ basic-12

Idle TN for the Third Party Application.

Do not identify an Associated Set (AST) to be used only by Third Party Application

Identify an Associated Set (AST) to be used only by Third Party Application basic-20

Key-Based Accessory for M3904 and M3905 which support key-based modules.

Configure keys up to and including 31

Configure keys up to and including 53 basic-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 175

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

2

Response Comment

Configure keys up to and including 75

KBD

(ON)

OFF

KEEP_MSGS

Pack/Rel

Keyboard Dialing Option

Enable Keyboard Dialing for data port

Enables Hayes mode dac-16

Preserve Meridian Mail Messages and current password vmba-19

(NO) YES

KEM (0)-4 Number of IP Phone Key Expansion Modules

(KEM) to configure.

basic-4.00

Note:

You can only configure more than 2 KEMs for IP Phones 1220 and 1230.

KEMOFST basic-4.00

<KEM><KeyOffset>

Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that do not support Paging and have a specific number of IP Phone KEMs configured.

On IP Phone 2002, prompted if 1 KEM is configured and

<CR>

is entered at the

KEY

prompt.

Where:

• KEM = 1

• KeyOffset = 0-23

On IP Phone 2004, prompted if 2 KEMs are configured and

<CR>

is entered at the

KEY

prompt.

Where:

• KEM = 1-2

• KeyOffset = 0-23

On IP Phone 1220, prompted if 1 to 4 KEMs are configured and

<CR>

is entered at the

KEY

prompt.

Where:

• KEM = 1-4

• KeyOffset = 0-11 basic-5.50

176 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

KEY

Response Comment

On IP Phone 1230, prompted if 3 or 4 KEMs are configured and

<CR>

is entered at the

KEY

prompt.

Where:

• KEM = 1-4

• KeyOffset = 0-11

Pack/Rel

basic-5.50

Once values are entered for KEM and

KeyOffset, the

KEY xx

prompt is presented for assignment of a function to the calculated KEM key. The

xx

is replaced with the calculated

KEM key number. When

<CR>

is entered after the assignment of a function to the KEM key, the

KEMOFST

prompt is presented again. This loop continues until a

<CR>

is entered at the

KEMOFST

prompt.

basic-1 xx aaa yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Telephone function key assignments.

Key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone

Note:

The just a

KEY

prompt is presented in a loop until

<CR>

is entered at the prompt.

Where:

• xx = entered IP Phone key number or calculated IP Phone KEM key number

Type xx NUL to remove a calling option or feature already assigned to a key.

• aaa = key name or function

• yyyy = additional information required for the key

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

• cccc or D = deals specifically with the Calling

Line identification feature.

Where:

- cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N

= the value entered at the SIZE prompt in

LD 15, minus 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 177

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Note:

You can only specify a value for cccc if aaa = ACD, HOT d, HOT L, MCN, MCR,

PVN, PVR, SCN or SCR.

- When the character "D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with a CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found

DN key is used.

Note:

The position of the (cccc or D) field varies depending on the key name or function.

The cccc and D parameters are mutually exclusive.

Some data ports require specific key assignments. Refer to the Meridian Data

Services NTPs for information regarding these requirements.

Note:

Type xx NUL to remove a calling option or feature already assigned to a key.

Key number limits that can be assigned are as follows:

0-7 for Meridian Communications Adapter

(MCA)

0-5 for M2006

0-7 for M2008

0-59 for M2616, varies with number of add-on modules

If either the Meridian Programmable Data

Adapter (MPDA) or the Display Module is equipped, then key 7 on sets M2008, M2216, and M2616 sets and key 5 on set M2006 become Program keys which cannot be used as function keys.

Any printout of the TN block does not show key

7 because it is a local function key.

On the M2616, if CLS = HFA, key 15 on the voice TN defaults to the Handsfree key. No other feature assignment is accepted.

Pack/Rel

178 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Primary and secondary data DNs must be unique.

A station SCR, SCN, MCR, or MCN DN must be removed as a member from all Group Hunt lists before the DN can be modified.

On the M3903, keys 4-15 are blocked. No feature assignment is accepted for keys 2-15.

On the M3903, M3904, and M3905, keys 29-31 are reserved. No feature assignment is accepted for keys 29-31 other than NUL.

On M3904, no feature assignment is accepted for keys 12-15.

On M3905, the craftsperson can assign NUL or a server application on key 5. On key 6, the craftsperson can assign NUL or a local application.

On M3905, the craftsperson can assign NUL or the program key on key 7.

On M3905, the craftsperson can assign AAG,

AMG, ASP,DWC, EMR, MSB, or NRD on keys

8-11. Other features are blocked.

Ranges of key numbers that can be assigned are as follows:

Pack/Rel

basic-24 basic-4.00

On IP Phone 1130, key numbers 0-15 and

27-28.

On IP Phone 2002, key numbers 0-79, varying with value specified at the

KEM

prompt.

• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31

• if KEM 1, key range = 0-55

• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79

On IP Phone 2004, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the

KEM

prompt.

• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31

• if KEM 1, key range = 0-79 (Paging feature)

• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79 (no Paging feature)

On IP Phones 1210/1220/1230, key number range is as follows: basic-5.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 179

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

On IP Phone 1210, key numbers 0-31.

On IP Phone 1220, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the

KEM

prompt.

• if KEM = 0, key range = 0-31

• if KEM = 1. key range = 0-43

• if KEM = 2, key range = 0-55

• if KEM = 3. key range = 0-67

• if KEM = 4, key range = 0-79

On IP Phones 1230, key numbers 0-79, varying with the value specified at the

KEM

prompt.

• if KEM 0, key range = 0-31

• if KEM 1, key range = 0-55 (Paging feature)

• if KEM 2, key range = 0-79 (Paging feature)

• if KEM 3, key range = 0-67 (no Paging feature)

• if KEM 4, key range = 0-79 (no Paging feature)

On IP Phones 1210/1220/1230, configuration guidelines for keys are as follows:

• key 0 is used for the primary DN

• keys 1-15 are used for programmable feature keys

These keys can be programmed with any DN or feature, except Message Waiting (key 16) and those DNs or features configured on keys 17-26 (soft keys)

• key 16 is reserved for the Message Waiting

(MWK) feature

• keys 17-26 are reserved for soft keys

• keys 27-30 are reserved, except on an IP

Phone 1230 that has 20 feature keys, where they are the last 4 programmable feature keys.

• key 31 is reserved

On IP Phone 1210, Key 0 is the only programmable feature key. It is configured with the primary DN.

Pack/Rel

180 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

On IP Phone 1220, the number of programmable feature keys depends on the number of KEMs configured:

• if KEM = 0, keys 1-3

• if KEM = 1, keys 1-3 and 32-43

• if KEM = 2, keys 1-3 and 32-55

• if KEM = 3, keys 1-3 and 32-67

• if KEM = 4, keys 1-3 and 32-79

On IP Phone 1230, the number of programmable feature keys depends on the number of KEMs configured:

• if KEM = 0, keys 1-15 and 27-30

• if KEM = 1, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-55

(Paging feature)

• if KEM = 2, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-79

(Paging feature)

• if KEM = 3, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-67 (no

Paging feature)

• if KEM = 4, keys 1-15, 27-30, and 32-79 (no

Paging feature)

Pack/Rel

xx AAG xx AAK

ACD Answer Agent key

Must have CLS = SPV.

acdb-1

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.

basic-24

Automatic Answerback key

AAA CLS and AAK key cannot be assigned to the same telephone. Only one type of

Automatic Answerback is allowed. M2616 telephone must have CLS = HFA.

aab-1 xx ACD yyyy (cccc or D) zzz bacd-1

Automatic Call Distribution key

Where:

• xx = key number (must be key 0)

• yyyy = ACD DN or Message Center DN bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 181

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys, from key 0, up to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zzzz = agent's position ID yyyy and zzzz can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150. Only ACD DN for Small

System and CS 1000S Model set.

Pack/Rel

xx ACNT Activity Code entry key

This key must have an associated lamp and applies to ACD-D and ACD-MAX only. ADS data block must be configured in LD 23.

acdd-13 xx ADL yy z...z

Autodial key

Where:

• xx = key number

• yy = maximum length of the ADL DN. Valid entries are: 4, 8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Note that other values are rounded up to the next valid number.

• z...z = actual Autodial DN (this entry is optional) optf-1 xx AGT yyyy xx AMG bacd-1

ACD Agent status key

Where: yyyy = agent's ID. The agent ID number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Must have CLS = SPV.

ACD Answer Emergency call key

Must have CLS = SPV.

acdb-1

182 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

The Position ID of the ACD set cannot be changed when the ACD set is acquired as a

Human Agent.

Pack/Rel

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AMG basic-24 xx AO3 xx AO6

Three-Party Conference key

On the M3902 key number 4 is reserved for

AO3, AO6, TRN, or NUL

On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.

basic-1 basic-24 basic-24 basic-25

Six-Party Conference key

On the M3902 key number 4 is reserved for

AO3, AO6, TRN, NUL

On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key number 18 is reserved for AO3, AO6, or NUL.

basic-1 basic-24 basic-24 basic-25

Attendant Recall key basic-1 xx ARC xx ASP ACD Supervisor call key (must have CLS =

AGN)

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for NRD, MSB, AAG, AMG, DWC and ASP.

acdb-1 basic-24

ACD Call Waiting Time indication key supp-14 xx ATW xx AWC ACD Calls Waiting key

Must have CLS = AGN and Supervisor Position

ID or SPID must be configured.

bacd-1 xx BFS TN Busy Forward Status key

Where: TN = Terminal Number to be screened.

A Key cannot be assigned to a BRI set.

bfs-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 183

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

It is possible to configure the TN of the same set against the BFS key only if the Class of

Service is BFEA.

xx CA yy z...z

Combined No Hold Conference and Autodial key

Where:

• yy = maximum length of the CA DN. Valid entries are: 4, 8, 12, (16), 20, 24, 28, 31. Note that other values are rounded up to the next valid number.

• z...z = actual Autodial DN (this entry is optional) basic-14 xx CAS Centralized Attendant Service key casm-1 xx CFW yy z...z

Call Forward key

Where: yy = maximum length of the CFW DN

Valid entries for M2317 or M3000 sets are any integer in the range of (4)-23. For all other BCS type sets, you may enter any integer in the range of (4)-31.

optf-1

Note:

The default for M3900 series telephones is

(16).

Where: z...z = Call Forward DN or range of DNs where calls are to be forwarded (the target DN).

Must be key 11 for LOGIVOX telephones.

A Group Hunt DN can be entered. If CLS =

CFXD, the Call Forward number must be an internal DN.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 19 is reserved for CFW or NULL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key number 19 is reserved for CFW or NULL.

basic-24 basic-25 xx CH D yy z...z

basic-14

184 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Combined No Hold Conference and Direct

Hotline key

Where:

• yy = number of digits in target DN (1-31)

• z...z = target DN

Pack/Rel

xx CH L yyy Combined No Hold Conference and Hotline

List key

Where: yyy = 0-999 for Hotline list entry as defined in LD 18.

xx CHG basic-14

Charge account key

On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 25 is reserved for CHG or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key number 25 is reserved for CHG or NUL.

chg-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx CLT Configure Callers List key in context sensitive area, CLT/NUL are only options for key 27.

basic-25.4

xx COS xx CPN

Controlled Class of Service key ccos-7

Calling Party Number key

On the M3903, M3904, M3905 key number 26 is reserved for CPN or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key number 25 is reserved for CPN or NUL.

chg-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx CS yyyy Combined No Hold Conference and Speed Call key

Where: yyyy = Speed Call list number from

0-8190. Not available on M3000 telephones.

basic-14 xx CSD xx CWT xx DAG

Conferee Selectable Display key.

Call Waiting key

Only one CWT Key is allowed. Should have

CLS = HTD because Hunting takes precedence.

Display ACD Agents key basic-23 basic-1 bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 185

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

This key displays the status of ACD agents appearing on the supervisor's telephone. Must have CLS = SPV and ADD or DDS.

Pack/Rel

xx DIG yyyy zz R/V

Dial Intercom Group key

Where:

• yyyy = group number, from 0-2045.

• zz = member number from 0-99. The zz value cannot be equal to or share the first digit of a

2 digit number with the SPRE code. For example, if SPRE = 1, zz cannot be 1, 10,

11...19.

• R = Ring option

• V = Voice option

Must have maximum number of Dial Intercom

Groups DGRP defined in LD 15.

If any member in a group has a two-digit member number, then all members have a twodigit number. The system adds leading zeros to other entries.

Prompted with Dial Intercom (DI) package 21.

di-1 xx DPU Directed Call Pickup key

Key is optional, dial access code can be used if CLS = DPUA. Not available on M3000 telephones. This prompt appears with Directed

Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.

dcp-12 basic-15 xx DRC yyy DID Route Control key

Where: yyy = route number = 0-511 xx DSP Display key

This key must have an associated key/lamp pair.

ddsp-1 xx DWC yyyy bacd-19

ACD Supervisor Display Waiting Calls key

186 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Where: yyyy = ACD DN. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

A maximum of eight DWC keys can be assigned per queue on eight supervisors.

Agent sets can only have 1 SWC key for their own queue.

ACD agent telephones can support the display waiting calls key. Must have CLS = SPV and

ADD or DDS.

Pack/Rel

T The key can be used with supervisors and agents.

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.

basic-24 xx EMR ACD Emergency key (must have CLS = AGN) acdb-1

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.

basic-24 acdb-1 xx ENI yyyy ACD Enable Interflow key

Where: yyyy = DN. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Only one is allowed per ACD DN. Must have

CLS = SPV.

xx EOVR xx FDIS xx FLH xx FOV xx GHD xx GPU

Enhanced Override key

Force Disconnect Key

DSN Flash Key

DSN Flash Override Key povr-20 pomw-25.4

atvn atvn

Group Hunt Deactivation

A station user can toggle the PDN in and out of all groups of which that PDN is a member.

pldn-15

Group Call Pickup key

The key is optional because a dial access code can be used if CLS = GPUA. Not available on

M3000 telephones. Allowed with Directed Call

Pickup (DCP) package 115.

dcp-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 187

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

xx GRC yy Group Call key Where: yy = 0-63 for Group number as defined in LD 18

Pack/Rel

grp-1 xx HLD xx HNDO

Hold

Hand-off for a Mobile Extension user.

supp-10 mobx-5.50

xx HOT Direct entry for Hotline Model set key (Small

System and CS 1000S), Automatic termination

DN is eight digits hot-10 nn HOT D dd num DN m (cccc or D)

Two-way Hotline key

Where:

• dd = number of digits dialed

• num = target_number (terminating DN is a maximum of 31 digits)

• DN = two-way hotline DN

• m = one of the following Terminating Modes:

H = Hotline (default), N = Non-ringing, R =

Ringing, or V = Voice

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

hot-21 xx HOT D nn x...x

Direct entry for One-way Enhanced Hotline key

Where: hot-10

• nn = number of digits dialed

• x...x = Hotline terminating DN up to a 31 digit maximum xx HOT D nn x...x xxxx (cccc or D)

Direct entry for Two-way Enhanced Hotline key hot-10

188 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Where:

• nn = number of digits in Target DN

• x...x = Terminating DN up to a 31 digit maximum

• xxxx = optional two way Hotline DN. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

Pack/Rel

xx HOT I dd num m

Intercom key

Where:

• dd = number of digits dialed

• num = target_number (terminating DN max

31 digits)

• m = one of the following Terminating Modes:

V = Voice (default), N = Non-ringing, or R =

Ringing hot-21 xx HOT L bbb

One-way Hotline key

Where: bbb = Hotlline list entry = 0-999. The

Hotline list entry is defined in LD 18.

Note that the Hotline list NCOS overrides the set NCOS.

hot-10 xx HOT L bbb xxxx (cccc or D)

Two-way list entry for Enhanced Hotline key

Where: hot-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 189

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

• bbb = List entry = 0-999

• xxxx = Two-way Hotline DN. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys, from key 0, up to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

Hotline list entry is defined in LD 18.

Note that the Hotline list NCOS overrides set

NCOS.

xx HOT P nn yyyy

Target PCA DN

Where:

• nn = PCA DN length. Maximum length is

32.

• yyyy = the target DN

Pack/Rel

pca-398

Note:

PCA supports configuration of Key 0 and

Key 1.

xx HOT P nn yyyzzzz

Access Code to dial the mobile phone of the

Universal Extension client (UXTY = MOBX).

For UXTY = MOBX, key 1 is reserved for HOT

P functionality.

Where:

• nn = maximum number of digits for yyyzzzz

(HOT P DN)

• yyyzzzz = 1-32 digit number where:

- yyy = the trunk steering code, or access code, to dial into the mobile network.

The access code could be a NARS/BARS/

CDP access code, or a route access code.

mobx-5.50

190 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

- zzzz = the mobile phone DN

Pack/Rel

xx HOT U <UADN>

Access Code used to make and receive calls between the SIP client and the universal extension (UXTY = SIPL). The SIP Line

Gateway (SLG) application is the only entity that makes use of this key.

Where:

• xx = any key except 0 (key 0 is reserved for the Primary DN)

• <UADN> = a 1-7 digit number representing a

User Agent DN

If a User Agent prefix (UAPR) is provisioned in the Customer Data Block (CDB), after the primary DN (PDN) is configured on key 0, the system automatically generates a UADN

(PDN + UAPR) and displays it on the TTY.

You can enter <CR> to accept the systemgenerated UADN, or enter a different

UADN.

If a UAPR is not provisioned in the CDB, you must enter a UADN.

Note:

The UADN must conform to the customer's dialing plan.

sip_lines-6.0

0 xx ICF nn xxxx

Internal Call Forward key

Where: nn = Forward DN length. Valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.

Where: xxxx = Forward DN (this entry is optional)

An ICF key can be configured if Call Forward is icf-19 xx IMM

KY1 aaa

DSN Immedicate Key

Key 1 located far left, below dial pad.

Where: aaa = VUP (Volume Up) by default for

KY1. Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.

atvn

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 191

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

KY2 aaa

Comment

Key 2 located middle, below dial pad.

Where: aaa = VDN (Volume Down) by default for KY2. Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.

KY3 aaa

Pack/Rel

Key 3 located far right, below dial pad.

Where: aaa = HLD (Hold) by default for KY3.

Any function not requiring a lamp can be assigned. CLS must be LVXA.

supp-10 xx LNG xx LNK

M2317 Language Toggle key (No Language) dlt2-9

Where:

• xx = key 29

• LNG = Language Toggle enabled

• NUL = Remove Language Option

This feature allows set operator to set and reset language display, toggling between French and

English versions on the alphanumeric display.

Last Number Redial key

LNRS defines the Last Number Redial Size.

For LOGIVOX telephones, key 8 is defined by set firmware as the Last Number Redial key.

The key definition is optional, because the user can press the DN key twice to activate Last

Number Redial.

Must have OPT = LRA in LD 15 and CLS =

LNA.

Inr-8 xx LSPK yyyy

Loudspeaker key

Where: yyyy = associated loudspeaker DN or

SPEKABUS channel ohol-20 mwc-1 xx MCK Message Cancellation Key

This key should only be programmed on

Message Center sets.

xx MCN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Multiple Call Non-Ringing key basic-20

192 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

Where:

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. The DN cannot appear simultaneously on a PBX set DN or as an SCR DN or SCN DN.

Once the MCN key has been defined, MARP is prompted.

On the M3901 and M3902 MCN cannot be configured on keys 1-5. MCN, if it is configured, must be assigned to key 0.

basic-24 xx MCR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Multiple Call Ringing key

Where:

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. The DN cannot appear simultaneously on a PBX set DN or as a SCR Single Call or SCN

DN.

basic-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 193

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Once the MCR key has been defined MARP is prompted.

On the M3901 and M3902 MCR cannot be configured on keys 1-5. MCR, if it is configured, must be assigned to key 0.

Pack/Rel

basic-24 xx MIK mwc-1 xx MRK

Message Indication Key

This key should only be programmed on

Message Center sets.

Message Registration Key

Requires PPM/Message Registration (MR) package 101 and CLS = ADD or DDS.

mr-10 xx MSB Make Set Busy key

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.

msb-1 basic-24 xx MWK yyyy Message Waiting Key

Where: yyyy = DN.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. With the Network Message Service feature equipped, the NMS-DN can be up to 13 digits.

On the M3902, key 5 is reserved for MWK or

NUL. On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 16 is reserved for MWK or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key 16 is reserved for

MWK or NUL.

mwc-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx NHC xx NRD xx NSVC yyyy

No Hold Conference key basic-14

Not Ready key

AGN or SPV Class of Service must be assigned.

On the M3905 key numbers 8-11 are reserved for AAG, AMG, ASP, DWC, MSB and NRD.

bacd-1 basic-24 bacd-12

Night Service key (must have CLS = SPV)

194 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Where: yyyy = ACD DN associated with that

Night Service. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

xx NUL xx OBV

Removes function or feature from key

Observe ACD agent key (must have CLS =

OUSD)

Pack/Rel

basic-1 bacd-12 xx OBV yy..yy

Observe key with Speed Call List Number

(must have CLS = OUSD). Where: yy.yy = SCL number xx OSN xx OVB xx OVR xx PONW xx PRK xx PRS

On-Site Notification key.

Overflow Position Busy key

Override key

Priority Override/Breakin Networkwide key oas-3.0

esa-23 aop-1 optf-1 pomw-25.4

Call Park key

The Transfer (TRN), or Six-Party Conference

(A06) key plus a Dial Access code can be used instead of the Park key.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 21 is reserved for PRK or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key 21 is reserved for

PRK or NUL.

cprk-2 basic-24 basic-25

Privacy Release key

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 24 is reserved for PRS or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key 24 is reserved for

PRS or NUL.

basic-1 basic-24 basic-25 xx PRY DSN Priority Key xx PVN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Private Line Non-Ringing key atvn basic-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 195

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

Where:

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. Must have Private Line Directory Number

(PRDN) defined in LD 14.

On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for

PVN.

basic-24 xx PVR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Private Line Ringing key

Where: basic-20

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. Must have Private Line Directory Number

(PRDN) defined in LD 14.

On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for

PRV.

basic-24 xx RAG ACD Ring Agent key (must have CLS =SPV) acdb-1

196 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

xx RCK y z Ringing Change Key

Where:

• y = first key/lamp strip controlled by key =

(0)-6

• z = second key/lamp strip controlled by key =

0-(1)-6.

Only one ringing change key per set is permitted. Requires International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 and Ringing Change Key (RCK) package

193.

rck-15 xx RDL yy Redial stored number key

Where: yy = number of digits = 4, 8, 12, (16),

20, 23. Numbers between 5 and 22 are rounded up to the next valid number.

snr-3 xx RGA xx RLS

Ring Again key

Must be key 10 on LOGIVOX telephones.RANA can be activated if OPT =

RNA in LD 15. When OPT = RND in LD 15, all sets with the RGA key can only activate Ring

Again Busy.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 20 is reserved for RGA or NUL.

On the IP Phone, key 20 is reserved for RGA or NUL.

rga/optf-2

0basic-24 basic-25

Release key

Requires an SL1 phone. Key/lamp pair is not required. Must be KY3 on a LOGIVOX phone

(CLS=LVXA).

basic-1 xx RLT xx RMK xx RMWK xxxx [yyyy]

Configure Redial List key in context sensitive area, RLT/NUL are only options for key 28.

basic-25.4

Room Status Key

Remote Message Waiting indication key rms-10 mw-24

Where:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 197

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

• xx= key number

• xxxx = Message Center DN

• [yyyy] = DN to be monitored [optional]

Pack/Rel

xx RNP xx

RNP yyyy

Ringing Number Pickup key basic-1 supp-12

Where: yyyy = Ringing Number Pickup group number is optional with package 131 SUPP

International Supplementary Features.

The RNP key when programmed without a group number allows the user to pick up a call in the Ringing Number Pickup Group specified by the RNPG prompt. This prompt also controls the group of which the set is a member . When programmed with a group number the key is used to pickup calls for that specific group. This was introduced for the Centralized Multiple

Line Emulation feature.

Radio Paging key rpa-15 xx RPAG yyyy

Where: yyyy = Route Access Code

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) Trunk Steering

Codes (TSC) and Distant Steering Codes

(DSC) can be entered against yyyy.

xx SCC yyyy Speed Call Controller key

Where: yyyy = SCL list number 0-8190. SCL must be defined in LD 18.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.

optf-1 basic-24 xx SCN yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Single Call Non-Ringing key

Where:

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN basic-20

198 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

Pack/Rel

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. Once the SCN key has been defined,

MARP is prompted.

On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for

SCN.

basic-24 xx SCR yyyy (cccc or D) zz..z

Single Call Ringing key

Where: basic-20

• yyyy = DN

• cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N, where N = the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD

15 minus 1.

• D = the character "D". When the character

"D" is entered, the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up, to find a DN key with

CLID table entry. The CLID associated with the found DN key is used.

• zz..z = additional information required for the key aaa.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. Use a single appearance DN to terminate

VCC Voice Call or SIG Signaling calls.

Once the SCR key has been defined, MARP is prompted.

On the M3901, M3902, key 0 is reserved for

SCR.

On Universal Extensions (TYPE = UEXT), key

0 is reserved for SCR.

The SCR primary key should be configured with the optional CLID information appended.

basic-24 basic-5.50

basic-5.00

xx SCU yyyy Speed Call User key optf-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 199

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Where: yyyy = SCL list number 0-8190. SCL must be defined in LD 18.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key 23 is reserved for

SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.

Pack/Rel

basic-24 basic-25 xx SIG yyyy Signal key

Where: yyyy = Single appearance DN.

The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

DNXP package 150. Key/lamp is not required.

basic-1 xx SSC yyyy System Speed Call controller key

Where: yyyy = SSC list number 0-4095.SSC list must be defined in LD 18.

On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 23 is reserved for SCC, SCU, SSU, SSC or NUL.

optf-1 basic-24 xx SSU yyyy System Speed Call User key

Where: yyyy = SSC list number 0-4095.SSC list must be defined in LD 18.

optf-1 xx TAD xx THF xx TRC

Time and Date key

For SL-1 sets only, must have CLS = ADD or

DDS, cannot be key 0.

Blocked on the M3901, M3902, M3903,

M3904, M3905.

Centrex Trunk Switch Hook Flash key ddsp-1 basic-24 thf-14

Malicious Call Trace key

Key/lamp not required. MCT is applied on a TN basis. This key can be configured on ACD telephones. Allowed when CLS = MCTA.

mct-10 xx TRN Call Transfer key

On the M3902, key 4 is reserved for TRN or

NUL. On the M3903, M3904, M3905, key 17 is reserved for TRN or NUL.

On the IP Phone 2004 key 17 is reserved for

TRN or NUL.

basic-1 basic-24 basic-25

200 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

xx USR

Comment

User Selectable Call Redirection key xx UST xx VCC yyyy

User Status key (must have UST = YES in

LD15 and UST = YES in LD 23)

Voice Call key

Where: yyyy = Single appearance DN. Not available on M3000 telephones.

Pack/Rel

uscr-19 ims-2 basic-1 xx VUP xx VDN

Volume Up key (must be assigned if Volume

Down is assigned)

Volume Down key (must be assigned if Volume

Up is assigned) xx WUK Guest entry of automatic Wakeup key (Key/ lamp pair is required) xx XMWK xxxx yyyy

Extended Message Waiting indication key

Where:

• xx= key number

• xxxx = Message Center DN

• yyyy = DN to be monitored gewu-16 mw-24

LANG (0)-5 X

(0)

1

2

3

4

5

X

Language choice for Automatic Wakeup

(AWU) calls. Prompted with Multi-Language

Wakeup (MLWU) package 206.

This entry defines the language presented for the Automatic Wakeup Recorded

Announcement (RAN), for language 0 through

5 as follows:

See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15

See LA11/LA12 in LD 15

See LA21/LA22 in LD 15

See LA31/LA32 in LD 15

See LA41/LA42 in LD 15

See LA51/LA52 in LD 15

Remove entry mlwu-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 201

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

LDN

Response

(NO)

0-3

0-5

Comment

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD

15

Pack/Rel

nldn-20

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD

15

Listed Directory Number Index as defined in LD

15

LHK

LNRS

(0)-7

(0)-27

(0)-59

(0)

4-(16)-31

Last Hunt Key number limit

For M2008

For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules (Small System and CS 1000S)

For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules

No Last Hunt Key or remove Last Hunt Key

(used for Internal/External Short Hunt) basic-10

Last Number Redial Size

Enter the maximum number of digits that can be stored. Valid entries are 4, 8, 12, (16), 20,24,

28, or 31. Invalid entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.

Inr-8

LPK

LTN

MARP

(0)-5

(0)-7

(0)-27

(0)-59

Line Preference Key limit (last key scanned for

Automatic Line Preference)

For M2006

For M2008

For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules (Small System and CS 1000S)

For M2616, varies with number of add-on modules

Prompted when CLS = IRA, NIA or OLA.

Isel-4

1-253 0-15 Logical TN and AUX link number

This prompt appears when CLS = IMA and the valid APL link is defined in LD15.

ims-5

(NO) YES Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime

Use TN as the Multiple Appearance DN

Redirection Prime. The MARP prompt, or

MARP information, appears following the DN basic-18

202 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MAUT

MCCL

Response Comment

KEY designation, and is associated with those

DN assignments.

(NO) YES x y z u

Pack/Rel

Modify Authorization Codes for this telephone ssau-19

This prompt appears with Station Specific

Authorization Codes (SSAU)package 229 and

CLS = AUTR.

Number of clients per supported SIP Line type for a Universal Extension designated as a SIP

Line.

Where:

• x = number of clients on Nortel SIP lines

(SIPN type)

• y = number of clients on 3rd party SIP lines

(SIP3 type)

• z = number of clients on fixed mobile convergence SIP lines (FMCL type)

• u = number of clients on telephony service

SIP lines (TLSV type) sip_lines-6.0

0

MLNG a...a

MLWU_LANG

(0)

1

2

3

4

Language selection for the M3902, M3903,

M3904, M3905, I1110, I1120, I1130, I1140,

I1150, I2001, I2002, I2004, or I2007. Where a...a is:

• <CR> no change

• ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR,

SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,

RUS, LAT, TUR.

basic-25.4

Language choice for Automatic Wakeup

(AWU) calls.

This entry defines the language presented for the Automatic Wakeup Recorded

Announcement (RAN), for language 0 through

5 as follows:

See RAN1/RAN2 in LD 15

See LA11/LA12 in LD 15

See LA21/LA22 in LD 15

See LA31/LA32 in LD 15

See LA41/LA42 in LD 15 mlwu-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 203

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

5

Response

X

Comment

See LA51/LA52 in LD 15

Precede with X to remove

MOD

MODL

MOTN

MPHI

(NO)

YES

1-127

<CR> l s c u

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Mode

Network is required for Meridian

Programmable Data Adapter

Modem synchronizes to clock in external device, such as QMT21 arie-14

Model number for small systems

Model number for CS 1000S

This prompt appears for Small System and CS

1000S Model sets.

basic-16 basic-1

Main Office TN

Accept default when CS 1000S is the Main

Office

When Main Office is a Large System.

sbo-2

Meridian Communications Unit used as MPH interface

Prompted if TYPE = MCU.

mph-19

MRT

NAME n aaaa,bbbb aaaa aaaa,

,bbbb

Music route number for route types MUS or

IMUS. By default there is no value.

basic-7.00

Calling Party Name Display name

First name comma Last name.

For example, John Doe is entered as

John,Doe. The first single comma is treated as the delimiter. Up to 27 characters (including the comma) can be input. The last occurrence of the first comma group serves as the name delimiter and is translated into a space between the first and last name.

When the delimiter is omitted, the input is stored as a first name.

When the delimiter follows the input, the input is stored as the first name.

When the delimiter precedes the input, the input is stored as a last name.

cpnd-21

204 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NCOS

NDID

NEWTYP

Response

(0)-99

Comment

Network Class of Service group xxxx a...a

Pack/Rel

ncos-1

The SIP Lines Gateway (SLG) node identifier. sip_lines-6.0

0

Specifies the TN_TYPE to convert to. (TYPE responses begin on Type of data block)

NUID

NHTN aaaa l s c u

0000

Network User ID for a dialable home system

DN. Applies to IP Phones.

Precede with X to delete.

grsec-4.0

Network Home system TN CS 1000M Large

Systemand CS 1000Esystem. Prompted when

NUID is defined.

0000 is a reserved TN to indicate the Network

Home is a CS 2100 System. Not used if the

Network Home is a CS 1000 System.

grprim-4.00

basic-5.00

Numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

NUMZON

E

0-1023

OHID (0)-9

OPE

PAR

(NO) YES

(SPAC)

EVEN

ODD

MARK

Off-Hook Alarm Security DN index for off-hook or interdigit timeout.

When a dial tone or interdigit timeout occurs on a set with Alarm Security Allowed (ASCA)

Class of Service, the set is intercepted to a predefined DN.

Enter the index number (0)-9 of the DN defined by LD 15 prompts ODNx.

basic-18

Change data port Operating Parameters

Space Parity

Even Parity

Odd Parity

Mark Parity mcu/arie-19 basic-1

PAGEOFST

<Page><KeyOffset>

Configure KEM key numbers for IP Phones that support Paging and have a specific number of

KEMs configured.

basic-4.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 205

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

PBDO

PLEV

POS

Response Comment

On IP Phone 2004, prompted if 1 KEM is configured and

<CR>

is entered at the

KEY

prompt.

Where:

• Page = 0-1

• KeyOffset = 0-23

Pack/Rel

On IP Phone 1230, prompted if 1 or 2 KEMs are configured and

<CR>

is entered at the KEY prompt.

Where:

• if KEM = 1, Page = 0-1

• if KEM = 2, Page = 2-3

• KeyOffSet = 0-11 basic-5.50

Once values are entered for Page and

KeyOffset, the

KEY xx

prompt is presented for assignment of a function to the calculated KEM key. The

xx

is replaced with the calculated

KEM key number. When

<CR>

is entered after the assignment of a function to the KEM key, the

PAGEOFST

prompt is presented again.

This loop continues until a

<CR>

is entered at the

PAGEOFST

prompt.

(OFF)

ON

0-(2)-7 xxxx

Port Busy when DTR off

Disabled

Key 7 is automatically assigned as the Make

Set Busy (MSB) key

Switching to any other mode forces PBDO to

OFF. Prompted if TYPE = R232 in operating modes 8 or 12.

dac-16

Priority Level, prompted with Priority Override/

Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or

Enhanced DPNSS1 Services (DPNSS_ES) package 288

2 = set can override sets of level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of level 2-7.

povr-20

ACD position ID. Prompted when SFMT =

AUTO, TNDN, TN or DN.

basic-12

206 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PRI

PRM

Response

(1)-48

(1)-32

Comment

Priority level for Automatic Call Distribution

(ACD) agent

Valid range for systems 11C, 51C, 61C, and

81C.

Valid range for all other system options.

The agent with the lowest number assigned has the highest priority and is the first ACD agent to receive calls. (Where Priority 1 has the highest priority level).

PRI is prompted with Automatic Call

Distribution, Priority Agent (PAGT) package

116 and CLS = AGN or SPV.

Pack/Rel

pagt-12

(ON)

OFF

Prompt for terminal or host mode

Terminal or Keyboard dial mode, prompts are output by data unit

Host mode prompts are not output by data unit arie-14

PROCEED

PSDS

PSEL

RCO

YES (NO)

(NO) YES

(DMDM)

TLNK

(0)-2

Confirms that the System Administrator is aware of what features is lost and still wants to perform the conversion.

Anything typed except YES implies NO

Public Switched Data Service option

With PSDS = YES, transmission is synchronous and the baud is 56K or 64K. 56K is the default.

arie-18

Protocol Selection, DM-DM or T-link

DMDM is used by Meridian 1 data devices such as ASIM, AIM, ADM, SADM, Asynchronous

Data Option or ADO, and MPDA. MCA can use both protocols.

TLNK protocol is used by SL-100 and DMS data devices

This prompt appears if DTAO = MCA, or TYPE

= MCU arie-18

Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No

Answer uscr-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 207

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

REQ:

?

Response Comment

This prompt appears when CLS = FNA or MWA

(or both)

Request

To get a list of possible responses

CHG

CPY 1-32

Change existing data block

Copy or create 1 to 32 new station data block(s) automatically from the specified station data block. Model sets cannot be copied.

Pack/Rel

basic-19

CHGTYP

END

MOV

Change type of an IP phone

Exit overlay program

Move data block from one TN to another.

MOV command can be used to move digital

"IPE" telephones from one loop, shelf, card, unit to another lscu with the following restrictions (includes moves across

Superloops):

-ACD sets must not be moved. Remove (out) data and re-enter at destination.

-Cannot be used for Small System and CS

1000S Model sets

MOV command can be used to move digital

"EPE" telephones from one unit or card to another, but does not support moving these phones across shelves or loops.

MOV PAIR command can be used providing the system is on Rls 24 or 25. This command do not function properly on Rls 15 - 23. It is recommended to use MOV on these releases of software.

basic-5.00

basic-25.4

Note:

If moving a voice unit with an associated data unit, the data unit must also be moved.

On the NT8D02 DLC card, both voice and data TN's can be moved by the MOV PAIR command.

208 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RNPG

RTS

SCI

SCPW

Response Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

If Call Forward is activated prior to the set move, the Call Forward data is moved to the destination set.

MOV PAIR Move voice TN and data TN data blocks on

NT8D02 Digital Line Card

NEW

OUT

Add new data block to the system

Remove data block

Before removing an ACD agent telephone, first remove the associated AGT key on the supervisor's telephone. Select OUT and then

NEW when switching resources between virtual and actual ACD DNs, to avoid unwanted information on ACD-D reports.

The following is a list of valid responses. For further information, consult the appropriate

Overlay program.

LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC DISI

DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS DSXP

ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN ENLS ENLU

ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU LBSY LDIS LIDL

LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT SUPL TRK XNTT

XPCT XPEC

LD 20: LTN LUC LUDU LUU LUVU PRT

LD 10: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT

(0)-4095

(ON) OFF

(0)-7 xxxx

Ringing Number Pickup Group

To remove a telephone from a group, enter 0 in response to the RNPG prompt.

grp-1

Request To Send applies only to asynchronous mode.

mca-18 sci-7 Station Category Indication priority level

The station category number 1 to 7 must be defined as attendant console Incoming Call

Indicator. LD 15 prompt ICI = CA1-CA7.

Station Control Password ffc-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 209

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Must equal Station Control Password Length

(SCPL) as defined in LD 15. Not prompted if

SCPL = 0. Precede with X to delete.

SECOND_DN x...x

SFDN

SFLT

X xxxx

(NO)

BOSS

SEC

Second DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Second Directory Number. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Deletes the second directory number

Secretarial Forwarding DN of secretary set

This prompt appears if response to SFLT =

BOSS.

Secretarial Filtering

Assign no designation to telephone

Designate telephone as a Boss set

Designate telephone as a Secretary set

SEC (NO) and <CR> takes you to the next prompt.

This prompt appears with Boss Secretary

Filtering (FTCSF) package 198.

Pack/Rel

vmba-19 ftcsf-15 ftcsf-15

SFMT

TNDN

TN

Select one of the following formats for the copy command. The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to

7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

basic-1

Manual selection of TNs and DNs or ACD position IDs for ACD telephones.

The TN and DN or POS for ACD set prompts repeat n times as specified under the CPY n command.

TN I s c u TN of new set

DN xxxx DN of new set

POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set

The new DNs or ACD position IDs for ACD telephones are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and DN or

210 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SGRP

Response Comment

ACD position ID for ACD telephones and each

TN.

The TN prompt repeats n times as specified under the CPY n command.

TN I s c u TN of new set

DN xxxx DN of new set

POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set

DN

AUTO

The new TNs are provided by the system. You are prompted for the starting TN and each DN or ACD position ID for ACD telephones.

The DN or POS for ACD sets prompt repeats n times as specified under the CPY n command.

TN I s c u TN of new set

DN xxxx DN of new set

POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set

The new TNs and DNs or ACD position IDs for

ACD telephones are provided by the system.

You are prompted for the starting TN and DN or ACD position ID for ACD telephones.

TN I s c u TN of new set

DN xxxx DN of new set

POS xxxx ACD position ID of new set

(0)-999

SIPU

SPID x...x

x...x

Pack/Rel

Scheduled Access Restriction group number sar-20

This prompt appears with Scheduled Access

Restrictions (SAR) package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.

SIP Lines user id.

sip_lines-6.0

0

Supervisor Position ID DN

SPID is prompted for ACD packages B, C, and

D when CLS = AGN. SPID can be up to 4 digits, bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 211

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt

SPWD

SSU

SUPR

Response Comment

up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

xxxx

0-4095

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Secure Data Password

This prompt appears only if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security codes do not print when PRT is requested.

ssau-19 ssc-2 System Speed Call List number

Precede with X to delete.

SIP Line super user.

Where:

• NO = SIP line user is not a super user

• YES = SIP Line user is a super user sip_lines-6.0

0

TEN

TGAR

THIRD_DN

TN

1-511

0-(1)-31 x...x

l s c u

Tenant number

This prompt appears if Multi-tenant is configured for the customer.

tens-7

Trunk Group Access Restriction. The default of

(1) automatically blocks direct access.

basic-1 vmba-19

Third DN sharing the Voice Mailbox

Third Directory Number. This DN can be up to

4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

X Deletes the third directory number

Terminal Number. The TN defines the location of the telephone.

TN appears when REQ = NEW, CHG, MOV,

MOV PAIR or OUT.

Large System TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

Where l = basic-1

212 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• 0-159: loops, superloops must be multiples of four, starting with superloop 0

• 0–255: loops, Option 81C

Pack/Rel

fnf-25

Where s =

• 0-3: IPE shelves on loops defined TERM in

LD 17 0-1: IPE shelves on loops defined

TERD in LD 17 and superloops

• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined TERQ in LD 17

Where c =

• 1-10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops.

• 0-15: IPE cards of superloops.

Where u =

• 0-3: single density units

• 0-7: double density units

• 0-15: integrated services digital line (ISDLC) cards

• 0-31: digital line cards or DLC

For a static voice or data TN, u = 0-31. To assign VCE to TNs (where u = 16-31), CLS must be FLXA. To assign DTA to TNs (where u

= 0-15), CLS must be FLXA. See text regarding

FLXA.

l s c u Format for CS 1000E, where:

Where l = 0, 4, 8, - 252: superloop number, multiples of 4

Where s =

• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop

• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop

Where c =

• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop

• 1-10: cabinet on superloop

• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop

Where u = 0-31 basic-4.00

basic-6.00

basic-5.00

basic-6.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 213

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

c u

Comment Pack/Rel

Format for Small System, where c u = card, unit basic-16

• c = 1-50

• u = 0-31 c u c u

Format for CS 1000S, where c u = card, unit basic-1

• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

• u = 0-31

Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit basic-4.00

• c = 0-4, 7-10

• u = 0-31

Format for MG 1000B Cabinet, where: c = card and u = unit

• c = 0-10

• u = 0-31

TOTN c u l s c u c u c u

Note:

For converted Small Systems only, the

Meridian Mail card must be installed in slot

10 if Meridian Mail is to be supported.

Format for MG 1000T, where:

• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,

47-50

• u = 0-31 basic-4.00

To Terminal Number

Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit basic-20 basic-4.00

Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small System

Model sets.

basic-16

Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit basic-1.0

214 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

c u

Comment

Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit

This prompt appears when REQ = MOV and is not prompted for Model sets.

Pack/Rel

basic-4.00

TOV

TRAN

TYPE:

(0)

1

2

3

(ASYN)

SYN

Timeout Value for the Data port, for M2006,

M2008, M2216 and M2616 data port only

No Timeout

15 minutes

30 minutes

60 minutes mcu/arie-19

Port transmission type for the data port on

M2006, M2008, M2216, M2616 telephones

Asynchronous data transmission

Synchronous data transmission

Asynchronous data modules cannot be set as synchronous. An MMPO with DTAO, MPDA, or

MMPO supports SYN.

mcu/arie-19 basic-1

?

Type of data block

To get a list of possible responses

1110 1120

1130 1140

1145 1150

1160 2001

2002 2004

2004p1

2004p2 2007

2033 2210

2211 2212

IP phone types

2006

2006 M

M2006 Digital telephone.1 DN per set

M2006 Digital telephone Model set

2008

2008 M

2016

M2008 Digital telephone

M2008 Digital telephone Model set

M2016 Digital telephone

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 215

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

2216

2216 M

Comment

M2216 Digital ACD telephone

M2216 Digital ACD telephone Model set

2317

2317 M

2616

2616 M

3000

3000 M

3901

3902

M2317 Digital telephone

M2317 Digital telephone Model set

M2616 Digital telephone

M2616 Digital telephone Model set

M3000 Digital Touchphone

M3000 Digital Touchphone Model set

M3901 Digital telephone

M3902 Digital telephone

3903

3903V

3903H

3904

3904V

3904H

M3903 Digital telephone

M3903 Virtual Terminal Set

M3903 Host Terminal Set

M3904 Digital telephone

M3904 Virtual Terminal Set

M3904 Host Terminal Set

3905

CARD

M3905 Digital telephone.

Unused line card data block, used for

Automatic Telephone Relocation.

Multi-line Telephone Line Card CARDMLT

I2001

I2002

I2004

I2050

IP Phone 2001

IP Phone 2002

IP Phone 2004

IP Software Phone 2050

MCU Meridian Communications Unit

MPORTBL Mobility Portable

Pack/Rel

arie-25 arie-25 basic-4.00

basic-2.0

basic-2.5

basic-2.0

216 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

OOSMLT

Comment

Out of Service Multi-Line Terminal Unit

Entering OOSMLT allows the administrator to mark any unit, regardless of card density or type, "Out of Service".

Pack/Rel

xpe-20

PCA

R232

R232 M

Personal Call Assistant

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-232 Data mode

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-232 Data mode Model set pca-3.0

R422

R422 M

VOLO

1210 1220

1230

UEXT

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-422 mode

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-422 mode Model set

The M2006, M2008, M2216, and M2616 require ISDLC line card Version C or greater.

The data port requires specific key assignments.

Mnemonic to configure an emergency TN

New IP Phone 1200 Series types.

basic-5.00

basic-5.50

UXID

UXTY

<CLID>

MOBX

TLSV

FMCL

SIPN

Universal extension.

Indicates that the TN is used by a universal extension client.

mobx-5.50

Calling Line ID of the Universal Extension client.

Where <CLID> = 1-16 digit number (excluding

0).

Must be entered if UXTY = MOBX; optional for other Universal Extension types.

mobx-5.50

Universal Extension type.

Prompted only if TYPE = UEXT.

Mobile Extension Line

Telephony Services

Fixed Mobile Convergence Line (reserved for future use)

Nortel SIP Line basic-5.50

mobx-5.50

tlsv-5.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 217

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

Prompt Response

SIP3

SIPL

Comment

Third Party SIP line

SIP Lines client

V25

VLL

VMB

VMB_COS

VSIT

WIRE

XLST

XPLN

ZONE

(NO) YES

(OFF) ON

NEW

CHG

OUT

0-127

(NO) YES

(OFF)

ON

(0)-254 xx

0–255 0–

8000

Pack/Rel

sip_lines-6.0

0

Note:

Universal Extension type cannot be changed on a Universal Extension. The

Universal Extension must be removed

(OUT) and configured again (NEW) to change the Universal Extension type.

V.25 bis option, synchronous mode only.

Virtual Leased Line

Voice Mailbox

Add Voice Mailbox

Change Voice Mailbox

Remove Voice Mailbox

This prompt appears with Voice Mailbox

Administration (VMBA) package 246.

arie-18 arie-14 vmba-19

Voice Mailbox Class of Service

Valid range

Visitor vmba-19

MSMN-370

Wire test. Prompted if TYPE = R232 or R422. dac-16

Wire test disabled

System automatically tests wiring/cabling when DAC installed.

Pretranslation group associated with this station.

Expected name length pre-8 cpnd-19

Zone Number to which the IP Phone belongs basic-25 basic-7.00

The zone prompt applies only when the IP

Phone type is 2001, 2002, 2004, and 2050.

Zone number is not checked against Overlay

117.

218 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response Comment

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 219

LD 11: Digital Telephone Administration

220 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 11: LD 12: Attendant Consoles

This program allows data blocks for attendant consoles to be created or modified.

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:

>ld 12 ATT000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx TNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx

TOT: xxxxx ATTENDANT CONSOLES AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx TOT: xxxx

If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License.

Prompts and responses

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

Response

aaa a...a

l s c u

Comment

Request (aaa = NEW, CHG, END, MOV, OUT)

Type of data block (a...a = 2250, or PWR)

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)

CTYP

CDEN

SETN

CDEN

TOTN

CUST l s c u xx

NUMZONE 0-1023

ANUM

(XDLC) EDLC Card type aa Card Density (aa = SD or DD) l s c u aa

Second Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)

Card Density of Second Terminal Number (aa = SD or DD)

1-63

To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)

Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Attendant Number

IADN

ERL

ALPD

DLEN xxxx

(0)-65535

(NO) YES xx

Individual Attendant DN for this console

Current ERL

Alphanumeric Display

Display Length (aa = (8) or 16)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 221

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

CPND

- DNDI

LANG

EBLF

SGRP

PRES

QTHM

- QDIS

ICP

- ICT

AADN

DNAN

Prompt

SSU

ICDR

- ABAN

DAPC

KEY

Response

yyyy

Comment

System Speed Call User list number

(ICDD) ICDA Internal Call Detail Recording (Denied) Allowed

(ABDD) ABDA Abandoned call record and time to answer (Denied)

Allowed

(CNDD) CNDA Call Party Name Display feature (Denied) Allowed

(DNDD) DNDA Dialed Name Display (Denied) Allowed

(00)-15

(BLFD) BLFA

Language to download to M2250 on Sysload

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (Denied) Allowed

(0)-999

0-19

(NO) YES

0-3 0-19

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

ICI keys to have Presentation Status

Queue Thermometer equipped

Queue Thermometer Display position, and ICI key number

(NO) YES

0-<NIPN>

Intercept Computer available

Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number xxxx Attendant Alternate Answering DN

(DNAA) DNAD (ANI DN used for 3WT ANI messages) or Outgoing CDTI2/

CSDTI2 route ANDN is used as DN in ANI messages

(DAPA) DAPD Dial Access Prefix on Console xx aaa yyyy Key (KEY responses begin on xx aaa yyyy)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AADN

ABAN

Response

x...x

Comment

Attendant Alternate Answering DN

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The DN must be a valid station DN or ACD DN. This prompt appears with Attendant Alternative

Answering (AAA) package 174.

Pack/Rel

aaa-15

(ABDD) Abandoned call record and time to answer

Denied fcdr-18

222 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

ALPD

ANUM

CDEN

CPND

CTYP

CUST

DAPC

Alphabetical list of prompts

Response

ABDA

Comment

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Allowed

ABDA generates a B-Record in CDR reports. Refer to the Call Detail Reporting

NTP for more information. ABAN appears with New Format Call Detail Recording

(FCDR) package 234.

Pack/Rel

(NO)

Yes

1-63

SD

DD

Alphanumeric Display

QCW3 Attendant Console

QCW4 Attendant Console

This prompt appears when TYPE = ATT.

Attendant Number basic-12 basic-1

Single Card Density

Double Card Density

If the loop is a single density loop, the default is single density. If the loop is a double density, the default is double density. If the loop is a quad density, there is no default.

This prompt appears when TYPE = ATT or

1250 and the loop is a single or double density.

basic-7

(CNDD) Call Party Name Display feature Denied cpnd-12

CNDA Call Party Name Display feature Allowed

(XDLC)

EDLC

Prompted when TYPE = 2250 and has

Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 and OPT = IDP in LD 15.

Card type is 16 port DLC Card type is 24 port DLCVCE/DTA basic-25 xx

Note:

EDLC not supported on Small Systems and CS 1000S.

Customer number associated with this set basic-1

Customer number is defined in LD 15.

(DAPA)

Dial Access Prefix on Console

Display Access Prefix Allowed isdn-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 223

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

Prompt

DLEN

DNAN

DNDI

EBLF

ERL

IADN

ICDR

Response

DAPD

Comment

Display Access Prefix Denied

(8)

16

Display Length

QCW2 Attendant Console

QCW3 or QCW4 Attendant Console

Prompted when TYPE = ATT. DLEN applies for only a QCW type console.

Pack/Rel

basic-1

(DNAA) ANI DN is used as the Customer Listed

Directory Number 0 (as defined in LD 15).

DNAD Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route ANDN is used as DN in ANI messages.

Prompted with Commonwealth of

Independent States (CIST) package 221.

cist-21

(DNDD) Dialed Name Display Denied

DNDA Dialed Name Display Allowed

Prompted if TYPE is 2250 and CPND =

CNDA.

(BLFD)

BLFA

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Denied

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Allowed

Prompted when TYPE = 2250 and OPT =

IBL or ILF in LD 15.

cpnd-13 basic-15

<CR>

Current Emergency Response Locator

Enter no value to make this TN Auto

Update.

0-65535 Enter a value to statically configure this TN

(Manual Update).

X Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.

basic-5.00

xxxx

(ICDD)

ICDA

Individual Attendant DN for this console.

The Individual Attendant DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with 'X' to delete an existing

IADN.

basic- 23

Internal Call Detail Recording Denied

Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed icdr-10

224 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

ICP

ICT

KEY

Alphabetical list of prompts

Response Comment

ICDA generates an L-Record in CDR reports. Refer to the Call Detail Reporting

NTP for more information. ICDR is prompted with Internal Call Detail

Recording (ICDR) package 108.

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES Intercept Computer available

Prompted when:

1. Intercept Computer Interface (ICP) package 143 is equipped

2. LD 17 ADAN USER is set for ICP

3. LD 15 prompt ICP = YES icp-16

0-<NIPN> Intercept Computer Terminal or printer number

Number of Intercept Positions (NIPN) is defined in LD 15.

icp-16 xx aaa yyyy

Console Key. Where:

• xx = key number 0-19 for M2250 consoles

• aaa = key name or function

• yyyy = additional information required for the key basic-1 xx ADL yy z...z

Autodial key. Where:

• xx = key number

• yy = ADL DN, maximum length is 31 digits.

• z...z = actual Autodial DN is optional basic-1 xx AUTO yyy...y

Direct Autoline DN, where: xx = Key number (0 - 19) yyy....y = Autoline DN. The Autoline DN can be 1 - 31 digits.

basic- 23 xx AWU Automatic Wake Up key (cannot be key 0 or 1) awu-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 225

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

Prompt Response

01 BIN

Comment

Allow Barge-In on key 01.

Pack/Rel

basic-1

Allow both Barge-In and Attendant Monitor on key 01 if China Attendant Monitor

Package (CHINA) package 285 is equipped. Must have OPT = AMA in

LD15.

china-21 xx BKI Break-In key

00 BVR Allow Busy Verify on key 0.

bki-1 basic-1

Allow both Busy Verify and Attendant

Monitor on key 00 if China Attendant

Monitor Package (CHINA) package 285 is equipped. Must have OPT = AMA in

LD15.

china-21 xx CHG Charge account key xx COS Controlled Class of Service key xx CPN Calling Party Number key xx DCW Display Call Waiting key xx DDL xx DDT xx DPD xx DPS

Do Not Disturb Individual key

Display Date key

Display Destination key

Display Source key fca-1 eccs-15 cab-1 basic-1 dndi-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 xx DRC DID Route Control key xx DTM Display Time key xx EES basic-1 basic-1

End-to-End Signaling key (cannot be key 0 or 1) basic-1 xx FLH xx FOV

DSN Flash key

DSN Flash Override key xx GND yy Group Do Not Disturb key Where: yy = group number = 0-99 atvn atvn dngd-1

226 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

Alphabetical list of prompts

Response

xx IMM

Comment

DSN Immedicate key xx LTA Low Tape Alarm key for mini CDR xx MCK Message Cancellation key

Turns off indication at a telephone.

Pack/Rel

cdr-8 mwc-1 xx MDT Maintain Change/Display Date key xx MIK Message Indication key

Turns on indication at a telephone.

xx MTM xx MTR xx NAS xx NUL xx PAG yyyy

Maintain Change/Display Time key

Meter key tad-1 mwc-1 tad-1 mr-10

Network Attendant Service key nas-20

Remove feature or function from key

Paging key Where: yyyy = Route Access

Code. This number can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150. The route must be defined in LD 16.

basic-1 basic-1 xx PRG Attendant Administration Program key xx PRK Call Park key xx PRY xx RDL

DSN Priority key

Redial stored number aa-1 cprk-2 atvn basic-1 xx RFW Attendant Remote Call Forward key xx RPAG yyyy

Radio Paging key Where: yyyy = Route

Access Code Coordinated Dialing Plan

(CDP), Trunk Steering Codes (TSC) and

Distant Steering Codes (DSC) can be entered against yyyy.

xx RTC arfw-20 rpa-15

Routing Controls key This key activates the

NCOS map defined in LD 86. Must have bars-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 227

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

Prompt

LANG

Response Comment

Network Class of Service (NCOS) package

32.

Pack/Rel

sacp-20 xx SACP Semi-Automatic Camp-On key

Must have Semi-Automatic Camp-On

(SACP) package 181.

xx SCC yyyy

Speed Call Controller key Where: yyyy = list number, 0-8190 optf-1 xx SECL Series Call key

Must have Series Call (SECL) package 191 secl-15 xx SSC yyyy

System Speed Call controller key Where: yyyy = list number, 0-4095 ssc-2 xxTHF xx TRC

(00)-15

Trunk Switch Hook Flash key

Malicious Call Trace key

Must have Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107.

Language to download to M2250 on

Sysload Language choices:

• (00) - English

• 01 - French

• 02 - Spanish

• 03 - German

• 04 - Italian

• 05 - Norwegian

• 06 - Galic

• 07 - Turkish

• 08 - Katakana

• 09 - People's Republic of China

• 10 - Taiwan

• 11 - Korean

• 12 - Polish thf-20 mct-10 basic-1

228 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

NUMZON

E

PRES

QDIS

QTHM

REQ

Alphabetical list of prompts

Response Comment

• 13 - Czech/Slovak

• 14 - Hungarian

• 15 - No language assigned

0-1023 Numbering zone

Pack/Rel

zbd-6.00

0-19 ICI keys to have Presentation Status

Up to 20 fields can be input, fields must be separated by a space.

coop-14

0-3 0-19 Queue Thermometer Display position, and

ICI key number coop-14

0-3 REST Queue Thermometer Display position, all

ICI keys that are not displayed on any other displays for the Queue Thermometer

0-3 NUL Queue Thermometer Display position, no

ICI key assigned

<CR> Stop the repetition of this prompt

(NO) YES Queue Thermometer equipped

Prompted with Console Operations

(COOP) package 169.

coop-14

CHG

END

MOV

Request

Change existing data

Exit overlay program

Move from one TN to another. CAUTION:

There is a possibility of data corruption when consoles are moved using this response.

Trunk and Attendant Consoles cannot be moved across loops or superloops.

Console data must be deleted "Out data" and reentered in the new location.

basic-1 basic-25.4

Note:

Superloops on an Small System are as follows: internal superloops in a 2 cabinet Option11C system are (4 slots per Sloop): slots 1- 4 5 - 8 9 - 12 13 -

16 17 -

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 229

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

Prompt

SETN

SGRP

SSU

TN

Response

NEW

Comment

20|--------------------------------|---------------

----------------| cabinet 0 cabinet

1

Add new data to the system

Pack/Rel

l s c u c u

(0)-999 yyyy l s c u

Second Terminal Number

Large System TN format, Where: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

Format for CS 1000E, Where: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

Small System and CS 1000S format

SETN must have same loop, shelf and card as the primary TN if TYPE = 2250. This cannot be a phantom loop.

basic-1 basic-4.00

sar-20 Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR)

Group number

Prompted with SAR package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.

System Speed Call User list number

Where: yyyy = 0-4095 ssc-2

Terminal Number.

The TN defines the location of the console.

For Meridian: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

The range values are as follows:

Where l =

• 0 - 159: loops, superloops must be multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0

• 0 - 255: loops, Option 81C

Where s =

• 0 - 3: IPE shelves on loops defined as

TERM in LD 17

• 0 - 1: IPE shelves on loops defined as

TERD in LD 17 and superloops

• 0: IPE shelf on loops defined as TERQ in

LD 17 basic-1

Where c =

230 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

TOTN

Alphabetical list of prompts

Response Comment

• 1 - 10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops

• 0 - 15: IPE cards of superloops

Where u =

• 0 - 3: single density units

• 0 - 7: double density units

• 0 - 7: integrated services digital line(ISDLC) cards

• 0 - 15: digital line cards (DLC)

Pack/Rel

l s c u c u l s c u l s c u c u c u

Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, -

252: superloop number in multiples of 4

Where s =

• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop

• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop

Where c =

• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop

• 1-10: cabinet on superloop

• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop

Where u = 0-31 basic-4.00

basic-6.00

basic-5.00

basic-6.00

For Small System: c u = card, unit

• c = 1 - 50

• u = 0 - 15 basic-16

To Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ

= MOV. TOTN cannot be a phantom loop.

Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for Small System, where: c u = card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small

System Model sets.

Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit basic-1 basic-4.00

basic-16 basic-1.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 231

LD 12: Attendant Consoles

Prompt

TYPE

ZONE

Response

c u

Comment

Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit

2250

Pack/Rel

basic-4.00

Type of data block

M2250 Console data block

M2250 requires an ISDLC Card or a Digital

Line Card.

basic-1

3260

PWR

0-8000

IP Attendant Console 3260

Power data block

TN used for power or Attendant

Supervisory Module (ASM). Third and fourth TNs used for power, or third TN for

ASM and fourth and fifth TNs used for power.

Zone of the IP Attendant Console 3260 basic-7.00

basic-7.00

232 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 12: LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone

Detectors, Multifrequency

Senders and Receivers

This program enables the administrator to create or modify data blocks for the following:

• Digitone Receivers (DTR)

• SL-1 Tone Detectors (TDET)

• Multifrequency Receivers (MFR)

• Dial Tone Detectors (DTD)

• Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) Senders/Receivers

• 2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signalling (MFK5)

• 2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling (MFK6)

• Extended Dial Tone Detector/Digitone Receivers (XTD)

• Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Senders/Receivers

• Extended CLASS Modem Card (XCMC)

These cards are used by 2500-type telephones and trunks that send DTMF tones to the system, and by

MF trunks to send MF tones to the system. All 2500 sets and some trunks must have Class of Service

(CLS) defined as Digitone (DTN). MF reception is available to QPC916 cards only.

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:

DTR000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx

If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License.

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

REQ: aaa

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, MOV, NEW, or OUT)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 233

LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers

Prompt

TYPE:

TN

POLR

XTDT

- DTO

Response

a...a

l s c u a...a

Comment

Type of data block (a...a = DTD, DTR, MFC, MFE, MFK5, MFK6,

MFR, TDET, CMODCMOD or XTD)

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Polarity of LED messages for DTD (a...a = (NORM) or REV)

(0)-7 Extended Tone Detector Table number

(NO) YES Dial Tone Detection Only

CDEN

TOTN aa l s c u

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, or 4D)

To Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on )

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CDEN

SD

DD

4D

<CR>

Card Density

Comment

Enter SD if this unit is on a single density circuit card. The card density cannot be changed from DD to SD if more than one unit is assigned.

Enter DD if this unit is on a double density circuit card. DD is not allowed if the network loop is not configured for double density

Enter 4D if this unit is on a quadruple density circuit card. 4D is not allowed if the network loop is not configured for quadruple density

If REQ = NEW and TYPE = DTR then CDEN is set to the default density as specified in the configuration record.

DTO

(NO)

YES

Dial Tone Detection Only

Do not disable DTR Detection

Disable DTR detection, only perform dial tone detection.

Prompted when TYPE = XTD

Pack/Rel

basic-1 dtd-10

234 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response

POLR

Comment

Polarity of LED messages

(NORM) Normal

REV Reversed

REQ

CHG

END

MOV

NEW

OUT

Request

Change existing data

Exit overlay program

Move Digitone Receiver, Tone

Detectors, MF Senders and

Receivers from one TN to another

CAUTION: There is a possibility of data corruption when Digitone

Receivers are moved using this response.

MOV command not supported due to complexity of restrictions and the risk of data corruption if restrictions not adhered to. Limited usefulness.

Add new data to the system

Remove information from data block

TN l s c u

Terminal Number

For Meridian: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

The range values are as follows:

Where l =

0 - 159: loops, superloops must be multiples of 4, starting with superloop 0

0 - 255: loops, Systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

Where s =

0 - 3: IPE shelves on loops defined as TERM in LD 17

0 - 1: IPE shelves on loops defined as TERD in LD 17 and superloops

0: IPE shelf on loops defined as

TERQ in LD 17

Where c =

1 - 10: IPE cards of dual and enhanced loops

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

dtd-10 basic-1 basic-25.4

basic-1 fnf-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 235

LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers

Prompt Response

l s c u

Comment

Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0,

4, 8, - 252: superloop number in multiples of 4

Where s =

• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop

• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop

Where c = c u

• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop

• 1-10: cabinet on superloop

• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop

Where u = 0-31

For Small System: c u = card, unit

The range values are: c = 1-50 u = 0-7 u = 8-11 when TYPE = MFR, MFC,

MFE, MFK5, MFK6 for Card 0

Note that units 0-7 must be of one type. Units 8-15 must also be of one type. The new MFC/MFE/MFK5/

MFK6 units on Card 0 must be enabled using the ENLX 0 command in LD 34.

TOTN l s c u

TYPE l s c u c u cu c u

To Terminal Number. Prompted when REQ = MOV.

Format for Large System, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for CS 1000E, where: l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit

Format for Small System, where: c u

= card, unit TOTN is not prompted for Small System Model sets.

Format for CS 1000S, where: c u = card, unit

Format for MG 1000B, and MG

1000T, where: c = card and u = unit

Type of data block

Pack/Rel

basic-4.00

basic-6.00

basic-5.00

basic-6.00

basic-1 basic-4.00

basic-16 basic-1.0

basic-4.00

basic-1

236 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response

CMOD

Comment

CLASS modem unit.

A CLASS modem unit is configured on the XCMC card. A maximum of

32 units can be configured on the

XCMC card.

DTD

DTR

MFC

MFE

MFK5

MFK6

MFR

Dial Tone Detector data block

Digitone Receiver data block

Multifrequency Compelled sender/ receiver data block

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling

(MFC) package 128 is required.

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel sender/receiver data block.

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel

(MFE) package 135 is required.

2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

Multifrequency Receiver data block

MFR applies to Feature Group D. Up to 255 MF Receivers can be defined.

Only units 0 and 1 can be used.

Feature Group D (FGD) package

158 is required.

XTDT

TDET

XTD

(0)-7

Tone Detector data block (Not supported on Small System)

Extended Dial Tone Detector and

Digitone Receiver data block

Extended Tone Detector Table number

If a table other than 0 is entered, it must exist in LD 97.

This prompt appears when TYPE =

XTD.

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

cname-23 cnumb-23 mfe-10 kd3-20 kd3-20 tdet-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 237

LD 13: Digitone Receivers,Tone Detectors, Multifrequency Senders and Receivers

238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 13: LD 14: Trunk Data Block

This program allows data blocks for trunks to be created or modified.

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory, disk records and system configuration limits are output in a header as follows:

>ld 14

TRK000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx TNS AVAIL: (U/

P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx RAN CON AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx MUS

CON AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USE D: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx AST SET AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx

ITG ISDN TRUNKS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xxxx TOT: xxxx TRADITIONAL TRUNKS AVAIL: xxxx USED: xx

TOT: xxxx

If an License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that License do not be printed. This does not apply for the TNs License. The header includes Recorded Announcement

Broadcast, Music Broadcast connections and Associated trunk License information.

After making any changes to the trunk data block, IPE trunk cards must be downloaded with ENLC l s c command in LD 32.

The Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL package or PLDN package 120 allows an asterisk (*) or double asterisk (**) as a valid input to a number of prompts, usually the asterisk is part of a dialed number. Without this package, for example, inputting one asterisk causes the system to reissue the last prompt, and two asterisks causes a restart of the Overlay at REQ.

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

REQ a...a

TYPE a...a

T_TN

- IPRI l ch l ch

- OPRI l ch

MODL -127

TN

DES l s c u x...x

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, MOV, LCHG, NEW x, or OUT x)

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on ADM)

Loop number and channel for tandem PRI connection

Loop number and channel for incoming PRI channel

Loop number and channel for outgoing PRI channel

Model number for Small System and CS 1000S

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on TN)

Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 239

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

CDEN

XTRK

MAXU

Response

aa a...a

1 - 32

Comment

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Extended Trunk (a...a = DB32, DB96, EXUT, ITG1, ITG2, ITG8,

ITGP, MC8, MC32, M32S, XCOT, XDID, XEM, XFEM, or XUT)

Maximum number of IP units supported (ITG card version dependant)

IPTN

ZONE

(NO) YES ITG card Physical TN.

0–255 0–

8000

Zone number

FWTM (NO) YES Firmware Timing for trunk hook flash

SXS (NO) YES Step-by-step CO trunk

SICA (1)-16

PDCA (1)-16

PCML aa

TOTN l s c u

Signaling Category table number

Pad Category table number for PRI2,DTI2,JDM,PRI,DTI trunks

Pulse Code Modulation Law (aa = MU or A)

TO Terminal Number

DDSL

DTSL

SIGL

CUST

0-15

0-159 aaa xx

Digital DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link (NT hardware)

Digital Trunk Signaling Link (GPT hardware)

Level 3 Signaling

Customer number associated with this trunk

SFEX

IAPG

(NO) YES Special digital FEX trunk

(0)-15 Event Group for USM message

NCOS xx

RTMB xxx xxx

Network Class of Service group

Route number, Member number

CONN

INC

(4)-48 Maximum number of broadcast connections allowed for this trunk.

(YES) NO Increasing channel numbers and decreasing member numbers

PRIO

CHID aaa xxxx

Priority designation (aaa = (XHP) or YLP)

Channel ID for this trunk.

SREF 1-9999999 ISDN Semi Permanent Connection (ISPC) Reference Number

SDCH (NO) YES Is the ISPC link used by a D-channel?

SMAS (NO) YES Is this ISPC acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link?

MTN l s c u Modem Terminal Number

NMUS (NO) YES Network Music

240 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

PRDN xxxx

CMF

RLDN

(NO) YES xxxx

Comment

Private Line Directory Number

Call Modification Features restriction

Release Link Trunk Directory Number

NGRP (0)-9

NITE xxxx

ATDN xxxx

MNDN xxxx

Night Service Group number

Night Service directory number

Auto Terminate DN

Manual Directory Number

TGAR

SIGL

XDIC

EMTY

CPAD xx aaa aaa aaa a...a

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Trunk Signaling (SIGL responses begin on SIGL)

Outpulsing for DIC trunks (aaa = (MUT) or NOR)

E & M Type (aaa = (TY2), TY1, or BPO) a...a

x...x

a...a

Carrier Pad out or Carrier Pad in for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks

(a...a = (COUT) or CIN)

Loop Dial Outpulsing (a...a = (LOOP) or BOP) LDOP

TIMP

BIMP

STRO a...a

Termination Impedance

Balance Impedance (a...a = (3COM), 600, 900, or 3CM2)

AUTO_BIMP

(NO) YES Automatic Balance Impedance Option

STRI a...a

Start arrangement Incoming (a...a = DDL, IMM, MWNK, OWK,

PTSD, SACK, RT, or WNK)

Start arrangement Outgoing (a...a = DDL, IMM, MWNK, OWK,

PTSD, SACK, RT, or WNK)

SUPN (NO) YES Answer and disconnect Supervision required

- STYP a...a

Supervision Type (a...a = ARF, BAT, BST, BTS, JDID, JCO, LBS,

PIP, and PSP)

AST

SEIZ

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Associated trunk for CTI trunk Monitoring and Control

Automatic Guard Detection for outgoing trunk

PPID

BTID

CLS

MFL

(0)-15

(0)-15 a...a

(0)-15

Periodic Pulse Metering country ID

Busy Tone country ID

Class of Service (CLS responses begin on )

Multifrequency digit level

MFLI (0) 1 Multifrequency transmit level identifier

MFPD (NO) YES Multifrequency PAD

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 241

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt Response

BTDT (0)-7

FCAR

TKID

(NO) YES nnnnnnn

Busy Tone Detection Table

Forced Charge Account

Trunk Identifier

Comment

DTCR

CFLP

(NO) YES Digit Collection Ready

0-159 Music Conference Loop

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AST

ATDN

AUTO_BIMP

BIMP

Response Comment

(NO) YES Associated trunk for CTI trunk Monitoring and

Control x...x

Pack/Rel

basic-23

Auto Terminate DN

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.

If a DNIS route is defined, then the response can only be an ACD DN. If no DN is assigned, the NITE number of the trunk is used.

Must have AUTO = YES in LD 16. Not prompted for Option 11C models.

disa-1 btd-23

(NO) YES Enable Automatic Balance Impedance Option.

Prompted only for EXUT type trunks. Not supported on dual Busy Tone Detection card

(NT5D31).

(3COM) 3-component Complex Impedance tip/ xpe-19

600

900

3CM2

Not prompted for RAN which exclusively uses 600

Not prompted for XEM trunks

For XUT trunks, the Termination Impedance

(TIMP) must be compatible with the Balance

Impedance (BIMP). See prompt TIMP for allowed combinations of BIMP/TIMP.

When using the Enhanced Universal Trunk card only 600 or 900 ¾ terminating impedance is allowed. However, more Terminating and Balance

Impedance (BIMP) combinations are available.

242 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

BTDT

BTID

CDEN

CFLP

CHID

SD

DD

4D

8D

Response Comment

In the case of AUTO_BIMP, this BIMP value is used as default value if an optimum AUTO_BIMP is not found or if the AUTO_BIMP test is not complete.

The Terminating and Balance Impedance options are listed below.

TIMP BIMP

600 600 600 3COM 900 3COM

900 900 900 3CM2 600 3CM2

Pack/Rel

btd-23

(0)-7 xxxx

Busy Tone Detection Table

The BTD table must be defined in LD 97. BTDT is mutually exclusive with BTID.

btd-21

Busy Tone country ID

This must be configured for a BTS supervised

XCOT trunk. One BTID type per card. Trunks must be removed from card to change BTID. BTDT is mutually exclusive with BTDT.

Busy Tone ID Recommended Country

0-2 Reserved for future use

3 Germany, Ireland

4 Switzerland 5 Denmark

6 Norway, Kuwait, Chili, Venezuela,

Indonesia, Thailand, Korea 7 Holland

8 Australia, Mexico

9 Ireland 10 Taiwan,

Brazil, Tortola, Mexico 11 Singapore

12 Argentina, Italy

13 Lebanon, Italy 14 Turkey

15 Reserved for future use btd-21

0-159

1-382

Card Density

Single Density

Double Density

Quad Density for XCOT only

Octal Density for XCOT only and there is no default.

Not prompted for superloops or Small System and

CS 1000S Models.

basic-7

Music Conference Loop

Channel ID for this trunk

Prompted when the Route specified has ISL enabled in LD 16. The number of ISL trunks allowed for the D-channel is specified in LD 17.

mus-1 isl-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 243

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

CIST

CLS

Response

1-4300

Comment

A different channel ID is requested for each

Phantom TN which is used for ISPC links. The same channel ID must be configured for the same

ISPC reference number on both PBXs linked by the connection.

For CS 1000 Release 4.0

Pack/Rel

basic-4.0

0

(NO)

YES

Incoming CIS three wire trunk is not a toll trunk cist-21

Incoming CIS three wire trunk is a toll trunk

CIST appears for trunks when SIGL = CIS. Only prompted for incoming route.

(APN)

APY

(BARD)

BARA

(CLID)

CLIA

CMFS

Class of Service options for trunks. Defaults are shown in parentheses. Enter each non-default option required, followed by a space.

ACD Priority not required

ACD Priority required

Applies only to COT, WAT, DID and FEX trunks.

basic-1 bacd-1

Barring Denied

Barring Allowed basic-7

(CND)

CNA

(CORX)

CORP

Calling Line Identification Denied

Calling Line Identification Allowed acli-24

CMFS trunk register signaling means that the CIS

MF Shuttle protocol is supported by the trunk.

CMFS can be defined only for trunks on CDTI2/

CSDTI2 with "CISFW=MFS" and only if both the

MFS and CIST Packages are equipped.

cismfs-23

Calling party Denied

Calling party Allowed

Allowed for L1 Multifrequency Compelled

Signaling and R2 MFC trunks. Automatic Number

Identification is denied for an Outgoing Loop Start

(LOP) Central Office Trunk (COT).

Must have Commonwealth of Independent States

(CIST) package 221 or Multifrequency Compelled

Signaling (MFC) package 128.

mfc-21

Central Office Ringback not provided by SL-1

Central Office Ringback provided by SL-1 supp-14

244 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(DIP)

DPDT

DTDP

DIPF

Comment Pack/Rel

Dial Pulse

Dial Pulse Digitone (incoming dial pulse - outgoing digitone) basic-21 basic-24

Digitone Dial Pulse (incoming digitone - outgoing dial pulse)

DIPF trunk register signaling requires that DP digit collection be performed by firmware. Applies to

CDTI2 or CSDTI2.

basic-24

DTN

MFC

MFE

MFK

MFR

Digitone

R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling. MFC can be configured on 1.5 DTI routes.

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel

Multifrequency Signaling for KD3

Multifrequency Receiver for Feature Group D basic-20

Mixed Signaling (MFC/DTMF) MFX

(DRPD)

DRPA

(ECD)

ECA

DTR PAD value Denied

DTR PAD value Allowed

Can only be configured for 2.0 Mb/s DID with DTI2 enabled.

dti2-10

Echo Canceling Denied

Echo Canceling Allowed

ECA indicates Echo suppression equipment is connected to trunk.

basic-1

(HKD)

HKA

(LNT)

JDID

JCO

Hong Kong DTI Denied

Hong Kong DTI Allowed

May only be used with DTI TNs with DTN CLS on

DID or TIE routes.

basic-6

Loop Start Non-supervisory Trunk

Japan DID (JDID not valid for XCOT trunks)

Japan CO capabilities allowed. JCO should only be accepted with SIGL = LOP. Japan PSTN trunks, (QPC686), not allowed for XUT/XEM.

Answer NO to prompt SUPN for an unsupervised trunk, instead of using LNT. For supervised trunks xutj-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 245

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt Response Comment

answer YES to SUPN then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt STYP.

Pack/Rel

(LPR)

HPR

(MID)

MIA

(MSNV)

MSBT

(NHFD)

NHFA

(P10)

P12

P20

(PIP)

PSP

Low Priority

High Priority

DID and TIE trunks should use HPR and be installed in card slot 1. Superloops do not require any trunks assigned as high priority.

basic-1

Manual Incoming Denied

Manual Incoming Allowed

Media Security Never

Media Security Best Effort

(Deny) Network Hook Flash

Allow Network Hook Flash

Trunk Hook Switch Flash feature over 911P trunks.

Make-break ratio for dial pulse dialing

10 pulses per second

(see explanation below)

20 pulses per second

P12 option:

• P10 = primary 10 pps make-break ratio of 50%

• P12 = secondary 10 pps make-break ratio of

50% basic-1 basic-5.0

0 basic-5.0

0 basic-21

All three make-break ratios can be set for XUT,

XUTJ and XEM trunks. See prompts P10R, P12R and P20R in LD 97.

Use P10 for PPS1 and P12 for PPS2 XUT/XEM trunks.

For Small System, P10 and P12 is also used for

DTI/DTI2 trunks. P12 applies only to XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks.

Polarity Insensitive card. (PIP is used for QPC330 and QPC331 packs)

Polarity Sensitive card (use PSP for QPC218,

QPC219 and QPC295 packs). When using PSP in

North America, the trunk route should have message registration set to reverse battery; the LD

16 prompt MR should be set to RVB.

basic-10

246 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

BST

Comment

Battery Supervised card (SIGL = LOP is required)

For loop start trunks with Answer Supervision in

U.S., the NT8D14 Universal Trunk does not provide Message Registration, PPM or PIP operation.

This can be used for Answer Supervision on

Ground Start trunks.

Not valid for XCOT trunks.

Pack/Rel

basic-4

SHL

LOL

Short line Class of Service

Long line Class of Service

SHL replaces NTC and LOL replaces TRC and

VNL for XDID and XCOT trunks.

basic-20

(SPCD)

SPCA

MIA

(THFD)

THFA

Analog Semi-Permanent Connections Denied

Analog Semi-Permanent Connections Allowed

Manual Incoming Allowed basic-24

(TRC)

NTC

VNL

Centrex Switchhook Flash Denied

Centrex Switchhook Flash Allowed basic-14

Transmission Class of Service

Transmission Compensated

Non-Transmission Compensated

Via Net Loss

The default depends on the signaling type (SIGL)

• DX2 = VNL

• DX4 = VNL

• EAM = VNL

• EM4 = VNL

• GRD = NTC

• LDR = NTC

• LOP = NTC

• OAD = NTC tip-19

VNL Class of Service is allowed with Universal

Trunk Tie trunks.

For XDID and XCOT cards:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 247

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

UNR

Response Comment

• NTC is replaced by SHL

• TRC and VNL are replaced by LOL

Existing databases is converted automatically. For

EM4 and WR4, AC15 = 2280 Hz. on XFEM trunks:

• NTC and VNL are equivalent to TIE designation

• TRC is equivalent to LINK designation

• TIE = PBX-PBX connections via leased line

• LINK = PBX-PBX connections on-premises

Pack/Rel

(CTD)

(WTA)

WTD

(XARF)

ARF

(XBAT)

BAT

(XBTS)

Conditionally Toll Denied. CTD is the default for trunk types: TIE, CSA, ATVN, FGD, and IDA

Conditionally Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Unrestricted. Only UNR is allowed for CO, FX and

WATS trunks. UNR is the default for all trunk types except: TIE, CSA, ATVN, FGD, and IDA

Warning Tone Allowed

Warning Tone Denied basic-7

ARF Supervised COT denied

ARF Supervised COT allowed

Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL

= LOP. Answer YES to prompt SUPN then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt

STYP.

basic-7

Battery Supervised COT denied

Battery Supervised COT allowed

Answer YES to prompt SUPN then enter the appropriate Supervision Type at prompt STYP.

Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL

= LOP.

basic-7

Busy Tone Supervised COT denied basic-7

248 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CMF

CONN

CPAD

CUST

DDSL

DES

DTCR

Response

BTS

Comment

Busy Tone Supervised COT allowed

Answer YES to prompt SUPN and then enter the appropriate supervision type at prompt STYP.

Pack/Rel

(XLBS)

LBS

(XREP)

RVEP

(NO)

YES

(4)-48

Loop Break Supervised COT denied

Loop Break Supervised COT allowed

Answer YES to prompt SUPN and then enter the appropriate Supervision Type at prompt STYP.

Must have TYPE = COT, XTRK = XCOT and SIGL

= LOP.

basic-7 rpa-15 Reversed Ear Piece denied

Reversed Ear Piece allowed

The E-lead is reversed for a radio paging trunk

Call Modification

Call Modifications allowed

Modifications not allowed basic-1

(COUT)

CIN

Define the maximum number of broadcast connections allowed for this trunk.

ranbrd-23 ran-23

Carrier Pad Out for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks xpe-15

Carrier Pad In for 4-wire E & M duplex trunks

With CPAD = CIN, a 7 dB pad attenuates the trunk input and a 16 dB pad attenuates the trunk output.

xx

0-15 x...x

Customer number (defined in LD 15 and prompted when REQ = NEW) basic-1 basic-7 Digital DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link

DASS2/DPNSS D-channel

Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs (DES is an optional entry) basic-22

(NO) YES Digit Collection Ready

Send acknowledge when digit collection resources such as DTR, MFC, and S/R are ready and attached.

Prompted when TYPE = DID and CLS = DTN.

Prompted with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131. Prompted when basic-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 249

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

IAPG

INC

Prompt

DTSL

EMTY

FCAR

FWTM

IPRI

IPTN

Response

0-159

Comment

the incoming trunk is analog, answer supervision is on, and EOS is set to BSY.

Digital Trunk Signaling Link

DASS2/DPNSS Signaling Link

Not supported on Small System and CS 1000S

Pack/Rel

basic-7

(TY2)

TY1

BPO l ch

E & M Type

4-wire E&M Type 2

4-wire E&M Type 1

4 wire E&M British Post Office. (BPO is allowed if

TYPE = XFEM and SIGL = EAM or EM4)

Precede with X to delete xpe-15

X

(NO) YES Forced Charge Account

(NO) Firmware Timing for Trunk Hook Flash is not used by the card

YES Firmware timing for Trunk Hook Flash is used by the card

This prompt appears if Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290, Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107 or Trunk Hook Flash (THF) package

157 are enabled.

chg-1 ccb-21

(0)-15

(YES)

NO

Event Group for USM message

Increasing channel numbers and member numbers

Increasing channel numbers and decreasing member numbers basic-23 basic-7

Incoming PRI channel

This is the PRI channel through which the Meridian

1 gains access to the PSPDN. Where:

• Loop = PRI loop number

• Channel = PRI channel that holds the incoming nailed up connection (between 1-23) mph-19

(NO)

YES

ITG card Physical TN.

The Terminal Number is a trunk unit on ITG card.

The Terminal Number is used for concentration purpose.

IPTN is output only if XTRK is ITG1 or ITG2.

basic-25

250 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

LDOP

MAXU

MFL

MFLI

Response

(LOOP)

BOP

Comment Pack/Rel

Loop Dial Outpulsing

Loop outpulsing for Loop Dial Repeating signalling xpe-15

Battery Oupulsing for Loop Dial Repeating signalling

1-32

1-24

32

(0)-15

(0)

1

Maximum number of Internet Protocol (IP) units supported

Meridian Integrated IP Telephony Gateway (dual slot)

Meridian Integrated IP Telephony Gateway (single slot)

Maximum number of voice media channels supported

For CS 1000S itg- 25 basic-2

Multifrequency digit level. MFL is not prompted for

Option 11C.

Expanded from 0-7 to 0-15 for Meridian 1 for superloop only. Enter the MFC digit level required for signals to the Public Switched Telephone

Network (PSTN).

Non-superloop codes and values:

Codes Level Values

(0) -5 dBm 1 -8 dBm 2 -9 dBm

3 -10 dBm 4 -11 dBm 5 -12 dBm 6 -13 dBm 7 -32 dBm basic-2

Superloop codes and values:

Codes Level Values

(0) -8 dBm 1 - 11 dBm 2 -

12 dBm 3 - 13 dBm 4 - 14 dBm

5 - 15 dBm 6 - 16 dBm 7 -

31 dBm 8 - 4 dBm 9 - 5 dBm

10 - 6 dBm 11 - 7 dBm 12 - 9 dBm 13 - 10 dBm 14 Spare

15 Spare

Multifrequency transmit level identifier. MFLI is prompted exclusively for the Small System. MFLI is prompted when CLS = MFC, MFE, or MFK.

opt11c-22

Use multifrequency transmit level as defined for

MFTL0 in LD 97.

Use multifrequency transmit levels defined for

MFTL1 in LD 97.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 251

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

MFPD

MNDN

MODL

NCOS

NGRP

NITE

NMUS

OPRI

PCML

Response Comment

(NO) YES Multifrequency PAD

MFPD is prompted if CLS = TLD, CUN or CTD, and if the trunk type is CSA or TIE. TLD is recommended. MFPD is not prompted if the route is 1.5 DTI and CLS= MFC.

Pack/Rel

basic-3 x...x

basic-1

1-127

Manual Directory Number

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. CLS should be MIA.

Model number for Small System

Model number for CS 1000S basic-14 basic-1

(0)-99

(0)-9 x...x

YES l ch

MU

A

Network Class of Service group

Night Service Group number

NGRP appears when ENS = YES in LD15. This prompt replaces the NITE prompt.

If ENS is changed from NO to YES while Night

Service is in effect, the system verifies that the

NITE number defined is a group number or a DN.

If a night DN or 0000 is defined, the existing NITE number is used.

ncos-1 basic-2

Night Service directory number

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to seven digits with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered.

Night Service applies to trunks terminating at the attendant. This prompt takes precedence over the

NITE and NIT1-NIT4 prompts in LD 15.

If a DN is defined here, the call goes to this DN. If there is no DN here, the call goes to the defined

LD 15 NITE prompts. Precede with X to remove.

basic-1

Network Music

Outgoing PRI channel (the PRI channel through which the Meridian 1 gains access to the PSPDN)

Where: Loop = PRI loop number and Channel =

PRI channel that holds the outgoing nailed up connection (between 1-23).

basic-5.0

0 mph-19 dti 2-15 Pulse Code Modulation Law

Mu-law

A-law

252 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PDCA

PPID

PRDN

PRIO

REQ

Response Comment

PCML is not prompted for JDMI loops. Prompted if loop is PRI2, DTI2, or if loop is PRI/DTI and is equipped with International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway

(GPRI) package 167.

Pack/Rel

(1)-16 xx x...x

(XHP)

YLP

CHG

END

LCHG

MOV

Pad Category table number

The PAD table must be defined in LD 73 first.

dti 2-15

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) country ID

Must be configured if PPM is enabled. One PPID type per card. Trunks must be removed from card to change PPID.

PPMID Frequency Recommended Country

(0) 50 Hz UK 1 12 kHz France

2 50 Hz France 3 16 kHz

Germany, Turkey, Egypt, Venezuela, Indonesia,

Finland 4 12 kHz Switzerland, Ireland,

Portugal, Italy, Spain, Lebanon, Turkey 5 12 kHz Denmark 6 16 kHz Norway,

Belgium 7 50 Hz Holland 8

12 kHz/50 Hz Australia (two different packs)

9-15 -------- Reserved for future use

Private Line Directory Number

PRDN must be defined in LD 11. This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

basic-7 basic-1 basic-7 Priority designation. Prompted if SIGL = DPN.

X High Priority

Y Low Priority

Used to determine which end has priority in a glare condition, where both sides seize the trunk at same time. XHP always has priority over YLP.

Request

Change existing data block

Exit overlay program

Print date and time that a trunk data block was last changed. The change can be the result of a NEW,

OUT, or CHG command.

basic-1

Move data block from one TN to another. Not valid for Small System and CS 1000S Models.MOV

cannot be used to move a Phantom TN.

MOV command cannot be used to move trunk data blocks.

basic-25

.4

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 253

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

RLDN

RTMB

SDCH

SEIZ

SFEX

SICA

Response

NEW x

OUT x

Comment

Add new data block to the system. Follow NEW with a value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive trunks.

You are not allowed to create more than one

Phantom TN at a time. When a value different than

1 is entered for the creation of a Phantom TN, it is simply ignored and only one TN is created.

Remove data block. Follow OUT with a value of

1-255 to remove that number of consecutive trunks.

Pack/Rel

x...x

Release Link trunk Directory Number

This DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150.

cas-1

0-511

1-510

0-127

1-510

0-511

1-4000

0-127

1-4000

(NO)

YES

Route number and Member number

Large System

Note:

CS 1000 Release 6.5 Virtual Trunks are limited to 3700 for SIP and 2400 for H.323.

The ISPC link is not used by a D-channel

The ISPC link is used by a D-channel

(NO) YES Automatic Guard Detection for outgoing trunk basic-1 basic-24

Small System

B-Channel Signaling is output if CHTY = BCH in

LD 16. A/B Bit Signaling is output if CHTY = ABCH in LD 16.

To use the ISDN Semi Permanent Connection

(ISPC) link, this entry must be an ISL TIE route.

Large System and CS 1000E system basic-4.0

0

Small System, CS 1000S system, MG 1000B, and

MG 1000T basic-4.0

0 ispc-22 basic-2 dti-5 (NO) YES Special digital FEX trunk

This is used on Digital Trunk Interface (DTI).

(1)-16 Signaling Category table number

The Digital Signaling Category table must be defined first.

dti 2-15

254 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SIGL

SMAS

Response Comment

See ABCD in LD 73. Default is 16 if loop type =

JDMI.

ALS

APNS

CIS

Level 3 signaling

ALS signaling on COT trunk with ground start

Alternate Private Network Signaling System

CIS three wire trunk signaling for IPE.

Commonwealth of Independent States (CIST) package 221 is required.

DAS

DPN

DX2

DX4

EAM

EM4

GRD

LDC

Digital Access Signaling System Number 2. This is allowed if DASS2 package 124 is equipped and

PRIV = NO in DTSL data block in LD 74.

Digital Private Network Signaling System Number

1, allowed for DPNSS package 123.

2-wire duplex

4-wire duplex. The Enhanced Universal Trunk card uses DX4 signaling.

E&M 2-wire

E&M 4-wire

LDR

LGR

LOP

OAD

WR4

Ground start

Loop calling, Disconnect Clear.

Accepted when TYPE = COT and UK package is equipped.

Loop Dial Repeating

Loop calling, Guarded Release. Accepted when

TYPE = COT and UK package is equipped.

Loop start

Outgoing Automatic, incoming dial

AC15 = 2280 Hz, 4-wire

Pack/Rel

tip-21

(NO)

YES

This ISPC is not acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link

This ISPC is acting as a MASTER when connecting data interfaces to the ISPC link

SMAS is prompted when SDCH =YES.

When the ISPC link is used to convey D-channel signaling, it is mandatory to have one side of the

ISPC link configured with SMAS=YES and the other side with SMAS=NO.

ispc-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 255

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

SREF

STRI

Response Comment

SMAS must be YES on the side of the ISPC link where the data interface is configured with the auto dialing capability.

Pack/Rel

1-9999999 ISDN Semi Permanent Connection (ISPC)

Reference Number

The ISPC reference number is defined by Telecom administration at the time of subscription. The response is limited to seven digits.

When REQ=NEW, the number given must be different than all the other ISPC reference numbers already associated with other Phantom trunk TNs.

DDL

IMM ispc-22

Start arrangement Incoming

Your response to STRI determines which type of signaling is used by the trunk to initiate digit sending or collection. Your STRI response should reflect the type of operation in use at the near end.

Delayed Dial

The terminating trunk returns an off-hook to the originating trunk, which is interpreted as an instruction not to send digits immediately. This delay allows the terminating end to find and attach digit collections equipment. When the equipment is attached, the terminating end returns on-hook which is interpreted as a signal to start sending digits.

For this application on incoming calls, the Meridian

PBX sends a non-programmable 256-384 ms pulse. For outgoing calls, the Meridian PBX expects a delay-dial pulse from the far end to terminate before sending digits. Some types of delay-dial operation can also be accommodated by the IMM option.

basic-5

Immediate

The terminating trunk is not expected to return a pulse telling the originating end to begin sending digits. In this application for incoming calls, the

Meridian 1 returns a 256-384 ms off-hook/on-hook wink to the far end. This wink accommodates certain types of delay-dial operation.

For outgoing calls, the Meridian 1 starts a 300 ms timer when the outgoing trunk is seized. Digits are sent out when an off-hook/on-hook wink returned from the far end ends, or when the 300 ms timer expires (whichever occurs first).

256 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

STRO

Response

MWNK

Comment

Modified Wink (MWNK) is printed automatically for

Taiwan R1 trunks.

Pack/Rel

twr1-24

OWK

PTSD

RT

Off-Hook Wink for RLR trunks equipped with signaling converter

This mode of operation is similar to wink except that the Meridian 1 waits one second after seizure before sending a wink start pulse. This arrangement applies only to release link remote trunks.

Proceed to Send for CEPT L1 signaling basic-20

WNK

SACK

Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.

RON/TRON start arrangement to be sent by the near end PABX upon reception of an Incoming

Seize

Wink or Fast Flash

The terminating trunk sends an off-hook/on-hook wink as in DDL operation. However, in WNK operation the pulse is interpreted as a signal that digit collection equipment has been attached. The pulse is expected to be of 140-290 ms duration.

For this application, the Meridian 1 first waits

128-256 ms after seizure and then returns a 256 ms pulse to the far end. After this, the Meridian 1 is ready to collect digits. On outgoing calls, the

Meridian 1 waits until the wink pulse is finished before sending digits.

basic-20

Seize Acknowledge for CEPT L1 signaling

Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.

Start arrangement Outgoing

Your response to STRO determines which type of signaling is used by the trunk to initiate digit sending or collection. Your STRO response should reflect the type of operation in use at the far end.

basic-20 basic-5

DDL

IMM

MWNK

OWK

PTSD

Delayed Dial

Immediate

Modified Wink (MWNK) is printed automatically for

Taiwan R1 trunks.

Off-Hook Wink for RLR trunks equipped with signaling converter

Proceed to Send for CEPT L1 signaling

Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.

twr1-24 xpe-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 257

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

STYP

Response

RT

Comment

RON/TRON start arrangement to be received by the near end PABX after an outgoing seize has been sent

SACK

WNK

Pack/Rel

xpe-20

Seize Acknowledge for CEPT L1 signaling

Allowed only for Tie trunk using WR4 signaling.

Wink or Fast Flash xpe-20

Supervision Type. STYP is prompted when SUPN

= YES.

For EPE equipment, only one response of PSP,

PIP or BST is accepted. For IPE equipment or with

XUT/EXUT, only one of BST, PIP, JDID, or JCO is accepted.

For XCOT, STYP accepts up to two responses.

The responses BAT, ARF and LBS are mutually exclusive. However, BTS can be used with any one of the aforementioned three responses.

basic-20

ARF

BAT

BST

(BTS)

(PSP)

JCO

When BTD and Japan packages are equipped,

BTS can be assigned to an XUT card. For Japan,

TYPE = COT, SIGL = LOP, SUPN = YES, STYP =

JCO BTS or TYPE = DID, SIGL = LOP, SUPN =

YES, STYP = JDID BTS.

ARF supervised trunks. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.

Battery Supervised COT. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.

Both Supervised Trunk

Incoming and Outgoing supervised LOP CO/FEX/

WATS trunk (QPC330/XUT/EXUT). BST and PIP are mutually exclusive.

Busy Tone Supervision. BTS is the default when

XTRK = XCOT. Must have XCOT LOP trunks. BTD package must be equipped. BTS can be configured with any one of PIP, BST, JCO or

JDID.

Polarity Sensitive Pack. PSP is the default when

SIGL = GRD.

Outgoing supervised LOP or GRD start CO/FEX/

WATS trunk (QPC218/XUT/EXUT)

Japan CO trunk.

Must have Japan Central Office Trunks (JPN) package 97 with LOP trunks (XUTJ). JCO and

BTS are no longer mutually exclusive.

258 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SUPN

SXS

T_TN

TGAR

TIMP

Response

(JDID)

Comment

Japan DID trunk.

JDID is the default when the trunk is a LOP DID trunk. Must have Japan Central Office Trunks

(JPN) package 97.

JDID is not automatically displayed.

(600)

900

1200

Pack/Rel

LBS

(PIP) l ch

Loop Break Supervision. Must have XCOT LOP trunks.

Polarity Insensitive Pack. PIP is the default when

SIGL = LOP.

Outgoing supervised Loop start CO/FEX/WATS trunk (QPC330/XUT/EXUT). PIP and BST are mutually exclusive.

(NO) YES Answer and disconnect supervision required

SUPN must = YES for a COT with Virtual Network

Service. For ground start trunks disconnect supervision is detected even if SUPN = NO.

The operation of answer supervision is affected if

Federal Communications Commission

Compliance for DID Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223 is equipped.

SUPN is automatically prompted YES for DID

LOP.

(NO) YES Step-by-step CO trunk

Only prompted for Universal Trunks XTRK or XUT when TYPE = CO. The central office reverses polarity on outgoing calls.

basic-1 xpe-15 mph-19

0-(1)-31

Tandem PRI connection. Where:

• Loop = PRI loop number

• Channel = PRI channel that holds the outgoing nailed up connection (between 1-23)

If the connection exists, both channels are displayed. Prompted if TYPE = TCON.

Trunk Group Access Restriction. The default of (1) automatically blocks direct access.

basic-1

Termination Impedance. Prompted if XTRK = XEM or XUT.

600 ohms tip/xpe-19

900 ohms

1200 ohms

Use 1200 ohms for RAN trunks and (600) or 900 for all others.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 259

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

TN

Prompt

TKID

Response Comment

When using the Enhanced Universal Trunk card only 600 or 900 ¾ terminating impedance is allowed. However, more Terminating and Balance impedance (BIMP) combinations are available.

The terminating and balance impedance options are:

TIMP BIMP

600 600 600 3COM 900 3COM 900 900

900 3CM2 600 3CM2

For XUT trunks, the Termination Impedance or

TIMP must be compatible with the Balance

Impedance or BIMP.

Pack/Rel

The following combination of BIMP/TIMP are allowed:

Timp Impedance Bimp Impedance

600 ohms 3-component or 3com 900 ohms 3-component or 3com 600 ohms 600 ohms 1200 ohms 600 ohms

For XEM trunks, TIMP must be set to 600.

When CLS = JDID, TIMP must be set to 600.

nnnnnnn Trunk Identifier

Does not have to be unique. Default is no trunk identifier assigned.

basic-6 l s c u Terminal Number, Large System format basic-1 l s c u c u l = 0-159 l = 0-255 with Fibre Network Fabric

Format for CS 1000E, Where l = 0, 4, 8, - 252: superloop number in multiples of 4

Where s = fnf-25 basic-4.0

0

• 0-1: MG 1000E on superloop

• 0-1: MG 1010 on superloop

Where c = basic-6.0

0

• 1-4, 7-10: chassis on superloop

• 1-10: cabinet on superloop

• 1-10: MG 1010 on superloop basic-5.0

0 basic-6.0

0

Where u = 0-31

Terminal Number, Small System format For Option

11C basic-14

260 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• c = 1-50

• u = 0-31

For Option 11C Chassis

• c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

• u = 0-31

Terminal Number, CS 1000S system format

• c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

• u = 0-31

Format for MG 1000B Chassis, where: c = card and u = unit

• c = 0-4, 7-10

• u = 0-31 l ch c u

Pack/Rel

basic-1 basic-4.0

0

Format for MG 1000T, where:

• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

• u = 0-31

Terminal Number for digital trunks when TYPE =

RDC or VDC: l = 0-159, Large System l = 0, 4, 8 - 252, CS 1000E basic-4.0

0 fnf-25 l = 0-255: loops, Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric

• l = 1-9 Option 11C l = 1-9, 11-19, 21-29, 31-39,

41-49, Option 11C with Survivable IP l = 11-14,

21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S l = 0-4, 7-10,

11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50 for MG 1000T

• ch = channel 1-24 for 1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI or 1-30 for 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.

sipe-25 basic-1.0

basic-4.0

TN cannot belong to a phantom loop. TYPE must be TIE if this TN is on a Phantom loop.

TN is not prompted for model sets.

Terminal Number of the first Virtual Trunk

For CS 1000S system, where: c = 61-99 basic-2.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 261

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

TOTN

TYPE

Response Comment

For MG 1000T, where: c = 61-69 xx xx l s c u cu cu l ch

ADM

ADM M

Pack/Rel

basic-4.0

0

PRI loop and channel atvn-25.4

7 basic-1 To Terminal Number. TOTN is prompted when

REQ = MOV. TOTN cannot be a phantom loop.

Format for Large System

Format for CS 1000E

Format for Small System

Format for CS 1000S system

Format for MG 1000B, and MG 1000T, where: c = card and u = unit

Loop and channel for digital trunks when TYPE =

RDC or VDC

Add-on Data Module data block

Data port interfacing with a data line card

Small System and CS 1000S Model basic-4.0

0 basic-7 basic-1.0

basic-4.0

0 basic-1

AWR

AWR M

CAA

Automatic Wake Up RAN/Music trunk data block.

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model CAA M

CAM

CAM M

CBCT

COT

COT M

CSA

CSA M

CAMA trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

NI-2 CBC trunk

Central Office Trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

262 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DIC

DIC M

Comment

Dictation trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

DID

DID M

FEX

FEX M

Direct Inward Dial trunk data block.

Per FCC regulations, DID trunks used in the U.S.

must be properly designated for answer supervision. Refer to FCC Compliance for DID

Answer Supervision in Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106. For an ISPC link when SDCH = YES, TYPE = DID .

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Foreign Exchange trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Pack/Rel

FGDT

IMUS

Feature Group D Trunk data block

IP Music trunk data block basic-7.0

0

IPAV

IPTI

IRAN

IP for ATVN

IP TIE trunk data block

IP Recorded Announcement trunk data block basic-7.0

0

ISA

MCU

MDM

MDM M

MUS

MUS M

PAG

Integrated Services Access trunk data block. Also called Call-By-Call service trunk type.

There is no provision against the use of non-

QPC237 trunk types for the analog ISA service route. Only TIE and ISA trunks are applicable for directly connecting SL-1 PBX to SL-1 PBX.

Meridian Communications Unit.

Modem/Data Module data block.

Data port interfacing with QPC60/2500 type card.

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Music trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Paging trunk data block

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 263

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

XDIC

TIE M

VAC

VDC

VGW

WAT

WAT M

(MUT)

NOR

RLM

RLM M

RLR

RLR M

TCON

TIE

Response

PAG M

Comment

Small System and CS 1000S Model

R232

R232 M

R422

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in RS-232

Data mode data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

R422 M

RAC

RAN

RAN M

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in RS-422

Data mode data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Real Analog Channel data block

Recorded Announcement trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Pack/Rel

RCD

RDC

Recorder trunk data block

Real Digital Channel data block

Release Link Main trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Release Link Remote trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Tandem Connection for MPH and PRI connections

TIE trunk data block For an ISPC link when SDCH

= NO, TYPE must be TIE.

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Virtual Analog Channel data block

Virtual Digital Channel data block

Voice Gateway

Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Mute outpulsing for DIC trunks

Normal outpulsing for DIC trunks xpe-15

264 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

XTRK

Response

DB32

Comment

Extended trunk. Prompted for superloops when defining the first unit. Packages 97 and 294 must be equipped.

VGW channels configured on 32 port DSP daughterboards

Pack/Rel

tip/xpe-19 basic-5.0

0

DB96

EXUT

IPMS

ITG1

ITG2

ITG8

ITGP

Note:

DB32 blocked for MGX

VGW channels configured on 96 port DSP daughterboards basic-5.0

0

Note:

DB96 restricted to cards 8-10 or 11-13 for MGX

Enhanced Extended Universal Trunk

IP Media Services Extended Trunk basic-5.0

0 basic-7.0

0

ITG card (1 cardslot circuit card)

ITG card (2 cardslot circuit card)

ITG 486 8-port card

ITG-P 24-port card itg- 25 itg- 25 basic-3.0

basic-3.0

MC8

MC32

M32S

XCOT

XDID

XEM

XFEM

XUT

VTRK

Media Card 8-port

Media Card 32-port (MC32) or Media Card 32-port

Secure (MC32S)

Media Card 32S basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-5.0

0

Extended CO trunk card. Type must be COT or

DID. If one or more units are to be used on a PPM route, then unit 0 must be defined as a PPM route member. If not, PPM do not function for any other unit on the card.

Extended DID trunk card

Extended E & M trunk card

Extended Flexible E & M trunk card

Extended Universal Trunk card

Virtual trunk for CS 1000S basic-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 265

LD 14: Trunk Data Block

Prompt

ZONE

Response

0-255 0–

8000

Comment

Zone Number which the physical unit of the ITG card belongs.

ZONE number is not checked against Overlay

117.

If xtrk is ITG1 or ITG2 and if IPTN is YES, the data block is saved and Overlay 14 returns to the REQ prompt after ZONE prompt

Pack/Rel

basic-25 basic-7.0

0

266 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 14: LD 15: Customer Data Block

This program allows data blocks for customers to be created or modified. When the Overlay is loaded, the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:

CDB000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx

Overlay program 15 is structured to allow changes to be made by entering the desired gate opener mnemonic at the TYPE: prompt. The prompt sequence associated with that gate opener is then prompted in the usual manner. Once the end of the sub prompts has been reached, the Customer Data Block is updated and saved.

Enhanced input processing has also been applied to the REQ: and TYPE: prompts in LD 15. Thus, if the prompt ends with a colon a list of possible responses can be obtained by entering '?' followed by a carriage return. The REQ: and TYPE: prompts also accept abbreviated responses, thus allowing the user to only enter the first three unique characters of the gateway name.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Contents:

Customer data block

on page 268

Default Customer Data Block on page 270

Data Block: AML (Application Module Link) on page 272

Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)

on page 273

Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles) on page 274

Data Block: AWU (Automatic Wake Up Data) on page 276

Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data) on page 277

Data Block: CCS (Controlled Class of Service)

on page 278

Data Block: CDR (Call Detail Recording)

on page 278

Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)

on page 279

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 267

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Section

Data Block: FFC (Flexible Feature Codes) on page 280

Data Block: FTR (Features and options) on page 280

Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)

on page 285

Data Block: ICP (Intercept Computer Update) on page 286

Data Block: IMS (Integrated Message Service)

on page 286

Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments) on page 287

Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers) on page 289

Data Block: MON (Set-based Monitoring)

on page 290

Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations) on page 291

Data Block: NET (Networking) on page 292

Data Block: NIT (Night Service) on page 295

Data Block: OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security) on page 296

Data Block: PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering) on page 296

Data Block: PWD (Password)

on page 297

Data Block: RDR (Call Redirection) on page 297

Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement) on page 299

Data Block: TIM (Timers) on page 300

Data Block: TST (Test lines)

on page 301

Customer data block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

AML_DATA

ANI_DATA

ATT_DATA

Response

CHG

CDB xx

Comment

Change existing data block

Customer Data Block

Customer number

(NO) YES Change Application Module Link options (see

Data Block:

AML (Application Module Link)

on page 272)

(NO) YES Change Automatic Number Identification numbers (see

Data

Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)

on page 273)

(NO) YES Change Attendant Console options (see

Data Block: ATT

(Attendant Consoles) on page 274)

268 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response Comment

AWU_DATA (NO) YES Change Automatic Wake Up options (see

Data Block: AWU

(Automatic Wake Up Data) on page 276)

CAS_DATA (NO) YES Change Centralized Attendant Service options (see

Data

Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)

on page 277)

CCS_DATA (NO) YES

Change Controlled Class of Service options (see Data Block:

CCS (Controlled Class of Service)

on page 278)

CDR_DATA (NO) YES Change CDR and Charge Account options (see

Data Block:

CDR (Call Detail Recording)

on page 278)

FCR_DATA (NO) YES

Change New Flexible Code Restriction options (see

Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)

on page 279)

Data

FFC_DATA

FTR_DATA

(NO) YES

Change Flexible Feature Code options (see Data Block: FFC

(Flexible Feature Codes) on page 280)

(NO) YES Change Features and options (see

Data Block: FTR

(Features and options) on page 280)

HSP_DATA

ICP_DATA

IMS_DATA

INT_DATA

(NO) YES

Change Hospitality Management options (see Data Block:

HSP (Hospitality Management) on page 285)

(NO) YES Change Intercept Computer update (se

Data Block: ICP

(Intercept Computer Update) on page 286)

(NO) YES

Change Integrated Message Service options (see Data Block:

IMS (Integrated Message Service)

on page 286)

(NO) YES

Change Intercept treatment options (see Data Block: INT

(Intercept Treatments) on page 287)

LDN_DATA (NO) YES

Change Listed Directory Numbers (see Data Block: LDN

(Listed Directory Numbers) on page 289)

MPO_DATA (NO) YES

Change Multi-Party Options (see Data Block: MPO (Multi-

Party Operations)

on page 291)

NET_DATA

NIT_DATA

(NO) YES Change ISDN and ESN Networking options (see

Data Block:

NET (Networking) on page 292)

(NO) YES Change Night Service options (see

Data Block: NIT (Night

Service) on page 295)

OAS_DATA (NO) YES Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options (see

Data Block:

OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security)

on page 296)

PPM_DATA (NO) YES Change Periodic Pulse Metering options (see

Data Block:

PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering) on page 296)

PWD_DATA (NO) YES

Change Customer related Passwords (see Data Block: PWD

(Password) on page 297)

RDR_DATA (NO) YES Change Call Redirection (see

Data Block: RDR (Call

Redirection) on page 297)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 269

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response Comment

ROA_DATA (NO) YES Change Recorded Overflow Announcement (see

Data Block:

ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement) on page 299)

SLS_DATA

TIM_DATA

TST_DATA

(NO) YES

Change SIP Line Services options (see Data block: SLS (SIP

Line Services) on page 300

(NO) YES Change Timers (see

Data Block: TIM (Timers)

on page 300)

(NO) YES

Change Test lines (see

page 301)

Data Block: TST (Test lines)

on

Note:

This Prompts and responses table does not list prompts which appear under each gate opener. To find prompts which appear under a given gate opener, refer to the page listed in the Comment section of this table.

Default Customer Data Block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ANI_DATA

ANAT

ANLD

PANI

CIS_ANI

- S_SIZE

Response

NEW Request = NEW

Comment

DEFAULT Type = DEFAULT (Default Customer Data Block) xx Customer number

Automatic Number Identification prompts are automatically output when adding a new customer

ANI billing number for attendants making ANI calls x...x

x...x

ANI Listed DN

(NO) YES M911 Pseudo ANI display

(NO) YES ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.

(0)-2000 Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.

- - S_ENTRY 1-2000

- - DNLG 0-(4)-15

- - LEC

- - ADDG

0-99..99

Entry of ANI table applying to a set

DN Length

Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.

0-(8)-99..9

Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).

- - ANDN 0-99..99

Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.

Up to 15 digits can be entered.

270 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- CIS_ENT

- - CAC0

- - CAC1

- - CAC2

- - CAC3

- - CAC4

- - CAC5

- - CAC6

- - CAC7

- - CAC8

- - CAC1

- - CAC2

- - CAC3

- - CAC4

- - CAC5

- - CAC6

- - CAC7

- - CAC8

- - CAC9

- - DFLT

Prompt

- R_SIZE

Response

(1)-512

- R_ENTRY (0)-aa

- - DNLG 0-(4)-15

- - LEC

- - ADDG

0-99..99

Comment

Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.

ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified

DN Length

Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.

0-(8)-99..9

Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).

- - ANDN 0-99..99

Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.

Up to 15 digits can be entered.

(NO) YES CAC Conversion table option CACC

- MFC_ENT (0)-31

- - CAC0 0-(3)-9

CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9

CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or

MFC CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table

(0)-31

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into MFC CAC

MFC value corresponding to CIS 0

MFC value corresponding to CIS 1

MFC value corresponding to CIS 2

MFC value corresponding to CIS 3

MFC value corresponding to CIS 4

MFC value corresponding to CIS 5

MFC value corresponding to CIS 6

MFC value corresponding to CIS 7

MFC value corresponding to CIS 8

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 271

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

- - CAC9

- DFLT

Response

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

Comment

MFC value corresponding to CIS 9

CIS value used when CIS CAC has not been received, or CIS

CAC received is not in the CIS CAC list of this table

Data Block: AML (Application Module Link)

GP03

GP04

GP05

GP06

GP07

GP08

GP09

GP10

GP11

GP12

GP13

GP14

GP15

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE: AML_DATA Application Module Link

Comment

Change existing data block

CUST

OPT

VSID

GP02 xx a..a

0-127 n n n n n n

Customer number

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

Value-Added Server Identifier

Group 2 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

Group 3 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 4 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 5 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 6 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 7 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 8 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 9 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 10 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 11 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 12 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 13 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 14 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 15 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

272 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)

Data Block: ANI (Automatic Number Identification)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ANAT

ANLD

CIS_ANI

- S_SIZE

Response

CHG

Comment

Change existing data block

ANI_DATA Automatic Number Identification xx Customer number x...x

x...x

ANI Attendant Billing number

ANI Listed Directory Number

(NO) YES ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.

(0)-2000 Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.

- - S_ENTRY 1-2000

- - DNLG 0-(4)-15

- - LEC

- - ADDG

0-99..99

Entry of ANI table applying to a set

DN Length

Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.

0-(8)-99..9

Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete

ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL

16).

- - ANDN

- R_SIZE

0-99..99

(1)-512

Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.

Up to 15 digits can be entered.

Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.

- R_ENTRY (0)-aa

- - DNLG 0-(4)-15

- - LEC

- - ADDG

0-99..99

ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified

DN Length

Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.

0-(8)-99..9

Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete

ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than ANSZ digits (defined in OVL

16).

- - ANDN 0-99..99

Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0.

Up to 15 digits can be entered.

(NO) YES CAC Conversion table option CACC

- MFC_ENT (0)-31

- - CAC0 0-(3)-9

- - CAC1 0-(3)-9

CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 273

LD 15: Customer Data Block

- CIS_ENT

- - CAC0

- - CAC1

- - CAC2

- - CAC3

- - CAC4

- - CAC5

- - CAC6

- - CAC7

- - CAC8

- - CAC9

- DFLT

Prompt

- - CAC2

- - CAC3

- - CAC4

- - CAC5

- - CAC6

- - CAC7

- - CAC8

- - CAC9

- - DFLT

(0)-31

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

0-(6)-10

Response

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

Comment

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9

CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or

MFC CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table

CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into MFC CAC

MFC value corresponding to CIS 0

MFC value corresponding to CIS 1

MFC value corresponding to CIS 2

MFC value corresponding to CIS 3

MFC value corresponding to CIS 4

MFC value corresponding to CIS 5

MFC value corresponding to CIS 6

MFC value corresponding to CIS 7

MFC value corresponding to CIS 8

MFC value corresponding to CIS 9

CIS value used when CIS CAC has not been received, or CIS

CAC received is not in the CIS CAC list of this table

Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

ATT_DATA xx

Attendant Consoles

Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

274 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: ATT (Attendant Consoles)

- ITH2

- ITH3

RTSA

SACP

ABDN

IRFR

- IRFP

LFFD

RTIM

ATIM

AQTT

AODN

SPVC

- SBLF

- ITH1

Prompt Response

OPT

ATDN

NCOS

ATAC

- PWD2

CWUP

CWCL

CWTM

CWBZ

EFLL

MATT

LFTN

LFTN a...a

(0)-x...x

(0)-99

Comment

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

Attendant Directory Number

Network Class of Service for all attendant consoles for this customer xxxxx x...x

Attendant Administration Access Code

Second level administration Password

(NO) YES Call Waiting queue Update

(0)-255

(0)-255

Call Waiting Call Limit

Call Waiting Time (0)-511

(0)-511

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Call Waiting Buzz

(0)-8064 Efficiency Factor Loading Level

(NO) YES Consoles used as Message Center l s c u l s c u

Lamp Field array Terminal Number (Opt 11 format is cu) (l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u)

Second Lamp Field array Terminal Number (Opt 11 format is cu)

(l s c u ranges are defined on l s c u) x00...x00

xxx yyy zzz Recall Timers for Slow-Answer, Camp-On and Call Waiting

(0)-126

0-(30)-255 x...x

(0)-63

(NO) YES

1-255

1-255

1-255 aaaa aaaa

First Directory Number of lamp field array

Attendant Alternative Answering Timer

Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds

Attendant Overflow DN

Supervisory Console

Standard Busy Lamp Field

Visual Indication Threshold 1

Visual Indication Threshold 2

Visual Indication Threshold 3

Recall To Same Attendant (aaaa = (RSAD), RSAA, or RSAX)

Semi-Automatic Camp-On (aaaa = (NO), ALL, or SNGL)

(NO) YES Activation of the Attendant Blocking of DN feature

(NO) YES Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward Password x...x

Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward Password

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 275

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

XRFR (NO) YES

Comment

External Attendant Remote Call Forward Password

- XRFP

ADHT x...x

(0)-14

External Attendant Remote Call Forward Password

Attendant Delay On-Hold Timer in seconds

AFNT

AFBT

(0)-126 Attendant Forward No Answer Timer (must be an even number)

(0)- AFNT Attendant Forward Buzz Tone (Entry can be equal to or less than response to AFNT prompt and must be an even number)

IDBZ

PBUZ

ICI

RICI

(NO) YES Trunk Buzzing IADN calls in the attendant queue.

xx yy Flexible Priority Buzz cadence for IADN and Code Blue calls.

0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Call Indicators xx xx...

ICI key numbers that may receive Recorded Overflow

Announcement

Data Block: AWU (Automatic Wake Up Data)

LA12

LA21

LA22

LA31

LA32

LA41

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

AWU_DAT

A xx

AWU

ATRC

Customer number

(NO) YES Automatic Wake Up

(NO) YES Attendant Recall allowed

Comment

Change existing data block

Automatic Wake Up Data

RANF

RAN1

RAN2

LA11

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

Music route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16

Primary Ran route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16

Secondary RAN route TYPE must be AWR in LD 16

Primary RAN route for Language1

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

Secondary RAN route for Language1

Primary RAN route for Language 2

Secondary RAN route for Language 2

Primary RAN route for Language 3

Secondary RAN route for Language 3

Primary RAN route for Language 4

276 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)

Prompt Response

LA42 0-511

LA51

LA52

0-511

0-511

R2BN

R2ED

NRWU

TAWU

- WUD

- - STE

Comment

Secondary RAN route for Language 4

Primary RAN route for Language 5

Secondary RAN route for Language 5

0-23 0-59 RAN2 Begin time; hour, minute

0-23 0-59 RAN2 End time; hour, minute

2-(5)

1-(3)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Number of Rings for Wake Up before recall to attendant

Number of Tries for an unanswered AWU call

Is Wake-up Delimiter required

Is Standard Time Entry allowed?

Data Block: CAS (Centralized Attendant Service Data)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

Comment

Change existing data block

CAS_DATA Centralized Attendant Service Data xx Customer number

CAS

- MAIN

(NO) YES Centralized Attendant Service main

(NO) YES CAS Main

- - CHDN x...x

- - HRCL 0-512

CAS silent Hold DN

Hold Recall timer in units of 2 seconds

- - ICI

- DFLT

- LDNT

- LADN

- RLA

0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

(NO) YES Default

(NO) YES Listed Directory Number Tone x...x

Local Attendant Directory Number

0-511 Release Link route number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 277

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data Block: CCS (Controlled Class of Service)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

CCRS

Comment

Change existing data block

CCS_DATA Controlled Class of Service xx aaa

Customer number

ECC1 aaa

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) Restricted Service (aaa =

(UNR), CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 1 (aaa = (UNR),

CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)

ECC2

CNCS

PELK aaa

0-99

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 2 (aaa = (UNR),

CTD, FR1, FR2, FRE, SRE, or TLD)

Network Controlled Class of Service for Electronic Lock

(NO) YES Electronic Lock on Private Lines

Data Block: CDR (Call Detail Recording)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

CDR

- IMPH

- OMPH

- AXID

- TRCR

- CDPR

- ECDR

- BDI

- OTCR

Response

CHG

CDR_DATA Call Detail Recording

Comment

Change existing data block xx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Customer number

Change Call Detail Recording data

CDR for Incoming Packet data call

CDR for Outgoing Packet data call

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

Auxiliary Identification output in CDR record

Carriage Return sent after each CDR message

Coordinated Dialing Plan Record option

End-to-End Signaling digits in CDR record

Buffer Data Interface for CDR

CDR provided, based on Originally dialed Trunk Route

278 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)

Prompt

- PORT

- - CNI

- BCAP

CHLN

FCAF

- CHMN

- FCNC

Response

0-15 a...a

(NO) YES

(0)-23

(NO) YES

(1)-CHLN

0-99

Comment

CDR port

Calling Number Identification (a...a = (DGTS), CLID, or

NONE)

Bearer Capability in CDR

Charge account number Length

Forced Charge Account active

Minimum number of digits for FCA code (Entry can be equal to or less than response to prompt CHLN)

FCA Network Class of Service

Data Block: FCR (Flexible Code Restriction)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

Comment

Change existing data block

FCR_DATA New Flexible Code Restriction xx Customer number

NFCR

- MAXT

- OCB1

- OCB2

(NO) YES

1-255

(0)-

(MAXT-1),

255

(0)-

(MAXT-1),

255

Enable New Flexible Code Restriction

Maximum number of NFCR translation tables

NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.

255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level 2. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.

255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

- OCB3

IDCA

- DCMX

(0)-

(MAXT-1),

255

NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level 3. Your entry can be either your response to the MAXT prompt minus one or 255.

255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

(NO) YES Incoming DID Digit Conversion allowed

1-255 Maximum number of IDC conversion tables

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 279

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data Block: FFC (Flexible Feature Codes)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

FFC_DATA Flexible Feature Code xx Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

CCRS

SCPL

SBUP

- PWD2

FFCS

- STRL aaa

0-8

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) Restricted Service

Station Control Password Length

(YES) NO Enable use of station control passwords for set based administration user level access xxxx PWD2 password for confirmation

(NO) YES Change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing indicator

1-3 String Length of end-of-dial indicator

- STRG xxx String to indicate end-of-dialing (Enterable characters are digits

0-9, *, and #.)

Auto Dial Delay in seconds ADLD

DFLT_SCPW

(0)-20

(NO) YES Allow or deny Default Station Control Password for IP

Phones.

MFAC x Mobile Feature Activation Code.

Data Block: FTR (Features and options)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

OPT

DGRP

IRNG

Response

CHG

FTR_DATA xx a...a

(0)-2046

(NO) YES

Comment

Change existing data block

Customer Features and options

Customer number

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

Maximum number of Dial Intercom Groups

Intercom Ring

280 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: FTR (Features and options)

TMON

PORT

STCB

NSCP

TFDR

RPA

MCDC

NAUT

IDEF

HCC

ALDN

ALRM

TIME

INT

RECD

- MCRT

SRCD

EEST

- DTMF

EESD

TTBL

ADCP

MUS

- MUSR

Prompt

PKND

DNDL

SPRE

LINK

- APL

PREO

BPSS

(NO) YES

0-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Response

(1)-4

(NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES

0-15

(0) 1

(NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(0)-31 xxxx

(NO) YES

0-511 aaaa x...x

(NO) YES

0-(15)

NO YES

(NO) YES

0-511

Comment

Number of digits Dialed for Group Pickup

Do Not Disturb Lamp on 500/2500 telephones

Special Prefix number (1-4 digits)

ACD DNIS Link option

Auxiliary Processor Link number

Pretranslation Option

Block Pretranslation on System Speed Call lists.

Set Relocation Security Code

End-to-End Signaling Tone to originating party

DTMF feedback tone

End-to-End Signalling Digit Display

Tone Table number

All-Digital Connection Prefix

Music for sets

Music Route for sets

Held Call Clearing (aaa = (NO), YES, or XFER)

Alarm Directory Number

Malicious Call Trace Alarm for internal or external calls

Time for the alarm in minutes

Internal

Recorder

Malicious Call Trace Recording Route number as defined in LD 16

Traffic Monitoring

Serial Data Interface Port Monitor

Station Camp-On Busy allowed

Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed

Trunk Failure Display Required

Radio Paging Allowed

Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed

Network Authorization Code

Internal/external definition

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 281

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

MTAR

LEND

MSCD

CPCI

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

CONF_DSP (NO) YES

- CNFFIELD (NO) YES

- -CNF_NAME (CONF) aaaa

- INTFIELD

- -INT_NAME

(NO) YES

(I) aaaa

- EXTFIELD (NO) YES

- -EXT_NAME (E) aaaa

DAPC

- TBL

- NPI

- - TON

- - - PREF

(NO) YES

1-15 aaa aaaa

0-9999

BSFE

- ACT_IDLE

- ACT_BUSY

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa

- DACT_IDLE

- DACT_BUSY

ARDL_ATTEMP

T

ASPCT

FXS

- FXSDN1 aaaa aaaa

1-(30)-60

(10)-180

YES (NO) x...x

Comment

Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction

List Entry Number Delimiter

Mandatory Speed Call Delimiter

Called Party Control on Internal Call (is not) is allowed for the customer

Change Conference Display configurations

Enable Conference Count Display Field

Change Conferees Count Display Field Name

Enable Internal Conferees Count display field

Change Internal Conferees Count display field

Enable Total External Conferees Count display field

Change Total External Conferees Count field name

Dial Access Prefix on CLID table entry option

Table Number

Numbering Plan

Type of Number

Access Prefix for a unique NPI/TON combination in the table.

Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement

Lamp status when boss's set has BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (WINK), FLSH, LIT or DARK

Lamp status when boss's set has BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (FLSH), WINK, LIT or DARK

Lamp status when boss's set doesn't have BSFE active and is idle, where aaaa = (DARK), WINK, LIT or FLASH

Lamp status when boss's set doesn't have BSFE active and is busy, where aaaa = (LIT), WINK, FLASH or DARK

Automatic Redial number of attempts

Analog Semi-Permanent Connection re-connection

Timer

Flexible Services

MADN of MIMS card 1

282 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: FTR (Features and options)

Prompt

DFLT_LANG

STS_MSG

MSG1

MSG2

MSG3

MSG4

MSG5

MSG6

MSG7

MSG8

Response

a...a

(NO) YES a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

Comment

Default language for M3900 on Remote Office.

Where a...a = (ENG), FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA,

NOR, SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,

RUS, LAT, TUR.

Modify Set-to-Set Messages

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 283

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

MSG9

Response

a...a

Comment

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

MSG10 a...a

Set-to-Set Message

Where:

• <CR> = keep current message

• <text string> = new message from 1-24 characters

VO_ALO

PCA

TPDN

VO_ALOHR

(NO) YES

(OFF) ON yyyy

(0)-23

Enable Virtual Office Automatic Logout.

Personal Call Assistant

Target PCA DN

MLPPSD xxxxxx

Virtual Office Automatic Logout time using 24 hour clock.

Default MLPP service domain used when no value is entered for the MLPPSD prompt in Overlay 87.

Where xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range 000000 to FFFFFF, used to signify a 24 bit binary integer. Default is 000000.

VO_CUR_ZONE_TD (Virtual Office: Current Zone for Time and Date option)

(NO) YES If VO_CUR_ZONE_TD is YES, Current Zone

(CUR_ZONE) is used for Time and Date, otherwise

Configured Zone is used. It allows the VO user to have the local time and date displayed on the IP phone used for VO login to a home call server.

VO_CUR_ZONE_ZDM (Virtual Office: Current Zone for Zone-based Digit Manipulation option)

(NO) YES

ZBD (NO) YES

If VO_CUR_ZONE_ZDM is YES, Current Zone

(CUR_ZONE) is used for ZDM, otherwise Configured

Zone is used. It allows VO users to use either local

PSTN connections of the call server where they are physically located (Current Zone), or remote PSTN connections of the call server where their VO TNs are configured (Configured Zone) depending on customers' preferences.

Enable/disable the Zone Based Dialing feature.

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

284 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)

Prompt

- DIALPLAN

Response

aaa

Comment

Configure the on-net dial plan (public or private) when

ZBD feature is enabled (controls DN/CLID processing).

Where:

• aaa = PUB (public on-net dial plan)

E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone

• aaa = PRV (private on-net dial plan)

7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Data Block: HSP (Hospitality Management)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

HSP_DATA Hospitality Management xx Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

FRAN

SRAN

IDR

AUTR

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

First RAN number for first PCR threshold

Second RAN number for second PCR threshold

Identification Error RAN number

Authcode Error RAN number

RLCR

FRAN

CLS1

0-511

0-511 aaa

NCS1

TGR1

CLS2

NCS2

TGR2

(0)-99

(0)-31 aaa

(0)-99

(0)-31

Relocation FFC Error RAN number

First RAN number for first PCR threshold

Class of Service 1 (aaa = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,

SPE, or TLD)

Network Class of Service

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Class of Service 2 (aaa = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,

SPE, or TLD)

Network Class of Service

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 285

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data Block: ICP (Intercept Computer Update)

- ICDN

- ECDN

- ICWN

- ICPS

- ICPR

- ICDL

- ICPD

- ICTD

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

ICP_DATA xx

Intercept Computer

Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

ICP

- APL

- NIPN

- ICCR

(NO) YES

0-15

0-(99)

Change Intercept Computer

Auxiliary Processor Link number used for ICP

Number of Intercept Positions that can be configured

(NO) YES Intercept Position Canceling Reply is sent if transfer is canceled from Intercept computer

- ICMM 0-9 Message number shown when the transfer is caused by a maintenance program

Internal Call DN x...x

x...x

(0)-511

External Call DN

Intercept Computer Owner aaa ICP Printer Search (aaa = (CIR) or COM)

0-<NIPN> ICP Printer number

3-(4)-7

(0)-9

CP DN Length

ICP Padding Digit

(NO) YES Intercept Computer Terminal Dial from directory

Data Block: IMS (Integrated Message Service)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

Comment

Change existing data block

IMS_DATA Change Integrated Messaging System features

CUST

IMS xx Customer number

(NO) YES Change Integrated Message System

286 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments)

Prompt Response

- SAMM (NO) YES Standalone Meridian Mail

Comment

- IMA

- - APL

(NO) YES

0-15

Integrated Messaging System enabled

Auxiliary Processor Link number for IMS

- UST

- - APL

- UMG

- - APL

(NO) YES

0-15

User Status Update enabled

Auxiliary Processor Link number for UST

(NO) YES User-to-User Messaging enabled

0-15 Auxiliary Processor Link number for UMG

Data Block: INT (Intercept Treatments)

CTRC

- RANR

CLDN

- RANR

NINV

- RANR

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ACCD

- RANR

Response

CHG

INT_DATA xx

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

CTVN

- RANR

MBNR

- RANR

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(OVF NAP OVF NAP) x...x

(NAP OVF NAP NAP) x...x

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

Comment

Change existing data block

Change Intercept Treatment

Customer number

Access Denied

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Call To Vacant Number

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Maintenance Busy Numbers

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Restricted Call

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Calls to Listed Directory Number

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Invalid NARS/BARS call

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 287

LD 15: Customer Data Block

- RANR

CONG

DLT

LLT

DNDT

MFVO

- RANR

MFVN

- RANR

MFCG

- RANR

LCKT

- RANR

Prompt

NITR

- RANR

Response

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

NRES

- RANR

NBLK

- RANR

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

UBRI

- RANR

RCLE

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(OVF OVF OVF ATN) x...x

(BSY BSY BSY BSY) x...x

(OVF NAP NAP NAP) x...x

(ATN OVF ATN ATN) x...x

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Comment

NARS/BARS Invalid Translation

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

NARS/BARS Restricted calls

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

NARS/BARS Blocked calls

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

MFC Call to Vacant Office

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

MFC Call to Vacant Number

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

MFC Congestion

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Call to a Lockout set

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Universal BRI

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Redirection Count Limit Exceeded as defined by

TRCL

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Congestion tone for all trunks busy condition (aaa

= (OVF) or BSY)

Direct Inward System Access Lockout treatment

(aaa = (OVF), ATN, or OFA)

Flexible Line Lockout treatment (aaa = (OVF),

ATN, or OFA)

Do Not Disturb intercept Treatment (aaa = (BST),

ATT, or RAN)

288 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers)

Prompt

- RRT

PINT

- PHIP

- RANR

PBLK

- RANR

PFAN

- RANR

PFNA

- RANR

PICP

- RANR

CPAS

0-511

Response Comment

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

(NO) YES Change Precedence Intercept treatment

(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Precedence dialed is higher than allowed x...x

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Call presented has higher precedence x...x

(ATN) RAN CPAS x...x

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer (Call Waiting)

(ATN) RAN CPAS

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer x...x

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

(ATN) RAN CPAS OVF Intercept treatment if called party cannot be preempted x...x

xxxx

Intercept Recorded Announcement Route number

Central Precedence answering station listed DN

Data Block: LDN (Listed Directory Numbers)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

LDN_DATA Listed Directory Numbers xx Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

OPT

DLDN

LDN0

LDA0

LDN1 a...a

xxxx

1-63 ALL x...x

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

(NO) YES Departmental Listed Directory Numbers

Listed Directory Number 0

Attendant consoles associated with LDN0

Listed DN 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 289

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

LDA1 a...a

LDN2

LDA2 x...x

a...a

LDN3

LDA3

LDN4

LDA4 x...x

a...a

x...x

a...a

LDN5

LDA5

LDBZ

ICI

Comment

Attendant consoles associated with LDN1 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)

Listed DN 2

Attendant consoles associated with LDN2 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)

Listed DN 3

Attendant consoles associated with LDN3 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL)

Listed DN 4

Attendant consoles associated with LDN4 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL) x...x

a...a

Listed DN 5

Attendant console associated with LDN5 (a...a = 1-63 or ALL) n n n n n n Listed Directory Number Buzzing assigned groups(n = 0-5)

0-19 aaaa Attendant Incoming Indicators

Data Block: MON (Set-based Monitoring)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

USBM

MON

Comment

Change existing data block

Set-based monitoring

(NO) YES UIPE Set-based monitoring

Where:

(NO) = all previously configured TNs are flushed, and subsequent prompts are not prompted.

YES = accept and prompt the next prompts.

<CR> = previously stored value taken.

TN1

TN2

TN3

TN4 l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

290 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations)

Prompt Response

TN5 l s c u c u

Comment

Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

TN6 l s c u c u Terminal Number For Large Systems For Small Systems and

CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Data Block: MPO (Multi-Party Operations)

- RALL

- CDTO

IFLS

MHLD

PCDS

- CNFD

- TGLD

- DISD

CCDO

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

FMOP

- RGNA

- AOCS

- RCY1

- RCY2

AFCO

- ACNS

Response

CHG

MPO_DATA Multi-Party Operations

Comment

Change existing data block xx

(NO) YES xxx yyy xxx yyy

1-(6)-15

1-(4)-15

Customer number

Flexible Misoperation Options

Ringing No Answer treatment

All Other Cases

Number of Cycles of Re-ringing before forwarding or disconnecting

Number of Cycles of Ringing before forwarding to transferring station

(NO) YES

2-(14)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Mandatory recall is required prior to dialing control digits

Control digit timeout; in multiples of two seconds

Ignore Switchhook Flash signal from 500/2500 sets

Manual Hold after inquiry enabled

(NO) YES Programming of Control Digits required

0-(1)-9, *, # Control Digit for Conference

0-(2)-9, *, # Control Digit for Toggle

0-(3)-9, *, # Control Digit for Disconnect

(NO) YES

(YES) NO aaa

Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment

(Automatic)/Manual Forced Camp-On

Attendant Clearing during Night Service (aaa = (NO), EXT, or

ALL)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 291

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data Block: NET (Networking)

AC2

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

OPT

Response

CHG

Comment

Change existing data block

NET_DATA Networking xx Customer number a...a

aaaa

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

Access Code 2 as defined in LD 86 (aaaa = NPA, NXX,

INTL, SPN, or LOC)

FNP

ISDN

VPNI

- PNI

- CLID

- - SIZE

- - INTL

- - ENTRY

- - - HNTN

- - - HLCL

- - - DIDN

- - - DIDN_LEN

- - - HLOC

- - - LSC

- ESA_APDN

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(0)-16283

(0)-16283

(NO) YES (Do not allow) Allow Calling Line Identification option

0-(256)-4000 CLID entry size

0-9999 xx

Country code (1-4 digits)

CLID entry to be configured

0-999999

0-99 ... 99

Enable Flexible Numbering Plan for customer

Integrated Services Digital Network

Virtual Private Network Identifier

Private Network Identifier a...a

0-7

0-x...x

0-x...x

(YES) NO

National code for home national number (1-6 digits)

Local code for home local number or Listed DN (1-12 digits)

Use DN as DID (a...a = YES, NO or SRCH)

Number of last few DN digits which needs to be sent over the network when DIDN is YES

Home location code (ESN) (1-7 digits)

Local steering code (1-7 digits)

- ESA_HLCL

- ESA_INHN

- CLASS_FMT x..x

(NO) YES aaa

Append the originating Directory Number after the Home

Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls

Home Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls

Home National Number in front of Home Local Number for Emergency Services Access calls

Send information to a CLASS set as the calling number

292 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: NET (Networking)

- - PCMC

- SATD

OCLI

TIDM

DASC

ROPT

DITI

TRNX

Prompt

- PINX_DN

- MBG

- BSGC

- PFX1

- PFX2

- HNPA

- HNXX

- CNTP

- RCNT

- PSTN

- - TNDM

EXTT

FTOP

APAD

Response

xx....x

(0)-65535

0-(65535) xxxx xxxx

200-999

100-9999 aaa

0-(5)

(NO) YES

0-(15)-31

0-(15)-31

0-(1)-5 aaa

(NO) YES xxxx aaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(FRES)

TBFT FTTB

FTLY x y

Comment

Node DN

Multi-location Business Group

Business Sub Group Consult-only

Prefix 1

Prefix 2

Home Number Plan Area code defined in LD 90

Prefix for Central Office defined in LD 90

Calling Number Type (aaa = (PDN) or LDN)

Redirection Count for ISDN calls

Public Service Telephone Networks

Tandem Threshold/Loop Avoidance Limit value permitted in a network connection

Pulse Code Modulation Conversions permitted, µ-Law to

A-Law or A-Law to µ-Law, in a network connection

Satellite Delays

CLID information for incoming/outgoing calls

Trunk Identity Meaningful

Display Access Code

Route Optimization (aaa = (NRO), RAX, ROA, or ROX)

DID to TIE connections allowed

(Prevent) Allow transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across the network

(Prevent) Allow unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.

Enter YES to indicate that a caller can transfer a call made to one outgoing trunk to another outgoing trunk without restrictions based on supervision. Trunk to trunk connection features such as TGAR/TARG and Trunk

Barring still apply as appropriate.

Enter NO to indicate that the transfer is allowed only if conditions regarding supervision are met. This prompt only applies to situations involving two calls originated by the same caller.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connection Option

Alternative Pad

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 293

LD 15: Customer Data Block

VNR

- RLI

NIT

Prompt

DMWM

MWNS

- REQ

- MFID

- - NOTI

- - MSSC

- - PRMT

- - CANC

- FLEN

- CDPL

- UDPL

NAS_ATCL

NAS_ACTV

FOPT

ARDL_ACCEPT

0-(20)-60

ARDL_RETRY 10-(30)-60

CNDN 0-x...x

- CNIP

CNAT

HMDN

CNTC

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa a

(NO) YES a aaa

YES NO

(NO) YES

0-1999

1-(16)

1-(10)

1-(19)

2-(8)

(YES) NO

(YES) NO

0-(6)-30

(YES) NO

0-x...x

xxxx x

Comment

Enable the output of DPNSSI Message Waiting Indication error messages

Message Waiting Indication Non Specified Information string to recognize.

Message Waiting Indication Non Specified Information table

Manufacturer Identifier

Non Specified Information string for Message Waiting

Notification a = any alphanumeric character

Subsequent Non Specified Information string for

Message Waiting notification

Non Specified Information string for Message Waiting

Cancellation

Vacant Number Routing

Route List Index as defined in LD 86

Flexible length of digits expected

Flexible length of VNR CDP

Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing (VNR) Uniform

Dialing Plan digits (UDP). Enter the maximum number of

UDP digits expected by VNR.

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) Interdigit

Timer

Network Attendant Service Attendant Control allowed

Network Attendant Service routing Activated

Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer

Automatic Redial Acceptance Timer in seconds

Automatic Redial Retry Timer in seconds

Customer Calling Number Identification DN on outgoing

MFC calls

Calling Number Identification Presentation

CNI Attendant DN on outgoing MFC calls

Home DN

Country Code

294 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: NIT (Night Service)

Prompt

NATC

INTC x

Response

xxx

Comment

National Access Code

International Access Code

For more information about configuring MALT VNR, see Element Manager System Reference

- Administration, NN43001-632 and IP Peer Networking Installation and Commissioning,

NN43001-313.

Data Block: NIT (Night Service)

NIT3

TIM3

NIT4

TIM4

RPNS

ENS

- NWT

- NNT

- NSO

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

NIT_DATA xx

Night Service

Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

NIT1

TIM1

NIT2

TIM2 x...x

hh mm x...x

hh mm

First Night Service DN by Time of Day

Hour and Minute for First Night Service DN

Second Night Service DN by Time of Day

Hour and Minute for Second Night Service DN x...x

hh mm x...x

hh mm

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-253

(NO) YES

Third Night Service DN by Time of Day

Hour and Minute for Third Night Service DN

Fourth Night Service DN by Time of Day

Hour and Minute for Fourth Night Service DN

Recall With Priority During Night Service

Enhanced Night Service enabled

Night Call Waiting Tone enabled

Night Number Table

Enhanced Night Service enabled

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 295

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data Block: OAS (Off Hook Alarm Security)

ODN4

ODN5

ODN6

ODN7

ODN8

ODN9

ASTM

HDOPT

HDTM

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ODN0

ODN1

ODN2

ODN3

Response

CHG

Comment

Change existing data block

OAS_DATA Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options xx Customer number xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

OHAS Security DN for zone 0

OHAS Security DN for zone 1

OHAS Security DN for zone 2

OHAS Security DN for zone 3 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

OHAS Security DN for zone 4

OHAS Security DN for zone 5

OHAS Security DN for zone 6

OHAS Security DN for zone 7 xxxx xxxx

OHAS Security DN for zone 8

OHAS Security DN for zone 9

1-(30)-63 OHAS off-hook or interdigit timeout timer in seconds

(0)-10 CONT OHAS Half Disconnect Treatment Options

1-(30)-600 OHAS Half Disconnect Timer in seconds

Data Block: PPM (Periodic Pulse Metering)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE: PPM_DATA Periodic Pulse Metering

Comment

Change existing data block

CUST

HMTL

PCDL

UCST xx

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(0)-9999

Customer number

Hotel/Motel environment

PPM output on CDR Link

Unit Cost for Periodic Pulse Metering

296 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: PWD (Password)

Prompt Response

ATCH (NO) YES

Comment

Attendant display of call Charge

SCDL

- WKDY

(0)-3

1-7

Schedule for printing Message Registration and PPM data

Week Day for weekly printout; 1 = Sunday

- DAY

- HOUR

- MCLR

- PTTY

0-28 hh

Day of month for printout; 0 = last day of month

Hour of day for printout hh hh Two printouts per day allowed when SCDL = 1

(NO) YES Meter Clear after printing

(0)-15 PPM TTY number for printing meters (one per switch)

Data Block: PWD (Password)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE: PWD_DAT

A

CUST

SPWD

- PWD2

ATAC

- PWD2 xx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Comment

Change existing data block

Password

Customer number

Secure data password for LD 88 authcodes and LD 24 DISA

Second level administration Password

Attendant Administration Access code

Second level administration Password

Data Block: RDR (Call Redirection)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

OPT

Response

CHG

RDR_DATA xx a...a

Comment

Change existing data block

Call Redirection

Customer number

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 297

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

FNAD

FNAT

FNAL

CFTA

CCFWDN

CFNA

Response

aaa aaa aaa

(NO) YES x...x

1-(4)-15

Comment

Call Forward No Answer treatment for DID calls (aaa =

(HNT), ATT, NO, or FDN)

Call Forward No Answer treatment for external Trunk non-

DID calls (aaa = (HNT), ATT, NO, or FDN)

Call Forward No Answer treatment for All other calls including trunk calls marked as internal (aaa = (HNT), ATT,

NO, or FDN)

Call Forward to Trunk Access code allowed

Customer Call Forward DN (maximum: 23 digits)

Number of normal ringing cycles for Call Forward No

Answer (CFNA)

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 0

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 1

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 2

CFN0

CFN1

CFN2

CRTOD

- CRT0

- CRT1

- CRT2

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

(NO) YES Change Call Redirection by Time Of Day alternate time options

SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 0, denotes time when Alternate

Redirection DN is used. (SH SM = Start time, EH EM = End time)

SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 1 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)

SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 2 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)

- CRT3 SH SM EH EM Alternate time option 3 (SH SM = Start time; EH EM = End time)

(NO) YES Call Redirection by Day CRDAY

- DAY0

- DAY1

- DAY2

- DAY3

CRHOL

- DATE

DFN0 n n n n n n n Days for day option 0 for which alternate treatment is given n n n n n n n Days for day option 1 for which alternate treatment is given n n n n n n n n n n n n n n aaa dd mm yyyy

- - HOL_OPT 0-3

NMDR (0)-4

1-(4)-15

Days for day option 2 for which alternate treatment is given

Days for day option 3 for which alternate treatment is given

Redirection Holiday(s)

Date of the holiday

Holiday redirection option for which the date applies

Number of normal ring cycles for DNDR

Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 0

298 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement)

Prompt

DFN1

DFN2

DMDR

DNDH

MDID

NDID

MWFB

TRCL

DFNR

FCWD

Response

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

(0)-14

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-7

(0)-15

(0)-126

Comment

Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 1

Number of distinctive ringing cycles for CFNA, Option 2

Number of distinctive ringing cycles for DNDR

Do Not Disturb Hunting allowed

No Answer DID calls routed to Message Center

No Answer non-DID calls routed to Message Center

DID calls to busy telephones routed to Message Center

Total Redirection Count Limit

DID Forward No Answer Ring cycles

Number of seconds a DID call should wait on a set before being forwarded to the attendant

Data Block: ROA (Recorded Overflow Announcement)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

OPT

FRRT

- FRT

SRRT

- SRT

WAIT

- MURT

RICI

Response

CHG

Comment

Change existing data block

ROA_DATA Recorded Overflow Announcement xx a...a

Customer number

Options (OPT responses begin on aaa)

0-511 First RAN route

0-(20)-2044 Time delay in seconds for the first RAN route

0-511 Second RAN route number for ROA

2-(40)-2044 Time delay in seconds for the second RAN route aaa

0-511

0-19

Treatment during Waiting time for ROA (aaa = (RGB), MUS, or SIL)

Music Route

ICI key numbers that may receive ROA

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 299

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Data block: SLS (SIP Line Services)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

SIPL_ON (NO) YES

SIPD x...x

UAPR x...x

NMME

Response

CHG

Comment

Change existing data block

SLS_DATA SIP Line Services xx Customer number

(NO) YES

Enable SIP Line Services.

SIP Line domain name.

Prefix used to auto-generate the User Agent DN (UADN) for

SIPL clients of the specified customer.

Enable Multimedia Service.

Data Block: TIM (Timers)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

CUST

TIM_DATA xx

Timers

Customer number

Comment

Change existing data block

FLSH

SDFL xxx yyy Switchhook Flash timing

384-(1024)-2048

Signal Destination Flash timing

1-(30)-63 Permanent Hold Timer PHDT

DIND

DIDT

LDTT

DLAT

BOTO

DBRC xxx yyy zzz Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets xxx yyy zzz Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets

2-(6)-30

(0)-120

2-(14)-60

Line disconnect tone timer for 500/2500 telephones in seconds

Delayed Answer Timer

Busy tone/Overflow tone Timeout

2-(60)-120 Duration Between Reminder Cadences for Audible Reminder of Held Call

300 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Data Block: TST (Test lines)

Prompt Response

RTIM

Comment

xxx yyy zzz Recall Timers for Slow Answer, Camp-On and Call Waiting

ATIM

AQTT

(0)-126

0-(30)-255

Attendant Alternative Answering Timer

Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds

ADLD

AFNT

AFBT

(0)-20

(0)-126

Auto Dial Delay in seconds

Attendant Forward No Answer Timer (must be an even number)

(0)- AFNT Attendant Forward Buzz Tone (Your entry can be equal to or less than your response to the AFNT prompt and must be an even number)

(0)-63 Night Forward No Answer or ring cycles NFNA

NFNS

ADHT

HWTT

NIT

FOPT

PRNG

PRMT

(0)-504

(0)-14

0-(300)-600 Length of Howler Tone in seconds

2-(8) Network Alternate Route Selection Interdigit Timer

0-(6)-30

Night Forward No Answer in seconds

Attendant Delay on Hold Timer in seconds

Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer

0 - (40) - 60 Precedence ringback timer in seconds.

0 - (60)-120 Duration of preemption tone before set goes to line lock out.

Data Block: TST (Test lines)

Prompt Response

REQ: CHG

TYPE:

Comment

Change existing data block

TST_DATA Test lines for transmission testing

CUST

T100

REF0

TST0 xx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Customer number

DN for Type-100 test line

DN for Reference trunk 0

DN for Test trunk 0

REF1

TST1

REF2

TST2 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

DN for Reference trunk1

DN for Test trunk 1

DN for Reference trunk 2

DN for Test trunk 2

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 301

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

REF3 xxxx

TST3 xxxx

DN for Reference trunk 3

DN for Test trunk 3

Comment

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ABDN

AC2

ACCD

ACNS

NPA

NXX

INTL

SPN

LOC

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Activation of the Attendant Blocking of DN

Prompted with Semi-Automatic Camp-On

(SACP) package 181.

Pack/Rel

abdn-20

Access Code 2

E.164 National

E.164 Subscriber

International

Special Number

Location Code

For DPNSS1, only SPN and LOC values apply.

Enter call types that use Access Code 2 (AC2)

Multiple responses are permitted. If a numbering plan is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to Access Code1

(AC1).

This prompt applies to both ISDN and non-

ISDN calls if you have Network Message

Services (NMS) package175.

pri-15 basic-1 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)

Access Denied

(NO)

EXT

ALL

Attendant Clearing during Night Service

No automatic treatment

External calls only

All calls mpo-20

302 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ACT_BUSY (FLSH)

ACT_IDLE

ADDG

ANDN

ADHT

ADLD

AFBT

Response

WINK

LIT

DARK

(WINK)

FLSH

LIT

DARK

0-(8)-99..99

0-99..99

X

(0)-14

(0)-120

(0)-2-AFNT

Comment

This prompt appears when the Multi-Party

Operations (MPO) package is equipped,

MPOP = YES and FMOP = YES.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp is on.

LCD Lamp is off.

Pack/Rel

bfs-24

LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp is on.

LCD Lamp is off.

bfs-24

Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. They is used to complete ANDN if LEC+ANDN is less than

ANSZ digits (defined in OVL 16).

Used as ANI DN if Calling number not available or DNLG=0. Up to 15 digits can be entered.

remove ANDN

Attendant Delay on Hold Timer

Prompted with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

supp-9

Auto Dial Delay

Time in two-second interval.

Prompted with the Flexible Feature Codes

(FFC) package 139. 0 = Auto Dial does not take place.

ffc-20

Attendant Forward Buzz Tone

The number of seconds in 2 second intervals that the attendant is buzzed at full volume.

Odd entries are rounded down to the next valid afna-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 303

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

AFCO

AFNT

ALDN

ALRM

Response

(YES) NO

(0)-2-126 x...x

(NO) YES

AML_DATA (NO) YES

ANAT

ANI_DATA

ANLD x...x

(NO) YES xxxxx

Comment

entry. If entry is 0, the original volume is in effect.

(Automatic)/Manual Forced Camp-On

Prompted with Priority Override (POVR) package 186.

Pack/Rel

povr-20

Attendant Forward No Answer Timer

The number of seconds in 2 second intervals that the call is presented to the attendant before Attendant Forward No Answer (AFNA) is attempted. Odd entries are rounded down to the next valid entry. If entry is 0, the call is not forwarded.

Prompted with Attendant Forward No Answer

(AFNA) package 134.

afna-14

Alarm Directory Number

Must be a Single-Appearance 500-set DN.

Precede with X to remove.

emct-20

Malicious Call Trace Alarm for internal or external calls

ALRM has to set to YES if the alarm is to be rung for any call (external or internal) when

MCT is activated.

emct-20

Change Application Module Link options basic-21

ANI Attendant Billing Number

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. In either case, together with ANLD (ANI listed

DN), the total number of digits must be seven.

Prompted with Automatic Number

Identification (ANI) package 12.

ani-1

Change Automatic Number Identification options basic-21

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Listed

Directory Number ani-1

304 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AOCS

AODN

APAD

X xxx yyy x y

Response

x...x

Comment

can be 0-5 digits, depending on the length of

ANAT. The combined number of digits for

ANAT and ANLD must be 7. Prompted with

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) package 12.

Enter the letter X to clear the field

Pack/Rel

All Other Cases

Where: xxx is for internal calls and yyy or ATN is for external calls

Valid entries for xxx and yyy are: mpo-20

• AAR - forward to attendant or Night Service after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles

• ATN - forward to attendant or Night Service

(ATN is the default for yyy or external calls)

• DAR - disconnect after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles

• DIS - disconnect default for xxx or internal calls

• OVF - provide overflow tone

• STD - standard operation.

Attendant Overflow DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry. Prompted with Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) package 56.

aop-1

Alternative Pad. Where: x = trunk pad selection and y = conference pad selection

Valid inputs for x are:

• (0) = default North America

• 1 = Australia

• 2 = New Zealand

• 3 = Italy

• 4 = China EPE or EPE/IPE systems

• 5 = China pure IPE system

• 6-7 = future usage currently set to default

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 305

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

APL

AQTT

0 - 15

0-(30)-255

ARDL_ACCEPT

0-(20)-60

ARDL_ATTEMPT

1-(30)-60

ARDL_RETRY

ASPCT

Response

10-(30)-60

Comment

Valid inputs for y are:

• (0) = default North America

• 1 = Alternative Conference pads selected

The default = 0 when REQ = NEW. The default is the existing value when REQ =

CHG.Alternative Conference pads are only provided on specific Conference cards.

Pack/Rel

Auxiliary Processor Link number apl-10

Attendant Queue Timing Threshold in seconds basic-1 ardl-22

Automatic Redial Acceptance Timer in seconds. An odd-numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number, and the following message is printed: "ARDL_ACCEPT

ROUNDED TO XX." (where: xx = the even number).

This is the maximum allotted time for the originator response on a successful automatic redial call. Prompted if Automatic Redial

(ARDL) package 304 is equipped.

ardl-22

Automatic Redial number of attempts

Any single ARDL call is automatically redialed up to the number of retries entered at this prompt. Prompted if Automatic Redial (ARDL) package 304 is equipped.

ardl-22

Automatic Redial Retry Timer in seconds. An odd-numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number, and the following message is printed: "ARDL_ACCEPT ROUNDED TO XX."

(where: xx = the even number).

This timer controls successive automatic redial retry dialing. Prompted if Automatic

Redial (ARDL) package 304 is equipped.

Analog Semi-Permanent Connections reconnection Timer basic-24

306 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ASTM

10

Response

180

1-(30)-63

ATAC

ATCH

ATDN

ATIM

ATRC xxxx

(NO) YES

(0)-x...x

(0)-126

(NO) YES

Comment

minimum value in seconds maximum value in seconds

Pack/Rel

OHAS Off-Hook or interdigit timeout timer

This timer is applied to telephones with Alarm

Security Allowed (ASA) Class of Service.

When the timer expires, the telephone is intercepted to the OHAS DN.

ASTM applies to all OHAS DNs. If the telephone has Alarm Security Denied (ASD)

Class of Service, the normal dial tone and interdigit timers are used. See LD 15 prompts

DIND and DIDT.

basic-18

Attendant Administration Access Code

The entered code is not actually accepted until the correct password is entered in the next prompt.

Prompted with Attendant Administration (AA) package 54.

aa-1

Attendant display of call Charge

Attendant Directory Number

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Calls timed for recall by the DPNSS1 redirection feature are redirected to this number when the timer expires.

supp-15 basic-1

Attendant Alternative Answering Timer

This timer is in increments of two seconds, odd numbers are rounded down to the next valid input. Use ATIM = 0 to disable AAA. Prompted with Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) package 174.

aaa-15

Attendant Recall allowed

A YES response enables Attendant Recall for unanswered Automatic Wake Up (AWU) call attempts.

awu-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 307

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

ATT_DATA (NO) YES

AUTR

AWU

0-511

X

(NO) YES

X

AWU_DAT

A

(NO) YES

AXID (NO) YES

Comment

The number of Wake Up tries is defined at the

TAWU prompt. The number of rings for a Wake

Up call is defined at the NRWU prompt.

Pack/Rel

Change Attendant Console options

Authcode Error RAN number

To disable the RAN basic-21 disa-16

Enable Automatic Wake-Up

All AWU related data is removed from CDB.

Prompted with Automatic Wake-Up (AWU) package 102.

Change Automatic Wake Up options awu-10 basic-21

BCAP

BDI

BOTO

BPSS

BSFE

BSGC

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

2-(14)-60

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(65535)

Auxiliary Identification output in CDR record cdr-1

Auxiliary Identification provides the TN when the call involves a multiple appearance DN.

Bearer Capability in CDR

Buffer Data Interface for CDR

Busy tone/Overflow tone Timeout

Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.

cdr-24 dba-24 basic-10

Block Pretranslation on System Speed Call lists when dial accessed.

Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement pxlt- 23 ssc- 23 ffcsf-24

Business Sub Group Consult-only. Where:

• 0 = no indication

• 1 - 65535 = Subgroup identifier

This value is sent as the Multi-location

Business Group Subgroup (MBGS) identifier or tenant number when an existing call has more than two different MBGSs. In this case a consultation connection is allowed, but tens-16

308 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CAC0

CAC1

CAC2

CAC3

CAC4

CAC5

CAC6

Response

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

Comment

completion of a call modification, conference or transfer, is disallowed.

If BSGC = 0 then Call Transfer and Call

Modifications can be restricted under certain circumstances. Ensure BSGC is not 0 if Call

Transfer and Call Modifications to be allowed.

Pack/Rel

MFC value corresponding to CIS 0.

Reserved.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 0.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 1.

Residential or business subset with the access to automatic regional, toll and international network".

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 1.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 2. Hotel subset with the access to automatic regional, toll international network.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 2.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 3.

Residential, business or Hotel subset with the access to local network only.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 3.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 4. Business subset with the access to regional, toll, international network and to special service numbers; preferential access to regional and toll network.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 4.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 5. Business subset of telecommunication administration with the access to automatic regional, toll, international network and to special service numbers free of charge.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 5.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 6. Toll Coin box and public call paystation with the access cist-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 309

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

CAC7

CAC8

CAC9

CACC

CANC

CAS

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

0-(3)-9

(NO) YES

YES NO

CAS_DATA (NO) YES

CCDO

CCFWDN

Response

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES x...x

Comment

to automatic regional and toll network also the general purpose coin box with the access to local and toll network (paying in cash) and the coin box with access to special services only.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 6.

Pack/Rel

MFC value corresponding to CIS 7. Business or residential subset with automatic access to regional, toll and international network plus to chargeable service numbers.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 7.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 8. Business subset for data, facsimile and electronic mail with automatic access to regional, toll and international network.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 8.

cist-24

MFC value corresponding to CIS 9. Local call coin box.

CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT 9.

cist-24

CAC Conversion table option

Non Specified Information string for Message

Waiting Cancellation.

dmwi- 23

Centralized Attendant Service

Prompted with Centralized Attendant Services

(Main) (CASM) package 26 or Centralized

Attendant Services (Remote) (CASR) package 27.

casm-1 basic-21 Change Centralized Attendant Service options

Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment is not required

Consultation Connection Disconnect Option alternative treatment is required mpo-20

Customer Call Forward DN.

Maximum of 23 digits allowed (0-23) basic-21

310 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CCRS

CDPR

Response

CCS_DATA (NO) YES

ZBD

CDPL

(UNR)

CTD

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

(NO) YES

1-(10)

(NO)

YES

Comment

CCFWDN allows subscribers to forward their phones to a central answering service by dialing a FFC. CCFWDN activates the regular

Call Forward All Calls function, but without having to specify the DN to which calls is forwarded. Customer Call Forward is only applicable to 500-type sets.

Pack/Rel

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS)

Restricted Service. This applies when CCRS is active. If CCRS is inactive, the set defaults to the TN class of service access restriction.

Allowed access restrictions are:

Unrestricted

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditional Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Prompted with Controlled Class of Service

(CCOS) package 81.

ccos-7

Change Controlled Class of Service options basic-21

Enable/disable the Zone Based Dialing.

zbd-6.00

Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing

(VNR) Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) cdp-10

Coordinated Dialing Plan Record option.

CDPR appears with Coordinated Dialing Plan

(CDP) package 59. Applies only to trunk routes with OPD = NO.

Replace the Distant Steering Code (DSC) or

Trunk Steering Code (TSC) with the Access

Code (ACOD). The format is: ACOD + concluding digits

Insert ACOD ahead of DSC or TSC. The format is : ACOD + DSC or TSC + concluding digits cdp-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 311

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

CDR

Response

(NO) YES

CDR_DATA (NO) YES

CDTO

CFNA

CFN0

CFN1

CFN2

CFTA

CHDN

CHLN

CHMN

2-(14)

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

(NO)

YES x...x

(0)-23

(1)-CHLN

Comment

Change Call Detail Recording record

Prompted with Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4.

Change CDR and Charge Account options

Control digit timeout in multiples of 2 seconds.

Pack/Rel

cdr-1 basic-21 mpo-20

Number of normal ringing cycles for Call

Forward No Answer

If the Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125 is equipped, this interval is tied to the number of cycles of NCAD ringing. Refer to 553-2711-180 Flexible Tone and Digit

Switches.

basic-1

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA,

Option 0

CFNA has three ringing cycle options. This assigns the normal ringing cycles for Option 0.

Refer to Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning this feature.

uscr-19

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA

Number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA

Call Forward to Trunk Access code not allowed

Call Forward to Trunk Access code allowed

CAS silent Hold DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Charge Account Number Length

Prompted with Charge Account (CHG) package 23 uscr-19 uscr-19 optf-12 casm-1 fca-1

Minimum number of digits for FCA code

The range is from 1 to CHLN, where CHLN =

Charge account Number Length.

fca-1

312 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CIS_ANI

CIS_ENT

CLASS_FMT

CLDN

CLID

CLS1

Response

(NO) YES

(0)-31

Xaa

Xaa Xbb

(DN)

LCL

NTN

Comment

ANI option to allow the configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message.

Pack/Rel

cist-24

CAC conversion table to convert CIS CAC into

MFC CAC

CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified cist-24

CAC conversion table entry to be deleted

CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be deleted.

For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable. An ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.

For all subprompts, if 0 is configured, the value configured for non-tie trunks in the outgoing

R2MFC table (LD 94) is used.

cnumb- 23

Send internal Directory Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.

Send Local Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.

Send National Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.

(NAP OVF NAP NAP)

Calls to LDN

(NO)

YES basic 1

Do not allow Calling Line Identification option isdn-22

Allow Calling Line Identification option

Calling Line Identification does not require

ISDN.

(UNR)

CTD

CUN

FR1

FR2

Class of Service

Unrestricted

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditional Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2 basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 313

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

FRE

SRE

TLD

CLS2

CNAT

(UNR)

CTD

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

0-9999

CNCS

CNDN

CNFD

CNFFIELD

X

0-99

X

0-9999

0-99999999

X

0-(1)-9, *, #

(NO) YES

Fully Restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Comment Pack/Rel

Class of Service

Unrestricted

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditional Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied supp-16

CNI Attendant DN on outgoing Multifrequency

Compelled Signaling (MFC) calls.

To remove

Prompted with Multifrequency Compelled

Signaling (MFC) package 128 mfc-9

Controlled NCOS

CNCS allows the user to select a controlled

NCOS to be used when the set is locked.

When a set is locked, the NCOS defined at this prompt is used as the set NCOS when a trunk call is made.

Precede entry with X to remove.

ffc -21

Customer Calling Number Identification on outgoing MFC calls. Prompted with

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128

Customer CNI sent

Customer CNI not sent

Precede with X to remove mfc-9

Control Digit for Conference

Enable Conference Count Display Field.

mpo-20 basic- 23

314 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CNF_NAME

Response

(CONF)

CNI

CNIP

CNTC

CNTP aaaa

(DGTS)

CLID

NONE

(YES)

NO x

(PDN)

LDN

Comment Pack/Rel

Change Conferees Count Display Field

Name.

aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.

basic- 23

Calling Number Identification (R2MFC)

Your CNI response determines which field of the CDR record contains the Calling Number

Identification for this customer.

CNI is recorded in the digits field

CNI of R2MFC is recorded in CLID field

CNI do not be recorded in CDR

CNI is prompted if :

• CDR = YES

• FCDR, CLID, and MFC packages are equipped

• FCDR = NEW in LD 17

• CLID = YES in LD 17 basic-22

Calling Number Identification Presentation

Send Customer Calling Number Identification

(CNDN) + Trunk ID (TKID) if Calling Line ID

(CLID) = NO in LD 17

Respond to Calling Number Identification

(CNI) request with End-of-CNI R2MFC level 1 forward signal (ECNI) basic-22

Country Code for CS 1000S, Where: x = 1 for

Canada basic-2

Calling Number Type

The Calling Line ID (CLID) feature displays the set's Prime DN

The CLID feature displays the customer's

Listed Directory Number (LDN)

This determines the default Calling Line ID

(CLID) Class of Service(CLS) for all sets except those configured differently in LD 10 pri-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 315

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

CONF loop

CONF_DS

P

(NO) YES

CONG

CPAS

CPCI

CRDAY

CRHOL

CRT0

CRT1

(OVFL)

BUSY xxxx

(NO)

YES

Comment

and LD 11. Attendant consoles only have a

Listed Directory Number (LDN).

Conference loop number

Change Conference Display configurations.

Pack/Rel

awu-10 basic-23

Congestion tone for all trunks busy condition basic-1

Overflow tone for all trunks busy condition

Busy tone

Central Precedence answering station listed

DN basic-21

Called Party Control on Internal Call is not allowed for the customer

Called Party Control on Internal Call is allowed for the customer

CPCI package 310 is required.

cpci-22

(NO) YES

NEW

CHG

OUT

OUT ALL

SH SM EH EM

Call Redirection by Day

Add holiday(s)

Change holiday(s)

Remove holiday(s)

Deletes all holidays in the list

Alternate time option 0, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.

Where:

• SH SM = Start time

• EH EM = End time

Both entries are in international time format and are entered as HH MM (hour = 00-23; minute = 00-59). The default value is 00 00 00

00. The default disables CRTOD for that alternate time option.

basic-24 basic-24 basic-22

SH SM EH EM basic-22

316 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CRT2

CRT3

CRTOD

CTRC

CTVN

CUST

CWBZ

Response

SH SM EH EM

Comment

Alternate time option 1, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.

See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.

Pack/Rel

basic-22

Alternate time option 2, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used.

See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.

SH SM EH EM basic-22

Alternate time option 3, denoting a time when the Alternate Redirection DN is used. See the prompt CRT0 for an explanation of the response format.

(NO)

YES

Call Redirection by Time Of Day

Do not change CRTOD alternate time options

Change CRTOD alternate time options

(OVF NAP OVF NAP)

Restricted Call basic-22 basic-1

(OVF OVF OVF ATN)

Call to Vacant Number

0-99

0-31

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Customer number for Large Systems

For CS 1000E

For Small Systems

For CS 1000S

For MG 1000B

For MG 1000T basic-1 basic-1 basic-4.00

basic-1.0

basic-2.0

basic-4.00

Call Waiting Buzz

First field-Provide two second buzz on exceeding upper CWCL or CWTM threshold.

Second field-Buzz on first call entering queue.

basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 317

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

CWCL

CWTM

CWUP

DACT_BUSY

Response Comment Pack/Rel

Call Waiting Call Limit basic-1

(0)-255 (0)-255

Lower and upper thresholds.

The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when number of calls in the queue exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the number of calls in queue is less than the lower threshold. Enter 0 to disable this feature.

(0)-1000 (0)-1000

Lower and upper thresholds defined as a percentage of the active consoles when OPT

= FACA.

When the FACA/FACD option is changed, a new value for CWCL must be set or the default values are used. The CWCL values for the tenant-level are set equal to the customerlevel values. CWCL is also prompted in LD

93.

(0)-511 (0)-511

Lower and upper thresholds for Call Waiting

Time.

The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when the call in the queue exceeds the upper threshold.

The lamp continues to flash until the wait time is less than the lower threshold. Enter 0 to disable this feature.

basic-1

(NO) YES

(LIT)

WINK

FLSH

Call Waiting queue Update

Prompted with M2250 Attendant Console

(DCON) package 140. The M2250 type consoles can be notified every time there is a change to the Call Waiting queue.

dcon-15

Boss's Lamp status when BSFE is disabled and set is busy.

LCD Lamp is on.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.

ffcsf-24

318 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DARK

DACT_IDLE

LCD Lamp is off.

Comment

DAPC

DASC

DATE

DAY

DAY0

(DARK)

WINK

LIT

FLSH

(NO) YES xxxx dd mm yyyy

0-28 n n n n n n n

ALL

Xn

Pack/Rel

Boss's Lamp status when BSFE is disabled and set is idle.

LCD Lamp is off.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 60 impulses per minute.

LCD Lamp is on.

LCD Lamp flash rate is 30 impulses per minute.

ffcsf-24

Dial Access Prefix on CLID table entry option isdn-24

Display Access Code

Enter the access code which is to be placed on displays before Originating Line Identities

(OLI) and Terminating Line Identities (TLI) are received from the ISDN.

The default is no code, when creating a new data block. Prompted with Multi Language

Wake Up (MLWU) package 206 and

Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.

mlwu-16

Date of the holiday

Where: dd = day mm = month yyyy = year

(optional, if no year is entered the holiday is repeated every year.

basic-24

Day of month for printout. Where 0 = last day of month supp-15

Days for day option 0 for which alternate treatment is given.

Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3

(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)

Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week

Precede the day number with X to remove basic-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 319

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

Xn Xn Xn

DAY1

DAY2

DAY3

DBRC n n n n n n n

ALL

Xn

Xn Xn Xn n n n n n n n

ALL

Xn

Xn Xn Xn n n n n n n n

ALL

Xn

Xn Xn Xn

2-(60)-120

Comment

Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.

Pack/Rel

Days for day option 1 for which alternate treatment is given

Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3

(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)

Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week

Precede the day number with X to remove

Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.

basic-24

Days for day option 2 for which alternate treatment is given

Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3

(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)

Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week

Precede the day number with X to remove

Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.

basic-24

Days for day option 3 for which alternate treatment is given

Where: n = 1 (Sunday) n = 2 (Monday) n = 3

(Tuesday) n = 4 (Wednesday) n = 5 (Thursday) n = 6 (Friday) n =7 (Saturday)

Alternate treatment is to be given throughout the week

Precede the day number with X to remove

Multiple days can be removed by preceding each day number with X and separating with a space.

basic-24

Duration Between Reminder Cadences for audible reminder of held call basic-14

320 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DCMX

DFLT

DFLT

Response

1-255

(NO)

YES

0-(3)-9

0-(6)-10

Comment

Odd entries are rounded up to a valid multiple of two seconds.

Pack/Rel

Digit Conversion Maximum number of tables idc-12

The sum of the values for MAXT and DCMX cannot exceed 255 or MAXT + DCMX = 255.

casr-1 Default

CAS do not be activated after a SYSLOAD.

CAS is activated after a SYSLOAD.

CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or MFC CAC received is not in the

MFC CAC list of this table.

CIS value used when CIC CAC has not been received, or MFC CAC received is not in the

CIC CAC list of this table.

cist-24

DFLT_LANG a...a

Default language for M3900 on Remote Office ponw-25.4

Where: a...a = (ENG), FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA,

NOR, SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN,

JAP, RUS, LAT, or TUR.

DFLT_SCPW

(NO) YES

DFNA

DFN0

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

Allow or deny Default Station Control

Password for IP Phones.

When DFLT_SCPW = YES, the system automatically assigns a SCPW when a new IP

Phone is programmed. An SCPW is not automatically assigned to an existing IP Phone until it receives a service change.

Number of Distinctive Ringing Forward No

Answer cycles

Prompted with Distinctive Ringing (DRNG) package 74.

Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for

CFNA, Option 0 drng-4 uscr-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 321

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

DFN1

DFN2

DFNR

DGRP

DIALPLAN

DIDN

Response

1-(4)-15

1-(4)-15

(0)-15

(0)-2046 aaa

(YES)

NO

SRCH

Comment

CFNA has three ringing cycle options. This assigns the Distinctive Ringing cycles for

Option 0. Refer to Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning this feature

Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for

CFNA, Option 1

Number of Distinctive Ringing cycles for

CFNA, Option 2

Pack/Rel

uscr-19 uscr-19

DID Forward No Answer Ring cycles

Defines the Number of ringing cycles before a

DID call is Slow Answer Recalled to the attendant console after the last stage of CFNA or hunt treatment has been completed (the maximum number of CFNA or hunt steps is two).

If DFNR = 0, then DID CFNA enhancement is disabled. DID Call Forward No Answer is the

Master Timer. Prompted if the FNAD prompt is not ATT or NO.

ffc-16

Maximum number of Dial Intercom Groups

(DIG)

Prompted with Dial Intercom (DI) package 21 di-1

Configure the on-net dial plan (public or private) when ZBD feature is enabled (controls

DN/CLID processing).

Where:

• aaa = PUB (public on-net dial plan)

E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone

• aaa = PRV (private on-net dial plan)

7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone zbd-6.00

Precede the DN of the active DN key with the digits in HLCL

Use digits in HLCL

Find a DN key of the set from key 0 which has

DIDN of a CLID entry set to YES isdn-22

322 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DIDN_LEN 0-7

DIDT

DIND xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz xxx yyy zzz

Comment

Number of last few DN digits which needs to be sent over the network when DIDN is YES

Pack/Rel

supp-9

Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets.

Where: xxx = 0-(14)-60; yyy = 0-(14)-60; zzz =

0-(14)-60 when International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.

The 1st parameter is the time before first digit or the dial tone time. The 2nd parameter is the time between the first and second digits. The

3rd parameter is the time between digits after the second digit.

Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.

Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for DTMF sets.

when International Supplementary Features

(SUPP) package 131 is not equipped.

Where: xxx = 0-(14)-60; yyy = 0-(14)-60; zzz =

0-(14)-60 when International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.

Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.

Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets when International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.

Where: xxx = 0-(30)-60; yyy = 0-(30)-60; zzz =

0-(30)-60;

The 1st parameter is the time before first digit or the dial tone time. The 2nd parameter is the time between the first and second digits. The

3rd parameter is the time between digits after the second digit.

Odd entries are rounded down to a valid multiple of two seconds.

Dial tone and Interdigit timeout for non-DTMF sets when International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 is not equipped.

Where: xxx = 0-(30)-60; yyy = 0-(30)-60; zzz =

0-(30)-60; basic-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 323

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

DISD

DITI

Response

0-(1)-9, *, #

(NO) YES

DLAT

DLDN

DLT

DMWM

DNDH

DNDL

DNDT

(0)-120

(NO) YES

(OVF)

ATN

OFA

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(BST)

ATT

RAN

Comment

Control digit for Disconnect

Pack/Rel

mpo-20

DID to TIE connections allowed

To connect external DID and internal network

TIE trunks for the customer (which allows an external trunk to be transferred across an internal network TIE trunk), set DITI = YES.

supp-10

Delayed Answer Timer.

Where 0 = no time limit. In seconds for internal calls. Call disconnected if not answered.

Prompted with Operator Call Back (OPCB) package 126.

opcb-14

Departmental Listed Directory Numbers.

Prompted with Departmental Listed Directory

Number (DLDN) package 76.

dldn-5

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Lockout treatment

Overflow tone

Attendant

Overflow then attendant disa-1

Enable the output of DPNSSI Message

Waiting

Indication Non Specified Information error messages (ERR0001, ERR0002, ERR0003).

dmwi- 23

Do Not Disturb Hunting allowed

Prompted with Meridian Hospitality Voice

Services (MHVS) package 179.

hvs-16

Do Not Disturb Lamp on 500/2500 telephones dndi-10

Prompted with Do Not Disturb Individual

(DNDI) package 9.

dndi-1 Do Not Disturb intercept Treatment

Busy Tone

Attendant

RAN trunk

324 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DNLG

DTMF

ECC1

ECC2

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

UNR

Response

0-(4)-15

(NO)

YES

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

Comment

Prompted with Do Not Disturb Individual

(DNDI) package 9

DN Length

Pack/Rel

End-to-End Signaling feedback tone

Use the improved EES for single tone feedback

Use the current EES for DTMF feedback tone ees-19

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 1 eccs-15

ECC1 is prompted with Enhanced Control

Class of Service (ECCS) package 173.

This access restriction applies when CCRS is active. When CCRS is inactive, the set reverts to the Access Restrictions defined in LD 10 or

LD 11. Allowed access restrictions are:

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditional Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Unrestricted

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service level 2 eccs-15

ECC2 is prompted with Enhanced Control

Class of Service (ECCS) package 173.

This access restriction applies when CCRS is active. When CCRS is inactive, the set reverts to the Access Restrictions defined in LD 10 or

LD 11. Allowed access restrictions are:

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditional Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 325

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

ECDN

Response

SRE

TLD

UNR x...x

ECDR

EESD

EEST

EFLL

ELPL

ENS

ENTRY

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

(NO)

YES

(0)-8064

1-15

(NO) YES xx

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Unrestricted

Comment Pack/Rel

External Call DN

DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and Multi-Tenant are not on intercept position.

The DN is used for intercept treatment for external calls. Up to13 digits allowed.

icp-16 ees-19 Print End-to-End Signaling digits in CDR record

End-to-End Signalling Digit Display

No End-to-End Signalling Digit Display

Display End-to-End Signalling Digits ees-24

End-to-End Signaling Tone to originating party ees-19

No feedback tone to the originator

Send feedback tone to originator

When EEST = NO or when EEST = YES and

DTMF = NO, Improved End-to-End Signaling is used. When EEST = YES and DTMF = YES,

Enhanced End-to-End Signaling is used.

EEST is prompted with End-to-End Signaling

(EES) package 10.

Efficiency Factor Loading Level

Prompted with Network Attendant Services

(NAS) package 159 nas-14

Electronic Lock Password Length (number of digits) basic-12

Enhanced Night Service enabled

Prompted with Enhanced Night Service (ENS) package 133.

ens-20

CLID entry to be configured.

CLID entries must be between 0 and the value entered at the SIZE prompt - 1. Precede entry isdn-22

326 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ESA_APD

N

E

(YES) NO

ESA_HLCL x..x

ESA_INHN

EXTFIELD

EXT_NAM

EXTT

FCAF

FCNC 0-99

FCR_DATA (NO) YES

FCWD

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(E) aaaa

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

(0)-126

Comment

or entries with X to delete. ENTRY is repeated until a <CR> is entered.

Pack/Rel

Append the originating Directory Number after the Home Local Number for Emergency

Services Access calls.

esa- 23 esa_clmp-

23

Home Local Number for Emergency Services

Access calls.

esa- 23

If the system is Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) packaged, then up to 12 digits are accepted.

If the system is not FNP packaged, then up to

7 digits are accepted. 'X' deletes the data.

Insert Home National Number in front of Home

Local Number for Emergency Services

Access calls.

esa- 23

Enable Total External Conferees Count display field.

basic- 23

Change Total External Conferees Count field name. aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.

basic- 23

Prevent unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.

Allow unconditional external Trunk to Trunk transfer.

basic-22

Forced Charge Account active

Prompted with Forced Charge Account (FCA) package 52 fca-1

FCA Network Class of Service

Change New Flexible Code Restriction options fca-1 basic-21

Forwarded No Answer Call Waiting DID feature.

FCWD determines the number of seconds a

DID call should wait on a set before being forwarded to the attendant frta-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 327

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

FFC_DATA (NO) YES

FFCS

FLEN

FLSH

FMOP

FNAD

FNAL

Response

(NO) YES

1-(16) xxx xxx yyy

(NO)

YES

(HNT)

ATT

FDN

NO

Comment

If (0) is chosen, the call is not forwarded to attendant. Valid entries are even numbers between 0-126, odd numbers are rounded down.

Prompted with French Type Approval (FRTA) package 197

Pack/Rel

Change Flexible Feature Code options basic-21

Change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing indicator ffc-15

Flexible length of digits expected

Switchhook Flash timing.(format Where: xxx =

20-(45)-768 when International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package

131 is not equipped)

Minimum and maximum switchhook flash time in milliseconds (format when International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package

131 is equipped) basic-1

Where: xxx = 20-(45)-768; yyy = xxx-

(896)-1500

The timing specified is used for EPE equipment only. XPE equipment uses the

FLSH specified in LD 97.

Flexible Misoperation options are not required mpo-20

Flexible Misoperation options are required

Call Forward No Answer treatment for DID calls

Hunt DN, defined in telephone data block

CFNA to attendant

Flexible CFNA DN, defined in telephone data block

CFNA not allowed basic-2

Call Forward No Answer treatment for all other calls including trunk calls marked as internal.

basic-10

328 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FNAT

FNP

FOPT

FRAN

(HNT)

ATT

FDN

(HNT)

ATT

FDN

NO

(YES) NO

0-511

X

Response

NO

0-(6)-30

Comment

An internal trunk call is a trunk call in which LD

16 prompt RCLS = INT. If FNAL = HNT, no answer calls are forwarded to the Hunt DN.

Hunt DN (defined in telephone data block)

CFNA to attendant

Flexible CFNA DN (defined in telephone data block)

CFNA not allowed

Pack/Rel

Call Forward No Answer treatment for external

Trunk non-DID calls.

An external call is defined as a trunk call in which LD 16 prompt RCLS = EXT. If FNAT =

FDN or HNT, then Call Forward by Call Type

(CFCT) handles the call.

Hunt DN, defined in telephone data block

CFNA to attendant

Flexible CFNA DN, defined in telephone data block

CFNA not allowed basic-10

Enable Flexible Numbering Plan for customer.

fnp-23

Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer

The number of seconds in two second intervals that CFW should be suspended on a set that has just forwarded a call off-node. Odd entries are rounded up to the next valid entry.

A response of 0 disables FOPT.

nas-20

The number of seconds in two second intervals that CFW (Call Forward) or ACR

(Alternate Call Routing) should be suspended on a phone that has just forwarded or routed a call off-node. Odd entries are rounded up to the next valid entry. A response of 0 disables

FOPT.

basic-7.00

First RAN number for first PCR threshold

To disable the RAN supp-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 329

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

FRRT

Response

0-511

FRT 0-(20)-2044

FTR_DATA (NO) YES

FTOP

GPXX

(FRES)

TBFT

FTTB

FTLY x

Comment

First Recorded Announcement or RAN Route for Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA).

Prompted with Recorded Overflow

Announcement (ROA) package 36 and OPT =

ROI. Enter X to remove

Pack/Rel

roa-14 frt-1 First RAN Time seconds before first RAN given.

Change Features and options basic-21

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Options.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Restricted. FTT feature is inactive.

Trunk Barring Flexible Trunk to Trunk

Connections. FTT adds new restrictions on connections not barred by TBAR

Flexible Trunk to Trunk connections Trunk

Barring. FTT lifts TBAR restrictions for routes barred by TBAR. FTT cannot add any new restrictions for non-barred routes.

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Only. All set based trunk to trunk connections for

Transfer and Conference are controlled by

FTT only.

basic-23

Unsolicited status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

Unsolicited status events are used with

Meridian Link applications. Enter the message to be sent to the host computer for telephones in the group, where: mlm-19

• 0 = No status messages monitored

• 1 = On-Hook

• 2 = Off-Hook

• 3 = Ringing

• 4 = Active

• 5 = Disconnect

• 6 = Unringing

Precede the value with an X to remove a status from the Group report.

330 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

GP02

GP03

Response

n n n n n n n n n n

Comment

The prompts GP02 through GP15 appear when Meridian Link package is equipped.

Default values are in Group 0 and Group 1:

• Group 0 = sends no messages

• Group 1 = sends all messages

Groups 0 and 1 cannot be entered or changed here, but can be entered in response to the

IAPG prompt in LD 10 and LD 11.

Pack/Rel

Group 2 status events

The following comment applies to prompts

GP03 through GP15:

Unsolicited status events are used with

Meridian Link applications. Enter the message to be sent to the host computer for telephones in the group, where: iap3p-13

• 0 = No status messages monitored

• 1 = On-Hook

• 2 = Off-Hook

• 3 = Ringing

• 4 = Active

• 5 = Disconnect

• 6 = Unringing

Precede the value with an X to remove a status from the Group report.

Default values are in Group 0 and Group 1:

• Group 0 sends no messages

• Group 1 sends all messages

Groups 0 and 1 cannot be entered or changed here, but can be entered in response to the

IAPG prompt in LD 10 and LD 11.

The prompt GP02 through GP15 are presented only with Integrated Services Digital

Network Application Module Link for 3rd Party

Vendors (IAP3P) package 153 equipped.

Group 3 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned iap3p-13

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 331

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

GP04

Response

n n n n n

GP05

GP06

GP07

GP08

GP09

GP10

GP11

GP12

GP13

GP14

GP15

HCC

HDOPT n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

(NO)

YES

XFER

Comment

Group 4 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 5 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 6 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 7 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 8 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 9 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 10 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 11 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 12 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 13 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 14 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Group 15 status events 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 assigned

Held Call Clearing, prompted with

International Supplementary Features

(SUPP) package 131.

feature not activated feature activated feature activated and set to transfer

Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect

Options iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 supp-9

Pack/Rel

iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 iap3p-13 basic-24

332 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

HDTM

HLCL

HLOC

HMDN

HMTL

HNPA

HNTN

HNXX

(0)

Response

1-10

CONT

1-(30)-600

0-99 ... 99

100-9999

Comment

No Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect treatment

Number of Off-Hook Alarm Security Half

Disconnect treatments

Continuous Off-Hook Alarm Security Half

Disconnect treatment

Pack/Rel

Off-Hook Alarm Security Half Disconnect

Timer in seconds basic-24

Local code for home local number or Listed directory number (1-12 digits). Precede with X to remove.

isdn-22

100-99999999 Home Location Code (ESN) as defined in LD

90 pri-12

Up to 7 digits with extended code. Prompted when ISDN=YES, or with Digital Private

Network Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123.

xxxx

(YES) NO

200-999

Home DN

Hotel/Motel environment basic-21 hosp-21

Home Number Plan Area code defined in LD

90

Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206. Not prompted with

International Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.

nanp-19

0-999999 National code for home national number (1-6 digits). Precede with X to remove.

isdn-22

Prefix for Central Office defined in LD 90.

Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206. Not prompted with

International Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.

Allow for digit insertion between HNXX and the

DN. If HNXX is 4 digits long, only the last 3 digits of the DN are displayed in the Calling

Line ID CLID.

mlwu-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 333

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

HOL_OPT 0-3

HOSP

HOUR

HRCL

HWTT

ICCR

ICDN

ICDL

ICI

ALL

X0-3

(NO) YES hh hh hh

0-512

HSP_DATA (NO) YES

0-(300)-600

(NO) YES xxxx

3-(4)-7 x aaa x CAy

Comment Pack/Rel

Holiday redirection option for which the date applies

Date applies to all holiday options

Precede the option number with X to remove the date from that option list basic-24

Hospitality Management or Hospitality allowed hosp-21

Prompted with HOSP package 166.

Hour of day for printout

Two printouts per day allowed when SCDL =

1

Hold Recall timer

Change Hospitality Management options casm-1 basic-21

Length of Howler Tone in seconds. Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU) package 206, and Operator Callback (OPCB) package 126.

Where: 0 = continuous tone mlwu-12

Intercept position Canceling Reply is sent if transfer is canceled from Intercept computer icp-10

Internal Call DN

DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and Multi-Tenant are not on intercept position.

The DN is used for intercept treatment for internal calls. Up to 13 digits allowed.

icp-16

ICP DN Length

Length of DN to and from the ICP computer.

icp-10

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Where: x = 0-9 if OPT = IC1, or x = 0-19 if OPT

= IC2. Where: aaa = ICI function name.

Multiple responses can be entered for the same key.

basic-20

ICI number, Station Category Indication priority level, (where y = 1-7)

334 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

x NCO x NDID x NFEX x NTIE x NUL x NWAT x RDI x RLL x Ryyy Ryyy x TRK x IAT x IEN x INT x LCT x LD0 x LD1 x LD2 x LD3 x LD4 x LD5 x MTR x MWC

Prompt Response

x CFB x CFN x DF0 x DL0 xx IADN

Comment

ICI number, Call Forward Busy

ICI number, Call Forward No Answer

ICI number, dial 0 fully restricted

ICI number, dial 0 xx = ICI key number (0 - 19)

ICI key for individual attendant DN.

ICI number, Inter-Attendant call

ICI number, Idle Extension Notification

ICI number, Intercept

ICI number, lockout intercept

ICI number, listed DN0

ICI number, listed DN1

ICI number, listed DN2

ICI number, listed DN3

ICI number, listed DN4

ICI number, listed DN5

ICI number, Meter Recall

ICI number, Message Waiting Calls

ICI number, Network CO trunk

ICI number, Network DID trunk

ICI number, Network FEX trunk

ICI number, Network TIE trunk

ICI number, remove ICI appearances

ICI number, Network WAT trunk

ICI number, RDI intercept

ICI number, Recall

ICI number, one or more Route numbers

ICI number, Trunk types and local route numbers

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

basic- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 335

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

ICMM

Response

0-9

ICP

ICP_DATA

ICPD

ICPR

ICPS

ICTD

ICWN

IDBZ

IDCA

IDEF

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-9

0-<nipn>

(CIR)

COM

(NO) YES

(0)-511

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Message number shown when the transfer is caused by a maintenance program

Pack/Rel

icp-14

Intercept Computer available

Prompted with Intercept Computer Interface

(ICP) package 143. Must be defined in LD

17.

Change Intercept Treatment options icp-10 basic-21

ICP Padding Digit

Padding digit for DNs shorter than specified in

ICDL.

icp-10 icp-10 ICP Printer number. Prompted if ICPS =

COM.

ICP Printer Search

Circular search

Common printer for all consoles

Type of Intercept Computer printer search, done when more than one console is used.

icp-10 icp-10 Intercept Computer Terminal Dial from directory

This prompt allows an intercept position of attendant type to dial an extension DN from the Intercept Computer Terminal.

Intercept Computer Owner

Prompted with Multi-Tenant Service (TENS) package 86. Tenant that owns the intercept computer.

Enable Individual Attendant DN Buzzing.

Incoming DID Digit Conversion Allowed

NFCR must = YES before IDCA can = YES.

Prompted with Incoming Digit Conversion

(IDC) package 113

Internal/external definition tens-9 basic- 23 idc-12 basic-22

336 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

IDR

IFLS

IMA

IMPH

IMS

IMS_DATA

INT

INTFIELD

X

Response

(NO)

YES

0-511

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Network wide INY/EXT definition for Call

Forward/Hunt by Call Type, Internal Call

Forward, and Break In Indication Prevention.

A call do not be treated as internal or external according to the network wide definition of internal and external calls. When IDEF = NO, information that can be entered previously at the IDEF prompt in LD 16 do not influence call treatment.

A call is treated as internal or external according to the network wide definition of internal and external calls.

Changing IDEF to NO and then back to YES do not reset the data entered in LD 16.

Pack/Rel

Identification Error RAN number

To disable the RAN supp-16

Allow switchhook flash signal from 500/2500 sets

Ignore switchhook flash signal from 500/2500 sets

If YES then sets require ground buttons.

mpo-20 ims-1

Integrated Messaging System enabled

Prompted when OPT=MCI

CDR for Incoming Packet data call

Change Integrated Messaging System features

Prompted with Integrated Message System

(IMS) package 35.

mph-19 ims-1

Change Integrated Message Service options basic-21

Internal Malicious Call Trace Alarm

If the alarm is to be rung when MCT is activated against internal calls ALRM = YES and INT = YES.

emct-20

Enable Internal Conferees Count display field.

basic- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 337

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

INTL

Response

0-9999

INTC

INT_DATA (NO) YES

INT_NAME (I) aaaa

INTR

IRFP xxx

(NO) YES x....x

Comment

Country code (1-4 digits). Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

isdn-22

International Access Code for CS 1000S,

Where: xxx = 011 for Canada

Change Intercept Treatment options basic-2 basic-21

Change Internal Conferees Count display field name.

aaaa = 1 to 4 alphanumeric characters.

basic- 23

Change Intercept Treatment

Intercept treatments determine the action performed when a user makes an invalid call.

Each intercept prompt requires four entries representing the type call:

• first entry = station/DISA

• second entry = attendant extended

• third entry = TIE trunk

• fourth entry = CCSA/DID trunk

One of the following responses is required for each entry: basic-1

• ATN = Intercept to Attendant

• BSY = Busy Tone

• NAP = Not Applicable

• OVF = Overflow Tone

• RAN = Intercept to Recorded

Announcement

• SRC1-SRC8 = Announcement Source

Channel

The defaults are shown for each Intercept prompt. If RAN is specified, you are prompted for the RAN route number.

Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward

Password

The password length is 1-8 digits. The password is numeric only.

arfw-20

338 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

IRFR

Response

(NO) YES

IRNG

ISDN

ITH1

ITH2

ITH3

LA11

LA32

LA41

LA42

LA51

LA12

LA21

LA22

LA31

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

1-255

1-255

1-255

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

0-511

Comment

Internal Attendant Remote Call Forward

Password Required

Intercom Ring

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom

Visual Indication Threshold 3 calls in queue > ITH3

Primary RAN route for Language 1

Prompted with Multi-Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206.

Pack/Rel

arfw-20 drng-4

Integrated Services Digital Network allowed for customer

Prompted when ISDN signaling package 145 is equipped and either the Integrated Service

Digital Network BRI Trunk Access (BRIT) package 233 is equipped or at least one PRA link is configured.

isdn-12 bacd-8 Visual Indication Threshold 1

TH1 ? calls in queue ? ITH2

Visual Indication Threshold 2

ITH2 ? calls in queue ? ITH3 bacd-8 bacd-8 mlwu-16

Secondary RAN route for Language 1

Primary RAN route for Language 2

Secondary RAN route for Language 2

Primary RAN route for Language 3

Secondary RAN route for Language 3

Primary RAN route for Language 4

Secondary RAN route for Language 4

Primary RAN route for Language 5 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16 mlwu-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 339

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

LA52

LADN

LCKT

LDA0

LDA1

7LDA2

LDA3

LDA4

LDA5

LDBZ

Response

0-511 x...x

Comment

Secondary RAN route for Language 5

Pack/Rel

mlwu-16

Local Attendant Directory Number

This must be different from the DN entered for

ATDN. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

casr-1 isdn-15

(BSY BSY BSY BSY)

Call to a lockout set

1-63

ALL

Attendant consoles associated with LDN0

Allow LDN0 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.

basic-5

1-63

ALL

1-63

ALL

1-63

ALL

Attendant consoles associated with LDN1

Allow LDN1 on all attendants. Precede with X to remove.

basic-5 basic-5 Attendant consoles associated with LDN2

Allow LDN2 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.

Attendant consoles associated with LDN3

Allow LDN3 on all attendants. Precede X to remove.

basic-5

1-63

ALL

1-63

ALL n n n n n n

ALL

X

Attendant consoles associated with LDN4

Attendant consoles associated with LDN4

Attendant console associated with LDN5

Attendant console associated with LDN5 nldn-20 nldn-20

Listed Directory Number Buzzing groups

0,1,2,3,4, or 5.

The Departmental Listed Directory Number groups which should be buzzed when a Listed

Directory Number/Code Blue call is in the attendant queue.

Precede with 'X' to remove.

basic-23

340 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

LDN_DATA (NO) YES

LDN0

LDN1

LDN2

LDN3

LDN4

LDN5

LDNT

LDTT x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

(NO) YES

2-(6)-30

Comment

Change Departmental Listed Directory

Numbers

Listed Directory Number 0

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

LDN0 must be defined for ISDN PRI DID service. The length of LDN0 determines the number of trailing digits translated as the dialed DN on PRI DID routes.

Listed DN 1

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

Listed DN 2

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

Listed DN 3

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

Listed DN 4

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

Listed DN 5

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove an entry.

Listed Directory Number Tone

Special tone to CAS main attendant when presented with LDN calls.

Line disconnect tone timer for 500/2500 telephones in seconds

Pack/Rel

basic-21 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 nldn-20 nldn-20 casr-12 basic-17

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 341

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

LEC

Response

0-99..99

X

LEND

LFFD

LFTN

LINK

LLT

(NO)

YES x00..x00

l s c u c u

(NO) YES

(OVF)

ATN

OFA

Comment

Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.

Remove LEC

Pack/Rel

List Entry Number Delimiter

A delimiter (*) is neither required nor allowed between the list entry number and telephone number

A delimiter (*) is required between the list entry number and telephone number.

LEND is prompted with packages scc-1 or ssc-34 ssc-22

First DN of lamp field array for ILF.

The system shows the status of the next 150 consecutive DNs. Last two digits of first DN must be 00. First DN must start on even 100

(e. g., 3400 is acceptable, but 3450 is not).

Precede with X to remove. Prompted when

OPT = ILF.

basic-1

Lamp Field array Terminal Number

LFTN is prompted again for a second lamp field array. For Supervisory Console, when assigning lamp field array to show Attendant status, enter the secondary TN of the console.

To remove the second LFTN, enter "0". To remove both LFTNs, enter XLF in response to prompt OPT. Prompted when OPT = ILF. Not allowed for 2000/3000 series telephones.

For Small System basic-1 dnis-10 ACD DNIS Link option. Prompted if OPT =

DNI.

Flexible Line Lockout Treatment

Overflow tone

Attendant

Overflow, then Attendant basic-4

342 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

LOCL

Response

1-(10)

LSC

MAIN

MATT

MAXT

MBG

1-9999999

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

1-255

(0)-65535

Comment

Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing

(VNR) Location digits (LOC). Enter the maximum number of LOC digits expected by

VNR.

Pack/Rel

fnp-14

Local Steering Code. LSC can be one to seven digits.

cdp-12

LSCs are required if the CDP DNs are longer than the local PDNs. The CLID sent for a CDP call is composed of the LSC defined in LD 15 plus the PDN of the calling set.

Various ISDN network features depend on the

CLID as the return address for sending feature control messages. Multiple LSCs can be defined in LD 87 for CDP but only one LSC can be defined here for the CLID.

The LSC prompt appears only if the user has a five or six digit dialing plan, or if the DPNSS software package is equipped. LSC is prompted here if ISDN = NO, otherwise LSC is a sub-prompt of ISDN.

Precede with X to remove

CAS Main

Consoles used as Message Center

Prompted with Message Waiting Center

(MWC) package 46 and OPT = MCI.

casm-1 mwc-1

Maximum number of NFCR translation tables nfcr-2

Once defined a lower value cannot be entered for MAXT. The sum of the values for MAXT and

DCMX cannot exceed 255 or MAXT + DCMX ?

255 per customer.

tens-16 Multi-location Business Group. Where:

• 0 = no indication

• 1 = reserved for public network

• 2-65535 = Business Group Identifiers

This parameter is used to define the Multilocation Business Group. It is not currently

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 343

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

MBNR

MCDC

MCLR

MCRT

MDID

MFAC

MFC_ENT

Response Comment

used by the MSL-1, but is added for interfacing with systems that require it.

Pack/Rel

(OVF OVF OVF ATN)

Maintenance Busy Numbers

MAIL MAIL MAIL MAIL

Mail intercept treatment configuration basic-1 sipe-25

(NO) YES

(NO) YES xxxx

Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed

Meter Clear after printing mct-10 supp-15

Malicious Call Trace Recorder route number as defined in LD 16.

emct-20

(NO) YES x

No Answer DID calls routed to Message

Center

Prompted with Message Waiting Center

(MWC) package 46 and OPT = MCI.

mwc-1

Mobile Extension Feature Activation Code.

Enables a mobile telephone connected to another telephone in a CS 1000 system, to signal the CS 1000 system for activation of various Call in Progress features (FFCs).

Enables a mobile phone user to Conference in, or Transfer a call to, a third party. Places the mobile phone on HOLD and provides a dial tone to connect to the third party. Used in combination with the Conference and Transfer

FFCs (LD57) for mobile telephones.

Where x = 1 character code.

• Nortel recommends that "*" be used as the

Mobile Feature Activation Code. You must coordinate with the Mobile and Public

Network providers to ensure this PBX configuration does not conflict with their feature interface.

• The MFAC code does not have to be unique with the customer number planning, as it is only dialed during established calls and is not valid in a dialing state.

mobx-5.50

CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC

344 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MFCG

MFID

MFVN

MFVO

MHLD

Response

(0)-31

Xaa

Xaa Xbb

<CR>

Comment

CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified

CAC conversion table entry to be deleted

CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be deleted.

Exit MFC CAC conversion table, gives

CIS_ENT prompt.

This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered as response.

For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.

An ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.

Pack/Rel

(OVF OVF OVF ATN)

MFC Congestion a opcb-14

Manufacturer Identifier. a = an alpha character representing a Manufacturer

The MFID is stored in the Non Specified

Information (NSI) table.

dmwi- 23

Note:

The first entry in the table is sent in NSI. The

NSI table must be configured with the proper MFID to send.

To delete a Manufacturer Identifier from the

NSI table, enter 'X' in front of the Manufacturer

Identifier.

'XALL' to remove all the existing Message

Waiting Indication Non Specified Information tables.

opcb-14 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)

MFC Call to Vacant Number

(OVF OVF OVF ATN)

MFC Call to Vacant Office

(NO)

YES

Manual Hold after inquiry is not required

Manual Hold after inquiry is required opcb-14 mpo-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 345

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

MLDN

Response

<MAIL DN>

MLPPSD xxxxxx

MPH (NO) YES mail DN

Comment Pack/Rel

sipe-25

Default MLPP service domain used when no value is entered for the MLPPSD prompt in

Overlay 87.

Where: xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range (000000 to FFFFFF) used to signify a

24 bit binary integer. Default is (000000).

atvn-25.47

CDR for Meridian Packet Handler

This is the Call Detail Records for an incoming packet data call from the Public Switched

Packet Data Network to the Meridian Packet

Handler mph-19

MPO_DATA

(NO) YES

MPOP

(NO)

YES

MSCD

MSG1

MSG2

(NO)

YES a...a

a...a

Change Multi Party Options basic-21

Multi-Party Operations

Do not define certain multi-party options

Define certain multi-party options

Prompted with Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package 141.

mpo-20

Mandatory Speed Call Delimiter

End of dial speed call delimiter is optional

A delimiter is required to store the number. A confirmation tone is given if this option is configured.

MSCD is prompted with package scc-1.

ssc-22

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message

346 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MSG3

MSG4

MSG5

MSG6

MSG7

MSG8

MSG9

Response

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

Comment

a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters)

Pack/Rel

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Set-to-Set Message

Where: basic-25.4

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 347

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

MSG10

MSRN

MSSC

MTAR

MURT

MUS

MUSR

MWFB

Response

a...a

x...x

a

(NO)

YES

0-511

X

(NO) YES

(0)-511

(NO) YES

Comment

a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters)

Pack/Rel

Set-to-Set Message

Where: a...a = <CR> keeps current message a...a = <text string> is the new message to be displayed (up to 24 characters) basic-25.4

Media Services Routing Number a = any alphanumeric character

Manufacturer-specific service character for

Message Waiting Notification.

basic-7.00

dmwi- 23

Disable Meridian Mail Trunk Access

Restriction

Enable Meridian Mail Trunk Access

Restriction

MTAR is prompted if OPT = MCI and Message

Center (MWC) package 46 is equipped.

mwc-22 mus-1 Music Route

Prompted if WAIT = MUS.

To remove.

Music for Sets

Prompted with Enhanced Music (EMUS) package 119.

emus-12

Music Route for Sets

The default is route "0" which is not normally a music route. Enter X to remove. Prompted if

MUS = YES.

emus-12

DID calls to busy telephones routed to

Message Center

Prompted with Message Waiting Center

(MWC) package 46 and when OPT = MCI.

mwc-1

348 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MWNS

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Message Waiting Indication DPNSSI Non

Specified Information string to recognize.

Pack/Rel

dmwi- 23

NAS_ ACTV

NATC

NAUT

NBLK

NCOS

(YES) NO

NAS_ ATCL (YES) NO x

Network Attendant Service routing Activated nas-20

Network Attendant Service Attendant Control allowed nas-20

National Access Code for CS 1000S, Where: x = 1 for Canada basic-2

YES

(NO)

Network Authorization Code prompt is given for every leg of a conference.

Network Authorization Code prompt is given for first leg of a conference.

naut-1 esn-1 (OVF OVF OVF ATN)

NARS/BARS blocked calls

(0)-99 Network Class of Service for all Attendant consoles in this customer.

Prompted with Network Class of Service

(NCOS) package 32.

ncos-1

NCS1

NCS2

NDID

(0)-99

(0)-99

(NO) YES

NET_DATA (NO) YES

NFCR

(NO)

YES

Network Class of Service

Network Class of Service ncos-1 ncos-1

No Answer non-DID calls routed to Message

Center

Prompted with Message Waiting Center

(MWC) package 46 and when OPT = MCI.

mwc-1

Change ISDN and ESN networking options basic-21

New Flexible Code Restriction

Do not enable New Flexible Code Restriction

Enable New Flexible Code Restriction

To build an IDC table in LD 49, NFCR and

IDCA must be set to YES. NFCR is prompted with New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) package 49.

nfcr-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 349

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

NFNA

NFNS

NIT4

Response

(0)-63

(0)-504 x...x

Comment Pack/Rel

Night Forward No Answer ring cycles

The number of times a DID/DOD and CO trunk call rings a set before being disconnected during Night Service. Prompted if OPT =

DNCA.

afna-14

Night Forward No Answer Seconds

If a value is entered for this prompt all outgoing

CO/DOD trunk calls in a waiting state, and all incoming CO/DID trunk calls in the answered state is disconnected after the time in seconds expires as entered in this prompt. The entered value must be a multiple of 8.

Prompted if OPT = DNCS.

afna-14

NINV

NIPN

NIT

NIT_DATA

NIT1

(OVF OVF OVF

ATN)

Invalid NARS/BARS call

2-(8)

2-(8)

(NO) YES x...x

Number of Intercept Positions that can be configured

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)

Interdigit Timer

Change Night Service options esn-1 icp-14 basic-21

First Night Service DN by time of day

DN can be defined as a PLDN

Up to four night service DNs can be defined.

The time of day is specified by the prompts

TIM1 to TIM4.

A Group Hunt pilot DN can be entered. Up to

4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

basic-12

NIT2 x...x

Second Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12

NIT3 x...x

Third Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12

Fourth Night Service DN by time of day DN can be defined as a PLDN basic-12

350 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NIT5

NITR

NMME

Response

x...x

Comment

Network Alternate Route Selection Interdigit

Timer

(OVF OVF OVF

ATN)

NARS/BARS invalid translation

(NO) YES Enable/disable Multimedia Services for SIP

Lines.

Pack/Rel

fnp-20 esn-1 basic-6.00

NNT

NOTI

NPI

NRES

NRWU

NSCP

NSO

NWT

0-253

(NO) YES

E163

E164

NATL

PRIV

TELX

UNKN

X121

Night Number Table

Speed Call List number designated to be used as the Night Number Table ens-20

Non Specified Information string for Message

Waiting Notification.

dmwi- 23

Numbering Plan based on E163

Numbering Plan based on E164

National

Private

Telex

Unknown

Data X121 isdn-24

(OVF OVF OVF ATN)

NARS/BARS calls which are restricted by

Supplemental Digit Restriction (SDRR) intercept treatment. See prompt INTR for details.

2-(5) Number of Rings for Wake Up before recall to attendant esn-1 awu-10

(NO) YES

0-9

(NO) YES

OAS_DATA (NO) YES

OCB1

Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed sco-20

Night Service Option number

Night Call Waiting Tone enabled ens-20 ens-20

Change Off-Hook Alarm Security options

Outgoing Call Barring level 1 basic-21 basic-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 351

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

OCB2

OCB3

OCLI

ODN0

ODN1

ODN2

Response Comment

(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level

1. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.

The default entry to OCB1 is zero (0).

255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

Pack/Rel

Outgoing Call Barring level 2

(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level

2. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.

The default entry to OCB2 is zero (0).

255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

basic-21

Outgoing Call Barring level 3

(0)–[MAXT-1] NFCR tree number to be used for OCB level

3. You may enter any digit between zero and your response to the MAXT prompt minus one.

The default entry to OCB3 is zero (0).

255 255 is a special entry which disallows this level.

basic-21

(NO)

EXT

ALL

NO manipulation is done on outgoing CLID for calls forwarded to EuroISDN link.

Last forwarding DN is sent as CLID information for incoming UIPE DID or CO calls landing on G/W node and forwarded back to this link.

The scenario described above still applies.

Moreover, last forwarding DN is sent as CLID for internal calls on ISDN tie except DPNSS

(MCDN/QSIG.) or local calls (Sets) redirected from G/W node to UIPE DID or CO link. If the redirection does not occur on G/W node, redirecting information number is sent as CLID if present in the incoming SETUP message received on G/W node from private network.

basic-23 xxxx xxxx xxxx

OHAS Security DN for zone 0

OHAS Security DN for zone 1

OHAS Security DN for zone 2 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18

352 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ODN3

ODN4

ODN5

ODN6

ODN7

ODN8

ODN9

OHAS

Response

xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

(NO) YES

OMPH

OPT

(NO) YES aaa

(ABDD)

ABDA

(AHD)

AHA

(AMD)

Comment

OHAS Security DN for zone 3

OHAS Security DN for zone 4

OHAS Security DN for zone 5

OHAS Security DN for zone 6

OHAS Security DN for zone 7

OHAS Security DN for zone 8

OHAS Security DN for zone 9

Off-Hook Alarm Security

Enter X to remove the OHAS DNs for the following zones.

basic-18

This is the Call Detail Records for an outgoing packet data call from the Meridian Packet

Handler to the Public Switched Packet Data

Network

CDR for outgoing packet data call mph-19

Options

Multiple options separated by spaces are allowed in response to the OPT prompt. The last option must be followed by a carriage return <CR>. The <CR> inputs the options selected and is followed by either the next prompt or a system message.

basic-1 supp-6 Attendant Busy Display Denied

Attendant Busy Display Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

Autohold on Loop Key Denied

Autohold on Loop Key Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

Attendant Monitor Denied misop-20 china-21

Pack/Rel

basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18 basic-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 353

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

AMA

(ATDA)

ATDD

(BIND)

BBIN

EBIN

(BIXA)

BIXD

(BLA)

BLD

(BOHD)

BOHA

(BWTD)

BWTA

(CCBD)

CCBA

(CFO)

CFF

Comment

Attendant Monitor Allowed

Only with China Attendant Monitor (CHINA) package 285.

Attendant Through Dialling Allowed.

Attendant Through Dialling Denied.

Break-In Indication Denied

Basic Break-In Indication

Extended Break-In Indication

Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package

127.

Break-In to external call Allowed

Break-In to external call Denied

Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package

127.

Pack/Rel

basic- 23 bki-9 bki-9

Break-In to Line Lockout Set Allowed

Break-In to Line Lockout Set Denied

Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package

127.

Position Busy with Calls on Hold Denied

Position Busy with Calls on Hold Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

bki-9 supp-6

Breakin Warning Tone Denied

Breakin Warning Tone Allowed

Collect Call Blocking Denied

Collect Call Blocking Allowed ponw-25.4

ccb-21

Call Forward Originating

Call Forward Forwarding

Either the Originating or Forwarding party's

Class of Service is used to determine access to services or features on Call Forward.

basic-1

354 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(CFRD)

CFRA

(CHDD)

CHDA

(COX)

COP

(CPD)

CPA

CPN

(CTD)

CTA

(CUI)

MTI

(CWRD)

CWRA

(CXOD)

CXOA

(DBD)

Comment

Call Forward Reminder tone for 500/2500 telephone Denied.

Call Forward Reminder tone for 500/2500 telephone Allowed.

Charge Display Denied at end of call

Charge Display Allowed at end of call

Pack/Rel

cfrt-19 supp-16

Central Office call No Priority for Ringing

Central Office call Priority for Ringing

Number Pickup or RNPU and Group Call

Pickup GPUA dcp-12

Call Park Denied

Call Park Allowed. Call Park (CPRK) package

33 must be equipped.

CPN enables the Call Park Network wide

(CPRKNET) option. CPRKNET package 306 must be equipped.

cpk-2 basic-1 Camp-On Tone Denied

Camp-On Tone Allowed

CI lamps show Attendant Console Group

(ACG) information for incoming calls

CI lamps show Multi-Tenant Service (MTS) information for incoming calls

Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169 coop-14

CFNA treatment for Call Waiting calls on a DN

Denied

CFNA treatment for Call Waiting calls on a DN

Allowed basic-21

No Override of Call Forward External

Overrides Call Forward External Denied

(CFXD) to allow call forward to a CDP Distant

Steering Code (DSC)

Flexible Incoming Tones Denied on digital sets basic-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 355

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

DBA

(DNCA)

DNCS

(DNX)

DNI

(DRE)

DRT

(DSX)

DSI

(DSTD)

DSTA

Comment

Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed on digital sets

Pack/Rel

If DNCA is entered, all DID/CO or DOD calls are disconnected after the number of ring cycles defined by the response to the NFNA prompt while the system is in Night Service.

If DNCS is entered, outgoing CO/DOD calls or incoming CO/DID calls in the answered state, and waiting on a set are disconnected after the number of seconds defined in response to the

NFNS prompt expires.

Only with Attendant Forward No Answer

(AFNA) package 134.

afna-14

ACD Dialed Number Identification Service feature excluded

ACD Dialed Number Identification Service feature Included

Only with Dialed Number Identification Service

(DNIS) package 98 dnis-10 coop- 5 Queue thermometer REST Excludes Inter-

Attendant calls, Recalls and Metered calls

Queue thermometer REST Includes Inter-

Attendant calls, Recalls and Metered calls

Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169

Data Services or server IS Excluded

Data Services or server IS Included

Only with Attendant Break-In (BKI) package

127.

bkil-8

DID call to Second degree busy Treatment

Denied

DID call to Second degree busy Treatment

Allowed

If Allowed DID calls forwarded to a busy set are disconnected. If Denied DID calls forwarded to a busy set follow the set's CLS

(FBA/FBD) treatment.

supp-6

356 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

(FKA)

FKD

GPAA

(GPAD)

(HLPD)

HLPA

(HRLD)

HRLA

(HTU)

HTR

Response

(FACD)

FACA

(HVD)

HVA

(IC1)

IC2

(IHD)

IHA

(LLCD)

LLCA

Comment

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

Flexible Attendant Call Waiting (ACW) thresholds Denied

Flexible Attendant Call Waiting (ACW) thresholds Allowed

If allowed, the Call Waiting thresholds are expressed as a percentage of the active consoles.

Forward Key Allowed

Forward Key Denied

Group Pickup Alert Allowed

Group Pickup Alert Denied

Individual Hold Lamp Option Denied.

Individual Hold Lamp Option Allowed.

Pack/Rel

supp-15 basic-6 basic-7.0

dhld- 23

Individual Hold Release Option Denied.

Individual Hold Release Option Allowed.

dhld- 23

Hot Line access Unrestricted

Hot Line access Restricted

If Restricted only Hot Line calls may terminate on Hot Line DNs. Only with Enhanced Hot Line

(HOT) package 70.

hot-10 hva-19 Handsfree Voice call Denied

Handsfree Voice call Allowed

Incoming Call Indicator key/lamp strips

One key/lamp strip = 10 ICIs

Two key/lamp strips = 20 ICIs basic-1

Individual Hold Denied

Individual Hold Allowed basic-1

Line Load Control commands in LD 2 Denied llc-10

Line Load Control commands in LD 2 Allowed

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 357

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

(LOD)

LOA

(LRD)

LRA

(MCTD)

MCTA

(MCX)

MCI

(MKRA)

MKRL

(MWUD)

MWUA

(NCD)

NCA

(PCMD)

PCMA

Comment Pack/Rel

Lockout Denied

Lockout Allowed

LOA locks an attendant out of re-entering an established call on the console Hold key. The attendant can override with the Barge-In feature.

basic-1

Last Number Redial Denied

Last Number Redial Allowed

Only with Last Number Redial (LNR) package

90.

Inr-8

Malicious Call Trace signal Denied

Malicious Call Trace signal Allowed

Only with Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package

107 mct-10 mwc-1 Message Center Excluded

Message Center Included

Multiple Key Ring All

Multiple Key Ring Lowest

Message Waiting Unconditional Denied

Message Waiting Unconditional Allowed basic_7.00

ffc-14

When an Attendant Console Group (ACG) is in Night Service, redirection of attendant calls is denied.

coop-5

When an Attendant Console Group (ACG) is in Night Service, redirection of attendant calls is allowed.

Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169.

Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail Denied nas-14

Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail Allowed

Must have PCMA to output PCMM prompt in

LD 23. Requires International Supplementary

358 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(PSD)

PSA

(PVCA)

PVCD

(RECA)

RECO

Comment

Features (SUPP) package 131 and Network

Attendant Services (NAS) package 157.

Presentation Status selection Denied on attendant consoles

Presentation Status selection Allowed on attendant consoles

Only with Console Operations (COOP) package 169

Pack/Rel

coop- 5

Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward Allowed arfw-20

Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward Denied

Attendant calls is redirected when all but one console is busy.

Attendant calls is redirected when all consoles are busy.

coop-5

(REA)

RED

(RND)

RNA

(ROX)

ROI

(RTD)

RTA

Note:

Attendant calls are redirected when there is no presentation status to other consoles in the console group. Console Operations

(COOP) package 169 is required.

Release on Exclusion Allowed

Release on Exclusion Denied misop-20

Ring Again No Answer Denied

Ring Again No Answer Allowed misop-20

Recorded Overflow Announcement Excluded roa-2

Recorded Overflow Announcement Included

This treatment applies exclusively to congested consoles with Recorded Overflow

Announcement (ROA) package 36.

Coordinated Dialing Plan routing feature

Denied

Coordinated Dialing Plan routing feature

Allowed cdp-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 359

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

(RTR)

ROR

(SBD)

SBA

(SDDE)

SDAL

(SIAD)

SIAA

(SLD)

SLA

(SYD)

SYA

EHS

(THPD)

THPA

Comment

RTA allows DID routing with Distant Steering

Codes over CO and WATS trunks. Only with

Call Detail Recording (CDP) package 59.

Pack/Rel

Terminating side of call determines ringing or buzzing cadence used

Originating side of call determines ringing or buzzing cadence used

Only with Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125.

ftc-14

Flexible Incoming Tones Denied for SL-1 telephones

Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed for SL-1 telephones

Only with Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125.

ftc-14

Single Digit Access to Hotel Services (Denied)

Allowed

Single Digit Access to Hotel Services (Denied)

Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

supp-6

Source Included when Attendant dials Denied supp-18

Source Included when Attendant dials Allowed supp-6 Slow Answer Recall Enhancement Denied

Slow Answer Recall Enhancement Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

basic-1 Secrecy Denied

Secrecy Allowed

Enhanced Secrecy Allowed

ACD Threshold Percentage Denied

ACD Threshold Percentage Allowed

Only with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

supp-5

360 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(TOA)

TOD

OTCR

(TTAD)

TTAA

(VOBD)

VOBA

(XBL)

IBL

(XDP)

IDP

(XLDN)

NLDN

(XLF)

ILF

(XTG)

ITG

(NO) YES

Comment

Attendant Monitor Tone Allowed

Attendant Monitor Tone Denied

Only with China Attendant Monitor Package

(CHINA) package 285.

Pack/Rel

china-21

Time To Answer and Abandoned call records

Denied

Time To Answer and Abandoned call records

Allowed

Only with New Format CDR (FCDR) package

234.

fcdr-8

Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override

Enhancement Denied

Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override

Enhancement Allowed basic-20

Exclude Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

Include Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

IBL and ILF cannot be used together. Only with

M2250 Attendant Console (DCON) package

140.

dcon-15 ddsp-1 Exclude Digit Display

Include Digit Display

Network-wide LDN denied

Network-wide LDN allowed nldn-20

Exclude Lamp Field array

Include Lamp Field array

Exclude key/lamp expansion module

Include key/lamp expansion module

Used as Trunk Group Busy field or supervisory lamp field basic-1

CDR provided, based on Originally Dialed

Trunk Route supp-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 361

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

PANI

Response

(NO) YES

PBLK

PBUZ

PCA

(ATN)

RAN

CPAS

OVF xx yy

(OFF) ON

Comment

M911 Pseudo ANI display where:

• No = no display pseudo ANI

• Yes = display pseudo ANI

Pack/Rel

basic-25

Call presented has higher precedence.

Attendant

Ran trunk

Central Precedence answering station

Overflow tone basic-21

Priority Buzzing cadence for IADN and Code

Blue calls.

xx - priority buzz-on phase yy - priority buzz off phase

Range is from 2 to 16 seconds. If the value entered is an odd number between 2 and 16, it is truncated to the next lowest even integer.

basic- 23

Personal Call Assistant, where:

OFF = Turns PCA off at the customer level

ON = Turns PCA on at the customer level pca-3.0

PCDL

PCDS

PCMC

PELK

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

0-(15)-31

(NO)

YES

Note:

Configuration of the PCA is preserved and enabled regardless of whether or not the feature is enabled.

PPM output on CDR Link. An additional three words is added to tape record.

supp-15

Programming of Control Digits is not required mpo-20

Programming of Control Digits is required

Pulse Code Modulation Conversions permitted in a network connection, µ-Law to A-

Law or A- Law to µ-Law, in a network connection esn-14

Do not enable Electronic Lock on Private Lines ffc-21

Enable Electronic Lock on Private Lines

362 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PFAN

PFNA

PFX1

PFX2

PHDT

PHIP

Response

(ATN)

RAN

CPAS

(ATN)

RAN

CPAS x...x

x...x

1-(30)-63

(ATN)

RAN

CPAS

OVF

Comment

Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer (Call waiting)

Attendant

Ran trunk

Central Precedence answering station

Pack/Rel

basic-21

Intercept if dialed DN fails to answer

Attendant

Ran trunk

Central Precedence answering station basic-21

Prefix 1. Prefix or area code for International

PRA. First element of Calling Party Number.

PFX1 + PFX2 + DN cannot exceed 8 numbers for AXE-10. Prompted with International

Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.

pri2-15

Prefix 2. Central Office Prefix for International

PRA. Second element of Calling Part

Number.

pri2-15

PFX1 + PFX2 + DN cannot exceed 8 numbers for AXE-10. Prompted with International

Primary Rate Access (IPRA) package 202.

ss25-4 Permanent Hold Timer

Number of two second intervals between reminders, for example: 30 = 60 seconds. If

Audible Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) is enabled then DBRC takes precedence over

PHDT.

Prompted with 2500 Set Features (SS25) package 18.

Precedence dialed is higher than allowed.

Attendant

Ran trunk

Central Precedence answering station

Overflow tone basic-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 363

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

PICP

(ATN)

RAN

CPAS

OVF

PINT (NO) YES

PINX_DN xx...x

PKND (1)-3

(1)-4

PNI

Response

1-16283

Comment

Intercept treatment if called party cannot be preempted.

Attendant

Ran trunk

Central Precedence answering station

Overflow tone

Change precedence Intercept treatment.

Node DN

Pack/Rel

basic-21 basic-21 basic-21

Number of digits Dialed for Group Pickup

Prompted with Directed Call Pickup (DCP) package 115.

To determine the number of digits, count the number of digits of the highest number RNPG group.

dcp-12

Private Network Identifier

Each customer data block must have a unique

PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.

The PNI in the CDB functions as a logical customer number for routing incoming noncall-associated Transaction Capability

Application Part (TCAP) facility messages to the appropriate ESN translations.

PNI = 1 is typical for customer 0. It must be matched by the PNI in the far end RDB.

Default PNI = 0 prevents the operation of features such as NRAG, NACD and NMS.

Within one network, use the same value for

PNI in both LD 15 and LD 16. When interworking with different networks, the LD 15 PNI is for the local system and the LD 16 PNI is for the target or remote switch.

PORT 0-15

<CR>

Note:

Requires package 148 (NTWK)

CDR port

Stop PORT prompt cdr-1

364 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PPMD

PPM_DATA (NO) YES

PREF

PREO

PRMT

PRNG

0-9999

(0)

1

Response

(0)-15

(YES) NO

#

X aaa

0 - (40) - 60

Comment

To remove a CDR port, change CDR = NO.

Exit and re-enter LD 15, select CDR = YES, then add only the desired CDR port numbers.

Precede with X to remove.

Serial Data Interface Port Monitor (Features and Options Data Block)

One Serial Data Interface Port Monitor per customer is recommended.

Pack/Rel

Periodic Pulse Metering

Prompted with Message Registration (MR) package 101.

Change Periodic Pulse Metering options mr-10 basic-21

Up to 4 digit Access Prefix for a unique NPI/

TON combination in the table.

Wild character for replacement of any digit.

The entry of # for wild card character is stored as *.

Reset the access prefix value to nil isdn-24

Pretranslation Option

Disabled

Enabled

To enable the Pretranslation feature, the

Pretranslation data block or Calling Group to

Speed Call correlation must be configured in

LD 18.

Prompted with Pretranslation (PXLT) package

92.

pxlt-8 aaa = sequence of any alphanumeric character. max of 126 characters.

Subsequent Non Specified Information parameters for Message Waiting notification.

'PRMT" is re-prompted until <CR> is entered, then the next prompt 'CANC' is prompted.

dmwi- 23

Precedence ringback timer in seconds.

atvn-25.47

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 365

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

PRMT

Response

0 - (60)-120

PSTN

PTTY

(NO) YES

(0)-15

Comment

Duration of preemption tone before set goes to line lock out.

Pack/Rel

atvn-25.47

Public Service Telephone Networks

Limit the number of PSTNs allowed in a network connection to one PSTN. The default

(NO) puts no limit on the number of PSTN connections.

isdn-14

PPM TTY number for printing meters (one per switch)

Precede with X to remove.

Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206. TTY must be defined with USER = BGD in LD 17.

mlwu-16

PWD_DATA

(NO) YES

PWD2 x...x

R2BN

R2ED

RALL

RAN1

0-23 0-59

0-23 0-59

(NO)

YES x...x

Customer related passwords basic-21

Second level administration Password

Password length is 4-16 characters and is defined in LD 17. The SPWD password is not updated unless the PWD2 password is entered correctly. PWD2 must be entered before new ATAC is accepted.

basic-1

RAN2 Begin time

RAN2 End time awu-10 awu-10

Mandatory Recall is not required prior to dialing control digits

Mandatory Recall is required prior to dialing control digits mpo-20

Primary Ran route, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E

Use RAN1 as the Primary route for Language

0 in a Multi Language AWU application. The route must be unique. TYPE must = AWR in

LD 16.

mpo-20

366 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RAN2

RANF

RANR

RCLE

RCNT

RCY1

RCY2

Response

x...x

x...x

x...x

Comment Pack/Rel

Secondary RAN route, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E

Use RAN2 as the Secondary route for

Language 0 in a Multi Language AWU application. The route must be unique. TYPE must = AWR in LD 16.

mpo-20

Music route, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E

TYPE must = AWR in LD 16.

awu-10

RAN Route number, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E ran-1

(ATN OVF ATN ATN)

Redirection Count Limit Exceeded as defined by TRCL

TN is not allowed for attendant calls. NAP is not allowed for any field for RCLE.

isdn-15

0-(1)-5

1-(6)-15

1-(4)-15

Redirection Count for ISDN calls

Maximum number of inter-node hops allowed in a network redirection call, only enforced when ISDN = YES. This field must be set to greater than 0 for a network redirection to take place.

esn-14 mpo-20 Number of Cycles of Re-ringing before forwarding to attendant or disconnecting.

Applies only if RGNA = DAR or AAR.

Number of Cycles of Ringing before forwarding to transferring station

Valid only for the RGNA option.

mpo-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 367

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response

RDR_DATA (NO) YES

RECD (NO)

YES

REF0

REF1

REF2

REF3 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

R_ENTRY aa

REQ:

Xaa

Xaa Xbb

<CR>

?

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

Comment

Change Call Redirection

Pack/Rel

basic-21

Malicious Call Trace Recorder is not activated emct-20

Malicious Call Trace Recorder is activated

Not prompted when defining a new customer.

DN for Reference trunk 0

DN for Reference trunk 1

DN for Reference trunk 2

DN for Reference trunk 3 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified

ANI entry for an incoming route to be deleted

ANI entries for an incoming between aa and bb to be deleted.

Exit

This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered as response.

ANI entries must be between 0 and

(R_SIZE-1).

For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.

An R-ENTRY can be deleted even if still configured on an incoming route.

cist-24

Request

A colon following a prompt indicates enhanced processing. Enhanced processing allows a user to either view a list of possible responses or input an abbreviated response.

Get a list of possible responses

Change existing data block

Exit overlay program

Add new data block to the system

Remove data block basic-1

368 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RGNA

Response

(NEW)

CHG

OUT xxx yyy

Comment

The REQ prompt appears under the NET:

Networking gate opener and the following responses is valid with respect to the DPNSSI

Message Waiting Indication feature.

Pack/Rel

dmwi- 23

Create a new Message Waiting Indication Non

Specified Information table.

Change a Message Waiting Indication Non

Specified Information table.

Delete a Message Waiting Indication Non

Specified Information table.

Ringing No Answer treatment

Where xxx is for internal calls and yyy is for external calls. Valid entries for xxx and yyy are: mpo-20

• AAR - Forward to Attendant or Night Service after re-ringing for RCY1 cycles

• ATN - Forward to Attendant or Night Service

• DAR - Disconnect After Re-ringing for RCY1 cycles

• DIS - Disconnect

• OVF - provide Overflow Tone

• (STD) - Standard Operation (this is the default)

RICI

RLA

RLCR xx

0-511

0-511

X

ICI key numbers that may receive ROA

Where: x = 0-9 if OPT = IC1 or 0-19 if OPT =

IC2

Precede with X to remove.

roa-2 casr-1 Release Link route number.

Route 31 can be designated an exclusively private route in LD 16.

Relocation FFC Error RAN number

To disable the RAN supp-16

RLI 0-999 0-1999

ROA_DATA (NO) YES

Route List Index fnp-20 basic-7.00

Change Recorded Overflow Announcement basic-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 369

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

ROPT

Response

(NRO)

RPA

RPNS

RR

R_SIZE

RTIM

RAX

ROA

ROX

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-511

1-512 xxx yyy zzz

Comment

No Route Optimization This option can be used to suppress Route Optimization on switches which already have high traffic.

Route optimization is performed on calls which have experienced alternative routing, been transferred or have been extended by an attendant.

Route Optimization after Alternative routing

Route Optimization after Transfer and extension by an attendant

Pack/Rel

dnwk-16

Radio Paging Allowed

Recall with Priority during Night Service rpa-20 supp-15

RAN route number.

ran-1

Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for incoming routes.

If <CR> is entered when REQ=NEW (new customer, it defaults to 1.

After conversion it defaults to the number of

ANI entries for incoming route created during conversion.

The R_SIZE can't be decreased if the entries are not empty cist-24

Recall. Where:

• xxx = 0-(30)-378 (for Slow-Answer)

• yyy = 0-(30)-510 (for Camp-On)

• zzz = 0-(30)-510 (for Call waiting)

These timers indicate in seconds the elapsed time before attendant recall. Slow Answer must be a multiple of six seconds while Camp-

On and Call Waiting must be a multiple of two seconds, with odd numbers are rounded down.

To change one timer all three fields must be input.

For recalls timed at the local node using the redirection feature developed for DPNSS, no basic-1

370 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

RTSA

SACP (NO)

SNGL

ALL

SAMM

SATD

SBLF

SBUP

SCDL

SCPL

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Alphabetical list of prompts

April 2011 371

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt Response Comment

data dump and SYSLOAD are required to implement a change in the password length.

Signal Destination Flash Timing

Pack/Rel

basic-21 SDFL

S_ENTRY

SIPD

384-

(1024)-2048

(1)-2000 x...x

Entry of ANI table applying to a set

Configure SIP domain name, where x...x =

1-16 characters.

Allowable values:

• 0-9

• A-Z

• a-z

• . (period) basic-6.00

SIPL_ON

SIZE

SPRE

SPVC

SPWD

(NO) YES Enable/disable SIP Line Services.

Where:

• NO = disable SIP Lines Services

• YES = enable SIP Line Services basic-6.00

0-(256)-4000 Specify maximum number of CLID entries needed.

Recommended Maximum Ranges settings for machine types:

• Small System and CS 1000S - 125 entries

• Options 51C and 61C - 1000 entries

• Option 81C - 4000 isdn-22 xxxx

(0)

1-63 xxxx

Special Prefix number (1-4 digits)

Precede with X to remove. The prefix must not conflict with the numbering plan.

basic-1

Supervisory console

No Supervisor console

Attendant number of Supervisory console

Prompted with Supervisory Attendant Console

(SPVC) package 93.

Secure Data Password

Precede with X to remove. This password is entered when using LD 88 for authorization codes and LD 24 for Direct Inward System

Access (DISA) block.

bacd-8 disa-1

372 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SRAN

Response

0-511

X

SRCD

SRRT

SRT

S_SIZE

STCB

STE

STRG

STRL

T100

TAWU

TBL

TFDR

TGLD

TGR1

TGR2

(0000)-9999

0-511

X

2-(40)-2044

0-2000

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

(#), xxx

1-3 xxx...x

1-(3)

1-15

(NO) YES

0-(1)-9, *, #

(0)-31

(0)-31

Comment

Second RAN number for second PCR threshold

To disable the RAN

Set Relocation Security Code Prompted with

Set Relocation (SR) package 53.

Precede with X to remove.

Second RAN Route for ROA.

Enter X to remove.

Pack/Rel

supp-16 sr-1 roa-2

Second RAN Time, in seconds before second

RAN given

Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for sets.

The SIZE can't be decreased if the entries are not empty.

ran-1

Station Camp-On Busy allowed

Standard Time Entry not allowed

Standard Time Entry allowed. The entry can be 3 or 4 digits long. STE is prompted if WUD

= YES.

sco-20 awu-22

String to indicate end-of-dialing

Up to three characters are allowed as defined by STRL. Valid entries are: digits 0 through 9, asterisk or *, and octothorpe or #. Default is

(#).

The default (#) cannot be used with the

Outpulsing, Asterisk, and Octothorpe (OPAO) feature package 104.

String Length of end-of-dial indicator ffc-15 ffc-15 basic-1 awu-16

DN for Type-100 test line

Number of Tries for an unanswered AWU call

This defines the number of times an unanswered AWU call is presented before recall to the attendant for manual Wake Up calls.

Table Number

Trunk Failure Display Required

Requires M2250 console. Prompted with

Trunk Failure Monitor (TFM) package 182.

isdn-24 tfm-15

Control digit for Toggle

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Trunk Group Access Restriction mpo-20 supp-16 supp-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 373

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

TIDM

Response

(NO)

YES

TIM_DATA

TIM1

TIM2

TIM3

TIM4

TIME

TMON

TN1

TN2

TN3

TN4

(NO) YES hh mm hh mm hh mm hh mm

0-(15)

(NO) YES l s c u c u l s c u c u l s c u c u l s c u c u

Comment

Trunk Identity Meaningful

PBX Reference Number is to be displayed without the Trunk Group Reference Number

Trunk Group Reference Number of a Trunk

Identity (TIDY) in LD 16, is meaningful

Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206 and Digital Private

Network Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123.

Change Timers

Hour and Minute for First Night Service DN.

Enter the hour and minute for First Night

Service DN.

Where: hh = 0-23, mm = 0-59

Enter X to remove the time. TIM1 should be set earlier than TIM2, 3 and 4. If no time is entered here, the system assumes a 24-hour clock.

Time for Second Night Service DN

Time for Third Night Service DN

Pack/Rel

supp-16 basic-21 basic-12

Traffic Monitoring

Prompted with Multi Language Wake Up

(MLWU) package 206 and Traffic Monitoring

(TMON) package 168.

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete basic-12 basic-12 basic-12 Hour and Minute for Fourth Night Service DN

For all of the entries in the Night Service Time of Day (NSTOD) feature, entering X for the DN deletes the existing value for that entry.

Entering <CR> allows the user to select an existing entry, or skip to another entry.

Malicious Call Trace Alarm Time emct-20 mlwu-14 basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

374 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TN5

Response

l s c u c u

TN6

TNDM

TON

TPDN

TRCL

TRCR

TRNX

TST_DATA l s c u c u

0-(15)-31

ECDP

ELOC

ESPN

INTL

LOCL

NATL

UNKN yyyy

(0)-7

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Terminal Number For Large Systems For

Small Systems and CS 1000S

Enter X to delete

Tandem threshold/loop avoidance limit

This is the value permitted in a network connection. If the value entered is greater than

25, then 25 is used for DPNSS calls.

Prompted when Integrated Services Digital

Network (ISDN) package 245 and ISDN

Supplementary Features (ISDN INTL SUP) package 161, or Digital Private Signaling

System Network Services (DNWK) package

231 is equipped.

Pack/Rel

basic-3.0

basic-3.0

isdn-14

ESN_CDP

ESN_LOC

ESN_SPN

International

Local

National

Unknown

Target PCA DN, where: yyyy = the primary DN

TPDN is prompted only if PCA is set to ON.

If there is no DN configured against the HOT

P key in LD 11, this value is used to extend the call using the PCA feature.

Enter X to remove. However, if there is at least one PCA with no target DN configured in LD

11, then this operation does not succeed.

isdn-24 pca-3.0

Total Redirection Count Limit

Number of times that a call can be redirected before being intercepted. (0) means that redirection is not limited by this feature, but is limited by various configurations.

Carriage Return sent after each CDR message

Prevent transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across a private network

Allow transfer on ringing of supervised external trunks across a private network

Change Test lines isdn-15 cdr-1 basic-22 basic-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 375

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

TST0

TST1

TST2

TST3

TSTL

Response

xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

(NO) YES

TTBL

TYPE:

(0)-31

CDB

DEFAULT

?

AML_DATA

ANI_DATA

ATT_DATA

AWU_DATA

CAS_DATA

CCS_DATA

CDR_DATA

FCR_DATA

FFC_DATA

FTR_DATA

HSP_DATA

ICP_DATA

IMS_DATA

Comment

DN for Test Trunk 0

DN for Test Trunk 1

DN for Test Trunk 2

Pack/Rel

basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

DN for Test Trunk 3

Test Lines for this customer

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

The following prompts are used for transmission testing. Refer to NTP

553-2001-325 Transmission Capabilities.

Tone Table number

Table 0, North American default values, is created when the first customer is created.

Refer to the Flexible Tone and Digit Switches

NTP for other tables.

Prompted with Flexible Tones and Cadences

(FTC) package 125.

Type of data block

Customer Data Block

Default Customer Data Block (when REQ =

NEW)

Get list of possible responses

You may directly access a given data block by entering the first three or all the letters of one of the responses listed below.

A colon following a prompt indicates enhanced processing. Enhanced processing allows a user to either view a list of possible responses or input an abbreviated response.

You may view the revised Prompts and

responses sequence for LD 15 on Customer data block

on page 268.

Gate openers:

Application Module Link options

Automatic Number Identification numbers

Attendant Console options

Automatic Wake Up options

Centralized Attendant Service options

Controlled Class of Service options

CDR and Charge Account options

New Flexible Code Restriction options

Flexible Feature Code options

Features and options

Hospitality Management options

Intercept Computer update basic-1 basic-1 ftc-13 basic-1

376 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

UAPR

UBRI

UCST

UDPL

UMG

USBM

UST

VNR

VO_ALO

VO_ALOH

R

VPNI

Response

INT_DATA

MON_DATA

MPO_DATA

NET_DATA

NIT_DATA

OAS_DATA

PPM_DATA

PWD_DATA

RDR_DATA

ROA_DATA

TIM_DATA

TST_DATA

LDN_DATA

SLS_DATA x...x

(OVF NAP NAP

NAP)

(0)-9999

1-(19)

Comment

Integrated Message Service options

Intercept treatment options

Departmental Listed Directory Numbers

Set-based monitoring

Multi-Party Options

ISDN and ESN Networking options

Night Service options

Off-Hook Alarm Security options

Periodic Pulse Metering options

Customer related Passwords

Call Redirection

Recorded Overflow Announcement options

Timers

Test lines

SIP Line Services options

SIP Lines services

SIP Line User Agent prefix.

Universal BRI

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

basic-6.00

basic-6.00

basic-6.00

basic-20

Unit Cost for periodic pulse metering

Flexible length of Vacant Number Routing

(VNR) Uniform Dialing Plan digits (UDP).

Enter the maximum number of UDP digits expected by VNR.

User to User Messaging enabled

UIPE Set Based Monitoring Where: (NO) = all previously configured TNs are flushed, and subsequent prompts are not prompted. YES = accept and prompt the next prompts. <CR> = previously stored value taken.

supp-15 fnp-14 ims-4 basic-3.0

User Status Update enabled

Vacant Number Routing

Prompted with Flexible Tones and Cadences

(FTC) package 160.

ims-4 fnp-20

(NO) YES

(0)-23

(0) - 16283

Note:

FNP must be configured to YES to allow configuration of VNR.

Enable Virtual Office Automatic Logout basic-25.4

Virtual Office Automatic Logout time using 24 hour clock.

basic-25.4

Virtual Private Network Identifier for CS 1000S basic-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 377

LD 15: Customer Data Block

Prompt

VSID

WAIT

WKDY

WUD

XRFP

XRFR

Response

0-127

(RGB)

MUS

SIL

1-7

(NO)

YES x...x

(NO) YES

Comment

<CR> = No Change

Enter X to remove the VPNI.

Value added Server Identifier

Enter the identifier number of the Value-Added

Server or VAS providing the services such as

Voice Messaging.

Enter X to remove the VSID.

Treatment during waiting time for ROA

Ringback

Music

Silence

Pack/Rel

usm-7 roa-2

Week Day for weekly printout. Where 1 =

Sunday.

Wake-up Delimiter is not required

Wake-up Delimiter is required

A time entered during use of the Automatic

Wake Up FFC Delimiter feature is valid only if the user enters "#" at the end of the time digits.

External Attendant Remote Call Forward

Password

The password length is 1-8 digits. The password is numeric only.

External Attendant Remote Call Forward

Password Required supp-15 awu-22 arfw-20 arfw-20

378 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 15: LD 16: Route Data Block,

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

This Overlay program allows data for trunk routes, ATM schedule hours, or ATM routes to be created or modified.

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:

RDB000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx RAN RTE AVAIL:

(U/P): xxx USED: xxx TOT: xxx

The range for route numbers are system dependent:

• 0-511 for Large Systems and CS 1000E

• 0-127 for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

After making any changes to the route data block, IPE trunk cards must be downloaded with ENLC l s c command in LD 32.

The License header includes Recorded Announcement Broadcast (RAN RTE) information. This information is updated each time a new RAN route is configured.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

RDB: Route data block

on page 380

ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block on page 396

SCH: ATM Schedules data block on page 397

Meridian 911 Route data block on page 397

NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block

on page 398

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 379

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Section

Other Information:

Table 3: Release Mechanism Options

on page 398

RDB: Route data block

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DMOD

ROUT

DES

Prompt

TKTP

M911P

M911_ABAN

M911_TONE

ABTR

VTRK

ZONE

NODE

PCID

Response

aaaa

RDB xx

1-127 x...x

x...x

a...a

Comment

Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)

Type of data block = RDB (Route data block)

Customer number associated with this route

Default Model number for this route (Small Systems,

CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T)

Route number, where x...x =

0-511: Large System and CS 1000E System

0-127: Small System, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T

Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs.

Trunk Type (TKTP responses begin on Trunk Type You must respond to this prompt when REQ = NEW.)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

M911 Trunk Type for MCDN Network.

optional call abandon treatment YES = abandoned call treatment for route NO = no abandoned call treatment for route optional call abandon tone YES = tone given on answer NO= silence given on answer

(15) Range 0 - 30

Timer (in minutes) to block the disconnect from being tandemed across to the target node. Default value:

15minutes. This timer value can be added in increments of 1 minute.

Virtual Trunk route (NO) YES

0–255 0–8000 Zone for codec selection and bandwidth management xxxx Node ID a...a

Protocol ID for the route.

380 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

CRID

TW_ROUTE

- NACC

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaaa

M911_ANI (NO) YES

- M911_TRK_TYPE aaaa

- M911_FORM (1) 2

-- ANI2_CLID (NO) YES

Comment

Allow or deny CDR record for SIP to include correlation

ID.

Taiwan R1 route

Network access control (aaaa = (PGNR), PGNC, or

PGNU)

Receive ANI digits for Meridian 911 routes

Meridian 911 ANI trunk types (aaaa = (911T) or 911E)

Automatic Number Identification Format

Optional ANI2 display for CLID ANI2 display (not) required with CLID Display. This prompt is only printed when M911_FORM is set to 2.

Optional call abandon treatment

Optional call abandon tone

CNVT

- DDMI

- ATDN

SAT

RCLS

IDEF

DTRK

- BRIP

- DGTP

- M911_ABAN (NO) YES

- M911_TONE (YES) NO

- NPID_TBL_NUM

PRIV

RPA

ESN

SIGL

0-7

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

(NO) YES

(0)-255

(0)-x...x

(NO) YES aaa

(NET) LOC

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

- IFC

- - CNTY

- CBCR a...a

a...a

(NO) YES

Meridian 911 route table index

Private Line Route

Radio Paging Route

Electronic Switched Network or ESN pad control

Layer 3 Signaling (a...a = APNS, BEL, DAS, DPN,

NT4, or NTS)

Conventional (applies only to Tie trunks)

Digit Manipulation Index

Attendant DN

Satellite used for trunk route via earth orbiting satellite

Route Class (aaa = (EXT) or INT)

Internal/external definition

Digital Trunk Route

ISDN BRI Packet handler route

Digital Trunk Type (a...a = BRI, DTI, DTI2, JDMI, PRI, or PRI2)

Interface type for route (IFC responses are listed on )

Country (CNTY responses can be found on )

Service route indicator

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 381

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

- CLID

- PROG

- SBN

- SIDE

- CNEG

- OVLR

- DIDD

- OVLS

- OVLT

- NASA

- MBGA

- PGPN

- RCAP

- - MWTO

- - MWRT

- -MQC_FEAT aaaa

BCOT

INTC

ISDN

(0) - 4000

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

- SDID

- - CTON

(NO) YES

(NCHG)

UKWN

Response

OPTx a...a

(NO) YES aaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-15

(NO) YES

(0)-8

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-15 a...a

(15) - 30

0 - (2) - 15

Comment

Calling Line Identification (x = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5)

Progress signal (a...a = NCHG, MALE, or MCON)

Send Billing Number

Meridian SL-1 Node Type (aaa = (NET) or USR)

Channel Negotiation

Overlap Receiving

Digits ignored for DID call during Overlap Receiving

Overlap Sending

Inter-INFO Timer during Overlap Sending

Network Attendant Service Allowed

MBG Interface on the D-channel

Protocol Set Group Number

Remote Capabilities (RCAP responses can be found on )

Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either

QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL PROCEEDING message.

Message Waiting Retry Timer.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either

QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.

MCDN QSIG Feature type, where aaaa = NAS, NACD or NMS

B-channel Overload Control timer

Speech calls to data sets are rejected (NO) or intercepted (YES) by an attendant.

Dedicated Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) route.

Send DID number instead of internal DN.IDC table with SDID Yes must be configured.

Calling Party Number

Call Type not changed.

Unknown call type.

382 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- MODE

- DCH

- DCHI

- IFC

- - CNTY

- MBXR

- - SIND

- SBN

- SRVC

Prompt

- - SRPM

- - PNI

- PR_TRIGS

- PR_RTN

- NCNA

- NCRD

- - TRO

- INAC

- - SPN

INC_T306

OUT_T306

(0) - 31

0-(15)-255

(0)-32700 aaa xx

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(2)-T306

0-(30)-T306

Response

INTL

NATL

LOCL a...a

0-159

1-15 a...a

a...a

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

International call type.

Comment

National call type.

Subscriber call type.

Mode of operation (a...a = APN, ISLD, or PRA)

D-channel number

DCHI port number

Interface type for route (IFC responses are listed on )

Country (CNTY responses can be found on )

Mobile Extension route (package 412 [MOBX] must be equipped).

Screening Indicator for the Mobile Extension route

(package 412 [MOBX] must be equipped).

Send Billing Number

Service type for AT&T ESS connections (SRVC responses can be found on Service type provisioned for AT&T ESS connections (where IFC = ESS#4 or

ESS#5) Prompted if ISDN = YES and IFC = ESS4 or

ESS5. Prompted with Inter Exchange Carrier (IEC) pkg 149.)

Service provisioned for National ISDN PRI (Rel 23 and later)

Service Parameter

Private Network Identifier (requires package 148

(NTWK))

Path Replacement Triggers

Retain option for far end PINX

Network Calling Name Allowed

Network Call Redirection

Trunk Route Optimization

Insert ESN Access Code to incoming private network call

SPN's AC is inserted first to search for a valid UDP number

Incoming T306 timer value in 2 second increments

Outgoing T306 timer value in 2 second increments

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 383

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

- - TGAR

CPUB

- IEC

DAPC

- TBL

CPFXS

HNTN

HLCL

ADDP

- DSEL

- INAC

- ISAR

- - RTN

- - FACY

- - SID

- - MIN

- - MAX

- - PTUT

- - PRIM

- - NCOS

- - CLS

Prompt

- FALT

- NSF

- COTR

- TIER

- WATR

- CHTY

- CTYP

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-511

0-511

0-511 a...a

a...a

Comment

Recognition of DTI2 ABCD FALT signal for ISL

Network Service Facility

DID/CO Trunk Reference route number

Tie Reference route number

Wide Area Telephone Service or WATS Reference route

Channel Type (a...a = (BCH) or ABCH)

Call Type for outgoing direct dialed TIE route (a...a =

(UKWN), CDP, INTL, LOC, NPA, NXX, or SPN)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-511

(NO) YES

0-511

0-510

1-510

0-510

Insert ESN Access Code

Integrated Service Access Route

Route Number

Facility indicator

Service Identification

Minimum number of channels

Maximum number of channels

Preference Trunk Usage Threshold

(YES) NO

(0)-99 a...a

Primary

Network Class of Service group number

Class of Service (a...a = (CTD), CUN, FR1, FR2, FRE,

SRE, TLD, or UNR)

Trunk Group Access Restrictions xx

(OFF) ON, LDN Conversion to public number feature.

001-999 Inter-Exchange Carrier ID

(NO) YES

(0)-15

(YES) NO

0-9999

Display of Access Prefix on CLID

Prefix table number to be associated with this route

Customer-defined Prefixes

Home National Number

0-9999

(NO) YES aaa

Home Local Number

Add Public Prefixes

Data Selection (aaa = (VOD), DTA, TDN, 3DTA, 7DTA,

7VOD or 3VCE)

384 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

AUTO

- ACMP

- LGTH

- GRD

REP

POST

STRT

WAIT

- MRT

BDCT

- DNIS

- - NDGT

- - WDGT

- - DDLY

- - DCDR

IANI

RTYP

- TITH

- NCTH

RANH

Prompt

PTYP

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES xx a

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa

4-(60)- 7200 aaaa

1-15 aaa aaa

(RGB) MUS

0 - 511

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(0) - 300

(0) - 100 x...x

Response

a...a

Comment

Port Type at far end (PTYP responses begin on Port

Type at far end The response to this prompt is used in determining the required transmission level. Refer to

Transmission Parameters Reference (NN43001-282) for more information.)

Auto terminate

Automatic Camp-On Calls to Busy Auto Terminate

Line

ACD DNIS route

Number of DNIS Digits

First or last 4 DNIS digits to be sent on APL and HSL

(a = (L) or F)

DNIS Interdigit Delay

Include DNIS number in CDR records

In-Band Automatic Number Identification route

Recording device for RAN trunks (aaa = AUD, CAP,

CK2, CKM, CON, DGT, LVL, or PUL)

Maximum message length in seconds

Ground Start Arrangement (aaaa = (PLAY) or IDLE)

Repetitions of recorded announcements

RAN Post announcement treatment (aaa = DIS or

ATT)

Start arrangement (aaa = IMM or DDL)

Ringback for calls queueing for RAN trunk

Music route for RAN queueing

Enable broadcast capability for this route.

For CS 1000E, the default is YES

Waiting Time Threshold (seconds)

Number of Calls Waiting Threshold

RAN or Music route which is used after post treatment, where:

• x...x = 0 - 511 for Large System and CS 1000E

• x...x = 0 - 127 for Small System, CS 1000S, MG

1000B, and MG 1000T

Precede with x to remove.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 385

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

SIGL

Prompt

ASUP

FORM

AUDN

ICOG

PREM

TW_INC_CLID (NO) YES

RANX

- RANR

- TCPP

- DTPI

- DPPI

- PII

- DTPO

- DPPO

AUXP

SRCH

TRMB

STEP

FACN

BAND

ACOD

CLEN

CPP

Response

aaa aaa aaa xxxx aaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES x...x

aaa

(YES) NO

0-511

(0) - 99999

(0) - 99 x...x

0 - (1)- 3999

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(*67) nnnn

(1167) nnnn

(NO) YES

(*82) nnnn

(1182) nnnn

(NO) YES

Comment

Answer Supervision returned by RAN to originator

(aaa = (NO), YES, or CO)

Signaling interface for CAMA trunks (aaa = BEL, NT4, or NT5)

Format for CAMA trunk signaling (aaa = M1A, M2B, or

M3C)

Auto termination DN for ISA service routes

Incoming and Outgoing trunk (aaa = IAO, ICT, or OGT)

Preemption allowed on this route. If SLP package is equipped, then COT, DID, FX, ISDN and Tie trunk types can be preemptable.

CLID Option on an incoming TWR1 route

RAN for calls diverted to external trunks

RAN Route number for the desired RAN route, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG

1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E

Search method for outgoing trunk member (aaa =

(LIN) or RRB)

Tromboning

Alternate trunk route for outgoing trunks

Tie or FX facility number

OUTWATS band number

Access Code for the trunk route

CLID entry number

Calling Party Privacy/Calling Party Privacy Override

Flag

CPP/CPPO flag for incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route

Privacy indicator for a digitone trunk

Privacy indicator for a dial-pulse trunk

Privacy Indicator Ignored

Privacy Override Indicator for a digitone trunk

Privacy Override Indicator for a dial-pulse trunk

Auxiliary processor applications

386 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

IDC

- DCNO

- NDNO

- DEXT

- - DNAM

LID

- LCNO

ANTK

SIGO

IABS

CAT

ID

STRK

SPTO

ANKP

INST

JDGT

- STYP

MFC

MFSS

TCRS

Prompt

TARG

BILN

- BLEN

- BNUM

- BDSP

ATGT

ASTP

SGRP

OABS

Response

0-(1)-31

(NO) YES

1-(10)-16

0-x...x

(NO) YES

(0)-60

1-(2)-15

(0)-999

0-9

(0)-3

00-99

(0)-9

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-99999999

1-(4)

(NO) YES

(0)-254

0-254

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-2

0-255 x...x

a...a

aaaa

(NO) YES

(B1) B2 B3

(YES) NO

Comment

Trunk Access Restriction Group

Billing Number Required

Billing Number Length

Billing number (1 to 16 digits depending on BLEN)

Billing Number Displayed

ADM Trunk Guard Timer

ADM Step-Forward ring cycles

Scheduled Access Restriction Group

Actual outgoing toll digits to be ignored for Code

Restriction

Number of incoming digits to be absorbed

CAMA trunk route category digits

Identification digit for CAMA trunk routes

Super Trunk group feature

Super Trunk Option

KP signal suppressed

Insert

Japan central office Digits

Incoming DID Digit Conversion on this route

Day IDC tree number

Night IDC tree number

Display External dialed digits

Display IDC Name

Line Identities option

Line identities Conversion tree number

ANI identifier number

Signaling arrangement (a...a = (STD), ESN2, ESN3,

ESN5, ETN, or EN19)

Standard Signaling Type (aaaa = (SDAT) or STDN)

Multifrequency Compelled or MFC Signaling

First MFS digit request backward signal

Toll Category Request Supported

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 387

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

MFCI

R2MD

- DIG#

SGL

BSSU

MFCO

EMGY

OPP

SWP

ICIS

ICDN

ICNP

Prompt

INDMF

- CLEN

MFEI

AUTM

- DIGS

SGL

MFEO

MFEA

MFED

MFKI

AUTM

DIGS

MFKO

LOCD

CHRG

1-127

(NO) YES

1-(4)-9

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

1-127

(NO) YES aaa a...a

(YES) NO x...x a...a

a...a

Response

(NO) YES

1 - (10) - 16

(0)-127

(NO) YES

(4)-5

(NO) YES

(0)-127

(YES) NO

0-(1)-9

1-127

(NO) YES

4-(5)

1-127 x aaaa

Comment

Indian R2MFC Operations

Maximum number of CNI digits requested for India

Phase 2 feature

MFE table number for Incoming calls

MFE Automatic Mode

Number of Digits expected

Signal

MFE table number for Outgoing calls

Access code signals are used in the signaling

First digit of special service call

MFK table number for Incoming calls

MFK Automatic Mode

Number of Digits expected

MFK table number for Outgoing calls

Number of digits used in a local call by the far end

Central Office (aaa = (6) or 7)

Charge DOD calls by line of by Block (aaaa = (BLOK) or LINE)

MFC Incoming table number

R2 modification

Number of digits

Signal

Backward Signal Suppression for undefined signal

MFC Outgoing table number

Emergency Route

Operator originated calls receive normal treatment for busy and intercept situations (aaa = (OPP) or ATT)

Subscriber with Priority (a...a = (NORM) or ATT)

Incoming Identifier Send

Incoming route DN (x...x = 1-7 digit CLID DN; a...a =

(NO) or CLID entry of 0-125 for trunk DN)

Incoming Numbering Plan (a...a = (UKWN), PUB, or

PRV)

388 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

ICNT

ICPS

OGIS

OGDN

OGNP

OGNT

OGPS

CCNI

CNTL

- TIMR

- SST

- DTD

- - TABL

- - XTDT

- - MDTD

- - DTDF

- - SCDT

- - 2 DT

- NEDC

- FEDC

CPDC

SPCT

DLTN

- TOV

- PSEL

- OPE

- - PSDS

- - TRAN

Response

a...a

(YES) NO

(YES) NO x...x a...a

a...a

a...a

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa xxx xx y

(NO) YES

0-31

0-7

1-(5)-31 x y

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa aaa

(NO) YES aaa

(NO) YES

(0)-3 aaaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

Comment

Incoming Numbering Type (a...a = (UKWN), INTL,

NTN, LCL, LOC, CDP or SPN)

Incoming Presentation Status

Outgoing Identifier Send

Outgoing route DN (x...x = 1-7 digit CLID DN; a...a =

(NO) or CLID entry of 0-125 for trunk DN)

Outgoing Numbering Plan (a...a = (UKWN), PUB, or

PRV)

Outgoing Numbering Type (a...a = (UKWN), INTL,

NTN, LCL, LOC, CDP or SPN)

Outgoing Presentation Status

Call Number Indicator or CNI enabled on route

Changes to Controls or timers

Trunk Timers (TIMR range definitions begin on aaa xxx)

Seizure Supervision Timer in seconds

Dial Tone Detection

Flexible dial tone detection table number

Extended Tone Detector Table Number

Minimum Dial Tone Detection delay in seconds

Dial Tone Detector Fail threshold

Secondary Dial Tone detection is used on route

Secondary Dial Tone

Near End Disconnect Control (aaa = ORG or ETH)

Far End Disconnect Control (aaa = (ORG), ETH, JNT, or FEC)

SL-1 is the only Controlling Party on incoming calls

Speech Path Cut-Through (aaa = (IMM) or DLY)

Dial Tone on originating calls

Data Time-out Value

Protocol Selection (aaaa = (DMDM) or TLNK)

Change data port Operating parameters

Public Switched Data Service option

Transmission mode (a...a = (ASYN) or SYN)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 389

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

- - PAR

- - DEM

- - PBDO

ANDT

HOLD

SEIZ

RGFL

RVSD

ILLR

- - DTR

- - DUP

- - DCD

- - MOD

- - INT

- - CLK

- - V25

- - HDLC

SVFL

OPCB

- IMBI

- IMCB

- TOBO

- BTCG

- IHT

- OHT

- OHTT

- SRT

- CGPC

- CDCT

DDO

Response

a...a

(OFF) ON aaaa

(ON) OFF

(NO) YES

(OFF) ON

(OFF) ON

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa

(OFF) ON

(NO) YES ic dc ht ic dc ic dc ic dc ic dc ic dc

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

2-(30)-62

0-(30)-126

0-(30)-62

1-(30)-1023

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Parity for data port (a...a = (SPAC), EVEN, MARK, or

ODD)

Data Terminal Ready

Duplex for data port (aaaa = (FULL) or HALF)

Data Carrier Detect

Mode for synchronous operation

Interworking

Clock source for synchronous operation

V.25 bis option for synchronous operation

High Level Data Link Control

Data Equipment Mode (aaa = (DCE) or DTE)

Port Busy upon DTR Off

Automatic Number Identification Dial Tone

Hold failure threshold

Seize failure threshold

Ring Failure threshold

Reversed wired CO trunk threshold

Illegal Ring threshold

Supervision Failure

Operator Call Back

Perform Immediate Break-In on this route

Perform Immediate Call Back on this route

Toll Operator Break-Out

Busy Tone to Calling Party disabled

Number of seconds in increments of two

Off-Hook Timer (2 second increments)

Toll Outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnect

Number of minutes on an outgoing CDPC call that a set is kept on-hold to a trunk (in increments of two)

Calling Party Control

Called Party Control

Delay Digits Outpulsing for DOD and CO trunks

390 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

DRNG

NDRI

BTUA

CDR

- INC

- LAST

- TTA

- - ABAN

- - CDRB

- QREC

- OAL

- - OTL

- - AIA

- - OAN

- - OPD

- - NDP

- CDRX

- CDRY

OPA

CCO

NATL

- TDG

SSL

CFWR

- IDOP

VRAT

MUS

- MRT

Response

(NO) YES

(0)-4

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(NO) YES aaa 0-32

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(YES) NO x...x

1-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-511

Comment

North American Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls

Network Distinctive Ringing Index

Block Transfer of Unanswered Call

Call Detail Recording

CDR records generated on incoming calls

CDR record printing content option for redirected calls

Time To Answer output in CDR

Abandoned call records output for this route

Abandoned call on busy tone records

CDR ACD Q initial connection records to be generated

CDR on outgoing calls

CDR on Outgoing Toll calls

Answered call Identification Allowed

CDR timing starts On Answer supervision of outgoing calls

Outpulsed Digits in CDR

Number of Digits Printed (aaa = INC or EXC)

Print CDRX records on multiple call transfer for non-

PPM outgoing calls

CDR Public Network Feature Invoke records is generated

Generates CDR or CDAS record for PPM pulses

Printing of CDR records for no PPM or AOC count

North American Toll scheme

Toll Digits

Special Service List number

Call Forward Restriction

Identify Originating Party

Answer an Attendant Extended Call over VNS immediately on the incoming bearer trunk

Music On-Hold

Music Route number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 391

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

MR

Prompt

A1MR

MANO

EQAR

- GCR

- - NTOL

- - ITOL

- SCR

DSPD

PANS

RACD

RUCS

RURC

RUCF

MULT

DSPT

RPPM

DTOS

FRL

OHQ

OHQT

CBQ

NDIG

AUTH

TDET

TTBL

PNNC

- PNDL

- SLCT

Response

aaa

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

0-9999 x y x y

(NO) YES

0-(10)-60 xxx

Comment

Message Registration (aaa = (NO), DURC, ENDC,

PPM, RVB, STAC, or XLD)

Real Time AOC Display

Pseudo Answer

Route traffic information in ACD Reports

Route Unit Cost

Route Unit Reference Cost

Route Unit Conversion Factor

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Multiplier for Charge Information

Charge Display Timer

Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering polling time in seconds

Answer is First Meter pulse

Manual Outgoing trunk route

Enable Equal Access Restrictions

(NO) YES General Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal Access calls

(DENY) ALOW North American Toll calls (example, 1+calls)

(DENY) ALOW International Toll calls (example, 011+calls)

(NO) YES Selective Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal Access calls

(NO) YES

0-7 0-254

Dial Tone on Outgoing Seizure

Facility Restriction Level

(NO) YES

(0)-63

(NO) YES

(2)-7

Off-Hook Queuing

Off-Hook Queue Threshold

Call Back Queuing

Number of Digits

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-31

(NO) YES

2-(6)-10

TONE MSG

Authcode

Tone Detector required

Tone Table number

Process Notification Networked Calls

Process Notification Delay Timer in seconds

Select Tone or Message

392 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

ACNI

OHT

OHTD

PLEV

OPR

OPDL

- AAT

--AATO

--ADAY

--AHOL

--AATB

Prompt

- NRT

- NMSG

- PNPS

ATAN

- ATBL

-AAAO

Response

0-511

(0)-30

(0)-30

(NO)

YES

PSTN

0 -31

(NO) YES

(0) - 3

(0) - 3

(0) - 3

0 - 31

(NO)

CAA

CAF

(NO) YES

0-(30)-126

(NO) YES

0-(2)-7

(NO) YES

(0)-8064

Comment

Notification Route number

Number of times Message is repeated

Interval between messages (2 seconds increments)

Attendant Announcement.

No Attendant Announcement.

Enable Attendant Announcement on this route.

Enable Attendant Announcement on this route on

PSTN calls only (For MCDN trunks only).

Attendant announcement is available on DID/TIE and

COT trunks only.

Announcement profile table

Uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay

56

Disable Alternative PC Attendant Announcement

Enable Alternative PC Attendant Announcement.

Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Time of Day

Option for this Route

Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Day of Week

Option for this Route

Alternative PC Attendant Announcement Holiday

Option for this Route

Announce profile table

Uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay

56

Alternative PC Attendant Announcement, where:

(NO) = No call answer is given

CAA = Call answer is given on announcement

CAF = Call answer is given forced

This prompt is for tone announcement valid only.

Accept Call Number Identification

Off-Hook Timer (2 seconds increments)

Off-Hook Timer Delay

Priority Level

Outpulsing Route

Outpulsing Delay in milliseconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 393

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

NADT

MON

TIDY

ATRR

TRRL

- FRIN

- - FRRC

- - FRRS

- - - FRRD

- - - RRBS

CNIE

CNIT

BTT

ACKW

PECL

DCTI

Prompt

PRDL

EOS

DNSZ

RCAL

MCTS

- MCCD

- MCDT

- MCTM

- MTND

FGNO

CDPC

ALRM

NCNI

(0)-255

(NO) YES xxxx yyyy

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(4)-15

(NO) YES

128-(384)

(NO) YES

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-7 aaa

(NO) YES

0-8

(0)-4

(0)-30

(NO) YES

(0)-127

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-7

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

2-(30)-254

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-511

Comment

Partial Dial timing

End-of-Selection Signal

Number of digits expected on DID routes

Recall (aaa = (NO), ATT, or DRA)

Malicious Call Trace Signal

Malicious Call Trace request string

Malicious Call Trace Delay Time in seconds

Malicious Call Trace request Timer id

Malicious Call Trace Tandem Disconnect delay

Feature Group D block number

Called Party Control

Malicious Call Trace Alarm is allowed for external calls

Request CNI after the defined number of digits are received

Request CNI after an ESN code is dialed

Call Number Identification Trace

Busy Tone Time

Acknowledgment seizure signal

Periodic Clearing Signal

Time (in seconds) that an extension is allowed to ring or be On-hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected

No Answer Disconnect Timer in seconds

Monitoring for route

Trunk Identity

AC15 Timed Reminder Recall

Recall signal (may not) can be received and transmitted on this route

Forward Release Indefinitely

Forward Release Repetition Count

Forward Release Repetition Seize

Forward Release Repetition Delay in milliseconds

Repeat Release Before Seize

394 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- RLSM

CCB

- CCB1

- ADDG

- ANDN

- DTOC

- CTOC

- COAT

- CACD

- CACC

- AANI

- CCB2

CCBA

ARDN

CTBL

ANIE

CISR

- ANSZ

- ANIC

- LEC

- ANFT

- - ITDN

-CAC_CONV

CAC

CAC_CIS

Response

(0)-15

(NO) YES

512-

(1536)-4992

Release Mechanism

Comment

Collect Call Blocking enabled

Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 in milliseconds

500-

(1520)-2550

(NO) YES

Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 in milliseconds

Collect Call Blocking Allowed

(NO) YES RPO Allow last Re-Directing Number

(0)-256 CLID manipulation index

(0)-x

(NO) YES

(7)-15

(NO) YES

0-9999999

ANI table Entry for Route (configured in LD 15)

CIS Route

Size of the ANI information

ANI Composing

(0)-31

Local Exchange Code (used for building ANI messages)

Additional Digit to be used in ANI sequences 0-(8)-9

0-9999999

(NO) YES aaaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(CONT) FAIL

ITDN xxxx

ANI DN

Direct Toll Connection

CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria

Continue Outpulsing After ATO Timer expires

(NO) BEF AFT Defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of the set/console.

(NO) BEF AFT Defines how the CAC is stored in the CDR.

Defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the CIS CO to the trunks within this route.

Defines the ANI Failure Treatment option.

Intercept DN (up to 8 digits) defines the DN to transfer the incoming calls which failed to provide ANI.

CAC conversion table number for CIS gateway, configured against MFC_ENT in LD 15.

Prompted only for non-outgoing R2MFC route

0-(3)-9

0-(3)-9

Specifies ANI category for an incoming trunk

CIS ANI Category Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 395

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

RDNL

Response

0-(4)-7

Comment

Route DN length for ANI

ATM: Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

DES

- TST

- PADL

EML

LMNL

LOUT

DSBL

MXTI

T100

PADT

STND

NMNL

NOUT

NTOF

- REF x...x

n...n

0-63

0-15

0-15

0-15

(0)-100

0-(5)-15 n...n

0-63

(YES) NO

27-90

27-90

(YES) NO n...n

Response

aaaa

ATM xx x...x

Comment

Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)

Type of data block = ATM (Automatic Trunk

Maintenance)

Customer number associated with this route

Route number

Where x...x =

0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)

T100 test line DN (2 to 10 digits)

Pad factor for T100 test line in dB

Standard T100 test line

Noise Maintenance Limit

Noise out-of-service limit

Near To Far measurement

Reference loop around DN (2 to 10 digits)

Test loop around DN

Pad factor for loop around

Expected Measured Loss

Loss deviation Maintenance Limit

Loss out-of-service deviation limit

Percentage of trunks to be Disabled

Maximum Time

396 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

SCH: ATM Schedules data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

HOUR

ROUT

DES

MDMP

- MRAT

DTYP

ADCP

OAMP

IAMP x...x

(NO) YES

5-30 aaa

(NO) YES

0-127

0-127

Response

aaaa

SCH xx

0-23 x...x

Comment

Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)

Type of data block = SCH (ATM Schedules)

Customer number associated with this route

Hour to start Automatic Trunk Maintenance test

Route number

Where x...x =

0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T

Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)

Modem Data Module Pair

Modem Ring Again Timer

Inbound/Outbound Data Port (aaa = (IOP), IDP, or

ODP)

All-Digital Connection Prefix

Outbound Modem Pool route number

Inbound Modem Pool route number

Meridian 911 Route data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

Response

aaaa

RDB xx x...x

Comment

Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)

Type of data block = RDB (Route data block)

Customer number associated with this route

Route number

Where x...x =

0-511: Large System and CS 1000E system 0-127:

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 397

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

DES

Prompt Response

x...x

TKTP

M911_ANI

M911_TRK_TYP

E

M911_FORM

DID

YES aaaa

(1) 2

M911_ABAN

M911_TONE

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

NPID_TBL_NUM 0-7

Comment

Designator field for trunk (0-16 character alphanumeric)

DID trunk types must be used for M911 route

Receive ANI digits for M911 route

Meridian 911 ANI trunk type (aaaa = (911T) or 911E)

Automatic Number Identification Format

Optional call abandon treatment

Optional call abandon tone

Meridian 911 route table index

NPID: Numbering Plan/Information Digit Digit (NPID) data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

IDTB

NPID

TRMT

-NPA

Response

aaaa

NPID

0-7

0-9 a...a

nnn

Comment

Request (aaaa = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, or OUT)

Type of data block = NPID

ID table index

Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit

NPID Treatment (a...a = (NONE), FAIL, TEST, or NPA)

Numbering Plan Area

Release Mechanism Options

The following table indicates whether a release signal is acknowledged or not. YES indicates the release signal is acknowledged, NO indicates the release signal is not acknowledged.

Table 3: Release Mechanism Options

RLSM

Option

0

1

Incoming Calls

Originator On-

Hooks first

Terminator On-

Hooks first

NO

NO

NO

NO

Outgoing Calls

Originator On-

Hooks first

Terminator On-

Hooks first

NO

NO

NO

YES

398 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

10

11

12

7

8

9

13

14

15

4

5

6

2

3

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Incoming Calls

NO

NO NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Alphabetical list of prompts

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

Outgoing Calls

NO

YES YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

2DT

A1MR

Response

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Comment

Secondary Dial Tone

Pack/Rel

xpe-16

Answer is First Meter pulse

Meter pulses are counted from the moment of seizure of the outgoing trunk. When the trunk answers, the PPM count is left unchanged.

Meter pulses received before Answer are invalid. Answer is taken as the start of the first charging period (example, when an answer signal is received the PPM count is incremented). Meter pulses mark the start of the subsequent charging periods.

A1MR is prompted when DTRK = YES,

DGTP = DTI2, and MR = PPM.

pemd-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 399

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

AAAO

AANI

AAT

AATO

AATB

ABAN

ABTR

ACKW

ACMP

ACNI

Response

(NO)

CAA

CAF

Comment

Alternative Attendant Announcement

No call answer is given 0-31.

Call answer is given on announcement.

Call answer is given forced.

This prompt is for tone announcement valid only.

Pack/Rel

atan-25.4

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the CIS CO to the trunks within this route.

cist-24

Disable Alternative Attendant

Announcement.

Enable Alternative Attendant

Announcement.

atan-25.4

(0) - 3 xx Announce profile table.

Where xx = 0-31

0-31 uses announcement profile AANN defined in

Overlay 56 atan-25.4

Abandoned call records output for this route fcdr-18 (NO) YES

(15) Range 0 - 30

Timer (in minutes) to block the disconnect from being tandemed across to the target node. Default value: 15 minutes. This timer value can be added in increments of 1 minute.

(NO) YES Acknowledgment seizure signal is expected after seizure of a DID/DOD trunk xpe-16

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Alternative Attendant Announcement Time of Day

Option for this Route.

atan-25.4

Automatic Camp-On calls to busy auto terminate Line

Accept Call Number Identification dpnss-20

400 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ACOD

ADAY

ADDG

ADDP

Response Comment

This DPNSS route (does not allow) allows

R2MFC CNI sent as an OLI string in the initial message (ISRM).

Prompted when:

• IDA package equipped

• MFC package equipped

• TKTP = IDA

• SIGL = DPN/APNS x...x

(0) - 3

0-(8)-9

(NO)

Pack/Rel

Access Code for the trunk route

The ACOD must not conflict with the numbering plan. Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

basic-1

Alternative Attendant Announcement Day of

Week

Option for this Route.

atan-25.4

Additional digit(s) to be used in ANI sequences.

If LEC and the DN to be transmitted consist of less than seven digits, ADDG is used as the last digit(s) of the ANI sequence.

Prompted if:

1. Commonwealth of Independent States

(CIST) package 221 is equipped

2. ICOG = OGT

3. TKTP = COT (for analog trunks, TKTP must = DID)

4. DGTP = DTI2 cist-21

If ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.

It is used to complete ANI DN if LEC+ANI DN consists of less than ANSZ digits.

Prompted for outgoing CIS route.

Can be from 1 up to the ANSZ length.

cist-24

Add Public Prefixes

The prefixes 0 (National) or 00

(International) are not added to the Calling euroisdn-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 401

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

ADCP

AHOL

AIA

ALRM

ANDN

Response

YES

Comment

Party Number if the Type of Number (TON) is Public on the set/attendant displays.

The prefixes 0 (National) or 00

(International) are added to the Calling Party

Number if the Type of Number (TON) is

Public on the set/attendant displays.

(NO) YES

(0) - 3

All-Digital Connection Prefix assigned to customer

Alternative Attendant Announcement

Holiday Option for this Route.

Pack/Rel

basic-5 atan-25.4

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Answered call Identification Allowed

Enter YES to output an "A" in the CDR TerID field to indicate answered calls.

Prompted when OAL = YES or OTL = YES.

cdr-13

Malicious Call Trace Alarm is allowed for external calls mct-10

0 - 9999999 ANI DN

ANDN is used for building ANI messages.

ANDN is prompted if Commonwealth of

Independent States (CIST) package 221 is equipped.

ANDN is not prompted if the route is outgoing only (ICOG = OGT) and TKTP is not COT (for analog trunks, not DID).

Incoming route:

If ANDN is defined, it is used as ANI DN in

CDTI2/ CSDTI2 ANI messages when this incoming trunk is the originator of an outgoing CDTI2/ CSDTI2 call. If ANDN is not defined, the the ANDN of the outgoing

CDTI2/ CSDTI2 trunk is used.

Outgoing route:

Default ANI DN in CDTI2/ CSDTI2 ANI messages. If the ANI DN of the call originator cannot be used, then ANDN for the outgoing

CDTI2/ CSDTI2 route is used. This occurs for sets with CLS DNAD and for incoming routes if ANDN is not defined.

can be from 0 up to the ANSZ length.

Prompted for outgoing CIS route.

cist-21 cist-24

402 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ANDT

ANFT

ANI2_CLID

ANIC

X

Response Comment

Used for building ANI message if ANIC=NO and DN of set is not allowed to be sent (CLS

DNAD).

Also used if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured, and DN of set is not allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).

Remove ANDN

(NO) YES

(CONT)

FAIL

ITDN

Pack/Rel

Automatic Number Identification Dial Tone ani-1

Defines the ANI Failure Treatment option.

cist-24

Provide call to the required destination

Drop the call

Transfer call to the intercept DN defined by the ITDN prompt

(NO)

(NO) YES

Optional ANI2 display for CLID

Prompted when M911_FORM is set to 2.

m911-7.00

ANI Composing

Prompted for outgoing CIS route.

If ANIC=NO, old ANI composing is used: if the originator of the call is a set, ANI message consists of the CAC of the originator + the LEC of the outgoing route + the DN of the originator or the ANDN of the outgoing CIS route, depending on the class of service (DNAA/DNAD) of the set. If the originator of the call is an incoming route, the components of the ANI message are retrieved from default ANI entries and/or from the data block of the outgoing CIS route.

If ANIC=YES, the following is done:

If no entry is associated with the calling set

(ANIE=0), then old ANI composing is used.

If an ANI entry is associated with the calling set (ANIE has a non-zero value), but the associated ANI entry is not configured, then old ANI composing is used.

If an ANI entry is associated with the calling set (ANIE has a non-zero value), and the associated ANI entry is configured, then ANI table is used for building the ANI message: none of the components of the ANI message cist-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 403

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

ANIE

ANKP

ANSZ

ANTK

ARDN

Response Comment

is retrieved from the data block of the outgoing CIS route.

(0)-x

Pack/Rel

ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY, LD 15) x= R_SIZE-1

R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be configured. (R-SIZE is defined in

LD 15) cist-24

(NO) YES

(7)-15 x...x

(NO)

YES

RPO

KP signal suppressed cam-1

Size of the ANI information

This is the length of LEC+ANI DN.

For analog routes, the only valid response is

7.

cist-24

ANI identifier number

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150. In either case, together with ANLD and ANI

Listed DN in LD 15, the total number of digits must be no less than 7.

ani-1

Allow last redirecting Number, where:

(NO) = treatment for originally called number.

YES = treatment for last redirecting number.

RPO = treatment for last redirecting number if OCN is Public.

basic-4.5

Note:

If ARDN = NO, the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number

+ Originally called number + Orignal diversion reason.

Note:

If ARDN = NO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the originally called number's mailbox.

Note:

If ARDN = YES, the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number

404 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ASTP

ASUP

Response

1-(2)-15

Comment

+ last redirecting number + last diversion reason.

Note:

If ARDN = YES, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the last redirecting party's mailbox.

Note:

If ARDN= RPO, if the Type of NUmber and Numbering plan indicator( TON &

NPI) of the origianlly called number is public, then the display on the terminating set would be the calling Number + last redirecting number + last diverting reason.

Note:

If ARDN= RPO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against the last redirecting party's mailbox.

Note:

If ARDN= RPO, and the Type of NUmber and Numbering plan indicator( TON &

NPI) of the origianlly called number is private, then the display on the terminating set would be Calling Number

+ Originally called number + Orignally diverting reason.

Note:

If ARDN= RPO, and the call lands on a voice mail system, the voice mail would be left against Originally called number's mailbox.

ADM Step-forward ring cycles

Pack/Rel

adm-12

(NO)

YES

CO

Do not return Answer Supervision by RAN to originator

Return Answer Supervision by RAN to originator

Return Answer supervision only if the originator is a CO trunk

The operation of answer supervision is affected with FCC Compliance for DID

Answer Supervision (FC68) package 223.

Refer to FCC Compliance for DID Answer ran-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 405

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

ATAN

ATBL

ATDN

ATGT

ATRR

ATVR

AUDN

AUTH

AUTM

Response Comment

Supervision, in Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106.

(NO)

YES

PSTN xx

(0)-x...x

(0)-60

(NO) YES

Add on Data Module (ADM) Trunk Guard

Timer

Two-second increments up to one minute, odd entries are rounded down to the next valid number.

AC15 Timed Reminder Recall. Prompted with AC15

Recall (ACRL) package 236.

Pack/Rel

Attendant Announcement.

No Attendant Announcement.

Enable Attendant Announcement on this route.

Enable Attendant Announcement on this route on PSTN calls only (For MCDN trunks only).

Attendant announcement is available on

DID/TIE and COT trunks only.

atan-25.4

atan-25.4

Announcement profile table.

Where xx = 0-31

0-31 uses announcement profile AANN defined in Overlay 56.

Attendant DN of conventional main, ESN main, ESN node or ETN node.

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

casm-5 adm-12 arcl-20

(NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES

(NO)YES

Present call has higher precedence (called party cannot be preempted) atvn

Auto termination DN for ISA service routes

Prompted when ISAR = YES and AUTO =

YES. This must be an existing DN, and cannot be deleted. When DNIS = YES, it must be an ACD DN.

Authcode to be prompted for incoming

NARS/BARS calls baut-1

Automatic Mode for MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 mfc-9

406 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AUTO

AUXP

BAND

BCOT

Response

YES

(NO)

Comment Pack/Rel

Auto-Terminate

The route members terminate on DN defined by response to ATDN prompt in LD 14.

basic-1

The route members terminate normally at the console.

Only ACD DNs or DISA DNs support Auto-

Terminate trunks. In order to set AUTO =

YES for TIE, DID and CCSA trunks, all members of the route must have STRI = IMM in LD 14.

YES

Auxiliary processor applications.

Send the Calling Line Identification and

Calling Party Name (if available) to auxiliary applications like Contact Center Manager

(CCM).

if the Calling Line Identification (CLID)

Presentation Indicator and the Calling

Party name Display (CPND) Indicator for an incoming ISDN call are received as

"restricted/denied", they are changed to

"allowed" cppe-6.0

(NO)

(0) - 99

(0) - 4000

Note:

If the Privacy Indicator Ignore (PII) prompt is configured to YES, the AUXP prompt is configured to YES automatically by the system, and cannot be changed.

Do not send the Calling Line Identification and Calling Party Name to auxiliary applications like Contact Center Manager

(CCM).

if the Calling Line Identification (CLID)

Presentation Indicator and the Calling

Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator for an incoming ISDN call are received as

"restricted/denied", they remain as such

OUTWATS band number.

cbc_pkg- 23

B-channel Overload Control timer value indicates the delay the M1 PBX introduces

(in milli seconds) before starting the actual disconnect sequence.

isdn- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 407

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

BDCT

BDSP

BILN

BLEN

BNUM

BRIP

BSSU

BTCG

BTT

BTUA

CAC

(NO)

YES

(NO)

YES

Response

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

Comment Pack/Rel

Enable broadcast capability for this route.

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23

For CS 1000E, the default YES cannot be changed.

CS 1000E only supports broadcast trunks.

Billing Number is not displayed at the CO basic-21

Billing Number is displayed at the CO

Billing Number is not required

Billing Number is required basic-21

1-(10)-16

0-9999

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Billing Number Length basic-21

Billing Number

Depending on your response to BLEN,

BNUM can be from 1 to 16 digits.

If BLEN is changed, a new BNUM must be entered. If the BNUM entered is less than the

BLEN specified, the BNUM is padded with leading zeros.

basic-21

ISDN BRI Packet handler route

BRIP is set to NO by default as this is not applicable to 911P routes.

bri-18

Backward Signal Suppression for undefined signal mfc-9

(NO) YES

2-(30)-254

(NO) YES

0-(3)-9

Busy Tone to Calling Party disabled

Busy Tone Time

Length of busy/overflow to be returned on

DTI routes in seconds.

Block Transfer of Unanswered call opcb-14 xct1-16 pra-14

Specifies ANI category for an incoming trunk.

CAC is used to build ANI messages on an outgoing trunk connected to this trunk. CAC is prompted if Commonwealth of

Independent States (CIST) package 221 is equipped.

cist-21

408 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CACC

CAC_CIS

Response Comment

However, CAC is not prompted if the route is outgoing only (ICOG = OGT) and TKTP is not COT (for analog trunks, not DID).

(NO)

BEF

AFT

0-(3)-9

Defines how the CAC is stored in the CDR.

The options are

Do not store CAC

Store CAC before the ANI

Store CAC after the ANI cist-24

CIS ANI Category Code range and default values

Pack/Rel

cist-24

CAC_CONV (0)-31

CACD

CAT

CBQ

CBCR

CCB

(NO)

BEF

AFT

00-99

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

CAC conversion table number for CIS gateway, configured against CIS_ENT in LD

15

Prompted only for non-outgoing CIS DTI2 route cist-24 cist-24 Defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of the set/console. The option also controls presentation of the CAC in the messages to the auxiliary processors

Do not display CAC

Display CAC before the ANI

Display CAC after the ANI

CAMA Trunk route category digits

Prompted if SIGL = NT4 or NT5

Call Back Queuing

Use only for incoming TIE calls.

Service route indicator cama-1 bque-1 cbc_pkg-23

Collect Call Blocking disabled on incoming route

Collect Call Blocking enabled on incoming route

The route must be: ccb-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 409

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

CCB1

CCB2

CCBA

CCNI

CCO

Response Comment

1. either incoming or incoming and outgoing

2. COT, DID, FEX, or WAT

3. neither ISDN nor M911

This prompt appears with Collect Call

Blocking (CCB) package 290.

Pack/Rel

512-(1536)-4992

Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 (ms). The input is rounded to the next multiple of 128 ms.

ccb-21

500-(1520)-2550

Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 (ms). The input is rounded to the next multiple of 10 ms.

If any CCB route members (trunks) are using firmware timing (FWTM = YES in LD 14), the

CCB2 timer do not change until the new timer value is downloaded to the card. This can be done by either enabling the card or initializing the switch. CCB2 is prompted when CCB = YES.

ccb-21

(NO)

YES

Collect Call Blocking denied (regular answer signal transmits)

Collect Call Blocking Allowed (CCB answer signal transmits)

CCBA is used for outgoing routes when a call tandems out on this route. For example, collect calls do not be accepted on a RAN or

TIE route when CCBA = YES. When CCBA

= NO, these routes can accept collect calls.

This prompt appears with Collect Call

Blocking (CCB) package 290.

ccb-21

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Call Number Indicator enabled on route

Printing of CDR records for no PPM or AOC count Prompted when OAL = YES or OTL =

YES mfc-15 cdr-10

410 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CDCT

CDPC

CDR

CDRB

CDRX

CDRY

CFWR

CGPC

CHRG

CHTY

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Called Party Control is not enabled on incoming calls when MFC IDCT signal is sent

Called Party Control is enabled on incoming calls when MFC IDCT signal is sent

Pack/Rel

opcb-14

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

Called Party Control is not enabled when

MCT feature is activated.

Called Party Control is enabled when MCT feature is activated.

Prompted when OPCB = YES supp-14

Call Detail Recording Set and change CDR options for this route.

cdr-1

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Abandoned call on busy tone records.

cdr- 23

Print CDRX records on multiple call transfer for non-PPM outgoing calls.

This prompt appears if CDRX package is equipped and MR is not equal to PPM. Also

CDR = YES, TKTP = COT or DID for

International DID/DOD and ICOG cannot be

ICT.

cdrx-20

CDR Public Network Feature Invoke records is generated ddsp-20

Call Forward Restriction supp-10 opcb-14 Calling Party Control on incoming calls on this route is not enabled

Calling Party Control on incoming calls on this route is enabled

(BLOK)

LINE

(BCH)

ABCH

A DOD Call over this MFK route must signal the CO that it wishes to be charged by block.

A DOD Call over this MFK route must signal the CO that it wishes to be charged by line.

kd3-20

Channel Type

B-channel

A/B bit signaling pra-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 411

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

CISR

CLEN

CLK

CLS

CLID

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

UNR

Response Comment

Prompted when DTRK = YES, ISDN = YES and Mode = PRA.

OPT0

OPT1

OPT2

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES CIS Route.

cist-24

0 - (1)- 3999 CLID entry number.

This prompt is given only for non-ISDN routes (where ISDN = NO and ISAR = NO).

1 - (10) - 16 Maximum number of Calling Number

Identification digits to request for India

Phase 2 feature.

esa-23

(OFF)

ON

External Clock source

Internal Clock source

Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN = SYN basic-18

Class of Service access restriction.

Prompted if TKTP = TIE.

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditionally Unrestricted

Fully restricted class 1

Fully restricted class 2

Fully restricted

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Unrestricted isa-12

Calling Line Identification. CLID is prompted only for UIPE-based protocols.

Prefix = 0 for North American dialing plan.

OPT0 is the default for ESIG and ISIG interfaces.

euroisdn-22

Prefix = 1 for international PFXs in CLID. Any numbering type is supported. OPT1 is the default for all EuroISDN interfaces.

Prefix = 2, for international PFXs in CLID.

CCITT numbering types supported are:

UKWN, INTL, NPA, and NXX. OPT2 is the default for CO/DID routes for the Telecom

New Zealand interface. For an interworking scenario, when the CLID option is OPT2, and the CPFXS prompt is NO, then the calling number is built based on the originating calling number type.

412 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CNEG

CNIE

CNIT

Response

OPT3

OPT4

OPT5

Comment

Prefix = 3 for international PFXs in CLID.

Only the NXX number type is supported.

OPT3 is the default for TIE routes for the

Telecom New Zealand interface.

For international COs, if the call originates from a CO trunk type, add nothing.

Otherwise, add PFX1 and PFX2. OPT4 is the default for all Asia Pacific interfaces.

This is the same as OPT4, except it supports a maximum of 10 digits in the CLID. OPT5 is the default for the Austrian interface.

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Channel Negotiation

Channel Negotiation not allowed

Channel Negotiation allowed

CNEG is prompted if IFC = 1TR6, Numeris,

APAC or D70.

bri-20

Request CNI after an ESN code is dialed.

The ESN code can be a Distant Steering

Code (DSC), Trunk Steering Code (TSC),

NARS Access Code 1 (ACI) or NARS

Access Code 2 (AC2).

If NCNI > 0 and CNIE = YES, CNI is requested when either one of the conditions is first met. CNIE is prompted when the following occur: dpnss-20

• MFC package is equipped

• TKTP = DID or TIE

• MFC Table = R2MF

• MFC signaling table is defined for the route

(NO) YES Call Number Identification Trace

Request MFC Call Number Identification digits only if dialed station has MCTA Class of Service.

Prompted when the following occur: supp-15

1. MCT and MFC packages are equipped

2. TKTP = DID or TIE

3. MFC = R2MF

4. MFC signaling table is defined on the route

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 413

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

CNTL

CNTY

POR

SING

SWE

SWI

TAIW

TCNZ

INDI

INDO

ITA

JAPN

MSIA

NET

NOR

PHLP

DUT

EAUS

EIR

ESP

FIN

FRA

GER

HKNG

(ESTI)

AUS

AUST

BEL

CHNA

CIS

DEN

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Changes to controls or timers

Country

ETS 300-102 basic protocol

Austria

Australian UIPE PRI

Belgium

China

Commonwealth of Independent States

Denmark

Holland

Australia

Ireland

Spain

Finland

France

Germany

Hong Kong

India

Indonesia

Italy

Japan ISDN UIPE connectivity

Malaysia connectivity

ETSI network side protocol

Norway

Philippines

Portugal

Singapore

Sweden

Switzerland

Taiwan

New Zealand BRI

Pack/Rel

basic-1 supp-9 basic-23 euro- 23 ipra-24 euro- 23 isdn-24 basic-23 basic-23 basic-23 isdn-24 isdn-24

414 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CNVT

COAT

COTR

CPDC

CPFXS

CPP

CRID

Response

THAI

UK

Thailand

United Kingdom

Comment

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Conventional switch route

Prompted with Network Signaling (NSIG) package 37.

Continue Outpulsing After ATO Timer expires

0-511

(NO) YES

(YES)

NO

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

nars-5 cist-24

DID/CO Trunk Reference route number

Determines how incoming public call types are handled for the associated Integrated

Service Access route or ISA. Prompted when TKTP = ISA and IFC = D100 or SL-1 and NSF = NO or YES. Precede with X to delete.

pra-12

SL-1 is the only controlling party on incoming calls. If CPDC = YES, the connection stays up until it is disconnected by SL-1. This is used for 911 emergency services.

basic-1

Customer-defined Prefixes option.

When constructing the Calling or Connected

Line Identification, the prefixes are retrieved from the Customer Data Block via the PFX1 and PFX2 prompts in LD 15, as is currently done.

When constructing the Calling or Connected

Line Identification, the prefixes are retrieved from the Route Data Block via the HNTN and

HLCL prompts in LD 16.

euroisdn-22

Calling Party Privacy/Calling Party Privacy

Override Flag provisioned for this route

A response of YES indicates that the CPP feature is recognized in this trunk route. CPP is prompted only if:

CPP package 301 is equipped trunk is either OGT or IAO non-ISDN option trunk route type = COT, DID, FEX or WAT cpp-24

Allow or deny CDR record for SIP to include correlation ID.

sip-4.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 415

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

CTBL

CTOC

CTON

CTYP

CUST

Response Comment

Prompted when VTRK = YES and PCID =

SIP and CDR is turned on for this route.

(0)-256

(DTDO)

AADT

ANIO

AODT

(NCHG)

UKWN

INTL

NATL

LOCL

Pack/Rel

CLID manipulation index

If CTBL=0 then that route is not associated with any flexible CLID manipulation table basic-7.00

cis-24 CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria

Dial Tone Detection only

Automatic Number Identification And Dial

Tone Connection

Automatic Number Identification Only

Automatic Number Identification Or Dial

Tone Connection

Calling Party Number

Call type not changed.

Unknown call type.

International call type.

National call type.

Subscriber call type.

basic-25.4

(UKWN)

CDP

INTL

LOC

NPA

NXX

SPN xx

Call Type for outgoing direct dialed TIE route pra-15

Unknown Call type

Coordinated Dialing Plan

International number

Location code

National number

Subscriber number

Special Number for other than international number format

The CTYP is used by the receiving switch so that it can associate a call with a call type and perform ESN access code insertion. This option only applies to direct dialing using trunk access codes. NARS and BARS dialing do not apply here.

If you intend to respond YES to prompt

ISAR, use the default <CR> for this prompt.

If ISAR = YES, then CTYP prints UNWN and does not permit you to enter a response.

Customer number associated with this route as defined in LD 15 basic-1

416 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DAPC

DCD

DCDR

DCH

DCHI

DCNO

DCTI

DDLY

DDMI

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Display of Access Prefix on CLID

(ON)

OFF

Data Carrier Detect

Data Carrier Detect lead follows state of lead on device to which it is connected.

Data Carrier Detect lead forced active.

Prompted if TKTP = R232 or MCU.

Pack/Rel

isdn-24

(NO) YES

0-159

1-15

(0)-254

(0)-511

Include DNIS number in CDR records

This prompt appears for ISDN routes to support Network ACD.

D-channel number dnis-19 isdn-16

DCHI Port Number. Prompted when MODE

= ISLD.

DCHI Port number must be defined in LD 17 pra-12

Day IDC tree number

Time, in seconds, that an extension is allowed to ring or be On-Hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected.

Respond with a value equal to the number of seconds a set is to ring after recall, plus the value of the Call Park Recall Timer. The

Call Park Recall Timer is defined in LD 50 in response to the CPTM prompt. Default or

<CR> means that the condition goes on indefinitely. The value stored - which is the closest lower multiple of four - is echoed back upon entry.

idc-12

(NO)

YES

(0)-127

(0)-255

DNIS Interdigit Delay

A fixed interdigit delay of 4 seconds is assigned to all digits until NDGT is reached.

A fixed interdigit delay of 12 seconds is assigned to the first three digits, and a delay of 4 seconds is assigned to all subsequent digits.

dnis-26

Digit Manipulation Index

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Network Alternate Route Selection nars-5

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 417

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

DDO

DEM

DES

DEXT

DGTP

Response Comment

Prompted with either Basic Alternate Route

Selection (BARS) package 57 or Network

Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package

58.

(NO) YES

(DCE)

DTE x...x

Delay Digits Outpulsing for DOD and CO trunks

Prompted with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 and ICOG =

OGT or IAO.

supp-15

Data Equipment Mode. Prompted if TKTP =

R232 basic-18

Data Carrier Equipment

Data Terminal Equipment

Designator field for trunk groups of 0-16 alphanumeric characters including spaces separating inputs. (this is an optional entry)

Pack/Rel

basic-22

(NO)

YES

BRI

DTI

DTI2

JDMI

PRI

PRI2

Display External dialed digits.

Do not display original digits

Display original digits pre converted

Prompted if AUTO = NO, DNIS = NO and

IDC = YES.

icd-12

Digital Trunk Type for route. ISL routes that use Phantom Trunk TNs must be configured as DTI2 routes.

Basic Rate Interface (Allowed if TKTP = TIE,

COT or DID and BRIP = NO)

1.5 Mb/s DTI (If BRIP = NO, then default is

DTI)

2.0 Mb/s DTI

Japan Digital Multiplex Interface. This response is allowed if either 2 Mbit Digital

Trunk Interface package 129 or 2 Mbit

Primary Rate Interface package 154 is equipped.

ISDN 23B + D (If BRIP = YES, then default is PRI)

ISDN 30B + D pra-14

418 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DIDD

DIG#

DIGS

DLTN

DMOD

DNAM

DNIS

DNSZ

DAPC

DPPI

DPPO

Response

(0)-15

Comment

Note:

Valid responses for this prompt are PRI/

PRI2 if M911P prompt is set YES.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

Number of leading digits ignored for DID call during Overlap Receiving brit-18

1-(4)-9

4-(5)

(NO) YES

Number of Digits

Number of Digits mfc-9 mfc-9

1-127

Dial Tone on originating calls

Provide dial tone to the far end when the trunk has been accessed from the far end.

basic-1

Default Model number for this route (Small

Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T) basic-16

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Display IDC name

Prompted with Calling Party Name Display

(CPND) package 95. Prompted following

NDNO if DNIS = YES.

dnis-17

ACD DNIS route

Prompted with Automatic Call Distribution

Package D (ACDD) package 50, and the

RTYP = TIE or DID.

dnis-10

(0)-7 Number of digits expected on DID routes

0 indicates no fixed number

Display of Access Prefix on CLID (NO) YES

(1167) nnnn Privacy indicator for a dial-pulse trunk.

Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits can be entered. If CPP prompt is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered, DPPI defaults to 1167.

supp-10 isdn-24 cpp-21

(1182) nnnn Privacy Override Indicator for a dial pulse trunk.

nnnn = any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits in length. DPPO is defaulted to

1182 if CPP is changed from NO to YES and

<CR> is entered cpp-23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 419

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

DRNG

DSBL

DSEL

DSPD

(VOD)

DTA

TDN

VCE

3DTA

3VCE

7VOD

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

North American Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls

Japan Distinctive Ringing

For TIE trunks to provide normal ringing

(example, make/ break/ make/ break, 0.25

sec./ 0.25 sec./ 2.25 sec. to incoming calls terminating on stations)

For CO trunks to provide distinctive ringing

(example, make/break, one second/two seconds to incoming calls terminating on stations).

Distinctive Ringing only applies to CAM,

COT, DID, FEX, TIE and WAT trunks. These trunks cannot be configured as outgoing only for prompt ICOG.

Pack/Rel

drng-8 drng-9

(0)-100

7DTA

(NO)

YES

Percentage of trunks to be disabled if loss or noise reaches the out-of-service limit atm-7

Data Selection

Voice or Data route

Data-only route

Transparent Data Network

Voice-only route

Data route and 3.1 kHz

Voice route and 3.1 kHz basic-19

Route supports voice or data calls and the telephony 7 khz/Video telephony teleservices

Route supports data calls and the telephony

7 khz/Video telephony teleservices

Prompted if DGTP = DTI, DTI2 or JDMI.

euro-24

Real Time Advice Of Charge Display.

Do not display charge information during call

Display charge information during call

DSPD applies to Aries sets (M2006, M2008,

M2016, M2216, and M2616) on a per route basis. To activate this feature, the prompt

MR must be set to either DURC or ENDC.

isdn-22

420 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DSPT

DTD

DTDF

DTOC

DTOS

DTPI

DTPO

DTR

DTRK

Response

0-(10)-60

Comment

Charge Display Timer in seconds

DSPT determines how long charge information is display at the end of the call.

Pack/Rel

isdn-22

(NO) YES x y

Dial Tone Detection dtd-10

Dial Tone Detector Fail threshold. Where: dtd-10

• x = increment threshold = 1-(2)-15

• y = decrement threshold = 1-(2)-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(*67) nnnn

(*82) nnnn

(OFF)

ON

(NO) YES

Direct Toll Connection

Dial Tone on Outgoing Seizure.

Prompted if SIGL = DAS.

dass2-16

Privacy indicator for a digitone trunk

Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits can be specified. Only the first digit can be an asterisk (*). If CPP prompt is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered, DTPI defaults to *67.

cpp-21

Privacy Override indicator for a digitone trunk.

nnnn = Any arbitrary digit (0-9) sequence up to 4 digits in length. The Asterisk (*) can only be entered as the first digit. DTPO is defaulted to *82 if CPP is changed from NO to YES and <CR> is entered cpp-23 basic-18 Data Terminal Ready. Prompted if TKTP =

R232 or MCU.

DTR lead follows state of the lead on the device to which it is connected

DTR lead always forced active dti-5 Digital Trunk Route.

Prompted with PBX Interface for:

• DTI/CPI (PBXI) pkg 75

• 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) pkg

129

• Japan Digital Multiplex Interface (JDMI) pkg 136

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 421

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

DUP

EMGY

EML

EOS

EQAR

ESN

FACN

Response Comment

• ISDN Primary Rate Access (PRA) pkg

146, or

• 2 Mbit Primary Rate Interface (PRI2) pkg

154

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

(FULL)

HALF

(NO) YES

0-15

(NO)

YES

BSY

(NO) YES

Note:

if M911P is set to YES, DTRK is set to

YES by default and is not configurable.

Duplex for data port.

Full duplex

Half duplex

Prompted if TKTP = MCU.

Emergency Route

Expected Measured Loss (in dB) basic-18 basic-24 atm-7

No End-of-Selection signal on DID routes

End-of-Selection signal is enabled

EOS and busy signals are enabled supp-10

Enable Equal Access Restrictions Prompted when TKTP = CO, FEX, WAT, or ISA, and

ICOG = OGT, or IAO.

eqa-17

(NO) YES Electronic Switched Network pad control for

NT8D15 XEM card.

xpe-15

This only applies to trunk routes whose members may use 4-wire E&M or DX signaling on an Electronic Switched

Network. This prompt is the replacement for the ESN switch setting on the QPC237 circuit card.

When YES is selected, a 1 dB improvement in loss levels is provided on trunk to trunk calls using the NT8D15 units.

Prompted with Network Alternate Route

Selection (NARS) package 58 and Meridian

1 Extended Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package 203.

(0) - 99999 Tie or FX facility number.

cbc_pkg-23

422 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FACY

FALT

FEDC

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Facility indicator for Private or TIE connection.

Tie connection in the NSF IE

Private connection in the NSF IE

Trunk routes to a DMS-250 automatically have FACY set to YES. All others default to

NO.

FACY is prompted when TKTP = TIE, ISAR

= YES, and IFC = D100, D250 or S100.

Pack/Rel

isa-17

(NO) YES Recognition of DTI2 ABCD FALT signal for

ISL

Prompted for DTI2 ISL routes.

pedm-18

(ORG)

ETH

FEC

Far End Disconnect Control

This entry should correspond to the type of disconnect control used by the far end apparatus of this trunk route. Loop start trunks can be assigned either ORG or

ETH.

Originating end control

The apparatus recognizes conditions on the near end only for calls originated by the

Meridian SL-1. This does not allow trunk to trunk connections.

Either end control

Conditions at the near end are recognized for both incoming and outgoing calls. This allows trunk to trunk connections subject to normal access restrictions. (e.g., TGAR) basic-1

Note:

If SUPP (131) package is disabled, then outgoing trunk to trunk transfer is allowed only when the response for FEDC and

NEDC is ETH.

Far end control

FEC allows trunk to trunk connections. FEC involves the following sequences for disconnect at the near end:

When the near end goes on-hook first, the

DSI (half disconnect) timer starts. If the far end of the trunk goes on-hook before the DSI timer runs out, then the trunk is idled immediately and the DSI timer is cancelled.

If the DSI timer expires, the trunk is locked

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 423

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

FGNO

FORM

FRIN

FRL

FRRC

FRRD

Response

JNT

Comment

out until an on-hook is received from the farend, at which time the SL-1 idles the trunk.

Joint control

JNT disallows trunk to trunk connections.

(0)-127

M1A

M2B

M3C

Feature Group D block number

Format 1 for CAMA trunk signaling

Format 2 for CAMA trunk signaling

Format 3 for CAMA trunk signaling

Pack/Rel

fgd-17 cama-1

(NO)

YES

0-7 0-254

Forward Release Indefinitely

Forward Release is not resent.

Forward Release is resent every time the

Disconnect Supervision timer expires and the Disconnect Supervision timer is restarted.

Prompted if DTRK = YES and DGTP =

DTI2.

Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and New

Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) tree number for this route pedm-18 basic-1

0-(4)-15 Forward Release Repetition Count

This represent the number of times a

Forward Release signal is resent before an error message is printed, if an acknowledgment is expected but not received.

The length of time the software waits for acknowledgment before re-sending the signal is given by the Disconnect

Supervision timer.

Prompted if FRIN = YES.

pedm-18

128-(384)-1920

Forward Release Repetition Delay in milliseconds

This is the delay between sending the seize message and the Forward Release. The accuracy of this timer is governed by the accuracy ofthe 128 millisecond timing queue.

Prompted if FRIN = YES and FRRS = YES.

pedm-18

424 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FRRS

GCR

GRD

HDLC

HLCL

HNTN

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Forward Release Repetition Seize

Do not re-seize the trunk before re-sending the Forward Release.

Re-seize the trunk before re-sending the

Forward Release.

Prompted if FRIN = YES.

Pack/Rel

pedm-18

(NO) YES

(PLAY)

IDLE

(NO) YES

General Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal

Access calls.

eqa-19

Ground Start Arrangement

RAN machine send ground signal when playing.

RAN machine send ground signal when idle.

ranbrd-23 ran-23

High level Data Link Control

Prompted if TKTP = MCU and V25 = YES.

basic-18

0-9999

0-9999

Home Location Number

This number is similar to PFX2 number prompted in LD 15. It is added to this overlay so that this prefix can be configured on a route basis as required in some countries

(e.g., Italy).

As is the case with PFX2, the HLCL prefix can be from one-to-four digits long. This prompt is displayed only if CPFXS = NO.

If only a <CR> is entered, this prompt keeps its previous configuration. If no value was configured previously, no value is configured.

Enter X to delete the digits.

euroidsn-22

Home National Number

This number is similar to the PFX1 number prompted in LD 15. It is added to this overlay so that this prefix can be configured on a route basis as required in some countries

(e.g., Italy).

As is the case with PFX1, the HNTN prefix can be from one-to-four digits long. This prompt is displayed only if CPFXS = NO.

If only a <CR> is entered, this prompt keeps its previous configuration. If no value was configured previously, no value is configured.

euroidsn-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 425

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

HOLD

HOUR

IABS

IANI

ICDN

ICIS

Response Comment

Enter X to delete the digits.

ic dc ht

0-23

Pack/Rel

Hold failure threshold. Where:

• ic = increment counter = 1-(2)-31

• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31

• ht = minimum hold time = 1-(40)-127 seconds

The failure to hold applies to trunks which are not properly seized but disconnected sooner than the minimum hold or ht.

See prompt ILLR for a description of increment count (ic) and decrement count

(dc) values. The default for AID trunks is 2 1

40.

basic-1

Hour to start Automatic Trunk Maintenance test

The system outputs xx:15 indicating the test start times are performed 15 minutes after the hour to avoid interactions with traffic reports.

atm-7

(0)-3

(NO) YES xxxx xxx xxxx (NO)

(YES)

NO

Number of Incoming digits to be Absorbed

For CCSA trunks only.

ccsa-1

In-band Automatic Number Identification route

ISDN must be (NO) for this feature to be enabled. Prompted if AUTO = YES.

ani-15

CLID DN for incoming route (1-7 digits) and

CLID entry (0-125) for trunk DN

CLID DN for incoming route (1-7 digits) and

CLID is not generated for trunk DN

ICDN is prompted if ICIS = NO or if the trunk route is not ISDN.

mfc/isdn-22

Incoming Identifier Send

Use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/R2MFC trunk

Do not use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/

R2MFC trunk

ICIS is prompted for incoming routes when

ISDN = YES or if the table type of MFCI =

R2MF.

mfc/ isdn-22

426 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ICNP

ICNT

ICOG

ICPS

ID

IDC

IDEF

Response

(UKWN)

PRV

PUB

Comment

Incoming Numbering Plan

Unknown

Private

Public

ICNP is prompted if table type of MFCI =

R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICNP is prompted only if the CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.

(UKWN)

INTL

NTN

LCL

LOC

CDP

SPN

Pack/Rel

mfc-22

Incoming Numbering Type

Unknown

International

National

Local

Location

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Special number

ICNT is prompted if table type of MFCI =

R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICNT is prompted if

CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.

mfc-22

IAO

ICT

OGT

(YES)

NO

Incoming and/or Outgoing trunk

Incoming and Outgoing

Incoming only Trunk

Outgoing only Trunk basic-1

Incoming Presentation Status

Provide Trunk DN

Do not provide Trunk DN

ICPS is prompted if table type of MFCI =

R2MF and ICIS = YES. ICPS is prompted if the CLID entry for ICDN = 0-125.

mfc-22

(0)-9

(NO) YES

(NET)

LOC

Identification digit for CAMA trunk routes cama-1

Incoming DID Digit Conversion on this route idc-12

Internal/external definition

Use network information to define a call as internal or external. Calls over the selected route receive a network treatment as defined by available network information.

Use local data to define a call as internal or external. Internal calls receive an internal treatment if RCLS = INT. External calls basic-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 427

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

IEC

IFC

Prompt

IDOP

IDTB

CPUB

Response Comment

receive an external treatment if RCLS =

EXT.

IDEF is prompted in LD 16 if IDEF = YES in

LD 15.

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Identify Originating Party

Call Detail Recording for Internal calls to identify forwarding station originating party.

Prompted when CFWR = NO supp-10

0-7

(OFF) ON

LDN

ID table index to be used by this Meridian

911 route

Conversion to public number feature.

No conversion; CLID remains in private number format. Send the NPA and NXX associated with LOC (in LD 90) or DSC (in

LD 87). Send the LDN of this node.

Valid Input: (OFF), ON, LDN Default: OFF m911-19

001-999

(0) - xxx

(0) - xxxxx

(SL1)

1TR6

APAC

AXEA

Inter-Exchange Carrier ID.

Precede with X to remove entry. If no value is entered "???" is printed in the route data block.

Prompted when TKTP = COT, FEX or WAT.

This value is used for information purposes only.

Inter-Exchange carrier providing the service.

Prompted if IFC = NI2 and SRVC is 0 - 16,

18, 21 - 31.

pra-12

Interface type for this PRI route. The IFC of an ISA route and its service route must match.

Meridian SL-1 pra-12 basic-5.00

Note:

If M911P is set to YES, IFC is set to SL1 by default and i3001s not configurable.

1 TR 6 for Germany

Asia-Pacific ISDN interface for Australian

BRI UIPE PRI, China, Hong Kong,

Indonesia, Japan BRI UIPE PRI, Malaysia,

Singapore & Thailand.

Ericsson AXE-10 for Australia

428 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

IHT

Prompt Response

AXES

Comment

Ericsson AXE-10 for Sweden

D70

D100

D25O

E403

Interface to Japan D70

Meridian DMS-100

Interface to Meridian DMS-250

EuroISDN interface for ETS 300 403

Q Reference Signalling Point interface EGF4

ESIG

ESGF

ESS4

ESS5

EURO

ISGF

ETSI Q reference signalling point (QSIG)

Interface ID. ESIG interface with GF platform.

ESGF can be entered if QSIG and QSIG GF packages are both equipped. If the Digital

Route Type is BRI, then the associated

DSLs must be removed before changing the interface type to ESGF.

Interface to AT&T ESS#4

Interface to AT&T ESS#5

EuroISDN interface

ISIG interface with GF platform.

ISGF can be entered if QSIG and QSIG GF packages are both equipped. If the Digital

Route Type is BRI, then the associated

DSLs must be removed before changing the interface type to ISGF.

Pack/Rel

euro-24 qsig gf-24

ISIG

JTTC

NI2

NUME

S100

SS12

SWIS

TCNZ

2-(30)-62

ISO Q reference signalling point (QSIG)

Interface ID

JAPAN TTC DCH interface ID

NI-2 TR-1268 interface type

Numeris for France

Meridian SL-100

SYS-12 for Norway

SwissNet for PRI2 (SN2)

Telecom New Zealand (NEAX-61)

Outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnect after the far end disconnects.

Number of seconds in increments of two after which an incoming Calling Party

Control call disconnects after the far end disconnects.

jttc- 23 opcb-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 429

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

ILLR

Response

ic dc

Comment Pack/Rel

Illegal Ring threshold. Where:

• ic = increment count = 0-(2)-15

• dc = decrement count = 0-(2)-15

ILLR specifies illegal ringing on a seized trunk.

ILLR is only prompted for COT, FEX and

WAT trunks.

The increment count (ic) and decrement count (dc) control the rate at which detected failures exceed the trunk error threshold. A counter (initially set to zero) records trunk successes and failures. The counter is incremented by the IC value each time a failure is detected, and by the DC value when a valid trunk condition is detected.

When the counter value exceeds the trunk threshold value (30), the overflow indicator is set, and a TRKxxx message displays. A high IC value increases the counter more rapidly than a low IC value, thus causing the counter to exceed the threshold with fewer detected failures.

The threshold counter only preserves positive values. If the counter contains a negative value, it automatically resets to zero. The next detected failure immediately increases the counter toward the threshold value, enabling quicker trunk failure detection.

ic dc = threshold percentage

• 41 = 20%

• 21 = 33%

• 32 = 40%

• 22 = 50%

• 24 = 67%

• 13 = 75%

• 14 = 80%

• 17 = 88%

The RSET command in LD 36 resets the threshold counters to zero.

basic-1

430 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

IMBI

IMCB

INAC

INC

INC_T306

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Immediate Break-In

Line signal is required before Break-In.

Prompted when MFC = R2MF, MFCI = a valid MFC table.

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

opcb-14

Immediate Call Back

Desired party is re-rung if IMCB = YES.

Prompted when MFC = R2MF, MFCI = a valid MFC table.

opcb-14

Insert ESN Access Code to incoming private network call

INAC permits an ESN access code to be automatically added to an incoming ESN call from a private network.

If INAC = YES, then digit insertion (INST) for

NARS or BARS calls is bypassed and

Access Code 1 (AC1) is used for all call types. However, calls can be specifically defined to use Access Code 2 (AC2) in LD

15 at the AC2 prompt.

INAC is prompted when the route type is either a TIE trunk or an IDA trunk with

DPNSS1 signaling.

pra-21

(NO) YES

0-(2)-T306

CDR records generated on incoming calls cdr-1

Incoming T306 timer value T306 is the variable timer for received DISCONNECT messages on incoming calls. This T306 allows in-band tones sent by the network to be heard.

This timer is stored in 2 second increments.

Listed below are region-specific T306 values: bri-20

APAC region T306 max value (in seconds)

Australia 60

China 30

Hong Kong 30

Indonesia 30

Japan 30

Malaysia 30

New Zealand 30

Singapore 30

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 431

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

INDMF

INST

INT

Prompt

INTC

IPUB

ISAR

ISDN

ITDN

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Thailand 30

Indian R2MFC Operations Disabled.

Indian R2MFC Operations Enabled.

Insert. Not prompted when DNIS = YES.

0-99999999 Digits to be inserted before leading digit

<CR> No digits are entered

X Precede with X to remove entry

(OFF)

ON

Interworking

Far end data unit is not a DMS-100 or

SL-100 Data Unit

Far end data unit is a DMS-100 or SL-100

Data Unit

Prompted if TKTP = MCU.

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

mfc- 23 basic-1 basic-18

Do not intercept voice calls which call data sets to an attendant

Intercept voice calls which call data sets to an attendant euroisdn-22

0-511

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES xxxx

Incoming Public Network call service route. cbc_pkg-23

Integrated Service Access Route denied

Integrated Service Access Route allowed

This prompt indicates whether this route is to be used as a service or reference route for the Integrated Service Access or ISA feature. ISAR can only be YES when there are no trunk assignments in LD 14.

pra-12

Integrated Services Digital Network

Defaults to YES when DGTP = PRI or PRI2 and REQ = NEW. Prompted for BRI routes when REQ = CHG. Prompted when ISDN =

YES in LD 15 and with ISDN package 145.

Select YES to allow MLPP over N1-1 PRI trunks pra-12 atvn-25.47

Intercept DN (up to 8 digits)

The DN, to which incoming calls which failed to provide ANI, are transferred.

cist-24

432 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ITOL

JDGT

LAST

LCNO

LEC

LGTH

LID

Response

(DENY)

ALOW

Comment

Deny International toll calls (example,

011+calls)

Allow International toll calls

1-(4)

(NO)

YES

0-255

Pack/Rel

eqa-17

Japan central office Digits

This indicates the number of address digits sent from the CO to the Meridian 1. If the number of digits is not known, set the parameter to (4).

CDR record printing content option for redirected calls.

The Terminating ID field in the CDR record contains the record before the last party.

The Terminating ID field in the CDR record contains the last party.

xutj-16 cdr-1

Line identities Conversion tree Number

Enter tree number for DCNO tree in LD 49, to be used for converting Line Identities.

Prompted if LID = 2.

dass2-16

0 - 9999999 Local Exchange Code

LEC is used for building ANI messages. LEC is prompted if: cist-21

1. Commonwealth of Independent States

(CIST) package 221 is equipped

2. ICOG = OGT

3. TKTP = COT (for analog trunks, TKTP must = DID)

4. DGTP = DTI2

Allowed from 0 up to the ANSZ length.

Prompted for outgoing CIS route.

Used for building ANI message if ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.

4-(60)- 7200

(0)-2

Maximum message length in seconds. For fault detection purpose. Applicable to MPUL,

MLVL & MCON RAN machine types.

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23

Line Identities option. Where: dass2-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 433

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

LMNL

LOCD

LOUT

MANO

MAX

MBGA

MBXR

MCCD

Response Comment

• 0 = do not send ISDN Line Identities

• 1 = send ISDN Line Identities

• 2 = convert and send ISDN Line Identities

Prompted with Integrated Digital Access

(IDA) package 122 and SIGL = DAS

0-15

(6) 7

Loss deviation Maintenance Limit (in dB)

Pack/Rel

atm-7

Number of digits used in a local call by the far end Central Office mfc-9

0-15

(NO) YES

1-510

Loss Out-of-Service deviation limit (in dB) atm-7

Manual Outgoing trunk route

Define the manual DN in LD 14 at prompt

MNDN.

basic-1

Maximum number of channels allowed on the ISA route, service dependent. The value entered is the maximum number of trunks limited by this service route. This value must match the one assigned at the CO.

For example, if MAX = 8 for Tie routes, no more than 8 channels can be used simultaneously for Tie calls. Prompted when: isa-12

1. ISAR = YES and IFC = ESS4, or

2. NSF = YES and IFC = SL-1 or D100 for the selected ISA route defined by response to RTN prompt.

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0- 8

MBG Interface on the D-channel

Prompted if Network Tenant Service feature active.

brit-18

Mobile Extension route.

Where:

• YES = route is mobile extension

• NO = route is not mobile extension mobx-5.50

The call trace request string can be 0-8 digits in length.

Valid digits are 0-9, *, #.

emct-20

434 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MCDT

MCTM

MCTS

MDMP

MDTD

MFC

MFCI

MFCO

MFEA

MFED

MFEI

Response

(0)-4

Comment

Digit string delay time is in seconds.

Granularity is 1 second.

(0)- 30

Pack/Rel

emct-20

Malicious Call Trace request timer id (in seconds)

This is the disconnection delay which is used when the far end goes on hook. Granularity is 1 second. Prompted if interface type for the D-channel is AXE-10 Australia.

mct-10

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

1-(5)-31

(NO)

YES

CMFS

MFE

MFK5

MFK6

1-127

1-127

(YES) NO

0-(1)-9

(0)-127

Malicious Call Trace Signal

Modem Data Module Pair

ADM only route

Modem Data Module Pair route

Minimum Dial Tone Detection delay emct-20 adm-5 dtd-10

Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) Signaling mfc-9

No MFC Signaling

Multifrequency Compelled or MFC Signaling

CIS MFS route. This response is allowed only if both the CIST and CSMFS packages are equipped and only for the outgoing CO

DTI2 routes and for the incoming DID DTI2 routes.

cismfs-23

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling for

Socotel

2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling mfe-10 kd3-20 kd3-20 mfc-9 MFC Incoming table number

Where 0 = Remove outgoing table

MFC Outgoing table number

Where 0 = Remove outgoing table mfc-9

Access code signals are used in the signaling

First digit of special service call

Precede with X to remove.

MFE table number for Incoming calls mfe-10 mfe-10 mfe-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 435

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

MFEO

MFKI

MFKO

MFSS

MIN

MOD

MODE

Response Comment

Where 0 = Remove incoming table

(0)-127 MFE table number for Outgoing calls

Where 0 = Remove outgoing table

Pack/Rel

mfe-10

1- 127

1- 127

MFK table number for Incoming calls

MFK table number for Outgoing calls kd3-20 kd3-20

(B1) B2 B3 Specifies the first MFS digit request backward signal used by the incoming

CDTI2-MFS trunk for the requesting the next digit from the outgoing CIS CO party. The

MFSS is prompted only if the MFC is set to

CMFS only for incoming routes.

cismfs-23

0-510 Minimum number of channels allowed on the

ISA route, service dependent

For example, if MIN = 2 for Tie routes, at least two channels is available for Tie calls.

Prompted when: isa-12

• ISAR = YES and IFC = ESS4

• NSF = YES and IFC = SL1 or D100 for the selected ISA route defined by response to

RTN prompt.

(NO)

YES

APN

ISLD

PRA

Network Mode for synchronous operation

Modem Mode for synchronous operation

Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN =

SYN.

basic-18

Mode of operation

Analog Private Network

APN is allowed only with Integrated Services

Digital Network Signaling Link (ISL) package

147 and Digital Private Signaling System 1

(DPNSS) package 123.

Route uses ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

ISLD is allowed only if ISDN = YES, and the

Integrated Services Digital Network

Signaling Link (ISL) package 147 is equipped. ISLD is allowed only on ISA and

TIE trunks.

ISDN/PRA route, DTRK must be YES

PRA allowed only if ISDN = YES.

pra-12

436 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

MR

Prompt

MON

MQC_FEAT

Response

<CR>

Comment

Note:

Valid response for this prompt is PRA if

M911P prompt is set to YES and VTRK is set to NO.

Default is NULL for service/reference routes

If you enter YES to prompt ISAR, then use the default <CR> for this prompt. If ISAR is

YES, then MODE prints NULL and does not allow a response.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

(NO) YES

NAS

NACD

NMS

Monitoring for route basic-12

MCDN QSIG Feature type

Prompted if RECAP = MQC

Precede MQC Feature type with X to remove meet-24

MCDN NAS functionalities are supported over QSIG

MCDN NACD functionalities are supported over QSIG

MCDN NMS - MC functionalities are supported over QSIG

(NO)

DURC

ENDC

PPM

RVB

STAC

Message Registration

If a 1TR6 trunk route is created where TKTP

= COT or DID, MR is automatic and is not prompted. However, if TKTP = TIE, then MR is not applicable to the route and is not prompted.

The route is not metered. If MR is set to NO, the trunk should have a Polarity Insensitive

Class of Service in LD 14. (CLS = PIP) mr-10

The AOC information is decoded during and at the end of the call. IFC must be set to

NUME or SWIS.

The AOC information is decoded at the end of the call

Buffered PPM signals to be counted on this route

Reverse Battery signal from PSTN for CO interrupted as supervisory signal and used as MR on this route.

Activation of the AOC-S sub-service

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 437

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

MRT

MTND

MULT

MUS

MWRT

MWTO

Response

XLD

Comment

M & MM Lead non-buffered is used. The only metering type allowed for TKTP = IDA and

SIGL = DAS.

MR is not prompted for Danish and Swedish

EuroISDN interfaces as AOC is not supported for those countries.

0-511

Pack/Rel

Music Route number

Route 31 can be configured an exclusively private route in LD 16.

MRT defines the Music Route number for

Recorded Announcement queueing.

mus-1 ranbrd-23 ran-23 mus-23

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Malicious Call Trace Tandem Disconnect delay for AXE10 interface

If set to YES the disconnect operation is delayed at the node closest to the CO for up to MCTM time when the call is a tandem call.

emct-20

Multiplier for Charge Information

Do not change calculation of charge information.

Provide the exact cost of charge information if the RURC exponent is configured to the value of the multiplier.

The response to MULT is YES when the

Central Office sends charge information in one hundredth of currency and the currency multiplier is less than 1. The multiplier exponent can be equal to the RURC exponent. This is only used with functional protocol.

isdn-22

(NO) YES

0 - (2) - 15

(15) - 30

Music on Hold mus-1

Message Waiting Retry Timer.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.

qsig-ss-25.4

Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started qsig-ss-25.4

438 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MXTI

M911_ABAN

M911_ANI

M911_FORM

Response Comment

when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL

PROCEEDING message.

0-(5)-15

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Maximum Time to wait for the far end to connect to test line (in seconds) atm-7

Meridian 911 Call Abandon

Abandoned call treatment is not used on this route

Abandoned call treatment is used on this route m911-21

(1)

2

Receive ANI for Meridian 911 routes.

The M911_ANI prompt acts as a gate opener for Meridian 911 prompts and always set to

YES. Prompted with Meridian 911 (M911) package 224 and TKTP = DID.

m911-19

Automatic Number Identification Format

1 = NPD (1 digit) +7-digit ANI

2 = II (2 digits) +10/20-digit ANI m911-25

M911_TONE

M911_TRK_T

YPE

(YES)

NO

Meridian 911 Tone

Tone given on answer

Silence given on answer

Meridian 911 ANI trunk types m911-21 m911-19

NACC

NADT

(T911T)

911E

(PGNR)

PGNC

PGNU

(0)-255

E911 tandem connections

End office connection

Network access control

Paging route is PAGENET restricted

Paging route is PAGENET controlled

Paging route is PAGENET uncontrolled

NACC is prompted if TKTP = PAG and

PAGENET package 307 is equipped.

pagenet-22

No-Answer Disconnect Timer (in seconds)

Only for 2.0 Mb/s DTI trunks.

isdn-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 439

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

NASA

NATL

NCNA

NCNI

NCOS

NCRD

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Network Attendant Service Allowed

Only prompted if IFC is SL1

(YES) NO

(YES) NO

(0)-7

(0)-99

(NO)YES

Pack/Rel

nas-20

North American Toll scheme; a toll call has 0 or 1 as first or second digit.

If NXX second digit is "1" set NATL to "NO" and answer "0" "1" to TDG. All toll digits for

TDG prompt can be removed by a YES response if REQ = CHG. Repeat LD 16 with a NO response to add toll digits.

cdr-13

.

Network Calling Name Allowed

Prompted if ISDN = Yes

Request CNI after the defined number of digits are received.

If NCNI = 0, CNI request does not depend on the number of digits received.

If NCNI is defined to be greater than the number of digits required for routing the call,

CNI do not be requested but the call is routed.

Prompted when the following occur: pra-13 dpnss-20

• Multifrequency Compelled Signaling

(MFC) package is equipped

• TKTP = DID or TIE

• MFC Table = R2MF

• MFC signaling table is defined for the route

Network Class of Service group number.

Prompted if TKTP = TIE.

Network Call Redirection allowed

YES allows Network Call Redirection messages to be sent or blocked if NCRD =

(NO).

Network Call Redirection can occur without having NCRD = YES. This prompt only controls the sending of Network Call

Redirection messages, not the actual redirection of the call.

When NCRD = YES, the message supplied provides information for the CLID display.

When NCRD = (NO), the call is redirected without the CLID redirection information if

CLID is enabled.

pra-13 pra-14

440 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NCTH

NDGT

NDIG

NDNO

NDP

NDRI

NEDC

Response

(0) - 100

Comment

Number of Calls Waiting Threshold.

Prompted only if BDCT = YES and for Start/

Stop RAN machine with STRT = DDL.

Default value zero means no threshold applies.

Pack/Rel

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23

1-(4)-7

1-(4)-31

(2)-10

Number of DNIS Digits expected

Number of DNIS digits required on the route

The extension to 31 digits is only available for DID, TIE or IDA routes.

dnis-10 dnis-24

Number of Digits in numbering plan at conventional main switch.

Prompted if SIGO = STD and CBQ = YES.

casm-1

0-254

INC 0-32

EXC 0-32

<CR>

(0)-4

(ORG)

ETH

Night IDC tree number

When REQ = NEW default is the DCNO tree defined. Otherwise, there is no default value.

idc-14

Number of Digits Printed

NDP affects dialed digits including EES digits with one exception. When both ECDR

= YES in LD 15 and OPD = YES in LD 16,

NDP affects only the outpulsed digits; the

EES digits are not affected.

Output the first 0-32 digits

Suppress the last 0-32 digits

If REQ = NEW, output all digits and suppress none.

isdn-15

Network Distinctive Ringing Index

(0) = Default/undefined edrg-16

Near End Disconnect Control

This entry determines the type of control exercised by the Meridian SL - 1 on trunk disconnections.

Originating end control The far-end on-hook condition is recognized only for incoming calls. Far end conditions are ignored for outgoing calls. ORG is default for TIE, DID and CCSA trunks.

Either end control If the far end goes on-hook for either incoming or outgoing calls, the onhook condition is recognized and the call is basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 441

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

NMNL

NMSG

NODE

NOUT

NPA

NPID

Response Comment

disconnected. ETH is the default for all trunks except TIE, DID and CCSA trunks.

27-90

Pack/Rel

Note:

If SUPP (131) package is disabled, then outgoing trunk to trunk transfer is allowed only when the response for FEDC and

NEDC is ETH.

Noise Maintenance Limit (in dBrn) atm-7

(0)-30 a...a

27-90 nnn

0-9

Number of this items Message is repeated mfc-24

Node ID.

For CS 1000S system.

The Node ID can have a maximum of 4 numeric characters.

NODE ID associated with the SS dedicated for 911P trunks.

basic-2

Note:

Remove all trunks associated with the node before you change the NODE field.

Noise Out-of-Service limit (in dBrn) atm-7

Numbering Plan Area

Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit

If <CR> is entered, the NPID table is created.

m911-19 m911-19

NPID_TBL_NUM

NRT

NSF

NTOF

0-511

0-7

(NO) YES

(YES) NO m911-19

Meridian 911 route table index

The ID table must be created before this prompt can be answered.

Notification Route number

Near To Far measurement

See prompts REF, TST and PADL.

mfc-24

Network Service Facility

Prompted when TKTP = ISA and IFC = D100 or SL1. When NSF = YES, the ATB traffic counter is incremented when the MAX value is reached in the service route.

pra-12 atm-7

442 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NTOL

OABS

OAL

OAN

OGDN

OGIS

OGNP

Response

(DENY)

ALOW

Comment Pack/Rel

Deny North American Toll calls (example, 1+ calls)

Allow North American Toll calls eqa-17

0-9 Actual outgoing toll digits to be ignored for

Code Restriction

OABS is frequently used with 1+calls.

Precede with X to remove.

basic-1

(NO) YES

(YES) NO xxxx xxx xxxx (NO)

CDR on outgoing calls

If answer supervision is defined for the trunk,

CDR records are generated only on call completion.

cdr-1

CDR timing starts On Answer supervision of outgoing calls

Prompted if OAL or OTL = YES. This prompt only applies to trunks with answer supervision CLS = PSP, or SUPN = YES.

With International Supplementary Features

(SUPP) package 131, the default is NO.

Without SUPP package 131, the default is

YES.

CLID DN for outgoing route (1-7 digits) and

CLID entry (0-125) for trunk DN

CLID DN for outgoing route (1-7 digits) and

CLID is not generated for trunk DN

OGDN is prompted if ICIS = NO or if the trunk route is not ISDN.

mfc/isdn-22

(YES)

NO

(UKWN)

PRV

Outgoing Identifier Send

Use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/R2MFC trunk or from the calling set. If OGIS = YES and the incoming trunk is R2MFC, the CNI form the incoming trunk CLID/CNI is used in the CLID.

Do not use CLID/CNI from incoming ISDN/

R2MFC trunk or from the calling set.

OGIS is prompted for outgoing routes when

ISDN = YES or if table of MFCI = R2MF.

mfc/isdn-22

Outgoing Numbering Plan

Unknown numbering plan

Private mfc/isdn-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 443

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

OGNT

OGPS

OHQ

OHQT

OHT

OHTD

OHTT

Response

PUB

Comment

Public

OGNP is prompted only if the CLID entry for

OGDN = 0-125.

(UKWN)

CDP

INTL

LCL

LOC

NTN

SPN

(YES)

NO

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Outgoing Numbering Type

Unknown numbering type

Coordinated dialing plan

International number

Local number

Location number

National number

Special Number

OGNT is prompted if CLID entry for OGDN

= 0-125.

mfc/isdn-22 mfc/isdn-22 Outgoing Presentation Status

Provide Trunk DN

Do not provide Trunk DN

OGPS is prompted if the CLID entry for

OGDN = 0-125.

.

Off-Hook Queuing

Used in NARS for incoming TIE callers ohq-1

(0)-63

0-(30)-126

(NO)

YES

0-(30)-62

Off-Hook Queue Threshold

BARS/NARS availability test. Compare with current P3 calls.

ohq-1

Off-Hook Timer

Number of seconds in increments of two after which an outgoing Calling Party Control call disconnecst after the far end disconnects.

Prompted when CNTL = YES and OPCB =

YES opcb-14 basic-24

Off-Hook Timer Delay

Masks the far end Off-Hook for up to 384 ms measured from the end of the interdigit pause of the digit send out.

Masks the far end Off-Hook for up to 2 seconds.

basic-1

Toll Off-Hook Timer

Number of seconds in increments of two after which a toll outgoing Calling Party pemd-18

444 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

OPA

OPCB

OPD

OPDL

OPE

OPP

OPR

Response Comment

Control call disconnects after the far end disconnects. Toll calls are identified by the responses to TDG and SSL.

Prompted when CNTL = YES and OPCB =

YES.

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Generates CDR or CDAS record for PPM pulses.

isdn-10

Operator Call Back

OPCB features to be assigned to this route.

Prompted when:

• TKTP = DID

• NEDC = ETH

• FEDC = ETH

• CPDC = NO

• CNTL = YES

• Operator Callback (OPCB) package 126 is equipped.

opcb-14

(YES)

NO

(0)-8064

(NO) YES

(NORM)

ATT

(NO) YES

Outpulsed Digits in CDR

Dialed digits in CDR

System must be initialized for changes to the

OPD settings to take effect. Prompted when

OTL = YES, OAL = YES or OAN = YES.

Outpulsing Delay, in milliseconds

If required for JDMI, OPDL = 3000 milliseconds.

Prompted when DGTP = DTI2 or JDMI.

cdr-12 pra-14

Change data port or operating parameters

Prompted only if TKTP = R232, R422 or

MCU.

basic-18

Operator originated calls receive normal treatment for busy and intercept situations

Operator originated calls routed to attendant for busy and intercept situations mfc-15

Outpulsing Route

All trunk members for an OPR must have

DTN CLS, unless they are on Route 31 or opao-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 445

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

OTL

OUT_T306

OVLR

OVLS

OVLT

PADL

PADT

Response Comment

Private Line Routes. When RPA = YES, the default is YES.

Prompted with Outpulsing of Asterisk "*" and

Octothorpe "#" (OPAO) package 104, and prompted when TKTP = COT, DID, FEX,

TIE, or WATS.

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

CDR on Outgoing Toll calls

If answer supervision is defined for the trunk,

CDR records are generated only on call completion. Prompted when OAL = NO and

Route = CAMA, CO, DID, FX, or WATS.

cdr-1

0-(30)-T306

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-8

Outgoing T306 timer value

T306 is the variable timer for received

DISCONNECT messages on outgoing calls.

This T306 allows in-band tones sent by the network to be heard.

This timer is stored in 2 second increments.

Listed below are region-specific T306 values:

APAC region T306 max value (in seconds)

Australia 60 China 30 Hong Kong 30

Indonesia 30 Japan 30 Malaysia 30 New

Zealand 30 Singapore 30 Thailand 30 bri-20

Overlap Receiving allowed

Not prompted if IFC = Numeris.

ovlp-15

Overlap Sending allowed. This prompt appears for the following APISDN interfaces which support Overlap Sending: AUST,

HKNG, SING, TCNZ, THAI. OVLS is not prompted if IFC = Numeris.

ovlp-15

Inter-INFO Timer during Overlap Sending.

This prompt appears only for APISDN interfaces which support Overlap Receiving:

THAI.

ovlp-15

0-63

0-63

Pad factor for loop around (in dB)

This is the far end tone level, plus the total pad loss at both ends on two trunks.

atm-7

Pad factor for T100 test line (in dB) atm-7

446 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

PII

Prompt

PANS

PAR

PBDO

PCID

PECL

PGPN

Response Comment

This is the near end tone level, plus the total pad loss at both ends.

(YES)

NO

(SPAC)

EVEN

MARK

ODD

Pack/Rel

Pseudo-Answer can be sent on some types of trunks as soon as end of dialing is detected.

supp-14

Pseudo-Answer is not sent on any type of trunk.

SUPN in LD 14 can be YES, or PANS = YES has no meaning.

Data port Parity

Space

Even

Mark

Odd

Prompted if TKTP = R232, R422 or MCU.

basic-18

(OFF) ON xxxx

Port Busy upon DTR Off

Prompted if TKTP = R232, DEM = DCE and

DTR = OFF.

basic-18 basic-2 Protocol ID for the route.

Where xxxx:

H323 = non-SIP route

SIP = SIP route

SIPL = SIP Line route basic-4.00

basic-6.00

(NO) YES

0-15

(NO)

YES

Periodic Clearing Signal

Not supported on XCOT.

Protocol Set Group. This entry must be consistent with Protocol Group Number

(PGPN) entry in LD 27.

supp-14 mph-18

Privacy Indicator Ignored

Calling Party Privacy Indicator is honored and the existing functionality is maintained.

The Calling Party Privacy Indicator is ignored. When PII is set to YES, the CLID

Presentation Indicator field in the Calling

Party Number IE is changed from restricted to allowed and the CPND Indicator field in cpp-23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 447

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

PNDL

PNI

Prompt

PLEV

Response

[CR]

Comment

the Display IE is changed from denied to allowed.

Leave the feature setting as it was prior to the active service change.

Pack/Rel

Note:

The PII prompt applies to all ISDN interfaces.

• Euro ISDN (All variants)

• APAC (All variants)

• QSIG (ISO and ETSI)

• MCDN Enterprise networking variants

(including the peer-to-peer variant-SL1 and the enterprise UNI variant- SL100)

• H323 and SIP (they use the MCDN peer-to-peer variant-SL1 between the call server and the signaling server) cppe-6.0

0-(2)-7

2-(6)-10

(0)-32700

Priority Level

Priority Level 2 sets can override sets of

Level 1 and 2, and can be overridden by sets of Level 2-7.

Prompted with Priority Override/Forced

Camp-On (POVR) package 186 or

Enhanced DPNSS1 Services (DPNSS_ES) package 288.

povr-20

Process Notification Delay Timer in seconds mfc-24

Private Network Identifier

Each customer data block must have a unique PNI when equipped with the multicustomer option. PNI = 1 is typical for customer 0. It must match the PNI in the far end CDB to support such features as NRAG,

NACD and NMS.

The PNI in the RDB functions as a logical customer number for routing outgoing noncall-associated Transaction Capability

Application Part or TCAP facility messages to the appropriate ESN translations within the far end PBX.

Using the default value of PNI = 0 prevents operation of features such as NRAG, NACD and NMS.

pra-12

448 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PNNC

PNPS

POST

PRDL

PREM

PRIV

PROG

Response

(NO) YES

(0)-30

DIS

ATT

(NO)

YES

BSY

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

NCHG

MALE

MCON

Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

Requires package 148 (NTWK)

Process Notification Networked Calls

Interval between messages (2 seconds increments)

RAN Post announcement treatment

Disconnect after maximum repetitions

Route to attendant after maximum repetitions

No Partial Dial timing on DID routes

Partial Dial timing is equipped using EOD

Busy signal is sent on time-out

Preemption allowed on this route. If SLP package is equipped, then COT, DID, FX,

ISDN and Tie trunk types can be preemptable.

mfc-24 mfc-24 ran-1 supp-10 atvn-25.47

Route is not a Private line route

Route is a Private line route

Any COT route can be a private route.

Prompted if TKTP = COT and REQ =

NEW.

basic-14

Progress

Send a PROGRESS signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

NCHG is the default for all interfaces except

Australian and Austrian. NCHG is not supported with Japan interface.

Send an ALERT signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

MALE is the default for Japan interface.

Send a CONNECT signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a euroisdn-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 449

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

PR_RTN

PR_TRIGS

PSDS

PSEL

PTUT

PTYP

Response Comment

progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

MCON the default for Australian and

Austrian interface.

(NO) YES

DIV xx y

CNG xx y

CON xx y

Pack/Rel

Path Replacement Retain Option is supported by the far end Private Integrated

Services Network Exchange.

qsig ss- 23

Path Replacement Triggers are set to their default values:

DIV 2 3

CNG 2 3

XCON 2 3

2 Path Replacement attempts with a delay of 3 minutes for Diversion and Congestion triggers but Connected number is not a trigger.

Diversion is used to trigger Path

Replacement.

Congestion is used to trigger Path

Replacement.

A Connected number different from a called number is used to trigger Path

Replacement.

xx = 0 - 15, the number of Path Replacement attempts.

y = 1 - 7, the delay between two Path

Replacement attempts in minutes.

Precede with X to remove.

qsig ss-23

(NO) YES

(DMDM)

TLNK

0-510

Public Switched Data Service

Prompted if TKTP = MCU.

basic-18

DM-DM Protocol Selection

T-link Protocol Selection

TLNK protocol is used by SL-100 and DMS data devices, DM-DM is used by Meridian 1 data devices such as ASIM, AIM, ADM,

SADM, Asynch Data Option or ADO, and

MPDA. MCA uses both protocols. PSEL is prompted if TKTP = R232, R422, or MCU.

basic-18

Preference Trunk Usage Threshold

Port Type at far end mfc-24 basic-5

450 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

QREC

R2MD

RACD

Response Comment

The response to this prompt is used in determining the required transmission level.

Refer to Transmission Parameters

Reference (NN43001-282) for more information.

Analog TIE trunk routes:

(ATT)

AOT

Analog TIE trunks

Analog TIE trunk, used instead of ATT whenever the PBX has one or more digital satellite trunk routes or DST to any digital satellite PBX which includes OPX telephones.

AST Satellite PBX TIE or ESN trunks if SAT =

YES

Digital TIE trunk routes:

(DTT)

DCT

DST

Digital or combination TIE trunk

Combination satellite PBX TIE trunk

Digital satellite PBX TIE trunk (allowed if

SAT = YES or NO)

Analog CO trunk routes:

(ACO)

ATO

Analog CO trunk

Analog toll office trunk

Digital CO, FEX, DID, and WAT trunk routes:

(DCO)

DTO

Digital or combination CO port

Digital or combination Toll Office trunk

1.5 Mb/s PRI TIE trunk routes:

(PRI)

DTT

DCT

DST

B-channel port classification

Digital or combination TIE trunk

Combination satellite PBX TIE trunk

Digital Satellite PBX TIE trunk

1.5 Mb/s PRI CO, FEX, DID, and WAT trunk routes:

(PRI)

DCO

DTO

B-channel port classification

Analog CO trunk

Analog toll office trunk

(NO) YES CDR ACD Q initial connection records to be generated

Pack/Rel

cdr-1

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

R2 modification

Route traffic information in ACD Reports mfc-9 acd-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 451

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

RANH

RANR

RANX

RCAL

Response Comment

Enter YES only if the route is used as the

Interflow DN of at least one ACD DN and the

Interflow Trunk traffic is desired.

Prompted for COT, TIE, DID, WAT, FEX and

RAN trunk types.

Actual ACD Report format output examples are included in the ACD Management

Reporting NTP.

x...x

x...x

Pack/Rel

RAN or Music route which is used after post treatment, where:

• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS

1000E

• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T

Precede with x to remove.

atan-25.4

RAN Route number for the desired RAN route, where:

• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS

1000E

• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S,

MG 1000B and MG 1000T ranx-20

(NO)

YES

(NO)

ATT

DRA

RAN for calls diverted to external trunks

RAN not requested when a call is forwarded to this route.

RAN requested when a call is forwarded to this route.

Prompted when:

1. TKTP = COT

2. RPA = NO

3. DSEL = VCE or VOD

4. ICOG = IAO or OGT ranx-20

Deny Manual Service Recall

Allow Manual Service Recall

DID Recall to Attendant for DTI2 trunks

RCAL is prompted when TKTP = DID or

COT supp-10

452 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RCAP

Response

BRI

CCBI

CCBO

CCBS

CCNI

CCNO

CCNR

COLP

CTI

CTO

XCOLP

Comment

Remote Capabilities. Precede with X to remove a configured capability. This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.

Pack/Rel

supp-10

ISDN Line/Trunk interworking. Default for all

Asia Pacific interfaces.

Call Completion to busy subscriber using integer value for operation coding

CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive.

qsig ss-24

Call Completion to busy subscriber using object identifier for operation coding

CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber for

QSIG and EuroISDN BRI interfaces.

CCBS is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package 316 is equipped.

Call Completion on no response using integer value for operation coding.

CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.

Call Completion on no response using object identifier for operation coding.

CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.

qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24

Call Completion to No Reply for QSIG and

EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCNR is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package

316 is equipped.

Connected Number IE Presentation is supported on far end. COLP is supported on

Indonesian interfaces, not as a default because it can be configured.

Default value for ESIG, ISIG, NI2 and

EUROISDN interfaces except for AUS, EIR,

DUT, BEL and FRA interfaces.

qsig ss-24 basic- 23

Call Transfer Integer

CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.

Call Transfer Object

CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.

Add call transfer notification remote capability to the EuroISDN interface.

Precede with 'X' to remove capability.

Remove COLP

Default value for all APAC, AUS, EIR, DUT,

BEL and FRA interfaces.

qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 bne-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 453

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt Response Comment

This prompt is issued only for UIPE-based protocols.

CPK

Pack/Rel

Network Call Park.CPK is allowed if IFC =

SL1 and CPRKNET package 306 is equipped.

QSIG SS Call Diversion Notification remote capability. Configure sending of QSIG

Diversion Notification Information, treatment of Rerouting request and coding of operations. If coded as Object Identifier, the remote capability ends with 'O", whereas for

Integer Value, the remote capability ends with 'I'. Only one remote capability is allowed.

qsig ss- 23

DV1I

DV1O

DV2I

DV2O

DV3I

DV3O

ECTO

MCID

MQC

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Diversion information is sent to remote switch. Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

EuroI ISDN Call Diversion

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Precede with 'X' to remove capability.

bne-25

Add call transfer notification and invocation remote capability to the EuroISDN

Precede with 'X' to remove capability.

bne-25 etsi ss- 23 MCID = Add MCID as a new remote capability.

Precede with 'X' to remove.

MCDN QSIG Conversion as a Remote capability meet-24

454 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RCLS

Response

NAC

NCT

ND1

ND2

ND3

NDI

NDO

Comment

Network access data.NAC is allowed if IFC

= SL1.

Enter XNAC to remove NAC from Remote

Capabilities.

Network Call Trace

Network Name Display 1

Network Name Display 2

Network Name Display 3. This ensures the same level of service between the MCDN and QSIG name display services.

Name Display - Integer ID Coding

Name Display - Object ID Coding

Pack/Rel

qsig-24 qsig-24

NDS

PRI

PRO

QMWI

QMWO

XQMW

Name Display Services

Add Path Replacement as a remote capability. Only one capability can be configured per link.

The encoding method uses Integer Values.

The encoding method uses Object Identifier

Precede with 'x' to remove capability.

qsig ss- 23

Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability.

The encoding method uses Integer Values.

Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability.

The encoding method uses Object

Identifier.

Remove Message Waiting Indication.

QMWI and QMWO are exclusive and may not be configured at the same time on the same link.

qsig ss-25.4

qsig ss-25.4

qsig ss-25.4

RVQ

UUS1

XUUS

(EXT)

INT

Remote Virtual Queuing

User-to-User Service 1

Decode UUS IE sent by Central Office

Send UUS IE to Central Office

Remove User-to-User Service 1 bne-25 bne-25

Route Class marked as external

Route Class marked as internal

Applies only to CAA, COT, CSA, DID, FEX,

TIE, FGDT, or WATS trunks.

basic-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 455

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

RDNL

REF

REP

REQ

RGFL

RLSM

ROUT

Response

0-(4)-7

Comment Pack/Rel

Remote DN length used to extract the necessary number of DN digits from the

MCDN or QSIG CLID or from the DPNSS

OLI.

Prompted if Commonwealth of Independent

States - Three Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package 221 is equipped for QSIG, MCDN, or DPNSS TIE routes.

cist-21 n...n

1-15

CHG

END

OUT

LCHG

NEW ic dc

Reference loop around DN, range is 2 to 10 digits basic-1

Repetitions of recorded announcements ran-1 basic-1 Request

Change existing data block

Exit overlay program

Remove data block

Print date and time that a trunk data block was last changed. The change can be the result of a NEW, OUT, or CHG command.

Add new data block to the system

(0)-15 x...x

Ring Failure threshold. Where:

• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31

• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31

RGFL specifies the percentage threshold for trunks which fail to produce the expected ringing and ground changes. See prompt

ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.

RGFL is not prompted for AID, CAM, CSA,

RLM, RLR and TIE trunks The default for

RAN and MUS trunks is 12 6.

basic-1

Release Mechanism.

Refer to Table 3: Release Mechanism

Options on page 398. RLSM is prompted if

DTRK = YES and DGTP = DTI2.

pedm-18

Route number

Where x...x =

0-511: Large System

For CS 1000E System basic-1 basic-4.00

456 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RPA

RPPM

RRBS

RTN

RTYP

Response Comment

0-127: Small System

For MG 1000B and MG 1000T

(NO) YES

(0)

10-250

251

Pack/Rel

Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering polling time (in seconds)

Real-time Periodic Pulse Metering do not operate

1-9 Rounded up to 10

Rounded down to 250 basic-4.00

Radio Paging Route

If this prompt is set to NO, the route is not allowed to be used for Radio Paging.

Prompted with Radio Paging (RPA) package

187 and TKTP = TIE or COT.

rpa-20 pedm-16

(NO)

YES

Repeat Release Before Seize

Seize the trunk normally.

A release signal is sent followed by the seize signal.

RRBS allows a FRLS signal to be sent immediately before a SEZ signal on a DTI2 trunk. RRBS is prompted if DTRK = YES,

DGTP = DTI2 and FRRS is not set to YES.

pedm-18

0-511

AUD

CAP

CK2

CKM

CON

DGT

LVL

MCON

MLSS

MLVL

MPUL

Route Number for any configured ISA route

RTN is the Route Number of the associated

Call-By-Call master route.

Prompted if TKTP = TIE.

pra-12

Recording device for RAN trunks

Audichron or Cook 212, required for XUT trunks

Code-a-Phone

Cook 201 or QAY1

Cook 201 Multichannel

NT7M Digital Recorders

213300 and 213400 Digital Recorders ran-1

Level start/stop (Enhanced Universal Trunk cards)

Continuous mode, multichannel.

Multi-channel Level Start/Stop. (Enhanced

Universal Trunk cards) Maximum length of message = 608 seconds.

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 457

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

RUCF

Response

PUL

Comment

Level start/stop, multichannel.

Pulse start/stop, multichannel.

These modes supports independent RAN trunks.

Request the RAN broadcast package.

Pulse start/stop (Enhanced Universal Trunk cards)

The Enhanced Universal Trunk cards word with CAP, CK2, or AUD RAN interfaces. The

Pulse and Level start/stop options are used in conjunction with the RAN interface selected.

The maximum length of the message allowed by software:

• AUD = 64 seconds

• CAP = 608 seconds

• CK2 = 64 seconds

• CON = 608 seconds

• DGT = 256 seconds x y

Pack/Rel

Route Unit Conversion Factor

Formula for Route Unit Conversion Factor is:

X*10

(-Y)

Where:

• x = 0-(1)-9999

• y = (0)-3 isdn-15

This results in a range of .001 to 9999.

If the Central Office sends the call charge in

AOC units (instead of AOC currency), RUCF is used to convert this charge into PPM format.

Call Charge scenarios:

1. When call charge in sent in currency:

Displayed charge = (Received charge/

RURC) * RUCS

2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:

Displayed charge = (Received charge *

RUCF) * RUCS units

RUCF is not prompted for Danish and

Swedish EuroISDN.

458 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RUCS

RURC

RVSD

Response

0-9999

Comment Pack/Rel

Route Unit Cost

RUCS can be used in Motel/Hotel type environments to calculate the margin the

Meridian 1 administrator wants to make per unit.

Call Charge scenarios: basic-10

1. When call charge in sent in currency:

Displayed charge = (Received charge/

RURC) * RUCS

2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:

Displayed charge = (Received charge *

RUCF) * RUCS units

When REQ = NEW, RUCS defaults to the

UCST value in CDB. RUCS is prompted when MR = PPM or XLD. Not prompted for

Danish and Swedish EuroISDN.

x y ic dc

Route Unit Reference Cost

Formula for Route Unit reference Cost is: X

* 10

(-Y)

Where:

• x = 0 - 9999

• y = (0) - 3 basic-20

This gives a range from.001 to 9999.

Call Charge scenarios:

1. When call charge in sent in currency:

Displayed charge = (Received charge/

RURC) * RUCS

2. When call charge in sent in AOC units:

Displayed charge = (Received charge *

RUCF) * RUCS units

The default value for x is identical to the previously entered RUCS value. Not prompted for Danish and Swedish

EuroISDN.

Reversed wired CO trunk threshold.

Where:

• ic = increment count = 1-(8)-31

• dc = decrement count = 1-(31) basic-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 459

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

SAT

SBN

SCDT

SCR

SDID

SEIZ

SGL

SGRP

Response Comment

RVSD specifies the percentage threshold for

CO trunks which have tip and ring or other trunk wiring problems. See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.

Prompted for COT, FEX and WATS trunks.

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Satellite used for trunk route via earth orbiting satellite

This prompt has no relation to the trunk route function connecting a main PBX to a satellite

PBX.

esn-1 basic-21 Do not send Billing Number on this route

Send Billing Number on this route

Secondary Dial Tone detection dtd-10

YES (NO)

Selective Carrier Restriction to restrict Equal

Access calls

New Flexible Code Restriction is enabled.

NTOL and ITOL must both be ALOW.

eqa-19

Send DID number instead of internal DN.

IDC table with SDID Yes must be configured.

basic-25.4

ic dc

(NO)

YES

(0)-999

Seize failure threshold. Where:

• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31

• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31

SEIZ specifies the percentage threshold of trunks which request seizure but are not seized (either no response from the far end or response is too late).

See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.

The default for AID trunks is 2 1. The default for RAN and MUS trunks is 12 6.

basic-1 mfe-10 Signal

Return normal MFE signal

Return MFE idle signal

Scheduled access restriction group sar-20 pra-15

460 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

SID

Prompt

SIDE

SIGL

SIGO

Response Comment

Prompted with Scheduled Access

Restrictions (SAR) package 162. Must have group defined in LD 88.

0-511

(NET)

USR

Pack/Rel

Service Identification for the route

Used to poll switches for traffic, ACD or CDR reports. Allows NSF to be turned on or off.

The service route ID must match the far end.

Prompted if NSF = YES and TKTP = TIE/

WAT/FX/COT.

Meridian SL-1 Node Type

Network

User

SIDE defaults to NET if IFC = SL1. SIDE defaults to USR if IFC = 1TR6, NUME,

APAC, EUROISDN or D70. Prompted if IFC

= SL-1.

basic-22

BEL

NT4

NT5

APNS

DAS

DPN

(STD)

ESN2

ESN3

ESN5

ETN

EN19

Signaling interface for CAMA trunks

Bell method

NT400 method

NT500 method

Layer 3 Signaling

APNSS signaling

DASS2 signaling, allowed with Digital

Access Signaling System 2 (DASS2) package 124

DPNSS signaling, allowed with Digital

Private Network Signaling System 1

(DPNSS) package 123 cama-1

Signaling arrangement

Standard signaling arrangement

Supports NCOS, TCOS and CCBQ call types

Supports network call transfer, Satellite Link

Control and all ESN2 call types. It does not support DTI calls. Either ESN2 or ESN3 is recommended for ISA

Supports DTI data calls plus all other types

Electronic TIE Network signaling arrangement esn-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 461

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

SIND

SLCT

SPCT

SPN

SPTO

SRCH

SRPM

Response Comment

ESN Transparent Data Networking data call.

Allowed when TKTP = TIE for PRI and DTI trunks.

(NO) YES Screening indicator for Mobile Extension route.

Prompted if MBXR = YES.

Where:

• YES = CLID is user provided and verified.

• NO = CLID is user provided and not verified.

Pack/Rel

mobx-5.50

TONE

MSG

(IMM)

DLY

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

(LIN)

RRB

0-(15)-255

Note:

If MBXR = NO, SIND is set to NO by default.

Select Tone

Select Message mfc-24

Speech Path Cut-Through

Immediate cut-through

Delayed cut-through basic-1

If yes is entered, the SPN's AC is inserted first to search for a valid UDP number. SPN is prompted when the route type is an IDA trunk with DPNSS1 signaling and when

INAC = YES.

pra-21

Super Trunk Option

7-10 digit outpulsing on ANI calls

3 digit outpulsing on ANI calls

Response must be YES for outpulsing to begin after three digits.

cam-1

Linear Hunting Search method for outgoing trunk member. Start with the highest trunk number, used for 2-way trunks.

Round Robin Hunting Search for outgoing trunk member. Start with next lower trunk than the one seized, used for outgoing trunks.

Service Parameter. Prompted if SRVC =

WATB.

basic-1 pra-16

462 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SRT

SRVC

SSL

Response Comment

1-(30)-1023 Number of minutes on an outgoing CDPC call a set is kept on hold to a trunk

(NNSF)

ACC

I800

IWAT

LDS

M800

MEG

Q900

SDN

WATB

WATM

(0) - 31

1-15

Pack/Rel

opcb-14

Service type provisioned for AT&T ESS connections (where IFC = ESS#4 or ESS#5)

Prompted if ISDN = YES and IFC = ESS4 or

ESS5. Prompted with Inter Exchange

Carrier (IEC) pkg 149.

No Network Specific Facility or NSF IE sent.

NSF refers to the services provided on a

Call-by-Call basis.

pra-12

Accunet Data service

International 800 service

In-WATs service for AT&T interface

Long Distance Service

MEGACOM 800 service

MEGACOM service

ATT&T Multiquest 900 service

Software Defined Network service

Wide Area Telephone Service Parameter

Band for AT&T ESS#5

Wide Area Telephone Maximal service for

AT&T ESS#5

Service provisioned for National ISDN PRI.

Prompted if IFC is NI2.

Decimal value of the service is entered here:

0 - No NSF IE (public network call)

One service route for incoming public network call and multiple service routes for outgoing public network call. The service route number for incoming public call has to be specified in IPUB prompt in the master route.

17 - INWATS selection

18 - OUTWATS selection

19 - Foreign Exchange Selection

20 - Tie Trunk Selection

AT&T defines services other than the one defined in the Bellcore CBC specification.

These values (defined in the facility coding field in the NSF IE) can be entered here to allow M1 to recognize the AT&T proprietary service.

cbc_pkg- 23

Special Service List number opcb-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 463

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

SST

STEP

STND

STRK

STRT

STYP

SVFL

Response Comment

Used to identify special service calls on this

PSTN for CO route, list must be previously defined in LD 18.

xx y

0-511

Pack/Rel

Seizure Supervision Timer

Timer for trunks with delay dial or DDL, wink or WNK and ground or GRD start arrangements. Where: xx = minimum value. Therefore: basic-18

• xx = 1-(3)-15 seconds for GRD start

• xx = 5 seconds for DDL and WNK y = increment value of 0-7 seconds

Alternate trunk route for outgoing trunks

STEP cannot be defined for an ISA route.

Route 31 is no longer an exclusively private route, unless configured as one in LD 16.

For dataport, it is only possible to step to a similar ADM data route.

Precede with X to delete.

basic-1

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

IMM

DDL

(SDAT)

STDN ic dc

Standard T100 test line (STND is 5.5

seconds and is followed by silent termination at the far end) atm-7

Super Trunk group feature cam-1

Start arrangement

Immediately connect call to recording

Delay call connection until start of recording ran-1

Standard Signaling Type

Standard Data signaling for voice and data

(DM-DM, non-tandem PSDS).

Standard Transparent Data Networking for voice and data and TDN calls. STDN is applicable to calls on DTI trunks only.

This prompt appears when SIGO = STD.

tdn-19

Supervision Failure. Where:

• ic = increment count = 1-(2)-31

• dc = decrement count = 1-(2)-31 basic-1

464 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SWP

T100

TABL

TARG

TBL

TCPP

TCRS

Response Comment

SVFL specifies the percentage threshold for trunks which fail to obtain supervision. See prompt ILLR for a description of ic and dc values.

Prompted for only AID, CAM, CSA, RLM,

RLR and TIE trunks. The default for AID trunks is 2 1.

(NORM)

ATT

Subscriber With Priority calls receives normal treatment for busy and intercept situations.

Subscriber with priority calls routed to attendant for busy or intercept situations

Pack/Rel

mfc-15 n...n

0-31

0-(1)-31

(0)-15

T100 test line Directory Number, 2 to 10 digits basic-1

Flexible dial tone detection Table number dtd-14

Trunk Access Restriction Group range

Enter the list of all TGAR in LD 10, LD 11 and

LD 14 which have restricted access to this route.

Multiple groups can be defined or deleted.

To delete entries, enter Xnn. List all entries to be deleted (Xnn, Xnn, ...). Entries must be separated by a space.

basic-1

Prefix table number to be associated with this route isdn-24

(NO)

YES

(YES) NO

CPP flag for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route.

An incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route carries the Privacy

Override indicator.

The call is marked as a CPPO call.

An incoming non-ISDN trunk call tandemed to this trunk route carries the Privacy indicator

The call is marked as a CPP call.

cpp-24

The Toll Category Request Supported option is defined for the incoming TOLL CDTI2-

MFS routes. Setting the TCRS to NO means that the CIS TOLL exchange does not support the TOLL Call Category Request cismfs- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 465

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

TDET

TDG

TFD

TGAR

TIDY

TIER

TIMR

Response Comment

MFS signal (B11). The TCRS is prompted only if the MFC is set to the CMFS only for the incoming routes.

(NO) YES x... x

Tone Detector required

Pack/Rel

basic-1

Toll Digits. Where: x = 0-9

Actual digits after the trunk access code which indicate toll calls. Precede with X to remove. If all digits are removed, the digits revert to the North American toll scheme.

Prompted when NATL = NO.

cdr-13

(0) - 3600

0-(1)-31 xxxx yyyy

0-511 aaa xxx

Timed forced disconnect for paging trunks

(30 second increments). TFD must be defined individually for each route.

basic-15

Trunk Group Access Restrictions

Prompted if TKTP = TIE, ISAR = YES, and

ISDN = YES.

basic-12

Trunk Identity.

Where:

• xxxx = PBX Reference Number The xxxx default is LSC as defined in LD 15, combined with route access code truncated to four digits.

• yyyy = Trunk Group Reference Number

The yyyy default is route number truncated to four digits.

Each of the two numbers can be one to four digits. Prompted if Digital Private Network

Signaling System 1 (DPNSS) package 123 equipped and SIGL not DPN.

dass2-16

Tie Reference route number

Determines how incoming TIE or private call types are handled for the associated

Integrated Service Access route or ISA.

Precede with X to delete. Prompted when

TKTP = ISA, IFC = D100 or SL-1 and NSF =

YES.

pra-12

Trunk Timers.

Where: basic-1

466 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• aaa = timer mnemonic

• xxx = timer value in milliseconds unless stated otherwise

Pack/Rel

AAD (384)-2048

Address Acknowledge Delay timer

AAD is the minimum time for the system to delay before sending the address acknowledge signal to the central office.

Inputs are in increments of 128 ms. Allowed only if Japan trunks and Meridian 1 packages are equipped.

ARD 512-(1024)-2048

ANI Request Duration Timer in 256ms increments

ARP 1-(3)-255 jpn-9

Autoguard Repeat Prevention timer

Only valid for Loop start COT. Inputs are in one second increments. International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package

131 and Meridian 1 XPE (XPE) package 203 required. Recommended value for Australia is 200.

ATO 128-(4992)-6528 xpe-18 ani-1 ANI Time-out timer in milliseconds.

For CIS outgoing trunk routes, the

ATO value defines the time delay which follows toll access code outpulsing. During this time delay, further outpulsing is halted until a special card firmware message confirms that the ANI response/ request interaction has been successful.

CRD 0-(512)-639

DDL 0-(70)-511

CO Release Delay timer.

Dial Delay timer

DSI 128-(34944)-499200 basic-18 basic-1

Disconnect Supervision timer

EESD 0-(1024)-4992

End to End Signalling Delay timer.

basic-1 arcl-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 467

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt Response Comment

The outpulsing DTMF tone using EES

(or IEES) is delayed "EESD" ms after the sending of the first recall signal to the

Norstar. If EESD = 0, the timer is not started and the buffered digits do not be outpulsed.

The EESD timer is accepted if

ACRL package 236 is equipped and if the route is analog TIE.

Pack/Rel

EOD 128-(13952)-32640

End-of-Dial timer, non-digitone trunks

For DID incoming calls in the U.S., to comply with FCC regulations, the EOD timer expires at 19,968 ms, even if configured otherwise.

All other call types utilize the configured timer parameters.

Refer to Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106for complete details concerning the FCC Compliance feature.

basic-1

FLH 0-(510)-32640

Hook Flash timer (in msec.)

The range for Centrex Switchhook flash timer is 256-(512)-1536. For CAS, it is recommended that the timer be set at 768 or greater.

This timer must be at least 256 ms shorter than the remote OGF timer and 256 ms shorter than the ICF timer.

thf-20

• 60-89 ms = Digit 1 is sent

• 90 ms = Hard coded for XFCOT hook flash

• 91-255 ms = Digit 1 is sent

• 256-1536 ms = Existing software controlled hook switch flash

Range for Centrex Switchhook flash timer is

60-(510)-1536 msec (the value is rounded to the nearest 10 msec).

Software controlled Centrex/Trunk Switch

Flash timer range of 60- 127 msec is done by sending digit 1.

The range of 128-1536 msec is already controlled by Centrex Switchhook Flash feature.

468 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Firmware flash user can enter any value from 60 to 1536.

FWTM must be YES in LD 14 for the trunk associated with this route, if firmware timing is to be used.

GRD 0-(896)-32640

Guard timer (response disallowed)

Pack/Rel

basic-1

GTI 0-(896)-32640

Incoming Guard timer (ms)

For DTI2 trunk routes, guard timer of 0 may be defined (meaning that timing is not necessary).

An Incoming Guard Timer on the

ISPC SLAVE side (when SMAS = NO) must be set to 0.

xct1-16

GTO 128-(896)-32640

Outgoing Guard timer

ICF 0-(512)-32640

Incoming Flash timer

IENB 2-(5)-10 xct1-16 basic-1

Idle Extension Notification Block timer (in minutes)

Semi-Automatic Camp-On (SACP) package

181 and Network Attendant Services (NAS) package 159 must be equipped.

nas-18

LCT 0-128-32640

Loop Calling detection timer Default for COT trunks = 128

Default for all others trunks = 256 basic-1

LEXT 50-(100)-350

Loop Extender timer (timer is in milliseconds)

The minimum amount of time the Meridian 1 waits to determine whether the tip is ground.

When the time is expired, the loop is closed to outpulsing.

tip-19

MAD 0-(500)-1000

Minimum Answer Delay timer

The minimum amount of time the Meridian 1 remains On-Hook after the called party is xujt-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 469

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt Response Comment

first alerted. Inputs are in steps of 100 ms, numbers are rounded up to next valid entry.

Allowed only if Japan trunks and Meridian 1 packages are equipped.

MFC 128-(12032)-65408

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) timer

MFE 128-(14976)-65408

MFC Interdigit timer

Pack/Rel

mfc-9 mfe-10

MFID (0) - 25088

R2MFC Interworking timer.

This timer is in the range of 0 - 25 seconds, in 128ms increments. A value of 0 indicates that the timer is disabled and existing timing functionality is used.

MFK 128-(4992)-32640

First backward signal awaiting timer basic-23 kd3-20

MFKM 45- (90)-180

Timer value in seconds representing the total amount of time the signal exchange equipment can be occupied in a call expressed in seconds.

MFO (0)-16256

MFC Transmit timer

If 0, then use current value of MFC Timer.

MFR128-(2048)-16256

MFC Reception timer

MFX128-(4096)-16256

MFC Transmission timer kd3-20 kd3-20 kd3-20

NBL 128-(4096)-32640

Enblock Long dialing timer

Long timeout period set to check if all digits have been entered.

NBS 128-(2048)-32640

Enblock Short dialing timer

Short timeout period set to check if all digits have been entered.

basic-12 basic-12

470 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NRAG (30)-240

Comment

Network Ring Again timer or DPNSS duration for T6 and T7 timers, in minutes.

Currently, only 30 minutes is supported.

NRD 128-(10112)-32640

No Ringing Detector change

OBA 2-(120)-510

Outgoing B-Answer timer

Time in seconds to wait for B-answer on outgoing ATL trunks for Sweden.

ODT 256-(4096)-16128

End-of-dial timer for DIGITONE trunks

OGF 0-(512)-32640

Outgoing Flash timer

OOD 1-(3)-3

Pack/Rel

pra-13 basic-1 supp-15 basic-1 basic-1

Optional Outpulsing Delay timer

Allowed for CO, FEX, WATT trunks.

RAS 128-(13952)-32640

Receipt of Answer Signal timer

RGV 128-(640)-1920

Ring Validation timer

Ring Validation timer for Japan Information.

Notification Service set as 256.

RMA 1024-32640

Receipt of Message Acknowledgment

Default = 5120 for SIGL = DPN.

Default = 20480 for SIGL = DAS

RTD 0-(12)-60 basic-1

Tone Detector Response Timer in seconds.

An odd numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number.

ardl-22

SFB 3-(3)-255

Seize Fail Busy timer

This timer controls the time that a trunk is held busy following a seize acknowledge failure or call collision. The recommended value for trunks with seizure supervision is

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 471

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

TITH

TKTP

Response

SRM 1024-(32640)

Service Request Message timer

TFD (0)-3600

Comment

25 seconds. The recommended value for trunks with no seizure supervision is 3 seconds.This value applies to all analog trunks except those which use the ARP timer.

Pack/Rel

Timed Forced Disconnect, in 30 second increments.

TFD applies to CO, DIC, FEX, PAG, TIE and

WATS routes.

basic-15

TTO (128)-7040

Taiwan Time Out value

VGD 0-(6)-31

VNS Guard timer

The time allowed for the trunk call to disconnect in seconds. This is the guard timer on the associated VNS DN.

VSS (0)-1-2-1023

Set Speechpath Timer. Where: twr1-24 vns-20 vns-20

• 0 = Do not answer the bearer channel until the terminating party answers

• 1 = Answer the bearer channel immediately on arrival

• 2-1023 = Answer the bearer channel after the specified seconds (rounded down to 2second multiple) if the terminating party has not already answered.

(0) - 300

ADM

Waiting Time Threshold (seconds).

Prompted only if BDCT = YES and for Start/

Stop RAN machine with STRT = DDL.

Default value zero means no threshold applies.

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23

Trunk Type

You must respond to this prompt when REQ

= NEW.

Add-on Data Module associated with a Data

Interface Card example, DLC, 4PDLC, AILC basic-5

472 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

AWR

CAA

CAM

CBCT

COT

CSA

DIC

DID

FEX

FGDT

IDA

IMUS

ISA

MCU

MUS

PAG

R232

Comment

Not supported on Small System.

Automatic Wake Up trunk block for RAN/

Music

Requires Automatic Wake Up (AWU) package 102.

Common Control Switching Arrangement

Automatic Number Identification data block

Requires Automatic Number Identification

(ANI) package 12.

Central Automatic Message Accounting trunk data block

Call by call master route

Central Office Trunk data block

Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.

Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data block

Dictation trunk data block

Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block

Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.

Foreign Exchange trunk data block

Feature Group D trunk

Integrated Digital Access

Requires Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package 122.

IP Music route data block

Integrated Service Access route or Call-by-

Call route type

For ISDN applications, only TIE or ISA

Trunks can connect a SL-1 directly to another SL-1. Requires Call-by-Call service

(CBC) package 117. Must have ISDN configured in LD 15 and LD 17.

Meridian Communications Unit port

Music trunk data block

Requires Music (MUS) package 44.

Paging trunk data block

DAC for NT7D16 on RS-232 port

Pack/Rel

awu-10 basic-1 basic-1 cbc_pkg-23 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 fgd-17 ida-16 basic-06.50

isl-12 basic-18 mus-1 basic-1 basic-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 473

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt

TOBO

TOV

TRAN

2

3

(0)

1

Response

R422

RAN

RCD

RLM

RLR

TIE

TIE ATL

TIE SEMI

TIE AUTO

TIE TONE

WAT

Comment

DAC for NT7D16 on RS-422 port

Recorded Announcement trunk data block

Requires Recorded Announcement (RAN) package 7.

Emergency Recorder trunk data block

Requires Basic Automatic Call Distribution

(BACD) package 40.

Release Link Main trunk data block

Requires Centralized Attendant Services

(Main) (CASM) package 26.

Release Link Remote trunk data block

Requires Centralized Attendant Services

(Remote) (CASR) package 27.

TIE trunk data block

Supported for ISDN BRI Trunk Access feature.

TIE ATL data block for Sweden

Semi-automatic TIE trunk data block

Automatic TIE trunk data block

Tone TIE trunk data block

Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block

Pack/Rel

basic-18 ran-1 bacd-1 casm-1 casr-1 basic-1 supp-15 opcb-14 opcb-14 opcb-14 basic-18

(NO)

YES

(ASYN)

Toll Operator Break-Out. TOBO is prompted if DTRK = YES, DGTP = DTI2, MFC = YES and OPCB = YES.

OPCA signals received after a toll operator break in operation is ignored.

An OPCA signal received after a toll operator break-in operation has been completed, results in the toll operator being removed from the call.

pedm-18 basic-18 Data Timeout Value

No timeout

15 minutes

30 minutes

60 minutes

Prompted if TKTP = R232, R422 or MCU.

Asynchronous Transmission mode basic-18

474 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TRMB

TRMT

TRO

TRRL

TST

TTA

TTBL

TW_INC_CLID

Response

SYN

Comment

Synchronous Transmission mode

If PSDS = YES, then TRAN must be SYN.

Prompted if TKTP = MCU.

Pack/Rel

(YES)

NO

Tromboning allowed. Incoming call on route can be routed directly back out on the same route.

tat-21

Tromboning denied. Incoming trunk call on route may not be routed directly back out on the same route.

Only applies to calls routed using NARS/

BARS or CDP. Does not apply to calls redirected by HUNT, Forward All Calls, or

Forward No Answer.

(NONE), FAIL, TEST, NPA)

Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit treatment

FAIL = Interrupts the NPD/ID as an ANI failure

TEST = Interrupts the call as a 911 test call

(for 922T calls only)

This prompt appears when the Meridian 911

(M911) package 224 is equipped.

m911-19

(NO) YES Trunk Route Optimization

Prompted if NCRD = YES and IFC = SL-1.

tro-16

(NO)

YES n...n

(NO) YES

(0)-31

Recall signal can be received and transmitted on this route.

Recall signal can be neither received nor transmitted on this route.

TRRL appears if ACRL package 236 is equipped and the route is analog TIE.

arcl-22

Test loop around DN, range is 2 to 10 digits basic-1

Time To Answer output in CDR fcdr-18

Tone Table number

Table (0), North American default values, is created when the first customer is created.

Refer to LD 56 for other tables.

ftc-13

CLID Option on an incoming TWR1 route twr1-24

(NO) YES

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 475

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Prompt Response

TW_ROUTE (NO) YES Taiwan R1 route

Comment

TYPE

ATM

NPID

RDB

SCH

Pack/Rel

twr1-24

Route type

Automatic Trunk Maintenance data block.

Requires Automatic Trunk Maintenance

(ATM) package 84.

Numbering Plan or Information Digit table.

Requires Meridian 911 (M911) package

224.

Route Data Block.

ATM Schedule block. Requires Automatic

Trunk Maintenance (ATM) package 84.

atm-19

V25 (NO) YES

VRAT

VTRK

WAIT

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(RGB)

MUS

V.25 bis option for synchronous operation

Prompted if TKTP = MCU and TRAN =

SYN.

Answer an attendant extended call over

VNS immediately on the incoming bearer trunk basic-18 vns-20

Virtual Trunk route

YES = Supports IP Peer facilities

For CS 1000S system basic-2.0

Provide ringback for calls queueing for RAN trunk.

ranbrd- 23 ran- 23 mus- 23 Provide music for calls queueing for RAN trunk.

Prompted only for RAN route when RAN broadcast package is equipped.

WATR

WDGT

0-511

(L) F

Wide Area Telephone Service or WATS

Reference route number

Determines how incoming WATS call types are handled for the associated Integrated

Service Access route or ISA. Precede with X to delete.

Prompted when TKTP = ISA, IFC = D250 or

SL-1 and NSF = YES.

pra-14

First or last 4 DNIS digits to be sent on APL and HSL link.

WDGT has no effect on AML links. All DNIS digits is sent for AML.

dnis-20

476 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

XTDT

ZONE

Response Comment

Prompted if NDGT is greater than 4. Also used for CDR when the New Format CDR

(FCDR) package 234 is disabled.

0-7

0-255 0–

8000

Pack/Rel

Extended Tone Detector Table number

If a table other than 0 is entered, it must have already been configured in LD 97. Must be the same value as defined in LD 13.

Prompted with Meridian 1 Superloop

Administration (XCT1) package 205.

xct1-16

Zone for codec selection and bandwidth management

For CS 1000S system basic-7.00

basic-2.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 477

LD 16: Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance

478 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 16: LD 17: Configuration Record 1

SyMWIstem configuration defines system hardware and software parameters. Overlay program 17 is used to modify the following:

• password options

• interface and transmission mode

• common equipment

• overlay automatic maintenance routines

• value added server configuration

• transmission parameters of Meridian Modular / Aries Telephone

• alarm filter

When the Overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header as follows:

CFN000 MEM AVAIL: (U/P): xxxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxxxx DISK RECS AVAIL: xxx DCH

AVAIL: XX USED: XX TOT: 64 AML AVAIL: XX USED: XX TOT: 16

Notes on ISDN configuration

ISDN configuration can be changed by adding the primary D-channel followed by the optional backup D-channel. Be sure to observe the following:

• Primary and back-up D-channels must be on the same card type (DCHI or MSDL)

• Primary D-channel parameters are automatically copied to the back-up D-channel.

• Disable both ends of a D-channel before making any changes to the D-channel.

• Changes to the D-channel pair can be made to the primary D-channel first (except for

BCHL and RCVP).

• The backup D-channel must be removed prior to removing the primary D-channel.

• When a backup D-channel is configured for a primary D-channel, the USR of the primary can be changed from SHA to ISLD or PRI, but not from ISLD to PRI or SHA.

• The ADAN DCH MOVE command allows the primary D-channels to move to a new logical number (NDCH), card type (CTYP), device number (DNUM), and port designation

(PORT) when adding MSDL cards. You do not need to remove any D-channels or Bchannels when using this command with MSDL cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 479

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

D-Channel Expansion

The D-channel Expansion feature increases the total number of possible D-channels in a multiple group Meridian 1 system. The number of physical I/O addresses permitted for Dchannel application to 16 for each network group. For each MSDL physical I/O address, up to four ports are available for D-channel use. With the D-channel Expansion feature, the software supports up to 255 D-channels.

For more information on the D-channel Expansion feature, refer to the Networking Features

and Services Fundamentals, 553-2901-301.

Prompts and responses

Configuration record 1

Prompt Response

REQ:

TYPE:

ADAN

PWD

CHG

CFN

Change

Configuration Record

Comment

aaa bbb x Action Device And Number (aaa = NEW, CHG, MOV or OUT ;

bbb = I/O device type ; x = port number) (see Gate Opener:

ADAN (Action Device and Number)

on page 481)

(NO) YES

Change Password options (see Gate Opener: PWD

(Password) on page 495)

PARM

CEQU

OVLY

VAS

(NO) YES

Parameters for Interface and transmission mode (see Gate

Opener: PARM (System Parameters)

on page 491)

(NO) YES

Change to Common Equipment (see Gate Opener: CEQU

(Common Equipment)

on page 488)

(NO) YES Overlay (see

Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay) on page 491)

(NO) YES

Value added server configuration (see Gate Opener: VAS

(Value Added Server) on page 496)

ATRN

ALARM

(NO) YES Change Transmission Parameters of MeridianModular / Aries

Telephone (see Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)

on page 488)

(NO) YES Change Alarm Filter (see

ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and

Values on page 498)

480 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

ESA (NO) YES

Comment

Change Emergency Services Access Settings (see

Gate

Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)

on page 490

Gate Opener: ADAN (Action Device and Number)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

- ADAN

TTY_TYPE

CAB

CAB_TYPE

- NUMD

- FTYP

- SIZE

- PDCH

- TTY

- -IPMG

- CTYP

- GRP

Response

CHG

ADAN aaa bbb xx a...a

x a...a

1-(2) aa

(0)-65534

0-63

0-15 supl sh a...a

x

Comment

Request

Action Device And Number

Add, change, move or out an I/O device where:

• aaa = NEW/CHG/MOV/OUT

• bbb = I/O device type AML, BDCH, DCH, HST, PRT,

TRF, TTY

• x = port number 0-15 (for PRT or TTY)

TTY logical type for Small System or Media Gateway

1000S (MG 1000S), where a...a is:

(SDI), LSL, or PTY

Cabinet number for Small System or MG 1000S, where x is:

(0), 1, 2,3 or 4

Cabinet Type, where a...a is:

• IP = IP (Intelligent Peripheral) Expansion Cabinet or

MG 1000S

• FIBR = Fiber Expansion Cabinet

Number of floppy disk drives

Floppy Type (aa = (3), 3S, or 5)

Size of History File buffer in characters

Primary D-channel associated with a backup Dchannel

Pre-defined MSDL-SDI terminal number

The IPMG on which the TTY is being configured, superloop and shelf

Card Type (CTYP responses can be found on )

Network group number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 481

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt

- CDNO xx

Response

- DNUM 0-15

- ADMIN_PORT 0

- LANGUAGE ENGLISH

- ADDITIONAL_PORT aa

- PORT 0-15

- DES

- BPS

- PARY

- STOP

- BITL d...d

xxxxx aaaa

(1)-1x5-2 x

Comment

Card number (Small System or MG 1000S)

Device number for I/O ports

Administration Terminal Port number

English Language supported on STA

Additional Port for the Single Terminal Access (aa =

P1, P2, or P3)

Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT)

Designator

Bits Per Second

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system. For example, BPS

9600.

Parity type (aaaa = (NONE) ODD, or EVEN)

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current PARY configuration on the system. For example, PARY

NONE.

Number of Stop bits (To configure value of 1.5, enter

1x5)

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP

1.

Data Bit Length (aaa = (5), 6, 7, or 8)

482 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- FLOW

- FLOW_TYPE

- -BCST

- PARM

- FUNC

- USER

- XSM

- TTYLOG

BANR

- CUST

- SSUP

- - APRT

Response

(NO) YES a...a

(NO) YES aaaa bbb aaa a...a

(NO) YES

0-65534

(YES) NO xx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BITL configuration on the system. For example, BITL 8.

Flow Control

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current FLOW configuration on the system. For example, FLOW

NO.

Flow control type for Small System or CS 1000S.

Where a...a is:

NONE, XON, MAIL, or HWR)

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current

FLOW_TYPE configuration on the system. For example, FLOW_TYPE NONE.

Broadcast ports affected by Flow Control

Parameters for Interface and transmission mode

(aaaa = R232 or R422 ; bbb = DCE or DTE)

MSDL card function (aaa = ABC, FCL, MOD, LME, or

SCN)

Output message types (USER responses begin on )

Extended System Monitor

Log buffer size

Optional Security Banner option

Customer number associated with this function

Senior Supervisor

ACD Printer

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 483

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

- STOP

- DPNS

- MWIF

- USR

- IFC

Prompt

H323

- OVLR

- OVLS

OVLT

Response

(1)-1x5-2

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa a...a

YES

YES

0-(1)-8

Comment

Number of Stop bits (to configure value of 1.5, enter

1x5)

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP

1.

Digital Private Network Signaling

Message Waiting Interface (aaaa = (STD) or ISDM)

User (aaaa = ISLD, PRI, SHA, SHAV, or VNS)

Interface type for D-channel (IFC responses can be found on BAD LINK "TYPE")

Indicates overlap signaling prompts for H.323

Overlap Receiving

Overlap Sending

Overlap Timer (in seconds) The timer controls the interval between the sending of INFORMATION messages. Defaults to 1 for D-channel over IP.

- - BSRV

- - BSRC

- -CNTY

CLID

PROG

CO_TYPE

- RCVP

- - ISLM

(NO) YES

1- (2) - 4

- - PINX_CUST 0-99

- - ISDN_MCNT 60-(300)-350

Note:

OVLT applies only to Overlap Sending (OVLS =

YES).

B channel Service messaging.

B channel Service Re-transmission Counter.

This customer number is used for the DN address translation associated with call independent connection messages received on this D-channel.

Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.

aaaa

OPTx a..a

aaa

Country (CNTY responses can be found on Country)

Calling Line Identification (x= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5)

Progress signal (a..a = NCHG, MALE, or MCON)

Central Office switch type (aaa = (STD) or ATT)

(NO) YES Recovery to Primary

0-(1792)-4000 Integrated Services Signaling Link Maximum.

484 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- PARM

- CLOK

- SIDE

- SEMT

- CNEG

- RLS

- QCHID

Prompt

- - SSRC

- - VNSM

- - VNSC

- - VNSP

- - VCNA

- - VCRD

- - VTRO

- - VSIG

- - DCHL

- BCHL

- PRI

- PRI2

- OTBF

- DRAT

- BPS aaaa bbb aaa aaa

(1)-5 x xx

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-255

0-254 loop x

0-255 2-15

1-(32)-127 aaa xxxxx

Response

0-(3700)

0-300

(0)-xx

0-32700

(NO) YES

Comment

Signaling Server Resource Capacity

Virtual Network Services Maximum

Virtual Network Services Customer number associated with the D-channel

Virtual Network Services Private Network Identifier

Virtual Network Services Network Call Party Name

Display available over this D-channel

Virtual Network Services Network Call Redirection available over this D-channel

Trunk Route Optimization before answer available over this D-channel for VNS

Virtual Network Services Network Signalling option

D-Channel PRI loop number

PRI loop number for Backup D-channel

Primary Rate Interface

Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence

Output request Buffers

D-channel transmission Rate (aaa = (56K), 64KC, or

64KI)

Bits Per Second

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system. For example, BPS

9600.

Parameters for Interface and transmission mode

(aaaa = R232 or R422 ; bbb = DCE or DTE)

Clock (aaa = EXT or INT)

Meridian 1 node type (aaa = (USR) or NET)

Number of Status Enquiry Messages sent within 128 ms from the network side

Channel Negotiation option (x = (1) or 2)

Release ID of the switch at the far end of the D-channel

Map channel number to timeslots on a PRI2 loop

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 485

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt

- RCAP

- - MWTO

- - MWRT

- - MQC_FEAT aaaa

- - PR_RTN (NO) YES

- - PR_TRIGS aaa xx

- OVLR (NO) YES

- - DIDD

- OVLS

- - OVLT

- MBGA

- NASA

- TIMR

- - T310

- - INC_T306

- - OUT_T306

- LAPD

- - T23

- - T200

- - N200

Response

a...a

(15) - 30

0 - (2) - 15

(0)-15

(NO) YES

(0)-8

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

10-(30)-60

110-(120)

0-(2)-240

0-(30)-240

(NO) YES

1-(20)-31

2-(3)-40

1-(3)-8

Comment

Remote Capabilities (see RCAP options in

Alphabetical list of prompts on page 500)

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either

QMWI or QMWO. The value entered (in seconds) is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, callindependent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL PROCEEDING message.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either

QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.

MCDN QSIG Feature type

Retain option supported by the far end PINX

Path Replacement Triggers

Overlap Receiving

DID Delete

Overlap Sending

Overlap Timer, in seconds

Multilocation Business Group Allowed

Network Attendant Service Allowed

Change protocol timer value

Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state

Timer range for PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks

Variable timer for received disconnect message on incoming calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network

Variable timer for received disconnect message on outgoing calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network (entered in 2 second increments)

Link Access Protocol for D-channel Change LAPD parameters

Interface guard Timer or DCHI only

Retransmission Timer

Maximum Number of retransmissions

486 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- RADR

- LCTL

- - T1

- - T2

- - T3

- - N1

- - N2

- - K

- LTHR

- - RXMT

- - CRC

- - ORUR

- - ABOR

- ENL

- DPNS

- DCHI

- CDNO

- PORT

Prompt

- - N201

- - T203

- - K

- - N2X4

- IADR

4-(8)-16

1-(7)

(NO) YES

1-(5)-20

1-(10)-20

1-(5)-255

1-(5)-255

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

0-15

1-9 xx

Response

4-(260)

2-(10)-40

1-(7)-32

0-(10)-20

0-(3)-255

0-(1)-255

(NO) YES

2-(4)-20

0-(10)-255

2-(5)-255 xxx

Comment

Maximum Number of octets in information element

Maximum Time allowed without frames being exchanged

Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames

Maximum Number of status inquires when remote is busy only applies to 1TR6

Individual Address for the data link level HDLC protocol

Remote Address for the data link level HDLC protocol

Change Link Control system parameters

Retransmission Timer. Range in units of 0.5 seconds,

(4) = two seconds

Maximum Time allowed without a frame being exchanged

Timer for initial link setup in units of 0.5 seconds for

ESDI only

Maximum Number of octets per HDLC information frame (xxx = 32, 64, 128, or (512))

Maximum Number of retransmissions in steps of 1

Maximum number of outstanding frames

Link Threshold. Change link performance thresholds for ESDI only

Retransmission Threshold

CRC threshold

Overrun/Underruns out-of-service threshold

Number of Aborts before an out-of-service

Enl / Dis error messages (Small System or MG 1000S)

Digital Private Network Signaling

D-channel Interface port number

Card Number where DCHI resides (Small System or

MG 1000S)

Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 487

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Gate Opener: ATRN (Aries Transmission)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

- CODE

- SOLR

- ROLR

- AOLR

- TOLR

- AGCD

- VOLR

- HRLR

- HTLR

Response

CHG

ATRN

(0)-2

0-(1)-4

(0)-63

(0)-12 32-50

(0)-63

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-8, 32-40

(0)-11, 32-54

Comment

Request

Aries Transmission

CODEC Coding Law

Sidetone Objective Loudness Rating

Receive Objective Loudness Rating

2216 ACD set Objective Loudness Rating

Transmit Objective Loudness Rating

Automatic Gain Control Disabled

Volume Reset

Handsfree Receive Objective Loudness Rating

Handsfree Transmit Objective Loudness Rating

Gate Opener: CEQU (Common Equipment)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

- MPED

- TERM

- REMO

- TERD

- REMD

- TERQ

- REMQ

- DDCS a...a

a...a

a...a

a...a

Response

CHG

CEQU aa a...a

a...a

0-159

Comment

Request

Change to Common Equipment parameters

Maximum Peripheral Equipment Density (aa = (SD),

DD, 4D, or 8D)

Single Density Terminal equipment loop or loops

Single Density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops

Double Density Terminal equipment loop or loops

Double Density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops

Quadruple Density Terminal equipment loop or loops

Quadruple density Remote Peripheral Equipment loop or loops

Loop number for DPNSS/DASS hardware

488 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- DTCS

- XCT

- MGTDS

- MGCONF

- IPMG

- TDS

- CONF

- MFSD

- DTDT

- - CODE

- - TN

- DLOP

- MG_CARD

- MODE

- - TMDI

- - LCMT

- - YALM

- - TITE

- - TRSH

- - DTIC

- PRI2

- APVL

- DTI2

- JDMI

- EXT0

- - CNI

Response

1-159 a...a

aaa bbb

Comment

Digital Trunk Channel Switches

Extended Conference/TDS/MFS

Configuring 2 Media Gateway TDS loops simultaneously.

aaa bbb ccc ddd Configuring up to 4 Media Gateway conference loops simultaneously.

supl sh Superloop and shelf of IPMG on which the MGTDS is associated.

a...a

a...a

0, 2, 4...255

aaa x xx xx xx l s c u

Tone and Digit Switch

Conference loop

Multifrequency Sender loop

Dial Tone Detector Test (aaa = NO, TDS, or EXT) lll dd ff

Code (CODE response is defined on x xx xx xx)

Valid Terminal Number that when accessed returns a test tone

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll = loop number

0 - 255, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)

MG card assigned to superloop supl sh card aaaa

(YES) NO aaa aaa

(0) 2

0-15

0, 4, 8,...254

0-255

0-159

Mode of operation (aaaa = LINK, PRI, or TRK)

TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK)

Line Coding Method (aaa = (B8S) or AMI)

Yellow Alarm Method (aaa = (FDL) or DG2)

T1 transmit Equalization

Threshold

Starting network loop slot for PRI/DTI card

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface or PRI loop number

0-255

0-255 x aaa bbb s p g

Analog Private Virtual Loop for virtual TN or channel

ID

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface or DTI loop number

Japan Digital Multiplexer Interface loop number

Extenders for CPU 0 to Network (EXT0 ranges are defined on x aaa bbb)

Core to Network Interface card location To delete use: s p xg

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 489

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt

- EXT1

- - CNI

- SYNM

- - MSDT

- - SSDT

- SMEM

- PFTR

- VXCT

Response

x aaa bbb s p g

(0)-5

0-159

0-159

(NO) YES

YES NO lll

Comment

Extenders for CPU 1 to Network (EXT1 ranges are defined on x aaa bbb)

Core to Network Interface card location To delete use: s p xg

Synchronization Mode

Main Synchronization DTSL

Standby Synchronization DTSL

Short Memory test

Prioritize Fast Transfer feature enabled or disabled

Virtual XCT loop number

Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)

Table 4: Gate Opener: ESA (Emergency Services Access)

REQ

TYPE

LIS

Prompt

SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP

DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT 5-(180)-1440

DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE

EX_DM_UPDT_TIMEOUT

CHG

ESA

Response

(NONE) INT or SUB EXT or

DM

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

5-(15)-1440 0

Comment

Change

Emergency Services Access gate opener.

The Location Information

Service to use:

• NONE

• INTERNAL LIS

• EXTERNAL DM

Look up the IP address of an

IP Phone behind NAT.

The period in minutes before a dynamic ELIN mapping is timed out.

Reuse the oldest ELIN.

Timeout in minutes before an unconnected External DM causes an alarm. No alarm is generated.

490 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Gate Opener: OVLY (Overlay)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

- SID

- BKGD

- FR44

- PBXH

- TODR

- DROL

- MID_SCPU

- TRLL

- CY45

Response

CHG

OVLY xxxx xx xx

1-4

00-23

0-23 xx xx

(NO) YES

1-31 1-31

(0)-31

- MULTI_USER (OFF) ON

Comment

Request

Change Overlay area options

System ID number

Background Overlay task

Frequency control of Overlay 44 in background

Hour to perform Message Waiting lamp maintenance

Time of Daily Routines

Daily Routine Overlays

Midnight Switch Cores Allow or deny Midnight Switch

Cores, where: Deny causes the system to perform the

3PE test during the Midnight routine instead of switching CPUs. Allow causes the system to switch

CPUs during the Midnight routine instead of performing the 3PE test.

Note:

Applicable to CPP systems only.

Test RPE Local Loop back

Cycles LD 45 can be run whenever a fault is detected

Multi-User Log In

Gate Opener: PARM (System Parameters)

The following values can be set at the factory. However, it is recommended that these values be reviewed during initial system installation.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

- LPIB

Response

CHG

PARM

96-7500

Comment

Request

Change system parameters

Low-Priority Input Buffers (range depends on system type)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 491

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

- NCR

- MGCR

- CSQI

- CSQO

- TUBO

- AXQI

- AXQO

- TRNS

Prompt

- RCAP

- HPIB

- 500B

- SL1B

- RPEB

- DTIB

- DTOB

- NCPU

- CFWS

- PCML

- ALRM

- ERRM

- DTRB

- ABCD

- TMRK

- FCDR x

(NO) YES aa

(NO) YES aaa xxx

(NO) YES xxx

Response

a...a

96-7500

16-5000

16-2048

16-1000

(35)-1000

(4)-100 x...x

0-NCR

(20)-255

(20)-255

(NO) YES

(20)-255

(20)-255 aaaa aaa

Comment

Remote Capabilities (See RCAP options in

Alphabetical list of prompts on page 500)

High-Priority Input Buffers (range depends on system type)

Output buffers for single line and digital telephones, and trunks (range depends on system type)

SL-1 Buffers

Remote Peripheral Equipment Buffers, 2.0 Mb/s RPE

Digital Trunk Input Buffers

Digital Trunk Output Buffers per Digital Trunk

Signaling Link

Number of Call Registers, range depends on system type

Maximum number of Call Registers used by AUX messaging

Maximum number of Call Registers for CSL input queues

Maximum number of Call Registers for CSL/AML output queues

Double message processing speed on AML

Size of Auxiliary Input Queue

Size of Auxiliary Output Queue

Selects which messages are going to be translated

(aaaa = (NONE), HELP, or BOTH)

Number of CPUs (x = 1 or (2))

Call Forward Saved on SYSLOAD

Pulse Code Modulation Companding Law (aa = (MU) or A)

Minor Alarm displayed on attendant consoles

Error Messages (aaa = ERR, BUG, or AUD)

Digitone Burst time in ms (xxx = 50, 60, 70, or (100))

16-tone DTMF operation enabled

Length of cadence increments in ms (xxx = 96 or

(128))

Format for Call Detail Recording (aaa = (OLD) or

NEW)

492 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- DCUS

- MSCL

- PMSI

- - MANU

- - PMCR

- - PORT

- - XTMR

- - XNUM

- - PMIN

- - PTMR

- NDIS

Prompt

- PCDR

- TPO

- TSO

- CLID

- DUR5

- MLDN

- NDRG

- MARP

- IPIE

- FRPT

0-5

0-8191

(NO) YES aaaa a

0-15

(0)-6

(1)-4

(NO) YES

(0)-31

(20)-255

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(NO) YES aaaa

Priority to CDR

Traffic Period Option

Trunk Seizure Option

Comment

Calling Line ID in the CDR

Duration 0.5

Multiple Loop DN

New Distinctive Ringing

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime feature allowed

Enhanced Unsolicited Status Message (USM) IE

(Deny) or allow Access to incoming calls by FRE station (aaaa = (NEFR) or OLFR)

Maximum number of ACD-ADS customers

Maximum Speed Call Lists

Modify Property Management Systems parameters

PMS interface (aaaa = (PMS1), PMS2, or PMS3)

Number of Call Registers used for PMSI

Port number (PORT system/card ranges can be found at PORT).

PMS acknowledgment time

Number of retransmissions per message for PMSI

Minor alarm when the PMSI link is not responding

Polling timer for PMSI

Number of Display messages for Background

Terminal

Support the Original Carrier Access Code format

Message Registration or Periodic Pulse Metering (aaa

= (MR) or PPM)

- OCAC

- MTRO

(NO) YES aaa

-

SBA_ADM_INS

0-(2)-63

- SBA_USER

- BCAP

0-(100)-500 a...a

Maximum Administrator and/or Installer Log Ins allowed at one time

Maximum User Log Ins allowed at one time

Bearer Capability (a...a = SPEE or 31KH)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 493

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt

- NORTEL_BRAND

Response

YES NO

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

- MODIFY (NO) YES

Comment

"NORTEL" Electronic Brandlining is displayed.

Current customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is for information only

Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text

Broadcast Configuration

Note:

MODIFY prompt is available to ADMIN2 user only.

- SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY

(YES) NO

- - IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

- OK (YES) NO

- -IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh

Change customized text string by text string input

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

- OK (YES) NO

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

- MODIFY (NO) YES

- PWD2 x...x

- SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY

(YES) NO

- - IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

Enter customized text string by text string input

This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt

Confirm customized text string

Change customized text string character by character, where: xx = (01 to 24) c = one supported character hh = 2 hexadecimal digits representing a supported character

DLE_DISP_CHAR customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt

Confirm customized text string

Current customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is for information only

Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text

Broadcast Configuration

Password 2

Change customized text string by text string input

Enter customized text string by text string input

This is infromation only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt

494 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- OK

Prompt Response

(YES) NO

- - IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

- OK

- MSEC

- MSSD

- NKEY

- TKEY

- DLAC

Comment

Confirm customized text string

Change customized text string character by character, where: xx = (01 to 24) c = one supported character hh = 2 hexidecimal digits representing a supported character

IDLE_DISP_CHAR customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. Displayed for confirmation with the following OK prompt

(YES) NO

(ON) OFF

Confirm customized text string

Enable Media Security for the system. Disable Media

Security. The device level settings are not effective when this option is set for the system.

(MSNV), MSBT Media Security System Default (Never) or Best Effort.

Changing this parameter affects all TNs that have the

CLS MSSD.

1-(31) Number of packets that can be secured by the same master KEY.

8-(24)-168

(NO) YES

Time in hours for session KEY.

Change Call Log Option, where:

YES - Log all calls

NO - Log unanswered calls

Gate Opener: PWD (Password)

The PWD2 prompt appears immediately following the TYPE = PWD entry, unless the LAPW password Multi User Login are enabled. To view LAPW prompts, LAPW package 149 must be equipped. LAPW users can change their passwords by entering the current password at prompt LPWD and entering the new password at the NLPW prompt.

REQ:

Prompt

TYPE:

PWD2

PSWD_COMP

FPC

Response

CHG

PWD a...a

(OFF) ON

(NO) YES

Change

Configuration Record

Comment

Enter valid password

Turns on or off the password complexity check for the

ADMIN, LAPW and PDT passwords.

Force Password Change

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 495

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt

LOUT

FLTH

LOCK

Response

1-(20)-1440

0-(3)-9

0-(60)-270

FLTA

AUDT

- SIZE

LLID

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(50)-1500

(NO) YES

ACCOUNT_REQ aaa

PWD_TYPE aaa

- PWTP

USER_NAME

PASSWORD

CONFIRM

PDT

OVLA

LEVL

CUST

HOST

MAT

OPT

(OVLY)

SBA a...a

a...a

a...a

(NO)

PDT1/PDT2 xx xx ... xx aaaa aaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

Comment

Logout, Inactive Session Logout Time in minutes

Failed Login Threshold

Lockout time

Failed Log In Threshold Alarm

Audit Trail for password usage

Word Size of Audit Trail buffer

Last Log In Identification

Account Request, where: aaa = (END), NEW, CHG, or OUT

Specifies the user type being added to the system, where: aaa = PWD2, PWD1, LAPW

Type of LAPW account, where: (Overlay) Password

Access Type

Set-Based Administration Password Access Type

Unique user name - up to 11 characters

Password for validating the users credentials on login, 4 to 16 characters

Confirm the typed in password

PDT access. This prompt is available only when adding or modifying LAPW, Level 1 (PWD1) and

Level 2 (PWD2) users.

Overlays Allowed

Access Level for Set Based Administration password, where; aaaa = (INST) or ADMN

Customer to be accessible by way of PWnn

Enable HOST mode Log In for password PWnn

Enable MAT Log In for password PWnn

Options for password PWnn

Gate Opener: VAS (Value Added Server)

REQ:

Prompt Response

CHG Request

Comment

496 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

TYPE:

VAS

- VSID

- DLOP

- ELAN

Prompt

- AML

- - SECU

- - INTL

- - MCNT

- - CONF

- APPL

- -CUST

- - DATA_CORRECT

- - AUTO_AUDIT

- - SATN

- - IDLP

- DLOP

- CMS

- - SECU

- - INTL

- - MCNT

- - CONF

- - SATN

- - IDLP

Prompts and responses

Response

VAS aaa

Comment

Value Added Server configuration

Value Added Server data block (aaa = NEW, CHG or OUT)

VAS Identifier 0-127 lll dd ff ...

x

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll = loop number, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)

Associate Value Added Server ID (VSID) x with

Application Module Link over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) x

0-15 Application Module Link

(NO) YES Security for Meridian Link applications

1-12

10-9999

Interval for checking Meridian Link for overload in five second increments

Threshold for number of Meridian Link messages per time interval aaa CSL Configuration (aaa = DIR or IND) aaa VMBA Application (aaa = NEW, CHG, or OUT; VMBA =

Voice Mailbox administration) xx Customer number

(OFF) ON Enable Voice Mailbox Database correction

(ON) OFF Enable the Automatic Voice Mailbox database audit ls c u SADM/Data Line Card TN

0-254 lll dd ff ...

DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops (lll= loop number, dd = number of voice or data calls, ff = frame format)

0-15 ESDI port number used for the CSL

(NO) YES Security for Meridian Link applications

1-12

10-9999

Interval

Message Count Threshold aaa ls c u

0-254

CSL Configuration (aaa = DIR or IND)

SADM/Data Line Card TN

IND DTI Loop

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 497

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

25

26

11

12

13

14

9

10

7

8

5

6

3

4

Offset ROLR/AOLR

0 +45.00

1

2

+45.85

+46.70

+47.55

+48.40

+49.25

+50.10

+50.95

+51.80

+52.65

+53.50

+54.35

+55.20

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

-39.50

-39.50

-38.50

-38.50

-38.00

-38.00

-37.00

-37.00

-36.50

-36.00

-35.50

-35.50

-42.50

-42.00

-41.50

-41.50

-41.00

-40.50

-40.00

-40.00

TOLR

-45.00

-44.50

-44.50

-44.00

-43.50

-43.00

-43.00

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

58

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

Offset ROLR/AOLR

32 +45.00

33

34

+44.15

+43.30

35

36

37

38

+42.45

+41.60

+40.75

+39.90

+39.05

+38.20

+37.35

+36.50

+35.65

+34.80

+33.95

+33.10

+32.25

+31.40

+30.55

+29.70

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

-50.50

-51.00

-51.50

-52.00

-52.00

-52.50

-53.00

-53.50

-54.00

-54.00

-54.50

-55.00

-47.50

-48.00

-48.50

-49.00

-49.00

-49.50

-50.00

-50.50

TOLR

-45.00

-45.50

-46.00

-46.00

-46.50

-47.00

-47.50

498 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Offset ROLR/AOLR

27 N.A.

28

29

N.A.

N.A.

30

31

N.A.

N.A.

TOLR

-35.00

-34.50

-34.00

-34.00

-33.50

Note:

ROLR values are for reset volume.

HRLR / HTLR Offsets and Values

Offset ROLR/AOLR

59 N.A.

60

61

N.A.

N.A.

62

63

N.A.

N.A.

TOLR

-55.00

-55.50

-56.00

-56.50

-56.50

HRLR / HTLR Offsets and Values

+47.10

+47.95

+48.80

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HRLR

+42.00

+42.85

+43.70

+44.55

+45.40

+46.25

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

17

Offset

0

1

4

5

2

3

-42.00

-41.50

-41.00

-40.50

-40.50

-40.00

N.A.

N.A.

HTLR

-44.00

-43.50

-43.50

-43.00

-42.50

-42.00

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

48

49

Offset

32

33

34

35

36

37

+36.90

+36.05

+35.20

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HRLR

+42.00

+41.15

+40.30

+39.45

+38.60

+37.75

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

-46.50

-46.50

-47.00

-47.50

-48.00

-48.00

-48.50

-49.00

HTLR

-44.00

-44.50

-45.00

-45.00

-45.50

-46.00

-49.50

-49.50

-50.00

-50.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 499

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

29

30

31

25

26

27

28

Offset

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HRLR

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HTLR

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

61

62

63

57

58

59

60

Offset

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HRLR

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

HTLR

-51.00

-51.00

-51.50

-52.00

-52.50

N.A.

N.A.

Note:

All values are OLR ratings measured without inserted loss/gain for trunk card interfaces and computed per IEEE methods. Receive ratings are at a maximum volume. Transmit ratings are measured in an anechoic environment with less than 25 dBA room noise.

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

500B 16-2048

Comment

Output buffers for single line and digital telephones, and trunks Buffers for single line telephones, trunks and Digital telephones

Small System has a value of 500 allocated by the system and cannot be changed.

These can be set higher but have no affect on the system operation other than consuming memory.

Refer to the Memory Calculations Appendix in the Planning and engineering NTPs.

Pack/Rel

basic-19

ABCD (NO) YES 16-tone DTMF operation enabled abcd-14

500 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

<CR>

Comment

Original value is left unchanged

ABOR 1-(5)-255 Number of aborts before an out-of-service.

Enter in units of 1, the number of aborts in

15 minutes before an out-of-service is enforced.

csl-7

Pack/Rel

ACCOUNT REQ

ADAN aaa Account Request, where aaa is:

(END) Exit overlay program

NEW Add a new user

CHG Change existing user

OUT Remove a user basic-4.50

Action Device And Number

NEW aaa x Add I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port

CHG aaa x Change I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port

MOV aaa x Move I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port

OUT aaa x Remove I/O device. Where: aaa = type, x = port

Where, aaa and x can be any of the following: basic-19

• AML 0-15 = Application Module Link

• BDCH 0-63 = Backup primary D-channel

• DCH 0-79 = primary D-channel

• FDK 0 = Floppy Disk unit, only ADAN CHG

HDK allowed (not applicable for Small

System, Option 81C or CS 1000S)

• ELAN 16-31 = Application Module Link over Ethernet

• HDK 0 = Hard Disk unit, only ADAN CHG

HDK allowed (not applicable for Options

11C or 81C)

• HST = History file

• PRT 0-15 = Printer port number

• STA 0-15 = Single Terminal Access port number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 501

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

• TRF = Traffic Log file

• TTY 0-15 = Teletype port number

Pack/Rel

Note:

You cannot configure more than 16 TTY and HST files. If a HST file is one of 16

TTY files configured and a new TTY is defined, the HST file is deleted because the TTY has higher priority than HST.

The MOV command is not supported for

AML, BDCH, HST, PRT, or TTY.

MOV command not supported for moving

MSDL D-channels and PRI D-channels due to complexity of restrictions and the risk of data corruption if restrictions not adhered to.

Limited usefulness.

Changes to I/O devices are saved before

ADAN is reprompted. To indicate the data has been saved, one of the following is output: basic-25.4

• ADAN DATA SAVED

• ADAN DATA CHGED

• ADAN DATA REMOVED

• ADAN DATA MOVED

Entering 4 asterisks (****) after the ADAN prompt saves the changes and exits the overlay.

Where aaa is the primary D-channel and

• x = 0-254 for multi-group systems

• x = 0-63 for single-group systems

• x = 0-79 for Small System and CS 1000S basic-25

ADDITIONAL_PORT

P1 P2 P3 Additional port number for STA terminal

This is the port for the Single Terminal

Access regular terminal, or the STA system monitor connection. This prompt repeats until <CR> is entered. There can be up to 3 ports for each STA application. Precede with

X to delete the port.

sta-19

502 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADMIN_PORT

0

Comment

This is the port used to connect the Single

Terminal Access Administration Port. This must be 0 (zero).

Prompted if ADAN = STA

A_FILTER

NEW

CHG

OUT

Add New Alarm Filter entry

Change an Alarm Filter entry

Remove an Alarm Filter entry

This is reprompted for subsequent Alarm

Filters. Up to 50 Alarm Filters can be configured. Entering <CR> moves on to the

E_FILTER prompt. Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

sta-19 alarm-19

AF_STATUS

(OFF) ON

AGCD

ALARM

ALRM

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES alarm-19

This prompt enables (disables) the alarm and exception filtering. <CR> retains the current filtering status

Automatic Gain Control Disabled

Change Alarm filters

Must have Alarm Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package 243.

alarm-19

Minor Alarm displayed on attendant consoles.

(NO) disables the minor alarm on consoles.

alarm-12

AML

AOLR

APPL

0-15 Application Module Link msdl-18

(0)-12 32-50 2216 ACD set Objective Loudness Rating

The default value for the AOLR prompt is the same default value as for ROLR prompt.

ee ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and

Values

on page 498to determine the decibel level which corresponds to your response to

AOLR.

basic-22

Application

This prompt allows the user to add, change, or remove an application associated with the vmba-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 503

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

VAS ID. The APPL prompt appears when

VAS = NEW or CHG.

NEW VMBA

Add Voice Mailbox

CHG VMBA

Change Voice Mailbox

OUT VMBA

ISAP

Pack/Rel

Remove Voice Mailbox

User application type: Meridian Link ISDN/

AP iap3p-13

APRT (NO) YES

APVL l c c c

ACD printer

APRT cannot be YES if prompt SSUP =

YES.

acdc-1

Analog Private Virtual Loop for virtual TN or channel ID

For Large System dpnss-16 l = 0-159

For CS 1000E System basic-4.00

i = 0, 4, 8-252

For Option 11C c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For Option 11C Chassis lse-24 c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

For CS 1000S system basic-1 c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

Format for MG 1000B Chassis basic-4.00

c = 0-4, 7-10

Format for MG 1000B Cabinet c = 0-10

Format for MG 1000T, where:

504 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,

47-50

• u = 0-31

Precede with X to remove.

ATRN (NO) YES

AUDT (NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Aries Transmission

Change Transmission parameters for

Meridian Modular or Aries telephones

These transmission parameters are downloaded to Meridian Modular telephones:

• after sysload (except during parallel reload)

• when enabling the loop, shelf or card

• when the telephone is plugged in.

These values determine the loudness of the receiver and transmitter.

areaway

Note:

Before changing these values, refer to

Transmission Parameters,

553-3001-182.

Audit Trail for password usage

Prompted for PWD1 and PWD2.

lapw-16

AUTO_AUDIT

AXQI

AXQO

(ON) OFF

(20)-255

(20)-255

Automatic Voice Mailbox database correction

When enabled, the Voice Mailbox data is audited every 5 days to ensure consistency between the Meridian Mail and Meridian 1 databases. The audit takes place during the daily routines every 5 days.

vmba-19 basic-1 Size of Auxiliary Input Queue

Maximum lesser of 25% of the maximum number of call registers defined for the system, or 255.

Size of Auxiliary Output Queue

Maximum lesser of 25% of the maximum number of call registers defined for the system, or 255.

basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 505

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

BANR

(YES) NO

Comment

Optional Security Banner option. BANR is prompted when USER = SCH and/or MTC.

Enable security banner printing option

Disable security banner printing option

If BANR = YES, the following Security

Banner is printed at the time a login is attempted, whether or not the login is successful:

"Warning: The programs and data stored on this system are licensed to or are the property of NT/BNR and are lawfully available only to authorized users for approved purposes. Unauthorized access to any program or data on this system is not permitted. THis system can be monitored at any time for operational reasons. Therefore, if you are not an authorized user, DO NOT

ATTEMPT TO LOG IN."

The programmer do not modify an existing I/

O block by hitting carriage return (<CR>) in response to BANR.

Pack/Rel

basic-22

BATT (NO) YES basic-18

BCAP

BCHI

(SPEE)

31KH

1-15

Battery backup for memory installed on

Option 21E and STE only

Bearer Capability

Speech

3.1 KHZ

Backup D-channel port number.

Precede with "X" to remove.

euroisdn-22 pri-12

BCHL l c

PRI loop number for Backup D-channel.

Prompted when ADAN = BDCH.

For Large System l = 0-159

For CS 1000E System l = 0, 4, 8-252

For Option 11C c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For Option 11C Chassis pri-12 lse-24 basic-4.00

506 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

c c

0-255

Comment

c = 0-4, 7-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

For CS 1000S system

Pack/Rel

basic-1 c = 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44, 47-50

Format for MG 1000B Chassis c = 0-4, 7-10

Format for MG 1000B Cabinet basic-4.00

basic-4.00

c = 0-10

Format for MG 1000T, where:

• c = 0-4, 7-10, 11-14, 17-24, 27-34, 37- 44,

47-50

• u = 0-31

PRI loop number for Backup D-channel on

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Precede with X to remove.

fnf-25

BCST (NO) YES

BITL (5), 6, 7, 8

Only this broadcast port is affected by flow control

All broadcast ports of the same user type are affected by flow control.

Use this prompt with caution. For example, if BSCT = YES, and a maintenance port receives an X-off command, system output to all maintenance ports are eventually blocked.

This prompt appears only if FLOW = YES.

BSCT is not prompted for TTY_TYPE =

LSL.

basic-18

Bit length. Prompted for asynchronous ESDI ports.

For Small System, BITL is not prompted for

CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =

PTY.

cls-7

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call

Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux

Base layer. The prompt displays the

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 507

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

current BITL configuration on the system.

For example, BITL 8.

5 / 6 / 7 / (8) For release 5.0: Default data bit length for all three remote TTYs on an MGC is 8.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

BKGD 30, 33, 34, 35,

36, 37, 38, 40,

41, 43, 44, 45,

46, 53

Background overlay task

Enter the diagnostic program number 30, 33 and so on, to run sequentially in background when the overlay area is idle.

The data dump routine LD 43 can be reserved for the DROL to preserve data integrity. Programs 33, 45, 46 and 53 are not applicable to Small System.

basic-1

BPS

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

48000

56000

64000

Asynchronous baud rates (bits per second): cls-7

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call

Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux

Base layer. The prompt displays the current BPS configuration on the system.

For example, BPS 9600.

1200 Bits Per Second

2400 Bits Per Second

4800 Bits Per Second. Default for AML ports.

9600 Bits Per Second. Default for MGC

19200 Bits Per Second. Maximum port speed for Release 5.0

48000 Bits Per Second

56000 Bits Per Second

64000 Bits Per Second. Default for ISL Dchannels.

If the baud rate is set differently (e.g., 4800) the system returns to the default

TEMPORARILY if it is manually initialized.

The entered baud rate returns when the initialization is complete.

basic-5.00

508 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

For Small System, BPS is not prompted for

CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =

PTY.

BSRV

BSRC

(NO) YES

1- (2) - 4

B channel Service messaging.

B channel Service Re-transmission

Counter.

Pack/Rel

basic 25.4

basic 25.4

CAB

(0)

1

2

3

4

Cabinet number for Small System

For CS 1000S where Main Cabinet is Call

Server and Expansion Cabinet is MG 1000S

Main cabinet

Expansion cabinet 1

Expansion cabinet 2

Expansion cabinet 3

Expansion cabinet 4

Note the following:

1. LSL is only supported on the main cabinet. When TTY_TYPE = LSL, CAB is not prompted. Instead, CAB 0 is printed automatically.

2. Pseudo TTY does not belong to any cabinet. Hence, for TTY_TYPE = PTY,

CAB is not prompted.

basic-22 basic-1 lse-24 lse-24

CDNO 0-15

1-50

1-9 11-19

21-29 31-39

41-49

0-10

Serial Data Interface (SDI) Card number

Number the SDI cards logically with the system. Keep a paper record of the number and physical location of each SDI card. Enter

0 if you are not using CDNO to keep track of

SDI ports and cards.

DCHI Small System Card number

MSDL application Small System Card number xpe-15 lse-24

SDI, LSL or PTY Small System Card number

Expansion cabinets only support one TTY port which is on the Fiber Receiver Card.

When CAB = 1 or 2, CDNO is not prompted.

Pseudo TTY does not belong to any card.

basic-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 509

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

0-50

1-50

Comment

When TTY_TYPE = PTY, CDNO is not prompted.

Pack/Rel

SDI, LSL or PTY Small System Card number lse-24

AML application Small System Card number lse-24

CEQU (NO) YES

CFWS (NO) YES

Change to Common Equipment parameters basic-1

Call Forward Saved on SYSLOAD and reactivate on completion. To save information, set CFWS = YES.

basic-20

CLID (NO) YES

OPT0

OPT1

OPT2

OPT3

OPT4

OPT5

Calling Line ID in the CDR

If CLID = NO, "XXXXXXXXXXXX" is printed in CLID field of CDR record. Prompted when

CDR = YES and the Integrated Services

Digital Network (ISDN) package 145 is equipped.

Prefix = 0 for North American dialing plan.

OPT0 is the default for ESIG and ISIG interfaces.

Prefix = 1 for international PFXs in CLID. Any numbering type is supported. OPT1 is the default for all EuroISDN interfaces.

Prefix = 2, for international PFXs in CLID.

CCITT numbering types supported are:

UKWN, INTL, NPA, and NXX. OPT2 is the default for CO/DID routes for the Telecom

New Zealand interface. For an interworking scenario, when the CLID option is OPT2, and the CPFXS prompt is NO, then the calling number is built based on the originating calling number type.

Prefix = 3 for international PFXs in CLID.

Only the NXX number type is supported.

OPT3 is the default for TIE routes for the

Telecom New Zealand interface.

For international COs, if the call originates from a CO trunk type, add nothing.

Otherwise, add PFX1 and PFX2. OPT4 is the default for all Asia Pacific interfaces.

This is the same as OPT4, except it supports a maximum of 10 digits in the CLID. OPT5 is the default for the Austrian interface.

pri-12 euroisdn-22

510 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CLOK

EXT

INT

Comment

Source of primary clock is either internal or external.

Prompted for ISL D-channels and ESDI synchronous ports. Other D-channels are automatically set to EXT.

External Clocking.

When USR = ISLD, CLOK can be set to

External. Default for ISL D-channels is

EXT.

Internal Clocking.

INT is used only during D-channel loopback tests, where one side is set to INT, the other is set to EXT. Default for ESDI AML ports is

INT.

Pack/Rel

pri-12

CMS 0-15

CNEG

(1)

2

ESDI port number used for the CSL

Synchronous ESDI port number used for the

CSL. This must be the same value as the port number defined at the ADAN prompt.

Precede with X to remove. Prompted when

SYNC and USER = CMS.

clews

Channel Negotiation option

Channel is indicated and no alternative acceptable, exclusive. Default value for all

EuroISDN interfaces except FRA interface.

Channel is indicated and any alternative acceptable, preferred. Default value for all

EuroISDN interfaces except FRA interface.

CNEG is prompted when IFC = APAC,

AXEA, AXES, D70, NUME, SS12, ESIG,

ISEG or TCNZ.

ipra-15

CNI

CNTY s p g

(ETSI)

Core to Network Interface card location. To

OUT a CNI card, it must be hardware disabled and located in the inactive CPU.

For systems with Fibre Network Fabric: s = slot 9-12; p = port 0-1; g = group 0-7

Both ports (0 and 1) can be used to configure network switching groups for card slot 9. No

CNI cables are required for port 0 of card slot

9.

basic-21

Country

ETS 300 =102 basic protocol supp-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 511

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

AUS

AUST

CHNA

CIS

DEN

DUT

EAUS

EIR

ESP

FIN

FRA

GER

HKNG

INDI

INDO

ITA

JAPN

MSIA

NET

NOR

PHLP

POR

SING

SWE

SWI

TAIW

TCNZ

THAI

Comment

Austria

Australia

China

Commonwealth of Independent States

Denmark

Holland

Australia

Ireland

Spain

Finland

France

Germany

Hong Kong

India

Indonesia

Italy

Japan UIPE based interface

Malaysia

ETSI network side protocol

Norway

Philippines

Portugal

Singapore

Sweden

Switzerland

Taiwan

New Zealand, defined as APISDN

Thailand

CODE x xx xx xx

Pack/Rel

basic-23 euro- 23 euro-24 euro- 23 isdn-24 basic-23 basic-23 basic-23 isdn-24 isdn-24

Code, prompted when DTD = TDS.

A valid Hex Code for access to a flexible TDS table for a test tone, used to check a Dial

Tone Detector or DTD.

basic-14

512 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(0)

1

2

Comment

This code only applies when the tone generator is a TDS. If an XCT is used to generate the test tone the value in CODE is ignored and the XCT generates the dialtone specified in the FCT Table number 0 in LD

56.CODEC Coding Law

Mu or ?-Law for North America. This parameter is only used by the Meridian digital sets as part of the transmission parameters.

A Law, inverted for Sweden only

A Law, even-bit interleaved

Pack/Rel

basic-14

CONF DIR

IND

0-158

0-255

29-31

D0-D158

S0-S158

29 30

31

62

31 94

Direct link CSL Configuration

Indirect link CSL Configuration

Conference loop

Use even-numbered loops for Conference.

You may configure more than 16 Conference loops; however, enabling more than 16

Conference loops may cause the system to lock-up. Precede with X to remove.

Conference loop, systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

Small System, 31 is for Expansion Module

Dealer Conference loop

Spare dealer Conference loop is in the same group as the units planned to use this loop.

Small System base conference capability

For CS 1000S IP daughterboards

Small System Provided on the first single port expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S

IP daughterboard

Small System Provided on the second single port expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S

IP daughterboard

Small System Line Size Expansion Provided on the first dual port fiber expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S IP daughterboard basic-1 fnf-25 ohol-20 ohol-20 basic-1 lse-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 513

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

62 95

Comment

Provided on the second dual port fiber expansion daughterboard or CS 1000S IP daughterboard

CONFIRM a...a

CO_TYPE

CRC

CSQI

(STD)

ATT

1-(10)-20

(20) - x

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

Confirm the typed in password ni2-21

Central Office switch type. Prompted if IFC

= NI2.

100% compatible with Bellcore standard

AT&T 5ESS

CRC threshold. Enter in units of 5 per cent.

CRC establishes the % of Cyclic

Redundancy Code (CRC) errors detected in

15 minutes before an out-of-service threshold is enforced.

CRC = (# of packets retransmitted) ÷ (total # packets sent).

cls-7

Maximum number of call registers for CSL input queues. Where: x = 25% of NCR

If AST is enabled, set CSQI equal to the larger value of the following:

• Number of ACD agents or AST sets to be controlled by the host computer, or

• 50.

cls-7

CSQO (20) - x

Note:

These call registers are used for

Command and Status Link applications such as Meridian Link.

Maximum number of call registers for CSL/

AML output queues. Where: x = 25% of NCR

If AST is enabled, set CSQO equal to the larger value of the following:

1. Number of ACD agents or AST sets to be controlled by the host computer , or

2. 50.

cls-7

514 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CTYP

CPSI

DCHI

DCIP

ESDI

ELAN

MGC

MGX

MSDL

MSPS

PTY

SDI

SDI2

SDI4

SPDC

SDI4

TMDI

XSDI

Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

These call registers are used for

Command and Status Link applications such as Meridian Link.

Card Type (Input/output port card type)

Call Processor card (Option 81C)

D-channel Interface card (limited to 15 for

DPNSS)

D-channel over IP

Enhanced Serial Data Interface

AML over Ethernet card

TTY on IPMG controlled by MGC

TTY on IPMG controlled by MG XPEC

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (for

Downloadable D-channel on Small System)

Misc./SDI/Peripheral Signaling card

Pseudo TTY (Option 81C)

Single port SDI card

Dual-port SDI card

Four-Port SDI card

Single Port DCH card

Four port SDI card

D-channel configuration on TMDI (NTRB21) card

SDI paddle board msdl-18 basic-4.00

basic-5.00

basic-6.00

basic-24

CUST

XSM xx

Note:

CTYP may printout as being set as QSDI from previous software, but CTYP must be set to SDI4 when configuring data.

TTYas terminal for extended system monitor pack basic-6.00

Customer number associated with this function (as defined in LD15) lapw-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 515

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

xxx

ALL

<CR>

Comment

Customer to be accessible by way of

PWnn.

Enter the customer (0-99) and the associated Tenant numbers (entered at the

TEN prompt) to have access with PWnn to overlays specified at prompt OVLA.

All customers and associated tenants have access with this password.

No change to previous definitions.

Precede with X to remove.

CY45 (0)-31

DATA_CORRECT

(OFF) ON

Pack/Rel

Cycles LD 45 can be run whenever a fault is detected

If any number from 1 to 31 is entered, that is the number of times LD 45 runs under fault conditions.

If 0 is entered the system performs as before without limiting the number of LD 45 runs.

supp-16 vmba-19

Voice Mailbox Database Correction

In enabled state, the Meridian Mail database is updated to match the Meridian 1 database when the database audit discovers a discrepancy.

DCHI

DCHL

0-15 D-channel Interface port number

When adding a D-channel the MEM AVAIL data is output after this prompt indicating the channel has been added. You can therefore abort the program and save the changes without going to the REQ prompt.

Precede with X to remove.

pri-12

0-159 PRI loop number

0-159 1-126 PRI loop number and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = D70 or CNTY =

JAPN.

0- 159 (0)-3 PRI loop number and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = TCNZ or CNTY =

MSIA.

0-159 2-15 PRI loop number and interface identifier for all other interfaces pri-12

516 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

0 - 255 xx yyy

Comment

PRI loop number, systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

PRI card number.

For Small System. Where: xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For CS 1000S. Where: xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

For Small System and CS 1000S. Where:

• yyy = (0)-3, Small System PRI card number (D channel loop) and interface identifier for the DCH when IFC = TCNZ or

CNTY = MSIA.

• yyy = 1-126, Small System PRI loop number and interface identifier for the

DCH when IFC = D70 or CNTY = JAPN.

• yyy = 2-15, Small System PRI loop number and interface identifier for all other interfaces.

One DCH can support up to 16 PRIs, except for D70 and JAPN (9 PRIs) and TCNZ and

MSIA (4 PRIs).

Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

fnf-25 basic-1

DCUS

DDCS

0-5

0-159

DENS

DES xx

SDEN

DDEN

4DEN d...d

Maximum number of ACD-ADS customers acdd-1

Loop number for NT DPNSS/DASS hardware

For Small System DPNSS PRI card number.

Where xx is: 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For CS 1000S DPNSS PRI card number.

Where xx is: 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

Precede with X to remove.

dpnss-16 lse-25 basic-1 basic-15 Single ports on SDI card

Double ports on SDI card

Quad ports on SDI card

Designator msdl-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 517

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

DES is used to identify the link and can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters: 0-9, and upper case (A-Z) including spaces separating inputs. Characters * and # are not allowed.

Spaces are removed by the system. For example: CAB 5 PORT 2 becomes

CAB5PORT2. Use the underscore character

(_) instead, for example: CAB_5_PORT_2.

DES can be left blank or changed as required. If DES is already defined for a link, the system outputs the current name and reprompts DES.

Precede the existing DES with X to remove.

Example: XCAB_5_PORT_2.

DIDD (0)-15

DLAC (NO) YES

DID Delete

Number of leading digits to delete when receiving digits from DID trunk.

Change Call Log Option, where:

YES - Log all calls

NO - Log unanswered calls

Pack/Rel

isdn-16 basic-7.00

DLOP lll dd ff

L1 L2 Ln

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops.

Where: lll = 0-159 dti-5 lll = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 Small

System lse-25 lll = 0-255 systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 lll = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S basic-1 lll is 0-255 for CS 1000E system and no dd or ff dd = maximum number of simultaneous voice or data calls 0-(24) ff = frame format D2, D3, D4, or ESF

The default for frame format ff is ESF if prompt MODE is set to PRI; D3 if MODE is set to DTI or LINK. Loop must be removed before a change to ff can be made.

X to delete the loop.

Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops

Loop numbers of the DTI Loops associated with this VAS. Loops must have previously

518 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

been defined as MODE = LINK. Precede with X to remove.

DNUM 0-15

DPNS

DRAT

(NO) YES

(56K)

64KI

Pack/Rel

Device number for I/O ports.

All ports on the MSDL card share the same

DNUM. The MSDL card address settings must match the DNUM value. For all other ports such as SDI, DCHI, etc., the device number is to match the port address switch settings.

To configure a D-channel on an even number port the card type must be SPDC or

MSDL.

msdl-18

Digital Private Network Signaling dpnss-16

D-channel transmission Rate 56 kb/s when

LCMT is AMI 64 kb/s clear. Allowed if LCMT

= B8S for SL-1 to SL-1 only. Default for

PRI2.

64 kb/s inverted HDLC, 64 kb/s restricted

DRAT must match the far end. DRAT is not prompted when configuring the ISLDchannel because speed is controlled by the modem baud rate.

pri-12

DROL

DTCS

DTDT

30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 40, 41, 43, 44, 45, 46, 51, 53,

60, 61

Daily Routine Overlays. Daily or midnight routine programs are run once a day at the time specified by prompt TODR.

Programs 33, 45, 46 and 53 are not applicable to Small System.

basic-1

1-159 Digital Trunk Channel Switches (Loop numbers for GPT hardware)

Precede with X to remove.

Not required for NT5K75AA. Prompted with

Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package

122.

DTCS does not apply to Small System.

supp-16

NO

TD

Dial Tone Detector Test

No DTD tests are required

The DTD is to be tested against a tone from the TDS dtd-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 519

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

EXT

Comment

The DTD is to be tested against an external source

DTI2

DTIB

Pack/Rel

0-159

N0-N159

0-255

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface loop number ipra-14

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface phantom loop number. Precede loop number with an

"N" to configure this loop as a phantom loop for trunks.

DTI2 loop number, systems with Fibre

Network Fabric fnf-25

Small System format for DTI2 loop number lse-24 1-9 11-19

21-29 31-39

41-49

11-14, 21-24,

31-34, 41-44

Small System format for DTI2 phantom loop number. Precede loop number with an "N" to configure this loop as a phantom loop for trunks. On an Option 11C, a Phantom loop can be included between 1-9.

For CS 1000S basic-1

Precede any DTI2 entry with X to remove.

(35)-1000 Digital Trunk Input Buffers

Required for IDA trunks. Prompted with

Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package

122. Used with NT5K75AA DCHI operating in mode 0 or 1.

dass2-1 6

DTIC 0, 4, 8,...156

Starting network loop slot for PRI/DTI card di-5

0, 4, 8,...254

DTOB (4)-100 systems with Fibre Network Fabric

On non-Network loops, enter return <CR> and ignore the SCH2035 message. Do not input loop numbers that take the system out of its bounds. Number must be even for all systems.

Not prompted for Small System.

fnf-25

Digital Trunk Output Buffers per Digital Trunk

Signaling Link

Required for IDA trunks. Prompted with

Integrated Digital Access (IDA) package dass2-16

520 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

122. Used with NT5K75AA DCHI operating in mode 0 or 1.

DTRB

DUPX

DUR5

(100)

50

60

70

(FULL)

HALF

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

Digitone Burst time in ms

100 ms bursts of DTMF with 100 ms interdigit pause

50 ms bursts of DTMF with 50 ms interdigit pause

60 ms bursts of DTMF with 90 ms interdigit pause

70 ms bursts of DTMF with 70 ms interdigit pause

This determines the DTMF burst and interdigit pause for the Tone and Digit Switch or TDS.

Burst time of 50 ms is used for the Fast TDS;

100 ms is used for the standard TDS. Burst time of 60 ms and 70 ms is used for international requirements.

Full Duplex mode

Enter FULL if each end can simultaneously send and receive.

Half Duplex mode csl-7

CDR call duration with 0.5 second accuracy.

DUR5 does not apply to CDR data link.

CDR call record output on TTY with 2.0

second duration accuracy.

CDR call record output on TTY with 0.5

second duration accuracy for Japan.

0.5 second duration accuracy is available for outgoing trunks with answer supervision outside Japan.

cdr-8

DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT

5-(180)-1440

The period in minutes before a dynamic

ELIN mapping is timed out.

basic-5.00

DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE

(YES) NO Reuse the oldest ELIN or fall back to the

Locator when all dynamic ELINs for an ERL basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 521

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

are in use and another emergency call occurs.

ELAN x

Pack/Rel

Application Module Link (AML) over

Ethernet

Associate Value Added Server ID (VSID) x with AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) x.

The configured VSID of the ELAN subnet is used to distinguish the connection between the Meridian 1 and each application in a multiple application Ethernet environment. If the Nortel Symposium Call Center (NGCC) package 311 is not equipped, a maximum of

16 ELAN subnets can be configured and supported in the range of 16 to 31.

nxcc-22

ENL

ERRM

ESCALA

TE

(YES)

NO

ERR

BUG

AUD

0-(2)-127

ENL error message for Small System

DIS error message for Small System ains-16

Error Messages (prompted when USER =

MTC)

Error monitor-hardware

Error monitor-software

Software Audit

The messages, if enabled here, are output on the maintenance port. Precede with X to remove.

basic-1

Alarm occurrence threshold (prior to escalating)

This determines the number of times a major alarm may occur before it becomes critical.

Entering 0 disables the alarm escalation.

This applies to major alarms only.

alarm-19

ESDI YES NO

EX_DM_UPDT_TIMEOUT

Enhanced Serial Data Interface

Default is as previous if ADAN = CHG. The default is NO if ADAN = NEW and no ports on the card are configured, or if the other port is configured and is not ESDI. The default is

YES if the other port is configured and is

ESDI.

basic-5.00

522 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

External DM Update Timeout alarm delay if the External DM did not connect to the system to perform a location update or periodic audit.

5-(15)-14400

0 = No alarm is generated.

EXT0 x aaa bbb

EXT1 x aaa bbb

Pack/Rel

Extenders for CPU 0

Not prompted for Small System.

Identifies the types of extenders that connect the Central Processing Unit or CPU to the various Network shelves. Where: basic-19

• x = Group number

• aaa = extender type located on the CPU shelf

• bbb = extender type located on the

Network shelf

Valid inputs:

• x = 0-4

• aaa = NIL for ACB cables or passive Bus

Extender on CPU shelf 0.

• aaa = SBE for Segmented Bus Extender on CPU shelf 0 cabled to Network shelf

3PE or Network shelf backplane connectors ACB.

• bbb = NIL if Network shelf not equipped.

• bbb = 3PE for 3 Port Extender on a

Network shelf cabled to a SBE on CPU shelf 0, or cabled to CPU shelf 0 backplane connectors ACB.

fnf-25

Note:

bbb must be 3PE for core side 0 for

Network Capacity Expansion

Extenders for CPU 1

Identifies the types of extenders that connect the Central Processing Unit or CPU to the various network shelves. Where: basic-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 523

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

• x = Group number

• aaa = extender type located on the CPU shelf

• bbb = extender type located on the

Network shelf

Valid inputs:

• x = 0-4

• aaa = NIL for ACB cables or passive Bus

Extender on CPU shelf 1

• aaa = SBE for Segmented Bus Extender on CPU shelf 1 cabled to Network shelf

3PE or Network shelf backplane connectors ACB.

• bbb = NIL if Network shelf not equipped.

• bbb = 3PE for 3 Port Extender on a

Network shelf cabled to a SBE on CPU shelf 1, or cabled to CPU shelf 1 backplane connectors ACB.

EXT1 is not prompted for SmallSystems.

E_FILTE

R

FCDR

NEW

CHG

OUT

(OLD)

NEW

Pack/Rel

Note:

bbb must be 3PE for core side 1 for

Network Capacity Expansion

Add an Exception Filter entry.

alarm-19

Change an Exception Filter entry.

Remove an Exception Filter entry.

This is reprompted for subsequent exception filters. Up to 50 Exception Filters can be configured. Entering <CR> to complete exception filter entries. Precede with X to remove.

Format for Call Detail Recording

OLD format

Information field location varies according to which features are equipped.

NEW CDR format.

Information field locations are fixed.

fcdr-20

524 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Prompted when New Format CDR (FCDR) package 234 is equipped.

FLOW (NO) YES

FLOW_TYPE

NONE

XON

MAIL

HWR

Pack/Rel

Flow control capability This prompt appears for Options: 51C, 61C, and 81C.

For Small System, FLOW is not prompted when TTY_TYPE = LSL.

csl-7 basic-22

Flow control type for Small System.

FLOW_TYPE is prompted when TTY_TYPE

= LSL.

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call

Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux

Base layer. The prompt displays the current FLOW_TYPE configuration on the system. For example, FLOW_TYPE

NONE.

No flow control

XON/XOFF flow control

Mail style flow control protocol

Hardware flow control protocol

FLOW_TYPE must be MAIL for the LSL used for Meridian Mail administration / maintenance access. When TTY_TYPE =

LSL and CARD = 0, only NONE and XON are valid responses.

FLTA

FLTH

(NO) YES

0-(3)-9

Failed Log In Threshold Alarm

Activate minor alarm in the event of FLTH being reached. Prompted with International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package

131.

supp-18

Number of times a user has to attempt a login before the account is locked out. 0 means never lock out the accounts.

Prompted for PWD2 users.

lapw-16

FMT_OUTPUT

Alarm Filters Formatted printing alarm-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 525

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

(OFF)

ON

<CR>

Comment

This prompt disables formatting for the alarm/exception output.

This prompt enables formatting for the alarm/exception output.

Retains the current formatting status.

FPC

FR44

(NO) YES

(1) - 4

Pack/Rel

Allow or deny Force Password Change

Note:

Do Not set the FPC to YES until the system security manager is ready to change the default passwords. This prompt can be used by the system security manager to change all four system passwords. The Response is not retained in the database.

Multiplication factor, frequency of Overlay 44 running in background less than other background overlay.

basic-4.00

FRPT (NEFR)

FTYP

FUNC

OLFR

(3)

3S

5

ABD

FCL

MOD

LME

SCN

Access to incoming calls by FRE station denied

Access to incoming calls by FRE station allowed

If FRPT = OLFR, then a FRE station can do

Ringing Number Pickup, Night Answer and receive modified calls.

basic-1 basic-20 3.5 inch high density floppy type

3.5 inch super density floppy type

5.25 inch floppy type

Prompted if ADAN = FDK or HDK. Not prompted for Small System.

MSDL card Function. This prompt is used when applying the MSDL card to the SDI application.

msdl-19

Autobaud

Flow Control (XON/XOFF handling)

Modem support

Line Mode Editing

Character Screening

526 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Precede with X to delete.

GRP 0-4

0-7

Pack/Rel

Network Group number (Option 81C)

Group numbers cannot be changed until the

I/O devices associated with that group are disabled.

The option 61C supports 1 network group

(0). Option 81C supports up to 8 network groups (0-7).

For Option 81C:

Port 0 of the CNI card in slot 8 in the NT6D60

Core Module must be configured as "group

5." This configuration is not equivalent to a network switching group (groups 0-4).

"Group 5" extends the inter-processor section to the interface bus, within the Core

Module, through the CNI card in slot 8 and the 3PE card in slot 7.

systems with Fibre Network Fabric

81-19 fnf-25

HOST

HPIB

(NO) YES

16-1000

96-7500

Enable HOST mode Log In for password

PWnn.

When a HOST user logs in, the outputs defined for the port are only output to that port. For example, two ports are defined by prompt USER to output BUG and SCH messages. When a HOST user logs in to one of these ports, the other port does not output

BUG and SCH messages until the HOST user logs out.

This removes the restriction that ports with the same output must operate at the speed of the slowest port. This feature is primarily used by applications such as Meridian

Manager.

lapw-17

High-Priority Input Buffers

High-Priority Input Buffers for System

Options 51C, 61C, and 81C.

Recommended for attendant consoles and

DID/TIE trunks. High priority line or trunk cards are placed in slot 1 and assigned have

CLS = HPR in LD 10, 11, 12 or 14.

Superloops do not require any line or trunk cards assigned as high priority.

Refer to Appendix 553-2201-151.

basic-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 527

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

HRLR (0)-8, 32-40

Comment Pack/Rel

Handsfree Receive objective Loudness

Rating

The HRLR value is downloaded to Meridian

Modular telephones after sysload, except when performing a parallel reload. Refer to

Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182

before adjusting this value.

The default is 0. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are

provided on HRLR / HTLR Offsets and

Values

on page 499 hfdl-20

HTLR (0)-11, 32-54

IADR

ICON

0-(3)-255

(NO) YES

Handsfree Transmit Objective Loudness

Rating

The HTLR value is downloaded to Meridian

Modular telephones after sysload, except when performing a parallel reload. Refer to

Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182

before adjusting this value.

The default is 0. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are

provided on HRLR / HTLR Offsets and

Values

on page 499 hfdl-20 cls-7 Individual Address for the data-link level

HDLC protocol.

The IADR and RADR prompts must be coordinated with the far end. If IADR is defined as 3, then RADR must be 1.

M3900 Full Icon Support Where: (NO) = feature disabled YES = feature enabled

ICON-PACKAGE

3.0

IDLE_DISP_CHAR xx c/hh

Change customized text string character by character, where xx (01 to 24) is the position of the character in the customized text string.

Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast

(EBLN ISM value of 2).

The IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt is only prompted if SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY =

NO and is re-prompted until a <CR> is basic-23

528 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

entered or xx = 24th character has been entered, thus allowing additional characters to be entered. Where: c = one supported character. hh = 2 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f) representing a supported character.

IDLE_DISP_STRING aaaa Enter customized text string by text string input. A maximum of 24 characters are accepted and validated. Enter <CR> for a blank Electronic Brandlining display.

Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast

(EBLN ISM value of 2).

Pack/Rel

basic-23

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY aaaa

IDLP 0-158 xx

0-255 basic-23

IDLE_DISP_STRING entered customized text string "aaaa" is shown. This is information only. This information is shown under three scenarios:

• to show the current EBLN Terminal Text

Broadcast customized text string before the MODIFY prompt to let the user decide if a change is required.

• To show the customized text string entered in response to the IDLE_DISP_STRING prompt for confirmation with the following

OK prompt.

• To show the customized text string entered in response to the IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompt (s) for confirmation with the following OK prompt.

Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast

(EBLN ISM value of 2).

IND DTI Loop

DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop. See

DLOP prompt.

Defines DTI card number used for IND CSL,

Small System

DTI loop number used for IND CSL loop, systems with Fibre Network Fabric csl-7 fnf-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 529

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

IFC

Comment Pack/Rel

Interface type for D-channel. Note that when

USR = ISLD or SHA, the interface is automatically entered as SL1.

pri-17

(D100)

1TR6

APAC

AXEA

AXES

D250

D70

EGF4

E403

ESGF

ESIG

ESS4

ESS5

EURO

ISGF

Meridian DMS-100

1 TR 6 for Germany

Asia-Pacific ISDN interface for Australian

BRI UIPE PRI, China, Hong Kong,

Indonesia, Japan BRI UIPE PRI, Malaysia,

Singapore & Thailand

Ericsson AXE-10 for Australia

Ericsson AXE-10 for Sweden

Interface to Meridian DMS-250

Interface to Japan D70

Q Reference Signalling Point interface

EuroISDN interface for ETS 300 403

ESIG interface with GF platform (allowed if

QSIG and QSIGGF packages are both equipped)

ETSI Q reference signalling point (QSIG)

Interface ID. Allowed only if the new Dchannel is configured on the MSDL card.

Interface to AT&T ESS#4 AT&T ESS#5 If

IFC = EURO, the MOV command (REQ =

MOV) may only be used to move an MSDL card to another MSDL card. For example, when IFC = EURO, an MSDL card cannot be moved to a DCHI card.

Interface to AT&T ESS#4

AT&T ESS#5

EuroISDN interface

If IFC = EURO, the MOV command (REQ =

MOV) may only be used to move an MSDL card to another MSDL card. For example, when IFC = EURO, an MSDL card cannot be moved to a DCHI card.

ISIG interface with GF platform (allowed if

QSIG and QSIGGF packages are both equipped) qsig gf-24 euro-24

530 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ISIG

JTTC

NI2

NUME

S100

SL1

SS12

SWIS

TCNZ

Comment

ISO Q reference signalling point (QSIG)

Interface ID. Allowed only if the new D channel is configured on the MSDL card.

Interface ID for JAPAN TTC; This input is only valid if the new D-channel is configured on the MSDL card

NI-2 TR-1268 interface type

Numeris for France

Meridian SL-100

Meridian SL-1

SYS-12 for Norway

SwissNet

Telecom New Zealand (NEAX-61)

Pack/Rel

jttc- 23

INC_T306

0-(2)-240 ddsp-20

INTL 1-12

Variable timer for received disconnect message on incoming calls, allowing inband tone to be heard when sent by the network (entered in 2 second increments).

The network stops sending tone after this timer expires. Default values for this timer include:

30 for China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia,

Hong Kong, Singapore, New Zealand, and

Thailand.

60 seconds for Australia PRI.

Note:

Message PWD GLOBAL SETTINGS

SAVED displayed when any changes made to the Password Gate Opener prompts and indicates to the user that the changes have been saved in protected memory. Ending the program with **** or

** do not reset the changes.

Interval

Time interval for checking Meridian Link for overload in five second increments

This is the interval for counting the number of messages on a Meridian Link. See prompt

MCNT.

iap3p-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 531

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

IPCONF 0-255

Comment

Virtual IP conference loop.

The maximum number of loops is 64. You can add multiple loops at the same time.

Precede a loop number with X to remove it.

You can remove multiple loops at the same time.

Pack/Rel

basic-6.50

Note:

Before a loop can be removed, it must first be disabled.

IPIE (NO) YES Allow or deny Enhanced Unsolicited Status

Message (USM) Information Elements (IE).

basic-4.00

IPMG supl sh

ISDN_MCNT

60-(300)-350

The IPMG on which the TTY is being configured. Enter the superloop and shelf of the IPMG. sl is the superloop number for the

IPMG and is in the range: 0 - 252 and sh is the shelf number and is: 0 or 1 There is no default value for IPMG.

basic-5.00

qsig-22

Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.

ISLM

JDMI

K

1-382

(4000)

0-159

0-255

1-(7)-32

Integrated Services Signaling Link

Maximum.

Maximum number of ISL trunks controlled by the D-channel. There is no default value.

The maximum number of ISL trunks controlled by the D-channel.

isl-12 basic-4.00

Note:

ISLM prompt is hidden for D-Channel on

IP and would be defaulted to 4000

Japan Digital Multiplexer Interface loop number

JDMI loop number, systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

Precede with X to remove. Not for Small

System.

jdtm-14 fnf-25

Maximum number of outstanding frames cls-7

532 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

This value can be the same for the Meridian

1 (near-end) and the host processor (farend). Where:

• 7 = recommended value for AUX applications

• 2 = recommended value for CCITT

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

LAPD (NO) YES

LAPW

LCMT

LCTL

LEVL

LIS

0-99

<CR>

(B8S)

AMI

(NO) YES

(INST)

ADMN

(NONE)

INT SUB

Pack/Rel

sta-19

Language supported on STA

Link Access Protocol for D-channel

Change LAPD parameters.

pri-12

Enter Limited Access to Overlays Password number to be created, modified or deleted.

No more password changes

Precede with X to remove.

LAPW is reprompted after the OPT prompt, thus allowing multiple Limited Access to

Overlays Password users to be created.

If the overlay is exited after the OPT prompt the LAPW information is saved. If the overlay is exited before the OPT prompt, the information is not saved.

lapw-16

B8ZS Line Coding Method

Alternate Mark Inversion, B7 Line Coding

Method

The default is B8ZS when the frame format is ESF. When the frame format is D2, D3, or

D4, the default is AMI.

pri-19

Change Link Control system parameters cls-7

Access Level for Set Based Administration password Installer.

Access Level for Set Based Administration password Administrator adminset-21

The Location Information Service to use:

NONE

INTernal SUBnet LIS basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 533

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

EXT DM

Comment

EXTernal DM.

SUBNET LIS or EXTERNAL DM can only be selected if the corresponding packages are unrestricted.

LLID (NO) YES

LNAME_OPTION

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Last Log In Identification

Identification display of last Log In and failed

Log In attempts message allowed.

Prompted with International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

supp-18 lapw-19

Require Log In name for password access

If the option is changed to YES, each password currently in the system is given a default name which is used until new names are assigned.

The default names applied to the passwords are:

• ADMIN1 is applied to the current PWD1

• ADMIN2 is applied to the current PWD2

• USER0 is applied to the current Password

00

• USER1 is applied to the current Password

01

• (and so on to USER 99)

The following message is output before reprompting REQ: DEFAULT LOGIN

NAMES SAVED.

To login to the system with the

LNAME_OPTION enabled, use: LOGIN

ADMIN2 <CR>

PASS (prompted by the system)

Enter the current second level administration password.

If the option is changed from YES to NO, random passwords are assigned by the system to ensure no password duplication.

The default password for PWD2 is output to the terminal when this option is disabled.

The following message is output:

WARNING: PASSWORDS is CHANGED

TO DEFAULT VALUES.

534 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

OK? (Y/N)

If Y is entered, the following appears:

DEFAULT PASSWORDS SAVED

PWD2 = <pwd2 password>

Note that entering YES forces the user to define passwords. If NO is entered, Log In name may still be entered, but is not required.

To find the other default passwords assigned by the system, Load Overlay 22 and print

PWD.

With Multi-user Log In enabled, it is possible for more than one user to be logged in with the same name/password combination.

However, no two Log In names can have the same password associated with them.

Pack/Rel

LOCK 0 -(60)-270

LOGIN_NAME aaa . . . . aaaa

Log In name for password access

When LNAME_OPTION is YES, the names must be associated with each Log In password. This can be up to 11 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z).

lapw-19

LOUT 1-(20)-1440

Lockout time, prompted for PWD1 and

PWD2 users.

The time, in minutes, that a port is locked out when the Failed Log In Threshold or FLTH has been exceeded.

Messages of the lockout are displayed on maintenance terminals and supervisory stations.

lapw-16

LPIB 96-7000

96-1000 supp-18

Logout, Inactive Session Logout Time

The number of minutes after which the system logs out if no information has been exchanged. Prompted with International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package

131.

Low-Priority Input Buffers for Large systems

Low-Priority Input Buffers for Small systems.

Most stations and trunks are defined as low priority. See prompt HPIB. Refer to the basic-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 535

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

Memory Calculations Appendix in the

Planning and Engineering NTPs.

LPWD aaaa

LTHR

MANU

MARP

<CR>

(NO) YES

(PMS1)

PMS2

PMS3

(YES) NO

Pack/Rel

Enter current LAPW password to change user password.

Leave Log In password unchanged

This prompt appears only for LAPW users logged in with a LAPW password. This prompt is used by Limited Access to Overlay users to change their password.

lapw-16 cls-7 Link Threshold

Change link performance thresholds for

ESDI only.

Standard PMS interface

Requires <CR> HOD to recognize input message

Updated RMS message is followed by the old RMS when a room DN checks IN or

OUT.

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime feature allowed.

pmsi-19 marp-18

MAT (NO) YES

MAT_READ_ONLY

(NO)

YES

Enable MAT 5.0 Log In for password PWnn

Mat 5.0 users can remote log in from a PC to perform Alarm Management and

Maintenance operations through a graphical interface. PWD1 and PWD2 users always have MAT 5.0 access.

mat-22 mat-22

Do not restrict MAT 5.0 write access for password PWnn

Restrict MAT 5.0 write access for password

PWnn

Read only provides MAT 5.0 users access to

Alarm Management and Equipment View windows. However, read only users cannot clear or acknowledge alarms, and can only perform status commands.

PWD1 and PWD2 users always have MAT

5.0 write access.

536 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MBGA (NO)

YES

Comment

Multilocation Business Group, for tenant, messages are allowed to be sent on this Dchannel.

Multilocation Business Group, for tenant, messages are allowed to be sent on this Dchannel.

Pack/Rel

isdn-16

MCNT

MFSD

10-9999 Message Count Threshold

Threshold for number of Meridian Link messages per time interval. The recommended setting is 400. With INTL = 4 and MCNT = 400, the maximum flow is 20 messages per second.

iap3p-12

0, 2, 4...158

Multifrequency Sender loop. Use evennumbered loops for Multifrequency Sender.

1-9 Small System

Precede with X to remove.

0, 2, 4... 254 Multifrequency Sender loop, systems with

Fibre Network Fabric basic-1 fnf-25

MG_CARD supl sh card

IPMG 403

Physical MGC card for the digitial loop association to the IPMG. The format is superloop shelf card.

MGCONF aaa bbb ccc ddd

Allow configuring up to 4 Media Gateway conference loops simultaneously. a b c d = 0

- 255

X to delete the loop.

basic-5.00

MGCR 0-NCR

MGTDS aaa bbb

Maximum number of call registers used by

AUX messaging.

MGCR is associated with the NCR prompt.

It is the maximum number of call registers that can be queued for use by AUX messaging before extra processing time is allocated to handle them.

basic-1

Allow configuring 2 Media Gateway TDS loops simultaneously. Where a b = 0 - 255 basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 537

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

X to delete the loop

MID_SCPU

(NO) YES

MLDN (NO) YES

Pack/Rel

basic-3.0

Midnight Switch Cores

Allow or deny Midnight Switch Core, where:

Deny causes the system to perform the 3PE test during the Midnight routine instead of switching CPUs.

Allow causes the system to switch CPUs during the Midnight routine instead of performing the 3PE test.

Note:

Applicable to CPP systems only.

Multiple Loop DN. MLDN allows multiple appearance DNs to be on different loops.

basic-1

MODE LINK

PRI

TRK

MODIFY (NO) YES

MPED (SD)

DD

4D

8D

MQC_FEAT

Mode of operation

Digital Link mode (Not supported for Small

System)

Primary Rate Interface mode

Digital Trunk mode dti-8

Change Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text

Broadcast configuration. Prompted if the

Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).

basic-23

Single (Maximum Peripheral Equipment

Density)

Double (Maximum Peripheral Equipment

Density)

Quadruple (Maximum Peripheral Equipment

Density)

Octal (Maximum Peripheral Equipment

Density)

Set to 8D for superloops. See LD 97. For

Small System, MPED = 8D in the default data and must remain at this value for the peripherals to work.

basic-7 meet-24

538 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NAS

NACD

NMS

Comment

MCDN QSIG Feature type

Prompted if RCAP = MQC Precede MQC

Feature type with X to remove

MCDN NAS functionalities are supported over QSIG

MCDN NACD functionalities are supported over QSIG

MCDN NMS - MC functionalities are supported over QSIG

MSCL (0)-8190

MSDT 0-159

Maximum number of Speed Call Lists that can be defined on the system

Main Synchronization DTSL.

Enter number of DTSL used for main synchronization.

Prompted if SYNM = 1, 2 or 4.

Pack/Rel

optf-13 supp-16

MSEC [ON]

MSSD

OFF

[MSNV],

MSBT

Enable the Media Security feature for the system with the end device security CLS set to MSNV (Never) unless the CLS for the TNs is MSSD

Disable the Media Security. The device level settings do not be effective when this option is set for the system.

basic-5.00

Media Security Security System Default for

TNs configured in LD11. This parameter has a default value of MSNV or “Never”. The administrator can choose to change this setting to MSBT or “Best Effort”. Changing this parameter affects all TNs that have the

CLS MSSD.

basic-5.00

Message Registration

Periodic Pulse Metering mr-20 MTRO (MR)

PPM

MULTI_USER

(OFF) ON

MWIF

(STD)

ISDM

Multi-User Log In multi-19

Message Waiting Interface

Standard Message Waiting Interface

Plessey ISDX switch with remote message notification capability samm-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 539

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

MWTO (15) - 30

Comment Pack/Rel

Message Waiting Time-out timer in seconds.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the duration of a timer started when a SETUP message is sent to set up a connection-oriented, call-independent connection for MWI transport. The timer is stopped on receipt of a CALL

PROCEEDING message.

qsig ss-25.4

MWRT

N1

N2

0 - (2) - 15

32, 64, 128, (512)

Maximum Number of octets per HDLC information frame. An entry of 128 or 512 is recommended for ELAN subnets.

csl-7

4-(8)-16

Message Waiting Retry Timer.

This prompt is only printed if the RCAP is set to either QMWI or QMWO. The value entered is the number of re-tries to be effected after a SETUP timeout.

qsig ss-25.4

N200

N201

N2X4

NASA

NCPU

1-(3)-8

4-(260)

0-(10)-20

(NO)

YES

1-(2)

Maximum Number of retransmissions in steps of 1.

Maximum Number of retransmissions

Network Attendant Service not allowed

Network Attendant Service allowed

Network Attendant Service signaling messages are sent on this D-channel.

Number of CPUs

This value is normally programmed at the factory.

pri-12

Maximum Number of octets in information element pri-12 pri-12

Maximum Number of status inquires when remote is busy (N2X2 only applies to 1TR6) ovlp-16 nas-20 basic-18

NCR xx Number of Call Registers, range depends on system type. Where: basic-19

540 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• xx = 26-2047 for System Option 51C

• xx = 26-20000 for System Option 81C

• xx = 26-65000 for System CS1000M or

CS1000E

The maximum number of call registers can be limited by the amount of system memory.

In this case the number of call registers is the amount of protected memory available divided by the number of words per call register.

For memory calculations, see

Communication Server 1000M and Meridian

1: Large System Planning and Engineering,

NN43021-220.

NDCH 0 - 63

Pack/Rel

Move the primary D-Channel to this logical number.

The ADAN MOV command is supported for

D-channels.

pri-18

NDIS (20)-255

NDRG

NKEY

NLPW

(NO) YES

[31]

X...X

<CR>

Number of Display messages for the

Background Terminal (BGD).

The NDIS entry determines the queue length for display messages for the BGD application.

bgd-10

New Distinctive Ringing

Prompted if Distinctive Ringing (DRNG) package 74 equipped, and if packages

ATVN 68, FTC 125 and JTDS 171 are turned off.

drng-10

The number of packets that can be secured by the same master key (2^n is the number of packets, 2^31 by default). Current default is the maximum allowed by SRTP for

SRTCP packets. Valid range for user is 1-31

(0 is ignored and mapped to the default of

31).

basic-5.00

New Limited Access to Overlay log on password for the user

Leave Log In password unchanged

Length is 4-16 characters with Limited

Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.

Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z.

lapw-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 541

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

NORTEL_BRAND

NPW1

(YES)

NO x...x

<CR>

Comment Pack/Rel

basic-23

"NORTEL" Electronic Brandlining display option. Prompted only if the EBLN ISM parameter value is set to "0" or "1".

Show the "NORTEL" Electronic brandline.

Show a blank brandline along with the Time and Date on an idle MDT set.

New Password 1(PWD1 Log In password) basic-1

No change

Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z. Length is 4-16 characters with Limited Access to

Overlays (LAPW) package 164.

Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).

NPW2 x...x

<CR>

New Password 2 (PWD2)

No change

Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z. Length is 4-16 characters with Limited Access to

Overlays (LAPW) package 164.

Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).

basic-1

NUMD 1- (2)

OCAC

OK

(NO) YES

Number of floppy disk drives

Prompted if ADAN = FDK or HDK. Not prompted for Small System.

basic-15

Support the Original Carrier Access Code format The expanded CAC format is automatically supported.

OCAC can be set to YES before and during the interim period. If OCAC is not set properly, Equal Access screening do not function.

fcc-20

Confirm validated Terminal Text Broadcast customized text string "aaaa" entered at the

IDLE_DISP_STRING or at the

IDLE_DISP_CHAR prompts. Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).

basic-23

542 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(YES)

NO

Comment

Keep the new text sting.

Re-enter a new text string.

OPT

(CFPA)

CFPD

Pack/Rel

Options for password PWnn. Multiple entries must be separated by a space.

Configuration Prompts Allowed

Configuration Prompts Denied CFPD allows access to prompts LPWD and NLPW to change one’s own password.

lapw-16

(DTD)

DTA

(FEAD)

FEAA

(FORCD)

FORCA

(LLCD)

LLCA

Deny DN-TN correspondence (administrator access only)

Allow DN-TN correspondence

(administrator access only) adminset-2 1

Deny Change Set Features (administrator & installer access)

Allow Change Set Features (administrator & installer access) adminset-21

Deny the Force command

Allow the Force command muli-19

(LOSD)

LOSA

(MOND)

MONA

(NAMD)

Line Load Control Denied

Line Load Control Allowed

Access to Line Load Control commands in

LD 2.

lapw-16 xpe-20 Loss Plan Customization Denied

Loss Plan Customization Allowed

Deny the Monitor command

Allow the Monitor command muli-19

NAMA

(PROD)

Deny Change CPND Names (administrator and installer access)

Allow Change CPND Names (administrator and installer access) adminset-21

Print Only Denied lapw-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 543

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

PROA

Comment

Print Only Allowed

(PSCA)

PSCD

(RDBD)

RDBA

Pack/Rel

Restricts overlay access to printing functions only.

Printing of Speed Call lists Allowed

Printing of Speed Call lists Denied lapw-16

Printing Speed Call lists can be allowed even though the overlay is restricted for all other functions.

Access to Resident Debug Denied

Access to Resident Debug Allowed

Access to Resident Debug (denied) allowed

Must have International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131.

lapw-15

ORUR

(TADD)

TADA

(TOLD)

TOLA

(TRKD)

TRKA

1-(5)-255

Deny Set Time and Date (administrator and installer access)

Allow Set Time and Date (administrator and installer access)

Deny Change Toll Restrictions

(administrator and installer access)

Allow Change Toll Restrictions

(administrator and installer access) adminset-21 adminset-21

Deny Change Trunks (Opt 11E administrator access only)

Allow Change Trunks (Opt 11E administrator access only) adminset-21 basic-4.50

Note:

Message PWD ACCOUNT SETTINGS

SAVED displayed when user input information is complete. Once complete the user information is saved to protected memory. Ending the program with **** or

** abort do not reset the changes.

Overrun/Underruns out-of-service threshold

Enter in units of 1, the number of overrun/ underrun in 15 minutes before an out-ofservice is enforced.

basic-1

544 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

OTBF 1-(32)-127

OUT_T306

OVLA

0-(30)-240

1-99

ALL

XALL

<CR>

Comment

Output request buffers

Pack/Rel

pri-12 ddsp-20

Variable timer for received disconnect message on outgoing calls, allowing in-band tone to be heard when sent by the network.

The network stops sending tone after this timer expires. Default values for this timer include:

30 for China, Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia,

Hong Kong, Singapore, New Zealand, and

Thailand.

60 seconds for Australia PRI.

List of Overlay programs from 1 to 99 to be accessible by way of password PWnn

Overlay number

To allow access to all overlays

To deny access to all overlays

No change to previous definitions

Multiple entries must be separated by a space and the last entry must be followed by a carriage return. Precede with X to remove.

lapw-16

OVLR

OVLS

OVLT

OVLY

PARM

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-8

(NO) YES

PASSWORD a...a

(NO) YES

Overlap Receiving

Overlap Sending ovlp-15 ovlp-15

Overlap Timer (in seconds)

This timer controls the interval between the sending of INFORMATION messages.

ovlp-15

Overlay basic-1 basic-4.50

Sets or accepts the users password.

Acceptable Characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, ! %

$ % ^ & () _ - + = {} | : ;"’ < , > . ? /.

Note:

Note: Spaces ~ ‘ * @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.

Gate opener for System Parameters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 545

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

R232/R422 DCE/DTE

Comment

Parameters for Interface and transmission mode, prompted for MSDL ports.

The RS-422 parameters are established with switch settings on the MSDL card. This prompt is used to verify those settings prior to enabling the card.

RS-232 parameters are set both on the card and at this prompt. Both values must be entered even if only one of them is being changed. For example "R232 DCE."

Default for AML is R232 DCE. Default for Dchannels is R422 DTE.

Pack/Rel

msdl-18

PARY

(NONE)

ODD

EVEN

Parity type. Prompted for asynchronous

ESDI ports.

For Small System, PARY is not prompted for

CARD 0 PORT 0 or when TTY_TYPE =

PTY.

basic-19

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call

Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux

Base layer. The prompt displays the current PARY configuration on the system. For example, PARY NONE.

No parity bit

Odd parity bit

Even parity bit

Default parity type for all three remote TTYs on a IPMG is NONE.

PBXH 0-23

PCDR

PCML

X

(NO) YES

(MU)

Hour to perform Message Waiting lamp maintenance

X = No test to be performed.

Priority to CDR

YES gives CDR priority over call processing.

mwc-15 cdr-1

Pulse Code Modulation companding Law for the system

?-Law (use ?-Law for North America) basic-1

546 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

A

Comment

A-Law. This takes precedence over the response to the INTN prompt in Overlay 97 for Small System DTI/PRI.

PDCH 0-63

PDT (NO)

PDT1/PDT2

Pack/Rel

Primary D-channel associated with a backup

D-channel

Both D-channels must be on the same card type that is DCHI or MSDL. Prompted if

ADAN = BDCH msdl-18

PDT access. This prompt is available only when adding or modifying LAPW, Level 1

(PWD1) and Level 2 (PWD2) users.

basic-5.00

PINX_CUST

0-99

PMCR

PMIN

PMSI

PORT

5 - 1023

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

PORT

0-1 qsig-22

This customer number is used for the DN address translation associated with call independent connection messages received on this D-channel. Prompted when IFC =

ISGF or ESGF.

Number of call registers used for PMSI.

Minimum number of call registers to be configured is 5 Maximum is lesser of either

1023 or 25 percent of the total system call registers

For example, if you enter 65, but 25 percent of the system total is 45, the number entered by the system is 45.

pms-19

Minor alarm when the PMSI link is not responding.

This is not prompted if XTMR = 0. When this prompt is Yes, the attendants minor alarm is activated when the PMSI link does not respond. Note that when the link responds again, the alarm is not cleared.

pms-19

Modify Property Management Systems parameters

This is prompted is Property Management

Systems Interface (PMSI) is enabled.

pms-19

Port number for MSDL cards, Option 81C I/

O devices, or PMSI ports:

Port number for the CP card basic-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 547

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

0-3

0-7

0-15

0-1

0-2

0-2

0-3

1, 3

0, 1 or 2

Comment

Port number for the MSDL card

Port number for Pseudo TTYs

This prompt appears for Property

Management Systems Interface (PMSI) port configuration.

Prompted only when CTYP = MSDL (Multipurpose Serial Data Link), CPSI (Option 81C

CP card), or PTY (Option 81C Pseudo

TTY).

Port number for Option11 systems:

Small System TDS/DTR Port number

Small System System Core port number.

Port 0 is configured on System Core but cannot be modified.

Small System, prompted for CAB 1-4 if

CAB_TYPE = IP

Small System DCHI/SDI Port number or

Small System pseudo TTY port number

For Small System:

Pack/Rel

sipe-25

1. Expansion cabinets only support one

TTY port which is on the Fiber Receiver

Card. When CAB = 1 or 2, PORT is not prompted.

2. The maximum number of pseudo TTY supported is 4.

3. For TTY_TYPE = LSL, Card 0 Port 0 is not allowed.

DCHI Port number

If D-channel is on PRI/PRI2 card, the valid

Port number is 1. If D-channel is on NTAK02 card, Ports 1 and 3 are valid.

SDI port number on the MGC or MGX. There is no default port number.

basic-5.00

PRI

Note:

Port 2 is not allowed for CTYP of MGX.

Primary Rate Interface

ISDN PRI architecture is composed of three protocol layers providing different services: pri-12

548 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

loop x card x

Comment

• layer 1: physical layer

• layer 2: link layer

• layer 3: network layer

Pack/Rel

These layers provide a standard interface for voice and data communication. Each layer uses the services provided by the layer below, and builds on these services to perform functions for the layer above. Each layer or block can be modified without affecting the protocols in another layer.

Enter loop number for additional PRI loops using the same D-channel and the interface

ID for the additional loop numbers. Where: fnf-25

• loop = 0-159 for PRI loop number

• loop = 0-255, systems with Fibre Network

Fabric

• x = 2-15 for Interface ID or 1-126 if IFC=

D70 or CNTY = JAPN

The PRI prompt is used to assign the PRI loops controlled by the D-channel. Each loop is given an Interface ID.

The PRI loop carrying primary D-channel

(DCHI) and backup D-channel (BCHI) are assigned an Interface ID 0 and 1, respectively. The 14 remaining PRI loops that can be assigned to the D-channel are defined here and given an Interface ID of

2-15.

For Small System

Where:

• card = 1-9 for PRI card number

• card = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 with

Survivable IP

• card = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS

1000S

• x = 2-15 for Interface ID or 1-126 if IFC=

D70 or CNTY = JAPN

Precede with X to remove. This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.

sipe-25 basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 549

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

PRI2 0-159 2-15 card 2-15

0-159 0-3 xx 0-3

0-159 xx

0-255

Comment

Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence, when IFC = SL-1 and DCHL is a

PRI2 loop.

Small System Secondary PRI2 loops for nB

+ D, plus sequence, when IFC = SL-1 and

DCHL is a PRI2 loop. Where card is: 1-9

11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number

Secondary PRI2 loops for nB + D, plus sequence, when IFC = TCNZ or CNTY =

MSIA. The D-channel is not necessarily on

IFC ID 0. This is set by service change.

Small System when IFC=TCNZ and or

CNTY=MSIA. Where xx is:

• 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number

• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S

Pack/Rel

ipra-14 basic-1

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface or PRI loop number Small System Where xx is

• 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 PRI card number

• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S basic-1

PRI2 loop number, systems with Fibre

Network Fabric

Precede with X to remove.

This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.

fnf-25

PRIM

PROG

0-15

NCHG

MALE

Primary PMS port. To remove port, enter X. pms-19

Progress

Send a PROGRESS signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

NCHG is the default for all interfaces except

Australian, Austrian and Japan interface.

Send an ALERT signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

euroisdn-22

550 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MCON

Comment

MALE is the default for Japan interface.

Send a CONNECT signal when a CALL

PROCEEDING message which contains a progress Indicator Information Element is received at the Meridian 1 EuroISDN gateway.

MCON the default for Australian and

Austrian interface.

Pack/Rel

PR_RTN qsig ss- 23

(NO) YES The prompt PR_RTN is printed only if the

RCAP is set to PRI or PRO.

Retain option is (is not) supported by the far end PINX.

PR_TRIGS

<CR>

DIV xx y CNG xx y CON xx y

Path Replacement Triggers are set to their default values: DIV 2 3 CNG 2 3 XCON 2 3 CTR2 2

3 2 Path Replacement attempts with a delay of 3 minutes for Diversion and Congestion and Call Transfer (triggered from secondary end) but Connected number is not a trigger.

Diversion is used to trigger Path

Replacement. Congestion is used to trigger

Path Replacement. A Connected number different from a called number is used to trigger Path Replacement.

CTR1 xx y

CTR2 xx y

Call Transfer is used to trigger Path

Replacement.

The Path Replacement Propose is triggered from the Primary End of transfer.

Call Transfer is used to trigger Path

Replacement.

The Path Replacement Propose is triggered from the Secondary End of transer.

Precede with X to remove. CTR1 and CTR2 are mutually exclusive. xx = 0 - 15, the number of Path Replacement attempts. y =

1 - 7, the delay between two Path

Replacement attempts in minutes.

qsig ss-23 qsig ss-25 qsig ss-25

PRTY xx xx xx Priority overlay programs to be stored in cache memory basic-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 551

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

Priority overlays stay in cache memory when a new overlay is loaded. Enter one or more commonly used overlay program numbers.

Priority can be set only for the number of overlays specified in the CACH. xx = the overlay number.

Precede with X to remove an overlay program number.

PSWD_COMP

(OFF) ON Turns on or off the password complexity check for the ADMIN, LAPW and PDT passwords, where: password contains a combination of at least eight alphanumeric characters, of the following type:

- lowercase alphabetic

- uppercase alphabetic

- numeric

• password does not contain the user ID or a portion of the user ID, in normal or reverse form

• password does not contain three or more letters in forward or reverse alphabetic sequence, ASCII sequence, or keyboard

(QWERTY) sequence

• password does not contain three or more consecutive characters

• password does not match the default password

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

PTMR

PWD

PWD2

(0)-31

(NO) YES x...x

Polling Timer for PMSI

This is the polling timer, in minutes. When

PTMR = 0, polling does not occur.

Change Password options pms-19 basic -19

Password 2

Enter current second level administration password. This password is required to change existing passwords PWD1, PWD2,

LAPW passwords and to change the

Electronic Brandlining Terminal Text

Broadcast customized text string.

basic-1

552 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Acceptable Characters are 0-9, A-Z, a-z, ! %

$ % ^ & () _ - + = {} | : ;"’ < , > . ? /.

Length is 4-16 characters with Limited

Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.

Without the LAPW package, the password requires 4 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F).

Note:

Spaces ~ ‘ * @ [ ] and # are not supported in passwords.

PWD_TYPE

PWD2

PWD1

LAPW

Specifies the user type account being added to the system

Password 2

Password 1

Limited Access to Overlays Password

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

PWnn x...x

PWTP

QCHID

(OVLY)

SBA

(YES)

Password

Length is 4-16 characters with Limited

Access to Overlays (LAPW) package 164.

Valid characters are 0-9, A-Z and a-z.

Where: nn = number entered in response to

LAPW prompt.

Enter the LAPW password to be used for

PWnn.

lapw-16

Note:

If the LAPW password is a Set Based

Administration (SBA) password

(PWTP=SBA), the PWnn response length is 4-16 numeric characters, where the valid characters are digits 0-9 only.

OVLY Password Access Type

SBA Password Access Type adminset-21

This rule is applicable for both encoding and decoding of Channel Identification IE

Timeslot values 17 to 31 of the PR12 loop associated with channel number 17 to 31 of the Channel Identification IE (previous behavior) qsig gf-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 553

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

NO

Comment

Timeslot values 17 to 31 of the PR12 loop associated with channel number 16 to 30 of the Channel Identification IE

RADR 0-(1)-255

RCAP

BRI

CCBI

CCBO

XCCB

CCBS

Remote Address for the data-link level

HDLC protocol

The IADR and RADR prompts must be coordinated with the far-end. If IADR is defined as 3, then RADR must be 1.

Remote Capabilities. Enter one or more values to define the capabilities of the farend.

Basic Rate Interface (when IFC = APAC,

SL1, D70, ESS4, or ESS5)

Call Completion to busy subscriber using integer value for operation coding

CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive.

Call Completion to busy subscriber using object identifier for operation coding

CCBO/CCBI are mutually exclusive

To remove remote capability.

CCNI

XCCN

CCNO cls-7

Pack/Rel

pri-19 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber for

QSIG and EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCBS is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package 316 is equipped.

Call Completion on no response using integer value for operation coding

CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.

To remove remote capability.

qsig ss-24

XCCN

CCNR

CPK

Call Completion on no response using object identifier for operation coding

CCNO/CCNI are mutually exclusive.

To remove remote capability.

Call Completion to No Reply for QSIG and

EuroISDN BRI interfaces. CCNR is allowed if QSIG supplementary services package

316 is equipped.

qsig ss-24

Network Call Park. CPK is allowed if:

554 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• IFC = SL1

• CPRKNET package 306 is equipped

COLP

XCOL

CTI

CTO

DV1I

DV1O

DV2I

DV2O

DV3I

Pack/Rel

Connected Line Identification Presentation

Connected Number IE Presentation is supported on Indonesian interfaces.

Default value for ESIG, ISIG, NI2,

EUROISDN and Indonesian interfaces except AUS, EIR, DUT, BEL, FRA interfaces.

to remove Connected Number IE

Presentation Default value for all APAC,

AUS, EIR, DUT, BEL and FRA interfaces.

Call Transfer Integer

CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.

Call Transfer Object

CTI and CTO are mutually exclusive.

QSIG SS Call Diversion Notification remote capability. Configure sending of QSIG

Diversion Notification Information, treatment of Rerouting request and coding of operations. If coded as Object Identifier, the remote capability ends with 'O", whereas for

Integer Value, the remote capability ends with 'I'. Only one remote capability is allowed.

Add "call transfer notification" remote capability to the EuroISDN interface.

Precede with 'X' to remove capability.

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

EuroI ISDN Call Diversion basic- 23 qsig ss-24 qsig ss-24 qsig ss- 23 bne-25 bne-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 555

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

DV3O

Comment

Diversion information is sent to remote switch.

Rerouting requests from remote switch are processed.

Precede with 'X' to remove capability.

ECTO XCTO Add call transfer notification and invocation remote capability to the EuroISDN

Use "XCTO" to remove capability

Pack/Rel

bne-25

MCID XMCI MCID = Add MCID as a new remote capability.

MQC

To remove remote capability.

MCDN QSIG Conversion as a Remote capability

MSL

MWI

NAC

Remote D-channel is on a MSDL card

Message Waiting Interfacing with DMS or with Virtual Dchannels

Network Access data. Enter XNAC to remove NAC as a remote capability. NAC is allowed if:

• the D-channel is defined on an MSDL card

(example CTYP=MSDL)

• the D-channel interface type is SL1

(IFC=SL1) etsi-ss- 23 meet-24

NCT

ND1

ND2

ND3

Network Call Trace supported

Network Name Display method 1

Network Name Display method 2

Network Name Display method 3. ND3 ensures the same level of service between the MCDN and QSIG name display services.

NDI

NDO

Name Display - Integer ID Coding

Name Display - Object ID Coding

NDS XNDS NI-2 Name Display Option.

Remove NDS Option.

qsig-24 qsig-24 qsig ss-25.4

556 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Add Path Replacement as a remote capability. Only one capability can be configured per link.

PRI

PRO

QMWI

QMWO

XQMW

The encoding method uses Integer Values.

The encoding method uses Object

Identifier.

Precede with 'x' to remove capability.

Pack/Rel

qsig ss-23

Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability. The encoding method uses

Integer Values.

Add Message Waiting Indication as a remote capability. The encoding method uses

Object Identifier.

Remove Message Waiting Indication (using the Integer Values encoding method) as a remote capability.

qsig ss-25.4

qsig ss-25.4

qsig ss-25.4

RLTI

RVQ

TAT

RLT Interworking over IP on the signaling server for all TAT invokes through a

CS 2x00.

Note:

RCAP TAT is also required for the RLT feature to be invoked on call modification.

It is automatically enabled.

Remote Virtual Queuing

RCAP is prompted until only <CR> is entered in response. Precede a value with X to remove.

ND1 and ND2 are used with Network Call

Party Name Display or NCPND. Both ends must have NCPND.

ND2 requires SL-100, DMS with BCS32 and later. Prompted with Remote Virtual Queuing

(ORC_RVQ) package 192.

basic-5.00

Invoke Trunk Anti-Tromboning operation using the correct variant if the far end switch supports this feature.

TAT can be input if the Trunk Anti-

Tromboning (TAT) package 293 is equipped, and one of the following is true:

• The IFC is SL1 and the CTYP used is either MSDL or a legacy card type still

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 557

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

supported for PRI and ISL (enterprise version of TAT is supported)

• The IFC is SL1 and the CTYP is DCIP, where the IP protocol is H.323 or SIP

(enterprise version of TAT is supported)

• The IFC is S100, D100, or D250 and the

CTYP used is either MSDL or a legacy card type still supported for PRI (carrier version of TAT is supported)

RCVP

UUI

XUUI

UUS1

XUSS

XRLT

XTAT

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

Remote capability where Use- to-User

Information is supported.

Remove UUI capability.

User-to-User Service 1

Decode UUS IE sent by Central Office

Send UUS IE to Central Office

Remove User-to-User Service 1 uui-3.0

bne-25

Use TAT on the signaling server.

basic-5.00

Note:

RCAP TAT is required for the TAT feature to be invoked on call modification.

Disable TAT, and disable RLT.

basic-5.00

Note:

RCAP TAT is required for the RLT feature.

Without TAT, no RLT invokes can ever be sent. RLT is disabled when TAT is disabled

Auto-recovery to primary D-channel option.

RCVP is supported on SL-1 to SL-1 connections only.

When RCVP = YES, the primary D-channel is automatically forced to be the active channel after it is brought up from a released state.

This option must be coordinated with the far end. Both sides must be either YES or NO.

If the two sides do not match, both sides default to NO. When IFC = SL-1, RCVP changes to NO.

For Backup DCH only.

pri-13

558 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

REMD

Comment

Double Density Remote Peripheral

Equipment loop(s)

0, 1, 2,...159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

G0,G1...G159

GEC loop or loops

T0,T1...T159

0-255

TVT loop or loops

Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be

TDS, CONF or MFSD.

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

REMO

0, 1, 2, ...159

G0,G1...G159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

GEC loop or loops

T0,T1...T159

Single Density Remote Peripheral

Equipment loop(s)

0-255

TVT loop or loops

Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be

TDS, CONF or MFSD

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

REMQ Quadruple density Remote Peripheral

Equipment loop(s)

0, 1, 2, ...159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

G0, 1...G159

GEC loop or loops

T0,T1...T159

TVT loop or loops

Precede loop number with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

rpe-1 fnf-25 basic-1 fnf-25 rpe-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 559

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

REQ CHG

END

Comment

Request: Change existing data block

Request: Exit overlay program

RLS xx

ROLR (0)-63

Pack/Rel

basic-1

Release ID of the switch at the far-end of the

D-channel.

This is the software release at the far-end. If the far-end has an incompatible release, it prevents the sending of application messages.

Shown below is the relationship between the

ISDN application, equipment and the software release ID or BCS at the far-end.

Application Far-End Minimum

RLS pri-19

Network

Ring Again

SL-1 SL-100

DMS-100/250

12 26 26

Network

ACD

SL-1 SL-100 15 29

Network Breakin and Force Disconnect

25

Network Message Service - Message

Center

SL-1 15

Network Message Service - Meridian Mail

SL-1 16

Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS-100

SL-1 DMS-100 19 36

The Release ID information is required and supported for connection to Nortel equipment only. For connections to AT&T

ESS#4 and ESS#5, set RLS = 1.

pomw-25.4

Receive Objective Loudness Rating

The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are

provided on ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values

on page 498 arie-14

560 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

The ROLR value is downloaded to Meridian

Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload. Refer to

Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182

before changing these values. Not prompted when United Kingdom (UK) package 190 is equipped.

RPEB 16-1000

RXMT 1-(5)-20

Pack/Rel

Remote Peripheral Equipment Buffers, 2.0

Mb/s RPE rpe-15

Retransmission Threshold

Enter in units of 5 per cent. RXMT is the % of retransmissions allowed in 15 minutes before out of service is enforced, or:

RXMT = (# of packets retransmitted) Ö (total

# packets sent).

basic-1

SATN l s c u

SBA_ADM_INS

0-(2)-64

SBA_USER

0-(100)-500

TN of SADM/Data Line Card associated with

IND CSL. For SL-1 telephone with CLS =

CMSA.

cls-7 l = 0-255, Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 adminset-21

Maximum Administrator and/or Installer Log

Ins allowed at one time.

adminset-21

SECU

SEMT

SEVERITY

(NO) YES

(1)-5

Maximum User Log Ins allowed at one time.

Security for Meridian Link applications

When set to NO, the host computer must specify both the TN and DN of the associate set in connect, answer and release messages.

Prompted when the Integrated Services

Digital Network Application Module Link for

Third Party Vendors (IAP3P) package 153 is equipped for ISDN/AP Third Party.

iap3p-12

Number of Status Enquiry Messages sent within 128 ms from the network side msdl-24 alarm-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 561

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

(NONE)

CRITICAL

MAJOR

MINOR

<CR>

Comment

Alarm Severity of a particular alarm entry

No rating (default status)

System operation is in jeopardy

Serious condition, the system is operational

Error condition detected, system operation not affected

Retains current value

SID

SIDE

SIZE

Pack/Rel

xxxx

(USR) NET Meridian 1 node type Slave to the controller

Network, the controlling switch

Prompted only if IFC = SL-1, ESIG or ISIG.

Opposite sides of the PBX-to-PBX interface must be set as NET or USR. The call processing software uses these labels to handle call collision.

pri-12

(0)- 65534

System ID number

The SID is used for polling an SL-1 for ACD,

CDR and traffic reports. It can also be printed and changed using LD 2.

basic-1

(50)-1500

Size of History File buffer in characters

The History File stores system messages in

Protected Data or P data and uses an SDI port address. The History File survives initialization, but is lost when SYSLOAD occurs or the length of the file is changed.

The History File cannot be created if all 16 I/

O ports are defined. Prompted if ADAN =

HIST or TRF

Word Size of Audit Trail buffer

The Size entered here must be a multiple of

50 for correct memory storage.

hist-18 lapw-16

SL1B 16-2048

SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP

SL-1 Buffers

Small System does not require SL-1B buffers. If set higher than default they only consume memory. Refer to the Memory

Calculations Appendix in the Planning and

Engineering NTPs.

basic-1

Look up the Private IP address or Public IP address of an IP phone behind NAT.

Prompted only if LIS = SUBNET.

basic-5.00

(NO) YES

562 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

SMEM (NO) YES

Comment Pack/Rel

Short Memory test

On a manual SYS load the memory is tested on one pass, if (NO), memory is tested with normal six pass test. Not prompted on

Option 81C.

smem-19

SOLR 0-(1)-4 Sidetone Objective Loudness Rating

The SOLR value is downloaded to Meridian

Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload.

Before changing these values, refer to

Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182.

arie-14

SSDT

SSRC

2

3

(1)

0

4

12 dB

7 dB

17 dB

22 dB sidetone disabled

The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value.

The default value is 1 (12 dB). The recommended North American value for all releases is 1 (12 dB). Does not apply to

M2216.

Note:

The switch will print the actual dB value in overlay 22. However it will only accept a number in the range 0-4 in overlay 17.

0-159

0-(3700)-4000

Standby Synchronization DTSL

Enter the number of the DTSL used for

Standby Synchronization. Prompted if

SYNM = 2 or 5.

Signaling Server Resource Capacity

Note:

If the entered SSRC value exceeds the

SSRC value received from the Signaling

Server, then a warning is provided to the administrator indicating that the Virtual

Trunks registration may fail due to capacity mismatch.

basic-16 sip-4.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 563

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

SSUP (NO) YES

Comment

Senior Supervisor

Device assigned used by senior supervisor/ load manager. Cannot be YES if prompt

APRT is YES.

Pack/Rel

acdc-1

STOP

(1)-2

(1)-1.5-2

Number of stop bits

Note:

This prompt is blocked for co-resident Call

Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Serial port configuration is controlled from the Linux

Base layer. The prompt displays the current STOP configuration on the system. For example, STOP 1.

Large Systems. Prompted for asynchronous

ESDI ports.

Small Systems. To enter 1.5, use 1X5. STOP is not prompted for CARD 0 PORT 0 or when

TTY_TYPE = PTY.

Default number of stop bits for all three remote TTYs on an MGC is 1.

cls-19

SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY

(YES) Change customized text string by text string input. Prompted if the Electronic Brandlining

ISM parameter is set to Terminal Text

Broadcast (EBLN ISM value of 2).

Input by text string and

IDLE_DISP_STRING is prompted.

NO Input character by character and

IDLE_DISP_CHAR nn is prompted.

basic-23

SUPPRESS

0-(5)-127 alarm-19

Alarm occurrence threshold (prior to suppressing)

Determines the number of times an alarm may occur before it is no longer output.

Entering 0 indicates that all alarm occurrences are output (no suppression)

SYNC (NO)

YES

Asynchronous mode of operation for ESDI port

Synchronous mode of operation for ESDI port csl-7

564 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

SYNM

(0)

1

2

3

4

5

Comment

Synchronization Mode

No synchronization

Main input from Digital Trunk Signaling Link or DTSL

Main input and standby input from DTSL

Main input from external clock

Main input from DTSL; standby input from external clock

Main input from external clock; standby input from DTSL

SYNM is prompted with Integrated Digital

Access (IDA) package 122.

Pack/Rel

ida-16

T1 2-(4)-20 Retransmission Timer

Range in units of 0.5 seconds, (4) = two seconds cls-7

T2 0-(10)-255 cls-7

T200

T203

T23

T3

2-(3)-40

2-(10)-40

1-(20)-31

2-(5)-255

Maximum Time allowed without a frame being exchanged.

Retransmission Timer

Entry is in units of 0.5 seconds.

Maximum Time allowed without frames being exchanged

Interface guard Timer or DCHI only

This timer checks how long the interface takes to respond. Entry is in units of 0.5

seconds.

Timer for initial link setup in units of 0.5

seconds for ESDI only.

pri-12 pri-15 pri-12 cls-7

T310

TDS

110-(120) Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the

QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state.

This range applies to PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks qsig-20

0, 2, 4...158

Tone and Digit Switch (TDS or Fast TDS service loop)

Use even-numbered loops for Tone and Digit

Switch (TDS). Precede with X to remove.

basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 565

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

1-9 11-19

21-29 31-39

41-49

Small System

Comment Pack/Rel

lse-24

TEN

TERD

TERM

0-255 xxx

ALL

<CR>

Note:

For Small System, all XTD/DTR units must be removed from the SSC card (card

0) before TDS 0 can be removed.

Tone and Digit Switch loop, Systems with

Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Tenant to be accessible by way of PWnn

All Tenants allowed

No change to previous definitions.

Precede with X to remove.

lapw-16

Double Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20

0, 1, 2,...159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

G0,G1...G159

GEC loop or loops

N0,N1,...N159

Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications

T0, T1...T159

TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket.

X0,X1,...X159

0-255

Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be

TDS, CONF or MFSD

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Single Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20

0, 1, 2, ...159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

566 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

G0,G1...G159

Comment

N0,N1,...N159

GEC loop or loops

Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications

T0, T1...T159

TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket

X0,X1,...X159

0-255

Precede loop number with X to remove. If entry is for an odd-numbered loop, the preceding even numbered loop cannot be

TDS, CONF or MFSD

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

TERQ

Pack/Rel

fnf-25

Quadruple Density Terminal equipment loop or loops phtn-20

0, 1, 2, ...159

Meridian 1 loop or loops

G0,G1...G159

GEC loop or loops

N0,N1,...N159

Precede loop number with N to create a phantom loop for third party applications

T0, T1...T159

TVT loop or loops - Swedish Televerket

X0,X1,...X159

Precede loop number with X to remove.

TIMR

TMDI

TITE

(NO) YES

(YES)

NO

(0)

2

Change protocol timer value

T1 transmit Equalization

0 - 200 feet

200 - 400 feet basic-1

TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK) Small

System

Other Card basic-24 basic-24

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 567

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

TKEY [24]

Comment Pack/Rel

Validity time for session key (in hours). Min.

value is 8 hrs, maximum is 168 hrs. Default is 24 hrs.

basic-5.00

TMRK 96, (128)

TN l s c u c u

Length of cadence increments in ms

Refer to the Flexible Tone and Digit Switch cards in the Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106. See CLN prompt in LD 56.

basic-13

Valid Terminal Number that when accessed returns a test tone

Valid Terminal Number, Small System

Prompted when DTDT = EXT.

basic-1

TODR

TOLR

0-23

(0)-63

TPO (NO)

YES

TRIGGER a...a

Time Of Daily Routines

Do not enable Traffic Period option

Enable Traffic Period option basic-1

Transmit Objective Loudness Rating

The default is 0, indicating no change to the default +45 dB. The number entered in this field corresponds to an offset value. The offsets and their corresponding values are

provided on ROLR / TOLR/ AOLR Offsets and Values

on page 498

The TOLR value is downloaded to Meridian

Modular telephones after sysload except when performing parallel reload. Refer to

Transmision Parameters (553-3001-182) before changing these values.Not prompted when UK package is equipped arie-14 basic-21 alarm-19

Trigger string for alarm tables

The trigger string can be up to 10 alphanumeric characters. At least one character must be alphabetic (a-z). Plus sign

(+) can be used to indicate the "wild card" entry.

For example, BUG++++ includes all BUG system messages. The mnemonics supported for this prompt are lists at the beginning of this overlay. A value must be entered; <CR> is not accepted

568 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TRLL 1-31 1-31

Comment

Test RPE Local Loop back

Perform complete 2.0 Mb/s RPE loop testing, including local loop back, in the RPE groups as part of daily routine. Not supported for Small System. Precede with X to delete.

Pack/Rel

rpe2-15

TRNS

(NONE)

HELP

BOTH

Selects which messages are going to be translated

Help and Option 81C specific system messages are printed in English version

Help is printed in translated version and

Option 81C specific system messages in

English

Help and Option 81C specific system messages are printed in translated version mlms-20

TRSH

TSO

TTY

0-15

(NO)

YES

0-15

Threshold

Digital Trunk Interface Threshold set defined in LD 73.

pri-19 basic-21 Do not enable Trunk Seizure option

Enable Trunk Seizure option

Pre-defined MSDL-SDI terminal number

Prompted if ADAN = STA sta-19

TTY_TYPE

TTYLOG

TUBO

(SDI)

LSL

PTY

0-65534

(NO)

YES basic-22

TTY logical type for Small System.

TTY_TYPE is only prompted when adding or changing TTY devices. For a PRT device,

TTY_TYPE is fixed as SDI.

Standard TTY type (default)

Low speed Link type

Pseudo TTY type muli-19

Log buffer size

When 0 is entered, there is no log file

Regular message processing speed on AML basic-25

Double message processing speed on AML

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 569

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

TYPE

ADAN

ALARM

ATRN

CEQU

CFN

OVLY

PARM

PWD

VAS

Comment

Type of data block

All input/output devices (includes Dchannels)

Alarm filter configuration data

When TYPE = ALARM, the system automatically prints out the current alarm and exception filters Must have Alarm

Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package 243.

Aries Transmission

Common Equipment parameters

Configuration data block

Overlay area options

System Parameters

System Password and Limited Access to

Overlay Password

When entering yes, the PWD2 is prompted unless LAPW is used and Multi-User Log In is enabled.

Value Added Server

Pack/Rel

basic-19 alarm-19 basic-19 basic-19 basic-1 basic-19 basic-19 basic-19 basic-19

USER

ACD

ADM

Output message types

When ADAN = HST, users can be BUG,

MCT, MTC, SCH and TRF. Prompted when

ADAN is PRT, TTY or, HST.

For Small System: basic-20

• LSL is not a valid response for the USER prompt

• USER is not prompted if TTY_TYPE =

LSL.

When TTY_TYPE = PTY, the response to

USER must be one of the following: MTC,

BUG, SCH, FIL, TRF, MCT

Automatic Call Distribution printer for reports

APL

Administrator SBA access level to be stored in the history file. Precede with X to remove.

Auxiliary Processor Link for IVMS

570 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

BGD

Comment

Background Terminal

Mutually exclusive with ACD, APL, CDL,

CMC, CMS, HSL, and LSL.

ACD

ADM

Software error

CDR Data Link

APL

BGD

BUG

CDL

CMC

CMS

Communications Management Center

Command and Status Link

Port must be defined as a synchronous ESDI

Customer Service Changes: Automatic Set

Relocation and Attendant Administration

Software error

CDR Data Link

Communications Management Center

Command and Status Link

Port must be defined as a synchronous ESDI

Pack/Rel

adminset-21

CSC

CTY

FIL

Customer Service Changes: Automatic Set

Relocation and Attendant Administration

CDR TTY port to output CDR records

This is a special response which applies to

Alarm Filtering message output.

When a port is assigned this User type, only

Alarm Filtered messages is output. The messages listed at the TRIGGER prompt are the messages that appear for this user type.

When AF_STATUS = OFF, no system messages are output to the port with FIL type.

The output appears as shown below. The field definitions follow.

<severity> <report id> <time> <date>

<sequence number> <event> <tab>

Operator data: <data> <tab> Expert data:

<data> alarm-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 571

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

Where: severity:

• **** = Critical

• *** = Major

• ** = Minor

• blank = None report id: The system message character string (BUG1234, ERR5683, etc.) time: hh:mm:ss date: dd/mm/yy sequence number: The sequence the message appears. The range is 0-65535, and the numbers are right justified. Meridian

1 and auxiliary processor messages have separate sequence numbers.

event: This indicates the type of event that is being output: MSG (message), SET (set alarm), CLR (clear alarm).

tab: 6 character indent

Operator data: This contains additional information to help clear the fault. This field contains the additional message information

(TN, loop number, etc.) that the message contains. Up to 30 characters appear.

Expert data: This field may not always appear. It contains system expert information.

HSL

ICP

INS

ACD/D High-Speed AUX link

Intercept Computer Link

Installer SBA access level to be stored in the history file. Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

adminset-21

LSL

MCT

ACD/D Low-Speed AUX link

Small System uses LSL for Meridian Mail administration/maintenance access

Malicious Call Trace TTY port along with other users mct-20

572 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MTC

Comment

Maintenance includes AUD, BUG and ERR if enabled by prompt ERRM in PARM. Use

MTC for the system monitor or XSM.

NOO

OSN

No Overlay allowed

OSN output device

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

PMS

SCH

TRF

USR

Property Management System interface

Service Change or any data base change

Traffic

User SBA access level to be stored in the history file.

Precede with X to remove.

adminset-21

USER_NAME a...a

USR

VAS

VCNA

ISLD

PRI

SHA

SHAV

VNS

NEW

CHG

OUT

<CR>

(NO) YES basic-4.50

Name assigned to user, up to 11 characters

User. Precede any of the following with X to remove.

Integrated Services Signaling Link

Dedicated.

D-channel for ISL only, in dedicated mode, without using the PRI channel.

Primary Rate Interface. D-channel for ISDN

PRA only.

Shared mode. D-channel used for both

ISDN PRA and ISL. D-channel must be using a PRI channel.

Shared Virtual Network Services. D-channel shared between PRA, VNS and ISLD.

Virtual Network Services. D-channel used for Virtual Network Services or for ISLD.

New Value Added Server

Change Value Added Server

Remove Value Added Server

End VAS prompting sequence pri-12 cls-7

Virtual Network Services Network Call Party

Name Display available over this D-channel vns-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 573

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response

VCRD (NO) YES

Comment

Virtual Network Services Network Call

Redirection available over this D-channel

VNSC (0)-xx

VNSM

VNSP

1-300

0-32700

Pack/Rel

vns-16

Virtual Network Services Customer number associated with the D-channel.

Customer number is defined in LD 15.

Customer 0 is the default for the D-channel.

Ensure customer 0 is not actually a user of the D-channel before changing.

vns-16 vns-16 Virtual Network Services Maximum controlled by the D-channel

Virtual Network Services Private Network

Identifier (PNI) for the far-end customer vns-16

VOLR (NO) YES

VSID

VSIG

VTRO

0-127

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Handset Volume Reset

To have handset volume reset whenever the user hangs up or uses handsfree, set VOLR

= YES.

agcr-20

VAS Identifier

Identifier for the VAS providing the services, this includes IS, Data Services, Voice

Messaging, Alpha terminals.

The value entered here is associated with the value which can be entered at the ELAN prompt. By responding to VSID, you are preparing to associate a link with a Value

Added Server ID to allow message transmission.

cls-7

Virtual Network Services Network Signalling denied/allowed.

VSIG=YES equal Signalling arrangement

=ESN5

VSIG=NO equal Signalling arrangement

=STD basic-23

Trunk Route Optimization before answer available over this D-channel for VNS.

1. Advanced Network Services (NTWK) package 148 is equipped

2. Trunk Anti-Tromboning (TAT) package

293 is not equipped

3. VCRD = YES vns-21

574 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

VXCT

0, 2, 4, ... 252

Comment

Virtual XCT loop number. ‘X’ to remove existing VXCT

XCT

0, 2, 4,...158

XNUM

XSM

D0-D158

S0-S158

0-254

(1)-4

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

xct-15

Extended Conference/TDS/MFS

Loop number for NT8D17 Conference/TDS/

MFS card. Enter an even network loop number for TDS/MFS functions. The

Conference function is automatically assigned the next higher or odd loop number.

System prints: TDS n MFS n CNF n+1

This indicates that TDS and MFS functions are configured on the even loop "n" and conference function is configured on the next higher odd loop.

Precede with X to remove. Both loops must be disabled first. Since TN 0 0 0 0 cannot be used in non-multigroup systems, it is recommended that Conference/TDS/MFS card be placed in loop 0.

You may configure more than 16 conference loops; however, enabling more than 16 conference loops may cause the system to lock-up.

Dealer conference loop

Spare dealer conference loop

Place in the same group as the units planned to use this loop.

XCT loop number for NT8D17 Conference/

TDS Card, Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric ohol-20 ohol-20 fnf-25

Number of retransmissions per message for

PMSI.

If XTMR = 0, this prompt does not appear.

pms-19

Extended System Monitor

This is the SDI port for the Extended System

Monitor. Prompt USER must be set to MTC

(maintenance messages) for the system xpe-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 575

LD 17: Configuration Record 1

Prompt Response Comment

monitor port. Only one port can be XSM =

YES.

XTMR (0)- 6

YALM (FDL) DG2

Pack/Rel

PMS acknowledgment time (the time measured in seconds to wait for the acknowledgment message from the PMS)

Where: 0 = no retransmission.

pms-19

Yellow Alarm Method

Prompted only if the frame format is ESF. If

YALM is not prompted, DG2 was set automatically. If YALM is prompted the response varies between countries.

The default is FDL when the frame format is

ESF. When the frame format is D2, D3, or

D4, the default is DG2.

pri-19

576 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 17: LD 18: Speed/Group Call,

Pretranslation, Special Service,

16-Button DTMF and Hotline

This overlay allows data for Speed Call, System Speed Call, Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, and Enhanced Hotline and 16-Button DTMF to be created or modified. The data can be printed using

Overlay 20.

The overlay allows the ability to add and copy multiple Speed Call lists and System Speed Call lists. The number of lists allowed by each system is subject to the system type and memory available. Refer to

Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details concerning speed call requirements.

The Pretranslation List configuration takes place in this program. To enable the Pretranslation feature in

LD 15, the list must be configured here using the XLAT prompt.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by task:

Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records on page 578

Configure Group Call lists

on page 578

Configure Speed Call lists

on page 579

Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list

on page 579

Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists

on page 580

Configure Special Service List on page 580

Move from one group or list to another on page 581

Configure Group Hunt

on page 581

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 577

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Configure ABCD data block

on page 582

Section

Other Information:

Flexible feature code information

on page 583

Compute Speed Call list memory size and disk records

Use this prompt sequence to determine if there are enough memory and disk records for new

Speed Call and Hot Line lists. Compare the output with the "MEM AVAIL" and "DISK RECS

AVAIL" values output before the REQ prompt. See also "System memory and disk space" at the beginning of this document.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

NOLS

DNSZ

SIZE

Response

COMP aaa

1-8191

4-(16)-31

1-1000

Comment

Request = COMP (Compute disk and memory required for new lists)

Type of data block, where: aaa = SCL, SSC or HTL

(Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line estimation)

Number of lists to be added

Maximum DN size (length) of digits allowed for new lists

Maximum number of DNs allowed in new lists

Configure Group Call lists

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

GRNO

GRPC

STOR

Response

aaa

GRP xx

0-63

(YES) NO xxx yyy...y

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = GRP (Group Call list)

Customer number associated with this data block

Group number for group call

Allow or deny group call control to the originator

Entry number (0-19) and the digits stored with it

Entry number (0- 5) and digits stored with it for Small

System

578 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Configure Speed Call lists

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

LSNO

TOLS

NCOS

DNSZ

SIZE

WRT

STOR

WRT

Response

aaa aaa

0-8190

0-4095

0-8190

(0)-99

4-(16)-31

1-1000

(YES) NO xxx yyy...y

(YES) NO

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block, where aaa = SCL or SSC (Speed

Call list or System Speed Call list)

List Number for Speed Call (SCL)

List Number for System Speed Call (SSC)

To List (New speed call list number)

Network Class of Service for SSC

Maximum DN size (length) for Speed Call lists

Maximum number of DNs in Speed Call list

Data is correct and can be updated in the data store

Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it

Data is correct and can be updated in the data store

Assign a Pretranslation group to Speed Call list

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

XLAT

- PRE

- PST

- SDA

Response

aaa

PRE xx

0-254 0-8191

0-254 8191

0-8190

0-8190

0-8190

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = Pretranslation calling group assignment

Customer number

Pretranslation list (Calling group to Speed Call list correlation)

If list number 8191 is assigned to a group then pretranslation is removed for that group

Pretranslation Speed Call List number

Post-translation Speed Call List number

Single-Digit Access Speed Call List number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 579

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Configure Enhanced Hot Line lists

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

LSNO

NCOS

DNSZ

SIZE

WRT

STOR

WRT

Response

aaa

HTL xx

0-8190

0-4095

4-(16)-31

1-1000

(YES) NO xxx yyy...y

(YES) NO

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = Hot Line list

Customer number

List Number for Hotline (one for customer)

Network Class of Service for HTL

Maximum DN size (length) allowed for Hot Line list

Maximum number of DNs in Hot Line list

Data is correct and can be updated in the data store

Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it

Data is correct and can be updated in the data store

Configure Special Service List

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

SSL

SSDG

- CDPC

- TOLL

- ALRM

- TNDM

- SSUC

- NDGT

- SSDG

Response

aaa

SSL

1-15 xxxx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0) - 15

<CR>

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = Special Service list

Special Service List number

Special Service Digit or Digits

Called Party Control is enabled

Toll number

Alarm is enabled

Tandem

Special Service Unanswered Call Mark

Number of digits collected before the seizure of the outgoing CIS MFS trunk

Special Service Digit or Digits

580 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Move from one group or list to another

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

LSNO

TOLS

GRNO

TOGR

Response

MOV aaa xx xxxx

0-254 xx

0-63

Comment

Request = MOV

Group or List Type (aaa = GHT, GRP, SCL, SSC, or

SSL)

Customer number

List Number

To List

Group Number

To Group

Configure Group Hunt

GRNO

GRPC

DNSZ

SIZE

STOR

WRT

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

LSNO

CUST

PLDN

PLAT

Response

aaa

GHT

0-254 xx xxxx

1-254 0-8191

0-63

(YES) NO

4-(16)-31

1-1000 xxx yyy...y

(YES) NO

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = Group Hunt

List Number

Customer Number

Pilot DN

Post-translation calling group and list number

Group Number for group call

Group Call originator (does) does not have control

Maximum Directory Number Size (length)

Size of list

Entry number (0-999) and the digits stored with it

Data is correct and can be updated in the data store

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 581

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Configure ABCD data block

- C

- D

- *

- #

- B

- C

- D

- *

- #

CONT

- A

- B

- B

- C

- D

- *

- #

- RCAL

POST

- A

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TBNO

DFLT

PRED

- A aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa

Response

aaa

ABCD

1-254

1-254

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa aaaa

ADL x...x

(NO) YES aaaa

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block = ABCD (16 Button DTMF)

Table Number

Default function table number

Pre-Dial

A key assignment

B key assignment

C key assignment

D key assignment asterisk key assignment

# key assignment

Recall button assignment

Post-dial

A key assignment

B key assignment

C key assignment

D key assignment asterisk key assignment

# key assignment

Control

A key assignment

B key assignment

C key assignment

D key assignment asterisk key assignment

# key assignment

582 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Flexible feature code information

Flexible feature code information

Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions

Button

A

B

C

D

*

#

RCAL

Pred

RGAD

SNR

CFWA

SPCU

NUL

NUL

NUL

Post

RGAA

SNS

NUL

NUL

NUL

NUL

Control

CNFD

TGLD

DISD

NUL

NUL

NUL

Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics

Function

ADL x...x (maximum 31 digits)

Authorization Code

Automatic Set Relocation

Automatic Wake Up Activate

Automatic Wake Up Deactivate

Automatic Wake Up Verify

Busy Number Redial Activate

Busy Number Redial Deactivate

Busy Number Redial Toggle

Call Detail Recording Charge Account

Call Forward All Calls Activate

Call Forward All Calls Deactivate

Call Forward All Calls Verify

Call Forward Destination Deactivation

Call Forward Hunt Override

BNRD

BNRK

CDRC

CFWA

CFWD

CFWV

CFDD

CFHO

Pre-dial mode mnemonic

ADL x...x

AUTH

ASRC

AWUA

AWUD

AWUV

Post-dial mode mnemonic

ADL x...x

BNRA

BNRK

CDRC

Control mode mnemonic

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 583

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Function Pre-dial mode mnemonic

Call Park

Call Park Access CPAC

Carriage return (use default from Table 7) <CR>

Conference Diagnostics

Conference Digit 1

COND

Conference 6 Trunk Disconnect

Customer Call Forward Activate

Customer Call Forward Deactivate

Customer Call Forward Toggle

CCFA

CCFD

CCFK

DEAF Deactivate RGA/LND/SNR/CFW

Disconnect Digit 3

Electronic Lock Activate

Electronic Lock Deactivate

Group Hunt Pilot DN

Incoming Call Indicator Activate

Incoming Call Indicator Deactivate

Incoming Call Indicator Override

ELKA

ELKD

GRHP

ACAI

ICID

Incoming Call Indicator Print

Integrated Message System Access

Last Number Redial

Maintenance Access

Malicious Call Trace

NUL (leave key without an assigned function)

ICIP

IMSA

RDLN

MNTC

NUL

Override

Paging and Radio paging code

Permanent Hold

Pickup DN

Pickup Group

Pickup Ringing Number

Ring Again Activate

PAG x...x

PUDN

Post-dial mode mnemonic

CPRK

<CR>

C6DS

ICPO

RDLN

MTRC

NUL

OVRD

PAG x...x

HOLD

PUGR

PURN

RGAA

Control mode mnemonic

<CR>

CNFD

DISD

NUL

584 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Function

Ring Again Deactivate

Ring Again Verify

Room Status

Speed Call Controller

Speed Call Erase

Speed Call User

Store Number (Erase)

Store Number (Redial)

Store Number (Save)

System Speed Call User

Terminal Diagnostics

Toggle Digit 2

Trunk Answer From Any Station

Trunk Verification

User Status

User for set based administrator

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pre-dial mode mnemonic

RGAD

RGAV

RMST

SPCC

SPCE

SPCU

RDNE

RDSN

RDST

SSPU

TRMD

Post-dial mode mnemonic

SPCU

RDSN

RDST

SSPU

Control mode mnemonic

TGLD

TFAS

TRVS

USTA

USER

Alphabetical list of prompts

*

#

Prompt Response

aaaa

Comment

# key assignment. For more information, see Table 5:

Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature

Code mnemonics

on page 583.

Pack/Rel

abcd-14 aaaa

A aaaa

Asterisk key assignment. For more information, see

Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature

Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible

Feature Code mnemonics

on page 583.

abcd-14

A key assignment. For more information, see

Table

5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 585

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Prompt Response Comment

functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature

Code mnemonics

on page 583.

Pack/Rel

ALRM

B

(NO) YES aaaa

Alarm is enabled

B key assignment. For more information, see Table

5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature

Code mnemonics

on page 583.

basic-1 abcd-14

C

CDPC

CONT

CUST aaaa

(NO) YES Called Party Control is enabled

(NO)

YES

Control; default mnemonics are used. For more

information, see Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics

on page 583.

Modify control mode table. For more information, see

Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature

Code functions on page 583.

basic-1 basic-1 xx

C key assignment. For more information, see Table

5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature

Code mnemonics

on page 583.

abcd-14

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.

Prompted when REQ = NEW or CHG and LSNO =

<CR> basic-1

D

DFLT

DNSZ aaa

1-254

<CR>

4-(16)-31

D key assignment. For more information, see Table

5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature Code functions on page 583 and Table 6: Flexible Feature

Code mnemonics

on page 583.

abcd-14

Default function table number

Prompted if a table has been defined for the customer.

No table is to be used as the default.

basic-1

Directory Number Size

Maximum length of DN allowed for Speed Call list or

Group Hunt list. Range is 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 31.

For Speed Calling the default = 16. Numbers between

1 and 30 are rounded up to the next valid number.

Once defined DNSZ should not be changed. Instead, print out the list, remove it with REQ = OUT and optf-1

586 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

rebuild the list with the new DNSZ. Prompted when

REQ = NEW and TYPE = GHT.

GRNO 0-63

GRP 0 - 4095

GRPC

<CR>

X

(YES)

Group Number for group call

Pack/Rel

grp-20

Ringing Number Pickup Group (RNPG) using this speed call list. Repeat for all groups sharing the same list.

grp-1

To reprompt "LSNO"

To remove

LSNO

NO

0-4095

0-8190

<CR>

Group Call originator does have control

If GRPC = YES in the Group Call List, the originator has control: when the originator goes on hook, the call is terminated. If GRPC = NO and the originator goes on hook, the Group Call acts like a conference call: the call remains active until all members go on hook.

grp-20

Group Call originator does not have control

List Number for Speed Call, System Speed Call,

Group Hunting and Hotline.

System Speed Call and Hot Line lists

A Speed Call list associated with Call Pickup network wide groups.

to end

Use only when REQ = CHG and TYPE = GHT.

List numbers exceeding four digits have the left most digits truncated, and only the right most digits is accepted. A Hot Line list uses a System Speed Call list entry, only one Hot Line list is allowed per customer.

MSCL must be defined in LD 17.

optf-1

NCOS (0)-99

NDGT (0) - 15

Network Class of Service

Prompted when TYPE = SSC or HTL.

basic-17

Number of digits which can be collected before the seizure of the outgoing CIS MFS trunk.

Number of digits to be accepted from the incoming

MFS trunk.

If the outgoing call is recognized as MFS call then the trunk will not be seized until the number of the user cismfs- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 587

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Prompt Response Comment

dialed digits equals to the NDGT or EOD timer expires or the OCTO ('#') is dialed.

If the incoming MFS call is recognized then the trunk should be requested to issue the BX MFS signal to the CIS CO party until the number of the accepted from the trunk digits equals to NDGT.

Pack/Rel

NOLS 1-8191 Number of lists to be added. Prompted if REQ =

COMP

PLAT

PLDN

POST

PRE

PRED

PST

1-254 0-8191 xxxx

Post-translation calling group and list number

List number 8191 is used to remove the group from being post-translated.

Pilot DN. Prompted when LSNO = <CR>.

pldn-15 pldn-15

(NO)

YES

0-8190

Do not modify Post-dial table

Default mnemonics are used; see Table 7.

Modify Post-dial table abcd-14

(NO)

YES

0-8190

Pre-translation Speed Call List number

Precede with X to remove.

pxlt-15

Do not modify Pre-dial pre-dial function table. Default mnemonics are used. For more information, see

Table 5: Default 16-button DTMF Flexible Feature

Code functions on page 583.

abcd-14

Modify the pre-dial function table. For more

information, see Table 6: Flexible Feature Code mnemonics

on page 583.

Post-translation Speed Call List number

Precede with X to remove.

pxlt-15

RCAL

REQ

ADL x...x

NUL

CHG

COMP

Recall button assignment

Autodial, where x...x is the autodial number to a maximum of 31 digits.

To leave the RCAL button without an assigned autodial number

Request

Change existing data block

Compute memory and disk requirements for new

Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line lists abcd-14 basic-19

588 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CPY xxx

END

MOV

NEW xxx

OUT

Comment

Copy speed call data. Where: xxx = 1-100.

The ability to copy multiple Speed Call and System

Speed Call lists is supported.

Exit overlay program

Move data block from one group or list to another.

Pack/Rel

MOV command can be used to renumber one group call or speed call list to another.

basic-25.4

Add new data block. Where: xxx = 1-100.

The ability to create multiple speed Call and System

Speed Call lists is supported.

Remove data block.

SDA 0-8190

SIZE 1-1000

1-96

Single-digit Access Speed Call List number

Precede with X to remove.

pxlt-15

Maximum number of DNs in Speed Call or Hot Line lists

Maximum number of DNs in Group Hunt list

Once defined, SIZE should not be changed. Instead, print out the list in LD 20, remove it with REQ = OUT and rebuild the list with the new SIZE. SIZE is not prompted for TYPE = GRP or PRE.

optf-1

SSDG

SSL

SSUC

STOR xxxx

<CR>

X

Special Service Digitone Digit or Digits (1-4 digits) opcb-14

To proceed past SSDG prompt.

Precede SSDG entry with X to remove it.

The SSDG prompt, followed by the CDPC, TOLL and

ALRM prompts, reappears after each ALRM prompt until the list contains 100 entries or a <CR> is entered for SSDG. Precede with X to remove.

Special Service List number

Precede with X to remove.

supp-14 1-15

X

(NO) YES Special Service Unanswered Call mark

If the outgoing call is recognized as SSUC (that is, if the first 1 - 4 digits outpulsed to the trunk = SSDG with

SSUC = YES), then such a call requires some specific disconnect treatment.

cist-21

Store xxx yyy ... y For TYPE = SCL, SSC, or HTL the input format is entry number and digits stored against it. Where: optf-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 589

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Prompt Response

xx yyyy

Comment

• xxx = list entry number from 000 to 999

• yyy ... y = digits stored with each list entry number xxx

For TYPE = GRP the input format is member number and member DN. Where: xx yy

• xx = member number (00-19 for 51C, 61C, and 81C or 0-5 for Small System)

• yyyy = member DN

If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped, up to seven digits are allowed; otherwise, only four digits can be entered.

For TYPE = GHT the input format is Group Hunt entry and digits stored against it. Where:

• xx = GHT entry number from 00 to 95

• yyyy = digits stored

<CR> Stop STOR prompt

For Speed Call, System Speed Call or Hot Line the member number must conform with SIZE and the number of digits must conform to prompt DNSZ.

Digits may include "*" and "#" if the Outpulsing, asterisk and octothorpe (OPAO) package 104 is equipped.

xxx <space> <CR>

Remove entry

Pack/Rel

TBNO

TNDM

1-254 Table Number

The number of the ABCD table to be added, changed or removed abcd-14

(NO) YES Send MFC H tandem signal

Prompted when the International Supplementary

Features (SUPP) package 131 and Multifrequency

Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128 are equipped.

supp-14

TOGR

TOLL

0-63 To Group

New group call group number.

(NO) YES Toll number

The SSDG entry is a toll number grp-1 opcb-14

590 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TOLS 0-8190

Comment

To List

New speed call list number.

TYPE

ABCD

CPNW

GHT

GRP

HTL

PRE

SCL

SSC

Type of data block

16-Button DTMF data block

Call Pickup Network Wide data

Group Hunt data block

Group call data block

Hot Line data block

Pretranslation data block

Speed Call List or pretranslation data block

System Speed Call data block

WRT

XLAT

Pack/Rel

optf-1 basic-1

(YES) NO Write

Data is correct and can be updated in data store.

The Prompt WRT follows prompts SIZE and STOR asking you to confirm the correctness of the data just entered. If data is correct, enter "YES" or <CR>.

A response of "NO" causes the data just entered to be ignored and SCH3213 is output.

A response of "****" aborts the program. Only the last

STOR value is lost. All previous values to which WRT was "YES" or <CR> are saved.

The following information is output with the WRT prompt:

ADDS: MEM: xxxxx DISK: yy.y

Where: optf-1

• xxxxx = the amount of protected memory

• yy.y = the number of disks records required for the new Speed Call list

Check the "MEM AVAIL" and "DISK RECS AVAIL" output values before the REQ prompt. See also

"System memory and disk space" at the beginning of this document.

xxx yyyy Calling group number to translation Speed Call list number correlation. Format if International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is not equipped, where: pxlt-8

• xxx = Pretranslation group number, 0-254

• xxx = Group 0 is used for trunks.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 591

LD 18: Speed/Group Call, Pretranslation, Special Service, 16-Button DTMF and Hotline

Prompt Response

xxx

Comment

• xxx = Group 1 is used for attendant consoles.

• xxx = Groups 2-254 can be used for other calling groups.

• yyyy = List number to be used for Pretranslation,

0-8191. 8191 is used to remove the group from pretranslation.

Pretranslation group number. Format if International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped, where:

<CR>

• xxx = Group 0 is used for trunks.

• xxx = Group 1 is used for attendant consoles.

• xxx = Group 2-254 can be used for other calling groups.

End the prompt group.

Pack/Rel

592 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 18: LD 19: Code Restriction

Overlay program 19 allows data for code restrictions to be created or modified.

Code Restriction is used to control the digits that can be dialed on a COT or FEX trunk route by a Toll

Denied (TLD), Conditionally Toll Denied (CTD) or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN) Class of Service telephone. See also New Flexible Code Restriction in LD 49.

Route 31 is not an exclusively private route. It can be configured as a private route in LD 16.

For small systems, Overlay program 19 is replaced by Overlay 49.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block

on page 593

CRB: Code Restriction data block

on page 594

FGDB: Feature Group D data block on page 594

ANI: Automatic Number Identification data block

Prompt Response

REQ: aaa

TYPE:

ANII

ANI

0-31

ANIT

NPA xxx

200- 999

Comment

Request

Type of data block = ANI (Automatic Number Identification)

ANI Data Block Index

Invalid ANI treatment

First 3 ANI digits in NPA format

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 593

LD 19: Code Restriction

Prompt Response

3ANI xxx

SLV3

NXX

NXX xxx yyy

SLV6

- SUB

Comment

3 Digit ANI (denied) allowed

Number of digits for screening

Range of end-office numbers xxx Number of digits for screening xxxx yyyy Range of subscriber numbers

CRB: Code Restriction data block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

NCOS

CUST

ROUT

TORT

CLR

ALOW

DENY aaa

CRB

0-99 xx

0-511

0-511

Response Comment

Request

Type of data block = CRB (Code Restriction)

NCOS value for subscribers

Customer number associated with this data block

Route number

To Route aaaa Codes (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)

200-999... 200-999 NXX, NPA codes allowed

200-999... 200-999 NXX, NPA codes denied

FGDB: Feature Group D data block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

FGNO

CIC

CCLS

PRES

OVLP

Response

aaa

FGDB

0-127

0000-9999 a...a

(YES) NO

(YES) NO

Comment

Request

Type of data block = Feature Group D

Feature Group D block number

Carrier ID

Carrier Class (a...a = IC, INC, or CONS)

Presubscription

Overlapped outpulsing by Local Exchange Carrier

(LEC)

594 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

SAC

ANII

CDAN

SHAN

PRTD

LDAC

LAAC

OPER

IITP

CPAR

INIT

ENBL

ENBS

IFTO

DGTO

MONT

Prompt

CCAN

INTR

ADFT

IIT

Response

aaa bbb xxx xxx xxx

0-31

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) ALL aaa

Comment

Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening

(aaa = NAM, NA0, INT, IN0, OPR, SAM, SAX, SA0,

CUT, or (ALL); bbb = (YES) or NO)

Service Access Codes

ANI Data Block Index

ANI Digits in CDR Records

Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays

Printout Control for Invalid II or ANI Digits

Long Distance Access Code (aaa = AC1 or AC2) aaa Local Area Access Code (aaa = AC1 or AC2)

DN nnn ... nnn RAN nnn

(NO) YES

Treatment for 0+, 0- calls

Intercept Treatment

(OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn ... nnn

Intercept Treatment for Invalid Address Format

(OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn ... nnn

Intercept Treatment for Invalid IIs xx yyyy zz

(NO) YES

Valid II, II Type, and NCOS for ANI screening bypass

Call Processing parameters

(NO) YES

1-(12)-30

1-(5)-30

2-(120)-254

128-(640)-5000

0-(256)-2048

Length of Initial String of dialed digits on outgoing calls

Long Enbloc dialing timeout

Short Enbloc dialing timeout

Inter-field FGD timeout in increments of 2 seconds

Interdigits timeout

Minimum On-Hook Time

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

3ANI (DENY)

Comment

3 Digit ANI denied

Apply invalid ANI treatment

Pack/Rel

fdg-17

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 595

LD 19: Code Restriction

Prompt Response

NCOS xx

Comment

3 Digit ANI allowed

Use this NCOS value (0-99)

Pack/Rel

ADFT (OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn . . . nnn

Intercept Treatment for Invalid Address format

ALOW 200-999 ... 200-999

NXX, NPA codes Allowed

<CR> Proceed to next prompt.

Prompted when CLR = DENY or <CR>.

ANII 0-31 ANI Data Block Index

When ANII = 0, there is no ANI screening; 1-31 is the

ANI block index number.

fgd-17 basic-1 fgd-17

ANIT fgd-17

CCAN

(OVF)

RAN xxx

DN xxxx

NCOS xx

Invalid ANI treatment

Overflow tone

RAN route (0-511)

Internal or external DN (1-16 digits)

Network Class of Service value (0-99)

IN0

OPR

SAM

SAX

SA0

CUT

(ALL) aaa (YES) Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening provided.

aaa NO Call Categories on calls to Carrier, and ANI screening not provided.

NAM

NA0

INT aaa can be any of the following:

1 + (inside World Zone 1)

0 + (inside World Zone 1)* (see note below)

1 + (outside World Zone 1)

0 + (outside World Zone 1)* (see note below)

0 - calls

1 + (Embodied SAC)

1 + (External SAC)

0 + (External SAC)* (see note below)

Cut-Through

All call types (Default when REQ = NEW) fgd-17

596 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

CCLS

CDAN

CIC

CLR

IC

INC

CONS

ALOW

<CR>

Note:

aaa entries marked with the symbol * use zero; not the letter O. If the letter is entered in place of the number zero, no error appears. However, NAM and SAM is overridden.

Inter-Exchange Carrier Class

International Carrier Class

Consolidated Carrier Class fgd-17

(NO) YES ANI Digits in CDR Records fgd-17

0000-9999 Carrier ID. Response must be three or four digits.

fgd-17

DENY Denied codes.

If CLR = DENY all NPA/NXX codes are denied except those entered in response to prompt ALOW

(only ALOW is prompted).

Allowed codes.

If CLR = ALOW all NPA/NXX codes are allowed except those entered in response to prompt DENY

(only DENY is prompted).

Proceed to next prompt when REQ = CHG

When changing a CRB, if CLR = <CR> then both

ALOW and DENY are prompted.

For a new CRB, CLR must = ALOW or DENY.

basic-1

CPAR

CUST

(NO) YES Call Processing Parameters xx Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15 fgd-17 basic-1 basic-1 DENY 200-999 ... 200-999

NXX, NPA codes Denied

<CR> Proceed to next prompt

Prompted when CLR = ALOW or <CR>

DGTO 128-(640)-5000

Interdigits timeout

The maximum time between two digits within the same field, in multiples of 128 milliseconds. 5000 rounds down to 4992.

fgd-17

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 597

LD 19: Code Restriction

Prompt Response

ENBL 1-(12)-30

Comment

Long Enbloc dialing timeout

Before initial string is complete on outgoing calls.

ENBS

FGNO

IFTO

Pack/Rel

fgd-17

1-(5)-30

0-127

2-(120)-254

Short Enbloc dialing timeout

After initial string is complete on outgoing calls.

fgd-17

Feature Group D block number

The system automatically assigns FGNO numbers in sequential order when REQ = NEW.

fgd-17 fgd-17

Inter-field FGD Timeout in increments of 2 seconds

The maximum time between two fields on incoming calls (in seconds).

IIT (OVF) RAN nnn DN nnn. . .nnn

Intercept Treatment for Invalid IIs.

Where:

• OVF = Overflow tone

• RAN nnn = RAN route

• DN nnn . . . nnn = Network or local DN fgd-17

IITP xx yyyy zz Valid II, II Type, and NCOS for ANI screening bypass.

Where: xx = II in range 00-99 yyyy = one of the following II types:

• REGU = Regular

• 4A8P = 4 or 8 party

• HOTL = Hotel/Motel

• CLES = Coinless

• TST3 = Test 3

• AIOD = Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing

• COIN = Coin

• TST7 = Test 7 zz = optional NCOS number defining ANI screening bypass (00-99) fgd-17

598 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

When IITP = <CR> and REQ = NEW, the following shows the default arrangement. International codes

(12-19) are left undefined.

xx = 00, 01, 06, 07, 10, 20, 27, 95 yyyy = REGU, 4A8P, HOTL, CLES, TST3, AIOD,

COIN, ST7 zz = No is default

Pack/Rel

INIT

INTR

LAAC

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Length of Initial String

Intercept Treatment fgd-17 fgd-17 fgd-17

LDAC

AC1, AC2 Local Area Access Code

Prompted with Network Alternate Route Selection

(NARS) package 58.

AC1, AC2 Long Distance Access Code

Prompted with Network Alternate Route Selection

(NARS) package 58.

fgd-17

MONT 0-(256)-2048

Minimum On-hook Time

The minimum amount of time between acknowledgment wink and answer off-hook signal, in multiples of 128 milliseconds.

fgd-17

NCOS 0-99 NCOS value for subscribers

Reprompts current level NPA, NXX, or SUB.

fgd-17

NPA

NXX

OPER

200-999 First 3 ANI digits in NPA format. Only 3 digits are allowed, even when using 1+ dialing.

Return to REQ <CR> xxx yyy Range of end office numbers

Prompted if SLV3 = NXX. Where:

• xxx = starting or only NXX

• yyy = ending NXX (optional)

Reprompts NPA <CR>

DN nnn. . . nnn RAN nnn

Treatment for 0+, 0- calls. Where: nanp/ fgd-17 fgd-17 fgd-17

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 599

LD 19: Code Restriction

Prompt Response Comment

• DN nnn . . . nnn = 1-16 digit network or local DN

• RAN nnn = RAN route (0-511)

OVLP

PRES

PRTD

REQ

ROUT

SAC

SHAN

SLV3

Pack/Rel

(YES) NO Overlapped outpulsing by Local Exchange Carrier

(LEC)

(YES) NO Presubscription

(NO)

ALL

REJ fgd-17 fgd-17

Printout Control for Invalid II or ANI Digits

No printout

Printout for all invalid ANI and II digits

Printout all invalid II digits. Printout invalid ANI when not mapped to NCOS.

fgd-17

CHG

END

MOV

NEW

OUT

PRT

0-511

Request

Change the existing data block

Exit overlay program

Move data block to a new route

MOV command can be used to move code restriction data blocks to a new route.

Add new data block to the system

Remove the data block

Print FGD or ANI data block

Route number xxx xxx xxx . . . xxx

Service Access Codes.

Default codes: 700, 800, 900, 601.

(NO) YES Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays basic-1 basic-25.4

basic-1 fgd-17 fgd-17

NXX

NCOS xx

Number of digits for screening

6 or 10 digit screening. NXX prompt follows.

NCOS xx = 3 digit screening (0-99), all NPA map to

NCOS value, NPA is reprompted.

fgd-17

600 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

SLV6 SUB

NCOS xx

Comment

10 digit screening level, SUB prompt appears next.

Not allowed if an ending NXX level (yyy) was entered at NXX prompt.

Pack/Rel

fgd-17

6 digit screening level, reprompts NXX. All XXXX numbers under the NPA map to NCOS value (0-99)

SUB xxxx yyyy Range of subscriber numbers. Where:

• xxxx = starting or only subscriber number

• yyyy = ending subscriber number (optional) fgd-17

TORT

TYPE

0-511

ANI

CRB

FDGB

To Route

New route number

TORT is prompted when REQ = MOV.

Type of data block

ANI screening data block (for Feature Group D)

Code Restriction data Block

Feature Group D data Block basic-1 basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 601

LD 19: Code Restriction

602 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 19: LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide

Table 7: Print Reports in LDs 20, 21, and 22

on page 603 documents only those print reports that can be obtained in LDs 20, 21, and 22. In the Alphabetical list of many other Administration Overlays, you can find print options at the REQ and TYPE prompts.

To obtain a list of telephones that have particular features, refer to LD 81. Consult LD 93 to print data for

Attendant Console groups. Consult LD 95 to print information for the Call Party Name Display (CPND) data block.

Table 7: Print Reports in LDs 20, 21, and 22

Print Report

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data

on page 610

Analog set (500 and PBX) data

on page 610

Application Module Link (AML) data

on page 646

Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data on page 611

Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15

on page 647

Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business on page 612

Audit trail (AUDT) data

on page 662

Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data on page 611

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data on page 647

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data on page 647

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data on page 648

Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data on page 648

Communication Set (BCS) data on page 612

Call Detail Recording (CDR) data

on page 648

Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data

on page 613

Call Redirection (RDR) data

on page 648

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data

on page 649

Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key

on page 649

Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital on page 613

Code Restriction (CRB) data on page 649

Common Equipment (CEQU) data

on page 663

LD

20

21

20

21

21

21

20

21

22

20

21

21

21

21

20

20

21

20

21

20

22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 603

LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide

Print Report

Communication Set (BCS) data on page 612

Configuration Record (CFN) data on page 663

Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data on page 649

Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems

on page 663

Customer data block (CDB) on page 650

Data access card (DAC) data on page 614

Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data on page 615

Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data on page 615

Digital Communications Set data

on page 616

Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data on page 616

Digitone Receiver (DTR) data

on page 616

Directory number (DNB) data on page 617

Directory number (DNB) range data

on page 617

Directory number (DNB) selection on page 618

Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data on page 650

Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data

on page 651

Hospitality Management (HSP) data on page 651

Hot Line List (HTL) data on page 618

Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data on page 619

Input/output device (ADAN) data on page 664

Integrated Message Service (IMA) data on page 664

Integrated Message Service (IMS) data on page 651

Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data

on page 651

Intercept Treatments (INT) data

on page 652

ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data

on page 652

Issue and Release (ISS)

on page 665

Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data

on page 652

Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data on page 620

Networking (NET) data

on page 653

Mobile Extension (MOBX) data

on page 620

Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data on page 621

21

21

21

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

21

20

20

20

20

20

22

21

22

20

21

20

20

21

22

21

22

22

21

21

21

LD

604 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Print Report

Overlay area (OVLY) data on page 665

Package (PKG) information

on page 665

Password (PWD) data on page 666

Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data

on page 666

Power (PWR) data on page 621

Pretranslation (PRE) data

on page 621

Set Relocation (SRDT) data

on page 655

Special Service List (SSL) data

on page 622

Speed call lists (SCL) data

on page 622

System Limits (SLT) data on page 666

System Loop Limit (SLL) data

on page 666

System Patch (ISSP) data on page 667

Tandem Connection (TCON) data

on page 622

Tape ID (TID) data on page 667

Template (TEM) data on page 622

Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks on page 623

Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data on page 624

Test lines (TST) data on page 655

Timers (TIM) data

on page 655

Tone Detector (TDET) data on page 624

Trunk data: All Trunks

on page 625

Trunk Members (LTM) data

on page 655

Trunk data: Specific Trunk types on page 625

Universal Extension (UEXT) data on page 626

Unused Card (LUC) data

on page 627

Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data

on page 627

Unused Units (LUU) data

on page 627

Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data on page 628

Value Added Server (VAS) data

on page 667

Voice Mailbox (VMB) data

on page 629

20

20

20

21

21

22

22

22

20

22

20

20

21

20

20

22

22

22

22

20

22

20

20

20

20

20

20

21

20

20

LD

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 605

LD 20-22: Print Reports Guide

606 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 20: LD 20: Print Routine 1

Overlay program 20 allows data to be printed for the following blocks:

• all hunting

• group calls

• speed calls

• template data blocks

• terminal numbers

• pre-translation

Data Access Card (NT7D16)

By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC.

If a specific TN is entered, the current settings are uploaded from the unit and printed with the database settings. This is useful if parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modify procedures.

Templates

Templates store telephone information in system memory. Telephones with the same configuration of keys and Class of Service share the same template. This makes efficient use of Protected Data Store. Template Audit (LD 1) is used to remove unused templates.

Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP)

When printing the TN block, "MARP" is output next to a DN appearance if it is the MARP TN for that DN. When printing the DN block, "MARP" is output prior to the DES if it is the MARP

TN. Refer to Features and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for an explanation of the

MARP feature.

The security password can be required to print telephone and TN information. The password

(SPWD) is required if the Station Security Authcode package (229) is equipped and the password is defined.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 607

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Linked Overlay programs

Overlay programs 10, 11, 20 and 32 are linked thus eliminating the need to exit one Overlay and enter another. Once one of the above Overlays has been loaded it is possible to add, print and get the status of a set without having to exit one Overlay and load another.

The input processing has also been enhanced. Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:

1. a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt or

2. an abbreviated response. The system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.

Prompts and responses

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

MODL

TBNO

TN

CDEN

CUST

BUID

MOTN

GRP

MPHI

SPWD

TEN

DN aa xx xx x...x

l s c u

1-4095

YES NO xxxx x...x

x...x

Response

a...a

a...a

xxx

1-254 l s c u

Comment

Request (REQ responses begin on )

Type of data block (Type responses begin on Type of data block)

Model number for Small System and CS 1000S (1-3 digits)

Table Number for 16-Button DTMF

Terminal Number (l s c u ranges are defined on Terminal

Number)

Card Density (aa = SD, DD, 4D, or 8D)

Customer number

Media Gateway 1000B (MG 1000B) User ID

Main Office TN

Group number to be printed

Meridian Packet Handler Interface

Security Password

Tenant (0 or 1-511)

Directory Number

608 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

HTNO

DGRP

DMEM

FOR

KEY

CSDN

GRNO

Prompt

DATE

Response

dd mmm yyyy

Date

Comment

PAGE (NO) YES Data printed on a per-page basis

- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

Adjust Paper so that printing starts at top of sheet

Designator DES d...d

IP_PHONE_MODEL xxxxxx

KEM_RANGE

CTYP

<startKEM

>

<endKEM>

<CR>

(XDLC)

EDLC

IP Phone model as defined in LD 11

Specifies range of keys to print for the IP Phone 1200 Series

KEMs attached to an IP Phone 1220, or 1230.

<CR> = Print all IP Phone 1200 Series KEM keys.

Card type is 16 port DLC Card type is 24 port DLC

NACT

AACS

SCNO

LSNO

RNGE

(NO) YES Next Activity

NO YES

0-8190

0-8190

Application acquired set

Speed Call list Number

Speed Call or System Speed Call List Number xxxx yyyy Range of list entries to be printed, inclusive from first entry number to last entry number.

xxxx Hunt Number

INFO

TEM

EHNO

EMULATED

XTRK

0-2045

0-99

Dial Intercom Group

Dial Intercom Group (DIG) Member number a...a

Print template data for telephone type.

(NO) YES Print data for multi-line telephones x..x

0-63 aaa x...x

x...x

Print the Converged Service Directory Number

Group Call Group Number

Information for templates (aaa = FRM, USE, USS, or DEF)

Template

YES / NO Display IP Phones registered in Emulation Mode / nonaaa

External Hunt DN

Emulation Mode.

aaa = DB32, DB96 or M32S

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 609

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Alphabetical list of print reports

2.0 Mb/s Digital Trunk Interface (DT2) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

DT2 l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Comment

Print

2.0 Mb/s DTI output

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Customer number

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Analog set (500 and PBX) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

CUST

NUMZONE 0-1023

TEN

DATE

PRT

500

PBX xx

Response

l s c u

SD, DD, 4D, 8D

0-511 dd mmm yyyy

ACT

Comment

Print

500/2500 type analog sets

Private branch exchange sets

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density

Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Tenant

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

PAGE

DES

(NO) YES d...d

Data printed on a per page basis

Print all units with DES "d...d'

610 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Prompt Response

d+

<CR>

Comment

Print all units starting with "d"

Disregard DES

Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets data

REQ:

TYPE:

Prompt

TN

CDEN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

DES

NACT

PRT

ASTS

PBX

Response

l s c u,...

SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx xx dd mmm yyyy

(NO) YES d...d, d+, +

(NO) YES, END

Comment

Print

Associate (AST) Sets

Private branch exchange sets

Terminal Number (Up to 6

TNs can be entered)

Card Density

Customer number

Print data from date specified

Data printed on a per page basis

Designator

Next Activity

Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent (PRI2) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

PRI2 l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Comment

Print

ACD Priority Agents

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Customer number

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 611

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Attendant console (2250) data from LD 12 Business

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

PRT

Response

2250 l s c u

SD, DD, 4D, 8D

CUST xx

NUMZONE 0-1023

Print

M2250 Console

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density

Customer number

Numbering zone

Comment

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

DATE

PAGE dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Communication Set (BCS) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

CUST

TEN

DATE

PAGE

DES

PRT

Response

BCS

Comment

Print

Business Communication Sets l s c u Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx

0-511 dd mmm yyyy

ACT

Customer number

Tenant

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

(NO) YES d...d

d+

<CR>

Data printed on a per page basis

Print all units with DES "d...d'

Print all units starting with "d"

Disregard DES

612 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Call Pickup Network Wide (CPNW) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

PRT

Response

CPNW xx

Comment

Print

Call Pickup Network Wide data

Customer number

Channel data: Real Analog, Virtual Analog and Virtual Digital

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

RAC

VAC

VDC l s c u dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Print

Real Analog Channels

Comment

Virtual Analog Channels

Virtual Digital Channels

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Class Modem unit data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

CMOD l s c u dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Comment

Print

CLASS modem unit

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 613

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Calling Line ID Verification data

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

PRT

Response

CLIDVER xx

SORTBY

DN

(DN) TN x...x

TN l s c u

ESA_ONLY (YES) NO

SHORT (YES) NO

Comment

Print

Calling Line ID Verification

Customer number as defined in LD 15. (See CUST response on xx xx)

Data printed is sorted by DN or TN

Print for Directory Number. If no value is entered, the report includes all Directory Numbers.

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Print data for ESA call type only or print data for all call types.

Print data in short (80 characters) or long format.

Data access card (DAC) data

By responding R232, R422 or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, the configured parameters for each port or the entire DAC can be printed.

If a specific TN is entered, the current settings are uploaded from the unit and printed with database settings. This is useful if parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modifying procedures.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CUST

TEN

DATE

Response

PRT, LTN, LUU

DAC

R232

R422 l s c u xx

0-511 dd mmm yyyy

ACT

Comment

Print data, TN, or unit for the TN specified

Print data for whole DAC

Print data for the RS-232-C ports

Print data for the RS-422 ports

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Customer number

Tenant

Print data from the date specified

Print data from the last Activity

614 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Prompt

PAGE

DES

Response

(NO) YES d...d

d+

<CR>

Comment

Data printed on a per-page basis

Print all units with DES "d...d'

Print all units starting with "d"

Disregard DES

Dial Intercom Group (DIG) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DGRP

DMEM

PRT

Response

DIG xx

0-2045

0-99

Comment

Print

Dial Intercom Group

Customer number

Dial Intercom Group

Dial Intercom Group Member number

Dial Tone Detector (DTD and XTD) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

DTD

XTD l s c u xx dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Comment

Print

Dial Tone Detector data

Extended Dial Tone Detector

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Customer number

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 615

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Digital Communications Set data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DMC

PRT

Response

DCS xx l s c

Comment

Print

Digital Communications Set

Customer Number associated with this data block

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT)

Mobility Controller Location

Digital set (2000 series, 3000, and Aries) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

PRT

Response

a...a

Print

Comment

TN

CDEN

CUST l s c u

SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx

NUMZONE 0-1023

Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density

Customer number

TEN

DATE

0-511 dd mmm yyyy

ACT

Type of data block (Type responses begin on page

Alphabetical list of prompts on page 629)

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Tenant

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

PAGE (NO) YES Data printed on a per page basis

Digitone Receiver (DTR) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

PRT

Response

DTR l s c u

Print

Digitone Receiver data

Comment

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

616 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Prompt

CDEN

DATE

PAGE

Response Comment

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Directory number (DNB) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DN

DATE

PRT

Response

DNB xx x...x

dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES PAGE

DES d...d

d+

+

<CR>

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR>

Print

Directory number data block

Customer number

Print for Directory Number

Print data from the date specified

Print data from the last Activity

Data printed on a per-page basis

Print all units with DES "d...d'

Print all units starting with "d"

Print units with no DES assignment

Disregard DES

Comment

Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet

Directory number (DNB) range data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DN

PRT

Response

DNB xx xxxx-xxxx

Comment

Print

Directory Number block

Customer number

Directory Number range

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 617

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Directory number (DNB) selection

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DN

DATE

PRT

Response

DNB xx xxxx,xxxx,..

dd mmm yyyy

ACT

PAGE

DES

(NO) YES d...d

d+

+

<CR>

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR>

Comment

Print

Directory Number block

Customer number

Up to 8 DNs can be entered (separated by a comma)

Print data from the date specified

Print data from the last Activity

Data printed on a per-page basis

Print all units with DES "d...d'

Print all units starting with "d"

Print units with no DES assignment

Disregard DES

Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet

Group Call (GRP) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

GRNO

PRT

Response

GRP

0-63

Comment

Print

Group Call

Group Call Group Number

Hot Line List (HTL) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

PRT

Response

HTL

Print

Hot Line List

Comment

618 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Prompt

CUST

RNGE

Response

xx xxxx...xxxx

<CR>

Comment

Customer number

Range of Hot Line list entries (0-1000) to be printed for this customer

Print all entries in the Hot Line list

Hunting (HNT, GHT, and EHT) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

HTNO

EHNO

PRT

Response

HNT

EHT

GHT xx x...x

x...x

Comment

Print

Hunting

External Hunting

Group Hunting

Customer number

Hunt Directory Number

External Hunt Directory Number

IP Phone Model (ISET) data

Prompt

REQ:

Response

LTN PRT

TYPE:

TN

CUST

ISET l s c u xx

NUMZONE 0-1023

TEN

DATE

PAGE

0, 1-511 dd mmm yyyy

(NO) YES

DES d...d, d+, +

IP_PHONE_MODEL

Comment

List TN of TYPE specified Print data block for the TYPE specified

Enable filtering by IP Phone model name

Terminal Number associated with the unit

Customer number

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Tenant

Print data from date specified

Date printed on a per page basis

Designator

IP Phone model as defined in LD 11.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 619

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

MRCD

Response

xxxxxx

N/A

Comment

IP Phone model associated with the report.

Display the list of key numbers corresponding to the

USER IDs registered for Call Recording

Mobile Extension (MOBX) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

UXID

PRT

Response

MOBX

<CLID>

Comment

Print.

Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit

Calling Line ID of Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit

Multifrequency (MFC, MFE, MFR, MFK5, MFK6, MFVE) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

MFC

MFE

MFR

MFVE

MFK5

MFK6

Comment

Print

Multifrequency compelled sender/receiver

Multifrequency signaling for Socotel sender/receiver

Multifrequency receiver (for Feature group D)

Multifrequency versatile units

2/5 Spanish KD3 MF signaling

2/6 Spanish KD3 MF signaling l s c u l ch

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

DTI/PRI loop and channel s ch DTI/PRI shelf and channel

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

620 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Out of Service unit (OOSSLT and OOSMLT) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

PRT

Response

OOSSLT

OOSMLT l s c u

Comment

Print

Single line TNs that are Out-of-Service

Multi-line TNs that are Out-of-Service

Terminal Number associated with the unit

Power (PWR) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

PWR l s c u

Comment

Print

Power data block

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density dd mmm yyyy Print data from date specified

ACT

(NO) YES

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Pretranslation (PRE) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

PRT

Response

PRE xx

Print

Pretranslation

Customer number

Comment

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 621

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Special Service List (SSL) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

SSL

PRT

Response

SSL

1-15

Comment

Print

Special Service List

Special Service List number

Speed call lists (SCL) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

LSNO

RNGE

PRT

Response

SCL

0-8190

<CR> xxxx xxxx

<CR>

Comment

Print

Regular and System Speed Call Lists

List Number for Speed Call or System Speed Call

Print for all lists

Range of Speed Call entries (0-1000) to be printed

Print all entries

Tandem Connection (TCON) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

PRT

Response

TCON

Comment

Print

Tandem Connection for Meridian Packet Handler and

PRI connections

Template (TEM) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

PRT

Response

TEM

Print

Templates

Comment

622 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Prompt

FOR

INFO aaa

Response

FRM

USE

TEMP

USS

DEF xxxx

<CR>

Comment

Telephone type

Print key/feature assignments template.

Print number of users of the template

Note:

Valid with the INFO prompt only when "500", "BCS",

"SL1","1210", "1220", or "1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.

Print TN using the template

Print number of templates defined and the number of templates allowed

Note:

Valid with the INFO prompt only when "500", "BCS",

"SL1","1210", "1220", or "1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.

Telephone template number.

Print all templates

Terminal Number Block (TNB) data for telephones and trunks

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

PRT

Response

TNB l s c u,...

Comment

Print

Terminal Number Block

Terminal Number (Up to 6 TNs can be entered)

CDEN

CUST

SD, DD, 4D, 8D xx xx

NUMZONE 0-1023

Card Density

Customer number

MPHI YES, NO

Numbering zone

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Meridian Packet Handler Interface

SPWD

TEN

DATE

PAGE

DES xxxx

0, 1-511 dd mmm yyyy

(NO) YES d...d, d+, +

Security Password

Tenant

Print data from date specified

Date printed on a per page basis

Designator

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 623

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

NACT

AACS

ASID

SFNB

SFRB

USFB

CALB

SMCB

SMOO

MRCD

Response

(NO) YES, END Next Activity a...a

x...x

Comment

Application acquired set (a...a = (NO), AGTH, or AGT)

Application Service ID

1 2 ...

1 2 ...

1 2 ...

1 2 ...

Set Feature Notification Bitmap

Set Feature Route Bitmap

Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap

Call Filter Bitmap

1-17

(NO) YES

N/A

Print set message control bitmap

(Do not set) Set message optimize option

Display the list of key numbers corresponding to the

USER IDs registered for Call Recording

Terminal Number Block (TNB) range data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

PRT

Response

TNB l s c u-l s c u

Comment

Print

Terminal Number Block

Terminal Number Range

Tone Detector (TDET) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

DATE

PAGE

PRT

Response

TDET l s c u dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Comment

Print

Tone Detector data

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

624 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Trunk data: All Trunks

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

CDEN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

PRT

TRK

Response Comment

Print

Trunk data block l s c u Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Customer number

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Trunk data: Specific Trunk types

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

DIC

DID

FEX

FGDT

IDA

ISA

MCU

MDM

PRT

Response

ADM

AWR

CAA

CAM

COT

CSA

Comment

Print

Add-on Data Module

Automatic Wake-Up RAN/Music trunks

Common Control Switching Arrangement

CAMA trunks

Central Office trunks

Common control switching arrangement access line

Dictation trunks

Direct inward dial trunks

Foreign Exchange trunks

Feature Group D trunks

Integrated digital access trunks

Integrated services access trunks (ISDN)

Meridian Communications Unit

Modem/Data Module

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 625

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

TN

CDEN

CUST

DATE

PAGE

Response

MUS

CBCT

PAG

R232

R422

RAN

RCD

Comment

Music trunks

NI-2 CBC trunk

Paging trunks

RS-232 mode data

RS-422 mode data

Recorded announcement trunks

Recorder trunks

RDC

RLM

RLR

TIE

Real digital channel

Release Link Main trunks

Release Link Remote trunks

TIE trunks

WAT l s c u

Wide Area Telephone service trunks

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card, unit)

SD, DD, 4D, 8D Single, Double, Quad or Octal Density xx Customer number dd mmm yyyy

ACT

(NO) YES

Print data from date specified

Print data from last activity

Data printed on a per page basis

Universal Extension (UEXT) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

TN

PRT

Response

UEXT l s c u

CUST

UXTY

UXID xx xxxx

<CLID>

Comment

Print.

Universal Extension data

Terminal Number associated with the Universal

Extension unit

Customer number

Type of Universal Extension.

Calling Line ID of Universal Extension.

626 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Unused Card (LUC) data

Prompt

REQ:

TN

LUC

Response

l s c s ch l ch

Comment

List Unused Card data blocks.

Terminal Number (loop, shelf, card)

DTI/PRI shelf and channel

DTI/PRI loop and channel

Unused Directory Number (LUDN) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

DN

PRT

Response

LUDN xx xxxx-xxxx

Comment

Print

List Unused Directory Numbers

Customer number

DN range

Unused Units (LUU) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

LUU

Response

500

SL1

2000

DTR

DSL

MCU

TRK

VGW

Comment

List Unused Units

Peripheral equipment requiring TNs:

Single line or analog sets

SL-1 sets

Digital sets and M2250 consoles

Digitone Receiver

Digital Subscriber Loop

Meridian Communications Unit

All trunks

Voice Gateway

Alphabetical list of print reports

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 627

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

TN

Response

1110 1120 1130

1140 1145 1150

1160 2001 2002

2004 2004p1

2004p2 2007

2033 2210 2211

2212 a...a

l s c u

IP Phones

Comment

Any specific trunk type (e.g., COT, DID, FEX, WAT, etc.)

Terminal Number

Unused Voice or Data unit (LUVU or LUDU) data

Prompt

REQ:

Response

LUVU

LUDU

TYPE:

TN

500

SL1

2000

DTR

DSL

MCU

TRK

1110 1120 1130

1140 1145 1150

1160 2001 2002

2004 2004p1

2004p2 2007

2033 2210 2211

2212 a...a

xx...xxxx

Comment

List Unused Voice Units

List Unused Data Units

Peripheral equipment requiring TNs:

Single line or analog sets

SL-1 sets

Digital sets and M2250 consoles

Digitone Receiver

Digital Subscriber Loop

Meridian Communications Unit

All trunks

IP Phones

Any specific trunk type (e.g., COT, DID, FEX, WAT, etc.)

Terminal Number

628 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Voice Mailbox (VMB) data

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

Response

PRT

VMB

<CR>

DN xxxx

VMB_STATE nnnn

Comment

Print

Voice Mailbox information

Customer number automatically appears. No entry is needed.

Print for Directory Number

Print based on Voice Mailbox State

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AACS

Response

NO

YES

Comment

Application acquired set

The TN is not acquired by an application

The TN is acquired by an application

Pack/Rel

ngcc-22

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

ASID

BUID

<CR> x...x

x...x

basic-1

Adjust paper then <CR> to start printing

Start printing

Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated

The ASID is used for sending the monitor/ control messages to the application. The

ASID value is updated based on the applications's Acquire message for the TN.

Since the AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used to communicate between the Meridian

1 and the application(s), the value of the existing VSID can be used to uniquely identify the application that has acquired this device.

ASID is printed if AACS = YES.

ngcc-22

MG 1000B User ID

For CS 1000S system sbo-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 629

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

CALB

CDEN

CSDN

CTYP

CUST

DATE

Response

1 2 ...

Comment

Call Filter Bitmap

CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.

CALB is printed if AACS = YES.

Pack/Rel

ngcc-22 basic-7 SD

DD

4D

8D

<CR> x..x

Single Card Density

Double Card Density

Quadruple Card Density

Octal Card Density

For all card densities

Print the Converged Service Directory

Number sip-4.00

(XDLC)

EDLC xx xx dd mmm yyyy

<CR>

ACT

Card type is 16 port DLC

Card type is 24 port DLC

Note:

EDLC not supported on Small System and

CS 1000S basic-25

Customer number as defined in LD 15 Print data range from first to last customer. Not prompted when:

1. REQ = LUU or LUC

2. TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM

3. a complete TN is entered

If no value is entered, then data blocks are printed for all customers.

basic-1

Print data from date specified.

Where:

• dd = 1-31

• mmm = JAN-DEC

• yyy = year (e.g. 1993)

DATE is prompted for TN related data.

Print data and show last activity date.

Print data from last activity date.

basic-1

630 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DES

DGRP

DMC

DMEM

DN

Response

d...d

d+

+

<CR>

Comment

ODAS Station Designator

Print all units with ODAS designator. Enter a

1-6 alphanumeric character representing an

Office Data Administration System (ODAS)

Station Designator.

Print units starting with ODAS designator d

Print units with no ODAS designator assigned

Disregard ODAS designator

DES is prompted on TN related data The printing of data is subject to restrictions imposed by responses to TN and DATE.

Pack/Rel

odas-1

0-2045

<CR> l s c

Dial Intercom Group

DIG numbers per customer

Print all Dial Intercom Groups for customer

DGRP is prompted when TYPE = DIG

Digital Enhanced Cordless

Telecommunications (DECT) Mobility

Controller Location

Small System and CS 1000S format basic-1 mc32-25 c

0-99

<CR>

Dial Intercom Group (DIG) Member number

Print all DIG member numbers basic-1 xxxx xxxx

<space> x<CR> xx<CR> xxx<CR> x-<CR> x-y<CR> xx-yyy<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx-yyyy

Directory Number

If no value is entered, the report includes all

Directory Numbers.

Print data block for DN

If a space is entered after the Directory

Number the system reprompts for DN. A maximum of six DNs can be stacked and printed at one time.

All DNs starting with first digit x (X000-X999)

All DNs starting with first two digits xx (XX00-

XX99)

All DNs starting with first three digits xxx

(XXX0-XXX9)

All DNs between X000-9999

All DNs between DN X000 through Y999

All DNs between DN XX00 through YYY9

Two specific DNs. Up to a maximum of 8

DNs.

All DNs between XXXX and YYYY basic-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 631

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

EHNO

EMULATED

ESA_HLCL

ESA_INHN

ESA_APDN

ESA_ONLY

FCTB

FOR

Response

xxxx

Comment

External HUNT DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

EHNO is prompted when TYPE = EHT

Print emulated / non-emulated / all IP

Phones .

YES / NO /

<CR> x...x

YES/NO

Home Local Code for Emergency Service

Access (up to 12 digits).

Insert/Do not Insert Home National Code in front of ESA_HLCL.

Append/Do not append DN after

ESA_HLCL.

Pack/Rel

eht-10 basic-5.00

YES/NO

Print data for ESA call type only or print data for all call types.

basic-4.00

(YES) NO

500

2xxx

3xxx

SL1

I2004

I2002

I2050

Feature Control Bitmap

Provides a feature control bitmap for the supported ICCM Agent Message Feature

Control options. This bitmap is downloaded by the application which controls the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired

TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

FCTB is printed if AACS = YES

Print template information for telephone type basic-1

Print data for 500/2500 telephones.

Print data for 2000 type telephones (specify type).

Print data for 3000 type telephones (specify type)

Print data for SL-1 telephones.

Print data for IP Phone type 2004

Print data for IP Phone type 2002, CS

1000S.

basic-24 basic-25 basic-2

632 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

GRNO

GRP

HTNO

INFO

Response

1210

1220

1230

Comment

Print data for IP SoftPhone type 2050, CS

1000S

Print data for IP Phone type 1210.

Print data for IP Phone type 1220.

Print data for IP Phone type 1230.

0-63

Pack/Rel

basic-5.50

Group Call Group Number. Prompted when

TYPE = GRP

Print all group call groups.

grp-1

<CR>

1 - 4095

<CR> grp-21 x...x

Group number to be printed

All groups assigned to a speed call list are printed.

Hunt Directory Number

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Prompted when TYPE = HNT.

basic-1

FRM

USE

USS

DEF

Information for Templates

Print key/feature assignment template

Note:

Valid with the INFO prompt only when

"500", "BCS", "SL1","1210", "1220", or

"1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.

Print the number of users of the template.

Print the TN using the template.

Note:

Valid with the INFO prompt only when

"500", "BCS", "SL1","1210", "1220", or

"1230" is entered in response to the FOR prompt.

Print the number of templates defined and the number allowed.

basic-1

IP_PHONE_MODEL xxxxxx

IP Phone model

IP Phone model as defined in LD 11.

basic-4.50

KEM_RANGE <startKEM>

<endKEM>

Specifies range of keys to print from IP Phone

1200 Series KEMs attached to an IP Phone

1220 or 1230.

Where: basic-5.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 633

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

LSNO

MODL

MOTN

MPHI

MRCD

NACT

Response Comment

• <startKEM> = 1-4

• <endKEM> = <startKEM>+1 - 4

If no <endKEM> is specified, only the keys corresponding to the KEM identified in

<startKEM> are printed.

Pack/Rel

<CR>

0-8190 xxx

<CR> l s c u

YES NO

N/A

(NO)

YES

Note:

Only prompted when the value specified at the TYPE prompt is 1220 or 1230.

Print keys from all IP Phone 1200 Series

KEMs configured on IP Phones 1220 or

1230.

Speed Call Lists

When inputting list number for printout, non-

DN input exceeding 4 digits can be truncated.

Only the 4 right-most digits is accepted and printed basic-1

Model number for Small System (1-3 digits)

Model number for CS 1000S (1-3 digits) basic-15 basic-1

Main Office TN

Accept default when CS 1000S is the Main

Office

When Main Office is a Large System or CS

1000E

MG 1000B with MGC, the MOTN TN entered for an IP Phone is 4-field format sbo-2.0

basic-5.00

Meridian Packet Handler Interface.

Prompted when TYPE = MCU. Respond YES if using the MCU for MPH interfaces.

mph-19

Dynamic prompt in IP Phone (ISET) and

Terminal Number Block (TNB) data that displays the IP Phone key numbers associated with USER IDs that are registered with the CR and that are eligible for recording purposes (CLS=ICRA).

basic-6.00

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt odas-1

634 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PAGE

NUMZONE

REQ:

RNGE

SCNO

SFNB

Response

END

Comment

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the

Overlay.

End Overlay program

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

END

LTN

LUC

LUDU

LUU

LUVU

PRT

Pack/Rel

Data printed on a per-page basis

Prompted only on TN related data

Numbering zone basic-1 zbd-6.00

Request

Exit overlay program

List TN of TYPE specified

Print Unused Card data blocks of TYPE specified

List Unused Data Units

Print Unused Units of TYPE specified

List Unused Voice Units

Print data block for the TYPE specified.

The following is a list of valid responses. For further information, consult the appropriate

Overlay program.

LD 32: CDSP CMIN CONV CPWD DISC DISI

DISL DISN DISS DISU DSCT DSPS DSXP

ENCT ENLC ENLG ENLL ENLN ENLS ENLU

ENPS ENXP IDC IDCS IDU LBSY LDIS LIDL

LMNT PBXT SDLC STAT SUPL TRK XNTT

XPCT XPEC

LD 10 or 11: CHG CPY MOV NEW OUT basic-1 xxxx yyyy

<CR>

0-253

0-8190

<CR>

1 2 ...

Range of list entries to be printed, inclusive from first entry number to last entry number.

Print All members of a specified SCL or SSC list.

optf-1

Speed Call list Number

Speed Call list Number

Print all lists. Prompted when TYPE = SCL optf-1

Set Feature Notification Bitmap

SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN

(login), SFN (logout), ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A ngcc-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 635

LD 20: Print Routine 1

TEN

Prompt

SFRB

SHORT

SORTBY

SPWD

TBNO

TEM

TEMP

Response Comment

numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

SFNB is printed if AACS = YES.

1 2 ...

Pack/Rel

Set Feature Route Bitmap

SFRB is used for messages such as: SFR

(login), SFR (logout), ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFR messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

SFRB is printed if AACS = YES.

ngcc-22

(YES) NO

(DN), TN xxxx

Print data in short (80 characters) or long format.

The output/report is sorted based on this flag.

If the response is DN, the overlay prompts the user to enter the DN and the output is sorted by the DN.

If the response is TN, the overlay prompts the user to enter the TN and the output is sorted by the TN.

basic-4.00

Security Password.

This prompt appears when:

1. the Station Specific Authcode package (229) is equipped.

2. the security password is defined in

LDs 10 and 11.

ssau-19

1-254 xxxxxxx

<CR> xxxx

<CR>

0

Table Number for 16-Button DTMF

Prompted when TYPE = ABCD

Template number

Print data for all templates.

Prompted when TYPE = TEM

Telephone template number.

Enter <CR> to print all templates.

Tenant

Shared customer resource stations supp-10 basic-1 basic-1 tens-7

636 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

TN

Prompt Response

1-511

<CR>

Comment

Tenant Service stations

Print data blocks for all tenants.

Pack/Rel

loop l s l s c l s c u s l ch card c 0 0 u c u

Terminal Number

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop.

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop and shelf

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf and card

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf, card and unit.

Print data of the specified TYPE for this shelf loop and channel (format for Digital Trunk and

Primary Rate Interfaces).

Print data of the specified TYPE for this card

(Small System and CS 1000S).

For Small System and CS 1000S

Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and unit (Small System and CS 1000S).

c ch n. . . n<space>

Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and channel (digital trunks only) (Small

System and CS 1000S).

<CR> l s c u, l s c u List of TNs (up to 6) l s c u, sl ch A TN and a trunk shelf loop/channel can be entered on the same line l s c, l s c

System prompts for TN. A maximum of six

TNs can be stacked and printed at one time.

Print data for all TNs of the specified TYPE.

l s, ls c u

All units within the specified starting and ending cards

All units, including the specified starting shelf and ending TN l s c u All TNs starting with the specified TN and ending with the last TN

Not prompted when TYPE = SCL, HNT, DIG,

TEM, or GRP basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 637

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

TYPE:

Response Comment

For MG 1000B with MGC, the TN entered for an IP Phone is 4-field format

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

loop, l s l c u, l s c u, l ch l = (0-255) systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Type of data block

500 500 M 500/2500 telephone Small System and CS

1000S Model

1110 1120

1130 1140

1145 1150

1160

2000 I2001

I2002 I2004

2003

2004p1

2004p2

IP Phone 1110 IP Phone 1120 IP Phone 1130

IP Phone 1140 IP Phone 1145 IP Phone 1150

IP Phone 1160

M2000 type digital telephones IP Phone 2001

IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 2003 Digital telephone

IP Phone 2004 Phase 1

IP Phone 2004 Phase 2

I2050 IP SoftPhone 2050

2006 2006 M M2006 Digital telephone Small System and

CS 1000S Model

2007 IP Phone 2007

2008 2008 M M2008 Digital telephone Small System and

CS 1000S Model

2033

2016

IP Phone 2033

M2016 Digital telephone

IP Phone 2210 IP Phone 2211 IP Phone 2212 2210 2211

2212

2216

2216 M

2250

M2216 Digital telephone (ACD terminal)

Small System and CS 1000S Model

M2250 Console

2317 2317 M M2317 Digital telephone Small System and

CS 1000S Model

2616 2616 M M2616 Digital telephone Small System and

CS 1000S Model

3000 3000 M M3000 Digital Touchphone Small System and

CS 1000S Model

4020 M4020 Model basic-1

638 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ABCD

ADM

ADM M

ARIE

ASTS

ATVN

AWR

AWR M

BCS

CAA

CAA M

CAM

CAM M

CLIDVER

COT COT M

CPNW

16-Button DTMF

Comment

Add-on Data Module Data port interfacing with a data line card

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Aries (M2006, M2008, M2016S, M2216 and

M2616) sets and Meridian Communications

Unit (MCU) data blocks

Associate (AST) BCS and Analog Sets

Autovon trunks

Automatic Wake Up RAN/Music trunk

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Business Communication Set

Common Control Switching Arrangement

(CCSA) Automatic Number Identification

(ANI) trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

CAMA trunk data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Calling Line ID Verification

Central Office Trunk (PSTN) data block Small

System and CS 1000S Model Call Pickup

Network Wide data

CSA

CSA M

DAC

DCS

Common Control Switching Arrangement access line

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Data Access Card

Digital Communications Set

DIC DIC M Dictation trunk data block Small System and

CS 1000S Model

DID DID M Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block Small

System and CS 1000S Model

DIG

DNB

DSL

Dial Intercom Group

Directory Number Block

Digital Subscriber Loop (S/T or U I/F for ISDN

BRI)

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

mc32-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 639

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt Response

DT2

DTD

DTR

2.0 Mb/s DTI output only

Dial Tone Detector

Digitone Receiver

Comment

EHT External Hunting

FEX FEX M Foreign Exchange trunk Small System and

CS 1000S Model

FGDT

GHT

GRP

HNT

HTL

I2004

IDA ISA

IPAV

ISET

LUDN

MCU

MDM

Feature Group D Trunk

Group Hunt

Group call

Hunting

Hot Line

IP Phone 2004

Integrated Digital Access Integrated Services

Access trunk (ISDN)

IP for AutoVon

IP Phone model name

List Unused Directory Numbers.

MDM M

MFC

MFE

MFK5

MFK6

MFR

Meridian Communications Unit

Modem/Data Module. Data port interfacing with QPC60 500/2500 type card

Small System and CS 1000S Model

Multifrequency Compelled sender/receiver data block

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel sender/ receiver

2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

Multifrequency Receiver (for Feature Group

D)

MFVE Print Multifrequency Versatile units

MUS MUS M Music trunk Small System and CS 1000S

Model

OOSMLT

OOSSLT

Out-of-Service Multi-Line Terminal

Out-of-Service Single Line Terminal

Pack/Rel

basic-25 basic-5.00

basic-4.50

kd3-20 kd3-20 xpe-20 xpe-20

640 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

PAG PAG M Paging trunk Small System and CS 1000S

Model

PBX

PRE

PBX sets

Pretranslation

PRI2

PWR

R232

ACD Priority Agents

Power data block

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-232 Data mode data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model R232 M

R422

R422 M

NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) port in

RS-422 mode data block

Small System and CS 1000S Model

RAC Real Analog Channel

RAN RAN M Recorded Announcement trunk Small

System and CS 1000S Model

RCD RDC Recorder trunk Real Digital Channel

RLM RLM M Release Link Main trunk Small System and

CS 1000S Model

RLR RLR M Release Link Remote trunk Small System and CS 1000S Model

SCL Regular and System Speed Call Lists

SSL

TCON

Special Service List

Tandem Connection for MPH and PRI connections

TDET

TEM

TIE TIE M

TNB

TRK

VAC

VDC

VGW

VMB

Tone Detector

Template

TIE trunk Small System and CS 1000S Model

Terminal Number

Trunk data block

Virtual Analog Channel

Virtual Digital Channel

Voice Gateway

Voice Mailbox information

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 641

LD 20: Print Routine 1

Prompt

USFB

UXID

UXTY

VMB_STATE

XTRK

Response Comment

WAT WAT M Wide Area Telephone Service trunk Small

System and CS 1000S Model

XTD

1210 1220

1230

Pack/Rel

Extended Dial Tone Detector and Digitone

Receiver

IP Phone 1210 IP Phone 1220 IP Phone 1230 basic-5.50

UEXT

MOBX

<CR>

Universal Extension.

Mobile Extension Universal Extension unit.

Print all mobx-5.50

mobx-5.50

1 2 ...

<CLID> xxxx

Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter

Bitmap

USFB applies to messages such as:

Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,

Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore,

Ready, Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway

Return, Reserved, Unreserved, ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding message set is enabled.

USFB is printed if AACS = YES.

ngcc-22 mobx-5.50

Calling Line ID of Universal Extension unit.

Where <CLID> = the DN of the Universal

Extension unit.

Type of Universal Extension.

Where xxxx = type of Universal Extension.

• MOBX = Mobile Extension Line

• TLSV = Telephony Services

• FMCL = Fixed Mobile Convergence Line

(reserved for future use)

• SIPN = Nortel SIP Line

• SIP3 = Third Party SIP Line mobx-5.50

vmba-19 nnnn aaa

Print based on Voice Mailbox State

Where aaa = basic-5.00

642 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response Comment

• DB32 (32 port DSP Daughterboard)

• DB96 (96 port DSP Daughterboard)

• M32S (32 channel secure media card)

• VTRK (Virtual Trunk)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 643

LD 20: Print Routine 1

644 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 21: LD 21: Print Routine 2

Overlay program 21 allows data to be printed for the following:

• customer data blocks

• code restriction data blocks

• route data blocks

• trunks within a route

• ATM routes

• ATM schedules

• CAS keys

• associated TN

Set Relocation data

This prints the sets which have "relocated out", but have not "relocated back in". With Automatic

Set Relocation, the set's serial number, NT code, color code, and release are also printed.

Input Processing

Prompts ending with a colon (:) allow the user to enter either:

• a question mark (?) followed by a carriage return (<CR>) to get a list of valid responses to that prompt, or

• an abbreviated response, the system then responds with the nearest match. If there is more than one possible match the system responds with SCH0099 and the input followed by a question mark and a list of possible responses. The user can then enter the valid response.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 645

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

REQ aaa

TYPE

CUST a...a

xx

SIZE

RNGE

HOUR

OPR

0-4000 aa ... aa

Comment

Request (aaa = END, LCS, LRT, LTM, or PRT)

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE)

Customer number associated with this data block

CLID table entry size

CLID entry or entries to be printed

0-23 All routes tested by ATM for this hour

(NO) YES Outpulsing Route

ROUT

ACOD

AACR

ASID

SFNB

USFB

CALB

TKTP

0-511 x...x

(NO) YES x...x

1 2 ...

1 2 ...

1 2 ...

aaa

Route number

Access Code for route

The route (is not)/is acquired by the application

Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated

Set Feature Notification Bitmap

Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap

Call Filter Bitmap

Trunk Type. aaa = ATVN

Alphabetical list of print reports

Application Module Link (AML) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE AML

CUST xx

Print

Application Module Link

Customer number

Comment

646 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of print reports

Attendant Console (ATT) data from LD 15

Comment Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ATT

CUST xx

Print

Attendant consoles

Customer number

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) data

Prompt Response

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CIS_ANI

PRT

ANI

Comment

Print

Automatic Number Identification xx Customer number

(NO) YES Print (do not print) CIS ANI

R_RANGE xx yy

CACC (NO) YES

ANI entries for set to be printed

CAC Conversion Table Option

- MFC_ENT_R 0

(0)-31 CAC Conversion Table (MFC CAC into CIS CAC)

- CIS_ENT_R 0

(0)-31 CAC Conversion Table (CIS CAC into MFC CAC)

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) route data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

ATM xx

0-511

Comment

Print

ATM routes

Customer number

Route number to be printed

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 647

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) schedule data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE SCH

CUST

HOUR xx

0-23

<CR>

Comment

Print

ATM schedules

Customer number

Print all routes tested by ATM for this hour

Print routes tested for all hours

Automatic Wake Up (AWU) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE AWU

CUST xx

Print

Automatic Wake Up

Customer number

Comment

Call Detail Recording (CDR) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CDR

CUST xx

Print

CDR and Charge Account

Comment

Customer number

Call Redirection (RDR) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE RDR

CUST xx

Print

Call Redirection options

Customer number

Comment

648 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CAS

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Centralized Attendant Service

Customer number

Centralized Attendant Service (CASK) Key

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CASK

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Centralized Attendant Service key

Customer number

Code Restriction (CRB) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CRB

CUST

ROUT

ACOD xx

0-511 xxxx

Comment

Print

Code Restriction data

Customer number

Route number to be printed

Access Code

Controlled Class of Service (CCS) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CCS

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Controlled Class of Service

Customer number

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Alphabetical list of print reports

April 2011 649

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Customer data block (CDB)

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CDB

Print

Customer data block

CUST xx

Comment

Note:

If you need information regarding System Passwords, print

PWD_DATA field by itself. PWD_data do not be provided by printing CDB.

Customer number

Features and options (FTR) data

-

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

FTR xx

TBL

ZBD

DIALPLAN

(0)-31

Print

Features and Options

Customer number

Tone Table Number

(NO) YES Zone Based Dialing xxx

Comment

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

The type of on-net dial plan (public or private) in use for the ZBD feature.

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Flexible Code Restriction (FCR) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE FCR

CUST xx

Comment

Print

New Flexible Code restrictions

Customer number

650 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE FFC

CUST xx

Print

Flexible Feature Code

Customer number

Comment

Hospitality Management (HSP) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE HSP

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Hospitality Management options

Customer number

Integrated Message Service (IMS) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE IMS

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Integrated Message Service

Customer number

Intercept Computer Update (ICP) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ICP

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Intercept computer options

Customer number

Alphabetical list of print reports

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 651

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Intercept Treatments (INT) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE INT

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Intercept treatment options

Customer number

ISDN Signaling Link (ISLL) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ISLL

Comment

Print

ISDN Signaling Link trunk TN

Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

LDN xx

Comment

Print

Departmental Listed Directory Numbers

Customer number

Multi-Party Operations (MPO) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

MPO xx

Print

Multi-party options

Customer number

Comment

652 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Networking (NET) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE NET

CUST xx

Comment

Print

ISDN and ESN networking options

Customer number

Night Service (NIT) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE NIT

CUST xx

Print

Night Service

Customer number

Comment

Off Hook Alarm Security (OAS) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE OAS

CUST xx

Print

Off-Hook Alarm Security

Customer number

Comment

Password (PWD) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PWD

CUST

PWD2 xx xxxx

Comment

Print

Customer Related Passwords

Customer number

Level 2 Password

Alphabetical list of print reports

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 653

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PPM

CUST xx

Print

Periodic Pulse Metering

Customer number

Comment

Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ROA

CUST xx

Comment

Print

Recorded Overflow Announcement options

Customer number

Route Data Block (RDB)

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE RDB

CUST

ROUT

ACOD

MBXR xx

0-511

<CR> xxxx

- SIND

<yes>,<no

>

<yes>,<no

>

Print

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number to be printed

Print data for all routes

Route access code

Mobile Extension route.

Comment

Send Indicator for Mobile Extension route.

654 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Set Relocation (SRDT) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE SRDT

Comment

Print

Recent Set Relocation activity

Test lines (TST) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

TST xx

Print

Test lines

Customer number

Comment

Timers (TIM) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

TIM xx

Print

Timer options

Customer number

Comment

Trunk Members (LTM) data

Prompt Response

REQ LTM

CUST

ROUT

ACOD xx

0-511 xxxx

Comment

List Trunk members

Customer number

Route number to be printed

Route Access Code

Alphabetical list of print reports

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 655

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AACR

ACOD

ARDN

ASID

CALB

ZBD

CRID

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

The route is not acquired by the application

The route is acquired by the application x...x

<CR>

Pack/Rel

ngcc-22

Access Code for route

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Print data for all route access codes

This prompt appears when ROUT = <CR> basic-1

(NO)

YES

RPO x...x

1 2 ...

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Allow last Re-Directing Number, where:

(NO) is Treatment for originally called number.

YES is Treatment for last redirecting number.

RPO is Treatment for last redirecting number if

OCN is Public.

basic-4.50

Application Service ID from which the acquired request originated

ASID is used for sending route status messages.

The ASID value is updated based on the application's Acquire message for the route.

Since the AML over Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used to communicate between the Meridian 1 and other applications, the VSID value might be used to uniquely identify the application which has acquired that device.

ngcc-22

Call Filter Bitmap

CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.

CALB is printed if AACR = YES.

ngcc-22

Print status of Zone Based Dialing feature.

Print data of CDR record for SIP.

zbd-6.00

sip-4.00

656 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CUST

Response

xx xx

<CR>

Comment

Customer number

Print data range from first to last customer

Not prompted when:

• REQ = LUU or LUC

• TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM

• a complete TN is entered

Print data blocks for all customers

DAPC

(DAPA)

DAPD

DIALPLAN aaa

Dial Access Prefix on Console

Display Access Prefix Allowed

Display Access Prefix Denied

Pack/Rel

basic-1 isdn-24

The type of on-net dial plan (public or private) in use for the ZBD feature.

Where:

• PUB = public on-net dial plan

E.164 CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone

• PRV = private on-net dial plan

7-digit DN/CLID is displayed on a terminating telephone zbd-6.00

FTR_DATA (NO) YES

HOUR 0-23

<CR>

MBXR

Change Features and options

All routes tested by ATM for this hour

Print routes tested by ATM for all hours

<yes>,<no> Mobile Extension route, where:

• <yes> = "yes" is printed if route is configured as MBXR in LD 16.

• <no> = "no" is printed if route is not configured as MBXR in LD 16.

mobx-5.50

PCA (NO) YES Personal Call Assistant, where:

OFF = Turns PCA off at the customer level

ON = Turns PCA on at the customer level

Note:

Configuration of the PCA is preserved and enabled regardless of whether or not the feature is enabled.

pca-3.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 657

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Prompt

PCID

OPR

REQ

RNGE

ROUT

SFNB

SIZE

TKTP

TPDN

Response

H323

SIP

Comment

Print Protocol ID for the route.

Print Protocol ID for the SIP route.

(NO) YES Outpulsing Route

This prompt appears when OPOA is equipped.

Prompted on TN related data

END

LCS

LRT

LTM

PRT aa ... aa

Request

Exit overlay program

List Configured Customers

For CS 1000S

List configured Routes associated with a customer

For CS 1000S

Print trunk route by TN and member number

Print data block for the TYPE specified.

0-511

<CR> basic-1 basic-2 basic-2

CLID entry to be printed

You may print one CLID entry or several CLID entries. If you want to print several CLID entries, separate each entry with a comma. Each CLID entry must be between 0 and the number entered for the prompt SIZE in LD 15.

isdn-22

Route number

Print data for all routes

This prompt appears when TYPE = CRB or RDB basic-1

1 2 ...

Pack/Rel

basic-2 basic-4.00

- - aaa yyyy

Set Feature Notification Bitmap

SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN (login),

SFN (logout), ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

SFNB is printed if AACR = YES.

ngcc-22

CLID table entry size.

The SIZE prompt and the SIZE value print out automatically after the CUST prompt.

isdn-22

Trunk Type. aaa = ATVN

Target PCA DN, where: basic-5.00

pca-3.0

658 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TYPE

Response Comment

yyyy = the primary DN

TPDN is prompted only if PCA is set to ON.

If there is no DN configured against the HOT P key in LD 11, this value is used to extend the call using the PCA feature.

Enter X to remove. However, if there is at least one PCA with no target DN configured in LD 11, then this operation does not succeed.

Pack/Rel

Type of data block

AML_DATA Application Module Link

ANI_DATA Automatic Number Identification numbers

ATM Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) data block

AWU_DATA Enable Automatic Wake-up

CASK Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) key data block

CAS_DATA Centralized Attendant Service

CCS_DATA Controlled Class of Service options

CDB Customer Data Block basic-1

Note:

If you need information regarding System

Passwords, print PWD_DATA field by itself.

PWD_data do not be provided by printing

CDB.

CDR_DATA Call Detail Recording

CLID

CRB

Calling Line Identification entry data

Code Restriction data block

FCR_DATA New Flexible Feature code options

FFC_DATA Flexible Feature Codes

FTR_DATA Feature

HSP_DATA Hospitality

ICP_DATA Intercept Positions and interrogation sets.

Prompted when REQ = PRT

IMS_DATA Integrated Messaging System

INT_DATA Alarm ring for Internal calls

ISLL IASL ISDN Signaling Link data block. This prompt appears when REQ = PRT.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 659

LD 21: Print Routine 2

Prompt

USFB

VTRK

Response Comment

LDN_DATA Listed Directory Number

MON_DATA Print Monitor data

MPO_DATA Multi-party options

NET_DATA ISDN and ESN networking options

NIT_DATA Night Service options

NPID Numbering Plan Digit or Information Digit table

OAS_DATA Off-Hook Alarm Security options

PPM_DATA Periodic Pulse Metering options

PWD_DATA Print the system Passwords

RDB Route Data Block

A printout of a route with the Night Key for DID

Digit Manipulation (NKDM) active shows * opposite the value for DCNO or NDNO.

RDR_DATA Call Redirection

ROA_DATA Recorded Overflow Announcement

SCH Schedule data block for ATM

SDP

SRDT

Secure data password

Set Relocation Data block

TIM Timer options

TIM_DATA System Speed Call

TST_DATA Loop Test trunk data

1 2 ...

Pack/Rel

Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap

USFB applies to messages such as: ngcc-22

Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,

Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore,

Ready, Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway

Return, Reserved, Unreserved, ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding message set is enabled.

USFB is printed if AACR = YES.

YES NO Virtual Trunk basic-5.00

660 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 22: LD 22: Print Routine 3

Overlay program 22 allows data to be printed for the following:

• Configuration Record

• DN to TN Matrix

• System Password number

• System Loop Limits

• software version

• tape ID

• issue number

• equipped feature packages

• System License parameters

When printing the DN block, "MARP" is output prior to the DES if it is the MARP TN. Refer to Features

and Services Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for an explanation of the MARP feature.

Audit trail for Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW)

You must be logged in with the PWD1 or PWD2 password to print the Audit Trail. Printing of the Audit Trail deletes the Audit Trail information and resets the buffer.

Packages equipped

This prompt sequence prints the equipped software packages. The packages are printed in numerical order by package number, accompanied by the mnemonic. In addition, you can get the status of an individual package.

Issue and release

If the system has a "patch", then a "+" is printed next to the issue number.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 661

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE:

PWD2

CUST

DN

DATE

Response

a...a

a...a

xxxx

Comment

Request (a..a = END, IPWD, ISS, ISSP, PRT, PWD,

ROM, SLL, SLT, or TLD)

Type of data block (TYPE responses begin on TYPE)

Password 2 xx xxxx dd mmm yyy ACT

Customer number associated with this data block

Print for Directory Number

(NO) YES

Date

Data printed on a per-page basis PAGE

- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR>

DES

NACT

- VHST d...d

(NO) YES aaa

Adjust paper so that printing starts at top of sheet.

Designator

Next Activity

View History File (aaa = (%ON) or %OFF)

Audit trail (AUDT) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE AUDT

Comment

Print

Audit trail. Must be logged in with the PWD1 or PWD2 password. Printing of the Audit trail deletes the Audit trail information and resets the buffer.

662 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Common Equipment (CEQU) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CEQU

Print

Common Equipment data

Comment

Configuration Record (CFN) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CFN

Print

Configuration record

Comment

Core Inventory (CINV) data for all systems

Comment Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE CINV

Print

Core Inventory list

History File (VHST) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

VHST

VHST

(%ON)

Print

View the History File

Turn ON display features

Comment

%OFF Turn OFF display features

BFIND aaa Search backward in the History File

BFIND

DOWN

BOT

Repeats the previous backward search

Moves to the top of the file

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 663

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Prompt Response

DOWN

Comment

Move forward 6 lines in the History File

FIND aaaa Search Forward in the history file

FIND Repeats the previous forward search

HELP

HST

List valid responses

View the system history file

NEXT BOT Moves to the end of the file

NEXT x Move forward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between

PREV TOP Moves to the top of the file

PREV x Move backward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between

TRF View the system traffic log file

TTYLOG n View the log file for TTY port n

UP TOP

UP

Moves to the top of the file

Move backward 6 lines in the history file

Input/output device (ADAN) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ADAN

Print

All I/O devices

Comment

Integrated Message Service (IMA) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE

CUST

IMA xx

Print

IMS Message Attendant

Customer number

Comment

664 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Issue and Release (ISS)

Prompt Response

REQ ISS

Comment

Print System Type, System Generic, Issue and Release.

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all

IPMGs configured on the system.

Meridian Modular Telephone (ATRN) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE ATRN

Comment

Print

Meridian Modular Telephone transmission parameters

Overlay area (OVLY) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE OVLY

Print

Overlay area information

Comment

Package (PKG) information

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PKG

PKG xxx

Comment

Print

Software Packages

Check equipped/restricted status of package number xxx

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 665

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Password (PWD) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PWD

PWD2 xxxx

Print

Print System Passwords

Level 2 Password

Comment

Peripheral Software Version (PSWV) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PSWV

Comment

Print

Peripheral Software Versions downloaded to: NT8D01

Controller cards, NT8D04 Network cards and NT8D018

Network/Digitone Receiver cards.

System Limits (SLT) data

Prompt Response

REQ SLT

Comment

Print System Type, System Generic and System Limits.

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all

IPMGs configured on the system.

System Loop Limit (SLL) data

Prompt Response

REQ SLL Print System Loop Limits

Comment

666 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

System Parameters (PARM) data

Prompt Response

REQ PRT

TYPE PARM

Print

System Parameters

Comment

System Patch (ISSP) data

Prompt Response

REQ ISSP

Comment

Print System Type, System Generic, Patch and Plug-in information.

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all

IPMGs configured on the system.

Tape ID (TID) data

Prompt Response

REQ TID Print Tape ID

Comment

Value Added Server (VAS) data

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

PRT

VAS

Comment

Print

Print Value Added Server data

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 667

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR> Start printing

CUST xx-xx

<CR>

Comment Pack/Rel

basic-1

Customer number

Print data range from first to last customer. Not prompted when: basic-1

1. REQ = LUU or LUC

2. TYPE = SCL, DIG or TEM

3. a complete TN is entered

Print data blocks for all customers

DATE dd mmm yyyy Print data from date specified.

Where:

• dd = 1-31

• mmm = JAN-DEC

• yyy = year e.g. 1993

<CR>

ACT

DATE is prompted for TN related data

Print data and show last activity date

Print data from last activity date basic-1

DES

DN d...d

d+

+

<CR>

Designator

DES is prompted on TN related data The printing of data is subject to restrictions imposed by responses to TN and DATE.

Print all units with ODAS designator dddddd

Print units starting with ODAS designator d

Print units with no ODAS designator assigned

Disregard ODAS designator odas-1 basic-19 xxxx

<CR> xxxx <space>

Directory Number

Print data block for DN

Print data blocks for all DN

If a space is entered after the Directory

Number the system reprompts for DN. A

668 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NACT

PAGE

Response

x<CR> xx<CR> xxx<CR> x-<CR> x-y<CR> xx-yyy<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx-yyyy

(NO)

YES

END

(NO) YES

Comment

maximum of six DNs can be stacked and printed at one time.

All DNs starting with first digit x (X000-X999)

All DNs starting with first two digits xx (XX00-

XX99)

All DNs starting with first three digits xxx

(XXX0-XXX9)

All DNs between X000-9999

All DNs between DN X000 through Y999

All DNs between DN XX00 through YYY9

Two specific DNs. Up to a maximum of 8

DNs.

All DNs between XXXX and YYYY

Pack/Rel

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.

End Overlay program odas-1

Data printed on a per-page basis

Prompted only on TN related data basic-1

PWD2

REQ x...x

<CR>

END

IPWD

ISS

ISSP

Enter second level administration password

(Password 2) to print information relating to all passwords.

basic-1

To print only the information regarding the

Limited Access to Overlay password used to login.

PWD2 is prompted when REQ = PWD or

TYPE = PWD.

Request

Exit overlay program

Insecure or Expired Password

Print System Type, System Generic, Issue and

Release.

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.

Print System Type, System Generic, Patch and Plug-in information.

basic-1 basic-4.50

basic-5.50

basic-5.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 669

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Prompt

PRT

PWD

SLL

SLT

Response Comment

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.

Print data block for TYPE specified

Print the system Passwords

Pack/Rel

Print System Loop Limits

Print System Type, System Generic and

System Limits : Licenset (License parameters and keywords).

For CS 1000E systems, also display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system.

basic-5.50

SSRC

TN

TID

Note:

If a License limit is set to the maximum value 32767, then the information for that

License is not printed. This does not apply to the license for TNs.

Print the Tape ID. (S/W Cart ID and Site ID for

Small System).

0-(3700) Signaling Server Resource Capacity sip-4.00

loop l s l s c

Terminal Number

TN is not prompted when TYPE = SCL, HNT,

DIG, TEM, or GRP.

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop.

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop and shelf

Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf and card l s c u Print data of the specified TYPE for this loop, shelf, card and unit.

l s c u, l s c u List of TNs (up to 6) l s c u, sl ch l s c, l s c

A TN and a trunk shelf loop/channel can be entered on the same line

All units within the specified starting and ending cards l s, ls c u All units, including the specified starting shelf and ending TN basic-1

670 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TYPE

Response

l s c u s l ch

Comment

All TNs starting with the specified TN and ending with the last TN

Print data of the specified TYPE for this shelf loop and channel (format for Digital Trunk and

Primary Rate Interfaces).

Print data for all TNs of the specified TYPE.

<CR> card c 0 0 u c u

Print data of the specified TYPE for this card

(Small System).

For Small System

Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and unit (Small System).

c ch Print data of the specified TYPE for this card and channel (digital trunks only) (Small

System).

n. . . n<space> System prompts for TN. A maximum of six

TNs can be stacked and printed at one time.

ADAN

ADAN AML

ADAN DCH

ADAN FDK

ADAN HST

ADAN PRT

ADAN TTY

ADM

ADM M

AHST

APL

ATRN

AUDT

CARD

Pack/Rel

Type of data block

All I/O devices

Application Modules

D-channel and backup D-channels

Floppy Disk units

History Files

System Ports

System Terminals

Add-on Data Module

Data port interfacing with a data line card

Small System and CS 1000S Model

All History File

Auxiliary Processor Links

Print Meridian Modular Telephone

Transmission parameters

Audit Trail buffer

Only system Administrators are allowed to print the Audit Trail. They must first respond to

PWD2 in LD 17 to define the password.

Card data block (used for Automatic Set

Relocation) basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 671

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Prompt Response

CEQU

CFN

CHID

CINV

DCP

DSDN

GHT

GRP

IMA

IPWD

IADN

OVLY

PARM

PHST

PKG

PKG xxx

PLUGIN

PSWV

Common Equipment

Comment

Configuration record data block

Channel ID for ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)

Core Inventory list (CP PIV data)

Directed Call Pickup

Data Services Directory Number or PTE IS

Group Hunt

Group call

IMS Message Attendant

Print account type and status: EXPIRED or

INSECURE

Individual Attendant Directory Number

Print Overlay area information

System Parameters

Previous History File All History File records

Because last request

Packages equipped.

Check equipped/restricted status of package number xxx.

Print details of all enabled plug-ins.

Peripheral Software Version(s) downloaded to:

• NT8D01 Controller cards

• NT8D04 Network cards

• NT8D018 Network/Digitone Receiver cards

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

basic-4.50

basic-5.50

PWD

REF

RLM

Note:

The version of peripheral software example

PSWV VERSION is not printed here for option 11C. It is printed along with other

Small System specific data in LD 143.

Print the system Passwords.

System prints the PWD block to the user with the new PSWD_COMP prompt and setting.

basic-4.50

Loop Reference trunk data

Release Link Main trunk.

672 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

VHST

Response

RLM M

RLR

RLR M

SCI

SFA

SFD

SLL

VAS

VHST

Comment

Release Link Main trunk - Small System and

CS 1000S Model.

Release Link Remote trunk.

Release Link Remote trunk - Small System and CS 1000S Model.

Station Category Indication data block

Second level Forwarding Allowed

Second level Forwarding Denied.

System Loop Limits.

Value Added Server data

View History File

Pack/Rel

vns-21

(%ON)

% OFF

View the History File

Turn ON display features

Turn OFF display features

This command is used to enable or disable the following three display features: hist-19

• brackets to surround the current index

([])

• percent symbol (%) preceding each

History File line

• relative location within the History File

(in percentage)

VHST accepts abbreviated responses.

BFIND aaaa Search backward in the History File

This command can be used to search backward, starting at the current index location, for the string "aaaa." If necessary, the file wraps until it returns to the same location.

The text string can be up to 12 characters.

Special characters like space, slash (/), and colon (:) are accepted. Leading or trailing spaces are ignored unless enclosed in double quotes. For example, the spaces denoted here are ignored: <SP><SP>INI<SP>. The spaces in this string, however, are included in the search: "<SP><SP>INI<SP>".

When the string is found, the system displays the current index location. Five text lines are shown, with the middle line containing the

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 673

LD 22: Print Routine 3

Prompt Response

BFIND Repeats the previous backward search

DOWN BOT Moves to the top of the file

DOWN

Comment

sought string. The VHST prompt is redisplayed to allow more command use. If the string is not found, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

FIND aaaa

Move forward 6 lines in the History File

This command can be used to move forward in the History File, toward the end. If x exceeds the end of the file, the end is shown.

When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

Search Forward in the History File

This command can be used to search forward, starting at the current index location, for the string "aaaa." If necessary, the file wraps until it returns to the same location.

The text string can be up to 12 characters.

Special characters like space, slash (/), and colon (:) are accepted. Leading or trailing spaces are ignored unless enclosed in double quotes.

For example, the spaces denoted here are ignored: <SP><SP>INI<SP>. The spaces in this string, however, are included in the search: "<SP><SP>INI<SP>".

When the string is found, the system displays the current index location. Five text line are shown, with the middle line containing the sought string. The VHST prompt is redisplayed to allow more command use. If the string is not found, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

Repeats the previous forward search FIND

HELP

NEXT BOT

NEXT x

List valid responses

Moves to the end of the file

Move forward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between.

This command can be used to view lines forward, toward the end of the file. The lines between the current index location, and the new one (x lines down) are displayed.

If you enter only NEXT, the default of 20 lines is used for the move. When the move is

Pack/Rel

674 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

PREV TOP

PREV x

TRF

TTYLOG n

UP TOP

UP

Comment

complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

Moves to the top of the file

Move backward x lines in the History File, display all lines in between

This command can be used to view lines backward, toward the top of the file. The lines between the current index location, and the new one (x lines up) are displayed.

If you enter only PREV, the default of 20 lines is used for the move. When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

View the system traffic log file

View the log file for TTY port n

Moves to the top of the file

Move backward 6 lines in the History File

This command can be used to move backward in the History File, toward the top. If x exceeds the top of the file, the top is shown. When the move is complete, VHST is reprompted to allow more command use.

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 675

LD 22: Print Routine 3

676 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 23: LD 23: Automatic Call

Distribution, Management

Reports, Message Center

Overlay program 23 allows Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) data, schedules for management reports and Message Center data to be created, modified, or printed.

ACD groups are also used for Meridian Mail and various server applications. When this overlay is loaded the available system memory and disk records are output in a header. Refer to the introduction of this document for details.

License also provides a header to indicate system configuration limits. For LD 23, the header appears as follows:

ACD DNS AVAIL: xxxxx USED: xxxxx TOT: xxxxx

To prevent Virtual Agent information from appearing on ACD-D reports, do not make changes to Virtual

Agents. If a change to a Virtual Agent is required, out the agent and rebuild it with REQ = NEW.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

Prompts and responses by data block on page 681

ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue Assignment prompts)

on page 682

CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer Controlled Routing)

on page 682

NACD: Network ACD data block on page 684

OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table on page 684

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 677

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

- - VSID

- - APL

- - UMG

- - RAN

- - UMT

AST

DSAC

- PRIM

- VSID

ICP

- ICPS

CUST

ACDN

CALP

ICDD

MWC

- IMS

- - CMS

- - IMA

- - IVMS

- - PCMM

- - DNIS

- - VSID

- - EES

- - APL

- - UST

- ICPR

MAXP

Response

aaa a...a

0-127

0-15

(NO) YES

0-511

2-(6)-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-127

(NO) YES aaa xx x...x

(POS) TER

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-127

(NO) YES

0-15

(NO) YES

0-<NIPN> xxx

Comment

Request

Type of data block (a...a = ACD, ADS, CDN, NACD, or SCB)

Customer number associated with this data block

ACD Directory Number

Calling party identification sent in PCI message

In Calls key Disconnect Deny

Message Waiting Center

Integrated Messaging Service

Command and Status link

Integrated Messaging Allowed

Integrated Voice Messaging System

Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail

Dialed Number Identification Service

Value Added Server ID

End-to-End Signaling

Auxiliary Processor Link number

User Status update

VAS ID of VAS providing VMS

Auxiliary Processor Link number

User-to-User Messaging

RAN route number

Update Message Time

Associated set

Data Services Access Code

Primary DSAC

Value Added Server ID

Intercept Computer Printer

Intercept Computer Printer Search (aaa = (CIR) or

COM)

Intercept Computer Printer

Maximum Positions

678 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

SDNB

BSCW

ISAP

ASID

SRRT

- SRT

NRRT

- NRT

FROA

NCFW

FNCF

CWTT

AACQ

- VSID

ALOG

RGAI

ACAA

FRRT

- FRT

HMSB

ACPQ

FORC

- FCFT

- FADT

- FADR

RTQT

RTQO

SPCP

OBTN

RAO

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

16-31 or (00)

(NO) YES

0-127

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-511

0-2044

0-511

0-2044

0-127

(0)-2044

(NO) YES x...x

(NO) YES

(0)-40-63

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(2)-30

(0)-15

(0)-14

(0)-50

(NRD) MSB

(NO) YES aaa aaa

Comment

Secondary DN Blocking

Block Secondary DN Calls on Walkaway

Integrated Services Application Protocol

Application service identity from which the acquired message originated

Application Acquired Queue

Value Added Server ID

Automatic Log In

Ring Again for Internal calls

ACD Agent while IDN on-hold Allowed

First RAN route number for ACD

First RAN Time

Second RAN route number for ACD

Second RAN Time

Night RAN Route

Night RAN Time

First RAN On Arrival

Night Call Forward

Force Night Call Forward to busy ACD DN

Call Waiting Threshold Time

Hold Make Set Busy (allowed) denied

Answer Call Priority Queue

Force

Flexible Call Force Timer

Force Answer Delay Time

Force Answer Delay timer for Ringback

Return to Queue Timer after no answer in number of ringing cycles

Return to Queue Option

Separate Post Call Processing

Observation Tone (aaa = (NO), AGT, or ALL)

Restricted Agent Observe (aaa = (NO), YES, or FULL)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 679

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

DAL

RPRT

RAGT

DURT

RSND

FCTH

TOFT

HPQ

- OCN

OVDN

IFDN

- BUSY

- AENI

OVBU

Prompt

HSID

CWTH

NCWL

- CWLF

- CWLW

BYTH

OVTH

EMRT

MURT

RTPC

STIO

TSFT

HOML

RDNA

ACNT

NRAC

- NDFL

0-511

0-511

(NO) YES

0, 1, 2, ...15

0-(20)-510

(NO) YES

(NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES xxxx

Response

0-15

0-(1)-2047

(NO) YES

(0)-2047

(0)-2047

(0)-204

0-(2047)

Comment

Host ID

Calls Waiting Threshold

New Call Waiting Lamp options

Call Waiting Lamp Flash threshold

Call Waiting Lamp Wink (fast flash) threshold

Busy Threshold

Overflow Threshold

2-1800

(NO) YES

(NO) YES x...x x...x x...x

Timed Overflow Threshold in seconds

High Priority Queue

Oldest Call in Network

Overflow Directory Number(s) x...x

Interflow Directory Number aaa bbb ccc ddd Busy treatment

(NO) YES Automatically Enable Interflow aaa bbb ccc ddd Overflow Busy

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

2-(4)-30

15-(30)-45

(4)-16

10-(20)-100

Emergency Route

Music Route

Real Time Processing

Status Input/Output devices

Telephone Service Factor Threshold in seconds

Headset Or MSB key Log Out

Restricted DN Access

Account

Enable Not Ready Activity Codes

Not Ready Default code Must be equipped with ACD-

D or NGCC package

Data Agent Log In with the MSB key allowed

Management reporting and status display

Reserve Agent

Duration Timer in minutes

Resend timer

Flow Control Threshold

680 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by data block

Prompt

CRQS

DNRT

CCBA

IVR

- ALOG

- TRDN

CWNT

CWNC

Response

0-(100)-255

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES xxxx l s c u

NO YES

Comment

Call Request Queue Size

Delay Night RAN Treatment

Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent

Interactive Voice Response queue

Provide Automatic Login for agents

Treatment DN for IVR queue

Call Waiting Notification TN

Call Waiting Notification TN control

Prompts and responses by data block

ACD or SCB: Automatic Call Distribution (ACD-D) or Schedule data block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

CPRD

SHR

EHR

DOW

RFRQ

SFRQ

ROPT

PRIO

PAGE

Response

aaa aaa

Comment

Request

Type of data block = ACD or SCB (Automatic Call

Distribution or Schedule data block for ACD management reports) xx Customer number associated with this data block dd mm dd mm Collection Period

0-23

0-23

Start Hour

Hour of day that data reporting ends

1-7

0-7 x

1-4

0-15

(NO) YES

Days of Week for data collection

Frequency that Reports are to be generated

Status display update Frequency (1 or 2)

Report Options

Printer(s) for Output

Start at the top of a new page for each report

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 681

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

AID

Prompt

- IDLB

- IDUB

- LOG

SRPT

TOT4

Response

(NO) YES

(1)-9999

IDLB-(9999)

(0)-999

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Agent ID mode

Agent ID Lower Boundary

Agent ID Upper Boundary

Maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time

Short Report option for report 4 (Agent position)

Totals on report 4

ADS: Auxiliary data system data block (includes Multiple Queue

Assignment prompts)

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

AID

- IDLB

- IDUB

- MQA

- - MQAS

- - MQAP

- - MQCF

- - - MCFD

Response

aaa

ADS xx

(NO) YES

(1)-9999

IDLB-(9999)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-3

Comment

Request

Type of data block = ADS (Auxiliary Data System)

Customer number associated with this data block

Agent ID mode

Agent ID Lower Boundary

Agent ID Upper Boundary

Multiple Queue Assignment

Select a Supervisor ID during login

Select Priorities during login

Automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login

The MQA Call Forwarding Digits attached to the Agent

IDs

CDN: Control DN data block (covers prompts for Customer

Controlled Routing)

Caution: Corruption results if a CDN is not configured in this overlay before that CDN is associated with or represented in an association table script in the CCR module.

682 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by data block

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

CDN

DFDN

NAME

CMB

CEIL

CLRO

OVFL

CDSQ

FRRT

- FRT

SRRT

- SRT

FROA

MURT

TDNS

RPRT

CNTL

VSID

HSID

CWTH

BYTH

OVTH

STIO

TSFT

ACNT

UUI

Response

aaa

CDN xx x...x

(NO) YES

0-511

0-2044

0-511

0-2044

(NO) YES

0-511 x...x

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(2047)

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-127

0-15

0-(1)-2047

(0)-2047

0-(2047)

0, 1, 2, ... 15

0-(20)-510 xxxx

(NO) YES

Comment

Request

Type of data block = CDN (Control DN)

Customer number associated with this data block

Control DN. The CDN cannot be configured as a mailbox DN.

Deny or allow Converged Desktop Service queue

First RAN route number for ACD

First RAN Time

Second RAN Route number for ACD

Second RAN Time

First RAN On Arrival

Music Route number

Local Default ACD DN

Display CDN name for redirected calls

Deny or Allow redirection to Control DN mailbox

CDN Ceiling value

Calling Line Restriction Override for CDN

Force Overflow Tone to the call when the ceiling threshold has been exceeded

Is DNIS number an original Called Party

Management reporting and status display

Control DN is in control

Value Added Server ID

Host ID

Calls Waiting Threshold

Busy Threshold

Overflow Threshold

Status Input/Output devices

Telephone Service Factor Threshold in seconds

Account

Use- to-User Information

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 683

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

NACD: Network ACD data block

Network ACD provides ACD capabilities over an Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN).

An NACD system distributes ACD activities between several sites. Connected by ISDN voice and data services, different sites can be physically or geographically separated within the network.

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ACDN

TABL

- OUTS

- TRGT

Response

aaa

NACD xx xxxx

(a) s xxxx xxxx xxxx tttt

Comment

Request

Type of data block = NACD (Network ACD)

Customer number associated with this data block

ACD Directory Number

Day, Night or Source Table (a = Day or Night, s =

Source Table)

Routing Table entries to be removed

Target ACD DN and the timer in seconds

OBVP: Configure the Observe Password Table

Prompt

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

ADPD

Response

aaa

OBVP xx xx..xx yy..yy

Comment

Request

Observe Password table

Customer number associated with this data block

Supervisor login ID followed by supervisor Observe password (separated by a space)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

AACQ

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Application Acquired Queue

The ACD DN is not acquired by the application

The ACD DN is acquired by the application

Pack/Rel

nxcc-22

684 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ABR

ACAA

ACDN

ACNT

ACPQ

ADPD

AENI

AID

ALOG

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment Pack/Rel

ACD Busy Routing

The agent is not presented with ACD calls when busy with an IDN call.

The agent is presented with ACD calls when busy with an IDN call.

basic-7.00

(NO)

YES

Allow ACD calls to an agent on an Individual DN

(IDN) Call On Hold.

The agent cannot place an IDN Call On Hold, and return to the idle queue.

The agent can put an active IDN Call On Hold and press the in-calls to return to the idle agent queue.

bacd-18 x...x

x...x

ACD Directory Number

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 acda-1

Account (Default activity code)

Maximum 4 digits (0 through 9). The # and * are not allowed. Prompted if the ADS data block is built, and CNTL = YES.

acdc-13

(NO) YES Answer Call Priority Queue

International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 must be equipped.

supp-15 oas-3.0

xx..xx yy..yy

Supervisor login ID followed by supervisor

Observe password (separated by a space).

(NO) YES Automatically Enable Interflow

Prompted when IFDN is defined.

acdb-12

(NO)

YES

(NO) YES

Customer operates in Position ID mode.

Customer operates in Agent ID mode.

acdc-2

Provide Automatic Log In for agents on this

DN.

Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. ALOG applies only to Command and Status Link (CMS) and Data Service Access Codes (DSAC).

Prompted if IMS or ISAP = YES.

csl-8

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 685

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

APL

ASID

AST

BSCW

BUSY

BYTH

Response

0-15

Comment

Auxiliary Processor Link number

Prompted if IMA = YES. The APL is defined in

LD 17.

Pack/Rel

lnk-2

16-31 or (00) Application service identity from which the acquired message originated

(NO) YES nxcc-22

Associated set

The Associate Set assignments are performed in LD 10 and LD 11 for each ACD telephone.

iap3p-13

(NO) YES Block Calls to the Secondary DN on Walkaway

The caller to the source DN hears busy tone.

bacd-13 aaa bbb ccc ddd

Interflow Busy Treatment for different originators

Prompted if IFDN is defined. The possible options are: acdb-12

• BSY = caller hears busy tone

• SRC = caller is re-linked to source queue

Enter BSY or SRC for each of the four different originators:

• aaa = Stations

• bbb = Attendants

• ccc = CO, FEX and WATS trunks

• ddd = all other trunk types

Defaults if the IFDN is an ACD DN, internal or external DN are:

BSY BSY SRC BSY (3rd entry cannot be changed)

Default if the IFDN is an attendant console:

BSY SRC SRC BSY (only the 4th entry can be changed)

(0)-2047 Busy Threshold at which the Calls Waiting lamp flashes and this queue ceases to accept overflowed calls.

acdb-1

686 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CALB

CALP

CCBA

Response Comment

When BYTH = 0, overflow calls are not accepted by this target queue unless an agent is available.

To delete existing entry, precede entry with X.

Pack/Rel

1 2 ...

Call Filter Bitmap

CALB applies to messages such as PCI, DN update, etc.

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would only be printed if the corresponding set message is enabled.

CALB is printed if AACR = YES.

nxcc-22

(POS) TER Calling party identification sent in PCI message, where: basic-4.00

• POS - Sends the POSID+DNIS in the called party DN field in the PCI message.

• TER - Sends the terminating DN in the called

Party DN field in the PCI message.

(NO)

YES

CDN

CDSQ

CEIL

CLRO x...x

(NO) YES

0-(2047)

(NO) YES

Collect Call Blocking Denied

Collect Call Blocking Allowed

Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is required.

Control DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

The CDN cannot beconfigured as a mailbox

DN.

Deny or allow Converged Desktop Service queue ccb-21 ear-17 sip-4.00

CDN Ceiling value

CEIL limits the number of unanswered calls a

CDN can have at its default ACD DN at a time.

New calls receive a busy signal when the ceiling is reached (CO trunks do not receive busy).

ear-17

Calling Line Restriction Override for CDN

If CLRO=YES, then Calling Line ID is displayed even if the Calling Line Restriction Feature is activated on the originating end.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 687

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

CMB

Response

(NO) YES

Comment Pack/Rel

Deny or Allow redirection to Control DN Mailbox, where: basic-4.50

• CMB = (NO), For SCCS routed calls, the voice mail would be left against the agent's mailbox.

• CMB = Yes, For SCCS routed calls, the voice mail would be left against the SCCS aquired

CDN's mailbox.

CMS

CNTL

CPRD

CRQS

CUST

CWLF

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Command and Status link

If this ACD DN is to use the CSL, enter YES. Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications csl-8

Control DN is in control.

When CNTL = NO, CDN calls are sent to the

Default ACD DN (DFDN).

ear-17 sm sd em ed Collection Period: Month and day data collection is to start and end. Where: acdc-2

• sm = start month (1-12)

• sd = start day of month(1-31)

• em = end month (1-12)

• ed = end day of month(1-31)

0-(100)-255 Call Request Queue Size

It is recommended that CRQS be approximately

20% higher than the number of trunks available for networking. If the customer selects the OCN option, set this value at 5% over trunking capacity. This avoids reserving agents for calls on the network when trunking facilities are unavailable. Flow Control (FCTH) is typically set at 25% of the call request queue size.

The CRQS must be defined for each ACD DN in the network. CRQS must be greater than FCTH.

CRQS = 0 closes the queue.

nacd-15 xx bacd-1

(0)-2047

Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15.

Call Waiting Lamp Flash threshold

Prompted if NCWL = YES. CWLF must be greater than or equal to CWTH acdb-15

688 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CWLW

CWNC

CWTH

Response

(0)-2047

Comment Pack/Rel

Call Waiting Lamp Wink (fast flash) threshold acdb-15

Prompted if NCWL = YES. CWLW must be greater than or equal to CWLF

NO

YES

I s c u

Alert rings for all calls

Alert rings for only priority calls

CWNC appears when a TN has been entered for

CWNT. There is no default.

m911-19

Call Waiting Notification TN m911-19 l = (0-255) Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

0-(1)-2047

CWTT

DAL

DFDN

DNIS

DNRT

0

X

(0)-40-63

(NO) YES x...x

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Calls Waiting Threshold: The number of Calls

Waiting in queue that triggers the "calls waiting" indication.

acdb-1

To disable

To delete existing entry.

ACD Call Waiting Threshold Time (in 1 second intervals) acnt-15

Data Agent Log In with the MSB key allowed

The data agent must be defined with a DTA

Class of Service in LD 11. DAL is not prompted when IVMS or DSAC are set to "YES".

Prompted if TYPE = SCB or ADS.

acdc-14

Local default ACD DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Calls to the CDN are directed to this ACD DN.

RAN and Music, if provided, are as defined for the CDN. Any other ACD treatment, such as

Night, is applied as if the caller directly dialed the

ACD DN.

ear-17 dnis-12 Dialed Number Identification Service

Send (do not send) ACD/DNIS information across the link. Not prompted for Virtual

Agents.

Delay Night RAN Treatment nacd-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 689

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

DOW

DSAC

DURT

EES

EHR

EMRT

FADR

Response Comment

When DNRT = YES for an ACD DN there is a delay in routing calls to the night RAN. The call is delayed until the call has reached the end of the Night table and there are no outstanding call requests for the call.

Prompted if a NACD Night table and a RAN route have been defined.

Pack/Rel

1-7

(NO)

YES

15-(30)-45

Days of Week for data collection

Where: 1 = Sunday and 7 = Saturday acdc-2

ACD DN is not an IS/Data Service Access Code csl-8

ACD DN is an IS/Data Service Access Code

Prompted when MWC = NO

Duration Timer (in minutes)

DURT indicates how long a Target node honors a call request from the Source node. If the timer expires, the call is removed from the call request queue. If this timer is too large, the network call request queues may become overcrowded. If the timer is too small, waiting customers can be cut off from receiving services.

This timer must be defined only for Target queues.

nacd-15

YES

(NO)

0-23

0-511

IVMS uses End-to-End Signaling to send tone.

ims-2

IVMS (does not use) End-to-End Signaling to send tone.

Prompted when IMA = YES.

Hour of day that data reporting ends

Emergency Recorder Trunk Route.

The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining EMRT. Enter X to remove.

acdc-2 acdb-1

(0)-14 Force Answer Delay timer for Ringback

Cadence

Enter delay time, in increments of two seconds, before call is connected to an agent. This delay timer ensures that a caller, during forced answer, receives at least one ringback cadence before being connected to an agent.

supp-14

690 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FADT

FCFT

FCTH

FNCF

FORC

FROA

FRRT

FRT

Response

(0)-15

Comment

Force Answer Delay Time

Enter Delay time, in increments of one second, between calls when Call Forcing is enabled. This delay timer offers an agent a few seconds break before having to answer the next call.

Pack/Rel

supp-14

0-(2)-30

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Flexible Call Force Timer (the time in seconds before Flexible Call Force is enforced) acdb-16

10-(20)-100 Flow Control Threshold to allow additional calls into the call request queue

The Flow Control option opens and closes the

ACD DN for network calls. Once the number of

Call Requests received over the network meets the call request queue size defined in LD 23, the queue is shut down (INACTIVE) for network calls. For the queue to open for network calls, the pending queue request size must drop to a value equal to the flow calls control.

For example, a call request queue size of 50 with a flow control of 10 allows the queue to become inactive after 50 call requests are pending. After

10 calls or 10 Call Requests have been answered or removed, leaving 40 remaining in queue, the queue reopens.

nacd-15

Force Night Call Forward to busy ACD DN bacd-15

Force

Calls are forced to arrive in answered state.

When FORC = Yes, the call arrives on Key 0 (incalls key) in an answered state. Headsets are recommended for this option.

acdb-1

(NO) YES

0-511

0-2044

First RAN On Arrival (the 1st RAN to be given to incoming calls immediately; FRT time ignored)

If FROA = NO, the call is forced to wait FRT time.

Recorded Announcement is only given if an idle agent is not found.

acda-1 acda-1 First RAN Route number for ACD

The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining FRRT. Enter X to remove.

First RAN Time (the time in seconds allowed before unanswered incoming ACD calls are connected to the first RAN) acda-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 691

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

HMSB

HOML

HPQ

HSID

ICDD

Response Comment

Prompted if FRRT is defined. If a value is not entered FRT defaults to blank and there is no connection to the RAN.

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

Agent cannot activate Make Set Busy if an ACD call is on-hold

Agent can activate Make Set Busy if ACD call is on-hold basic-9

(NO)

YES

(NO)

YES

0-15

(NO) YES

Handset Removal or Make Set Busy key (MSB key) log out.

The HOML option allows an agent to log out by removing the headset or going on hook without using the Make Set Busy (MSB) key. Logout while on Agent Reserve causes a cancellation message.

Log out with only the Make Set Busy key

Log out with either handset removal or Make Set

Busy key activation

HOML is prompted if an Auxiliary Data System

(ADS) or Schedule Block (SCB) exists.

bacd-1

High Priority Queue (preference given to High

Priority trunk calls)

Calls from the source queue's high priority trunks are presented after another queue's Timed

Overflow queue (TOFQ) calls.

Calls from the source queue's high priority trunks are presented before another queue's Timed

Overflow queue (TOFQ) calls.

In an NACD environment, HPQ must be denied to receive the OCN prompt. (HPQ = No) tof-10

VAS ID for the Host Application Module Link.

When the CCR and ML applications are both running, this HSID is the VSID assigned to the

AML for Meridian LInk in LD 17. The VSID prompt in this CDN configuration matches the

VSID for the CCR AML port configured in LD

17.

ccr-17

In Calls key Disconnect Deny. Pressing the In

Calls key while active on an ACD call disconnects the call.

acd-40

692 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ICP

ICPR

ICPS

IDLB

IDUB

IFDN

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Intercept Computer Printer (ACD MC used for

Intercept Printer)

0-<NIPN>

Intercept Computer Printer

Printer number (for ICPS = COM); NIPN is defined in LD 15

Pack/Rel

icp-14 icp-14

Intercept Computer Printer Search (when more than one console is used)

Circular search

One Common printer for ACD group icp-14

(CIR)

COM

(1)-9999

IDLB-(9999) Agent ID Upper Boundary

This prompt is used with the IDLB prompt to determine the maximum number of agents allowed by the system. The number must be within the parameters set by the IDLB and IDUB prompts.

Prompted if TYPE = ADS or SCB and AID = YES acdc-19 x...x

Agent ID Lower Boundary

This prompt is used with the IDUB prompt to determine the maximum number of agents allowed by the system. The number must be within the parameters set by the IDLB and IDUB prompts.

Prompted if TYPE = ADS or SCB and AID = YES acdc-19

X

Interflow Directory Number

The Interflow Directory Number serves as the

DN to which calls interflow. IFDN can be up to 31 digits.

Calls diverted to the IFDN are not routed by

NACD. Network calls diverted to an IFDN lose all the network information, so that information cannot be displayed on the terminating telephone.

A group hunt pilot DN can be entered. If the

OPAO package is equipped, then # can be used in this DN.

To delete existing entry.

IFDN and NFCR are affected by the Outpulsing feature for Japan. Refer to the Feature

Description in Features and Services

Fundamentals, NN43001-106 for details.

acdb-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 693

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

IMA

IMS

ISAP

IVMS

IVR

LOG

MAXP

MCFD

Response Comment

Typing four asterisks (****) at the IFDN prompt do not let the user exit Overlay 23.

(NO) YES Integrated Messaging Allowed (ACD DN assigned to IMS) Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.

Pack/Rel

ims-2

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Integrated Messaging Service

Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. IMA must be set to Yes in LD 15.

ims-2

Integrated Services Application Protocol (ACD messages sent across the ISDN/AP link)

Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.

ani-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-999

(0)-999

1-120

(0)

1-3

X

Integrated Voice Messaging System

Set to YES for Meridian Mail applications.

ivms-2

Interactive Voice Response queue

An ACD queue must be defined as an IVR queue before the Treatment Request for IVR command can be used in Customer Controlled Routing

(CCR) applications.

Login maximum (the maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time) ivr-18 acdc-18

Login maximum (the maximum number of agents that can be logged in at any one time) acdc-18

Maximum Number of Agent Positions. The value of the MAXP can be increased to the allowed maximum or decreased to the current number agents.

acda-1

Multiple Queue Assignment (MQA) Call

Forwarding Digits attached to Agent IDs. The digits are used to determine which Phantom TNs are Call Forwarded.

MCFD is prompted if MQCF = YES.

mqa-21

No digits attached to Agent IDs

Limit of digits attached to Agent IDs. Maximum is 3.

No digits attached to Agent IDs

694 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MQA

MQAP

MQAS

MQCF

MURT

MWC

NAME

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Multiple Queue Assignment

No Multiple Queue Assignment functionality

Multiple Queue Assignment functionality

MQA is prompted if AID = YES and MQA package 297 is equipped. Warning: The HSL link must be disabled before you configure or change

MQA.

Pack/Rel

mqa-21 mqa-21

(NO)

YES

(NO)

YES

MQA Priority option

No Priorities selected during login

Select Priorities during login

Prompted if MQA = YES and Priority Agent package 116 is equipped.

Multiple Queue Assignment Supervisor ID option

No Supervisor ID during login

Select a Supervisor ID during login

Prompted if MQA = YES.

mqa-21

(NO)

YES

0-511

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Multiple Queue Assignment Call Forward option mqa-21

No automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login

Automatic Call Forwarding of Phantom TNs to agent sets at login

Prompted if MQA = YES and Phantom TN package 254 is equipped.

Music Route number

The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining MURT. Enter X to remove.

acdb-1

Message Waiting Center

(ACD DN is a message center DN)

MWC is set to YES for Meridian Mail applications. Prompted if Message Waiting

Center (MWC) package 46 is equipped.

Display CDN name for redirected calls mwc-1 basic-4.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 695

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

NCFW

NCWL

NDFL

NRAC

NRRT

NRT

OBSC

OBPT

OBTN

Response

x...x

Comment

Night Call Forward DN for ACD calls (up to 23 digits) and Operator Revert DN for Meridian Mail

(IMS, IVMS). NCFW is tracked on reports as interflow.

NCFW can be up to 31 digits. Precede NCFW entry with X to delete.

Typing four asterisks (****) at the NCFW prompt will not exit Overlay 23 with package OPAO enabled.

Pack/Rel

acda-1

(NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES

0-511

New Call Waiting Lamp options

When NCWL = YES, the Busy Threshold and

Overflow Threshold apply only to Overflow by

Number and Interflow conditions, but do not change the lamp states. Calls in the Call

Request and Local Flow-in queues are included when adding up the calls in queue for lamp state updates.

acdb-15 acdd-24 Not Ready Default code

Must be equipped with ACD-D or NGCC package

Enable Not Ready Activity Codes acdd-24

(0)-2044

Night RAN Route number assigned as night announcement for ACD calls.

If NRRT and NCFW are both defined, then

NRRT course first. The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining NRRT. Enter X to remove.

acda-1

Night RAN Time

This is the time in seconds - in increments of 1 before RAN is connected to ACD calls. NRT is prompted if NRRT is defined and International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped.

supp-9

(NO) YES xx

(NO)

AGT

ALL

Login/Logout control.

Supervisor Inactivity Timer, in minutes

(Default = 5, Minimum = 2, Maximum = 99)

No Observation Tone given

Audible Observe Tone to Agent only

Audible Observe Tone to all parties oas-3.0

oas-3.0

acdb-1

696 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

OCN

OUTS

OVBU

Response

(NO) YES

Comment Pack/Rel

Accept Oldest Call in Network

This feature determines if the oldest call in the network is answered ahead of calls to the Source location. Use caution with this feature. Because agents are reserved for network calls, agents may remain idle while calls wait in the local queue.

To avoid reserving all the agents for network calls, split the ACD group into two areas: one area for all calls and the second area for a group of agents equal to the number of tie lines between the network locations. This solution allows local calls to overflow by time into the area for all calls.

The OCN option must be defined only for Target queues.

When OCN = YES and HPQ = NO, the system compares calls from queues for that target ACD

DN. The highest priority call that has waited the longest is the call presented to the next available agent.

When OCN = NO and HPQ = NO, the system selects the oldest call from the ACD DN's own

Timed Overflow (TOF) queue. If there are no calls in the Source Timed Overflow queue, the system looks at calls in the Call Request queue and Source Timed Local Flow-in queue.

When OCN = NO and HPQ = YES, the system presents calls from the agent's own TOF queue and High-Priority queues before presenting calls from Source TOF queues and Call Request queues.

OCN is prompted if Network Automatic Call

Distribution (NACD) package 207 equipped.

nacd-15 xxxx xxxx Routing Table entries to be removed

Up to 20 entries at a time can be removed from the Enhanced Overflow (EOVF) or Network ACD

(NACD) routing tables. Only 5 entries can be entered at OUTS at a time. OUTS is prompted until just <CR> is entered.

Prompted if REQ = CHG. Remove routing tables by list entry number, not by ACD DN. Print the

NACD data to see the ACD DN associated with each entry number.

nacd-15 aaa bbb ccc ddd acdb-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 697

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

OVDN

OVFL

Response Comment

Overflow Busy treatment for specific call originator types when IFDN not defined.

Enter the required treatment for Overflow calls:

• LNK = caller is re-linked to source queue (the default value)

• BSY = caller hears busy tone

Enter all four entries at the same appearance.

Enter LNK or BSY for each of the four different originators:

• aaa = Internal calls

• bbb = Attendant calls

• ccc = LNK

• ddd = DID and TIE trunks

Pack/Rel

If busy tone is configured for CO trunk calls, the calling or called party is billed for the duration of the call, which is from the time the PBX returns answer supervision until the time the calling party disconnects.

BSY is not allowed for CO trunks. Prompted if there is no entry for IFDN.

x...x x...x x...x

X

Xxxxx

(NO)

YES acdb-1

Overflow ACD Directory Number(s) (maximum of three responses)

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

To remove ALL OVDNs for the ACD DN

To delete a specific DN.

Any new entry replaces the old data. The

Overflow DN cannot be a CDN.

Overflow Tone

Busy tone is given to call

Force overflow tone is given to call by Mobility switch

OVFL is prompted when a call arrives at a

Controlled DN in default mode and when that call has exceeded the CDN-to-a-default-ACD-DN ceiling threshold.

basic-20

698 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

OVTH

PAGE

PCMM

PRIM

PRIO

RAGT

Response

0-(2047)

Comment Pack/Rel

Overflow Threshold

OVTH represents the value at which the Calls

Waiting lamp winks (Fast flashes), causing calls which are entering the queue to overflow.

When OVTH = 0 overflow is attempted when all agents are busy. Enter X to delete existing entry.

acdb-1

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Start at the top of a new page for each report

Periodic Clearing with Meridian Mail

Prompted if OPT = PCMA in LD 15 acdc-2 nas-14

(NO) YES

0-15

2-(4)-30

Primary DSAC csl-8

Printer(s) for Output (establish the number(s) of devices used for output of reports) acdc-2

These output devices must have been defined in

LD 17 as ACD printers. Precede with X to remove a device number.

Number of seconds an agent in a remote target is reserved for an overflow call.

The Reserve Agent Timer keeps the agent reserved until call presentation or timeout. The timer also prevents a situation where an agent can be reserved indefinitely.

When an agent is reserved with Countdown

Allowed (CNTA) CLS as defined in LD 11, the

RAGT countdown is shown on the agent's Digit

Display.

The agent being reserved has a Reserve Agent

Timer with countdown display. The countdown display starts when the Reserve Agent Timer

(RAGT) starts, and counts down by increments of 2 seconds, to zero. If the call is not presented to the Target agent before the Reserve Agent

Timer (RAGT) expires, that call remains at the originating Source queue. The Target agent is returned to the idle agent queue.

nacd-15

If the Reserve Agent Timer is set too high, the agent is reserved waiting for calls. If the Reserve

Agent Timer is set too low, the agent can be freed before the network facility can set up the call.

Different timer settings can be tried through Load

Management. Subsequent calls are presented

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 699

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

RAN

RAO

RDNA

REQ

Response Comment

to agents only after the Reserve Agent Timer has expired.

The RAGT must be defined only for Target queues.

0-511

Pack/Rel

(NO)

YES

FULL

Recorded Announcement Trunk Route Number for calls entering message queue (default NO

RAN) acda-1

Restricted Agent Observe

Restricted Agent Observe on logout disabled

Restricted Agent Observe on logout enabled

Restrict the supervisor from observing any of agents IDN calls even when logged in

(NO)

YES

CHG

DACR

END

LST

NEW

OUT

PRT

Restricted DN Access

Enter NO if use of DN keys is to be allowed without logging in.

Enter YES to restrict agents from making outgoing calls when not logged in.

Prompted if an Auxiliary Data System (ADS) or

Schedule Block (SCB) exists.

acdc-1

Request

Change existing data

Select OUT followed by NEW, instead of CHG when switching resources between virtual and actual ACD DNs to avoid unwanted information on ACD-D reports.

De-acquire ACD Queue and CDN resources

Exit Overlay program

List ACD DNs

(This includes ACD DNs, CDNs and NACD DNs)

Add new data to the system

Remove data block

When removing an ACD DN from the Meridian 1 which is monitored by ACD-MAX, the DN is not automatically deleted from the ACD-MAX configuration.

Print the specified data bacd-18

700 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RFRQ

RGAI

ROPT

RPRT

3

4

1

2

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

7

Response Comment

Report Frequency. See also ROPT prompt for

Report Options.

No reports

All reports hourly on the hour

All reports hourly on the half-hour

All reports half-hourly

Report 3 every quarter-hour, no other reports.

Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports hourly on the hour.

Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports hourly on the half-hour.

Report 3 every quarter-hour, other reports every half-hour

Pack/Rel

acdc-2

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Ring Again for Internal calls

When internal caller dials a queue with no available agents, fast ringback is provided. If

RGAI = YES, the caller can activate Ring Again to be presented to the next available agent.

Enter YES for Data Service Access Code.

(DSAC). RGAI must = YES for DSAC.

acda-8

Report Options

Agent group

Queue

Trunk routes

Agent position

Precede with X to disable a report. More than one option allowed. Any new entry replaces the old data.

acdc-2

Information about this ACD-DN (or CDN) is excluded in management reports and status displays.

Information about this ACD-DN (or CDN) is included in management reports and status displays

RPRT is prompted only if a SCB or an ADS block exists for this customer.

acdc-17

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 701

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

RSND

RTPC

RTQO

RTQT

SDNB

SFNB

Response

(4)-16

(NO)

YES

(NRD)

MSB

(0)-50

(NO) YES

1 2 ...

Comment Pack/Rel

Note:

For release 4.0 and earlier, the default is

YES.

Message Resend timer (in seconds)

This is the length of time the Source node waits for a response from the Target node after sending a Call Request message.

When the Resend Timer expires, another message is sent. If the second Call Request message expires without a response, the Call

Request is removed from the network queue.

The Resend Timer should be changed only if the network uses multiple hops and ISL with lower baud rates.

A single hop typically requires 100 ms of real time to set up the call. When the Resend Timer is too large, the control function of the timer to limit traffic to busy nodes is lost. If the Resend

Timer is too small, the access of calls to nodes can be limited unnecessarily.

The Resend Timer must be defined for the

Source node and the Target nodes.

nacd-15

Real Time Processing

The SAGP Load Management command does not take effect in real time.

The SAGP Load Management command takes effect in real time.

supp-9 acd-23 Return to Queue Option

Not Ready

Make Set Busy

Return to Queue Timer after no answer in number of ringing cycles acd-23

Secondary DN Blocking

Block calls to the Secondary DN while busy on

ACD call.

acdb-12

Set Feature Notification Bitmap

SFNB is used for messages such as: SFN

(login), SFN (logout), ...

nxcc-22

702 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SFRQ

SHR

SPCP

1

2

Response Comment

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of SFN messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value is printed only if the corresponding message is enabled.

SFNB is printed if AACR = YES.

0-23

(NO) YES

Frequency of Status Display updates

30 seconds

60 seconds

Start Hour

Hour of day that data reporting starts

Pack/Rel

acdc-2 acdc-2

Separate Post Call Processing (to enable separate DCP/PCP indication)

When SPCP = YES, agents in Post Call

Processing (PCP) are separated from agents in

Direct Call Processing (DCP). Changing the

SPCP option for an ACD DN changes all ACD

DNs in the same customer group.

Agent (AGT) key lamp states and display (DAG) field on supervisor telephones are affected by

SPCP as follows:

AGT key lamp steady:

• SPCP = YES; agent is on an ACD call

• SPCP = NO; agent is on an ACD call or not ready (NRD) acdb-1

AGT key lamp fast flash:

• SPCP = YES; agent is on non-ACD call or

NRD

• SPCP = NO; agent is on non-ACD call

DAG Display ACD DN:

• SPCP = YES; displays # of agents on ACD calls

• SPCP = NO; displays # of agents on ACD calls or NRD

DAG Display non-ACD DN:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 703

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

SRPT

SRRT

SRT

STIO

TABL

TDNS

Response Comment

• SPCP = YES; displays # of agents on non-

ACD calls or NRD

• SPCP = NO; displays # of agents on non-ACD calls

The SPCP option is a customer-wide option. A change to SPCP for any ACD queues affects all

ACD queues for that customer.

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES

0-511

Short Report option for report 4 (Agent position) acdc-2

Use the short report when more than one agent, each with a unique agent ID, logs into the same position ID during a report period.

Second RAN Route number for ACD

The route and at least one trunk must exist before defining SRRT. Enter X to remove.

acda-1

0-2044 acda-1

0, 1, 2,...15

Status Input/Output devices

Enter all Input/Output devices assigned for status displays. The device must be first defined in LD 17. Prompted if a Schedule Block (SCB) exits. Enter X to remove.

acdc-2 x

Second RAN Time

Time in seconds before second RAN is connected to ACD calls. Prompted if SRRT is defined. There is no default for SRT.

Table. Where: x =

• D = Day Table

• N = Night Table

• S = Source Table

The Day Table is mutually exclusive with TOFT.

The Night Table is mutually exclusive with

NCFW.

nacd-15

(NO)

YES

DNIS number is not an original Called Party of a defined CDN queue.

basic-20

DNIS number is an original Called Party of a defined CDN queue. TDNS = YES is recommended if a CDN is defined for the Mobility

704 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TOFT

TOT4

TRDN

TRGT

TSFT

TYPE

Response Comment

Control Point (MCP) application to control a

Personal Communication Service (PCS) call.

2-1800

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

Timed Overflow Threshold (in seconds)

Before defining the TOFT value, first delete that

OVDN from its Source ACD DN. Then, enter the time, in seconds, that you want a call to wait in queue before it overflows to an OVDN.

When REQ = CHG, and the OVDNs are answering TOF calls, an error message is output indicating the affected Target ACD DNs.

Enter X to disable the feature. If no value is entered, NONE is printed.

tof-10

Totals on report 4

Averages are output on report 4 (Agent position)

Totals are output on report 4 (Agent position)

Prompted if ROPT = 4. If TOT4 = YES, HDCP column is output on report 1 and 4. Must have

ACD-C enabled.

acdc-10 xxxx xxxx tttt

0-(20)-510

Treatment DN for IVR queue

A treatment DN does not have to be a valid DN in the switch. If Meridian Mail is to be used for both Voice Messaging and IVR, a Treatment DN should not be the same as any Meridian Mail voice box. Enter X to remove.

ivr-18

Target. Where:

• xxxx = Target ACD DN

• tttt = time (0-1800) in seconds

Up to 20 target ACD DNs can be defined. For each target, tttt is the total time from the call entering the ACD queue until a call request is sent to the target. TRGT rounds up to an even number.

nacd-15

Telephone Service Factor Threshold (in seconds)

Prompted if a Schedule Block (SCB) exits.

acdc-1

ACD

Type of data block

Automatic Call Distribution data block bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 705

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

Prompt

UMG

UMT

USFB

UST

Response

ADS

CDN

NACD

OBVP

SCB

Comment

Requires Basic Automatic Call Distribution

(BACD) package 40.

Auxiliary Data System data block

Requires Automatic Call Distribution Package C

(ACDC) package 50. Not valid when REQ =

PRT.

Control Directory Number data block

This is a special DN created to specify a destination ACD DN to which incoming calls are directed. Multiple CDNs can direct calls to the same ACD DN providing different treatments based on the CDN parameters.

Requires Enhanced ACD Routing (EAR) package 214.

Network ACD data block

Requires Network Automatic Call Distribution

(NACD) package 207.

Observe Password table

Schedule data Block for ACD Management

Reports

Requires Automatic Call Distribution, Package C

(ACDC) package 42.

Pack/Rel

acdd-2 nacd-15 oas-3.0

acdc-2

(NO) YES

2-(6)-15

User to User Messaging ims-2

Update Message Time

Silence interval in seconds after message queue alert tone.

ims-2

1 2 ...

(NO) YES

Unsolicited Status Message (USM) Filter Bitmap

USFB applies to messages such as:

Onhook, Offhook, Ringing, Active,

Disconnect, Unringing, Hold, Restore, Ready,

Not Ready, Walkaway, Walkaway Return,

Reserved, Unreserved, ...

This bitmap is downloaded by the application which is used to control the sending of USM messages on behalf of the acquired TN. A numeric value would be printed only if the corresponding message set is enabled.

USFB is printed if AACR = YES.

nxcc-22

User Status update ims-2

706 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

UUI

VSID

Response

(NO) YES

0-127

Comment

Use- to-User Information

Pack/Rel

uui-3.0

Value Added Server ID of VAS providing VMS csl-8

VASs are external server equipment facilities such as Meridian Mail. Prompted if IMS or ISAP

= YES. Must be defined in LD 17.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 707

LD 23: Automatic Call Distribution, Management Reports, Message Center

708 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 24: LD 24: Direct Inward System

Access

Overlay program 24 allows data for the Direct Inward System Access (DISA), the Emergency Services

Access (ESA) , and the Mobile Service Access (MSA) features to be created, modified, and printed.

Note:

To manage and print data for the Mobile Service Access feature, package 412 (Mobile Extensions) must be equipped.

Prompts and responses

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) data block

Prompt Response

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

SPWD

DN

CCBA aaa

DIS xx xxxx

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DIS (Direct Inward System)

Customer number associated with this data block

Secure data Password x...x

DISA Directory Number

(NO) YES Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent

SCOD

AUTR

TGAR

NCOS

COS

RANR

- RTMR x...x

0-(1)-15

(0)-31

Security Code

(NO) YES Authorization Code required

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Network Class of Service aaa x...x

Class of Service (aaa = (CTD), FR1, FR2, FRE, CUN, SRE,

TLD, or UNR)

Route number for DISA RAN

(0)-10-300 Route timer

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 709

LD 24: Direct Inward System Access

Prompt Response

DGTS x...x

- DLNT

CRCS

(YES) NO x

Comment

Digits for DISA Digit Insertion

Dial tone needed after digit insertion

Code Restriction Class of Service

Emergency Services Access (ESA) data block

REQ

TYPE

Prompt

CUST

ENTR

- -ESDN

- -ESRT

- -RLI

- -DDGT

- -DFCL

- -OSDN

- -

MISDIAL_PREVEN

TION xxxx x..x

x..x

x..x

YES

Response

aaa

ESA

Comment

Request

Type of data block = ESA (Emergency Services Access)

Customer number associated with this data block xx xx xxxx

0-511

Emergency Services Directory Number

Emergency Services Access route number

Route List Index number

Directing digits

Default ESA Calling Number

On-Site Notification station DN

WARNING The MISDIAL_PREVENTION feature has the potential to suppress actual emergency calls; hence all intercepted emergency calls need to be identified and investigated. System message OSN004 will be printed for the suppressed ESA calls. Refer to NTP for further details.

- -ARE YOU SURE? (NO) YES Disable Misdial feature Enable Misdial feature

- -MISDIAL_DELAY

1-(2)-3-4 Misdial delay, in seconds.

- -ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT

(YES) NO Allow (ignore) last ESDN digit repeat. Deny (trap) last

ESDN digit repeat.

ENTR

VOLO_COUNT

(0) ... xx The number of emergency TNs in the pool.

710 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

VOLO_FIRST_T N

Response Comment

c u l s c u The first TN in the emergency TN pool.

VOLO_CALBK_TIM

900-(1200)-1800

The number of seconds the emergency TN is used after the ESA call is complete.

Mobile Service Access (MSA) data block

Prompt Response

REQ:

TYPE:

CUST

SPWD

DN

SCOD

AUTR

CCBA aaa

MSA xx xxxx x...x

x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = MSA (Mobile Service Access)

Customer number associated with this data block

Secure data Password

Mobile Service Directory Number

Security Code

(NO) YES Authorization Code required

(NO) YES Allow Collect Call Blocking Answer signal to be sent

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ARE YOU

SURE?

AUTR

CCBA

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO)

YES

Comment

MISDIAL_PREVENTION

Enter YES, if prompted

Pack/Rel

basic-5-0

Authorization Code required

If YES, the user enters the authorization code but not the special prefix access code.

disa-7

Collect Call Blocking Denied

Collect Call Blocking Allowed ccb-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 711

LD 24: Direct Inward System Access

COS

Prompt

CRCS

CUST

DDGT

DFCL

DGTS

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

UNR x xx x..x

x..x

Response

x...x

Comment

Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package

290 is required.

Pack/Rel

Conditionally Toll Denied Class of

Service

Conditionally Unrestricted Class of

Service

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted Class of Service

Semi-Restricted Class of Service

Toll Denied Class of Service

Unrestricted Class of Service

Code Restriction Class of Service New

Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) must be activated at least once.

disa-1

Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15. Where xx =

• 0-15 ESDN entry.

• 0-31 Small System.

• 0-99 Large System.

• NULL end of entries disa-1

Directing digits (e.g. 1, 11, 911, etc.). Up to 4 digits are accepted.

The configured digits are outpulsed as the called number if the outgoing trunk for the ESA call is a CAMA trunk.

esa- 23

Default ESA Calling Number. The input must be the following lengths:

* On a system that is not FNP packaged,

8 or 11 digits are accepted if the first digit of the input is '1'; otherwise the input must be 7 or 10 digit.

* On a system that is FNP packaged, up to 16 digits are allowed to be entered.

'X' deletes the data.

Note that the prompt does not expect a

CLID entry number.

esa- 23

Digits for DISA Digit Insertion.

dpna-21

712 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

DLNT

DN

ENTR

ESDN

ESRT

Prompt

X

Response

(YES)

NO x...x

0-15 xxxx

0-511

Comment

A maximum of 31 digits can be defined.

Removes existing digits and deactivates DISA Digits Insertion.

Direct Private Network Access (DPNA) package 250 is required.

Pack/Rel

Dial tone needed after digit insertion

Dial tone not needed after digit insertion dpna-21

Directory Number.

Where x..x = 1-4 digit number, or a 1-7 digit number when Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Directory Number.

Mobile Service Access (MSA) Directory

Number.

If DN is a DISA Directory Number

(TYPE = DIS):

• all trunk routes terminating in DISA must auto-terminate (LD 16 prompt

AUTO = YES)

• trunks must have ground start signaling (LD 14 prompt SIGL = GRD)

• DN must be the same as prompt

ATDN in LD 14 disa-1 disa-1 basic-5.50

Entry for new Emergency Services DN

(ESDN).

esa-23

Emergency services DN. Up to 4 digits are accepted.

esa- 23

Emergency Services Access route number. Precede with "X'" to delete the data.

Route number of the following routes types are accepted as valid input:

CAM

COT

DID

FEX

TIE esa- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 713

LD 24: Direct Inward System Access

Prompt

MISDIAL_PREVENTION

(NO)

YES

MISDIAL_DELAY

1-(2)-3-4

ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT

(YES)

NO

NCOS

OSDN

(0)-99 x..x

RANR

(X)

Response

x...x

Comment

WAT

The route number of an ISA service route (LD16, ISAR = YES) can be entered for ESRT as long as the route type of the ISA service route is one of the above.

To configure RLI information in LD 24, enter no values at the ESRT prompt and enter the RLI number at the RLI prompt.

This ensures that only the RLI is active as the routing method.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

Disable Misdial feature

Enable Misdial feature.

basic-5.00

Misdial delay, in seconds.

basic-5.00

Allow (ignore) last ESDN digit repeat.

Deny (trap) last ESDN digit repeat.

Network Class of Service ncos-1

On-Site Notification station DN. The input must be a valid single appearance internal DN.

'X' deletes the data.

The On Site Notification function is dependent on the OSDN to locate and alert the OSN set in the event of an ESA call.

esa- 23

Route number for DISA RAN, where:

• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS

1000E

• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS

1000S, MG 1000B and MG 1000T dpna-21

Removes existing route and deactivates DISA RAN.

This prompt appears with Direct Private

Network Access (DPNA) package 250

714 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

REQ

Prompt

RTMR

SCOD

SPWD

TGAR

TYPE

0-(1)-15

DIS

ESA

MSA

VOLO_COUNT (0) ... xx

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

(0)-10-300 x...x

X

Response

<CR> xxxx

Comment

and Recorded Announcement (RAN) package 7.

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create a new DISA data block

Remove a DISA data block

Print DISA data block

Pack/Rel

disa-1

Route Timer

RTMR = the maximum time (in seconds) that a caller can wait for an available

RAN trunk before being removed from the RAN queue. A caller that has failed to capture a RAN trunk during the

RTMR time limit proceeds with the call as if DISA RAN has completed. Entering

"0" clears the timer and deactivates the

DISA RAN timer.

dpna-21

Security Code

Where x..x = 1-8 digit security access code.

Remove security code.

No security code or code not changed.

disa-1

Secure Data Password

Prompted only if the password is defined in LD 15. If the password is not entered, the security code does not print when PRT is requested.

disa-1

Trunk Group Access Restriction disa-1

Type of data block

Direct Inward System Access data block

Emergency Services Access data block

Mobile Service Access data block disa-1 esa-23 mobx-5.50

The number of emergency TNs in the pool. Where xxx = basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 715

LD 24: Direct Inward System Access

Prompt Response Comment

• 32 for System Option 11C

• 255 for System Option 81C

VOLO_FIRST_TN c u l s c u

VOLO_CALBK_TIM

900-

(1200)-1800

The 1st TN in the emergency TN pool.

Prompted if VOLO_COUNT is not 0.

The number of seconds the emergency

TN is used after the ESA call is complete. Input must be an even number. The default value is 1200 seconds. Prompted if the

VOLO_COUNT is not 0.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

basic-5.00

716 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 25: LD 25: Move Data Blocks

Overlay program 25 allows data associated with loops, shelves, or cards to be moved to or interchanged with different loops, shelves, or cards.

The program also allows the data associated with different customers to be moved at the same time as long as all source and destination loops, shelves, and cards are identical for all customers specified.

Move and swap rules

1. Before using MOV or SWP the following hardware should be removed from the system and reconstructed after the MOV is completed:

• Consoles

• Digitone Receivers

• Dial Tone Detectors

• Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC/MFE)

• PRA loops

• ACD telephones

• All lines associated with the loop or card on the destination side

2. Loops must be configured in LD 17.

3. NT8D17 Conference/TDS loop cannot be moved or swapped with LD 25.

4. When moving a card, the units on the source card must match with the card type on the destination side.

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

REQ: aaa

CUST

SRCL xx xx ... xx xxx

Comment

Request (aaa = END, SWP, or MOV)

Customer number

Source Loop number from which data is to be moved

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 717

LD 25: Move Data Blocks

Prompt Response

SRC 1-50

DSTL

DEST xxx

1-50

SHCD

STUN

MVSG

- SHSG

STSG a...a

xx

Comment

Source Card for Small System

Loop number Destination to which data is to be moved

Destination Card for Small System

Shelf Card (a...a format = ss TO ds or ss c TO ds c)

Starting destination Unit Number

(NO) YES Move Segment a...a

Shelf Segment (a...a format = ss sseg TO ds dseg)

0-3 Starting destination Segment

Move and swap rules

Scenario: Move or swap a shelf or card from source loop to destination loop

Single density loop (SD)

Single density loop (SD)

DESTINATION

Double density loop (DD)

Quadruple density loop

(4D)

all cards are SD all cards are SD all cards are SD

SOURCE

Double density loop (DD)

Quadruple density loop

(4D) all cards must be

SD all cards must be

SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be DD or SD cards can be 4D,

DD or SD

Scenario: Move or swap a whole loop from source loop to destination loop

SOURCE

Single density loop (SD)

Double density loop (DD)

Single density loop (SD)

shelf 0-3 all cards on shelf must be SD

DESTINATION

Double density loop (DD)

if only shelf 0 and/or 1 is configured on loop shelf 0-1

Quadruple density loop

(4D)

if only shelf 0 is configured on loop if only shelf 0 is configured on loop

718 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Scenario: Move or swap a whole loop from source loop to destination loop

Quadruple density loop

(4D)

Single density loop (SD)

DESTINATION

Double density loop (DD)

all cards on loop must be SD cards can be DD or SD

Quadruple density loop

(4D)

shelf 0

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CUST xx xx ... xx Customer number

Comment

Enter the customers affected by the move or swap operation. Customer 0 must be specified to move digitone receivers on the source loop.

<CR> All customers affected

The move/swap superloop data on a customer basis is not supported. Enter a return, (<CR>) when moving or swapping superloop data.

Pack/Rel

basic-1

DEST 1-50 Card number Destination to which data is to be moved (not supported for digital cards). If the loop hasD-channel as a backup, REQ = MOV is not supported.

For Small System, card 0 is not supported.

basic-1

DSTL xxx Loop number Destination to which data is to be moved

Where xxx is:

0-159 basic-20

0-255 Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

0-9 Small System

1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49, Small System for

DTI, DTI2, PRI, PRI2 lse-25 basic-1

11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S

If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ =

MOV is not supported.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 719

LD 25: Move Data Blocks

Prompt Response

MVSG (NO) YES

Comment

Move or swap Superloop Segments

REQ

END

MOV

SWP

Pack/Rel

basic-15

Request

Exit Overlay program.

Move data associated with an existing loop to a

vacant loop (see Move and swap rules on

page 718).

basic-1

CAUTION: Before using MOV, consoles and digitone receivers should be removed from the database and reconstructed after the move is completed.

MOV command can be used to move data blocks at a card, shelf or loop level within the following guidelines:

1. Before using the MOV command, the following hardware should be removed from the source and destination loop, shelf or cards and reconstructed after the move is completed.

basic-25.4

• Consoles

• Digitone Receivers

• Dial Tone Detectors

• Multifrequency Compelled Signalling cards

(MFC/MFE)

• PRA loops

• ACD telephones

• All lines associated with the loop or card on the destination side of the move command.

2. Loops must be configured in LD 17

3. NT8D17 Conference/TDS card cannot be moved with LD 25

4. Type of source card must match with the card type on the destination side.

5. Cannot move Superloop data on a customer basis (SCH5235)

Swap (interchange) data associated with existing loops (

Move and swap rules on page 718)

SHCD Shelf Card basic-1

720 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ss TO ds

Comment

Move or interchange data to or between shelves.

ss c TO ds c

Move or interchange data to or between cards.

Where:

• c = card number (0-15)

• ss = source shelf

• ds = destination shelf

Shelf range:

• SD = 0-3

• DD = 0-1

• 4D = 0

• 8D = 0-1 (superloops only)

SHSG

SRC

SRCL

Pack/Rel

ss sseg TO ds dseg

Move/Swap source Shelf Segment to destination

Shelf Segment, where: basic-15

• ss = source shelf

• ds = destination shelf

• sseg = source segment

• dseg = destination segment.

The SHSG command is used to move or swap superloop segments.

1-50 Source Card number from which data is to be moved (not supported for digital cards). If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ = MOV is not supported. For Small System, card 0 is not supported.

basic-1 xxx Source Loop number from which data is to be moved

Where: xxx = 0-159 basic-20 xxx = 0-255 Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 721

LD 25: Move Data Blocks

Prompt Response Comment

xxx = 0-9 Small System xxx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 Small

System for DTI, DTI2, PRI, PRI2

11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 for CS 1000S

If the loop has D-channel as a backup, REQ =

MOV is not supported.

STSG 0-3

STUN xx

Pack/Rel

lse-25 basic-1

Starting destination Segment

For superloops only, if REQ = MOV, enter the starting destination segment to which the shelf is to be moved.

basic-15

Starting destination Unit Number

Enter the starting destination unit number to which the first source unit is to be moved. The source card must not be on a superloop; the destination card must be on a superloop.

The value of xx depends on source loop density.

For 500/2500 and digital line cards: basic-15

• SD, xx = 0, 4, 8, 12

• DD, xx = 0, 8

• QD, xx = 0, 8 (8 for digital line cards only)

For a Digitone Receiver card the destination density is 8D and the source density is:

• SD, xx = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

• DD, xx = 0, 2, 4, 6

• QD, xx = 0, 4

SD, DD trunk cards cannot be moved to Universal or E&M/Dictation Trunk cards.

Different source cards cannot be mixed into

Superloop cards with one destination. Only ALC,

DLC and DTR can be moved to superloops.

722 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 26: LD 26: Group Do Not Disturb

Overlay program 26 allows Do Not Disturb groups to be created, modified, and printed.

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

REQ: aaa

TYPE:

CUST

DND xx

GPNO

TOGP

GRPx

STOR

RMOV

0-99

0-99

0-99 x...x

x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DND (Do Not Disturb Group)

Customer number associated with this data block

Group Number or new Group Number to be formed

Move to Group number

Number of next Group to be moved

DN to be Stored

Remove DN

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CUST xx

Comment

Customer number associated with this data block as defined in LD 15.

GPNO 0-99

<CR>

Group Number or new Group Number to be formed

Print all Group Numbers.

Prompted when REQ = PRT.

GRPx

REQ

0-99

<CR>

Number of next Group to be moved

Proceed to next prompt.

Action Request

Pack/Rel

dndg-1 dndg-1 dndg-1 dndg-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 723

LD 26: Group Do Not Disturb

Prompt Response

CHG

END

MOV

MRG

NEW

OUT

PRT

REM

Comment

Change existing data block.

Exit Overlay program.

Move a DN from one DND Group data block to another

Group data block.

Pack/Rel

Merge existing Group data blocks into a new Group (the old groups still exist) data block.

Create a New data block.

Remove data block.

Print DND Group data block.

Remove an entry from a Group data block.

RMOV x...x

dndg-1

STOR

G0-G99 x...x

G0-G99

Remove DN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Remove Group number

DN to be stored

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Group number to be stored. Numbers can be added when REQ is CHG.

dndg-1

TOGP

TYPE

0-99

DND

Move To Group number

DND Group data block type dndg-1 dndg-1

724 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 27: LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate

Interface (BRI) Administration

Overlay program 27 was introduced to configure ISDN Basic Rate Interface hardware.

If ISDN BRI is being configured for the first time, the following sequence must be used:

1. Configure Protocol group (PROT) data block, Link Access Protocol on D-channel (LAPD) data block.

2. Configure PRI loop, route, and channel data blocks for packet data transmission.

3. Configure Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) data block.

4. Configure Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator.

5. Configure S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) or U Interface Line Card (UILC) data block.

6. Configure Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL) data block.

7. Configure Terminal Service Profile on DSL (TSP) data block.

If changing the existing ISDN BRI service this sequence does not have to be followed, but the relationship of one data block to another must be observed. Due to interactions the changing of one data block may require the changing of other data blocks.

Refer to the ISDN BRI Administration NTP for complete details.

Prompts and responses

BRSC: Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

BRSC

BRSC l s c

Comment

Request

Type of data block = BRSC (Basic Rate Signaling

Concentrator)

Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator card

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 725

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt

MISP

Response

x...x

DPSD

- MPHC

- MPH

- PRI_CH l

(NO) YES

(YES) NO l ch

Comment

MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and

MG 1000Ts

D-channel Packet Switched Data

Switch Route D-channel packet data to (Meridian Packet

Handler) or public switched packet data network

Meridian Packet Handler loop

PRI for Packet Handler and BRSC connections

CARD: SILC/UILC card data block

The S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) or U Interface Line Card (UILC) configuration procedures identify the location, the card type, and the MISP network loop for each SILC or UILC installed.

• in the Large System Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) and Common Equipment (CE)

Modules

• in a card slot for each SILC or UILC installed in the Base or Expansion cabinet of a Small

System

• in a card slot for each SILC or UILC installed in a MG 1000S of a CS 1000S system.

After the card configuration block is created, the dedicated D-channels are automatically assigned if the MISP is enabled. When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at the TN prompt prints out information for all the cards in the system.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

TN

MISP

CTYP

Response

aaa

CARD l s c u x...x

aaaa

Comment

Request

Type of data block = CARD (SILC/UILC)

Terminal Number of SILC or UILC

MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and

MG 1000T

Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)

726 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

DNAT: Data Network Address Tables data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

DNAT

DNIC

NTN

Response

aaa

DNAT

1-32 xxxx x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DNAT (Data Network Address Table)

DNA Table to print

Data Network Identification Code

Network Terminal Number

DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIL)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

DSL

APPL

DES

CUST

CTYP

MISP

Response

aaa

DSL l s c dsl

BRIL d...d

xx aaaa x...x

MODE

B1CT

B2CT

LDN

MTEI

MCAL

MTSP aaaa aaa aaa

(NO) 0-5

1-(8)-20

1-(4)-8

1-(8)-16

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DSL (Digital Subscriber Loop)

Digital Subscriber Loop address

Basic Rate Interface Line

DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

Customer number associated with this function

Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)

MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and

MG 1000T

Mode for DSL (aaaa = NTAS or NTFS)

B-channel 1 Call Type (aaa = (VCE) or (DTA) or PMD or

IPD)

B-channel 2 Call Type (aaa = (VCE) or (DTA) or PMD or

IPD)

NO = No LDN assigned to the DSL 0-5 is the Departmental

Listed Directory Number defined in LD 15

Maximum Terminal Endpoint Identifiers

Maximum Calls allowed per DN when TYPE = DSL

Maximum Terminal Service Profiles

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 727

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt

LAPD

PRID

PDCA

Response

0-15

1-6

1-16

FDN

EFD

HUNT

EHT

TGAR

NCOS

SGRP

CAC_MFC

- CLS x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

0-(1)-31

(0)-99

(0)-999

(0)-10 aaa

Comment

LAPD protocol group number for DSL assignment

Protocol ID. Prompted if REQ = NEW

Pad Category table defined in LD 73. Prompted if PRID =

2 or 4

Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory. Number (1-13 digits allowed)

External Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory

Number (1-13 digits allowed)

Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)

External Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)

Trunk Group Access Restriction number

Network Class of Service

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

MFC CNI Category Code

Class of Service (See

Alphabetical list of prompts on

page 734)

DSL: Digital Subscriber Loop data block (APPL = BRIT or BRIE)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

DSL

Response

aaa

DSL l s c dsl

DES

APPL d...d

aaaa

- ISDN_MCNT

60-(300)-350

CUST

CTYP

MISP xx aaaa x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DSL (Digital Subscriber Loop)

Digital Subscriber Loop address

DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

Basic Rate Interface (aaa = BRIT or BRIE)

Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.

Customer number associated with this function

Card Type (aaaa = SILC or UILC)

MISP loop number for Large System and CS 1000E; SISP card slot for SSmall Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and

MG 1000T

728 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

MODE

- MTFM

TKTP

CLOK

- TSET

PDCA

ROUT

TIMR

- T310

B1

- MEMB

- TGAR

- NCOS

- CLS aa

Response

(NO) YES aaa

(NO) YES

0-15

1-16

0-511

(NO) YES

10-(30)-60

110-(120)

(NO) YES

1-510

0-(1)-31

(0)-99 aaa

B2

- MEMB

- TGAR

- NCOS

- CLS

(NO) YES

1-510

0-(1)-31

(0)-99 aaa

Comment

Mode for DSL (aa = (TE) or NT)

Multi-Frame Mode

Trunk Type (aaa = TIE, COT, and DID)

Clock source

Threshold Set for clock errors

Pad Category table (defined in LD 73)

Route number for the Trunk DSL

Change Timer values

T310 Timer value in seconds

T310 Timer range for PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks

Change B-channel 1 configuration

Member number of BRI route

Trunk Group Access Restriction number

Network Class of Service

Class of Service (see

Alphabetical list of prompts

on page 734)

B-channel 2

Member number of BRI route

Trunk Group Access Restriction number

Network Class of Service

Class of Service (see

Alphabetical list of prompts

on page 734)

LAPB: Link Access Procedure - Balanced data block

The Link Access Protocol for B-channels defines the B-channel packet data configuration.

Meridian 1 Packet Handler (MPH) package 248 must be equipped.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

PGPN

Response

aaa

LAPB

0-15

Comment

Request

Type of data block = LAPB (Link Access Procedure -

Balance)

Protocol Group Number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 729

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

- T2

- T3

- N1

- N2

- K

Prompt

USER

LAPB

- T1

Response

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

2-(6)-130

1-(4)-129 xxx

23-(135)- 263

1-(10)-15

(1)-7

Comment

Print groups selected at PGPN prompt

Change Link Access Protocol for B-channels

Response Timer in units of 0.5 seconds

Maximum frame delay in units of 0.5 seconds

Idle Timer in units of 0.5 seconds (xxx = 0 or 3-(12)-131)

Maximum I-frame size in octets

Maximum number of retries

Window size

MISP: Multipurpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block

The Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) configuration procedures identify each

MISP in the system and its packet handling capabilities. After the MISP is configured it can be enabled using LD 32. An MISP can support any combination of SILCs and UILCs up to a total of four, which are assigned to the MISP using the SILC/UILC configuration procedure.

When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at the LOOP prompt prints out all MISPs in the system.

When REQ = CHG, the following applies:

• MISP must be disabled when adding/removing D-channel packet capability

• remove Packet Mode Data call type B-channels before removing the B-channel packet capability

• remove Logical Terminal Identifiers (LTIDs) before removing the D-channel packet capability

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

LOOP

CARD

MG_CARD l s c

APPL

PH

- PRI

Response

aaa

MISP

0, 2, 4...158

1-9 a...a

a...a

0, 2, 4...158

Comment

Request

Type of data block = MISP

MISP/SISP loop number

SISP card slot number (valid only for Small Systems, CS

1000S, MG 1000B, and MG 1000T)

The Media Gateway card for the MISP associated to the

IPMG.

Application (a...a = BRI, BRIE, BRIL, or MPH)

Packet Handler (a...a = DCH, BCH, or BDCH)

Primary Rate Interface

730 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- CH

DPSD

- MPHC xx

Response

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

- TN

PRFX

NTNO

DNIC

NWIF

- TN

- RATE

- LAPB

- X25P

- PVC

- IC

- TC

- OC

- DNAT l s c u

0-9

(YES) NO xxxx

1-3 l s c u

(64) 56

(NO) YES

(YES) NO n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

1-32

Comment

Channel number

D-channel Packet Switched Data

Route D-channel packet switched data to the Meridian

Packet Handler.

Terminal Number

DNA table Prefix

Public Switched Packet Data Network presentation

Data Network Identification Code

MPH Network Interface identifier

Terminal Number

PSDN communication Rate

Change LAPB parameters

Change X.25 parameters

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number range

Incoming Logical Channel number range

Two-way Logical Channel number range

Outgoing Logical Channel number range

DNA Table to print

PVC: Permanent virtual circuit connections data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

PVC

MPH

PVCN

XPVC

- NWIF

NTN1

LCN1 loop

1-4

(YES) NO

1-3 x...x

1-4095

Comment

Request

Type of data block = PVC (Permanent virtual circuit connections)

Meridian Packet Handler loop

Permanent Virtual Circuit Number

External or internal PVC connection

MPH Network Interface identifier

First Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number for NT1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 731

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt

NTN2

LCN2

Response

xx . . . xx

1-4095

Comment

Second Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number for NT2

PROT or LAPD: Protocol or Link Access Protocol data block

The protocol configuration procedures define the protocols used by ISDN BRI DSLs to communicate over ISDN. These protocol groups support various ISDN communication standards used in North America, Europe, and other continents and countries.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

PGPN

LAPD

USER

- T200

- T203

- N200

- N201

- K

- N2X4

PGPN

Response

aaa

PROT

0-15

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(2)-40

4-(20)-80

1-(3)-8

4-(260)

(1)-32

0-(10)-20

<CR>

Comment

Request

Type of data block = PROT or LAPD (Protocol group or Link

Access Protocol on D-channel)

Protocol Group Number

Change Link Access Protocol for D-channels

Print groups selected at PGPN prompt

Retransmission Timer in increments of 0.5 seconds

Maximum Time between transmission frames

Maximum Number of retransmissions

Maximum Number of contiguous octets or bytes in information element

Maximum number of outstanding Negative

Acknowledgment (NAKs)

Number of Status Inquiries when Remote Station is in peer busy for 1TR6

This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.

TSP: Terminal Service Profile data block

The Terminal Service Profile (TSP) configuration procedures define the service profiles for

ISDN BRI terminals connected to a DSL. A service profile specifies the type of transmission, the call restrictions, and the features the terminal can use.

Prompt

REQ

Response

aaa Request

Comment

732 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

TYPE

DSL

OPT

USID

MPHC

- SPID

TRMT

TEI

BCH

- LAPB

- X25P

- NTN

- PVC

Response

TSP l s c dsl a...a

(0)-15

(YES) NO a...a

a

0-63 x

(NO) YES

(YES) NO x...x

n1 n2

Comment

Type of data block = TSP (Terminal Service Profile)

Digital Subscriber Loop address

Options (a...a = DN, DNS, SPID, SUID, or USID)

User Service Identifier

Route D-channel packet switched data to the Meridian

Packet Handler

Service Profile Identifier

Terminating Type (D or B)

Static TEI for addressing terminal

Terminal Service Profile association (x = 1 or 2)

Change LAPB parameters

Change X.25 Parameters

Network Terminal Number

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel number range

- IC

- TC

- OC

CDR n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

(NO) YES

Incoming Logical Channel number range

Two-way Logical Channel number range

Outgoing Logical Channel number range

Internal CDR

FEATID

SSRV_NI aaa mmm nnn Feature ID association aaa mmm nnn NI-1 Supplementary Service

SUPL_SVC aaa

DN x..x yyyy

Supplementary Services (aaa = AO3 or AO6)

Directory Number (x..x) and CLID table entry (yyyy)

- CT

- MCAL

- CLIP

- PRES aaa

1-(4)-8

(YES) NO

(YES) NO

Call Types for the DN (aaa = VCE or DTA)

Maximum Calls allowed per DN

Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming calls

Presentation of CLID to far-end on outgoing calls

- ANIE

COLP

TRANS

FEAT

(0)-n

(NO) YES

(NO) YES a...a

ANI Entry

Connected Line Identification Presentation

Transparent presentation of COLP, CLID coming from S0 terminal without presentation option

Features (see FEAT responses in

Alphabetical list of prompts on page 734)

SSRV_ETSI aaa mmm nnn Supplementary Service

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 733

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt

DFDN

ERL

Response

x...x

(0)-65535

Comment

Default Directory Number

Emergency Response Locator

X25P: X25P packet protocol parameters data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

X25P

Request

Comment

Type of data block = X25P (X.25 packet protocol parameters)

LAPB Protocol Group Number PGPN

X25P

- T10/T20

0-15

(YES) NO

15-(180)-930

- T11/T21 15-(180)-930

- T12/T22 15-(180)-930

Change X.25 Parameters

Request restart Timer in 1 second units

Call request Timer in 1 second units

Reset request Timer in 1 second units

- T13/T23 0-15-(180)-930 Clear request Timer in 1 second units

- PSIZ xxx Default Packet Transmission Size in octets (xxx = 16, 32,

64, (128), or 256)

- WSIZ 1-(2)-7 Default Transmit Window Size in octets

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ANIE (0)-n

Comment

ANI Entry

Where n=S_SIZE in customer data block.

If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key.

If ANIE is from 1-N:

If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the components of the ANI message are retrieved from the ANI entry in

Customer Data Block, if configured.

Pack/Rel

cist-24

APPL Application bri-19

734 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

B1

Prompt Response

(BRI)

BRIE

BRIL

BRIT

MOB

MPH

Comment

Basic Rate Interface if Integrated Service Digital

Network BRI Trunk Access (BRIT) package 233 and Basic Rate Interface Line Application (BRIL) package 235 not equipped.

Basic Rate Interface protocol engine

BRIE supports the QSIG and EURO ISDN interfaces and requires BRIT package 233. Any changes in the DSL route has to match the BRIE loadware application.

To configure the appropriate application for the

DSL, the required application must be entered here. To add or delete an application, the MISP must be in a disabled state. To delete an application, all associated DSLs must be removed first.

Precede with an X to remove.

Pack/Rel

brit-20

Basic Rate Interface Line

APPL defaults to BRIL if BRIL package 235 is equipped. Otherwise, BRIT is the default.

Basic Rate Interface Trunk

BRIT supports SL-1, Numeris and 1TR6 interface.

APPL defaults to BRIL if BRIL package 235 is equipped. Otherwise BRIT is the default. BRIT package 233 is required.

Mobility Routing Application

Meridian Packet Handler

BRIL and MPH cannot operate on the same

MISP.

MPH can be deleted only if there are none of the following:

• no D-channel packet data separators

• no B-channel or D-channel terminals

• no network interface

• no PVC connections bri-18

B1CT

(NO) YES Change B-channel 1 configuration

When REQ = NEW B1 do not be prompted.

(VCE)

(DTA)

PMD

IPD

B-channel 1 Call Type

Circuit switched Voice

Circuit switched Data

Packet Mode Data

B-channel Packet Data with MPH bri-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 735

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

B2

Prompt Response Comment

For PMD the B-channel packet data must have been specified at the PH prompt during the MISP configuration procedure. PMD cannot be selected simultaneously with VCE and/or DTA.

Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

B2CT

(NO) YES Change B-channel 2 configuration.

When REQ = NEW and B2 = NO, all B1 parameters except for MEMB is used as default.

When REQ = CHG, BS = NO and a change was made to ROUT on B1, all parameters remains unchanged except for the route member number, which is an unused member. A message is output to inform the user of the new member number assigned.

bri-18

(VCE)

(DTA)

PMD

IPD

B-channel 2 Call Type

Circuit switched Voice

Circuit switched Data

Packet Mode Data

For PMD, the B-channel packet data must have been specified at the PH prompt during the MISP configuration procedure. PMD cannot be selected simultaneously with VCE and/or DTA.

B-channel Packet Data with MPH

Precede with X to remove.

bri-19

BCH

BRSC

1

2 l s c

TSP associated with the B1 DSL Channel

TSP associated with the B2 DSL Channel bri-19

Basic Rate Signaling Concentrator

Only 1 BRSC card can be enabled on a single IPE shelf.

bri-19 loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric fnf-25

CAC

CAC

0-(3)-9

(0) - 10

Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic

Number Information category code Allowed with

Commonwealth of Independent

States-Three Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package

221.

cist-21

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) CNI

Category Code Allowed with Multifrequency

Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128.

mfc-9

736 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9

Comment

CIS ANI category code

CAC_MFC

CARD

(0)-10

1-9

MFC CNI Category Code

Pack/Rel

cist-24 cist-24

Card slot for Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG

1000B, and MG 1000T ISDN Signalling

Processor (SISP). CARD applies exclusively to

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T.

qsig-22

CDR

CH

CLIP

CLOK

(NO)

YES

1-23

1-30

Turn off Internal Call Detail Recording

Turn on Internal Call Detail Recording

Channel number for PRI

Channel number for PRI2

This channel carries D-channel packet data between the MISP and the packet handler. The

PRI route and channel must have already been defined in LD 16 and LD 14. Prompted if PH =

DCH or BDCH.

(YES) NO Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming calls.

bri-19 bri-18 bri-18

(NO) YES Clock source. Prompted if the following conditions are met: bri-18

• CTYP = SILC

• DSL = 0 or 1 (card dsl number)

• MODE = TE

For Option 11C, the SILC must reside in slot 1-10 of the base cabinet.

For CS 1000S, the SILC must reside in slot 1-4 of the MG 1000S basic-1

CLS

(ABDD)

ABDA

(APN)

APY

Class of Service

You can enter more than one Class of Service by separating each entry with a space.

Abandoned call record and time to answer Denied

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Allowed fcdr-18

ACD Priority not allowed

ACD Priority allowed dpnss-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 737

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response

(BRTD)

BRTA

Brent Denied

Brent Allowed

(ZBDD)

ZBDA

Comment Pack/Rel

basic-3.0

ZBDD denies external station activity records to be generated for the set

ZBDA allows external station activity records to be generated for the set mct-20

(DNAA)

COLP

DNAD

(ICDD)

ICDA

(MRD)

\MRA

(PGND)

PGNA

(PRMD)

PRMA

(THFD)

THFA

(UDI)

RDI

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

SRE

TLD

UNR

DN of the key that makes the call used in ANI messages.

Outgoing CDT/CDTI2 ANDN used as DN in ANI messages.

Commonwealth of Independent States - Three

Wire Analog Trunk (CIST) package 221 is required.

cist-21 bri-20 Internal Call Detail Recording Denied

Internal Call Detail Recording Allowed

Message Restriction Denied

Message Restriction Allowed mr-10

Deny PAGENET access

Allow PAGENET access

Deny MLPP Alternate Party Preemption

Allow MLPP Alternate Party Preemption

Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) Denied

Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) Allowed

Unrestricted DID

Restricted DID

Conditionally Toll Denied (valid for TIE trunks only)

Conditionally Unrestricted (valid for TIE trunks only)

Fully Restricted Class 1 (valid for TIE trunks only)

Fully Restricted Class 2 (valid for TIE trunks only)

Fully Restricted (valid for TIE trunks only)

Semi-Restricted (valid for TIE trunks only)

Toll Denied (valid for TIE trunks only)

Unrestricted

Connected Line Identification Presentation pagenet-22 atvn-25.47

ipra-21 supp-10 bril-22

738 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Optional CONNECTED NUMBER IE and optional connected subaddress IE are not passed from M1 to S0

Optional CONNECTED NUMBER IE and optional

CONNECTED SUB-ADDRESS IE are passed from M1 to S0

Pack/Rel

CT VCE

DTA

CTYP SILC

UILC

Circuit switched Voice Call Type for the DN

Circuit switched Data Call Type for the DN

One or more call types can be entered by separating each entry with a space. The call types entered must have been specified for the B1CT and B2CT prompts during the DSL configuration procedures. Precede with X to remove.

bri-18

S/T Interface Line Card Type

U Interface Line Card Type

This prompt is displayed if only the S/T (SILC) or

U(UILC) Interface Line Card has not been previously configured or when configuring another DSL on the same SILC/UILC.

bri-18

CUST xx

DES

DFDN

DMPH

DN d...d

x...x

(YES)

NO x..x yyyy

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.

bri-18

DSL Designator (1 to 6 alphanumeric characters) bri-18

Default Directory Number

Enter a 1 to 7-digit directory number. This directory number must have been previously defined at the DN prompt. A directory number can be associated with multiple TSPs.

Only one default DN can be defined for a TSP.

This DN is sent in the outgoing setup if the terminal does not send a calling line identification number with the outgoing call.

bri-18

Meridian Packet Handler supports 8 SAPI 16 separators and 19 B-channels.

Meridian Packet Handler supports 3 SAPI 16 separators and 1 B-channels.

bri-19

Directory Number (x..x = 1 to 7 digits) and CLID table entry (yyyy).

bri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 739

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response Comment

Where yyyy is range for CLID table entry (yyyy) is: [(0) - (value entered for SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1)]

The Directory Number cannot be shared by a non-

BRI terminal. 1-8 DNs can be assigned to a DSL.

The DN can be assigned to multiple TSPs on a

DSL but cannot be assigned to any other DSL.

Precede with X to remove.

Pack/Rel

DNAT mph-19

DNIC

1-32

<CR> xxxx

DNA Table to print

Prints all Data Network Address (DNA) tables

Data Network Identification Code

Enter a 4-digit DNIC for this item bri-19

DPSD (NO)

DSL

YES l s c dsl c dsl

Route D-channel Packet Switched Data calls to an external packet handler, or Public Switched

Packet Data Network (PSPDN).

Do not route D-channel Packet Switched Data calls to an external packet handler, or Public

Switched Packet Data Network (PSPDN).

mph-19

Digital Subscriber Loop address for Large System

For CS 1000E

Where: bri-20 basic-4.0

• l (superloop) = 0-156 (must be 0 or a multiple of 4)

• s (shelf) = 0-1

• c (card) = 0-15

• dsl (Digital Subscriber Loop) = 0-7

You can assign 31 DSLs for each MISP if you specified DCH or BDCH at the PH prompt during

MISP configuration procedures.

When REQ = PRT, entering <CR> at this prompt prints out all DSLs in the system.

fnf-25 l = (0-255) Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric

Digital Subscriber Loop address.

For Small System, where:

• c (card) = 1-9

• c = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49 lse-25

740 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

For CS 1000S, where: c = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

For MG 1000T, where:

Where: c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 dsl (Digital Subscriber Loop) = 0-7

EFD x...x

EHT

ERL

FDN

FEAT x...x

<CR>

0-65535

X x...x

(CFTD)

CFTA

(CFXD)

CFXA

(DNDY)

DNDN

(DNO3)

DNO1

DNO2

Pack/Rel

basic-1.0

basic-4.00

External Flexible Call Forward No Answer

Directory Number (1-13 digits allowed)

External Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed)

Current Emergency Response Locator.

Enter no value to make this TN Auto Update.

Enter a value to statically configure this TN

(Manual Update).

Enter ‘X’ to remove the existing value.

bri-18 bri-18 basic-5.00

Flexible Call Forward No Answer Directory

Number (1-13 digits allowed)

Features

Call Forward by call Type Denied

Call Forward by call Type Allowed

Call Forward to External DN Denied

Call Forward to External DN Allowed. CFXA is valid if PRID = 2 or 6 in DSL.

bri-18 bri-18 isdn-20

Diversion Notification with called party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification without called party's number and name.

qsig ss- 23

Diversion Notification Option with diverted-to party's number and name when available.

Diversion Notification Option without notification.

Diversion Notification Option without diverted-to party's number and name.

qsig ss- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 741

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

HUNT

IC

Prompt Response

(FBD)

FBA

Comment

Call Forward Busy Denied

Call Forward Busy Allowed

(FND)

FNA

(HBTD)

HBTA

(HTD)

HTA

Call Forward No Answer Denied

Call Forward No Answer Allowed

Hunting By call Type Denied

Hunting By call Type Allowed

Hunting Denied

Hunting Allowed

Always assign HTA if the terminal does have CWT capability.

Pack/Rel

FEATID

(MWD)

MWA

(SFD)

SFA

Message Waiting Denied

Message Waiting Allowed

Second level Call Forward No Answer Denied

Second level Call Forward No Answer Allowed aaa mmm nnn

Feature ID association

This is prompted when PRID = 6, to implement the

ISDN BRI Conferencing capability. Where: bri-19

• aaa = Feature: AO3 = 3-party conference,

AO6 = 6 party conference

• mmm = Feature activation ID (1-127)

• nnn = Feature indication ID (1-127)

This is optional. If nothing is entered, the same value as mmm is used. Feature activation and

Feature indication ID are the feature key assignments on the terminal. The key numbers must also be configured at the terminal level.

Recommended assignments are: M5317TDX:

AO6 15 and M5209TDcp: AO6 9.

x...x

n1 n2

<CR>

Hunt directory number (1-13 digits allowed) bri-18

Lowest incoming Logical Channel Number range

(1-4095)

Highest incoming Logical Channel Number range

(1-4095) no incoming LCNs bri-19

742 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ISDN_MCNT

60-(300)-350

Comment

Layer 3 call control message count per 5 second time interval.

Pack/Rel

qsig gf-22

K

LAPB

LAPD

LCN1

LCN2

(1)-7

(1)-32

Window size

Maximum number of outstanding negative acknowledgment (NAKs) frames.

(NO) YES Change Link Access Protocol for B-channels mph-19

(NO) YES Change Link Access Protocol for D-channels

0-15 bri-18

LAPD protocol group number for DSL assignment bri-19

1-4095 bri-19

1-4095

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel

Number for NT1

Permanent Virtual Circuit Logical Channel

Number for NT2 bri-19 bri-19

LDN

LOOP

(NO)

0-5

No LDN assigned to the DSL

Departmental Listed Directory Number defined in

LD 15 bri-20

0, 2, 4,...158

xx bri-18

MISP loop (must be an even number and the next odd loop number must be unequipped)

When REQ = PRT, enter <CR> to print all MISPs in the system.

SISP loop For Small System, where:

• xx = 1-9

• xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For CS 1000S, where: lse-25 basic-1.0

c = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

For MG 1000T, where: basic-4.00

c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 xxx xxx = (0, 2, 4 ... 254) Systems with Fibre

Network Fabric fnf-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 743

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response

LTEI

Comment

Logical Terminal and Terminal Endpoint

Identifiers.

The Logical Terminal Identifier (LTID) consists of:

Pack/Rel

bri-18 n1 n2 m

Xm

<CR>

• Logical Terminal Group (LTG)

• Logical Terminal Number (LTN)

• Static Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) pair for D-channel packet data transmission

The maximum number of LTID and TEI pairs is defined by MTEI. LTG = 15 and LTN = 1023 is an invalid combination.

Logical Terminal Group (LTG) 1-15

Logical Terminal Number (LTN) 1-1023

TEI (0-63)

Deletes LTID and TEI as a pair for the specified

TEI

Go to the next prompt.

LTEI is prompted if D-channel packet data was specified for the associated MISP.

MCAL

MEMB

2-(16)-32 Maximum number of calls on a DSL at one time when TYPE = TSP. The maximum number of calls includes Active, Waiting, and On-Hold calls.

Warning is received if less than 8 is specified.

1-(4)-8 Maximum Calls allowed per DN when TYPE =

DSL. The maximum number of calls allowed for a directory number includes sum total of Active calls, Call Waiting, and calls On-Hold.

bri-18 bri-18

1-254

1-510

Member number of BRI route

Member number of BRI route

The specified route must match the BRI route type as well as the trunk type specified at the TKTP prompt.

bri-18 bri-24

MG_CARD supl sh card The Media Gateway card for the MISP associated to the IPMG. superloop shelf card.

IPMG 403

MISP 0, 2, 4...158 MISP loop number for large systems For CS

1000E ISDN BRI applications on the MISP must be disabled when changing the MISP loop or card. The SILC or UILC must be disabled before changing the MISP loop number.

bri-19 basic-4.0

744 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

xx

Comment

Prompted if the MISP has not been assigned to the specified SILC or UILC. Eight BRSC cards can be configured per MISP

ISDN signalling processor (SISP) card slot number

For Small System, where: xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For CS 1000S, where: xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

For MG 1000T, where: c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

Pack/Rel

basic-1.0

basic-4.00

MODE

MPH

NTAS

NTFS

(TE)

NT loop

Mode. Prompted when CTYP = SILC.

NTAS and NTFS can be input when APPL = BRI,

BRIL, or MPH. TE and NE can be input when

APPL = BRIT or BRIE.

bri-18

Network Termination Adaptive line Sampling

(extended passive bus, branched passive bus

Point-to-Point bus, U interface DSL)

Network Termination Fixed line Sampling (short passive bus)

Terminal Equipment Mode for DSL

Network Termination Mode for DSL. If CTYP =

UILC, then MODE = NT.

Meridian Packet Handler loop

This is the loop with the dedicated connection from the MISP card. Prompted when B2CT =

IPD.

mph-19 loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric fnf-25

MPHC

MTEI

(YES)

NO

1-(8)-20

Route D-channel packet switched data to the

Meridian Packet Handler

Route D-channel packet data calls to an external packet handler, or Public Switched Packet Data

Network (PSPDN) mph-19

Maximum Terminal Endpoint Identifiers bri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 745

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response Comment

MTEI represents the maximum number of both static and dynamic combined assigned to the logical terminals on a DSL.

MTFM

MTSP

N1

(NO) YES Multi-Frame Mode

Prompted if MODE = TE.

1-(8)-16 Maximum Terminal Service Profiles

23-(135)- 263

Maximum I-frame size (in octets)

N2

N200

N201

1-(10)-15

1-(3)-8

4-(260)

Maximum Number of retries

Maximum Number of retransmissions

Pack/Rel

bri-18 bri-18 mph-19 mph-19 bri-18

Maximum Number of contiguous octets or bytes in information element bri-18

N2X4

NACT

NCOS

NTN

NTN1

NTN2

0-(10)-20 Number of Status Inquiries when Remote Station is in peer busy for 1TR6 ovlp-15 odas-1

(NO)

YES

END

(0)-99

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.

End Overlay program

Network Class of Service bri-18 x...x

x...x

Network Terminal Number

Add the NTN to the DNA table. The NTN can be up to 10 digits; up to 32 NTN entries are supported for each table.

Enter a range of NTNs by separating the numbers with a space. Delete entry by preceding the number with X.

bri-19

First Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the

NTN

Up to 10 digits can be entered.

bri-19 x...x

Second Permanent Virtual Circuit connection to the NTN

Up to 10 digits can be entered.

bri-19

746 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NTNO (YES)

NO

Comment

Public Switched Packet Data Network presents only the NTN in the Incoming Call packet's called address field.

Public Switched Packet Data Network presents

NTN and DNIC in the Incoming Call packet's called address field

Pack/Rel

bri-19

NWIF 1-3

<CR>

OC

OPT n1 n2

<CR>

(BRIL)

MPH Network Interface Identifier

Indicates there is no identifier

Delete an identifier by preceding the entry with an

X.

bri-19

Outgoing Logical Channel number range

Lowest Incoming Logical Channel Number range

(1-4095) bri-19

Highest Incoming Logical Channel Number range

(1-4095) no incoming LCNs

PDCA

PGPN

PH

DN

DNS

SPID

SUID

USID

<CR>

1-16

0-15

ALL

<CR>

BRI Line application

This information is NOT downloaded to the DSL.

Terminal Service Profile (TSP) print options (when

REQ = PRT):

Print TSPs with the requested Directory

Number.

Print Directory Number for specified dsl.

Print TSPs with the specified Service Profile

Identifier.

Print Service Profile ID and User Service Identifier map.

Print TSPs with the specified User Service ID.

Print all TSPs defined for the specified dsl.

bri-19 bri-18 bri-18 Pad Category table defined in LD 73

Prompted if PRID = 2 or 4

Protocol Group Number

To remove all protocol groups. You cannot remove a protocol group if it is assigned to a

DSL.

To print all protocol groups and the number of

DSLs in each group

Packet Handler mph/bri-19 bri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 747

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response

(X)

DCH

BCH

BDCH

Comment

No packet data transmission

BRI terminal communicates with the packet handler using multiplexed D-channels over a dedicated BD-channel

BRI terminal communicates with the packet handler using a dedicated B-channel

Both D-channel and B-channel communicate with packet handler

If you select DCH or BDCH, the MISP can support only 31 DSLs because one serial port is dedicated to the packet handler.

Pack/Rel

PRES

PRFX

PRI

(YES) NO Presentation of CLID to far-end on outgoing calls.

0-9 DNA table Prefix.

bri-18 bri-19

0, 2,4,.....158

Primary Rate Interface xx

Loop numbers.

This Primary Rate Interface is connected to the packet handler. The Primary Rate Interface must have already been added in LD 17.

Prompted if B1CT or B2CT = PMD.

Card number

For Small System, where: bri-18 lse-25

• xx = 1-9

• xx = 1-9 11-19 21-29 31-39 41-49

For CS 1000S, where: basic-1.0

xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44

For MG 1000T, where: basic-4.00

c = 1-4, 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 xxx xxx = (0, 2, 4 ... 254) Systems with Fibre

Network Fabric fnf-25

PRI_CH loop channel

PRI for packet handler and BRSC connections.

Where: bri-19

748 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

loop (1-159) = the PRI loop number that is connected to the external packet handler channel (1-23) = the PRI channel number where the dedicated BRSC connection terminates

This PRI loop must have been previously assigned in LD 17, and must be dedicated to packet handler connection. The PRI channel must be configured for BRI packet data in LD 14 and

LD 16.

Pack/Rel

loop = (0-254) Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

PRID

1

2

3

4

5

6

Protocol ID. Prompted if REQ = NEW.

ANSI

ETSI

DMS

NET64

Numeris

NI-1

PRID = 6 allows the ISDN BRI conference feature to be configured in the TSPs of the DSL bri-19

PSIZ

PVC

PVCN

RATE

16 32 64 (128) 256

Default packet transmission Size (in octets) n1 n2 bri-19

Lowest Permanent Virtual Circuit logical channel number range

Highest Permanent Virtual Circuit logical channel number range bri-19

1-4

(64) 56

Permanent Virtual Circuit Number

PSDN communication Rate

This establishes the rate at which the PSDN communicates across the PRI channel network interface.

bri-19 bri-19

REQ

ROUT

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

0-511

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create a new data block

Remove data block

Print data block

Route number for the Trunk DSL bri-18 bri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 749

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response Comment

The specified route must match the BRI route type as well as the trunk type specified at the TKTP prompt. The specified route must be on the

Network (NET) side if MODE = NT for the DSL.

Pack/Rel

SCPW xxxxx

SGRP

SPID

(0)-999 a ... a

Station Control Password

The SCPW entry must equal the Station Control

Password Length (SCPL) defined in LD 15.

SCPW is not prompted if SCPL = 0. Precede entry with "X" to delete.

isdn-20

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number bri-18

SSRV_ETSI

VCFW

DCFW

VID7

Service Profile Identifier

Where: aaa...a = 9-character alphanumeric service profile ID. A maximum of 8 valid SPIDs per

TSP are allowed. Precede with X to remove.

Any combination of 20 characters or less is valid.

Prompted only if the user service identifier is 1-15.

It is repeated until <CR> is entered but only up to

8 SPIDs should be entered. This SPID must be entered in the initializing terminal to associate the terminal with a USID.

bri-18 bri-23

Supplementary Service

Voice Call Forward. VCFW is valid if CT = VCE or if CT = VCE and DTA.

isdn-20

Data Call Forward. DCFW is valid if CT =DTA or

VCE and DTA. Prompted if PRID = 2 (ETSI) in the

DSL.

The ETSI set supports telephony 7 KHz/

Videotelephony teleservices

Precede with X to remove, the service must not be active.

euro-24

SSRV_N1 aaa mmm nnn

NI-1 Supplementary Service. Where:

• aaa = VCFA (Voice Call Forward

Activation) if CT = VCE

• aaa = VCFD (Voice Call Forward

Deactivation) if CT = VCE

• aaa = DCFA (Data Call Forward Activation) if CT = DTA isdn-20

750 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

• aaa = DCFD (Data Call Forward

Deactivation) if CT = DTA

• mmm = Feature Activation ID, 1-127

• nnn = Feature Indication ID, 1-127 (If not defined, mmm is used).

The same mmm value can be assigned to VCFA and VCFD, or to DCFA and DCFD. Precede with

X to remove, not allowed if feature is activated.

Prompted if PRID = 6.

Pack/Rel

isdn-20 SUPL_SVC

T1

AO3

AO6

Supplementary Services

Three-Party Conference

Six-Party Conference

Precede with X to remove.

2-(6)-130 Response Timer (in units of 0.5 seconds)

Default is 3 seconds.

mph-19

T10/T20

T11/T21

15-(180)-930

Request Restart Timer (in 1 second units)

15-(180)-930

Call Request Timer (in 1 second units) mph-19 bri-19

T12/T22

T13/T23

T2

T3

T200

15-(180)-930

Reset Request Timer (in 1 second units)

0-15-(180)-930

Clear request timer (in 1 second units)

1-(4)-129 Maximum frame delay (in units of 0.5 seconds)

Default is 2 seconds. T2 must be less than T1.

3-(12)- 131 Idle Timer (in units of 0.5 seconds)

Default is 6 seconds

0 Turns off the timer.

If this is not 0, it must be greater than T1.

(2)-40 Retransmission Timer

Registered in increments of 0.5 seconds to specify the time delay which occurs before the system retransmits the information.

bri-19 bri-19 mph-19 mph-19 bri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 751

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response

T203 4-(20)-80

Comment

Maximum Time between transmission frames (in increments of 0.5 seconds)

Pack/Rel

bri-18

T310 Timer used to determine how long SL-1 can wait for the response message when the QSIG outgoing call is in the U3 (outgoing call processing) state.

10-(30)-60 Default = (10) seconds for TCNZ

Default = (30) seconds for QSIG

110-(120) This range applies to PRI, PRI2, and BRI trunks qsig-20

TC

TEI

TGAR

TIMR n1 n2

<CR>

Lowest two-way Logical Channel Number range

Highest two-way Logical Channel Number range

No two-way LCNs mph-19

0-63 Static TEI for addressing terminal

This is given in units of 1 second.

Trunk Group Access Restriction number 0-(1)-31

(NO) YES Change Timer values. Not prompted for APISDN

AUST.

mph-19 bri-18

TKTP

TN

TIE

COT

DID l s c

TIE Trunk Type

COT Trunk Type

DID Trunk Type

Terminal Number of SILC or UILC. Prompted when B1CT= PMD. Where: bri-20

• l (loop) = 0-156 (must be 0 or a multiple of

4)

• s (shelf) = 0-1

• c (card) = 1-15

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25 l (loop) = 0-252 (must be 0 or a multiple of

4)

If REQ = PRT, entering:

• l: prints out information for all cards on this loop

• l s: prints out information for all cards on that loop and shelf

752 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

l s c u loop ch

1-20

Comment

• <CR>: prints out information for all system cards

• card: prints information for this card (Small

Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T only)

Terminal Number

PRI loop and B-channel number

Small System

Pack/Rel

TRANS (NO)

TRMT

TSET

TYPE

YES

D

B

0-15

BRSC

CARD

DNAT

DSL

LAPB

LAPD

MISP

PROT

PVC

TSP

X25P

Restrict presentation of COLP, CLID coming from

S0 terminal without presentation option

If TRANS = NO and if the presentation indicator is set to restricted, the number digits are erased from the information element before it is sent to the S0 terminal.

CONNECTED NUMBER IE received from the

Meridian 1 is sent transparently to S0 terminal, even if restricted bril-22 bri-20 Terminating Type

D-channel terminal type configuration used

B-channel terminal configuration type used

Threshold Set for clock errors tset-7

Type of data block

BRI Signaling Concentrator

S/T (SILC) or U (UILC) Interface Line Card data block

Data Network Address Tables

Digital Subscriber Loop data block

Link Access Protocol on B-channels

Link Access Protocol on D-channel

Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor data block

Protocol group data block

Permanent Virtual Circuit connections

Terminal Service Profile data block

X.25 Packet Protocol Parameters bri-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 753

LD 27: ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Administration

Prompt Response

USER

(NO)

YES

Comment

Print groups selected at PGPN prompt. USER is prompted when REQ = PRT.

Do not print LAPB or LAPD group user information

Print LAPB or LAPD group user information

(LAPB or LAPD groups selected at the PGPN prompt as well as the TSPs or MPH network interfaces which use them)

Pack/Rel

mph-19

USID (0)-15

ALL

User Service Identifier

The total number of TSPs defined for a DSL cannot exceed the maximum number of TSPs allowed for a DSL as specified by the MTSP prompt during the DSL configuration procedures.

Removes all TSPs defined for the DSL. Use only when REQ = OUT.

A default TSP should be configured for noninitializing terminals. This is done by assigning

USID = 0 to the TSP.

bri-18

WSIZ

X25P

XLST

XPVC

1-(2)-7 Default Transmit Window Size (in octets) bri-19

(YES) NO Change X.25 Parameters

If these parameters are changed, all active calls associated with the TSPs and network interfaces for the group is dropped.

bri-19

(0)-254 bri-18

(YES)

NO

Pretranslation group

Prompted if PREO = 1 in LD 15

External PVC connection

Internal PVC connection bri-19

754 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 28: LD 28: Route Selection for

Automatic Number Identification

Overlay program 28 allows data for Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification (RS-ANI) to be created, modified, and printed.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

RSAC

0-RT

0+RT

1RT

CORT

Response

aaa

RSA xx xxxx x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = RSA (Route Selection ANI)

Customer number associated with this function

RS-ANI Access Code digits

0- calls, Route access code (calls to Public Network

Operator

0+ calls, Route access code

1+ or IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) calls

Route access code

Central Office (local calls) Route access code

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

0+RT x...x

Comment

0+ calls Route access code (for toll calls that require

Public Network Operator assistance)

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150

Pack/Rel

ani-1

0-RT x...x

0- calls, Route access code (calls to Public Network

Operator ani-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 755

LD 28: Route Selection for Automatic Number Identification

Prompt Response Comment

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150

1RT x...x

Pack/Rel

1+ or IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) calls,

Route access code

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150 ani-1

CORT x...x

CUST

REQ

RSAC

TYPE xx

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT xxxx

RSA

Central Office (local calls) Route access code

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150 ani-1 ani-1 Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15

Request

Change an existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create a New data block

Remove data block

Print RSA data ani-1

RS-ANI Access Code digits

Route Selection ANI data block ani-20 ani-1

756 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 29: LD 29: Memory Management

Overlay program 29 is used to determine the following:

• determine the amount of unused memory

• determine if sufficient memory is available to accommodate substantial amounts of new data to be added

• respond to messages SCH601 and SCH603 on SL-1 XN & XL

Prompts and responses

REQ

MSG

Prompt Response

aaa x...x

Comment

Request

SCH Message (x...x = 601 or 603 xx)

NEW DATA PLANNED?

(NO) YES New data to be added in this program?

TYNM aaa xx Type and Number (TYNM responses begin on

TYNM)

OPT

MAP

DISPLAY NEW MAP?

SAVE NEW MAP?

aaaa a...a

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Option (aaaa = FULL or FREE)

Active Map or Data Dump (a...a = ACT or DUMP)

Display new map

Save new map

PWD2

CHANGE MAP?

CMD

PGMM

PGBY xxxx Password 2

(NO) YES Change Map a...a

xxx yy

Command (a...a = ASGN or CHK)

Page/Memory Module xxx yyyyy Page/Bytes

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 757

LD 29: Memory Management

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CHANGE MAP?

(NO) YES

Comment

Change map

Prompted when SAVE NEW MAP? = NO or automatic map generator fails (message

MEM150)

CMD

ASGN

CHK

DISPLAY NEW MAP?

(NO) YES

Command

Assign logical page and memory number

Check memory map

MAP

ACT

DUMP

Display new map

Prompted when a new map has been created

Map

Active map

Data dump

Prompted when REQ = PRT

MSG

OPT

601

603 xx

NEW DATA PLANNED?

(NO) YES

FULL

FREE

Pack/Rel

basic-1 basic-1 basic-1 basic-1

SCH Message. Prompted when REQ = SCH.

basic-1

Enter 601 when SCH message is 601

Enter 603 followed by the parameters printed with the SCH603 message during an attempt to add data.

basic-1

New data to be added in this program?

Prompted when REQ = SCH

Option

Full map

Free space only basic-1

758 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PGBY

PGMM

Response

xxx yyyyy

Comment

Page/Bytes (used to define logical page size).

Where:

• xxx = Logical Page number (0-254,

256-510)

• yyyyy = size (1-65535)

Prompted only if CMD = ASGN.

xxx yy

Pack/Rel

basic-1

Page/Memory Module (used to determine the

Memory Module where Logical Pages reside or where they are moved). Where: basic-1

• xxx = Logical Page number (0-254,

256-510)

• yy = Memory Module number (00, 01, 02)

Prompted only if CMD = ASGN.

PWD2

REQ xxxx

ADD

CHG

CLR

PRT

END

GEN

SCH

Password 2 (Second level administration password as defined in LD 17) basic-1

Request

Create a new data block

Change existing map (SL-1XN & XL systems only)

Clear map

Print the specified map

Exit Overlay program

Generate a new map. Do not use this response unless ROMs with memory extensions are in place.

Change map in response to error messages

SCH601 and SCH603 basic-1 basic-1 SAVE NEW MAP?

TYNM

(NO) YES Save new map

Prompted when a new map has been created

Type and Number

500 1-12800 Number of new 500/2500 telephones

ACD 0-99 1-240 1-240 basic-1 basic-1 bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 759

LD 29: Memory Management

Prompt Response Comment

Customer number, number of ACD DN, maximum number of positions per ACD DN

AGNT 1-12800

Number of Agent positions

ANI xxx yyyy zzzz

Feature Group D ANI data blocks. Where:

Pack/Rel

bacd-1 fgd-17

• xxx = number of NPAs (1-160)

• yyyy = number of ranges of NXXs

(0-9999)

• zzzzz = number of ranges of XXXXs

(0-30,000)

APRT 1-16 Number of ACD Printers

ATM 1-4096 Number of ATM routes for the system

ATT 1-480 Number of consoles

AUB 1-99 1-5000 1-14

BGD 1-15 1-99

Customer number, number of authcodes, authcode digit length

Number of Background Terminals in the system, and the number of customers in the system

Number of new customers CDB 1-99

CDL 1-16 Number of CDR links

CDP 0-99 1-10000

Customer number, number of steering codes

CONF xxx Number of Conference loops

CPG 1-100 1-63

CPG Level services, customers and average size bacd-1 atm-7 basic-1 baut-1 bgd-10 basic-1 clnk-1 cdp-1 basic-1

CPND xx yy zz

Calling Party Name Display data xx = number of customers with CPND, 1-99 yy = number of CPND names per customer,

1-1000 zz = average size of name string, 5-27 characters

CRB 1-1024 Number of Code Restriction Blocks cpnd-10 basic-1

760 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DGT 1-99 xx xx

Comment

DIS 0-99 1-240

Customer number, number of digit manipulation tables, maximum average number of inserted digits

Customer number, number of DISA DN

DND 1-99 1-100 1-127

Customer number, number of DND groups, average number of numbers per group

DTR 1-126 Number of Digitone Receivers

EBLF xx yy zz

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Where:

Pack/Rel

basic-1 disa-1 dndg-1 basic-1 basic-14

• xx = the number of customers (1-99) to receive the feature

• yy = average number of hundreds groups per customer

• zz = average DN length (4, 5, 6 or 7 digits)

ESN xx Number of customers with ESN (1-99)

FCAS 1-99 xx yy zz

Customer number, number of Free Calling Area tables, maximum average number of FCAS blocks, maximum average number of different first digit of NXX codes

FGD xxx yyy

FGD data blocks. Where: basic-1 fca-1 fgd-17

• xxx = number of FGD blocks (1-128)

• yyy = average number of II entries

FTC 0-31

MFC xx

MFE xx

Number of Flexible Tone Control tables

Number of Multifrequency Compelled Signaling cards

Number of Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel cards

MFR 1-99 0-126 0-126

Automatic Call Distribution routes ftc10 mfc-9 mfe-10 bacd-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 761

LD 29: Memory Management

Prompt Response Comment

Number of customers, average number of ACD routes per customer, average largest member number per ACD route

MFRR 1-255

Number of Multifrequency Receivers

MFSD xx

MFT xx yy zz

Number of MF Sender loops

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling. Where:

Pack/Rel

fgd-17 basic-1 mfc-9

• xx = number of MFC tables

• yy = number of levels per table

• zz = average number of signals per level

MFET xx yy zz

Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel. Where: mfe-10

• xx = number of MFE tables

• yy = number of levels per table

• zz = average number of signals per level

NACD xx yy zz

Network Automatic Call Distribution. Where:

• xx = the number of NACD customers

• yy = average number of source DNs

• zz = average number of target ACD DNs

NCTL 1-99 Number of customers with NTCL

NET 1-99 xx yy

Customer number, number of Network

Translation codes, number of LOC codes

RDB 1-4064 1-126

Number of Routes, average largest member number

REMO xx Number of RPE loops

RLB 1-99 1-256 1-32

RSA 1-99

Customer number, number of Route Lists, maximum average number of entries

Number of customers to get RS-ANI basic-1 esn-1 basic-1 rpe-1 basic-1 ani-1

762 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

SCL 4-31 1-1000 1-8191

Comment

DN size as defined in LD 18, list size as defined in LD 18, number of new lists

SDR 1-99 xx yy

Customer number, number of Supplemental

Digit Restriction blocks, maximum average number of entries

Pack/Rel

optf-1 basic-1

SL1 1-12800 basic-1

SUP 1-16

TAP 1-3

TDS 1-80

Number of new SL-1 telephones

Number of ACD Supervisor TTY

Number of new Tape units

Number of new TDS loops bacd-1 basic-1 basic-1

TENC 1-99 Number of customers that have Tenant Service ten-7

TENR 0-127 Number of routes that is shared by Tenants ten-7 ten-7 TENT 0-512 Number of Tenants that have access to each other

TERM 1-159 Number of new Terminal loops basic-1

TRK 1-6400 Number of new Trunks

TTY 1-16 Number of new TTY basic-1 basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 763

LD 29: Memory Management

764 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 30: LD 49: New Flexible Code

Restriction and Incoming Digit

Conversion

Overlay program 49 allows the building, changing, deleting, moving, and printing of code restriction trees and the cancellation of all New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) data.

Overlay program 49 also allows the building, changing, deleting, moving, and printing of Incoming DID

Digit Conversion (IDC) data.

Prompts and responses

FDID

HOSP

XPDN

SDID

IDGT

AUTH

CRNO

INIT

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

FROM

TO

CUST

DCNO

ALOW

- UPDT

Response

aaa aaa

0-99 0-254

0-99 0-254 xx

0-254

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Request

Type of data block (aaa = FCR or IDC)

Source customer and tree number

Destination customer and tree number

Customer number

Digit Conversion tree Number

Flexible DID IDC tree

Hospitality IDC table

Expand DN length by 1-8 (1-5) digits

Send calling party DID

0-9999 0-9999 Incoming Digits xxxx Authcode

(0)-254 aaaa xxxx

(YES) NO

Code Restriction tree Number

Initial (aaaa = ALOW or DENY) Allow or deny all codes.

Digit sequence to be allowed.

Update Tree

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 765

LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion

Prompt

DENY

- UPDT

FRCE

BYPS

- UPDT

Response

xxxx

(YES) NO

(NO) YES xxxx

(YES) NO

Comment

Digit sequence to be denied.

Update Tree

Force

Digit sequence to be bypassed.

Update Tree

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ALOW

Response

xxxx

AUTH

BYPS

CRNO

CUST xxxx y...y

xxxx xxxx

(0)-254 xx

<CR>

Comment

Allow (Digit sequence to be allowed unconditionally)

Prompted when INIT = DENY.

Digit sequence to be conditionally allowed and maximum number of digits that can follow

A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.

when United Kingdom (UK) package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed. Enter

<CR> to end ALOW prompt.

Pack/Rel

nfcr-2

Authcode associated with the DID directory number printed directly above the AUTH prompt.

ffc-16

Bypass (Digit sequence to be bypassed)

A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.

when UK package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped, a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed. Enter <CR> to end

BYPS prompt.

nfcr-2

Code Restriction tree Number (NFCR tree number)

The maximum number of trees allowed for a customer is defined by prompt MAXT in LD

15.

nfcr-2

Customer number

For all customers nfcr-2

766 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DCNO

DENY

FCSD

FDID

FRCE

FROM

HOSP

Response

0-254 xxxx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-99 0-254

(NO) YES

Comment

Prompted when REQ = PRT.

Digit Conversion tree Number (IDC tree number)

A HOSP IDC tree number cannot be 0. Its valid range is 1-254.

Pack/Rel

idc-12

Deny (Digit sequence to be denied)

A maximum of 50 digits can be analyzed.when UK package 190 is not equipped. If UK package 190 is equipped a maximum of 5 digits can be analyzed.

Prompted when INIT = ALOW.

nfcr-2

Controls the SDID tree structure when an inconsistency occurs between the SDID and

IDC tree. FCSD is printed only when SDID =

YES and inconsistencies are found.

If FCSD = YES then the newly entered

Internal DN is placed in the SDID tree, and some of the existing SDID data is lost.

If FCSD = NO then the existing SDID data is retained and the newly entered input Internal

DN will not be in the SDID tree structure.

Note:

It is not possible to exit the overlay at this prompt using "end" or "****". Only a YES or NO response is acceptable.

Flexible DID IDC tree fdid-24

Force the storage or release of data.

If an entry for ALOW, DENY or BYPS conflicts with existing data, FRCE is prompted.

For example, ALOW = 7 and the existing

ALOW = 7000. In this case enter "NO" to ignore the data, or "YES" to accept the change. A modification of this type may result in the loss of portions of the tree.

If REQ = RLS and FRCE = YES, then all the customer's NFCR data is deleted. Prompt

NFCR in LD 15 must be set to NO first.

nfcr-2

Source customer and tree number

Hospitality IDC table nfcr-2 dnis-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 767

LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion

Prompt

IDGT

Response Comment

0-9999 0-9999 Incoming Digits (DN or range of DNs to be converted)

The external DNs to be converted is output and the users enter the internal DN. For example, to convert the external DN 3440 to

510, enter:

Pack/Rel

idc-12

• Prompt: Response

• IDGT: 3440

• 3440: 510

To convert the external DNs in the range

3440 to 3465, enter:

• Prompt: Response

• IDGT: 3440 3465

• 3440: 444

• 3441: 445

• .

• .

• 3465: 469

This is not a prompt. This is the DID directory number which delineates the following prompt.

To delete a DN or a DN from a range of DNs

• Prompt: Response

• IDGT: 3440

• 3440 x

INIT

REQ

ALOW

DENY

CHG

END

MOV

NEW

Initial

To specify digit strings to be denied

To specify digit strings to be allowed

Entering DNs can be affected by the

Outpulsing feature for Japan.

nfcr-2

Request

Change an existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Move existing data block to a new customer and/or NFCR tree data block

Create a new data block nfcr-2

768 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

OUT

PRT

RLS

RPL

SDID

TO

TYPE

UPDT

XPDN

(NO)

YES

0-99 0-254

FCR

IDC

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

Comment

Remove a specified NFCR tree data block

Print NFCR tree data block

Release all NFCR data blocks for a specified customer

Replace data in the specified NFCR tree data block with new data

Pack/Rel

Send DN of set when calling party number is requested dnis-15

Send DID of set. If no DID for set, then no DN is sent.

Prompted when the International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package is equipped and REQ = NEW

Destination customer and tree number nfcr-2 nfcr-2 Type of data block

NFCR data block

Incoming Digit Conversion data block

Update Tree

Data is correct and can update the NFCR tree.

Expand DN length by 1-8 (1-5) digits.

A response of YES requires twice the memory per DN.

nfcr-2 basic-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 769

LD 49: New Flexible Code Restriction and Incoming Digit Conversion

770 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 31: LD 50: Call Park and Modular

Telephone Relocation

Overlay program 50 allows the implementation and administration of the Call Park and Meridian Modular

Telephone Relocation features.

Prompts and responses

Call Park data

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

BLOC

CPTM

RECA

SPDN

MURT

Response aaa

CPK xx

1-5

30-(45)-240

(NO) YES

(0)-50 xxxx

0-511

Comment

Request

Type of data block = CPK (Call Park)

Customer number associated with this function

Call Park block number

Call Park Timer (in seconds)

Recall parked call to attendant

Number of contiguous system park DNs and first DN

Music Route

Meridian Modular Telephone ID change during relocation

The serial number, NT code, color code or release information stored in a Meridian Modular

Telephone can be changed during the relocation sequence. This can be done only after the set has "relocated out" and before it is "relocated in" to the new location. An application of this occurs when the terminal is being replaced with one of the same type and requires the same key configuration.

See Set Relocation Data in LD 21, and IDU: Print set ID command in LD 32.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 771

LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

TN

SER

NTCD

COLR

RLS

Response aaa

MTRT

I s c u xxxxxx xxxxxxxx xx xx

Comment

Request = CHG or OUT

Type of data block = MTRT (Meridian Modular

Telephone Relocation Table)

Terminal Number

Serial number

NT (product) Code

Color

Release

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

BLOC 1-5

ALL

<CR>

Comment

Call Park block number

Where:1-5 allows the system administrator to define the subsequent prompts. After subsequent prompts have been defined, the administrator is returned to the BLOC prompt until a carriage return (<CR>) is entered.

The Primary Call Data Block (block 1) must be defined before any Secondary Call Park Blocks

(2-5) can be added.

Enter ALL when REQ = OUT to remove all Call

Park Blocks

Enter <CR> to return to the REQ prompt.

BLOC is prompted if CPRKNET package 306 is equipped.

Pack/Rel

cprknet-22

COLR xx Color of Meridian Modular Telephone. The color codes are:

• 03 is black

• 35 is chameleon ash

• 93 is dolphin arie-18

CPTM 30-(45)-240

30-(45)-480

Call Park Timer (in seconds)

Call Park recall time (in seconds) if CPRK package 33 is equipped cprk-20

772 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

The amount of time a call is held in the parked state before recalling the parking set or the attendant.

CUST xx

MURT

NTCD

0-511

X xxxxxxxx

Pack/Rel

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 cprk-2 mus-1 Music Route number for parked calls

Remove existing music route.

New NT (product) Code of Meridian Modular

Telephone arie-18

RECA

REQ

(NO)

YES

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

Recall Attendant

Unanswered parked calls recall the parking set

Unanswered parked calls recall the attendant cpk-20

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program.

Create a new Call Park data block (not applicable if TYPE = MTRT)

Remove data block

Print call park data block (not applicable if TYPE

= MTRT) cprk-2

RLS

SER

SPDN xx xxxxxx xx yyyy

New Release of Meridian Modular Telephone

New Serial Number of Meridian Modular

Telephone asr-18 arie-18

System Park DNs

Number of contiguous System Park DNs, and first

DN Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Where: xx = # of contiguous System Park DNs. The range is: yyyy = First Call Park DN

• (0)-50

• (0)-100 when CPRK package 33 is equipped cprk-2

TN l s c u

Terminal Number

Old Terminal Number of set in relocation table arie-18 fnf-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 773

LD 50: Call Park and Modular Telephone Relocation

Prompt Response

c u

Comment

Where: l = 0-254 Systems with Fibre Network

Fabric

Old Terminal Number of set in relocation table

(Option 11C format)

TYPE

CPK

MTRT

Type of data block

Call Park data block

Meridian Modular Telephone Relocation Table

Pack/Rel

cprk-2

774 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 32: LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment

Overlay program 52 defines the 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) group data and system thresholds.

Overlay program 52 is not supported on small systems.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold) on page 775

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)

on page 776

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold)

on page 777

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer) on page 777

Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block

on page 778

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Counter Threshold)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

GRP

TASK

LFAL

Response

aaa

RPE2

1-31

CTHS

0-(5)-255

Comment

Request

Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment)

RPE group number

Counter Threshold

Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 775

LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Prompt

FAEL

PCML

LFAR

FAER

PCMR

RPF

LINT

BGTH

Response

0-(5)-255

0-(5)-255

0-(5)-255

0-(5)-255

0-(5)-255

0-(3)-255

0-(2)-255

0-(3)-7

Comment

Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site

Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site

Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Remote site

Remote Processor Failure

Local site Initialization of Remote Peripheral Controller

Background Threshold

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Group Member)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

GRP

TASK

ID

LM0

LM1

LM2

LM3

- SPAR

Response

aaa

RPE2

1-31

GMBR x...x

xxx xxx xxx xxx

(NO) YES

Comment

Request

Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment)

RPE Group number

Group Member

Identifier

Loop number for Member 0 in the group (first primary loop)

Loop number for Member 1 in the group (second primary loop)

Loop number for Member 2 in the group (third primary loop)

Loop number for Member 3 in the group (fourth primary loop or spare loop if SPAR = YES)

Spare loop option

776 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to Timer Threshold)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

GRP

TASK

LFAL

FAEL

PCML

LFAR

FAER

PCMR

RPF

Response

aaa

RPE2

1-31

TTHS

2-(10)-999

2-(600)-999

2-(600)-999

2-(10)-999

2-(10)-999

2-(600)-999

128-

(1024)-9999

Comment

Request

Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment)

RPE group number

Timer Threshold

Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site in seconds

Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site in seconds

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site in seconds

Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site in seconds

Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site in seconds

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Remote site in seconds

Remote Processor Failure in milliseconds

2.0 Mb/s RPE data block (TASK equal to No New Data call timer)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

GRP

TASK

ERR

NND

Response

aaa

RPE2

1-31

NND

10-(14)-30

0-(56)-1800

Comment

Request

Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment)

RPE group number

No New Data call timer

Error threshold in seconds

No New Data call time in seconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 777

LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Prompts and responses to remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

GRP

LOOP

Response

OUT

RPE2

1-31 x xx x

Comment

Remove

Type of data block = RPE2 (2.0 Mb/s Remote

Peripheral Equipment)

RPE Group number

Loop numbers for loops to be removed.

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

BGTH 0-(3)-7

Comment

Background Threshold (Unsparing attempts allowed by background)

A response of 0 deactivates the background processing of LD 53 for this RPE group.

ERR

FAEL

FAER

Pack/Rel

rpe2-15

10-(14)-30 Error threshold in seconds

Time after which the NND state is entered.

rpe2-15

2-(600)-999 Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site in seconds

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS

0-(5)-255 Frame Alignment Error rate at Local site

Prompted when TYPE = CTHS rpe2-15

2-(10)-999 Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site in seconds

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS

0-(5)-255 Frame Alignment Error rate at Remote site

Prompted when TYPE = CTHS rpe2-15

GRP

ID

LFAL

1-31

<CR> x...x

RPE group number

All RPE group numbers, when REQ = PRT

Identifier (1-16 character alphanumeric group identification) rpe2-15 rpe2-15

2-(10)-999 Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site in seconds rpe2-15

778 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS

0-(5)-255 Loss of Frame Alignment at Local site

Prompted when TYPE = CHTS

LFAR 2-(10)-999 Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site in seconds

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS

0-(5)-255 Loss of Frame Alignment at Remote site

Prompted when TYPE = CHTS

LINT

LM0

LM1

LM2

0-(2)-255 Local site Initialization of Remote Peripheral

Controller (RPC)

0-159 Loop number for group member 0 (1st primary loop)

Precede with X to delete a loop number

0-159

0-159

Loop number for group member 1 (2nd primary loop)

Precede with X to delete a loop number

Loop number for group member 2 (3rd primary loop)

Precede with X to delete a loop number

LM3

LOOP

NND

PCML

Pack/Rel

rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15

0-159 x xx x

ALL

Loop number for group member 3 (4th primary loop or spare loop if SPAR = YES)

Precede with X to delete a loop number.

rpe2-15

Loop numbers for loops to be removed.

All loops in the group are removed

If accepted, then the whole group is removed.

rpe2-15

0-(56)-1800 No New Data call time in seconds

The time to stay in the NND state. Time is stored as nearest lower multiple of 8. A response of 0 deactivates the NND error handling system on this

RPE group.

rpe2-15

2-(600)-999 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site in seconds.

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS.

0-(5)-255 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at Local site

Prompted when TYPE = CHTS rpe2-15 rpe2-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 779

LD 52: 2.0 Mb/s Remote Peripheral Equipment

Prompt Response

PCMR

Comment

2-(600)-999 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at

Remote site in seconds.

Prompted when TYPE = TTHS.

0-(5)-255 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) error rate at

Remote site

Prompted when TYPE = CHTS

REQ

RPF

Pack/Rel

rpe2-15

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

Request

Change a data block

Exit Overlay program

Create a new data block

When an RPE group is created using REQ = NEW, counter and timer thresholds are initialized to their default values.

Remove 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block

Print 2.0 Mb/s RPE data block

128-(1024)-9999

Remote Processor Failure (milliseconds) rpe2-15 rpe2-15

RPF

SPAR

TASK

TYPE

0-(3)-255

(NO) YES

CTHS

GMBR

NND

THRS

TTHS

RPE2

Remote Processor Failure

Spare loop option

Counter Threshold

Group Member

No New Data call timer

Threshold data (timer/counter)

Timer Threshold

When REQ = PRT, TASK can only be GMBR or

THRS

Type of data block

2.0 Mb/s RPE group data rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15 rpe2-15

780 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 33: LD 56: Flexible Tones and

Cadences

Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) is an optional feature that is used to customize the tones provided to telephone users. FTC is primarily intended for international markets where tones which are different from the North American defaults are required.

Overlay program 56 allows the implementation and administration of tone and ringing parameters for one or more customers. If the FTC feature (package 125) is not equipped, North American tones and cadences are used.

An FTC table number can be entered for each trunk route at prompt TTBL in LD 16. Table 0 is the default for all trunk routes and contains the defaults for North America.

What are tones and cadences?

Tones are used to provide call status to telephone users. A tone is defined by both the frequency and volume of the sound.

Tones are provided in on and off phases. One or more cycles of on/off cycles make up a tone's cadence. For example, the default cadence for normal North American ringing is 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off, and so on.

Flexible Tone and Cadence (FTC) tables

FTC tables define the tones and cadences used for various calling features. Up to 31 FTC tables can be created. Each table can be associated with one or more trunk routes by entering the table number in response to prompt TTBL in LD 16.

Master Cadence (MCAD) table

The Master Cadence Table (MCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by software. These are used for single line sets (500/2500) and digital sets.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 781

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

The MCAD can have 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases each.

Entry 0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries 1-15 are reserved for ringing cadences.

Most of the software cadences are continuously repetitive unless it is specified that the tone should end after the last phase. There are four exceptions to this rule: prompts ACBT,AOBT,

INTU and OVRD cadences repeat the last 8 phases. This allows a special initial tone burst to be defined. To have the first cycle repeat, it must be defined as both the first and last cycle.

A cadence is defined at the CDNC prompt by entering the time for each on and off phase. The time depends on the settings for the TMRK prompt in LD17 which defines the software cadence increments as 96 or 128 ms. For each phase, enter the closest multiple of 5 ms equal to the multiple of 96 or 128 ms which gives the a time Š the time required.

The range for the first phase is 1-9999. The range for the second phase is 0-9999. Once an

MCAD entry has been created, it can be changed but not removed.

For example, given LD 17 TMRK is set to 128 ms, and a repeating 2 seconds on, 4 seconds off cadence is required.

1. Determine the ON phase (2 seconds = 2000 ms) 2000/128 = 15.625 = 16 (always round up) 128 x 16 = 2048 ms multiple of 5 closet to 2048 ms = 2050 Entry for prompt CDNC = 2050/5 = 0410

2. Determine the OFF phase (4 seconds = 4000 ms). By using the same calculation, the entry for prompt CDNC = 0820.

3. To define the cadence, respond to the prompts as follows:

REQ NEW, CHG TYPE MCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820

To define the cadence: 2 s on, 4 s off, 4 s on, 2 s off, repeat cycle 1 and 2, enter:

CDNC 0410 0820 0820 0410

To define the cadence: 2 s on, then steady off, enter:

CDNC 0410, or CDNC 0410 0000

If an odd number of non-zero phases are entered, software ends the tone after the last ON phase. Once a zero phase has been entered, it cannot be followed by non-zero phases. A carriage return at any phase results in zero for the remaining phases.

Once the cadence is defined, it can be entered in response to the CDNC prompt for a given feature. For example, CDNC is output after the Call Waiting tone prompt.

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table

The Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by an NT8D17

Conference/TDS/MFS card.

782 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table

The FCAD can have 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases. Entry

0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries 1-15 are reserved for ringing cadences. Each phase is in multiples of 5 ms.

FCAD cadences have the following capabilities:

• Each cadence can be defined to end at the "on" phase, the "off" phase, or repeat after a single pass through the defined on/off cycles. Any or all of the five cycles can be repeated.

• Unique tones can be defined for each "on" phase. These tones are permanently held in the Conference/TDS/MFS firmware.

In order to have the same cadences on 500/2500/digital telephones and SL-1 telephones, the

MCAD and FCAD entries 0-15 are identical. Changes to MCAD entries 1-15 automatically change FCAD entries 1-15. The FCAD entries 1-15 can be changed only by changing the

MCAD entries 1-15.

The Conference/TDS/MFS card must be disabled and then re-enabled to download changed firmware cadences.

Examples of creating firmware cadences:

1. For a cadence of 2 s on, 4 s off, repeat:

REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820

END REPT CYCS 1 (on/off cycles to be repeated) WTON NO (use default tone for this cadence)

2. For a cadence of 2 s on, 4 s off, 3 s on, 5 s off, repeat:

REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0410 0820 0614 0998

END REPT CYCS 1 2 (on/off cycles to be repeated) WTON NO (use default tone for this cadence)

3. For a cadence of:

0.1 s on at 950 Hz, 19 dB below overload A-law, 0.1 off 0.1 s on at 1400 Hz, 20 dB below overload A-law, 0.1 off 0.1 s on at 1800 Hz, 20 dB below overload A-law, steady off REQ NEW, CHG, PRT TYPE FCAD WCAD 1-255 CDNC 0020 0020 0020

0020 0020

END OFF WTON YES (define tones for this cadence)

TONES 134 135 136 (See NT8D17 Conference/TDS tone table)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 783

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

TDS and NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards

There are two types of cards providing tones and cadences:

• Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) cards

• NT8D17 Conference, TDS and Multi-Frequency (MF) Sender card

There are a variety of TDS cards. Each card provides a different set of tones and cadences.

When a TDS card is used for SL-1 sets, each tone and cadence is identified by a hexadecimal code. The decimal equivalents for these hex codes are entered at the TDSH prompt for each calling feature.

Refer to the Flexible Tones and Cadences NTP for the appropriate codes.

When the NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS cards are used, the tones and cadences are defined by the following prompts:

• XCAD = 0-255 - entry in the Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD)

• XTON = 0-255 - tone stored in the card firmware

• CDNC = 0-255 - entry in Master Cadence Table (MCAD)

The ringing cadences for all telephones use the Master Cadence Table (MCAD). MCAD entries

1-15 are downloaded to the Peripheral Controller to provide ringing.

Time interval for Call Forward

For Call Forward No Answer (CFNA), the time interval before a call is forwarded is measured by the time interval for one ring cycle (defined at NCAD prompt) times the number of ring cycles

(defined at CFNA prompt in LD 15).

All other types of ringing forward a call after this same time interval regardless of cadence. For example, those with a faster cadence forward after more rings, those with a slower cadence after fewer rings.

Installing FTC

These steps outline the process to install the FTC feature and change the default tones and cadences for one or more calling features.

784 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Installing FTC

To assist in fault clearing, it is recommended that you keep a record of all changes:

• Load Overlay 56

• Define new MCAD cadences

• Define new FCAD tones and cadences

• Create one or more FTC tables (one for each trunk route requiring different tones and cadences)

• Define the non-default tones and cadences for each FTC table

• Enter the FTC table number for each trunk route (LD 16 prompt TTBL)

• If a Conference/TDS/MFS card is equipped, then follow these steps:

- set options in LD 97

- initialize the system (INIT)

- disable and enable each Conf/TDS/MFS card (LD 34)

- disable and enable each Controller (LD 32)

Note:

The Master Cadence Table (MCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by software. These are used for single line sets (500/2500) and digital sets.

MCAD can have up to 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on/off phases. Entry

0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed. Entries are reserved for ringing cadences.

To define an MCAD cadence, enter the time for each on and off phase. Phases are in 5 ms increments. For example, enter 200 to have a phase last 1 second (200 x 5 ms = 1000 ms =

1 second).

The range for the first phase is 1-9999. The range for the second phase is 0-9999. Once an

MCAD entry has been created, it can be changed but not removed.

Note:

Prompts with the response i bb c tt are prompted only for systems equipped with Tone and

Digit cards.

• i = internal (0) or external (1) source

• bb = burst

• cc = cadence

• tt = frequency/level

Prompts with the response i bb c tt define the Internal/External source, burst, cadence and frequency/level respectively. Enter the decimal equivalent (0-15) of the TDS Hex code (refer to 553-2711-180).

The first field is usually 0. If an external source is used the entry is 1 and the fourth field is 0-7 for the specified channel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 785

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Note:

The Firmware Cadence Table (FCAD) defines cadences that are controlled by the NT8D17

Conference /TDS/MFS card. These are used for SL-1 sets.

The FCAD can have up to 256 entries (0-255). Each entry can have up to 10 on-off phases.

Entry 0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed.

FCAD cadences have the following capabilities:

• each cadence can be defined to end on the ON phase, OFF phase or repeat after a single pass through all defined on-off cycles. Any or all of the five on-off cycles can be repeated.

• a unique tone can be defined for each on phase. These tones are permanently held in the Conference/TDS/MFS firmware.

In order to have the same cadences for 500/2500 Digital and SL-1 sets, the MCAD and FCAD entries 0 through 15 are identical. Changes to MCAD entries 1 through 15 automatically change

FCAD entries 1 through 15. FCAD entries 1 through 15 cannot be changed without changing the MCAD entries.

Note:

The cadences for Software Controlled Cadence Tones AOBT (Agent Observe Tone), INTU

(Intrusion tone) and OVRD (Override tone) do not repeat in the same manner as the other tones. All other tones repeat all on-off cycles from the first up to the fifth if all ten on and off times are programmed. However, these tones reserve cycle 1 for special use, providing a tone burst of a different length if desired, to emphasize the initial iteration of the tone cycle.

Note:

A cycle of 200 3200 50 3200 have a 200 millisecond tone followed by 3.2 seconds of silence.

After this initial burst, the tone repeats in a 50 millisecond on, 3.2 seconds off pattern as long as the time remains valid. However, if the pattern is intended to not have an initial burst, the first two entries must be repeated as the last two entries to obtain the correct sequence.

As an example, if the desired tone is repeating sequence of 50 ms on, 100 ms off, 100 ms on,

50 ms off, 50 ms on, 3500 ms off, the entry must be as follows:

50 100 100 50 50 3500 50 100

Intrusion Tone Note for Small Systems

The following settings are recommended when programming the Intrusion tone on an Small

System.

Prompt Response

INTU XTON 175 XCAD 19 CDNC 19 MCAD 1914 25 14 2000 FCAD 1914 25 14 2000

END REPL CYCS 2

786 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block

on page 787

DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block

on page 788

FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block

on page 789

FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block

on page 789

FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block

on page 789

MCAD: Master cadence data block

on page 795

RART: Route Access Restriction table data block on page 796

RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block

on page 796

TBAR: Trunk Barring data block on page 796

Print a customer defined route ART course on page 797

Other Information:

Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables

on page 798

AANN: PC Attendant Announcement data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

TBL

-NIPR

Response

aaa

AANN xx

0-31

(NO) YES

Comment

PC Attendant Announcement block.

Customer Number

Announcement table number.

Nightstation announcement priority. If NIPR is set to

YES, ANNS is given for each call to the nightstation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 787

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

-ANQU

-ANAT

-ANNS

-ANFA

-ANFB

-ANSR

-ANXC

-ANOF

Response

(NO) YES aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aaa

Comment

PC Attendant Announcement is given on calls in PC

Attendant or night service queue only.

Announcement when terminating to the PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement when terminating to night station, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement when CFNA to PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement when CFB to PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement when slow answer recall, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement on calls extended by PC Attendant, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

Announcement on calls overflowed from the PC

Attendant queue, where: aaa = R000 - R128 RAN announcement

DTAD: Special Dial Tone After Dialed Number data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

DDGT

- TONE

Response

aaa

DTAD x...x

a...a

Comment

Request

Type of data block = DTAD (Special Dial Tone After

Dialed Number)

Dialed digits (1-5 digits)

Tone to be provided after the dialed digits (a...a =

(DIAL), SPDT, or SRC-SRC8)

788 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

FCAD: Firmware Cadence data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

WCAD

CDNC

END

- CYCS

- WTON

- - TONES

Response

aaa

FCAD

0-225 xxxx xxxx ...

xxxx a...a

x x x x

(NO) YES ttt ttt ...

Comment

Request

Type of data block = FCAD (Firmware Cadence)

Cadence Number (0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed)

Cadence

End treatment for cadence (a...a = REPT, ON, or OFF)

Cycles

Define Tones associated with the cadence

NT8D17 tones (0-255) to be used with each phase of the cadence

FDTD: Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

TABL

ACNO

- OACn

- DTPn

- CNT

DGTS

Response

aaa

FDTD

0-31

1-4 x....x

(YES) NO

(0)-15 x...x

Comment

Request

Type of data block = FDTD (Flexible Dial Tone

Detection)

Table number

Access Code Number

Outgoing Access Code (1-4 digits)

Dial Tone Post-dial

Count

Digits

FTC: Flexible Tones and Cadences data block

An FTC table number can be entered for each trunk route at prompt TTBL in LD16. Table 0 is the default for all trunk routes and contains the defaults for North America.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 789

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

REQ TYPE

TABL USER

DFLT RING

- NCAD - NBCS

- - TDSH - -

XTON

Response

aaa FTC 0-31

(NO) YES

0-31 (NO) YES Default to existing FTC tone table Change the ringing feature definitions

(1)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

- DCAD - DBCS

- - TDSH - -

XTON

0-(2)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

- ICAD - IBCS - -

TDSH - - XTON

0-(5)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

- NDR1 PBX -

NDR1 BCS - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- NDR2 PBX -

NDR2 BCS - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

0-255 i bb c tt 0-

(2)-255 0-

(2)-255

0-255 i bb c tt 0-

(2)-255 0-

(2)-255

Comment

Request Type of data block = FTC (Flexible Tones and

Cadences) FTC Table number Print users of this table and tone table values (tone table value only)

Normal Cadence Normal BCS (SL-1 set) ringing TDS

Hex (Default is 0032) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code

Distinctive Cadence Distinctive BCS (SL-1 set) ringing

TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/

TDS) Tone code

Intercom Cadence Intercom ringing for BCS

(SL-1)sets TDS Hex (Default is 0012) XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Tone code

Network Distinctive Ring 1 cadence for PBX sets

Network Distinctive Ring 1 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS

Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence code

Network Distinctive Ring 2 cadence for PBX sets

Network Distinctive Ring 2 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS

Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence code

- NDR3 PBX -

NDR3 BCS - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- NDR4 PBX -

NDR4 BCS - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- RCAD - RBCS

- - TDSH - -

XTON

- GCAD - GBCS

- - TDSH - -

XTON

- HCAD - HBCS

- - TDSH - -

XTON

0-255 i bb c tt 0-

(2)-255 0-

(2)-255

0-255 i bb c tt 0-

(2)-255 0-

(2)-255

0-(1)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

0-(1)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for PBX sets

Network Distinctive Ring 3 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS

Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence code

Network Distinctive Ring 4 cadence for PBX sets

Network Distinctive Ring 4 for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS

Hex (Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence code

Recall Cadence Recall for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS Hex

(Default is 0032) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code

Group Call Cadence Group Call for BCS (SL-1) sets

TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/

TDS) Tone code

0-(1)-255 i bb c tt

0-(2)-255

Held call reminder Cadence Held call reminder ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets TDS Hex (Default is 0082) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

790 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- PCAD - PBCS

- - TDSH

- - XTON

HCCT

0-(4)-255

(NO) YES

- DIAL - EEST - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-55

- CFWT - -

XTON - - XCAD

- SURV - - XTON

- - XCAD

- SPCL - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

Response

0-255 i bb c tt

0-(3)-255 0-

(19)-255

0-(4)-255 0-

(253)-255

0 00 0 tt 0-

(4)-255 (0)-255

Comment

Recall or Misoperation Cadence Recall or

Misoperation ringing for BCS TDS Hex (Default is

0032)

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

Hardware Controlled Cadences and Tones

Dial tone End-to-End Signaling Feedback Tone TDS

Hex (Default is 0004) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code For EEST, this value is set to 0 no matter what is entered. XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Cadence number (FCAD cadence number)

Conference Warning Tone Conference Warning Tone number. A tone number provided by the tone circuit.

Conference Warning Tone cadence number. The cadence number should be set up under FCAD.

Flexible Survivable Dial Tone Flexible Survivable Dial

Tone Code Flexible Survivable Dial Tone Cadence number

Special dial tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD Cadence number)

- CDT - - TDSH -

- XTON - - XCAD

- CFDT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-255

Control Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Call Forward Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0004) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS)

- MWDT - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- CFMW - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- ACTN - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

- BUSY - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

- RGBK - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

0-(17)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

0-(17)-255 i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-(7)-255

0-(16)-255 i bb c tt 0-(5)-255

0-(1)-255

Message Waiting Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0024)

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Call Forward Message Waiting tone TDS Hex (Default is 0024) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Active feature Dial Tone TDS Hex (Default is special dial tone) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Busy tone TDS Hex (Default is 0017) XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Ringback tone TDS Hex (Default is 0035) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 791

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

- PREM - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

Response

i bb c tt 0-(6)-255

(0)-255

- PRBK - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

- ARBK - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD i bb c tt 0-

(11)-255 0-

(2)-255 i bb c tt 0-

(11)-255 0-

(2)-255

- FFCT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

- LIMT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-255

0-255

Comment

Preemption tone TDS Hex (Default is 0006) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Precedence Ringback tone TDS Hex (Default is

0008D) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

ACD RGA (Ring Again) Ringback tone TDS Hex

(Default is 0008D) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Flexible Feature Code Confirmation Tone TDS Hex

(Default is 0004) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Log In Mode Tone for 500/2500 ACD sets TDS Hex

(Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

- NRMT - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

- AWUT - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD i bb c tt 0-(4)-255

(0)-255

- OVFL - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD i bb c tt 0-255

0-255 i bb c tt 0-(7)-255

0-(17)-255

Note:

default values for XTON and XCAD should not be used for A-law configuration.

Not Ready (NRDY) Mode Tone for ACD sets TDS Hex

(Internal/External, burst, cadence and tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Automatic Wake Up special error Tone TDS Hex

(Default is 0027) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Overflow tone TDS Hex (Default is 0027) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

- TEST - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

- HOWL - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

0 0 0 tt 0-(8)-255

(0)-255 i bb c tt 0-255

0-255

- ERWT - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255

Test tone TDS Hex (Default is 0008) XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Howler tone TDS Hex (Default is Overflow tone) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Expensive Route Warning Tone TDS Hex (Default is

0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

792 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- PCWT - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

Response

0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255

Comment

Precedence Call Waiting Tone TDS Hex (Default is

0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

(FCAD Cadence number)

- ACFT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD

0 0 0 tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255

- TLP - - TDSH -

- XTON - - XCAD i bb c tt (0)-255

(0)-255

ACD Call Force Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

Tone to Last Party TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number

- TLPT - PATI - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD

CAB - TDSH -

XTON - XCAD

(0)-30 i bb c tt

(0)-255 (0)-255

(NO) YES i bb cc tt 0-255 0-255

Tone to Last Party Timer in seconds. No tone = 0

Patience tone Multi-Party Operations TDS Hex

(Default is 0000) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

M911 Call Abandon on Answer tone TDS external, burst, cadence and tone NT8D17 TDS Tone code

NT8D17 Cadence code for FCAD

CAST

- LDN - - TDSH -

- XTON - - XCAD

- - CDNC

(NO) YES i bb c tt (0)-255

0-(24)-255 0-

(16)-255

- DI0 - - TDSH -

- XTON - - XCAD

- - CDNC

- HLDC - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

0-(22)-255 0-

(16)-255 i bb c tt (0)-255

0-(24)-255 0-

(16)-255

Centralized Attendant Service Tones

Listed Directory Number tone TDS Hex (Default is

0346) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

MCAD software Cadence number

Dial 0 Recall tone TDS Hex (Default is 0283) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software

Cadence number

Hold Confirmation tone TDS Hex (Default is 0346)

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software Cadence number

- CPNC - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

0-(21)-255 0-

(17)-255

(NO) YES

Camp-On Confirmation tone TDS Hex (Default is

0243) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

MCAD software Cadence number

Software Controlled Cadences and Tones SCCT

ILIN ILOU

- CAMP - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD - -

CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(17)-255

NSCC pending agent Login tone NSCC pending agent

Logout tone

Camp-On tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 793

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

- RPAW - - CLN

- - TDSH - -

XTON - - XCAD

- - CDNC

- AOBT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC

- INTU - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC

- CWT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC

- OBKT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC

Response

x xx xx xx 1-31 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(19)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(18)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(19)-255

Comment

Radio Paging Warning tone Cadence Length TDS Hex

(Default is 0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Agent Observe Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Intrusion tone (If Small System, see note on Intrusion

Tone Note for Small Systems on page 786.) TDS Hex

(Default is 0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS)

Tone code XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(20)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(17)-255

Call Waiting Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Observe Blocking Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003)

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

- OVRD - -

TDSH - - XTON -

- XCAD - -

CDNC

- OHQ - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(18)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(3)-255

- SRT - - TDSH -

- XTON - - XCAD

- - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(22)-255

- TMAT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(22)-255

Override tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Off-Hook Queuing tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003)

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Set Relocation Tone TDS Hex (Default is 0003) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number MCAD software cadence number

Telephone Messaging Alert Tone TDS Hex (Default is

0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

- TMOT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC

- TSUT - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - - CDNC i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(23)-255 i bb c tt 0-(3)-255

(0)-255 0-

(23)-255

Telephone Messaging OK Tone TDS Hex (Default is

0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

Telephone Status Update Tone TDS Hex (Default is

0003) XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code

794 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt Response

ABST - XTON -

XCAD - CDNC

PNNC - XTON -

XCAD - CDNC

SRC

- SRC1 - - TDSH

- - XTON - -

XCAD - SRC2 -

SRC3 - SRC4 -

SRC5 - SRC6 -

SRC7 - SRC8

MINT

- CFSN - - TDSH

- CPOQ - -

TDSH - RGAR -

- TDSH - RPCT -

- TDSH - RGAB

- - TDSH -

MWAN - - TDSH

- DNDA - - TDSH

- SSLK - - TDSH

0-(4)-255

(0)-255 0-

(2)-255

(0)-255 (0)-255

0-(2)-255 (NO)

YES i bb c tt (0)-255

(0)-255

PULS

- P10 - ID1 - ID2

- IDD - IDE

RVDL

Comment

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

Authorization Code Conditionally Last Enhancement cadence NT8D17 TDS Tone code NT8D17 TDS

Cadence code MCAD table entry for this cadence

Process Notification for Networked Calls tone NT8D17

TDS Tone code NT8D17 TDS Cadence code MCAD table entry for this cadence Source

Source tone 1 TDS Hex (Default is 0000) XCT

(NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) Cadence number Source tone 2

Source tone 3 Source tone 4 Source tone 5 Source tone 6 Source tone 7 Source tone 8

(NO) YES Allow tones or announcements

0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255

0-255 i bb c tt

0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255

0-255 i bb c tt

0-255 0-255 i bb c tt 0-255 0-255 i bb c tt

(NO) YES

Call Forward All Calls active Third parameter Call is being parked or set is in Off-Hook Queuing state Third parameter Ring Again is applied by another set Third parameter Confirmation Tone replaced by an announcement Third parameter Station Dialed Busy

Third parameter Message Waiting Third parameter Do

Not Disturb Third parameter Set Status Lockout Third parameter

Pulse timers are to be changed

4 (8) 256-

(768)-1024 256-

(512)-1024

256-1024 256-

(384) (0) x

Codes for make/break ratio for 10 pps Inter-Digit 1

Inter-Digit 2 Inter-Digit DTMF EOS interdigital pause in milliseconds Reverse Dial format

MCAD: Master cadence data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

WACD

Response

aaa

MCAD

0-225

Comment

Request

Type of data block = MCAD (Master cadence)

Cadence Number (0 is reserved for continuous tone and cannot be changed)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 795

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

CDNC

Response

xxxx xxxx ...

xxxx

Cadence

TBAR: Trunk Barring data block

REQ

Prompt Response

NEW CHG Request

Comment

RART: Route Access Restriction table data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

ART

Response

CHG

RART xx

(0)-127

1-63

Comment

Request. REQ = NEW or OUT is not accepted for

RART.

Type of data block = RART (Route Access Restriction table)

Customer number

Route

Access Restriction Table

RCDT: Route Category Default Table data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

COT

DID

TIE

OTH

(0)-63

(0)-63

(0)-63

(0)-63

Response

CHG

RCDT

Comment

Request. When TYPE = RCDT, you cannot enter NEW or OUT at the REQ prompt.

Type of data block = RCDT (Route Category Default table)

COT, FEX, WAT. These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD16.

These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD16

CAA, CAM, CSA, TIE

Other

Comment

796 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

TYPE

ART

DENY

Response

TBAR

1-63 yyy yyy ...

Comment

Type of data block = TBAR (Trunk Barring)

Access Restriction Table

Enter ART number denied to Originating Trunk

Connection (OTC)

Print a customer defined route ART course

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

Response

PRT aaa xx

(0)-127

Request

Type of data block

Customer number

Route

Comment

Default Master Cadence (MCAD) tables

020

021

022

023

005

016

017

018

019

000

WCAD =

001

002

003

004

DEFAULT MCAD TABLE (Master Cadence Table)

CDNC = 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0410 0800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0308 0076 0308 0076 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0205 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0102 0102 0205 0819 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0100 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0128 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0051 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0205 3072 0051 3072 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0205 1229 0051 1229 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0051 0026 0051 2048 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0410 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0102 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0512 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 797

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Master Cadence (MCAD) table for Japan

001

002

CDNC = 0050 0050 0050 0450 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

CDNC = 0200 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables

000

WCAD =

001

002

003

004

005

016

017

018

DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Firmware Cadence Table)

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0410

0800 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0308

0076 0308 0076 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 2 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0205

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0102

0102 0205 0819 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 2 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100

0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100

0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050

0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0010

0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

798 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Default Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables

019

WCAD =

020

021

022

023

024

025

026

027

028

029

DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Firmware Cadence Table)

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0040

0060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0015

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020

0020 0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0060

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0020

0000 0020 0000 0020 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

YES

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0200

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0400

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0125

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = OFF SPCL =

NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0030

0070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 799

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) table for Japan

001

WCAD =

002

017

DEFAULT FCAD TABLE (Cadence Table for JAPAN TDS)

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0200

0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 2 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0050

0050 0050 0450 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1 SPCL = NO

Cadence number in the Master Cadence table (MCAD) CDNC = 0100

0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 END = REPT CYCS

= 1

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ABST

ACFT

ACNO

ACTN

ANAT

Response Comment

Authorization Code Conditionally Last

Enhancement cadence

1-4

<CR> aaa

Pack/Rel

nars-24

ACD Call Force Tone

When defining the hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter zero for the other values (e.g.,

TDSH = 0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx, XCAD =

000).

ftc-13

Access Code Number

Outgoing Access Code to be used (4 codes per table)

Go to DGTS prompt (REQ = CHG) ftc-12

Active feature dial tone ftc-12

Announcement when terminating to the PC

Attendant. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

800 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ANFA

ANFB

ANNS

ANOF

ANQU

ANSR

ANXC

AOBT

Response

aaa

Comment Pack/Rel

Announcement when CFNA to PC Attendant.

Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

aaa aaa

Announcement when CFB to PC Attendant.

Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

Announcement when terminating to night station. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

aaa

(NO) YES aaa

Announcement on calls overflowed from the

PC Attendant queue. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

PC Attendant Announcement is given on calls in PC Attendant or night service queue only.

atan-25.4

Announcement when slow answer recall.

Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

aaa Announcement on calls extended by PC

Attendant. Where: aaa = R000 - R128 announcement is given via RAN announcement atan-25.4

Agent Observe Tone

This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle. For example, a cadence is defined as

3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off.

After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern. In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined ftc-13

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 801

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

ARBK

ART

AWUT

BUSY

CAB

CAMP

CAST

Prompt Response Comment

as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.

1-63

<CR>

Pack/Rel

ACD RGA (Ring Again) Ringback tone ftc-13

Access Restriction Table

Return to REQ prompt

ART remains unchanged Printing of the route category default table occurs ftc-10

(NO) YES

(NO)YES

Automatic Wake Up special error Tone

Busy tone

M911 Call Abandon on Answer tone

Camp-On tone mlwu-16 ftc-13

M911-19 ftc-13

Centralized Attendant Service Tones

Modification to the CAS (Centralized

Attendant Service) tone definition.

For systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/

TDS) cards, each feature requires a firmware cadence (XCAD), a software cadence

(CNDN) and tone (XTON).

Due to the finer resolution of the firmware cadence (5 ms) compared to the software

(96/128 ms), you should allow the software cadence to be long enough to cover the full duration of the XCAD.

For example, to define a cadence of 0.1 s on,

0.1 s off, 0.1 s on, steady off ftc-13

• CDNC0020 0020 0020 0000

• END OFF

• SPCL

The software cadence is then 0.3 s (600 ms).

If the software precision is 128 ms, the software cadence is calculated as follows:

• 600 ms/128 = 4.6 = 5 (rounded up)

• 128 x 5 = 640

Entry to on phase = 640/5 = 0128, and to define the cadence enter 0128 to prompt

CDNC.

802 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CDNC

CDT

CFDT

CFMW

CFWT

CFSN

CLN

Response Comment Pack/Rel

xxxx xxxx ... xxxx

On-off phases for Cadence (ten on-off cycles)

Entries 1 through 15 are reserved for ringing cadences. When defining the cadences in

MCAD each phase entry is in 5 millisecond increments.

The range for the first phase is 1-9999 increments.The range for the second phase is 0-9999 increments. The default is 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0.

See the the default MCAD Tables on

Default

Master Cadence (MCAD) tables

on page 797.

ftc-14

0-(16)-255

0-(17)-255

0-(19)-255

0-(18)-255

0-(20)-255

0-(3)-255

0-(22)-255

0-(23)-255

MCAD software cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

MCAD software cadence number (see Note

5)

MCAD software cadence number (see Note

5)

MCAD software cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

MCAD software cadence number

MCAD software cadence number ftc-14

Control Dial Tone

Call Forward Dial Tone ftc-13 ftc-13

Call Forward Message Waiting tone

Conference Warning Tone (applies only to

Small System) ftc-13 basic-21

0-255 0-255 Call Forward All Calls active

First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15

1-31 Cadence Length (length of the Camp-On tone burst in 96 or 128 millisecond increments)

See TMRK prompt in LD17.

ftc-9

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 803

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

CNT

Prompt

COT

CPNC

CPOQ

CUST

CWT

CYCS

DBCS

DCAD

DDGT

DENY

Response

(0)-15

Comment

Count

Number of digits outpulsed before dial tone detector reconnection (0 specifies that digit counting is not to be used).

Pack/Rel

ftc-12

(0)-63 COT, FEX, WAT. These route types is assigned the entered ART when the route is created in LD 16.

Camp-On Confirmation tone ftc-13

0-255 0-255 Call is being Parked or set is in Off-Hook

Queuing state.

First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15 xx Customer number as defined in LD15

Call Waiting Tone cust-15 ftc-13 x x x x On-off Cycles (1 to 5) to be repeated. Default is no repeats.

Prompted when END = REPT ftc-14

Distinctive BCS (SL-1 set) ringing ftc-13

0-(2)-255 Distinctive Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set ringing MCAD cadence number. (See Notes 1 and 3)

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt DBCS). DCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-13

Dialed digits (1-5 digits)

To remove

To end pnp-15 xxxxx

X

<CR> yyy yyy ...

ALL xALL

Xyyy Xyyy ..

<CR>

Enter ART number denied to Originating

Trunk Connection (OTC)

Deny all ARTs to OTC

All ART numbers are allowed to OTC

Enter ART numbers allowed to OTC

Return to REQ prompt with no table being stored ftc-10

804 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

DFLT

DGTS

DI0

DIAL

DID

DNDA

DTPn

EEST

END

Prompt

ERWT

Response Comment

The ART is removed unless it is used as a default when REQ = OUT. REQ = NEW or

OUT is disallowed for RART.

0-31

<CR> xxxx

Xxxxx

Pack/Rel

Default to existing FTC tone table

Create tone table without defaulting

Prompted when REQ = NEW ftc-13

Digits

The system waits for dial tone after these additional (1-4) digits.

Remove digit sequence from table

Return to REQ prompt

DGTS prompt repeat until <CR> is pressed.

ftc-12

REPT

ON

OFF

Dial 0 recall tone

Dial tone ftc-13 ftc-13

(0)-63 These route types is assigned the entered

ART when the route is created in LD 16

0-255 0-255 Do Not Disturb

First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15

(YES) NO Dial Tone Post-dial

Dial tone detector is to be reconnected immediately after Outgoing Access (OACn).

ftc-12

End-to-End Signaling feedback Tone

Indicates that the improved EES tone is used.

There is actually no cadence.

When using the Enhanced Conference/TDS card, the XCAD prompt is not printed, and the cadence is set to 0 no matter what is entered.

ees-19 ftc-14 End treatment for cadence

Repeating cycles (defined by the CYCS prompt)

End cadence on the "on" phase

End cadence on the "off" phase

Expensive Route Warning Tone ftc-13

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 805

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

FFCT

GBCS

GCAD

HBCS

HCAD

HCCT

Response Comment

When defining the hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software.

Enter zero for the other values (e.g., TDSH =

0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx, XCAD = 000).

Pack/Rel

Flexible Feature Code Confirmation Tone

This tone allows users of 500/2500 or multiline telephones to receive a confirmation tone after activating/deactivating the following features: ffc-15

• Call Forward activate/deactivate

• Ring Again deactivate

• Store/erase Stored Number Redial

• all Automatic Wake Up codes

• Speed Call store

• any verification code

0-(1)-255

0-(1)-255

(NO) YES

Group Call ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets grp-13

Group Call Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set Group Call Ringing

Cadence MCAD cadence number

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt GBCS). GCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

grp-14

Held call ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-13

Held call reminder Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set held call reminder ringing cadence MCAD cadence number

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt HBCS). HCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-13

Hardware Controlled Cadences and Tones

Modification of the hardware (TDS card) controlled cadence tone definitions allowed.

ftc-13

806 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

HLDC

HOWL

IBCS

ICAD

ID1

ID2

IDD

IDE

ILIN

Prompt

ILOU

Response Comment

For systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/

TDS) cards, each feature requires a firmware cadence (XCAD) and tone (XTON). For other

TDS cards, the tone and cadence is defined by prompt TDSH.

Pack/Rel

Hold Confirmation tone

Howler tone ftc-13 ftc-13

0-(5)-255

Intercom ringing for BCS (SL-1)sets

Distinctive Dial Intercom ringing for BCS

(SL-1) sets ftc-13

Intercom Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set Dial Intercom

Distinctive ringing MCAD cadence number

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt IBCS). ICAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-13

256-(768)-1024

Inter-Digit 1(P10 interdigit pause in milliseconds) ftc-13

256-(512)-1024

Interdigit 2 (P20 interdigit pause in milliseconds)

256-1024 ftc-13

Interdigit DTMF pause in milliseconds

Default is 512 if 100 is the response to prompt

DTRB in LD 17. Otherwise, the default is

384.

ftc-13 ftc-13 256 - (384) EOS interdigital pause in ms.

Prompted if DDD package is equipped and

PULS = YES.

Nortel Symposium Call Center (NXCC) pending agent Login tone

Nortel Symposium Call Center (NXCC) pending agent Logout tone nxcc-22 nxcc-22

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 807

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

INTU

LDN

LIMT

MINT

MWAN

MWDT

NBCS

NCAD

NDR1 BCS

Response Comment

Intrusion tone

This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle.

For example, a cadence is defined as 3 s on,

3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off. After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern.

In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on,

3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.

Pack/Rel

ftc-13

Listed Directory Number tone ftc-13

(NO) YES

Log In Mode Tone for 500/2500 ACD sets

This is the tone setting for ACD services to

500/2500 agent sets. You must have Flexible

Tones and Cadences (FTC) supported for this feature to function properly.

bacd-16

Note:

default values for XTON and XCAD should not be used for A-law configuration.

Allow tones or announcements

(NO- tone default values) mint-15

0-255 0-255 Message Waiting

The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15

(1)-255

Message Waiting Dial Tone

Normal BCS (SL-1 set) ringing ftc-13 ftc-13

Normal Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set ringing MCAD cadence number. (Notes 1 and 3)

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt NBCS). NCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-13

Network Distinctive Ring 1 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16

808 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NDR1 PBX

NDR2 BCS

NDR2 PBX

NDR3 BCS

NDR3 PBX

NDR4 BCS

NDR4 PBX

Response

0-255

Comment

Network Distinctive Ring 1 cadence for PBX sets

500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive

Ringing cadence 1 MCAD cadence number.

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt NDR1 BCS). NDR1 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

Pack/Rel

ftc-16

0-255

Network Distinctive Ring 2 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16

Network Distinctive Ring 2 cadence for PBX sets

500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive

Ringing cadence 2 MCAD cadence number.

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt NDR2 BCS). NDR2 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-16

Network Distinctive Ring 3 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16

0-255

0-255

Network Distinctive Ring 3 cadence for PBX sets

500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive

Ringing cadence 3 MCAD cadence number.

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt NDR3 BCS). NDR3 PBX is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-16

Network Distinctive Ring 4 for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-16

Network Distinctive Ring 4 cadence for PBX sets

500/2500 and Digital set Network Distinctive

Ringing cadence 4 MCAD cadence number

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt NDR4 BCS). NDR4 PBX is also used ftc-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 809

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

OBKT

OHQ

OTH

OVFL

OVRD

P10

Prompt

NIPR

NRMT

OACn

Response Comment

for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES xxxx

Xxxxx

Nightstation announcement priority. If NIPR is set to YES, ANNS is given for each call to the nightstation.

atan-25.4

Not Ready (NRDY) Mode Tone for ACD sets

This is the tone setting for the NRDY function within ACD services to 500/2500 agent sets.

You must have Flexible Tones and Cadences supported for this feature to function properly.

bacd-16

Outgoing Access Code (1-4 digits)

Where: n = ACNO response

Remove OACn ftc-12

(0)-63

<CR>

Observe Blocking Tone

Off-Hook Queuing tone ftc-13 ftc-13

Other (ADM, DIC, MDM, PAG, RCD)

These route types is assigned the entered

ART when the route is created in LD 16.

Return to REQ prompt.

Overflow tone ftc-10

Codes for make/break ratio for 10 pps.

Other make/break ratio (Prompt S10P in

LD97) ftc-13

Override tone

This cadence repeats the last 8 on/off phases to allow for a special tone burst on the first cycle.

For example, a cadence is defined as 3 s on,

3 s off, 1 s on, 3 s off. After the initial burst, the tone repeats in a 1 s on, 3 s off pattern.

In order to repeat the initial 3 s burst, it must be entered as the first and last cycle because the first cycle is not repeated. In this case the cadence is defined as: 3 s on, 3 s off, 1 s on,

3 s off, 3 s on 3 s off.

ftc-13 ftc-13

810 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

PNNC

PRBK

PREM

PULS

RBCS

RCAD

PATI

PBCS

REQ

Prompt

PCAD

PCWT

Response Comment

North American make/break ratio (Prompt

S10P in LD97)

(See also CLS P10 in LD 14)

Pack/Rel

Patience tone multi-party operations frta-21

Recall or Misoperation ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets (default is SL-1 ringing tone TDS code) ftc-12

0-255

(NO) YES

0-(1)-255

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

Recall or Misoperation Cadence

500/2500 and Digital set Recall or

Misoperation ringing cadence MCAD cadence number

It is recommended that the cadence used matches the cadence provided for SL-1 sets

(prompt PBCS). PCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17

Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-12

Precedence Call Waiting Tone

When defining the TDS hex codes for this tone, only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter zero for the other values (e.g.,

0 0 0 xx).

ftc-13

Process Notification for Networked Calls tone mfc-24

Precedence Ringback tone ftc-13

Preemption tone

Pulse timers are to be changed ftc-13 ftc-13

Call Park Recall ringing for BCS (SL-1) sets ftc-14

Recall Cadence

500/2500 and digital set Call Park recall ringing cadence MCAD cadence number.

RCAD is also used for SL-1 sets in systems with XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) cards.

ftc-14

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Add new data block to the system

Remove data block ftc-13

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 811

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

RGAB

RGAR

RGBK

RING

ROUT

RPAW

RPCT

RVDL

SCCT

SPCL

Response

PRT Print data block

Comment Pack/Rel

0-255 0-255 Station Dialed Busy (calling party allowed to apply Ring Again)

The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15

0-255 0-255 Ring Again is applied by another set

The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.

Ringback tone

(NO) YES ftc-15 ftc-13

Change the Ringing feature definitions

For systems with NT8D17 Conference/TDS cards, all telephones share the same ringing cadence. SL-1 telephones require an

NT8D17 tone (XTON).

ftc-13

(0)-127

<CR> x xx xx xx

Route

Print routes with non-zero ART numbers, along with the ART number. Return to REQ prompt.

REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for RCDT ftc-10

Radio Paging Warning tone

0-255 0-255 Confirmation Tone Replaced by an announcement

The first parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. The second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-15 ftc-15

(0)

1

2

(NO) YES

Reverse Dial format

No Reverse Dial format

Reverse Dial format 1

Reverse Dial format 2

Software Controlled Cadences and Tones

Modification of the Software Controlled

Cadence Tone definitions allowed ftc-10 ftc-13

Special dial tone Only the code for the frequency/level is required as the cadence is provided by software. Enter 0 for the other ftc-13

812 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

SRC6

SRC7

SRC8

SRT

SSLK

SRC2

SRC3

SRC4

SRC5

SRC

SURV

TABL

TBL

Prompt

SRC1

Response Comment

values (e.g., TDSH = 0 0 0 xx, XTON = xxx,

XCAD = 000).

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES Source tones (SRC1 through SRC8) are required.

Eight intercept Source tones can be defined.

These tones are entered in LD 15 in response to the various intercept treatment prompts.

ftc-13

Source tone 1

Prompts and default values for TDSH, XTON and XCAD are the same for all SRC1 through

SRC8 prompts.

ftc-13

Source tone 2

Source tone 3

Source tone 4

Source tone 5 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13

Source tone 6

Source tone 7

Source tone 8

Set Relocation Tone ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13 ftc-13

0-255 0-255 Set Status Lockout

First parameter is the MCAD table cadence entry number. Second parameter is the XCT tone code.

ftc-13

0-31

<CR>

0-31

Flexible Survivable Dial Tone ip-25.4

FTC Table number

To associate a FTC table with a trunk route, enter the table number in response to prompt

TTBL in LD 16.

Prints all tables ftc-13

Announcement table number.

atan-25.4

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 813

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

Prompt

TDSH

TEST

TIE

TLP

Response

i bb c tt

Comment

Hexadecimal code for TDS. Internal/

External, burst, cadence and tone (See Note

2)

The default value of a TDSH prompt changes according to the tone-type prompt (e.g.

NBCS, IBCS, HOWL, etc.) which precedes it.

Pack/Rel

ftc-14 ftc-13

(0)-63

Test tone

CAA, CAM, CSA, TIE

These route types is assigned the entered

ART when the route is created in LD16.

Tone to Last Party

TLPT TMAT

TMOT

TONE

TONES

TSUT

TYPE

(0)-30

(DIAL)

SPDT

SRC-SRC8 ttt ttt ...

AANN

DTAD

FCAD

FDTD

FTC

Tone to Last Party Timer in seconds. No tone

= 0.

Telephone Messaging Alert Tone ftc-13

Telephone Messaging OK Tone ftc-13

Tone to be provide after the dialed digits.

Dial tone

Special Dial Tone

Source tones 1-8 (Valid if FTC package [125] is equipped) pnp-15

NT8D17 tones (0-255) to be used with each phase of the cadence.

Default is no tones (0 0 0 0 0).

Default

Firmware Cadence (FCAD) tables on

page 798 ftc-14

Telephone Status Update Tone

Type of data block

PC Attendant Announcement data block

Special Dial tone After Dialed number data block

Firmware Cadence data block

Flexible Dial Tone Detection data block

Flexible Tones and Cadences data block ftc-13 ftc-13 atan-25.4

ftc-15 ftc-13

814 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

USER

WCAD

WTON

XCAD

XTON

Response

MCAD

RART

RCDT

TBAR

Comment

Master Cadence data block

Route Access Restriction Table data block

REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for

RART.

Route Category Default Table data block

REQ = NEW or OUT is disallowed for

RCDT.

Trunk Barring data block

(NO) YES

0-225

(NO) YES

Pack/Rel

ftc-14

Print Users of this table and tone table values

(tone table value only)

Prompted when REQ = PRT ftc-13

Cadence number in the Firmware Cadence table (FCAD)

Cadence number 0 is reserved for continuous tone and is not changeable.

ftc-14

Define tones associated with the cadence.

Prompted for systems equipped with

Conference /TDS / MF Sender cards.

ftc-14

0-(2)-255

0-(2)-255

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD cadence number)

The default range of a XCAD prompt changes according to the tone-type prompt (e.g.

DBCS, HOWL, etc.) which precedes it.

ftc-19

XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code ftc-19

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 815

LD 56: Flexible Tones and Cadences

816 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 34: LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

Overlay program 57 allows the implementation and administration of the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) software and hardware.

Up to 99 user access codes can be entered at a time for one or more different codes. After entering 99 user access codes, SCH8891 is output.

If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped, up to 7 digits are allowed for Flexible

Feature Codes. Otherwise, a maximum of 4 digits can be entered.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

FFCT

CEPT - REP*

ALL

- CODE

- ADMN

- AFTO

- AREM

- ASRC

- ATDA

- ATDD

Response

aaa

FFC xx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES 0-9

(NO) YES aaaa

ADMN xxxx

AFTO xxxx

AREM xxxx

ASRC xxxx

ATDA xxxx

ATDD xxxx

Comment

Request

Type of data block

Customer number associated with this function

Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone

Conference European Des Postes Tel defaults

Replacement for the * in the CEPT default codes

Remove all Flexible Feature Codes (only prompted when REQ = OUT).

Specific Flexible Feature Code mnemonic to remove

(only prompted when ALL = NO).

Set-based Administration sequence code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

DSN Flash Precedence code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Automatic Set Removal code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Automatic Set Relocation code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Autodial Activated Enter Flexible Feature Code

Autodial Deactivated code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 817

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

- BNRD

- CCFA

- CCFD

- CDRC

- CFDD

- CFHO

- CFWA

- CFWD

Prompt

- ATVF

- ATVM

- ATVP

- AUTH

- AVNR

- AWUA

- AWUD

- AWUV

- BNRA

- CFWV

- COND

- CPAC

Response

ATVF xxxx

ATVM xxxx

ATVP xxxx

AUTH xxxx

AVNR xxx

AWUA xxxx

AWUD xxxx

AWUV xxxx

BNRA xxxx

BNRD xxxx

CCFA xxxx

CCFD xxxx

CDRC xxxx

CFDD xxxx

CFHO xxxx

CFWA xxxx

CFWD xxxx

CFWV xxxx

COND xxxx

CPAC xxxx

Comment

DSN Immedicate Precedence code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

DSN Priority Precedence code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

DSN Flash Override Precedence code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Authorization code Enter Flexible Feature Code

DSN Routine Call code Enter Flexible Feature Code.

Where xxx = 0-999

Automatic Wake Up Activate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Automatic Wake Up Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Automatic Wake Up Verify code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Busy Number Redial code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Busy Number Redial Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Customer Call Forward code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Customer Call Forward Deactivate code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

CDR Charge Account code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Call forward destination deactivation Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Call Forward/HUNT Override via FFC code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Call Forward All Calls Activate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Call Forward All Calls Verify code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Conference Diagnostics code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Call Park Access Code Enter Flexible Feature Code

818 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- CWGD

- C6DS

- DEAF

- DPVS

- ELKA

- ELKD

- EOVR

- FDIS

- GHTA

- GHTD

- GRPF

- - GRCL

- HIDN

- HOLD

- ICFA

- ICFD

Prompt

- CPP

- CPPO

- CPRK

- CSHF

- CWGA

Response

CPP xxxx

CPPO (*82) xxxx

CPRK xxxx

CSHF xxxx

CWGA xxxx

CWGD xxxx

C6DS xxxx

DEAF xxxx

DPVS xxxx

ELKA xxxx

ELKD xxxx

EOVR xxxx

FDIS xxxx

GHTA xxxx

GHTD xxxx

GRPF xxxx xxxx

HIDN xxxx

HOLD xxxx

ICFA xxxx

ICFD xxxx

Comment

Calling Party Privacy code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Calling Party Privacy Override code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Call Park code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Centrex Switchhook Flash code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Call Waiting Activated code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Call Waiting Deactivated code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Six-Party Conference code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Deactivate Feature code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Data Port Verification code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Electronic Lock Activate code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Electronic Lock Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Enhanced Override code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Forced Disconnect code Enter Forced Disconnect code

Group Hunt Termination Allowed code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Group Hunt Termination Disallowed code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Group Call code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Group Call List number (configured in LD18).

Hospitality Identification (Hospitality Management) code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Permanent Hold code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Internal Call Forward Activate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Internal Call Forward Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 819

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

Prompt

- ICFV

- INST

- HREL

- ICPA

- ICPD

- ICPO

- ICPP

- IMS

- ITXX - - RTXX

- LILO

- MCAN

- MCFA

- MCOM

- MLIO

- MNT

- MNTC

- MSBA

- MSBD

Response

ICFV xxxx

INST xxxx

HREL xxxx

ICPA xxxx

ICPD xxxx

ICPO xxxx

ICPP xxxx

IMS xxxx xxxx xxxx

LILO xxxx

MCAN xxxx

MCFA xxxx

MCON xxxx

MLIO xxxx

MNT xxxx

MNTC xxxx

MSBA xxxx

MSBD xxxx

Comment

Internal Call Forward Verify code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Set based administration Installer code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Hospitality Relocation (Hospitality Management) code

Enter Flexible Feature Code

Intercept Computer Interface Activate code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Intercept Computer Interface Deactivate code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Intercept Computer Interface Override code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Intercept Computer Interface Print code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Integrated Message System access code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

For "1xx' Special Services (up to 4 digits) CO route number for the "1xx" service

Log In-Log Out for 500/2500 ACD sets code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Cancel a Transfer or Conference from a mobile phone.

Enter Flexible Feature Code

Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.

Activate a Conference from a mobile phone. Enter

Flexible Feature Code.

Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.

Complete a Conference or Transfer from a mobile phone. Enter Flexible Feature Code.

Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.

Multi-Language I O code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Enter set-based Maintenance sequence code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Maintenance Access code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Make Set Busy Activated code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Make Set Busy Deactivated code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

820 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

- OVRD

- OCBA

- OCBD

- OCBV

- PCAA

- PCAD

- PCAV

- PGAP

- PGIP

- PGSP

- PLDN

Prompt

- MTGL

- MTRC

- MTRN

- MWRA

- MWUA

- MWUD

- NRDY

OVRD xxxx

OCBA xxxx

OCBD xxxx

OCBV xxxx

PCAA xxxx

PCAD xxxx

PCAV xxxx

PGAP xxxx

PGIP xxxx

PGSP xxxx

PLDN xxxx

Response

MTGL xxxx

MTRC xxxx

MTRN xxxx

MWRA xxxx

MWUA xxxx

MWUD xxxx

NRDY xxxx

Comment

Enables a mobile phone use to toggle between the two parties in a Conference or Transfer. Enter Flexible

Feature Code.

Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.

Malicious Call Trace code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Activate the Mobile Extension transfer feature. Enter

Flexible Feature Code.

Mobile Extension package (412) must be equipped.

Repeat Multiple Wake Up Activated code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Multiple Wake Up Activated code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Multiple Wake Up Deactivated code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Not Ready Activation/Deactivation for 500/2500 ACD sets code

Enter Flexible Feature Code

Override and Priority Override code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Outgoing Call Barring feature code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Outgoing Call Barring Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Verify the Outgoing Call Barring feature code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Personal Call Assistant Activate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Personal Call Assistant Deactivate code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Personal Call Assistant Verify code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Answer Parallel Paging code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Initiate Parallel Paging code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Initiate Serial Paging code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Pilot DN code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 821

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

Prompt

- - USE - - LSNO

- - HTYP - -

CFWI - - MQUE

Response

aaaa nnnn aaa

(NO) YES aaaa

- PONW

- PUDN

- PUGR

- PURN

- RCFA

- RCFD

- RCFV

- RDLN

- RDNE

- RDSN

- RDST

- RGAA

- RGAD

- RGAV

- RMST

- RPAN

- RPAX

- SADS

- SAEN

- SALK

- SAUN

- SCPC

PONW xxxx

PUDN xxxx

PUGR xxxx

PURN xxxx

RCFA xxxx

RCFD xxxx

RCFV xxxx

RDLN xxxx

RDNE xxxx

RDSN xxxx

RDST xxxx

RGAA xxxx

RGAD xxxx

RGAV xxxx

RMST xxxx

RPAN xxxx

RPAX xxxx

SADS xxxx

SAEN xxxx

SALK xxxx

SAUN xxxx

SCPC xxxx

Comment

Use (aaaa = GPHT, SCLU, or SCLC) List Number

Hunting Type (aaa = (LIN) or RRB) Call Forward All

Calls have priority over Group Hunting Limit to calls

Queued against pilot DN (aaa = (ALL), 0, 1, or ACTM)

Priority Override Network Wide Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Pick Up DN code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Pick Up Group code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Pick Up Ringing Number code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Remote Call Forward Activate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Remote Call Forward Deactivate code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Remote Call Forward Verify code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Redial Last Number code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Redial Number Erase code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Redial Saved Number code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Redial Store code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Ring Again Activate code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Ring Again Deactivate code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Ring Again Verify code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Room Status code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Radio Paging Answer call code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Radio Paging Access code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

SAR Disable code Enter Flexible Feature Code

SAR Enable code Enter Flexible Feature Code

SAR Lock code Enter Flexible Feature Code

SAR Unlock code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Station Control Password Change code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

822 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

- TFAS

- TNDN

- TRMD

- TRVS

- USER

- USCR

- USTA

- VTLF

- VTLN

Prompt

- SFAC

- SPCC

- SPCE

- SPCU

- SSPU

Response

SFAC xxxx

SPCC xxxx

SPCE xxxx

SPCU xxxx

SSPU xxxx

TFAS xxxx

TNDN xxxx

TRMD xxxx

TRVS xxxx

USER xxxx

USCR xxxx

USTA xxxx

VTLF xxxx

VTLN xxxx

Comment

Secretarial Filtering Access code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Speed Call Controller code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Speed Call Erase code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Speed Call User code Enter Flexible Feature Code

System Speed Call User code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Trunk Answer From Any Station code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

Enter the DN-to-TN conversion utility code Enter

Flexible Feature Code

Terminal Diagnostics code Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Trunk Verification code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Set based administration User code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

User Selectable Call Redirection code Enter Flexible

Feature Code

User Status code Enter Flexible Feature Code

Virtual Office Terminal Logoff Enter Flexible Feature

Code

Virtual Terminal Login Enter Flexible Feature Code

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADMN xxxx

Comment

Enter set-based administration sequence (used to configure trunks)

Pack/Rel

supp-16

ALL (NO) YES Remove all Flexible Feature Codes

Prompted when REQ = OUT.

Choose default (NO) if removing individual

Flexible Feature Codes. Enter the selected code at the CODE prompt and the actual Flexible ffc-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 823

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

AWUD

AWUV

BNRA

BNRD

C6DS

CCFA

CCFD

CDRC

CEPT

Prompt Response Comment

Feature Code when the Flexible Feature Code is displayed.

AREM

ASRC xxxx xxxx

Automatic Set Removal code

Automatic Set Relocation Code

Pack/Rel

supp-16 sr-15

ATDA

ATDD

AUTH

AWUA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Autodial Activated

Autodial Deactivated

Authorization code

Auto Wake Up Activate code ffc-20 ffc-20 baut-15 awu-15

CFBA xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Auto Wake Up Deactivate code

Auto Wake Up Verify

Activate the Busy Number Redial feature

Deactivate the Busy Number Redial feature

Six-Party Conference code

Activate the Customer Call Forward feature

Deactivate the Customer Call Forward feature

CDR Charge Account code awu-15 awu-15 ffc-21 ffc-21 awu-15 ffc-21 ffc-21 chg-15

(NO) YES Conference European Des Postes Tel defaults are to be used.

CEPT is prompted when REQ = NEW. If CEPT

= YES, then all CEPT defaults is set up. The default value for CPP is *67 if Calling Party

Privacy (CPP) package 301 is equipped.

basic-15

(NO)

YES

Call Forward Busy Activated

Call Forward to attendant pldn-15

CFDD

CFHO

CFWA xxxx xxxx

Call forward destination deactivation code

Call Forward/HUNT Override via FFC

Call Forward All Calls Activate code chffc ffc-22 optf-15 optf-15

824 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

COND

CPAC

CPP

CPPO

CPRK

Prompt Response

CFWD xxxx

Comment

Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code

CFWI

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

optf-15

Call Forward All Calls have priority over Group

Hunting

Skip idle station with CFW active

Terminate on idle station with CFW active

Prompted when USE = GPHT optf-15

CFWV

CODE xxxx aaaa

Call Forward All Calls Verify code

Specific Flexible Feature Code (FFC) type.

Where aaaa = mnemonic of FFC type to be changed. (e.g., AUTH, CPP, etc.)

Two actions are required to change a specific

FFC:

1. Enter the mnemonic of the FFC to be changed and then enter

<CR>

.

The mnemonic of the FFC is presented.

2. enter the desired numeric value for the FFC

The Flexible Feature Code can be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits when Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package (150) is equipped.

CODE is prompted when ALL = NO.

Example: to change the Flexible Feature Code for Call Park to 88, respond to CODE as follows:

Prompt Response

CODE CPRK <CR>

CPRK <88CR>

CODE <CR> (No further prompts, return to

REQ)

Forced Disconnect.

Priority Override/Breakin Network wide code.

No further prompts, return to REQ.

ffc-15

FDIS

PONW

<CR> xxxx xxxx

Conference Diagnostics code

Call Park Access Code xxxx Calling Party Privacy

(*82) xxxx Calling Party Privacy Override code xxxx Call Park code optf-15 basic-15 cpk-15 cpp-21 cpp-23 cpk-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 825

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

Prompt Response

CSHF xxxx

CUST xx

Comment

Centrex Switchhook Flash code

Pack/Rel

thf-15

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 cust-15

CWGA

CWGD

DEAF xxxx xxxx xxxx

Call Waiting Activated

Call Waiting Deactivated

Deactivate Feature (deactivates RDLN, RGA,

CFW, GHD and SNA codes.

Same operation as ATDD, CFWD, MSBD,

CWGD and RGAD ffc-20 ffc-20 optf-15

DPVS

ELKA

ELKD

EOVR

FDIS

FFCT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Data port verifications code

Electronic Lock Activate code basic-15 basic-15

Electronic Lock Deactivate code basic-15

Enhanced Override (manual Forced Camp-On followed by Priority Override) povr-20 xxxx Force Disconnect code.

ponw-25.4

(NO) YES Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone

This tone allows users of 500/2500 or multi-line telephones to receive a confirmation tone after activating/deactivating the following features:

• Call Forward activate, deactivate

• Ring Again deactivate

• Store/erase Stored Number Redial

• all Automatic Wake Up codes

• Speed Call store

• any verification code ffc-15

GHTA

GHTD

GRCL

GRPF xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Group Hunt Termination Allowed

Group Hunt Termination Disallowed pldn-15 pldn-15

Group Call List number (configured in LD18).

ffc-20

Group Call ffc-20

826 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

ICPD

ICPO

ICPP

IMS

ICFA

ICFD

ICFV

ICPA

Prompt Response

HIDN xxxx

Comment

Hospitality Identification

HOLD

HREL

HTYP xxxx xxxx

(LIN)

RRB

Permanent Hold code

Hospitality Relocation

Hunting Type

Linear Hunting

Round Robin Hunting

Prompted when USE = GPHT xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Internal Call Forward Activate code

Internal Call Forward Deactivate code

Internal Call Forward Verify code

Intercept Computer Interface Activate code

Pack/Rel

hosp-16 basic-15 hosp-16 pldn-15 icf-19 icf-19 icf-19 icp-10

Intercept Computer Interface Deactivate code icp-10

Intercept Computer Interface Override code icp-10

Intercept Computer Interface Print code

Integrated Message System Access code icp-10 ims-15

INST

ITXX

LILO

LSNO

MCAN xxxx xxxx xxxx nnnn xxxx

Set based administration Installer

For "1xx' Special Services (up to 4 digits) adminset-21 ees-18

Login-Logout for 500/2500 ACD sets

Dialing the number programmed here allows an

ACD Agent on a 500/2500 telephone to toggle between Login and Logout. There is no confirmation tone.

bacd-16

List Number

SCL/SSC/GHT list number

LSNO is prompted when the PLDN response has not been defined as a GPHT pilot DN.

pldn-15

Cancel a Transfer or Conference from a mobile phone.

Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.

mobx-5.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 827

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

Prompt Response

MCFA xxxx

Comment

Activate a Conference from a mobile phone.

Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.

MCOM xxxx

MLIO

MNT xxxx xxxx

Complete a Conference or Transfer from a mobile phone.

Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.

Multi-Language I O

Enter set-based maintenance sequence (used to enable or disable trunks).

Pack/Rel

mobx-5.50

mobx-5.50

mlio-16 mlio-16

MNTC

MQUE xxxx

(All)

0

1

ACTM

Maintenance Access code

Limit to calls queued against pilot DN

No limit to the number of queued calls

No calls to be queued

One call can be queued.

Active Members (Allowed with French Type

Approval (FRTA) package 197) basic-15 supp-16

MSBA

MSBD

MTGL

MTRC

MTRN xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Make Set Busy Activated.

Make Set Busy Deactivated.

ffc-20

Enables a mobile phone use to toggle between the two parties in a Conference or Transfer.

Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.

mobx-5.50

Malicious Call Trace code

Activate the Transfer feature from a mobile phone.

Where xxxx is a 1-4 digit number.

ffc-20 mct-15 mobx-5.50

MWRA

MWUA

MWUD

NRDY xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Multiple Wake Up Activated

Automatic Wake Up (AWU) package 102 must be equipped for the MWU FFC codes to be available.

ffc-20

Repeat Multiple Wake Up Activated.

Multiple Wake Up Deactivated ffc-20 ffc-20

Not Ready activation/deactivation for 500/2500

ACD sets bacd-16

828 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

PURN

RCFA

RCFD

RCFV

RDLN

RDNE

PCAV

PGAP

PGIP

PGSP

PLDN

PONW

PUDN

PUGR

Prompt Response Comment

Dialing the number programmed here allows an

ACD Agent on a 500/2500 telephone to toggle in and out of the Not Ready state like other ACD

Agents. There is no confirmation tone returned.

OCBA

OCBD xxxx xxxx

Activate the Outgoing Call Barring feature

Deactivate the Outgoing Call Barring feature

Pack/Rel

ffc-21 ffc-21

OCBV

OVRD

PCAA

PCAD xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Verify the Outgoing Call Barring feature

Override and Priority Override

Personal Call Assistant Activate code

Personal Call Assistant Deactivate code ffc-21 povr-20 pca-398 pca-398 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Personal Call Assistant Verify code

Answer Parallel Paging code.

Initiate Parallel Paging code.

Initiate Serial Paging code.

Pilot DN

Priority Override Network Wide code.

Pick Up DN code.

Pick Up Group code.

pca-398 ffc-14 ffc-14 ffc-14 supp-15 ponw-25.4

grp-15 grp-15 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Pick Up Ringing Number code.

Remote Call Forward Activate code.

Remote Call Forward Deactivate code.

Remote Call Forward Verify code.

Redial Last Number code.

Redial Number Erase code.

grp-15 optf-15 optf-15 optf-15 lnr-15 snr-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 829

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

RPAN

RPAX

RTXX

SADS

SAEN

SALK

SAUN

Prompt Response

RDSN xxxx

RDST

REP*

REQ xxxx

0-9

<CR>

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

Comment

Redial Saved Number code.

Pack/Rel

snr-15 snr-15 Redial Store code.

One digit replacement for the * in the CEPT default codes.

The CEPT defaults is defined again with this digit used in place of the "*". In addition, the trailing # is omitted. REP* is prompted only when

REQ = NEW and CEPT = YES.

Use <CR> to create only CEPT defaults. Note that digit replacement is blocked for CPP defaults.

No change to defaults ffc-15

Request

Change existing data.

Exit Overlay program.

Create a new data block.

Remove Data Block.

Print Data Block.

ffc-15

RGAA

RGAD

RGAV

RMST xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Ring Again Activate code.

Ring Again Deactivate code.

Ring Again Verify code.

Room Status code optf-15 optf-15 optf-15 rms-15 xxxx xxxx

0-511 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Radio Paging Answer call code

Radio Paging Access code

CO route number for the "1xx" service

SAR Enable code

SAR Lock code

Ring Again Activate code

SAR Unlock code rpa-20 rpa-20 ees-18 sar-20 sar-20 sar-20 sar-20

830 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

TNDN

TRMD

TRVS

TYPE

USCR

USE

Prompt Response

SCPC xxxx

Comment

Station Control Password Change code

SFAC

SPCC xxxx xxxx

Secretarial Filtering Access code

Speed Call Controller code

SPCE

SPCU

SSPU

TFAS xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Speed Call Erase code

Speed Call User code

System Speed Call User code

Trunk Answer From Any Station code xxxx xxxx xxxx

FFC xxxx

GPHT

SCLU

SCLC

Enter the DN-to-TN conversion utility.

Terminal Diagnostics code

Trunk Verification code

Flexible Feature Codes data block

User Selectable Call Redirection

Initiate Group Hunting

SCL/SSC List User

SCL/SSC List Controller

Prompted when the PLDN response has not already been defined.

USER

USTA

VTLF

VTLN xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Set based administration User

User Status code

Virtual Terminal Logoff

Virtual Terminal Login supp-16 basic-15 tvs-15 ffc-15 uscr-19 pldn-15

Pack/Rel

basic-15 ffcsf-15 optf-15 ffc-14 optf-15 optf-15 basic-15 adminset-21 basic-15 arie-25 arie-25

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 831

LD 57: Flexible Feature Codes

832 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 35: LD 58: Radio Paging

Overlay program 58 allows the definition of options on a Radio Paging Access Code (RPAX) basis per customer.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block on page 833

RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block on page 834

RPS: Radio Paging System data block on page 835

TBL: Translation Table access data block

on page 835

RPAX: Radio Paging Access Code data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

SNUM

RPAX

- ROUT

- PANN

Response

aaa

RPAX xx

0-15 nnnn

0-511

(NO) YES

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Radio Paging Access Code data block

Customer number associated with this function

System Number

Radio Paging Access code

Route number

Recorded Paging Announcement

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 833

LD 58: Radio Paging

Prompt

- - RPAR

- INTR

- RANR

Response

0-511 xxxx x...x

- MMDN

- EXTR

- RANR

- BYPS

- OPER

- - INTM

- - TRDN

- PATH

- - TWSP

- - ACPS

- - - ACPT

- DCHR xxxx x...x

(NO) YES aaaa

(0)-1-9

(0)-7

(0)- 16 aaaa aaaa

(YES) NO

(YES) NO xxxx

Comment

Route number that provides the recorded announcement

Treatment for internal calls to pager which is in the rack

Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if INTR = RAN

Meridian Mail DN which provides the recorded announcement or the defined function, prompted if INTR or EXTR = MAIL

Treatment for external calls to pager which is in the rack

Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if EXTR = RAN

Bypass the DN-PSA translation

Operation (aaaa = (AUTO) or MANU)

Internal Mode digit for this RPAX

Transmit this number of digits of caller's DN to paging equipment

Number of digits of caller's DN to paging equipment

Type of path to be provided (aaaa = (NONE), SPCH, or

RNGB)

Two-way Speech Path with a mobile pager allowed (aaaa

= (BOTH) or INT)

Radio Paging System to provide call-in-progress signals

Call Accepted is to be detected

Display Characters

RPCD: Radio Paging Customer Data block

Promp t

Response

REQ aaa

TYPE RPCD

CUST xx

RPTO a...a

MRPS (NO) YES

TRAN aaa

Comment

Request (CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Radio Paging Customer Data block

Customer number associated with this function

Radio Paging Tone (a...a = (SPCL), DIAL, or NONE)

Multiple Radio Paging Systems

Translation type (aaa = (TAB), TWO, THR, FOR, or NO)

834 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Promp t

Response

DNLN 1-(4)-16

PRET (YES) NO

RCRG 0-(6)-20

RCTI 0-(30)-120

RCAL (NO) YES

TBTR 4-(10)-30

Comment

DN Length

Pretranslation for Radio Paging

Number of Ring Cycles when recall to transferring set, before reroute to attendant

Time to wait for a "BUSY' transferring set to become idle

Recall if busy from RPA

Time between two recall attempts (to an SL-1 set)

RPS: Radio Paging System data block

Promp t

Response

REQ aaa

TYPE RPS

CUST xx

SNUM 0-15

PSAL 1-7

RTIM 0-(60)-630

STO 10-(30)-630

NSTO 10-(30)-630

MTO 0-(150)-630

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Radio Paging System data block

Customer number associated with this function

System Number

Paging System Access code Length

Length of the Recall Timer

Length of time required for Speech Path to be maintained in seconds

Length of time required for paging when No Speech Path is required

Length of the Meet-Me Timeout timer in seconds.

TBL: Translation Table access data block

Promp t

Response

REQ aaa

TYPE TBL

CUST xx

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Translation Table access

Customer number associated with this function

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 835

LD 58: Radio Paging

Promp t

Response

SNUM 0-15

DNPS xxxx yyyy

TABT aaa

RANG xxxx...xxxx

Comment

System Number

The DN to be translated and the number of the paging equipment to which the DN is assigned.

Table Type (aaa = DNP, NPS, or UPS)

Print DN Range from the first DN to the second DN

Alphabetical List of Prompts

Prompt Response Comment

ACPS (YES) NO Radio Paging System to provide the call-in-progress signals

Pack/Rel

rpa-15

ACPT (YES) NO Call Accepted is to be detected.

Prompted when PATH = RNGB or SPCH.

If PATH = RNGB or SPCH and ACPT = YES, then ringback is provided only when the call accepted signal is received. Speech path opens when Start-talk signal is received.

If PATH = RNGB and ACPT = NO, then ringback is provided when all the paging information has been entered.

If PATH = SPCH and ACPT = NO, then speech path is provided when all paging information has been sent

(number processed).

BYPS (NO) YES By-pass the DN-PSA translation

YES means that meet-me is not available and that the trunk is accessed directly; the next prompt is RPAX.

Prompted when MRPS = NO.

rpa-15

CUST

DCHR xx xxxx

(PAGE)

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.

rpa-15

Display Characters. Enter X to remove all characters rpa-15

Characters to be displayed on sets with Call Party

Name Display (CPND) activated (replaces the FFC)

(one per page).

DNLN 0 - (4) - 16 DN Length

Prompted if TRAN = NO, TWO, THR, or FOR rpa-15

836 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical List of Prompts

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

DNPS xxxx yyyy The DN to be translated and the number of the paging equipment to which the DN is assigned. This prompt is repeated to allow multiple entries.

Xxxxx

<CR>

The DN to be deleted from the entry

Stops the DNPS prompt rpa-15

EXTR

INTR

INTM

(BUSY)

ATT

SRC1 -

SRC8

RAN

MAIL

(BUSY)

ATT

SRC1 -

SRC8

RAN

MAIL

1-9-(0)

<CR>

MMDN xxxx

Treatment for external calls to pager which is in the rack.

Caller gets busy tone.

Call is routed to the attendant.

Tones or announcement delivered from the TDS card, programmed in Overlay 56.

Call is routed to the RAN machine.

Call is routed to Meridian Mail.

rpa- 23

Treatment for internal calls to pager which is in the rack.

Caller gets busy tone.

Call is routed to the attendant.

Tones or announcement delivered from the TDS card, programmed in Overlay 56.

Call is routed to the RAN machine.

Call is routed to Meridian Mail.

rpa- 23 rpa-15 Internal Mode digit for this RPAX

Default is the mode digit defined in EXTM

Meridian Mail DN which provides the recorded announcement or the defined function, prompted if

INTR = MAIL.

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

rpa- 23

MRPS (NO) YES Multiple Radio Paging Systems

MTO 0-

(150)-630

Length of the Meet-Me Timeout timer in seconds, after the STO or NSTO timer has expired

Where: 0 = no meet-me after STO or NSTO has expired. 10 second resolution.

NSTO 10-

(30)-630

OPER (AUTO)

MANU

Length of time required for paging when No Speech

Path is required. 10 second resolution.

Automatic Operation

Manual Operation rpa-15 rpa-15 rpa-15 rpa-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 837

LD 58: Radio Paging

Prompt Response Comment

PANN (NO) YES Recorded Paging Announcement allowed (denied) for this route

Pack/Rel

rpa-15

PATH (NONE)

SPCH

RNGB

PRET (YES)

NO

PSAL 1-7

No speech path or ringback provided

Speech path provided

Ringback to the calling party provided

Pretranslation for Radio Paging calls Allowed.

Pretranslation for Radio Paging calls Denied.

rpa-15 rpa- 23 rpa-15

RANG xxxx xxxx Print DN Range from the first DN to the second DN.

rpa-15 xxxx

<CR>

Print this DN.

Print all DNs

DNs are those listed in the Radio Paging (RPA) translation table. Prompted when TABT = DNP

RANR x...x

Paging System Access code length

Number of digits that are to be used to identify individual paging devices

Route number that provides the recorded announcement, prompted if EXTR = RAN or if INTR

= RAN, where:

• x...x = 0-511 for Large System and CS 1000E

• x...x = 0-127 for Small System, CS 1000S, MG

1000B and MG 1000T rpa- 23

RCAL (NO) YES Recall if busy from RPA.

RCRG 0-(6)-20

X

Number of ring cycles when recall to transferring set, before reroute to attendant.

Where: 0 = use value entered in response to CFNA prompt in LD 15

Reroute to attendant (that is, no recall attempts to transferring set).

rpa-15 rpa-15

RCTI

REQ

0-(30)-120 Time to wait for a "BUSY' transferring set to become idle. After this time the call is routed to the attendant.

rpa-15

CHG

END

NEW

Request

Change existing data block.

Exit Overlay program.

Create a new data block.

rpa-15

838 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical List of Prompts

Prompt Response

OUT

PRT

Remove data block.

Print data block.

Comment

ROUT 0-511

RPAR 0-511

Pack/Rel

Route number of the trunk route connected to this paging system.

Route must be defined as PRA in LD 14 and 16.

rpa-15

The route number where the recorded announcement is provided from.

Route must be defined as RAN in LD 16.

rpa-15

RPAX nnnn

<CR>

Radio Paging Access Code

Tis prompt is repeated to allow multiple entries.

Stop RPAX prompt.

Access Codes must previously be defined in LD 57.

rpa-15

RPTO

RTIM

(SPCL)

DIAL

NONE

Radio Paging Tone, which is to be provided after the

RPAX/RPAN

Special dial tone

Normal Dial tone

No tone rpa-15

0-(60)-630 Length of the Recall Timer (in seconds) after the STO or NSTO timer has expired

Where: 0 = no timeout limit. 10 second resolution rpa-15

SNUM 0-15 rpa-15

STO 10-

(30)-630

System Number

Prompted when MPRS = YES

Length of time required for Speech Path to be maintained in seconds. 10 second resolution.

rpa-15

TABT rpa-15

TBTR

TRAN

DNP

NPS

UPS

Table Type

Print the DN-Paging System Access (PSA) entries

Print the unused PSA codes

Print the used PSA codes

Prompted when TYPE = TBL

4-(10)-30 Time between two recall attempts (to an SL-1 set)

(TAB)

TWO

THR

FOR

Translation type

Translation lookup table

Last two digits of DN

Last three digits of DN

Last four digits of DN rpa-15 rpa-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 839

LD 58: Radio Paging

Prompt Response

NO

Comment

No translation (DN sent as PSA code)

Prompt is not given if MRPS = YES. TRAN is then forced to TAB.

TRDN (0)-16

Pack/Rel

Transmit this number of digits of the caller's DN to the paging equipment rpa-15

TWSP

TYPE

(BOTH)

INT

RPAX

RPCD

RPS

TBL

Two-way speech path with a mobile pager allowed rpa-15

Both internal and external calls

Internal calls

Prompted when PATH = SPCH

Type of data block

Radio Paging Access Code data block

Radio Paging Customer Data block

Radio Paging System data block

Translation Table access data block rpa-15

840 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 36: LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Overlay program 73 allows the implementation and administration of the Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and

Primary Rate Interface (PRI) software and hardware.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

PRI2 data block ( LPTI)

on page 844

DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI)

on page 846

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI) on page 847

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI) on page 847

Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package 167) on page 849

Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/

JDMI

on page 851

Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on

page 851

Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)

on page 852

Table 11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)

on page 853

Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt on page 854

Signaling category assignment and modification

on page 854

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category on page 856

Table 13: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (In_Out Calls)

on page 860

Table 14: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Incoming Calls) on

page 860

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 841

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Section

Table 15: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Outgoing Calls) on

page 861

Prompts and responses by data block

DDB: Digital data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

MGCLK

- PREF

- - SREF

CEQP

CLKN

- PREF

- - SREF

CC0

PREF CC0

SREF CC0

Response

aaa

DDB sl s c c c

(NO) YES xx xxx xxx xx

1-9

1-9

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block = DDB (Digital data block)

Superloop, shelf, and card number of Clock Controller for IPMG.

Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.

Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.

Secondary Reference card. The Secondary

Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.

Clock Controller Equipped (Small System)

Card number for Clock Controller (Small System)

Primary Reference

Secondary Reference

Card number for Clock Controller 0 (Small System)

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference, Where xx is:

• 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet

• 1-4 for Option 11C main Chassis

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference, Where xx is:

842 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by data block

CC1

PREF CC1

SREF CC1

CC2

PREF CC2

SREF CC2

CC3

Prompt

PREF CC3

SREF CC3

CC4

PREF CC4 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

Response Comment

• 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet

• 1-4 for Option 11C main chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 1

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference, Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP (Intelligent Peripheral) expansion cabinet 1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 2

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 3

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 4

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 843

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

CTRR

TRSH

RALM

BIPC

LFAC

BIPV

SRTK

SRNT

LFAL

AUTO

SRAR

SRGT

SRIM

SRMM

ICS

Prompt

SREF CC4 xx

Response Comment

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the secondary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis

(NO) YES

0-15

1-(3)-128

0-(2)-128

0-(3)-128 Loss of Frame Alignment Counter

1-(3)-4 1-(2)-4 Bipolar Violation maintenance and out-of-service threshold

Slip Rate Tracking mode maintenance 1-(5)-24 1-

(30)-3600

1-(15)-1024 1-

(3)-1024

Slip Rate Non-Tracking

1-(17)-10240

Clock tracking recovery in case of Blue Alarm on reference loops (Small System)

Threshold set

Remote (yellow) Alarm clear threshold

Bipolar violation Count threshold

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

1-(15)- 127

(1)-127

1-(2)-127

0-159

Loss of Frame Alignment maintenance and out-ofservice thresholds

Automatic recovery for frame slippage

Slip Rate Automatic Recovery

Slip Rate Guard Time in minutes

Slip Rate Improvement Monitoring time in minutes

Slip Rate Maintenance Maximum

Multi Purpose Serial Data Link Idle Code Selection

PRI2 data block ( LPTI)

The following prompts and associated responses define the grade of service timers for the DTI card. Group I problems are treated individually. They are bipolar violations, bit error rate (frame alignment) problems and slips.

844 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by data block

FAP

GP2

MNG1

NCG1

OSG1

MNG2

NCG2

OSG2

PERS

CLEA

Group II problems are treated as a group. They are bit 3 of TS0 (far-end out-of-service), bit 6 of TS16 (far-end lost multiframe alignment), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), loss of frame alignment and loss of multiframe alignment.

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

FEAT

LOOP

MFF

ACRC

ALRM

RAIE

SLP

NOOS

BPV

RATS

CRC

OOSC aaa

Response

PRI2

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block = PRI2

LPTI loop aaa

(NO) YES aaa

Feature = LPTI (Loop timer)

Loop number for PRI2

Multiframe Format (aaa = (AFF) or CRC)

Automatic reporting of CRC-4 error

Default alarm handler selected (aaa = (REG) or

ALT)

RAIE Group II alarm state enabled or disabled (NO) YES mc mt oc ot

(NO) YES

Slip count

The grade-of-service feat

Bipolar Violation thresholds 1-(128) or

(122)-255

1-(10)-15 The number of consecutive seconds the firmware has to check and validate error rate condition x...x

Cyclic Redundancy Check threshold [x...x = 1-(201) or (97)-255)]

1-(28)-255 (1)-255 Frame Alignment thresholds

T2 mt dt ct ot nnnM nnnM nnnM nnnS nnnS nnnS

0-(50)-254

0-(100)-256

0-(5)-127

Group 2 error thresholds

Maintenance Guard time Group 1

No New Calls Guard time Group 1

Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1

Maintenance Guard time Group 2

No New Calls Guard time Group 2

Out-of-Service Guard time Group 2

Group 2 Persistence timer and clearance timer

Clearance timer for Group II problems in 2 ms increments

Out -of-Service Counter

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 845

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

DTI2 / JDMI data block ( LPTI)

LCLB

UCFS

TGLR

MFF

CRC

BPV

FAP

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa aaaa

FEAT

LOOP

LPTI loop

CDTI2 (NO) YES

P DIGT (S) abcd

P METR (R) abcd

- EDGE x

- TIME

- MINP

40-(240)-480

(8)-256

Metering (Bits P, X or U are selectable)

Edge of pulse (0 or 1)

Maximum time METR signal can be on

Minimum Pulse length for a Meter Pulse

- PPMD

- ITPP

-MINP

-ITBP

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

8-(72)-248

8-(72)-248

PPM Parameter Download required

Italian PPM option allowed

Minimum time a PPM pulse is active

Idle time between PPM pulses

SASU

MFAO

SZNI

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block = DTI2 or JDMI

Feature = LPTI (Loop timer)

Loop number for DTI2

CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card

Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U are selectable)

SLP

GP2

FRFW

0-8064

YES NO

(NO) YES

Seize Acknowledge Supervision period

Multiframe Alignment Option

PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of MFAS and far-end fault states allowed

Lockout Clear Back option for DID trunks (NO) YES xxxx

(NO) YES

Unequipped Channel Fault Signal

Toggle Reserve bits in Frame 0 aaa Multiframe Format (aaa = (AFF) or CRC)

NC mt dt ct ot Cyclic Redundancy Check error counts

NB mt dt ct ot Bipolar Violation error counts

NF mt dt ct ot Frame Alignment Problem thresholds

NS mt dt ct ot Slip count maintenance threshold

T2 mt dt ct ot Group 2 error thresholds

(NO) YES DTI2 loop is equipped with special Firmware for France

846 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses by data block

Prompt

CISFW

-MFSL

-500L

Response

aaa

(0)-3

(0)-1

Comment

Defines the CDTI2/CSDTI2 card's FW option to be used

The MFS signals transmission level.

ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

FEAT

MAND

MGCLK aaa aaaa

Response

SYTI

0-(15)-1440 sl s c

NCSD

OSGD

OOSC

PERS

DBNC

CLKN

PREF

SREF

CC0

0-(15)-1440

1S-59S

0-(15)-1440

0-(5)-127

0-(100)-254

(10)-32

0-4 l s c c c

1-4 l s c

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type (aaaa = DTI2, PRI2, or JDMI)

Feature = SYTI (System timers)

Maintenance Guard time

Superloop, shelf, and card number of Clock

Controller for IPMG.

Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.

New Call Suppression Guard time

Out-of-Service Guard time in minutes

Out-of-Service Counter

Persistence timer

Debounce timer

Card number for Clock Controller. Where:

• 0-4 is for Small Systems

• l s c is for CS 1000E

Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.

Secondary Reference card. The Secondary

Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.

Card number for Clock Controller 0. Where:

• 0-4 is for Small Systems

• l s c is for CS 1000E

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 847

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

PREF CC0

SREF CC0

CC1

PREF CC1

SREF CC1

CC2

PREF CC2

SREF CC2

CC3

PREF CC3

SREF CC3

CC4

1-9

Response

1-9 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

Comment

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference for the main cabinet

(Option 11C)

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the secondary clock reference for the main cabinet

(Option 11C)

Card number for Clock Controller 1

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 2

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 3

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number for Clock Controller 4

848 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses for setting pad values

Prompt

PREF CC4

SREF CC4

CCGD

CCAR

EFCS xx

Response

xx

0-(15)-1440

0-(15)

(NO) YES

Comment

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis

Card number of DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the primary clock reference. Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet 4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis

Clock Controller free run Guard time

Clock Controller Audit Rate

Enable Fast Clock Switching

Prompts and responses for setting pad values

Prompts and responses DTI / PRI data blocks (with GPRI package

167)

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

FEAT

PDCA

TNLS

DFLT

Response

aaa aaa

PAD

1-16

(NO) YES

1-16

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block = DTI or PRI

Pad Category

Pad Category table. PDCA 1 and PDCA 16 are preconfigured. See the Note below for further details.

Terminal Number List

Use default codes from this pad category table for the following prompts if <CR> is entered at the prompt

Note:

For the following prompts, x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit). You may assign receive and transmit dB values to the following prompts by entering a code which corresponds to a dB value. Code options and their corresponding dB values are listed in

Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 849

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

XEM

BRIL

BRIT

MCM

TOLT

TOLL

DTO

VNL

SATT

ACO

ATO

PRI

PRI2

XUT

Prompt Response Comment

JDMI on page 851. The codes listed in Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/JDMI on page 851 apply for both Rx codes and Tx

codes.

To find the default values for Pad Category 1 when TYPE = DTI or PRI, refer to

Table 9:

Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167)

on page 851. To find default values for Pad Category 1 when TYPE = BRIL, BRIT, DTI2, or PRI2, refer to

Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)

on page 852. To find default values for Pad Category 16 when TYPE = JDMI, refer to

Table

11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)

on page 853.

ONP

DSET x y x y

On-Premises Extension

Meridian Digital Set

OPX

DTT

SDTT

DCO x y x y x y x y

Off-Premises Extension

Digital TIE Trunks

Satellite Digital TIE Trunks

Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks x y x y x y x y x y x y x y x y

1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI Digital TOLL Office trunks

Via Net Loss (Analog TIE)

Satellite Analog TIE Trunks

Analog COT and WATS trunks

Analog TOLL Office trunks

1.5 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk

2.0 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk

Extended Peripheral Equipment Universal Trunk x y x y x y x y x y x y

Extended Peripheral Equipment E&M Trunk

Basic Rate Interface Line

Basic Rate Interface Trunk

M1 CT2 mobility pad value

Toll call pad data on DTI2 card

Toll call pad data on line card (Do not refer to

Table 8:

Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/

BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/JDMI on page 851 for TOLL

values. Refer instead to Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt

on page 854).

850 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses for setting pad values

Table 8: Pad codes and corresponding dB values for DTI/PRI/BRIT/BRIL/PRI2/DTI2/JDMI

Code

0

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

Value (dB)

0.0‡

+1.0‡

+2.0‡

+3.0‡

+4.0‡

+5.0‡

+6.0‡

+7.0

+8.0‡

Code

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Value (dB)

+9.0

+10.0‡

+11.0

+12.0‡

+13.0

+14.0

-1.0‡

-2.0‡

-3.0‡

Code

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

Value (dB)

-4.0‡

-5.0

-6.0‡

-7.0

-8.0

-9.0

-10.0

Idle‡

+0.6‡

Note:

PRI/DTI pad category prompts require GPRI package 167.

Note:

Dagger Represents pad values supported by DTI2 for large systems.

Note:

Small System supports all pad values for DTI2.

Note:

Positive dB represents loss and negative dB represents gain.

Note:

Code 0, pad value 0.0, is equivalent to no pad. It is used for DTA (Data only) and VOD (Voice or Data) call types and supported by DTI2.

Note:

"Idle" means that PCM signals are converted to silence.

Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167)

Connection type

ONP

DSET

Rx code

6

6

Rx PAD (dB)

+6.0

+6.0

Tx code

0

0

Rx PAD (dB)

0.0

0.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 851

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Connection type

OPX

DTT

SDTT

DCO

DTO

VNL

SATT

ACO

ATO

PRI

PRI2

XUT

XEM

BRIL

BRIT

MCM

Rx code

6

0

0

6

6

6

3

3

0

6

0

6

3

0

0

0

Rx PAD (dB)

+6.0

+6.0

+6.0

+6.0

0.0

0.0

+6.0

0.0

+3.0

+3.0

0.0

+6.0

+3.0

0.0

0.0

0.0000

Tx code

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Rx PAD (dB)

Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2)

Rx code Rx PAD (dB) Tx code Rx PAD (dB) Connection type

ONP

OPX

DTT

DCO

NTC

TRC

DTR

VNL

ACO

AFX

ADD

17

4

4

4

4

0

4

4

17

17

0

-3.0

+4.0

+4.0

+4.0

+4.0

-3.0

-3.0

0.0

0.0

+4.0

+4.0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

852 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Connection type

PRI

DSET

BRIL

BRIT

MCM

TOLT

TOLL

Rx code

0

0

0

0

16

0

6

Rx PAD (dB)

0.0

+6.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

Prompts and responses for setting pad values

Tx code

Table 11: Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16) (JDMI)

Rx code Rx PAD (dB) Tx code

VNL

ACO

AFX

ADD

PRI

DSET

BRIL

BRIT

Connection type

ONP

OPX

DTT

DCO

NTC

TRC

DTR

MCM

TOLT

TOLL

+4.0

+4.0

+4.0

+4.0

0.0

+6.0

0.0

0.0

-1.0

-3.0

0.0

0.0

+4.0

+4.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

6

0

0

4

4

4

4

0

0

0

16

4

4

0

15

17

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

30

1

1

- - -

8

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

30

0

0

Rx PAD (dB)

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

- 7.0

Rx PAD (dB)

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

+1.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

+8.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

+1.0

+1.0

- - -

0.0

0.0

- 7.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 853

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt

10

11

12

13

7

8

5

6

9

Code

0

1

2

3

4

+3.0

+2.5

+2.0

+1.5

+5.5

+5.0

+4.5

+4.0

+3.5

dB Value

>= +8.0

+7.5

+7.0

+6.5

+6.0

24

25

26

27

19

20

21

22

23

Code

14

15

16

17

18

-4.0

-4.5

-5.0

-5.5

-1.5

-2.0

-2.5

-3.0

-3.5

dB Value

+1.0

+0.5

0.0

-0.5

-1.0

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

Code

28

29

30

31

32

dB Value

-6.0

-6.5

-7.0

-7.5

-8.0

-8.5

-9.0

-9.5

-10.0

-10.5

-11.0

<= -11.5

Signaling category assignment and modification

What can be entered for the abcd response?

Prompts which show the response abcd, such as IDLE (S), require a four field response to indicate the status of four bits: a, b, c and d. The abcd response represents a trunk supervisory message. The bit states within the message are determined by using the appropriate input.

Allowable inputs for each bit are: 0, 1, C, P, U, X, N. These input options are explained as follows:

• 0 - Bit is a steady state 0 (LOW) e.g. 0000 bits abcd are all steady state 0.

• 1 - Bit is a steady state 1 (HIGH) e.g. 0101 bits b and d are steady state 1 while bits a and c are steady state 0.

• C - Bit is pulsed and present continuously (Continuous pulsing of two or more bits is not allowed.).

854 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Signaling category assignment and modification

• "C" can be entered only for signals that have "C" in front of them when the signal is prompted; the signals are: "C CLRB (S), C CLRB (R) and C SUPO (S) UNUSED"

• "C" cannot be mixed with 0 or 1 or P in the ABCD pattern. Therefore, the entry must look like CXXX, XCXX, etc.

• "C" can be entered only once in the ABCD pattern

• C cannot be entered for the CLRB (R) or CLRB (S) prompts if the pulsed E&M package

(232) PEMD is equipped P - Bit is pulsed. e.g. PC10 bit a is pulsed, bit b is pulsed and sent continuously, bit c is steady state 1 and bit d is steady state 0.

• U - Bit is a don't-care bit (for received signals only) e.g. U10U bits a and d are don't-care bits, bit b is steady state 1 and bit c is steady state 0.

• X - Bit is not to be changed (used in conjunction with Pulsed or Continuously pulsed bit) e.g. XPXX bits a, c and d are unchanged, bit b is set to steady state 1 and bit c is set to steady state 0.

Another input to the signal name prompt is allowed. The other allowable input is:

N - The signal is not required.

How to tell if the signal is pulsing, pulsed or steady?

The signal type is identified by a single character followed by a blank space preceding the signal name. For example, the prompt E SEZ(R) indicates that the Seize signal can be either

Pulsed or steady state. The signal type identifiers are:

• C - Continuous Pulsing, Pulsed or steady state

• E - Pulsed or steady state

• P - Pulsed (single pulse unless otherwise indicated)

• No preceding character indicates the signal is steady state only

Pulsed signals output the TIME prompt. This prompt is described for each of the signals that may prompt it.

How to determine signal direction?

The direction of the signal is indicated by a single character in brackets at the end of the signal name:

• (R) - Indicates that the signal is to be received by the switch

• (S) - Indicates that the signal is to be sent by the switch

For example, E SEZ (R) indicates that the Seize signal can be either Pulsed or steady state and that the signal is to be received by the switch.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 855

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

How to tell if the prompt incoming or outgoing, or both

ABCD prompts correspond to incoming calls, outgoing calls or both incoming and outgoing calls. Prompts IDLE (S) to P RRC correspond to incoming/outgoing calls. Prompts E SEZ (R) to P FRLS (R) correspond to incoming calls. Prompts E SEZ (S) to C SUPO (S) correspond to outgoing calls.

A note about JDMI

For Japan Digital Multiplex Interface (JDMI), the signal requires only a bit signaling. All four bits is allowed to be programmed as the software uses all four bits for call processing. The

JDMI hardware defaults the bcd bits to 101 for sending signaling changes. Therefore, if any changes are made to received signals, the bcd bits must be set to 101; otherwise, these signals do not be recognized.

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

FEAT

SICA

TNLS

DFLT

Response

aaa aaa

ABCD

2-16

(NO) YES

(1)-16

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block

Feature = ABCD

Signaling Category

Terminal Number List

Default signaling category to be used for Default values

Note:

The following prompts have default values for Signalling Category 1 and 16 which can be found in

Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/

PRI2) on page 852.

Prompts for Incoming/Outgoing Calls

IDLE (S) abcd Idle

IDLE (R)

FALT (S)

FALT (R) abcd abcd abcd

Idle

Fault (DTI out-of-service)

Fault (DTI out-of-service)

856 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category

Prompt

P RRC (S)

- TIME

Response

abcd Register Recall

Comment

10-(100)-630 Time of RRC (S) in milliseconds

TIME (0)-1920

Prompts for Incoming Calls

Persistence Time required before signal is accepted

E SEZ (R) abcd

- TIME

Seize for voice or data calls from a non-SL-1

16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000

Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration

SEZD (R)

- SEZV (R) abcd

P CALL (R) abcd

- TIME abcd Seize for data calls between SL-1s

Seize for voice calls

Signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk

1-(2)-15 1-(8)-15

SEZA (S)

- TIME abcd

50-80-90

PRCS (S) abcd

WNKS (S) abcd

P WNKS (S) abcd

Pulse on time, pulse off time

Seize Acknowledgment

Time delay prior to sending SEZA

PRCS

Wink Start

Wink Start

- TIME 10-(220)-630 Time for P WNKS (S)

P DIGT (R) abcd Decadic pulses

NRCV (S) abcd

P EOSF (S) abcd

Number Received

End of Selection Free

- TIME

- P EOSB

(S)

- - TIME

(100)-150 abcd

(100)-150

P OPC (R) abcd

- TIME

- TIME

64-(128)-192

Time for EOSF (S)

End of Selection Busy

Time for EOSB (S)

Operator Calling

Time of OPCA (R) pulse

16-(96)-1000 16-(160)-1000

Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration

- REPT (1)-5

CONN (S) abcd

E CON (S) abcd

Number of OPCA (R) pulses

Connect

Connect

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 857

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

- TIME

Response

Connect

Comment

10-(150) 630 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments

CONN (R) abcd

P BURS (S) abcd

P BURS (R) abcd

- TIME

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking

64-(128)-192 Time for BURS (R) pulse

CLRB (S) abcd

C CLRB (S) abcd

- TIME

Clear Back

Clear Back

10-(600)-2000 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments

- P RCT (S) abcd

- - TIME

Release Control

100-(150) 300 Time value is stored in 10 ms increments

- - P RCOD

(S) abcd Release Control Originating party Disconnect

- - - TIME 150

P OPRS (R) abcd

- TIME xxxx yyyy

P NXFR (S) abcd

P ESNW (S) abcd

P CAS (S) abcd

Timer value in milliseconds is fixed

Operator manual recall

Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS (R)

Network Transfer

ESN Wink

Centralized Attendant

CLRF (R)

- SOS abcd abcd

Clear Forward

Special Operator Signal

P BRLS (S) abcd

- TIME

Backward Release

10-(600)-2000 Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments

P FRLS (R) abcd

- TIME

Forward Release

16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration

Prompts for Outgoing Calls

E SEZ (S) abcd

- TIME 10-(150)-630

Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1

Time of pulse length in 10 ms increments

SEZD (S) abcd Seize for Data calls

- SEZV (S) abcd

SEZA (R) abcd

Seize for Voice calls

Seize Acknowledgment

858 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category

Prompt

- TIME

Response

xxx

Comment

Delay time for the SEZA signal (xxx = 50, 80, 90, (150), or

800)

WNKS (R) abcd

- TIME

Wink Start

20-(140)-500 20-(290)-500

Minimum and maximum length of WNKS (R) pulse

P WNKS (R) abcd

- TIME

Wink Start

16-(136)-504 16-(288)-504

Minimum and maximum length of P WNKS (R) pulse

P EOS (R) abcd

- TIME

End of Selection

(64)-320 64-(256)-320

Length of EOS (R) pulse

CONN (S) abcd

CONN (R) abcd

E CONN (R) abcd

- TIME

Connect

Connect

Connect

16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000

P OPRC (R) abcd

P BURS (S) abcd

Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments

Operator Recall for special services

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking

P BURS (R) abcd

- TIME 64-(128)-192

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking

Time for BURS (R) pulse

CLRB (R) abcd

C CLRB (R) abcd

- TIME

Clear Back

Clear Back

16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

- P RCTL (R) abcd

- - TIME

Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments

Release Control

96-(128)-320 96-(256)-320

P NXFR (R)

- TIME abcd

P ESNW (R) abcd

P CAS (R) abcd

CLRF (S) abcd

(0)-800

Time stored in 8 ms increments

Network Transfer

ESN Wink

Centralized Attendant Service

Clear Forward

Time in milliseconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 859

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

- SOS

Response

abcd

P FRLS (S) abcd

C SUPO (S) abcd

Special Operator Signal

Comment

Forward Release

- TIME 10-(600)-2000 Only prompted for pulsed signals

P BRLS (R) abcd Backward Release

- TIME 16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

Time of pulse length in 8 ms increments

Complex Supervision to Operator Signal used for KD3 signaling. Note that the input for a must be C.

Table 13: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (In_Out Calls)

IDLE (S)

IDLE (R)

FALT (S)

FALT (R)

TIME

P RRC (S)

In/Out Calls SICA 1

1001

1001

1101

1101

0

UNUSED

SICA 16

1101

1101

0101

0101

0

UNUSED

Table 14: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Incoming Calls)

SICA 1 SICA 1 SICA 16 Incoming

Calls

E SEZ (R)

SEZD (R)

SEZV (R)

P CALL (R)

SEZA (S)

TIME

PRCS (S)

P WNKS (S)

TIME

P DIGT (R)

NRCV (S)

0001

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

150

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

SICA 16

0101

Incoming

Calls

CONN (R)

UNUSED P BURS (S)

UNUSED P BURS (R)

UNUSED C CLRB (S)

UNUSED P RCTL (S)

P RCOD (S)

UNUSED P OPRS (R)

PXXX P NXFR (S)

220 P ESNW (S)

PXXX P CAS (S)

UNUSED CLRF (R)

0001

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

0101

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

860 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses for ABCD signaling category

Incoming

Calls

P EOSF (S)

P EOSB (S)

P OPCA (R)

E CONN (S)

SICA 1

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

0101

SICA 16 Incoming

Calls

UNUSED SOS (R)

UNUSED P BRLS (S)

UNUSED P FRLS (R)

0101

SICA 1

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

SICA 16

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

Table 15: Default values for Signaling Categories 1 and 16 (Outgoing Calls)

Outgoing Calls

E SEZ (S)

SEZD (S)

SEZV (S)

SEZA (R)

P WNKS (R)

TIME

P EOS (R)

CONN (S)

E CONN (R)

P OPRC (R)

P BURS (S)

P BURS (R)

C CLRB (R)

P RCTL (R)

P NXFR (R)

P ESNW (R)

P CAS (R)

CLRF (S)

SOS (R)

P FRLS (S)

P BRLS (R)

SICA 1

0001

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

UNUSED

UNUSED

0001

0101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

0101

0101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

1101

UNUSED

UNUSED

SICA 16

0101

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

PXXX

136 288

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

UNUSED

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 861

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

500L

ACO

ACRC

ADD

AFX

ALRM

Response

(0)-1

Comment

ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level.

The prompt appears when only CISFW is set to MFA.

The transmission level can be set to the following values:

0 (default) = -7.3 DB

1 = -3.5 DB

Pack/Rel

x y

<CR>

(NO)

YES

Analog COT and WATS trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14

No reporting of CRC-4 error

Automatic reporting of CRC-4 error during transmission

ACRC is printed only for PRI2 loops and if

MFF = CRC.

euro-20 x y

<CR> x y

<CR>

(REG)

Analog Direct Inward Dial trunks. Where x =

Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14

Analog Foreign Exchange trunks. Where x =

Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14

Regular firmware alarm handler (RAI transmission is controlled by software) dti/pra-14

862 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

ATO

Prompt

BIPC

BIPV

Response

ALT

Comment

Alternate firmware alarm handles (Immediate transmission of RAI by firmware)

An error rate less than 10 is reported as a

Group 1 alarm message.

Pack/Rel

x y

<CR>

0-(2)-128

Analog Toll Office trunks. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Bipolar violation Count threshold

This is the maximum number of times a DTI/

PRI loop can be taken out of service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.

Refer to the Digital Trunk Interface

maintenance NTP or the PRI and DCHI maintenance NTP for details.

If "0" is entered, there is no limit on number of times trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.

The method of bit rate monitoring depends on the loop configuration: dti/pra-14

1. For DTI mode: bipolar violation threshold

2. For PRI mode with D2, D3, or D4 framing format: bipolar violation threshold

3. For PRI mode with Extended Superframe

Format (ESF): Cyclic Redundancy

Check (CRC) threshold

1-(3)-4 1-(2)-4

Bipolar Violation maintenance and Out-of-

Service threshold

This is the maximum number of times a DTI/

PRI loop can be taken out of service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually. Refer to the Digital Trunk Interface maintenance

NTP or the PRI and DCHI maintenance NTP for details.

dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 863

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

BPV

BPV

Prompt Response Comment

If “0” is entered, there is no limit on number of times trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.

The method of bit rate monitoring depends on the loop configuration:

1. For DTI mode: bipolar violation thresholds

2. For PRI mode with D2, D3, or D4 framing format: bipolar violation thresholds

3. For PRI mode with Extended Superframe

Format (ESF): Cyclic Redundancy

Check (CRC) thresholds

Pack/Rel

1-(128)-255 1-(122)-255

Bipolar Violation Maintenance and Out-of-

Service thresholds. The values entered are multiplied by 16 to obtain the actual count, giving an actual range of 16-4080.

dti/pra-14

NB mt dt ct ot

Bipolar Violation error counts. Where:

• NB = Error count values are in the range 1-

(205)-255

• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)

• (default = 10S)

• dt = No new data calls threshold time

(NNDC) (default = 3S)

• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)

• (default = 3S)

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)

• (default = 1S)

Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:

Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.

Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:

• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments

• 1S–240S = 1 second increments dti/pra-14

864 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

BRIL

BRIT

C CLRB (R)

C CLRB (S)

CCAR

Response Comment

• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments

• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments

Important note: The following requirements must be met:

• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot

• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.

Pack/Rel

x y

<CR> x y

<CR> abcd

N abcd

N

0-(15)

Basic Rate Interface Line. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Basic Rate Interface Trunk. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Clear Back. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

If C CLRB (R) not required, when IDLE would be used abcd-18

Clear Back. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854. If

Clear Back is configured as continuous pulsing then a 100 ms pulse is sent very 333 ms.

If CLRB (S) not required (IDLE signal is used) abcd-18

Clock Controller Audit Rate

The time, in minutes, between normal CC audits. Only programmable on units equipped with 2.0 Mb/s DTI/PRI.

supp-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 865

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

CC0

CC1

CC2

CC3

CC4

Prompt

CCGD

CDTI2

CEQP

Response Comment

Before programming clock controller references, the QPC775 clock controller card(s) must be plugged in, and the switches on the system's QPC441 3 Port Extender appropriately set.

Unless this is done, the PREF and SREF prompts are not given.

Pack/Rel

1-9 Card number for Clock Controller 0 (Option

11C with Survivable IP). Where xx is:

• 1-9 for main cabinet

• 1-4 for Option 11C main chassis sipe-25 xx xx

Card number for Clock Controller 1. Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 1

• 11-14 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 2

• 21-24 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

xx xx

0-(15)-1440

Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 3

• 31-34 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

Card number for Clock Controller 2. Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Survivable IP expansion cabinet 4

• 41-44 for Option 11C chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

supp-15

Clock Controller free run Guard time (in minutes)

(NO)

YES

No CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card

CDTI2/CSDTI2 Card

(NO) YES Clock Controller Equipped dti/pra-14 dti/pra-14

866 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CISFW

CLEA

CLKN

CLRB (R)

CLRB (S)

Response Comment

Prompted only for SL-1 M, MS or S.

Pack/Rel

YES

(NO)

DP

MFS

MFA

0-(100)-256

CISFW defines the CDTI2/CSDTI2 card's FW option to be used.

cist-21

YES means that this loop is CIS DTI trunk. NO means that the given loop must be considered as DTI2.

Prompted with CIST package 221 and CDTI2

= YES.

Non CIS DTI2 signalling protocols on the

NTCG01AA/NTCG02AA or NTCG01AB/

NTCG02AB card.

cismfs-23 cist-24

Dial Pulse CIS signalling protocol on the

NTCG01AA/NTCG02AA card.

Both the CIS Dial Pulse and the CIS MFS signalling protocols on the NTCG01AB/

NTCG02AB. Minimum card vintages are specified.

CIS Firmware type is MFA - which means that the Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling

+ ANI Reception + Firmware Dial Tone

Detection capabilities are supported euro-20

Clearance timer for Group II problems in 2 millisecond increments. CLEA is printed only for PRI2 loops.

xx l s c abcd

N abcd

Card number for Clock Controller (Option

11C) Where: xx = 1-9

Superloop, Shelf, Card number of Clock

Controller supp-18 basic-5.00

Clear Back. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

CLRB (R) not required, when IDLE would be used abcd-14

Clear Back. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 867

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

CRC

Prompt

CLRF (R)

CLRF (S)

CONN (R)

CONN (S)

Response

N

Comment

CLRB (S) not required (IDLE signal is used) abcd

N abcd

N abcd

Pack/Rel

Clear Forward. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

CLRF (R) not required abcd-18

Clear Forward. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

CLRF (S) not required abcd-18 abcd

Connect. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14

Connect. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

x...x

NC mt dt ct ot

Functionality depends on datablock in use.

pri2-14

In the DTI2 and JDM1 datablocks, CRC configures the Cyclic Redundancy Check threshold, where x...x = 1-(201) or (97)-255

In the PRI2 datablock, CRC configures the

Cyclic Redundancy Check error counts.

Where:

• NC = Error count values are in the range 1

- 255

• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).

Default = 10S.

• dt = No new data calls threshold time

(NNDC). Default = 3S.

• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).

Default = 3S.

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS).

Default = 1S.

Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:

Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.

Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:

868 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

C SUPO(S)

CTRR

DBNC

DCO

DFLT

Response Comment

• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments

• 1S–240S = 1 second increments

• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments

• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments

Important: The following requirements must be met:

• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot

• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.

Pack/Rel

abcd

N

(NO)

YES

(10)-32 x y

<CR>

(1)-16

Complex Supervision to Operator signal used for KD3 signalling calls to Special Services with Hold. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Note that the input for the a field must be C.

SUPO not required kd3-20

Clock tracking recovery in case of Blue Alarm on reference loops (Small System).

Software controlled clock reference tracking recovery is disabled in case of Blue Alarm on the reference loops.

Software controlled clock reference tracking recovery is enabled in case of Blue Alarm on the reference loops.

basic-4.50

Debounce timer (in milliseconds) For DTI2 only.

pedm-18

Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.

Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code

(transmit). Response range for x and y is:

0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks

(SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14

Default signaling category to be used for default values.

dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 869

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

DTO

DTT

Prompt

DSET

Response

<CR>

Comment

When REQ = NEW, default is SICA 1 for DTI2 and SICA 16 for JDMI.

Table 9: Default Pad

Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with

GPRI pkg 167)

on page 851 shows the default values for both Signaling Categories 1 & 16.

A carriage return configures default values, according to your configuration:

DTI/PRI - default pad codes from Table 9:

Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1)

(DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167)

on page 851 on

Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values

(PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on

page 851. (PDCA 1). Must be equipped with

GPRI package 167.

BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2 - default pad codes

from Table 10: Default Pad Category 1 values

(PDCA 1) (BRIL/BRIT/DTI2/PRI2) on

page 852 on Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values (PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg

167) on page 851. (PDCA 1)

JDMI - default pad codes from

Table 11:

Default Pad Category 16 values (PDCA 16)

(JDMI)

on page 853 on Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt on page 854. (PDCA

16)

Pack/Rel

x y

<CR> x y

Meridian Digital Set. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

<CR> x y

1.5 Mb/s DTI/PRI Digital TOLL Office trunks.

Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code

(transmit). Response range for x and y is:

0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks

(SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Digital TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on gpri-18

870 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

FAP

Prompt

E CONN (R)

E CONN (S

E SEZ (R)

E SEZ (S)

EDGE

EFCS

FALT (R)

FALT (S)

Response

<CR>

Comment

page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values

Pack/Rel

abcd abcd

Connect. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14

Connect. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14 abcd abcd

Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-18

Seize for voice or data calls to a non-SL-1. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-18

0

1

(NO) YES Enable Fast Clock Switching

EREF option in LD 60 must be chosen to enable this prompt.

abcd

N abcd

Edge of pulse

PPM bit counted when changed from 1 to 0

PPM bit counted when changed from 0 to 1

Fault (DTI out-of-service). For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

If FALT not required dti/pra-14 dti/pra-18 abcd-14 abcd-14

N

Fault (DTI out-of-service). For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

If FALT not required

1-(28)-255 (1)-255

Frame Alignment thresholds dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 871

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

FEAT

Response

NF mt dt ct ot

Comment

Frame Alignment Problem thresholds

Where:

• NF = Error count values are in the range: 1-

(32)-255

• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)

• (default = 4S)

• dt = No new data calls threshold time

(NNDC)

• (default = 1S)

• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)

• (default = 1S)

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)

• (default = 100T)

Pack/Rel

dti/pra-14

Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:

Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.

Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:

• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments

• 1S–240S = 1 second increments

• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments

• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments

Important note: The following requirements must be met: mt = >dt = >ct = >ot

Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.

ABCD

PAD

Feature

ABCD bit signaling category Valid response when TYPE = DTI2 or JDMI. Refer to NTP

553-2911-200 for default ABCD table with suggested values.

Pad category Valid response for all types.

This prompt is not applicable for DPNSS and

DASS2 applications. For DPNSS, the pad values are automatically set to zero (0) for dti/pra-14

872 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

GP2

Prompt

FRFW

Response

LPTI

SYTI

Comment

both transmit and receive. For DASS2, the loss pad values are set to zero (0) for transmit and four (4) for receive.

If TYPE = BRIL or BRIT, then PAD is the only response allowed.

Loop Timers

Valid response when TYPE = DTI2, JDMI or

PRI2.

System Timers and counter (only one set per system)

Valid response when TYPE = DTI2, JDMI or

PRI2.

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES This DTI2 loop is (is not) equipped with special Firmware for France.

dti/pra-18

T2 mt dt ct ot

Group 2 error thresholds

Where:

• T2 = Error count values in range: 1-

(20)-255. The T2 entry defines the maximum time that can occur before software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32,640 msec and rounds them to the closest multiple of 128 msec.

• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)

• (default = 100S)

• dt = No new data calls threshold time

(NNDC)

• (default = 12S)

• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)

• (default = 12S)

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)

• (default = 4S)

Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:

Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.

Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows: dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 873

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

ICS

Prompt

IDLE (R)

IDLE (S)

ITBP

ITPP

LCLB

LFAC

LFAL

Response Comment

• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments

• 1S–240S = 1 second increments

• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments

• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments

Important note: The following requirements must be met:

• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot

• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.

Pack/Rel

0-159 abcd abcd

Multi Purpose Serial Data Link Idle Code

Selection

Loop number for which IDLE PCM code has to be sent Precede loop number with X to remove pra-24 abcd-14 Idle. For information about your response

options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Idle. For information about your response

options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14

8-(72)-248 Idle Time between PPM pulses in milliseconds

(NO)

YES

Italian PPM option denied

Italian PPM option allowed kd3-20 kd3-20

(NO) YES Lockout Clear Back option for DID trunks

0-(3)-128 Loss-of-Frame-Alignment Counter

This is the maximum number of times a DTI/

PRI loop can be taken out-of-service in 24 hours. If this threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.

If "0" is entered, there is no limit on number of times that trunks can be taken out and automatically restored to service.

dti/pra-14

1-(17)-10240 1-(511)-10240 dti/pra-14

874 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

LOOP

LOOP

MAND

MCM

MFAO

MFF

Prompt

MFSL

Response Comment

Loss-of-Frame-Alignment maintenance and out-of-service thresholds for a 24 hour period

The maintenance threshold must be greater than the out-of-service threshold.

Pack/Rel

dti/pra-14 loop card loop

PRI2 Loop number

PRI2 or DTI2 card slot for Option 11C only

DTI Loop number

Must be defined in LD 17.

dti/pra-14

0-(15)-1440 x y

<CR>

YES

NO

<CR> dti2-14

Maintenance guard time (in minutes). For

DTI2 only.

M1 CT2 Mobility Pad value. . Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values mcmo-20

Multiframe Alignment Option

DTI card sets bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of

Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs

(JDMI default)

DTI card do not set bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of

Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs

(DTI2 default)

No change is required.

dti/pra

(AFF)

CRC

(0)-3

Multiframe Format

The prompt appears only if CDTI2 = YES.

CRC4 or Alternate Frame Format can be chosen. In the previous design, this prompt was issued for SDC2 (Option 11C DTI2) loops.

Alternative Frame Format

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC 4). CRC is prompted for Small System. For Large

System, only AFF is supported.

dti/pra-14

The MFS signals transmission level. The prompt appears when CISFW is set to MFS

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 875

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

MGCLK

MINP

MNG1

MNG2

NCG1

NCG2

NCSD

NOOS

Response Comment

or MFA and the CISMFS package is equipped.

The transmission level can be set to the following values:

• (0) = -7.3 db

• 1 = -5.0 db

• 2 = -3.5 db

• 3 = 0 DB

Pack/Rel

sl s c Superloop, shelf, and card location of the

Clock Controller (NTAK20) for the IPMG.

Package 403 (IP Media Gateway) must be enabled.

To remove the configured Clock Controller on a particular IPMG, precede the Prompt arguments with an "X". For example, "MGCLK

Xsl s". Note that the "c" (card) parameter is not required for the removal.

ipmg-5.0

kd3-20 8-(72)-248 Idle time between PPM pulses (in milliseconds) nnnM Maintenance Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M.

dti/pra-14 nnnM nnnM

Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M. No

New Calls

Guard time Group 1 where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15M.

dti/pra-14 nnnS

(NO)

YES

No New Calls Guard time Group 2, where nnn

= 1-(15)-240. Default = 15S.

dti/pra-14

0-(15)-1440 1S-59S

New Call Suppression Guard time in minutes and seconds. For DTI2 only.

dti2-14

The grade of service feat

Enable current grade of service feat

Alternate grade of service feat dti/pra-18

876 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NRCV (S)

NTC

ONP

OOSC

OPX

OSG1

OSG2

OSGD

P BRLS (R)

Response

abcd

N

Comment

Number Received. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

NRCV (S) not required

Pack/Rel

abcd-14 x y

<CR> x

<CR>

0-(5)-127

Non-Transmission Compensated (Analog

TIE). Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit). Response range for x and y

is: 0-26. See DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks

(SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14

On-Premises extension. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14 x y

<CR> nnnM nnnS

Out-of-Service Counter (Counts out-ofservice occurrences since midnight) (DTI disabled) For DTI2 only.

dti2-14

Off-Premises Extension. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values dti/pra-14 dti2-14 Out-of-Service Guard time Group 1, where nnn = 1-(15)-240.

Out-of-Service Guard time Group 2, where nnn = 1-(15)-240. Default = 15S.

dti2-14

0-(15)-1440 abcd dti2-14

Out-of-Service Guard time (in minutes). For

DTI2 only.

Backward Release. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling

abcd-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 877

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

P BRLS (S)

P BURS (R)

P BURS (S)

P CALL (R)

P CAS (R)

P CAS (S)

Response

N

Comment

category assignment and modification on

page 854.

This signal is mutually exclusive with the P

RCTL (R) signal.

P BRLS (R) not required abcd

N abcd

N abcd

Pack/Rel

Backward Release. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

This signal is mutually exclusive with P RCTL

(S) and RCOD (S) signals.

P BRLS (S) not required abcd-18

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

BURS (R) not required abcd-14

N abcd

Bring Up Receiver for L1 networking. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Uses switchhook flash timer for pulse duration time.

BURS (S) not required abcd-14

Signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk. For information about your response

options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-14 abcd

N abcd

Centralized Attendant Service (DTI2 only).

For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

CAS (R) not required abcd-14

Centralized Attendant. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

Pulse time not variable. Prompted for DTI2 only.

abcd-14

878 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

P DIGT (R)

P DIGT (S)

P EOS (R)

P EOSB (S)

P EOSF (S)

P ESNW (R)

P ESNW (S)

Response

N

Comment

CAS (S) not required abcd

N abcd

N abcd

N abcd

Pack/Rel

Decadic pulses. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

DIGT (R) not required abcd-14

Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U).

For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

JDMI default = PXXX

DIGT (S) signal not required abcd-14

End of Selection. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

EOS (R) not required abcd-14

N abcd

N abcd

End of Selection Busy. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

EOSB (S) not required abcd-14

End Of Selection Free. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

EOSF (S) not required abcd-14

N abcd

N

ESN Wink. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

ESNW (R) not required abcd-14

ESN Wink. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854

Pulse time not variable.

ESNW (S) not required abcd-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 879

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

P FRLS (R)

P FRLS (S)

P METR (R)

P NXFR (R)

P NXFR (S)

P OPCA (R)

Response

abcd

N

Comment

Forward Release. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

This signal is mutually exclusive with CLRF

(R) the signal.

P FRLS (R) not required

Pack/Rel

abcd-18 abcd

N abcd

N

Forward Release. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

This signal is mutually exclusive with the

CLRF (S) signal.

P FRLS (S) not required abcd-18

ABCD bits value for received metering pulses.

For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Bits P, X or U are selectable. Only two P bits can be selected. P METR (R) is prompted only when COT and DID trunks are equipped.

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) package 101 is required.

METR (R) signal not required

N must be selected when either a CDTI2 or a

CSDTI2 cards is equipped. These cards do not support PPM.

ppm-14 abcd

N abcd

N abcd

N

Network Transfer. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

NXFR (R) not required abcd-14

Network Transfer. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Pulse time not variable.

NXFR (S) not required abcd-14

Operator Calling. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

OPCA (R) not required abcd-14

880 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

P OPRC (R)

P OPRS (R)

P RCOD (S)

P RCTL (R)

P RCTL (S)

P RRC (S)

P WNKS (R)

Response

abcd

N

Comment

Operator Recall for special services. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854. Minimum three

pulses of 160 milliseconds each

OPRC (R) not required abcd

N abcd

N abcd

Pack/Rel

abcd-14

Operator manual recall. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

OPRS (R) not required abcd-14

Release Control Originating party

Disconnect. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

This signal is another pulsed SL-1 signal sent on incoming trunks when the originating party disconnects first.

RCOD (S) not required abcd-15

N abcd

N

Release Control. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

RCTL (R) not required abcd-14

Release Control. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854

abcd-14

RCTL (S) not required

Prompted when CLRB is unused or is defined the same as IDLE.

abcd

N abcd

N

Register Recall (activated by Malicious Call

Trace). For information about your response

options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

RRC(S) not required abcd-14

Wink Start. For information about your

response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

P WNKS (R) not required abcd-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 881

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

P WNKS (S)

PDCA

PERS

PPMD

PRCS (S)

PREF

Response

abcd

N

Comment

Wink Start (corresponds to a pulsed seize.

For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

acknowledgment).

P WNKS (S) not required

P WNKS (S is prompted when SEZA (S) is not required.

Pack/Rel

abcd-18

1-16

<CR>

Pad Category table (Pad Category Table1 cannot be changed or deleted)

Print all the pad category tables dti/pra-14

0-(100)-254 Persistence timer in milliseconds for far-end problems For DTI2 only.

0-(50)-254 Group 2 Persistence timer and clearance timer (in 2 millisecond increments) dti2-14

(NO)

YES abcd

N

0-159

0-254 l s c

PPM Parameter Download not required

PPM Parameter Download required kd3-20

PRCS. For information about your response

options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

PRCS (S) not required abcd-14

Primary Reference

Source loop for clock controller (Large

System format)

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Source from a Basic Rate Interface Trunk

(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) (Large

System format)

Where: dti/pra-14 fnf-25

• l = 0-156 (loop number must be zero or a multiple of four)

• s = 0-1

• c = 0-15

The SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

882 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PREF CC0

PREF CC1

Response

1-9

<CR> l s c c loop

1-9

1-4

0-254

<CR>

X

Comment

Source card for clock controller (Option 11C format)

The response must be the same as CLKN above, or <CR> for free run.

If source is a Basic Rate Interface Trunk

(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

If REQ = NEW and carriage return is entered, then Primary Reference is free-run mode.

If REQ = CHG, then Primary Reference is not changed.

The loop or card must already be defined in

LD 17 (prompt DLOP). Use <CR> for freerunning mode. Free-running mode uses loop

255. If <CR> is used, you are not prompted for the Secondary Reference (SREF).

Precede with X to remove

Pack/Rel

Prompted only if the l-s-c entered against

CLKN is a MISP loop. The SILC TN (for primary reference) is accepted in sl-s-c format.

Primary Reference card that accepts the SILC card number for MISP loops. For non MISP loops, the card number must match the card number entered against the MGCLK prompt.

basic 5.0

ipmg-5.0

Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller zero (non-Small System). The clock controller derives its primary clock pulses from the loop selected here.

Card number containing the primary clock reference for the main cabinet (Option 11C) dti/pra-14

Card number containing the primary clock reference for the main chassis

If a BRI trunk (BRIT) is the reference source then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

ipmg-5.0

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Primary Reference remains at current setting

Primary Reference reverts to the free-run mode fnf-25 loop Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one. The response is the loop from dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 883

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

PRI

Prompt

PREF CC2

PREF CC3

PREF CC4

Response

0-254

<CR>

X xx

Comment

which the clock controller is deriving its primary clock pulses. (Large System)

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Primary Reference remains at current setting

Primary Reference reverts to the free-run mode

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis

Pack/Rel

fnf-25 sipe-25 basic-1.0

xx xx

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

xx x y

<CR>

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

1.5 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

884 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PRI2

RAIE

RALM

RATS

REPT

REQ

SASU

SATT

Response

x y

<CR>

Comment

2.0 Mb/s PRI/DTI trunk. Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values

Pack/Rel

gpri-18

(NO)

YES

1-(3)-128

Disable reporting of RAIE Group II alarm state with continuous CRC error information reporting

Enable reporting of RAIE Group II alarm state with continuous CRC error information reporting euro-20

Remote (yellow) Alarm clear threshold

This is the number of "remote alarm clear" signals received in 24 hours. If the threshold is reached the DTI/PRI must be restored to service manually.

dti/pra-14

1-(10)-15

(1)-5

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

0-32256 x y

<CR>

The number of consecutive seconds the firmware has to check and validate error rate condition.

dti/pra-18

Number of OPCA (R) pulses dti/pra-14 dti/pra-14 Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create a new data block

Remove data block

Print the specified data block

Seize Acknowledge Supervision period (in milliseconds)

DTI2 default = 1920; JDMI default = 4992 sasu-18

Satellite Analog TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 885

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

SDTT

SEZA (R)

SEZA (S)

SEZD (R)

SEZD (R)

SEZD (S)

SEZV (R)

Response

x y

<CR>

Comment

Satellite Digital TIE Trunks. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values

Pack/Rel

gpri-18 abcd abcd-14

N abcd

N abcd

Seize Acknowledgment. For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

SEZA (R) not required

Seize Acknowledgment. For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

SEZA (S) not required abcd-14 abcd

N abcd

Seize for voice or data calls from a non-SL-1.

For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

abcd-18

Seize for data calls between SL-1s. For information about your response options,

refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

SEZD (R) signal not required abcd-18 abcd-14

N abcd

N

Seize for data calls (only recommended for

SL-1 to SL-1 applications). For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

SEZD (S) not required

Seize for voice calls. For information about

your response options, refer to Signaling category assignment and modification on

page 854.

SEZV (R) signals not required abcd-14

886 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SEZV (S)

SICA

SLP

Response

abcd

N

Comment

Seize for voice calls (only recommended for

SL-1 to SL-1 applications). For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

SEZV (S) not required

Pack/Rel

abcd-14

2-16

1

<CR>

Signaling Category

If REQ = PRT, then 1 must be input to print default table

If REQ = PRT, all signaling tables are printed abcd-14 mc mt oc ot Slip count. Where:

• mc = Maintenance threshold slip count 1-

(5)-255

• mt = Maintenance threshold time default =

24H

• oc = Out-of-service threshold slip count 1-

(30)-255

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time default =

1H

Threshold times must be one of the following: dti/pra-14 nnnnT, nnnS, nnnM, or nnH

Where:

• nnnn is an integer

• T,S,M, or H show the increments of use

The time values are as follows:

• nnnnT = 20 millisecond increments (nnnn =

20-5000)

• nnnS = 1 second increments (nnn = 1-240)

• nnnM = 1 minute increments (nnn = 1-240)

• nnH = 1 hour increments (nn = 1-24)

NS mt dt ct ot

Slip count maintenance threshold. Where:

• NS = Error count values are in the range: 1-

(20)-255

• mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT) dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 887

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

SOS

Prompt

SREF

Response Comment

• (default = 30S)

• dt = No new data calls threshold time

(NNDC)

• (default = 10S)

• ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)

• (default = 10S)

• ot = Out-of-service threshold time (OOS)

• (default = 6S)

Response options for mt, dt, ct, ot:

Threshold time entries end in one of the following letters: T, S, M, H. These letters indicate the time increment to be used.

Response options for mt, dt, ct and ot are as follows:

• 20T–5000T = 20 millisecond increments

• 1S–240S = 1 second increments

• 1M–240M = 1 minute increments

• 1H–24H = 1 hour increments

Important note: The following requirements must be met:

• mt = >dt = >ct = >ot

• Values must be within the ranges specified for the response options above. Values outside those ranges such as 0s are not supported.

Pack/Rel

abcd

N

0-159

0-254

Special Operator Signal. For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Undefined

Prompted when OPRC = N.

abcd-14

Secondary Reference. Prompted when PREF is not free-run.

Source loop for clock controller (non-Option

11C format)

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric dti/pra-14 fnf-25

888 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SREF CC0

X c

Response

l s c

1-9

<CR>

Comment

Source from a Basic Rate Interface Trunk

(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) (non-

Option 11C format)

Clock controller card for CS 1000E.

Where:

• l = 0-156 (loop # must be 0 or a multiple of

4)

• s = 0-1

• c = 0-15

The SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

Source card for clock controller (Option 11C format)

If source is a Basic Rate Interface Trunk

(BRIT) S/T Interface Line Card (SILC) then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

The loop or card must already be defined in

LD 17 at the DLOP prompt.

Free-running mode. Loop 255 is reserved for free-running mode.

Precede with X to remove

Pack/Rel

ipmg-5.0

Secondary Reference card. The Secondary

Reference card cannot match the card number entered against the MGCLK or PREF prompts.

ipmg-5.0

loop

0-254

1-9

1-4

Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller zero (non-Small System). The response is the loop from which the clock controller is deriving its secondary clock pulses.

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric dti/pra-14 fnf-25 sipe-25 Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the secondary clock reference for the main cabinet (Option 11C)

Card number containing the secondary clock reference for the main chassis ipmg-5.0

If a BRI trunk (BRIT) is the reference source then the SILC must have DSL 0 defined as a trunk and CLOK = YES in LD 27.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 889

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

SREF CC1

SREF CC2

SREF CC3

Response

<CR>

X

Comment

Secondary Reference remains at current setting

Secondary Reference reverts to the free-run mode loop

0-254

<CR>

X xx xx

Pack/Rel

Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one. The response is the loop from which the clock controller is deriving its secondary clock pulses. (Large System) dti/pra-14

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Secondary Reference remains at current setting

Secondary Reference reverts to the free-run mode

The clock controller prompts only appear for clocks which are valid for the machine type being configured.

The prompts only appear if the system is in a valid state for the definition of the DTI2/PRI2/

BRIT clock controller data (example, the 1.5

Mb/s DTI clock references must be unused or in a free-run mode).

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 11-19 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

1

• 11-14 for Option 11C Chassis fnf-25 sipe-25 basic-1.0

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 21-29 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

2

• 21-24 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

xx Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 31-39 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

3

• 31-34 for Option 11C Chassis sipe-25 basic-1.0

890 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

SREF CC4

SRIM

SRMM

SRNT

SRTK

Response

xx

Comment

Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/

SILC containing the primary clock reference.

Where xx is:

• 41-49 for Option 11C IP expansion cabinet

4

• 41-44 for Option 11C Chassis

Pack/Rel

sipe-25 basic-1.0

(1)-127

1-(2)-127

Slip Rate Improvement Monitoring time (the amount of time in minutes before returning trunks either to service or to the SRGT state)

After the tracking or non-tracking mode frame slippage out-of-service threshold is exceeded, the slip rate is monitored for improvement.

If the non-tracking maintenance threshold exceeds SRMM or fewer times in the duration of this timer, then the trunks are returned to service. Otherwise, this timer is reset and monitoring continues.

dti/pra-15

Slip Rate Maintenance Maximum

Number of times the Slip Rate exceeds the maintenance limit while waiting for Slip Rate improvement during the time window specified at the SRIM prompt.

dti/pra-14

1-(15)-1024 1-(3)-1024

Slip Rate Non-Tracking mode maintenance and out-of-service thresholds

These are frame slip rate thresholds for the non-tracking mode.

The first value is the maintenance threshold in seconds. The second value is the out-ofservice threshold in seconds, the amount of time in which 10 slips occur.

dti/pra-14

1-(5)-24 1-(30)-3600

Slip Rate Tracking mode maintenance (in hours) and out-of-service thresholds (per hour)

These are frame slip rate thresholds for the tracking mode.

The first value is the maintenance threshold or the elapsed time (in hours) between frame slips. The default is 1 slip in 5 hours. The second value is the out-of-service threshold dti/pra-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 891

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

Prompt

SZNI

TGLR

TIME

TIME

Response Comment

or the number of slips per hour. The default is 30 slips in 1 hour.

(NO) YES PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of

MFAS and far-end fault states allowed

(NO) YES Toggle reserves bits in Frame 0, Timeslot 0.

Prompted for JDMI loops. jdmi-14

Pack/Rel

1-(2)-15

1-(8)-15

Pulse on time

Pulse off time

(100)-150 Time for EOSF (S) (in milliseconds)

64-(128)-192

Time of OPCA (R) pulse (in milliseconds) abcd-14 abcd-14

10-(100)-630 emct-20

Time of Register Recall signal timer {RRC (S)} in milliseconds. This defines the flash duration for 2.0 Mbit DTI trunks.

64-(128)-192 abcd-14

Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds)Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds) xxxx yyyy Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS

(R) (in milliseconds). Where: abcd-14

• xxxx = 8-(48)-2040

• yyyy = xxxx-(128)-2040 abcd-14 abcd-14 50 80 90 (150) 800

Delay time for the SEZA signal (in milliseconds)

20-(140)-500 20-(290)-500

Minimum and maximum length of WNKS

(R) pulse (in milliseconds).

64-(128)-192

Length of BURS (R) pulse (in milliseconds)

40-(240)-480

Maximum time METR signal can be on (in milliseconds) abcd-14 abcd-14

892 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

(0)-800

Comment

Milliseconds

Prompted when the abcd bits entered in response to the CLFR (S) prompt are different from the abcd bits of the IDLE signal

Pack/Rel

abcd-14

100-(150) 300

Time value is stored (in multiples of

10 milliseconds)

150 Timer value in milliseconds is fixed

(64)-320 64-(256)-320

Length of EOS (R) pulse (in increments of

8 milliseconds)

96-(128)-320 96-(256)-320

Time (stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds)

10-(220)-630

Time for P WNKS (S) (in increments of 10ms)

16-(96)-1000 16-(160)-1000

Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration (in increments of 8 ms)

10-(150) 630 abcd-18

10-(600)-2000

Prompted for pulsed signals (in increments of

10 ms)

10-(600)-2000

Prompted for pulsed signals (in increments of

10 ms)

Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)

16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

Minimum and maximum acceptable pulse duration (in increments of 8 milliseconds)

10-(150)-630

Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)

16-(136)-504 16-(288)-504

Minimum and maximum length of P WNKS

(R) pulse (in increments of 8 milliseconds) abcd-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 893

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

TRC

Prompt

TNLS

TOLL

TOLT

Response

16-(56)-1000 16-(296)-1000

Comment

Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 8 milliseconds)

16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

10-(600)-2000

Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 8 milliseconds)

Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length (in increments of 10 milliseconds)

16-(296)-2000 16-(960)-2000

Only prompted for pulsed signals. Pulse length(in increments of 8 milliseconds)

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

Terminal Number List (for the PRT command) dti/pra-14 do not print the list of trunk TNs using the requested table (pad category or SICA) following the table number.

Print the list of trunk TNs using the requested table (pad category or SICA) following the table number.

x y x y x y

Toll call pad data on line card. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x = 0 - 31 and y = 8-39.

The values entered are pad values to be used for the 500/2500 TN on the line card connected to the DTI2 call. Valid codes and their corresponding dB values are listed in

Table 12: Default pad values for TOLL prompt

on page 854.

chtl-21

Toll call pad data on DTI2 card. Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

chtl-21

Transmission Compensated (Analog TIE).

Where x = Rx code (receive) and y = Tx code

(transmit). Response range for x and y is:

0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks

(SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

dti/pra-14

894 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

VNL

Prompt

TRSH

TYPE

UCFS

Response

<CR> Initial values

0-15

Comment Pack/Rel

Threshold set Enter this number in LD 17 when defining a DTI/PRI loop. Use X0-15 to remove TRSH.

dti/pra-19

Note:

The LD 17 DLOP/TRSH associated with this LD 73 TRSH must be removed first.

Precede with X to remove.

BRIL

BRIT

DDB

DTI

DTI2

JDMI

PRI

PRI2 abcd x y

Type of data block

Basic Rate Interface Line data block with

Basic Rate Interface Line Application (BRIL) package 235

Basic Rate Interface Trunk data block with

Integrated Service Digital Network BRI Trunk

Access (BRIT) package 233.

dti/pra-14

1.5 Mb/s DTI data block

1.5 Mb/s DTI with International 1.5/ 2.0 Mb/S

Gateway (GPRI) package 167 data block

2.0 Mb/s DTI data block dti/pra-14 grpi-18

Japan Digital Multiplex Interface data block

(not supported on Option 11C) jdmi-12

1.5 Mb/s PRI data block with International 1.5/

2.0 Mb/s Gateway (GPRI) package 167

2.0 Mb/s PRI data block grpi-18

Unequipped Channel Fault Signal - ABCD bits to be sent on unequipped channel.

The default is 1101. Allowable input for each of the four fields is 0 or 1. For information about your response options, refer to

Signaling category assignment and modification on page 854.

Via Net Loss (Analog TIE). Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

dti/pra-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 895

LD 73: Digital Trunk Interface

XUT

Prompt

XEM

Response

<CR> Initial values x y

<CR> x y

Comment Pack/Rel

Extended Peripheral Equipment E&M Trunk

(Analog TIE trunk). Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

DTI2 / PRI2 / JDMI data blocks (SYTI)

on page 847 for more information about x and y codes.

Initial values gpri-18

Extended Peripheral Equipment Universal

Trunk (Analog CO trunk). Where x = Rx code

(receive) and y = Tx code (transmit).

Response range for x and y is: 0-26. See

Table 9: Default Pad Category 1 values

(PDCA 1) (DTI/PRI with GPRI pkg 167) on

page 851 for more information about x and y codes.

gpri-18

896 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 37: LD 74: Digital Private Network

Signaling System Link

Overlay program 74 allows data blocks for Digital Private Network Signaling System Number 1 (DPNSS1) and Digital Access Signaling System Number 2 (DASS2) protocols to be created or modified.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

LSSL

RATE

S2

HTYP

DDSL

DTSL

SIGL

DDCS

DTCS

PRIV

- SIDE

- MWIF

- SAT

- - NT2

L2_RST

(0)-1 aaaa

0-n

0-159

DA x...x

0-159

(YES) NO aaa a...a

(NO) YES

1-(26)-100

(YES) NO

Response

aaa aaaa xx a...a

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block (aaaa = DDSL, DTSL, LSSL, LSRC, or LSVC)

Low Speed Signaling Link

Baud rate for Low Speed Signaling Link (aaaa =

(EXT), 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,

19K, 56K, or 64K)

Switch 2 mode

Hardware Type (aaaa = DCHI, DCHX, or MSDL)

DPNSS link number

Digital Trunk Signaling Link number

Level 2 Signaling (DASS2)

Loop for DPNSS Channel Switch

Digital Trunk Channel Switch loop number

Private link

Side for Termination (aaa = (AET) or BNT)

Message Waiting Interface (a...a = (STD) or ISDM]

Satellite

Post retransmission acknowledgment delay.

Indicates if Layer 2 can bereset during a system initialize.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 897

LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link

Prompt

FLOW CNTL

- BRST PARM

- - REPL PARM

CNTL

- ALRM

- CNTR

(NO) YES xx x

Response Comment

Flow Control

Burst Parameter set on public network (xx = (0) 4, 8,

16, or 32)

Replenishment Parameter set on public network (x =

1, 2, 4, or 8)

(NO) YES Change Control timers and counters aaa pp mm cc Alarm timers (aaa = AIS, DAI, FAE, HER, LOI, TBF, or

TSF; pp = persistence time; mm = monitor time; cc = repeat threshold time) aaa x Counter threshold (aaa = CRT, TMT, or SCT; x = threshold value)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ALRM

Response

AIS pp mm cc

Comment

Alarm timers.

For the following response alternatives, pp = Persistence time, mm = Monitor time and cc = Repeat count threshold.

Alarm Indication Signal

Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-

(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(4)-15.

DAI pp mm cc

FAE pp mm cc

Distant Alarm Indication

Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-

(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(5)-15.

Frame Alignment Error

Where: pp = 0-(2)-15 seconds, mm = 0-

(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(4)-15.

HER pp mm cc High Error

Where: pp = 0-(1)-15 minutes, mm = 0-

(1)-24hours and cc = 0-(10)-15.

LOI pp mm cc Loss Of Input

Where: pp = (0)-15 seconds, mm =

(0)-24hours and cc = (0)-15.

TBF pp mm cc Transmit Buffer Full

Where: pp = 0-(5)-15 seconds, mm =

(0)-24hours and cc = 0-(1)-15.

Pack/Rel

dpnss1/dass2-16

898 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

TSF pp mm cc

Comment

Transmit Signaling Failure

Where: pp = (0)-15 seconds, mm =

(0)-24hours and cc = (0)-15.

Pack/Rel

BRST PARM

CNTL

CNTR xx

Burst Parameter set on public network.

dpnss1/dass2-16

You may respond with: (0), 4, 8, 16, or

32.

dpnss1/dass2-16

(NO) Do not change Control timers and counters

Change Control timers and counters YES

Counter threshold

CRT 0-(120)-255 Channel Reset Threshold

TMT 0-(50)-255 Test Message Threshold

SCT 0-(20)-255 Stop Count Threshold

If 255 is entered, the threshold is set to infinity.

dpnss1/dass2-16

MPT

1-(100)-255

Monitoring Period Timer: during which

NMT messages must be received before overload is detected.

NMT

512-(2048)-

16384msec

OTH 1-(5)-255

Number of Messages Threshold: the number of messages to be received by

Layer 3 before overload is detected. This threshold can only be exceeded after the

MPT time has elapsed.

Note:

If NMT = 255 then Overload

Protection mechanism disabled, regardless of OTH/DTH.

Overload ThresHold: the number of times overload must be detected before any action is taken on the link. Once this threshold exceeded, the link is temporarily disabled for LDT seconds.

Note:

If OTH = 255 and if NMT < 255,

Overload is monitored - Link is permanently disabled when DTH is exceeded, as long as DTH is not 255

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 899

LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link

Prompt

DDCS

DDSL

DTCS

DTSL

Response Comment Pack/Rel

LDT

16-(32)-1024sec

Note:

If OTH < 255 & NMT < 255, Overload is monitored, link is disabled for LDT time, and brought back into service.

Link Disable Timer: defines the amount of time in seconds that must elapse before the link is brought back into service, after having been disabled due to overload.

DTH 1-(5)-255 xxx

Disable THreshold value: the limit of the number of times the link can be disabled.

When this threshold is exceeded, the link is permanently disabled.

Note:

If DTH and OTH = 255 and NMT <

255, Overload Protection is disabled.

Loop for DPNSS Channel Switch Where xxx is:

DDCS is prompted when TYPE =

DDSL.

dpnss1/dass2-16

• 0-159

• 1-9, 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 (Small

System)

• 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-45 for CS

1000S sipe-25 basic-2

0-n

0-159

0-159

DPNSS link number. Where:

• n = 15 for NT5K35AA or NT5K75AA in standard mode (S2 = 0)

• n = 159 for NT5K75AA in expanded mode (S2 = 1)

DDSL: is prompted when TYPE =

DDSL.

dpnss1/dass2-16

Digital Trunk Channel Switch loop number

Prompted when TYPE = DTSL. (Large

System) dass2-16

Digital Trunk Signaling Link number.

dass2-16

900 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

Prompted when TYPE = DTSL. (Large

System)

FLOW CNTL

(NO) YES

HTYP

L2_RST

LSSL

MWIF

NT2

DCHI

DCHX

MSDL

(YES) NO xx

(STD)

ISDM

1-(26)-100

Pack/Rel

Flow Control FLOW CNTL is prompted if

PRIV = NO.

dpnss1/dass2-16

Hardware Type

DPNSS1, DASS2 or APNSS link configured with the NT5K35 DCHI card or on the NT5K75 DCHI card in standard mode.

dpnss_es-21

DPNSS1 or DASS2 link configured with the NT5K75 DCHI card in the expanded mode.

DPNSS1, DASS2 or APNSS link configured with the MSDL card.

Indicates if Layer 2 can bereset during a system initialize. On certain systems, for example System Y and SX2000, established calls would be released if the

Layer 2 is reset during an initialize. This prompt should only be set to NO when using NTAG54AA type Dual DCH

Daughter board on a NTCK43AB DCH

PRI card.

ida- 23

Note:

If this Option is set to NO on an

NT6D11 type card, the card would be left disabled after the initialize.

Low Speed Signaling Link

Link number identifying the D-channel to be used for APNSS.

dpnss1-18 samm-20 Message Waiting Interface

Standard message waiting interface

Plessy ISDX switch with remote message notification

Minimum post retransmission acknowledgment delay.

dpnss_es-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 901

LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link

Prompt

PRIV

RATE

(EXT)

110

150

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19K

56K

64K

REPL PARM x

REQ

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

S2

(YES)

NO

Response Comment

This is the minimum period of time after the expiry of NL and NTI that the system waits for acknowledgment before reporting a retransmission failure to level

3 in 20 ms units.

For a Private link to another PBX

For a link to the public exchange

Not prompted for APNSS.

Pack/Rel

dpnss1/dass2-16

Baud Rate for Low Speed Signaling Link dpnss1/dass2-18

110 bits per second

150 bits per second

300 bits per second

600 bits per second

1200 bits per second

2400 bits per second

4800 bits per second

9600 bits per second

19 kilobits per second

56 kilobits per second

64 kilobits per second

Replenishment Parameter set on public network.

You may enter: 1, 2, 4, or 8.

Request

Change existing data block.

Exit Overlay program

Create a new data block

Remove data block

Print data block dpnss1/dass2-16 basic-1

Switch 2 mode (the mode selected with the switch S2 located on the NT5K75AA

DCHI card) dpnss1/dass2-16

902 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

(0)

Response

1

SAT

SIDE

SIGL

TYPE

(NO) YES

(AET)

BNT

DA

DDSL

DTSL

LSSL

LSRC

LSVC

Comment

NT5K35AA DCHI card or NT5K75AA

DCHI card operating in standard mode

NT5K75AA DCHI card operating in expanded mode

Satellite

A Side (Exchange Termination)

B Side - PBX Termination

Pack/Rel

dpnss_es-21 dpnss1/dass2-16

Level 2 Signaling (DASS2)

Type of data block

DPNSS Link (NT hardware) data block

Digital Trunk Signaling Link (GPT hardware) data block. Not supported on

Small System.

Low Speed Signaling Link data block.

Required for APNSS.

Low Speed Channel data block.

Accepted when REQ=PRT.

Low Speed Virtual Channel data block.

Accepted when REQ=PRT.

dpnss1/dass2-16 dpnss1/dass2-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 903

LD 74: Digital Private Network Signaling System Link

904 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 38: LD 79: Virtual Network Service

Overlay program 79 allows the implementation of Virtual Network Services feature.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

VNDN

CONF

Response

aaa aaa xx

Request

Type of data block

Customer number

Comment

1-4000 n...n

Number of contiguous VNS Directory Numbers

When REQ = OUT and VNDN = XALLVNDNS., the switch outputs the following:

REMOVE ALL VDN BLOCKS?

The following prompt then appears:

(NO) YES (Deny) Confirm intent to remove all VDN blocks

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CONF

(NO)

YES

Comment

Confirm

Deny intent to remove all VDN blocks

Confirm intent to remove all VDN blocks

CONF is prompted if REQ = OUT and VNDN =

XALLVNDNS.

CUST xx

REQ

CHG

Pack/Rel

vns-22

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 basic-1

Request

Change existing data block basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 905

LD 79: Virtual Network Service

Prompt Response

DIS

END

ENL

NEW

OUT

PRT

Comment

Disable a block of contiguous VDN to prevent the use of a VDN in this block

Exit Overlay program

Enable a block of contiguous VDN

Create Virtual Network Service data block

Remove Virtual Network Service data block

Print Virtual Network Service data block

Pack/Rel

TYPE

VNDN

VNS

Type of data block

Virtual Network Service data block basic-1

1-100 n...n

Number of contiguous VNS Directory

Numbers, and first VNS DN x...x

Individual VDN. This entry is accepted if REQ =

NEW, OUT, DIS or ENL.

1-4000 xxxxxxx

Number of contiguous VDNs and first VDN. This entry is accepted if REQ = NEW.

XALLVDNS Remove all VNS data blocks. This entry is accepted if REQ = OUT.

VNDN is reprompted until a carriage return is entered.

vns-16

906 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 39: LD 81: Features and Station

Print

Overlay program 81 is used to print a list or count of telephones with selected features. It also allows last service change date information to be printed.

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) is indicated by an "M" following FEAT

(when TYPE = MCN, SCN, MCR, or SCR).

Prompts and responses

HMDN

SGRP

RNPG

LSNO

NCOS

ZONE

REQ

Prompt

CUST

DATE

PAGE

DES

FEAT

NZON

Response

aaa xx xx a...a

(NO) YES d...d

aaaa

0-1023 x..x

0-999 xx yy xx yy xx yy

0–255 0–8000

0–255 0–8000

<CR>

Comment

Request (aaa = LST, CNT, or END)

One Customer or a range of Customer numbers

Print data from activity date specified (You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)

Data printed on a per page basis

1-6 alphanumeric character Office Data

Administration System

Features requested (see FEAT responses in

Alphabetical list of prompts on page 908).

Numbering zone or range of numbering zones

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Home Directory Number

Station Group

Ringing Number Pick Up Group

List Number

Network Class of Service

MG 1000B Zone Range of Zones All Zones

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 907

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt Response

- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

NACT

<CR>

(NO) YES

Starts printing

Next Activity

Comment

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADJUST PAPER THEN

<CR>

<CR>

Comment

Starts printing

Prompted when PAGE = YES

CUST xx xx

DATE

<CR> dd mmm yyyy

Pack/Rel

basic-1

One Customer or a range of Customer numbers associated with this function as defined in LD 15

All Customers basic-1

Print data from activity date specified. Where: basic-1

DES

ACT

<CR> d...d

• dd = day (0-31)

• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)

• yyyy = year

Print data from last Activity date.

Disregard date restrictions.

dddd d+

+

<CR>

1-6 alphanumeric character Office Data

Administration System (ODAS) Station

Designator

Print data for stations with specific DES.

Print data for stations with a DES starting with d.

Print data for all stations with no DES.

Print data for all stations.

odas-1

ECL

ERL

Emergency Caller Location. List or count the

TNs by ECL.

Emergency Response Location. List or count the TNs by ERL.

basic-5.00

basic-5.00

908 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FEAT

AAA

AAD

AAG

AAK

ABDA

Response

2000

3000

500

3900

ISET

Comment Pack/Rel

Features requested

Enter a specific feature mnemonic or one of the following for groups of features: ALL, COS,

DNK, SETS, SCL, RNP or 500.

FEAT is repeated until <CR> is entered.

All M2000 telephones.

basic-1 dset-7

M3000 Touchphone

500/2500 type telephone tset-7 basic-1 basic-24 M3901, M3902, M3903, M3904, M3905 telephones

Print both MNL and DIP telephones. 2500 type telephones are requested by DTN entry.

All IP telephones basic-3.0

aab-1

ABDD

Automatic Answerback Allowed

Automatic Answerback Denied

Answer call from Agent key

Automatic Answerback Key

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Allowed

Abandoned call record and time to answer

Denied supp-18

ACD

ACNT

ADD

ADL

ACD in calls key

Assignment of activity codes allowed

Automatic Digit Display equipped

Autodial key bacd-1 bacd-13 ddsp-1 optf-1

AGN AGT ACD Agent ACD Agent's key

AGTA

AGTD

ACD services for 500/2500 telephone Allowed

ACD services for 500/2500 telephone Denied bacd-1 bacd-16

AHA AHD

ALL

Automatic Hold Allowed Automatic Hold Denied supp-10

All features

When REQ = LST, only the features actually programmed on telephones are listed along with basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 909

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt

BNRA

BNRD

C6A

C6D

CA

CAS

CCBA

CCBD

CCOS

CCSA

CCSD

AUTD

AUTR

AUTU

AWC

BFEA

BFED

BFS

Response Comment

the associated TN. Features not listed are

RNPK, DIP and MNL.

When REQ = CNT, features available in the system software are listed even if they are not programmed on any telephone. Not listed are

RNPK, 500, 2500, SL-1, 2000, and 3000.

AMG

AO3 AO6

ARC

ACD Answer/Monitor Emergency call key

Three-party conference key Six-party conference key Attendant Recall key

Pack/Rel

supp-14 basic-1 basic-1

ARHA

ARHD

ASCA

ASCD

ASP ATW

Audible Reminder of Held Call Allowed Audible

Reminder of Held Call Denied basic-14

Alarm Security Allowed Alarm Security Denied ohas-18

ACD Answer Supervisor call key ACD Call

Waiting time indication key iani-14

Authorization Code Denied Authorization Code

Restricted Authorization Code Unrestricted ssau-19

ACD Calls Waiting display key

Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement Allowed

Boss Secretary Filtering Enhancement Denied ffcsf-24

Busy Forward Status key

Busy Number Redial Allowed

Busy Number Redial Denied

Six-Party Conference Allowed

Six-Party Conference Denied

Combined No Hold Conference and Autodial bfs-20 ffc-21 basic-10

Centralized Attendant Service

Collect Call Blocking Allowed Collect Call

Blocking Denied

Controlled Class of Service key Controlled

Class of Service Allowed Controlled Class of

Service Denied basic-14 casm-1 ccb-21 ccos-7

910 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CDCA

CDCD

Comment

Conferee Display Count Allowed Conferee

Display Count Denied

ZBDA

ZBDD

ZBDR

ZBDO

ZBDV

Station Activity Records Allowed Station Activity

Records Denied

Converged Desktop Multimedia restricted

Converged Desktop Multimedia only Converged

Desktop Multimedia and voice

Pack/Rel

basic-23 mct-20 sip-4.00

CFHA

CFHD

List/count sets with CFHA CLS List/count sets with CFHD CLS

CFTA CFTD Call Forward by Call Type Allowed basic-10 Call

Forward by Call Type Denied

CFW

CFXA

CFXD

Call Forward key

Call Forward number to External DN Allowed

Call Forward number to External DN Denied cfho-20 basic-1 basic-10

CHD

CHG

CHL

Combined No Hold Conference and Direct Hot

Line basic-14

Charge Account key fca-1

Combined No Hold Conference and Hot Line list basic-14

CLT Callers List key basic-25.4

CLTA CLTD Network Call Trace Allowed Network Call Trace

Denied basic-17

CMSA

CNAA

CNAD

CNDA

CNDD

Command and Status link Allowed

CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format

Allowed.

CLASS Calling Name Denied.

csl-8 cname- 23

Call Party Name Display Allowed Call Party

Name Display Denied cname- 23 cpnd-10

CNIA CNID Call Number Identification Allowed Call Number

Identification Denied pra-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 911

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt Response

CNTA

CNTD

Comment

Network ACD Countdown Allowed Network

ACD Countdown Denied

CNUA

CNUD

CNUS

COS

Pack/Rel

nacd-15

CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format

Allowed.

cnumb- 23

CLASS Calling Number Denied. CLASS Calling

Number Single Data Format Allowed.

cnumb- 23 cnumb- 23

CPFA

CPFD

CPN

Print stations with Class of Service restrictions.

These are telephones with equipped with C6A,

C6D, CMSA, CNDA, CNDD, CTD, CUN, DSI,

FRE, FR1, FR2, NCOS, SFA, SFD, SRE, TLD,

TTA, TTD, UNR and VMA.

basic-1 povr-15 Forced Camp-On from another set Allowed

Forced Camp-On from another set Denied

Display Calling Party Number key cpnd-10

CPTA

CPTD

Forced Camp-On to another set Allowed Forced

Camp-On to another set Denied

CRA CRD Continuous Ring Allowed Continuous Ring

Denied ffc-15 basic-14

CS

CSD

Combined No Hold Conference and Speed Call

Conferee Selectable Display key basic- 23 basic-1 CTD CUN Conditionally Toll Denied Conditionally

Unrestricted

CWA CWD

CWT

Call Waiting Allowed Call Waiting Denied Call

Waiting key basic-1

DAG

DAPA

DAPD

DCFW

DDGA

DDGD

ACD Display Agents key

Display of Access Prefix Allowed Display of

Access Prefix Denied bacd-1 isdn-24

Default call forward for Phantom TNs Report includes Virtual and Host terminals phtn-20 arie-25

DN Display on other set Allowed DN Display on other set Denied sdd-21

912 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DRG1

DRG2

DRG3

DRG4

DSH

DSI

DSP

DTA

DPU

DPUA

DPUD

DRC

DRDA

DRDD

Response

DDS

Comment

Digit Display allowed

DDV Data port Verification denied

DELA DELD Dealer Allowed Dealer Denied

DIG

DIP

DLO

DNAA

DNAD

DNDA

DNDD

DNK

Dial Intercom Group

Dial Pulse telephone (500 type)

Pack/Rel

ddsp-1 amp-5 ohol-20 di-1 basic-1

Digital Long line COS ftc-16

ANI DN used as the customer Listed Directory number

Outgoing CDTI2/CSDTI2 route used as DN in

ANI message cist-21 cpnd-13 Dialed Name Display Allowed Dialed Name

Display Denied

Telephones with MCN, MCR, SCN, and SCR keys basic-1

DN Pickup key

DN Pickup Allowed DN Pickup Denied grp-1 dcp-12

DID Route Control

Distinctive Ringing by Directory Number

Allowed. Distinctive Ringing by Directory

Number Denied.

basic-14 edrg-24

Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (high/fast)

Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (high/slow)

Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (low/fast)

Digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (low/slow)

Digital Short line COS

Data Service access or IS Server TN allowed

Digit Display key

Data set drng-7 ftc-16 xcti-16 ddsp-1 basic-5

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 913

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt Response

DTN

Comment

Digitone dial telephone (2500 type)

DWC

ELA ELD

ACD Display Waiting Calls key

Erase Lists Allowed Erase Lists Denied

Pack/Rel

basic-1 bacd-1 basic-25.4

EOVR

FAXS

FBA FBD

FEDA

FEDD

Enhanced Override key

Facsimile servers povr-15 faxs-18

Call Forward Busy Allowed Call Forward Busy

Denied optf-1

Far End Disconnect Allowed for Digital Cordless

Set. Far End Disconnect Denied for Digital

Cordless Set.

mc32-25

FITA FITD Flexible Incoming Tones Allowed Flexible

Incoming Tones Denied

FLXA FLXD Flexible voice/data TN allowed Flexible voice/ data TN denied

FNA FND Call Forward No Answer Allowed Call Forward

No Answer Denied basic-14 digital_set-2

2 basic-1

FR1 FR2

FRE

Fully Restricted class 1 Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted basic-1

(FRA) FRU

FRD

Flexible Registration class of service Allowed

Flexible Registration class of service Upgrade

Flexible Registration class of service Denied basic-5.00

FRN French language display for M2317 dlt2-12

FTTC FTTR

FTTU

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Conditional

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections Restricted

Flexible Trunk to Trunk Connections

Unrestricted basic-23 basic-23 basic-23

GHD

GPU

GPUA

GPUD

Group Hunt Denied key

Group Call Pickup key

Group call Pickup Allowed Group call Pickup

Denied grp-1 dcp-12 dcp-12

914 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

GRC Group Recall key

Comment

HBTA

HBTD

HFA HFD

Hunt by call Type Allowed Hunt by call Type

Denied

Handsfree Allowed M2616 Handsfree Denied

M2616

LOGIVOX Telephone Hold key HLD

HOTD

HOTL

HPR

Enhanced Hot Line, Direct entry method

Enhanced Hot Line, List entry method

High Priority station

Pack/Rel

grp-1 supp-10 arie-14 supp-10 hot-10

HSPA

HSPD

HTA HTD

HTL

I2004

IAMA

ICDA ICDD

ICF

Hospitality Management Allowed Hospitality

Management Denied

Hunting Allowed Hunting Denied

Hot Line

IP Phone 2004

ICP Answering Machine Denied/Allowed

Internal CDR Allowed Internal CDR Denied

Internal Call Forward key basic-1 hosp-16

IMA

IMM

IPNA

IRA IRD

IMS or IVMS Allowed

Immediate

Intercept Position Allowed

Incoming Ringing line preference Allowed

Incoming Ringing line preference Denied

IRGA

KLS

Interrogation Set Allowed

Key/lamp Strip icp-14 basic-1

LDTA LDTD Line Disconnect Tone allowed Line Disconnect

Tone denied basic-17 basic-1 hot-10 basic-25 icp-16 icdr-10 icf-19 ims-2 xct1-16 icp-14

1sel-4

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 915

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt Response

LLC1 LLC2

LLC3 LLCA

LLCN

Comment

Line Load Control level 1 Line Load Control level

2 Line Load Control level 3 Line Load Control

Allowed Line Load Control off

Pack/Rel

11c-10

LMPN

LMPX

LNA LND

LNK

LOL

LPA LPD

Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN vmba-24

Red LED on Meridian Modular Telephone reflects the status of the mailbox associated with the PDN and non-PDNs

1nr-8 Last Number Redial Allowed Last Number

Redial Denied Last Number Redial Key

Long Line Class of Service

Message Waiting lamp Allowed Message

Waiting lamp Denied xops-20 mwc-1 mwc-1

LPR

LSPK

Low Priority station

Loudspeaker key basic-1 ohol-20

LVXA LVXD LOGIVOX Telephone Allowed LOGIVOX

Telephone Denied

MBXD

MBXA

Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind Transfer

Denied. Multi-Party Operation (MPO) Blind

Transfer Allowed. Multi-Party Operations (MPO) package 141 must be equipped to enter MBXD or MBXA.

supp-10 mpo-21

MCBY

MCBN

MCD MCK

MCN

MCR

Set linked to a MICB line card. Set linked to a non-MICB line card.

basic-25

Message Center DN Message Cancellation Key

Multiple Call Non-Ringing DN

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance

Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).

mwc-1 basic-1

Multiple Call Ringing DN

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance

Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).

basic-1

916 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MCRA

MCRD

Comment

Multiple Call Arrangement Allowed Multiple Call

Arrangement Denied

Pack/Rel

supp-15

MCTA

MCTD

MIK

Malicious Call Trace Allowed Malicious Call

Trace Denied

Message Indication Key mct-10 mct-19 mwc-1

MINA MIND Message Intercept Allowed Message Intercept

Denied mint-15

MLNG

MMA MMD

Language Selection

Multimedia Allowed Multimedia Denied basic-25.4

ngen-24 ngen-24 basic-1 MNL Manual service

MMA MMD Multimedia Messaging Allowed Multimedia

Messaging Denied

MON TN(s) Monitored by at least one BFS key

MPTA

MPTD

Modem Pass Through Allowed Modem Pass

Through Denied

MRA MRD Message Registration Allowed Message

Registration Denied

MSB Make Set Busy key bfs-20 basic-5.50

mr-10

MTA

MWA MWD

MWK

Maintenance set Allowed

Message Waiting Allowed Message Waiting

Denied Message Waiting key msb-1

MSID MSIA Make Set Busy Improvement Denied Make Set

Busy Improvement Allowed basic-5.50

basic-1 mwc-1 sdd-21 NAMA

NAMD

NCOS

NDD

Name display on other set Allowed Name display on other set Denied

Network Class of Service (COS)

No Digit Display ncos-1 ddsp-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 917

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt

NSVC

NUID

NZON

OBV

OCBA

OCBD

OLA

OLD

ONS OPS

OSN

Response

NHC

Comment

No Hold Conference

NIA NID Incoming non-ringing line preference Allowed

Incoming non-ringing line preference Denied

Notification Key Lamps NKL

NRCA

NRCD

NRD

Forced Camp-On night class restriction Allowed

Forced Campon night class restriction Denied

ACD Not Ready key

Pack/Rel

basic-14

1se1-4

1se1-4 drng-7 supp-16 bacd-1

NROA

NROD

NRWA

NRWD

Priority override night class restriction Allowed

Priority override night class restriction Denied

Call Waiting Night class restriction Allowed Call

Waiting Night class restriction Denied supp-16 supp-16

OVB

OVDA

OVDD

OVR

ACD Night Service key for Supervisor Control bacd-12

Network User Identifier. Temporary IP Users

Numbering zone

ACD Observe agent key

Outgoing Call Barring Allowed Outgoing Call

Barring Denied

Outgoing Line preference Allowed

Outgoing Line preference Denied basic-5.00

On Premise Station Off Premise Station On Site

Notification key.

OSN is accepted as valid input only if the system is ESA and ESA_SUPP package equipped.

xops-20 xops-20 esa-

23

Attendant Overflow position

Override Allowed (500/2500 telephone)

Override Denied (500/2500 telephone)

Override key zbd-6.00

ccb-21

1se1-4 aop-1 ffc-15 basic-1

918 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RBHA

RBHD

RCBA

RCBD

RCC

RCK

RDI

RDL

RDLA

RDLD

RGA

Response

PEPE

Comment

Prints all TNs and cards configured on IPE/EPE shelves.

Pack/Rel

basic-3.0

pagenet-22 (PGND)

PGNA

PHD

POA POD

Deny PAGENET access Allow PAGENET access

Permanent Hold

Optional Privacy Allowed Optional Privacy

Denied basic-4 basic-1

PRK

PRS

Park key

Privacy Release key cprk-2 basic-1

PRSA

PRSD

PUA PUD Call Pickup Allowed Call Pickup Denied

PVN PVR

Priority Call Pickup Allowed Priority Call Pickup

Denied

Private Line Non-ringing phantom DN Private

Line Ringing phantom DN supp-15 grp-1 basic-1

RAG RBDA

RBDD

ACD Call Agent key Redirection By Day Allowed

Redirection By Day Denied basic-24

Redirection By Holiday Allowed Redirection By

Holiday Denied basic-24

Recall to boss Allowed

Recall to boss Denied basic-5.50

Restricted from Receiving Collect Calls

Ringing Change Key

Restricted from receiving DID calls

Stored Number Redial supp-10 rck-15 supp-10 basic-14

Automatic Redial call Allowed Automatic Redial call Denied ardl-22

Ring Again key optf-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 919

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt

SAR

SCC

SCI

SCL

SCN

Response Comment

RLFA RLFD Reversed Lamp Flash Allowed Reversed Lamp

Flash Denied

Pack/Rel

supp-10

RLS

RLT

RMMA

RMMD

RMMO

RMWK

RNP

Release key

Redial List key

Remote Monitoring of Messages Allowed

Remote Monitoring of Messages Denied Allow

Remote Monitoring of Messages and to

Override, if it is being already monitored

Remote Message Waiting indication key

Ringing Number Pickup (includes PUA, PUD and RNPK) basic-1 basic- 25.4

vmba-24 vmba-24 grp-1

RNPK

RPA

RTDA

RTDD

Ringing Number Pickup key

Radio Paging Allowed

Call Redirection by Time of day allowed Call

Redirection by Time of day denied grp-1 rpa-15 basic-22

SCR

SCU

SDNA

SDND

Scheduled Access Restriction

Speed Call Controller

Station Category Indication Priority Level

Speed Call (includes SCU and SCC) sar-20 optf-1 sci-7 optf-1

Single Call Non-ringing DN

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance

Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).

Single Call Ringing DN

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance

Redirection Prime (MARP) for the DN is indicated by an "M" in the output (MCN M).

Speed Call User basic-1 basic-1 optf-1

Phantom DN as SDN allowed. Phantom DN as

SDN denied.

basic-5.50

920 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

SETS

SFA SFD

All telephones

Comment Pack/Rel

basic-1

Second level Forwarding Allowed Second level

Forwarding Denied optf-10

SHL

SIG

SIPL

SL1

Short Line Class of Service

Buzz key to phantom DN

SIP Line TN

SL-1 stations xops-20 basic-1 basic-6.00

basic-1

SMSA

SMSD

SMWD

SMWA

SNR

Standalone Mail Server Allowed Standalone

Mail Server Denied samm-20

Extended message waiting indication denied.

Extended message waiting indication allowed.

mw-24

SPKA

SPKD

SPV

SRE

Stored Number Redial

Speaker Class of Service Allowed Speaker

Class of Service Denied

ACD Supervisor

Semi-Restricted

SSC SSU System Speed Call Controller System Speed

Call User ffc-15 ohol-20 acdb-1 basic-1 optf-1

SWA

SWD

TAD

TDD

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Allowed

Station-to-Station Call Waiting Denied

Time And Date key

Touchphone Display basic-8 ddsp-1 tset-7

THF THFA Centrex Trunk Switchhook Flash Centrex Trunk

Switchhook Flash Allowed (500/2500 telephones)

THFD Centrex Trunk Switchhook Flash Denied

(500/2500 telephones) thf-14

TLD Toll Denied basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 921

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt

UST

VCC

VCE

VDN

VMA

VOLA

VOLD

Response

TRC

Comment

Malicious Call Trace key

TRN

TSA

Call Transfer key

Three-Party Service Allowed

TVA TVD

UCC UDI

Trunk Verification Allowed Trunk Verification

Denied

Unrestricted from Receiving Collect Calls

Unrestricted from receiving DID calls

Universal Extensions UEXT

ULAA

ULAD

User Level Access Allowed for set based administration

User Level Access Denied for set based administration

Unrestricted UNR

USR USRA

USRD

User Selectable Call Redirection key User

Selectable Call Redirection allowed User

Selectable Call Redirection denied

(VOUD)

VOUA

VSIT

Telephone Status feature

Voice Call to phantom DN

Voice set

LOGIVOX telephone Volume Down

Pack/Rel

mct-10 basic-1 mpo-21 basic-1 basic-1 supp-10 basic-5.50

adminset-21 basic-1 uscr-19 iap3p-13 basic-1 basic-5 supp-10

Server Voice Messaging Allowed csl-8

Virtual Office login operation is allowed on this

TN Virtual Office login operation is denied on this

TN For CS 1000S basic-2 basic-2 Deny other user to virtually login onto this TN

Allow other user to virtually login onto this TN

DECT visitors msmn-25

922 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

HMDN

LSNO

MANU

MLNG

NACT

NCOS

Response

VUP WTA

WTD

Comment

LOGIVOX telephone Volume Up Warning Tone

Allowed Warning Tone Denied

Pack/Rel

supp-10 basic-1

WUK

XFA XFD

Guest entry of Automatic Wake Up key

Call Transfer Allowed Call Transfer Denied gewu-16 basic-1

XHA XHD Exclusive Hold Allowed Exclusive Hold Denied dhld-4

XMWK Extended Message Waiting indication key vmba-24

XRA XRD Ring Again Allowed Ring Again Denied

ZONE MG 1000B zone(s) For CS 1000S optf-1 basic-2 x..x

Home Directory Number

List Number.

0-8190 0-8190

One Speed Call List Number or a range of list numbers

<CR> Print all lists.

LSNO is prompted when FEAT is SCL, SCU,

SCC, SSC, SSU or CS.

msmn-25 basic-1

Manual Update flag. Llist or count the IP phones that are Manual Update.

basic-5.00

a...a

To print telephones with a language selection matching the language in the response to the

MLNG prompt.

Where: a...a = ENG, FRE, GER, DUT, SPA, ITA, NOR,

SWE, DAN, POR, FIN, POL, CZE, HUN, JAP,

RUS, LAT, TUR.

basic-25.4

(NO)

YES

END

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt.

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.

End Overlay program.

odas-1

Network Class of Service. NCOS is prompted when COS or NCOS.

basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 923

LD 81: Features and Station Print

Prompt

NZON

PAGE

REQ

RNPG

SGRP

ZONE

Response

0-3 0-3

0-7 0-7

0-15 0-15

0-99 0-99

Comment

One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when CDP equipped

One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when BARS or NFCR equipped

One NCOS group number or a range of group numbers when NARS equipped

One NCOS group number, or a range of group numbers for all features

Pack/Rel

0-1023

0-1023

0-1023

<CR>

Numbering zone

One numbering zone

Range of numbering zones

All numbering zones

(NO) YES Data printed on a per page basis zbd-6.00

CNT

END

LST

Request

Print a count of telephones equipped with the features specified in response to the FEAT prompt.

Exit Overlay program.

List telephones equipped with the features specified in response to the FEAT prompt.

basic-1 basic-1

Ringing Number Pickup Group.

0-255 0-255 One Ringing Number Pickup Group number or a range of group numbers

0-4095 0-4095

Ringing Number Pickup Group:

<CR> Print all groups.

RPNG is prompted when RNP, RNPK, PUA,

PUD, DPU, DPUA, DPUD, GPU, GPUA or

GPUD.

basic-1

Station Group

0-999 0-999 One station group number or a range of station group numbers.

sar-20

Print Zone

924 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response

<CR>

(0)-255

(0)–8000

All zones, sorted by TN.

Specified zone.

Comment

(0)-255 (0)-255

(0)–8000 (0)–8000

Range of zones, sorted by zone.

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

basic-7.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 925

LD 81: Features and Station Print

926 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 40: LD 82: Print Hunt Chain,

Multiple Appearance Group

Overlay program 82 allows the printing of hunting patterns and Multiple Appearance groups for system stations.

Refer to the Office Data Administration System Fundamentals, NN43001-552 for detailed information regarding printouts for multiple appearance DNs, single appearance DNs appearing on telephones with multiple appearance DN, and hunting patterns.

A TN which is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) is indicated by an "M" preceding the

TN in the output.

Prompts and responses

Prompt

REQ

CUST

Response

aaa xx xx

Comment

Request (aaa = EHT, END, HNT, MAG, MAP)

Customer number or range of customer numbers

DATE a...a

(NO) YES a...a

xxxx

Print data from activity date specified or last activity date

(You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)

Data printed on a per-page basis PAGE

DES

DN

Print all telephones with DES "dddddd"

Print specific DN

- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR> Starts printing

NACT (NO) YES Next Activity

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 927

LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR>

Comment

Starts printing. Prompted when PAGE = YES

CUST xx xx

<CR>

Customer number or range of customer numbers

Print data for all customers.

DATE

DES

DN

Pack/Rel

basic-1 basic-1 dddddd d+

+

<CR> xxxx xxxx xxxx

ALL

<CR> dd mmm yyyy Print data from activity date specified. Where: basic-1

ACT

<CR>

• dd = day (0-31)

• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)

• yyyy = year

Print data from last activity date.

Disregard date restrictions.

Print all telephones with DES "dddddd"

Print all telephones with DES "d"

Print all telephones with no DES assignment

Disregard DES odas-1

Print specific DN

Print range of DNs

Print data when REQ = MAG or MAP

Print data for all DNs

DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package

150.

basic-1

NACT

(NO)

YES

END

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.

End Overlay program odas-1

928 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

PAGE

REQ

Response

(NO) YES

EHT

END

HNT

MAG

MAP

Comment

Data printed on a per-page basis

Pack/Rel

basic-1

Request

External Hunting pattern (except regular and short hunting)

Exit Overlay program

Hunting pattern (except short hunting and EHT)

Multiple Appearance Groups Print Multiple

Appearance Groups including all Single

Appearance DNs assigned on telephones having Multiple Call Assignments.

Multiple Appearance Print Multiple Appearance

DN and associated TNs. The hunt pattern displayed shows only the first TN in a MADN hunt group.

basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 929

LD 82: Print Hunt Chain, Multiple Appearance Group

930 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 41: LD 83: Terminal Number Sort and Print

Overlay program 83 allows the printing of a list of TNs and of TN blocks in Designation (DES) order.

"MARP" is output after the DN when printing the TN block (NOT when using the LST command) if the TN is the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

CUST

NUMZONE

CSDN

DATE

Response

aaa x...x

x...x

x...x

a...a

PAGE (NO) YES

- ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR>

NACT (NO) YES

Comment

Request (aaa = END, LST, TNB)

Customer number or range of customer numbers

Numbering zone or range of numbering zones

Print the Converged Service Directory Number

Print data from activity date specified or last activity date (You may enter: dd mmm yyyy or ACT)

Data printed on a per-page basis

Starts printing

Next Activity

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ADJUST PAPER THEN <CR>

<CR> Starts printing

Comment Pack/Rel

odas-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 931

LD 83: Terminal Number Sort and Print

Prompt

CUST

Response

xx xx

END

LST

TNB

Comment

Customer number or range of customer numbers

Print data date for all customers

CSDN

DATE

NACT

NUMZONE x...x

PAGE

REQ

<CR> x...x

dd mmm yyyy Print data from activity date specified. Where: odas-1

ACT

<CR>

• dd = day (0-31)

• mmm = month (JAN-DEC)

• yyyy = year

Print data from last activity date

Disregard date restrictions

(NO)

YES

END

(NO) YES

Next Activity

Return to REQ prompt

Reset the ACT date to the current system date, print the new ACT value and exit the Overlay.

End Overlay program odas-1

Numbering zone or range of numbering zones basic-6.00

Data printed on a per-page basis odas-1 odas-1 Request

Exit Overlay program

Print List of TNs in designator order

Print list of TN blocks in designator order

Pack/Rel

odas-1

Print the Converged Service Directory Number sip-4.00

932 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 42: LD 84, 85: Set Designation Entry

(ODAS)

Overlay program 84 allows the addition of line designators to existing single line (500/2500) sets.

Overlay program 85 allows the addition of line designators to existing multi-line (SL-1, M2000, etc.) sets.

If currently active on a call, the station is disconnected after the last <CR>.

Prompts and responses

TN

DES

Prompt Response

l s c u d...d

Comment

Terminal Number

1-6 character alphanumeric designator

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DES d...d

TN l s c u c u

END

Comment

1-6 character alphanumeric Office Data

Administration System (ODAS) Station

Designator.

Terminal Number Small System Exit Overlay program

Pack/Rel

odas-1 basic-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 933

LD 84, 85: Set Designation Entry (ODAS)

934 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 43: LD 86: Electronic Switched

Network 1

Overlay program 86 allows data defining the NARS/BARS/CDP features to be created, modified, and printed.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by feature:

FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation) on page 937

FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network) on page 937

FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion) on page 939

FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)

on page 939

FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)

on page 940

FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier) on page 941

FEAT equal to CMDB (flexible CLID manipulation)

Response

REQ

CUST

Prompt

a...a

xx

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END,

LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 935

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

FEAT

Prompt

CMDB

Response

TBNO

RLNO

MNUM

MID

MNPI xxx

0–15 a...a

XXXXXXXX a...a

MTON a...a

MDR

MNOD

DEL

INST

RNPI

RTON a...a

X

XX

XXXXXXXX a...a

a...a

Comment

Feature = CMDB (flexible

CLID manipulation data block)

CLID manipulation Index numbers (1-256)

Rule number

Matching Number Type (a...a

= CLNG, CONN, REDN,

OCN, DC)

Matching initial digits

Matching Numbering Plan

Indicator (a...a = E164, PRIV,

E163, TELE, X121, NATL,

DC)

Matching Type of Number

(a...a = UKWN, INTL, NATL,

SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP,

CSS7, DC)

Matching digit relation (a...a

= GT, LT, EQ, DC)

Matching number of digits

(0-32)

Number of leading digits to be deleted (1-32)

Insert up to 8 digits

Replacement Numbering

Plan Indicator (a...a = E164,

PRIV, E163, TELE, X121,

NATL, NCHG)

Replacement Type of

Number (a...a = UKWN,

INTL, NATL, SPN, LOCL,

ELOC, CDP, CSS7, NCHG)

936 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

FEAT equal to DGT (Digit Manipulation)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

DMI

DEL

ISPN

INST

CTYP

Response

a...a

xx

DGT

(0)-1999

(0)-19

(YES)

NO x...x

x...x y...y

#...# a...a

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = DGT (Digit manipulation)

Digit Manipulation Index numbers

Number of leading digits to be Deleted

Special IP Number

For off-net calls

For on-net calls

Insert leading digits

For Specialized Common Carriers (SCC). Insert digits including access number, delimiter*, authorization code

Insert alphanumeric characters

Call type to be used by the call. This call type must be recognized by the NRS and far-end switch. This is critical for correct CLID behavior.

If ISPN=NO, the CLID is based on this field. Is

ISPN=YES, the CLID is based on the call type before digit manipulation.

FEAT equal to ESN (Electronic Switched Network)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

MXLC

Response

a....a

xx

ESN

0-999

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = ESN (Electronic switched network)

Maximum number of Location Codes (NARS only)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 937

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

MXFS

CDP

- MXSC

- NCDP

MSCC

AC1

AC2

DLTN

ERWT

- ERDT

TODS

RTCL

NMAP

ETOD

TGAR

MXSD

MXIX

MXDM

MXRL

MXCM

MXFC

Prompt

0–255

(YES) NO

0-32000

3-7

0-7 xx xx

(YES) NO

Response

0-16000 xxx xxx

0-2000 xxx xxx

0-256

(YES) NO

0-(6)-10 aa-aa

(DIS) YES xx yy

1-7

(NO) YES

Comment

Maximum number of Location Codes (with the ESN

Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)

Maximum number of Supplemental Digit restriction blocks

Maximum number of Incoming Trunk Group exclusion tables

Maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables

Maximum number of Route Lists

Maximum number of CLID manipulation lists (1-256)

Maximum number of Free Calling area screening tables

Maximum number of Free Special number screening tables

Coordinated Dialing Plan feature for this customer

Maximum number of Steering Codes

Number of digits in CDP DN (DSC + DN or LSC + DN)

Maximum number of Special Common Carrier entries

One or two digit NARS/BARS Access Code 1

One or two digit NARS Access Code 2

NARS/BARS Dial Tone after dialing AC1 or AC2 access codes

Expensive Route Warning Tone

Expensive Route Delay Time

Time of Day Schedules

Routing Controls

NCOS Map

Extended Time of Day schedule

Check for Trunk Group Access Restrictions

938 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

FEAT equal to ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

ITEI

RTNO

Response

a...a

xx

ITGE

1-127

0-127

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = ITGE (Incoming Trunk Exclusion)

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index number

Route Number associated with index

FEAT equal to NAS (Network Attendant Service)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

TBL

ALT

ID

TODS

- PER

- DAYS

ALST

DBK

QUE

Response

a...a

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function xx

NAS

(0)-63

1-7 x...x

1-7

1-7

Feature = NAS (Network Attendant Service)

NAS routing Table 0 is the customer routing table

Attendant Alternative number

Digits (up to 16) dialed to reach a remote attendant

1-31 Schedule period to be changed hh mm hh mm The start and stop times for the schedule period

Days assigned to the currently defined schedule period.

Alternatives List

(N) Y

(N) Y

Drop Back busy option

Queuing to a route

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 939

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

ROUT

SCNV

TDET

- TYPE

EXP

FRL

DMI

CTBL

ISDM

FCI

- TONE

TOD

VNS

- VDCH

- VDMI

- VTRK

CNV

FEAT equal to RLB (Route List)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

RLI

ENTR

LTER

- CONA

0-511

(NO) YES

(NO) YES aaa a...a

0-7

(NO) YES

1-15 xxx

1-(20)-254

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-7

(0)-1999

(0)-256

(0)-255

(0)-255

Response

a...a

xx

RLB xxxx xxx

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = RLB (Route list)

Route List Index to be accessed

Entry number for NARS/BARS Route list

Local Termination entry

Continuation Allowed. Attempts the next entry of the

Route List Block (RLB) if local termination fails for a

NARS call. Prompted when LTER = YES This operation cannot be used for Trunk Steering Code

(TSC) or Distant Steering Code (DSC) configuration.

Route number

Skip Conventional signaling

Tone Detector used

Type of tone detector application (aaa = TIE, CC1, or

CC2)

Tone type expected from SCC (a...a = DIAL or SCC)

Time of Day schedule

Entry is a VNS route

VNS D-channel number

VNS Digit Manipulation Index

VNS Trunks

Conversion to LDN

Expensive route

Facility Restriction Level

Digit Manipulation Index

CLID manipulation index

ISL D-channel Down Digit Manipulation index

Free Calling Area Screening Index number

940 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

FSNI

BNE

DDV

DDI

SBOC

PROU

- COPT

IDBB

IOHQ

OHQ

CBQ

ISET

NALT

MFRL

OVLL

Response

(0)-1-255

(NO) YES

(YES) NO

(YES) NO aaa

(1) 2

(1) 2 aaa

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(0)-8

1-(5)-10 aaa

(0)-24

Comment

Free Special Number Screening Index

Business Network Extension Route

DPNSS Diversion Validation

DPNSS Diverting Immediate

Step Back on Congestion (aaa = (NRR), RRO, or

ROA)

Preferred Routing. The default value is 1.

QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for (1), 2

ISDN Drop Back Busy (aaa = (DBD), DBA, or DBI)

ISDN Off-Hook Queuing option

Off-Hook Queuing allowed

Call Back Queuing

Initial Set

Number of MCDN alternate routing attempts

Set Minimum Facility Restriction Level (aaa = (MIN) or

0-7)

Overlap Length

FEAT equal to SCC (Special Common Carrier)

REQ

Prompt

CUST

FEAT

MXLC

SCCI

LDN2

RBTD

Response

a...a

xx

SCC

0-999

0-16 000

(0)-7

(0)-10

(0)-30

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or

PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = SCC (Special Common Carrier)

Maximum number of LOC codes (NARS only)

Maximum number of LOC codes (with the ESN

Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)

Special Common Carrier Index

Number of digits in SCC type 2 LDN

Ringback Tone Delay time

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 941

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

AC1 xx xxxx

Comment

One or two digit NARS/BARS Access Code 1

One to four digit Flexible Numbering Plan Access

Code 1

The access code cannot conflict with the numbering plan.

Pack/Rel

b/nars-1

AC2 xx xxxx

ALST 1-7

One or two digit NARS Access Code 2

One to four digit Flexible Numbering Plan Access

Code 2

The access code cannot conflict with the numbering plan.

nars-1

Attendant Alternatives List (up to 4 for each schedule period)

If no attendants are placed on the list, local attendant service is given. Precede with X to remove an alternative attendant.

The order of the input determines which entry in the alternative list is being changed. For example, to change the third alternative, both the first and second alternatives must be entered.

nas-15

ALT

BNE

CBQ

1-7

X1-X7

<CR>

Attendant Alternative number

Clear the alternative number (zero ID store); allowed only if there is no schedule period associated with it.

Stop ALT prompt, go to TODS prompt.

nas-15

(NO) YES Business Network Express/Name Display, Private

CLID and COLP allowed/denied.

bne-25

(NO)

YES

Note:

BNE is output only if the route of the RLI entry is

EuroISDN.

Call-Back Queuing not allowed

Call-Back Queuing allowed

This prompt should not be used with NARS

DPNSS1. CBQ is not prompted if LTER = YES.

fcbq-1

942 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CDP (YES) NO

Comment

Coordinated Dialing Plan feature for this customer

Pack/Rel

cdp-1

CNV

CONA

COPT

(NO) YES Conversion to LDN required (NARS). Not prompted if route is TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES nars-1

(NO) YES Continuation Allowed to attempt the next entry of the

Route List Block if local termination fails for a NARS call. Prompted when LTER=YES This operation cannot be used for Trunk Steering Code (TSC) or

Distant Steering Code (DSC) configuration.

basic-7.00

(1)

2

QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for the following causes:

• cause 34 "No channel / circuit available"

• cause 38 "Network out of order"

• cause 42 "Congestion"

QSIG Alternate Routing is supported for the following causes:

• cause 3 "No route to destination"

• cause 27 "Destination is out of service"

• cause 34 "No channel / circuit available"

• cause 38 "Network out of order"

• cause 41 "Temporary failure"

• cause 42 "Congestion"

CTBL

CTYP

(0)-256

(NCHG)

INTL

NPA

NXX

LOC

CLID manipulation index

If CTBL=0, then RLB is not associated with any flexible CLID manipulation table.

Call type to be used by the call. This call type must be recognized by the NRS and far-end switch. This is critical for correct CLID behavior.

If ISPN=NO, the CLID is based on this field. Is

ISPN=YES, the CLID is based on the call type before digit manipulation.

Call type not changed

Special number in International format

NPA

NXX

Location Code pra-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 943

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Prompt Response

CDP

SPN

UKWN

Comment

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Special Number other than International

Unknown call type

CUST xx Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15

Pack/Rel

basic-1

DAYS 1-7

DBK (NO)

YES

Days assigned to the currently defined schedule period

To remove days from the schedule period precede the number representing the day with X. Up to 7 entries, separated with a space, can be input

(Where: 1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday).

nas-15

Drop Back busy option disabled

Drop Back busy option enabled

Up to four entries one for each of the attendant alternatives in this schedule period.

If both sides of the ISDN trunk are set to N the remote node accepts the call and reroutes it, thus one side of the trunk must be set to Y.

If a node has all the NAS routes with DBK = Y it is considered by the network as "Centralized Night DN

Node". This permits all other nodes in night to reject all attempts of this specific node, even in night, thus the call can be inserted only in this local night DN que.

The order of the response to this prompt must correspond to the order of response to the ALST prompt.

nas-15

DDI

DDV

(YES) NO DPNSS Diverting Immediate

YES = Send the Diverting Immediate information to the far end.

NO = Far end is not M1 and does not handle

Diverting Immediate message. Do not send the

Diverting Immediate information to the far end.

basic-5.50

(YES) NO DPNSS Diversion Validation.

YES = Process the messages sent from the far end.

NO = Far end is not M1 and does not handle

Diversion Validation messages for CFW. Ignore the messages from the far end and allow setting of

CFW.

basic-5.50

944 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DEL (0)-19

(0)-32

Comment

Number of leading digits to be Deleted

Pack/Rel

b/nars-1

Number of leading digits to be deleted (1-32) in case of CMDB basic-7.00

DLTN

DMI

(YES) NO NARS/BARS Dial Tone after dialing AC1 or AC2 access codes

(0)

(0)-31

(0)-255

(0)-999

(0))-1999 b/nars-1

Digit Manipulation Index numbers

No digit manipulation required

CDP

NARS/BARS b/nars-20

NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160

The maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables is defined by prompt MXDM. DMI is not prompted if route TKTP = ADM.

zbd-7.00

DORG (NO) YES The CLID information of the original caller is sent in the setup message. If it is set to No, there is no change in function of the feature and the CLID information of the transferring telephone is sent.

basic-5.00

ENTR esn-1 0-63

0-6

X

Entry number for NARS/BARS Route List

Route list entry number for CDP

Precede with x to remove

ERDT 0-(6)-10 Expensive Route Delay Time (in 2 second intervals) b/nars-1

ERWT (YES) NO Expensive Route Warning Tone

Note:

ERWT is not supported on TIE trunks.

ERWT defaults to of three bursts of tone, but can be modified in LD 56 if Flexible Tones and Cadences

(FTC) package 125 is equipped, to indicate that the call is placed over an expensive route.

The user has 3 choices:

1. go On-Hook and abort the call

2. remain On-Hook and accept the call

3. activate Ring Again b/nars-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 945

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Prompt Response

ETOD 1-7

X1-X7

Comment

Extended Time of Day schedule (day(s) of the week for special TOD schedule) Where:1 = Sunday and =

Saturday.

To remove a day

Pack/Rel

b/nars-1

EXP

FCI

FEAT

DGT

ESN

ITGE

NAS

RLB

SCC

(NO) YES Expensive route

Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES

Free Calling area screening Index numberUse 0 if no FCAS is required. Not prompted if route TKTP =

ADM.

(0)-127

(0)-255

BARS

NARS b/nars-1 b/nars-1 esn-1 Feature

Digit manipulation data block

ESN data block

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion data block

Network Attendant Service data block

Route List data Block

Special Common Carrier data block

FRL

FSNI

ID

IDBB

INST

(0)-7

(0)-1-255 x...x

<CR>

(DBD)

DBA

DBI x...x

x...x y...y

Facility Restriction Level

Free Special Number screening Index b/nars-1 fnp-20

Digits (up to 16) dialed to reach a remote attendant nas-15

Leave ID unchanged, go to ALT prompt.

orc/orq-16 ISDN Drop Back Busy

Drop Back Disabled

Drop Back if All routes busy

Drop Back if Initial set busy.

IDBB appears if ISDN=YES in LD 15

Insert leading digits. Where x...x is: up to 31 leading digits b/nars-1

For Specialized Common Carriers (SCC), up to 23 leading digits can be inserted including: access number, delimiter*, and authorization code.

946 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

#...#

X...X

Comment

Insert alphanumeric characters. Where #...# is: an alphanumeric string of up to 31 characters Allowed characters are: c = country code p = numbering zone prefix x = precede with x to delete previously defined value

Insert up to 8 leading digits in case of CMDB

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

basic-7.00

IOHQ

ISDM

(NO) YES ISDN Off-Hook Queuing option

Prompted if ISDN = YES in LD 15.

(0)-255

(0)

(0)-31

(0)-127

(0)-999

(0)-1999 ohq-16

ISL D-channel Down Digit Manipulation Index number.

Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER = YES

No digit manipulation required

CDP

NARS/BARS

NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.

When the ISL D-channel goes down, this Digit

Manipulation Index is used to perform the Digit

Manipulation which includes the ESN access code insertion capability.

This is used only when the ISL reverts back to conventional signaling. When the D-channel is up the existing DMI is used to perform digit manipulation.

This DMI is used only when the ISL D-channel is down. Any valid DMI can be entered. The ISDM is intended to be a DMI which inserts an ESN access code.

is1-17 zbd-7.00

ISPN

ISET

ITEI

(YES) NO Special IP Number.

If ISPN = YES then CLID format is determined by the call type specified during digit analysis. If ISPN

= NO then CLID format is specified by call type

(CTYP).

basic 4.0

(0)-64 Initial Set. Number of entries in Initial Set for route list block.

b/nars-1

1-127

1-255

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index

BARS

NARS b/nars-5

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 947

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Prompt Response

LDN2 (0)-10

Comment

Number of digits in SCC type 2 LDN

LTER

MFRL

(NO) YES

(MIN) 0-7

Local Termination entry

Set Minimum Facility Restriction Level used to determine autocode prompting.

Use default of MIN to set to the minimum FRL value.

Pack/Rel

b/nars-1 fgd-17 b/nars-1

MID XXXXXXXX Matching initial digits

MNOD X Matching number of digits (0-32)

MNPI a...a

Matching Numbering Plan Indicator (a...a = E164,

PRIV, E163, TELE, X121, NATL, DC) basic-7.00

basic-7.00

basic-7.00

MNUM a...a

MTON

MSCC

MXCM a...a

0-7 xxx

Matching Number Type (a...a = CLNG, CONN,

REDN, OCN, DC)

Matching Type of Number (a...a = UKWN, INTL,

NATL, SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP, CSS7, DC) basic-7.00

basic-7.00

Maximum number of Special Common Carrier

(SCC) entries nars-1

Maximum number of CLID manipulation lists (1-256)

If MXCM = 0, the system do not allow the creation of any CLID manipulation lists.

basic-7.00

MXDM

MXFC

MXFS

0-32

0-256

0-1000

0-2000

0-127

0–255

0–255

Maximum number of Digit Manipulation tables (you must count Table 0 for the system)

CDP

NARS/BARS

NARS/BARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 equipped esn-1 zbd-7.00

b/nars-1 Maximum Free Calling area screening tables

Prompted when NARS/BARS equipped

BARS

NARS

Maximum number of Free Special Number

Screening tables b/nars-1

948 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

MXIX

0-127

0–255

Comment

Maximum number of Incoming Trunk Group

Exclusion tables (use "0" if not required)

BARS

NARS

MXLC 0-999

MXRL

0-16 000

0-128

0-128

0-256

0-1000

0-2000

MXSC 0–8000

Pack/Rel

b/nars-5

Maximum number of LOC codes (NARS only) nars-1 locx-4.0

Maximum number of LOC codes (with the ESN

Location Code Expansion feature and the FNP feature enabled)

Note:

Small Systems, CS 1000S, MG 1000B, and MG

1000T display a warning message when you configure the MXLC prompt to a value greater than 4000. Nortel recommends that you increase the LOCs in sets of 50, and regularly check on the available memory.

Maximum number of Route Lists

If MXRL = 0, the system do not allow the creation of any route lists.

esn-1

CDP

BARS

NARS

NARS with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package

160 equipped zbd-7.00

MXSD

NALT

0-10000

0-32000

(0)-1500

1-(5)-10

Maximum number of Steering Codes for Small

System

Maximum number of Steering Codes in North

America

Maximum number of Steering Codes outside North

America cdp-1

Maximum Supplemental Digit restriction blocks b/nars-1

Number of MCDN alternate routing attempts (MALT retries only).

Prompt appears once per RLI.

brte-24

Note:

This prompt is introduced to limit the number of

MALT retries. The retries include only those that

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 949

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Prompt Response

NCDP

3-7

3-10

Comment

are retried as a result of MALT Feature invoked.

MALT retry count will only be incremented for such retries. The retries performed as a result of disabled routes or busy routes do not form a part of MALT Retry. For example: if the retry to ENTRY

2 is performed because the route in ENTRY 1 is either busy or disabled, then this retry is not considered as a MALT retry and the MALT retry count will not be incremented for such attempts.

Pack/Rel

Define DN length for CDP

A Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) consists of the

CDP code and the Directory Number (DN). This dialing plan does not need an access code because the CDP code is part of the internal dialing plan.

The CDP code is one of the following: the Distant

Steering Code (DSC) or the Local Steering Code

(LSC) cdp-1

Number of digits in CDP DN (DSC + DN or LSC +

DN)

Number of digits in CDP DN with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150

NMAP xx yy NCOS Map (NCOS numbers to be applied for routing controls). Where:

• xx = current NCOS number

• yy = NCOS number to be applied for

BARS/CDP or NARS when routing control is in effect.

NCOS ranges: 0-99 ncos-1

OHQ

OVLL

PER

(NO)

YES

(0)-24

Off-Hook Queuing not allowed

Off-Hook Queuing allowed

This prompt should not be used with NARS

DPNSS1. OHQ is not prompted if LTER = YES.

bars-1

Overlap Length

Number of digits dialed (after the ESN access code) before SETUP message is sent or outpulsing begins. If OVLL = 0, Overlap Sending is controlled by the number of digits in the ESN or CDP steering codes (e.g. FLEN).

ovlp-16 hh mm hh mm

The start and stop times for the schedule period the start time must be less than the stop time)

950 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

QUE (NO)

YES

Comment

Queuing to a route disabled

Queuing to a route enabled

Up to four entries one for each of the attendant alternatives in this schedule period. The order of the response to this prompt must correspond to the order of response to the ALST prompt.

Pack/Rel

RBTD (0)-30

REQ

CHG

END

LCHG

NEW

OUT

PRT

Ringback Tone Delay time in seconds for SCC (only even numbers is accepted) nars-1 esn-1 Request

Change existing data block.

Exit Overlay program.

Print date and time that each data group was last changed (data groups include: ESN, DGT, NAS,

RLB, SCC, and ITGE)

Create new data block.

Remove data block.

Print data block.

RLI

RLNO

RNPI

0-127

0–255

0-999

0-1999

0-15 a...a

Route List Index to be accessed

CDP and BARS

NARS

FNP esn-20 basic-7.00

basic-7.00

basic-7.00

ROUT

RTCL

RTNO

0-511

(DIS)

YES

0-511

Rule number in CMDB block

Replacement Numbering Plan Indicator (a...a =

E164, PRIV, E163, TELE, X121, NATL, NCHG)

Route number

Not prompted if LTER = YES.

Disable Routing Controls.

Enable or modify Routing Controls.

Route Number associated with index

Precede with X to delete an existing route.

esn-1 esn-1 b/nars-5

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 951

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

Prompt Response

RTON a...a

Comment

Replacement Type of Number (a...a = UKWN, INTL,

NATL, SPN, LOCL, ELOC, CDP, CSS7, NCHG)

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

SBOC dpnss1-16

SCCI

(NRR)

RRO

RRA

(0)-7

Step Back on Congestion

No Reroute

Reroute if originating node, step back if transit node.

Reroute all.

Special Common Carrier Index into the SCC data table

Use "0" if not required.

nars-1

SCNV

TBL

TBNO

TDET

(NO) YES Skip Conventional Signaling.

(0)-63 NAS routing table. 0 is the customer routing table. It is also associated with Attendant Console Group 0.

nars-16 xxx CLID manipulation Index numbers (1-256) in CMDB block basic-7.00

(NO) YES Tone Detector used

Not prompted if route TKTP = ADM or LTER =

YES.

nars-1

TGAR

TOD

TODS

(NO)

YES

0-1

0-7

1-31

0

0-1

0-7

Check for Trunk Group Access Restrictions

Ignore TGAR/TARG when call is placed through

BARS.

Examine TGAR/TARG when call is placed through

BARS.

esn-1 esn-1 Time of Day schedule

CDP

NARS/BARS

Precede with X to turn off schedule.

Time of Day schedule

Schedule period to be changed.

Catch-all period. Start and stop times are not relevant for this period. The next prompt is ALST.

CDP

NARS/BARS esn-1

952 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

0-7 hh mm hh mm

Comment

Schedule number, start hour, start minute, end hour, end minute for NARS/BARS.

0-1 hh mm hh mm

X1-X31

X0

<CR>

Schedule number, start hour, start minute, end hour, end minute for CDP.

Remove the schedule period

Remove/clear all alternatives associated with period

0. This leaves the catch-all treatment as local attendant treatment.

End NAS feature data setup and return to REQ prompt.

Pack/Rel

TONE

TYPE

VDCH

VDMI

SCC

DIAL

CC1

CC2

TIE

1-15

SCC dial tone expected

Normal dial tone type expected

SCC Type 1 tone detector application

SCC type 2 tone detector application

On-network call tone detector application

VNS D-channel number vns-16

VNS

(0)

1-31

1-255

0-999

0-1999

VNS Digit Manipulation Index number for the Dchannel (ESN routing)

No digit manipulation required

CDP

NARS/BARS

With Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160

(NO) YES Entry is a VNS route

Prompted for DID,TIE and CO.

vns-16 basic-7.00

vns-16

VTRK 1-(20)-254 VNS Trunks (maximum number of VNS Trunks to be used by this route list entry) vns-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 953

LD 86: Electronic Switched Network 1

954 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 44: LD 87: Electronic Switched

Network 2

Overlay program 87 allows data which define the NARS/BARS/CDP features to be created, modified and printed.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by feature:

CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)

on page 955

FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)

on page 956

FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)

on page 957

NCTL (Network Control)

on page 957

CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TYPE

LSC

Response

a...a

xx

CDP aaa x...x

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = CDP (Coordinated Dialing Plan)

Type of steering code (aaa = LSC, DSC, or TSC)

Local Steering Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 955

LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2

- CCBA

- NPA

- NXX

TSC

- FLEN

- ITOH

- CCBA

- RLI

Prompt

- DMI

- DEL

DSC

- FLEN

- DSP

- RRPA

- RLI

Response

0-31

0-4 x...x

(0)-24 aaa

(NO) YES xxx

(NO) YES xxxxxxx xxxxxxx x...x

(0)-24

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-1999

Comment

Digit Manipulation Index for LSC

Number of digits to be deleted

Distant Steering Code

Flexible Length number of digits

Display (aaa = LSC, LOC, or DN)

Remote Radio Paging Access

Route List to be accessed for Distant Steering Code

Collect Call Blocking maximum 7 digit NPA code allowed maximum 7 digit NXX code allowed

Trunk Steering Code

Flexible Length number of digits

Inhibit Time-out option

Collect Call Blocking

Route List to be accessed for trunk steering code

FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

FCI

GKCF

NPA

NXX

- DENY

- ALOW

Response

a...a

xx

FCAS xxx

(0)-255 xxx aaaa xxx xxx xxx xxx

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = FCAS (Free Calling Area Screening)

Free Calling Area Screening Index number

Gatekeeper Cost Factor

Three-digit NPA code to be screened

NXX codes for NPA (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)

NXX code or range of codes to be Denied

NXX code or range of codes to be Allowed

956 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

FSNI

SPN

XXX

- DENY

- ALOW

Response

a...a

xx

FSNS

1-255 x...x

aaaa xxx xxx xxx xxx

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = FSNS (Free Special Number Screening)

Free Special Number screening Index

Special Number code to be screened

Routing codes (aaaa = DENY or ALOW)

Routing code or range of codes to be Denied

Routing code or range of codes to be Allowed

NCTL (Network Control)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

SOHQ

- OHTL

SCBQ

- CBTL

Response

a...a

xx

NCTL

(NO) YES

2-(10)-60

(NO) YES

10-(20)-30

- RANE

- RANC

NRNG

NCOS

0-511

0-511

0-99 1-99

(0)-99

MLPPSD xxxxxx

ARDL a

- MPL

- EQA aaaa

(NO) YES

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NCTL (Network Control)

Off-Hook Queuing option

Off-Hook Queue Time Limit

Call-Back Queuing option

Call-Back Queue Time Limit

RAN route number for CBQ offer to ESN stations

RAN route number for CBQ offer to Conventional main

NCOS Range

Network Class of Service group number

MLPP Service Domain class of service.

ARDL network route selection is allowed from both initial and extended route sets or only the initial route set (a = (A) or I)

Maximum Precedence Level

Equal Access associated with this NCOS group

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 957

LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2

Prompt

- FRL

- RWTA

- NSC

- - LIST

- OHQ

- CBQ

- RETT

- RETC 4-(5)-16

- - ROUT a

- - RADT

- SPRI

(0)-30

(0)-3

- MPRI

- PROM

TOHQ

(0)-3

(0)-30

0-7

Response

(0)-7

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-253

(YES) NO

(NO) YES

2-(10)-30

Facility Restriction Level

Comment

Expensive Route Warning Tone

Network Speed Call access allowed

List numbers to which System Speed Call has access

Off-Hook Queuing eligibility

Call Back Queuing eligibility

Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Timer

Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Counter

Call Back Queuing on Initial or All Routes (a = (I) or A)

Route Advance Timer

Starting Priority in CBQ

Maximum Priority attainable in CBQ

Priority Promotion timer

TCOS OHQ eligibility

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ALOW xxx xxx

<CR>

Comment

Routing code (NXX) code or range of codes to be allowed

Stop ALOW prompt

Pack/Rel

b/nars-20

ARDL

CBQ

CBTL

I

(A) ARDL network route selection is allowed from

ALL (both initial and extended) route sets

ARDL network route selection is allowed only from initial route set

(NO) YES Call Back Queuing eligibility ardl-22 bque-1

10-(20)-30 Call Back Queue Time Limit (in 2 second increments)

This is the time in which the user must respond to

Ring Again feature to accept the CBQ call.

Applies to multi-line sets only.

b/nars-1

958 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

CCBA (NO)

YES

Comment

Collect Call Blocking (CCB) Denied

Collect Call Blocking Allowed

CCBA is prompted when TYPE =TSC or DSC.

CCBA is prompted with CCB package 290.

CUST xx

Pack/Rel

ccb-21

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 esn-1

DEL 0-4

0-7

DENY

DMI

DSC xxx xxx

<CR>

0-31

0-999

0-1999 xxxx

Number of digits to be Deleted

Up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150 cdp-1 b/nars-20 Routing (NXX) code or range of codes to be denied

Stop DENY prompt.

Digit Manipulation Index for LSC

With Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package

160 b/nars-20 basic-7.00

DSP

(LSC)

HLOC

DN

Distant Steering Code

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until

<CR> is entered.

cdp-19 fnp-20 Display

Local Steering Code

Home Location code

Directory Number to be used for CLID

Prompted with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160 and ISDN are equipped.

EQA

FCI

FEAT

(NO) YES Equal Access associated with this NCOS group eqa-18

1-127

1-255

Free Calling area screening Index number

BARS

NARS

Table 0 is network reserved to indicate that no

FCAS is applied.

b/nars-1

CDP

FCAS

FSNS

NCTL

Feature

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Free Calling Area Screening

Free Special Number Screening (allowed with

Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160)

Network Control esn-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 959

LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2

Prompt Response

FLEN (0)-24

Comment

Flexible Length number of digits

Prompted with Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.

FRL (0)-7

FSNI

GKCF

ITOH

LIST

1-255

(0)-255

(NO) YES

0-4095

<CR>

Inhibit Time-out option

List numbers to which System Speed Call has access

All lists

Precede with X to remove SSC list.

Pack/Rel

fnp-20

Facility Restriction Level

FRL is assigned to each NCOS. It determines the entries in a Route List (RLI) to which it has access.

0 is the most restrictive, 7 is the least restrictive and can access more entries.

b/nars-1

Free Special Number screening Index fnp-20

Gatekeeper Cost Factor, where:

• 0 = not required for Gatekeeper configuration

• 1-255 = a higher number represents a more expensive call

For CS 1000S basic-2.0

fnp-20 ssc-2

LSC

MLPPSD xxxx xxxxxx

Local Steering Code

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until

<CR> is entered.

cdp-19

MLPP Service Domain class of service.

Where: xxxxxx = six hexadecimal characters in the range (000000 to FFFFFF) used to signify a 24 bit binary integer. Default is taken from

Overlay 15.

Precede with x to remove.

atvn-25.47

MPL

MPRI

NCOS aaaa

(0)-3

(0)-99

Maximum Precedence Level

Maximum Priority attainable in CBQ

Network Class of Service group number bque-1 ncos-1

960 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NPA xxx xxx yyy xxxxxxx

Comment Pack/Rel

Three-digit NPA code to be screened (the first digit must be 2-9; the second and third digits can be 0-9). Omit the "1" in 1 + NPA format.

xxx = 200-999. Only 3 digits are allowed, even when using 1 + dialing.

BARS allows up to 15 NPA codes per table.

NARS allows up to 15 NPA codes per table with a maximum of 800 NXX codes each.

Area code or extended NPA code translation

Where: nanp-19 xxx & yyy = 200 - 999. FCAS accepts only three digits for the NPA, even if 1 + dialing in use.

Numbering Plan Area Code basic-25

7 digits are allowed when TYPE = DSC

NRNG

NSC

NXX

0-99 1-99 NCOS Range (starting and ending number for

NCOS printing)

<CR> Pressed without defining the ending number, then only the NCOS with the starting number defined is printed.

Prompted when REQ = PRT.

ncos-14

(NO) YES

DENY

ALOW xxxxxxx

Network Speed Call access allowed

NXX codes to be denied for NPA

NXX codes to be allowed for NPA

Public Network Exchange Code

7 digits are allowed when TYPE = DSC nsc-2 b/nars-1 basic-25

OHQ

OHTL

(YES) NO Off-Hook Queuing eligibility

2-(10)-60 Off-Hook Queue Time Limit (in 2 second increments)

This is the maximum amount of time a user remains off-hook for OHQ before it times out.

After timeout the system searches once before going to Network Blocking Intercept treatment.

If an odd number is entered, it is rounded up to the next even number.

ohq-1 b/nars-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 961

LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2

Prompt Response

PROM (0)-30

Comment

Priority Promotion timer (in 30 second increments, where: 1 = 30 seconds and 30 = 15 minutes)

Pack/Rel

pque-1

RADT (0)-30 Route Advance Timer (in 30 second increments, where: 1 = 30 seconds and 30 = 15 minutes) bque-1

RANC

RANE

REQ

RETC

RETT

0-511

0-511

RAN route number for CBQ offer to Conventional main

Enter X to remove RAN route.

nars-1

RAN route number for CBQ offer to ESN stations

Enter X to remove RAN route.

nars-1

CHG

END

LCHG

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Print date and time that each data group level was last changed (data groups include: NCTL, FCAS,

FSNS, LSC, DSC, and TSC)

Create new data block

Delete existing data block

Print data block esn-1

NEW

OUT

PRT

4-(5)-16 Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Counter.

This is the number of times the initial set should be searched before the scanning includes the extended set. Once the retry counter threshold is met, each node in the network searches its extended set.

rvq-18

2-(10)-30 Remote Virtual Queuing Retry Timer in seconds.

This is the number of seconds between forward scanning attempts.

rvq-18

RLI

ROUT

0-31

0-127

0-255

0-999

0-1999

(I)

Route List accessed for trunk or distant steering code

CDP

BARS

NARS

Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) (Release 20 & later) cdp-20 basic-7.00

Call Back Queuing on Initial routes

The system offers queuing only after examining

ISET (Initial Set) entries.

bque-2

962 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

A

Comment

Call Back Queuing on All routes

The system examines all entries in the route list, both ISET (Initial Set) and ESET (Extended Set) before offering queuing.

RRPA

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES Remote Radio Paging Access (Remote Radio

Paging FFC is being used).

Prompted if a CDP, TSC or DSC is being added or changed.

rpa-20

RWTA

SCBQ

SOHQ

SPN

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(NO) YES x...x

Expensive Route Warning Tone

Call Back Queuing option

Off-Hook Queuing option

Special Number code to be screened.

xxx = 1-19 digits b/nars-1 b/nars-1 b/nars-1 fnp-20

SPRI

TOHQ

TSC

TYPE

XXX

(0)-3

0-7

<CR> xxxx

LSC

DSC

TSC

FSNS

ALL

DENY

ALOW

Starting Priority in CBQ pque-2

TCOS OHQ eligibility

Which TCOS (example, FRL) are OHQ eligible

(Up to 8 entries).

No TCOS are OHQ eligible

Precede with X to remove OHQ eligibility from a

TCOS.

b/nars-1

Trunk Steering Code

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package 150. Prompted until

<CR> is entered.

cdp-19 fnp/ cdp-20 Local Steering Code

Distant Steering Code

Trunk Steering Code

Free Special Number Screening Index

All steering codes

Routing codes to be denied

Routing codes to be allowed fnp-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 963

LD 87: Electronic Switched Network 2

964 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 45: LD 88: Authorization Code

Overlay program 88 allows data for Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) and Network Authorization Code

(NAUT) to be created, modified and printed.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block

on page 965

AUT: Authcode entries data block

on page 966

SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block on page 967

AUB or RAUB: Authcode or Room Authcode data block

REQ

TYPE

Prompt

CUST

SPWD

ALEN

ACDR

Response

aaa aaaa xx xxxx

1-14

NO YES

AUTHCOD_ALRM (OFF) ON

RANR x...x

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type = AUB (Authcode) or RAUB (Room Authcode)

Customer number associated with this function

Secure Data Password

Authcode Length

Activate CDR for authcodes

Authcode Alarm

RAN Route number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 965

LD 88: Authorization Code

ACLE

Prompt

BRST

RTRY

- RAN2

CLAS

- COS

- TGAR

- NCOS

- CAC_CIS

AUTO

- SECR

- NMBR

- CLAS

0-(10)

(NO) YES x...x

(0)-115 a...a

0-(1)-31

(0)-99

0-(3)-9

YES NO

0000-9999

1-50000

(0)-115

Response

(NO) YES

Comment

Authorization Code Conditionally Last

Enhancement

Number of initial bursts of tone to be given

(Disable) Enable Authcode - last Retry

Route number for Authcode - last Retry RAN

Class code value assigned to authcode

Class of Service

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Network Class of Service

CIS ANI category code

Automatically generate authcodes

Security password (NAUT)

Number of authcodes to be generated automatically

Class code to be automatically assigned

AUT: Authcode entries data block

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

SPWD

CODE

SARC

- SERV

- SGRP

CLAS

SECR

Response

aaa

AUT xx xxxx xxxx

NO YES nnn...nnn

0-999

(0)-115

0000-9999

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type = AUT (Authcode entries)

Customer number associated with this function

Secure Data Password

Authcode

Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) Code

SAR Service functions for SARC

SGRP number

Class code

Security password

966 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

SAR: Scheduled Access Restriction data block

OFFP

- STAR

- STOP

- DAYS

- COS

- TGAR

- NCOS

ICR

LOCK

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

CUST

SPWD

SGRP

SCDR

Response

aaa

SAR xx xxxx

0-999

(NO) YES

1-8 hh mm hh mm d ... d a...a

0-(1)-31

(0)-99

(NO) YES

(1)-8

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type = SAR (Scheduled Access Restriction)

Customer number associated with this function

Secure Data Password

SAR Group number

Activate CDR for the SAR code feature

Off-hour Period number

Start time

Stop time

Respond with a new set of days to be used

Class of Service

Trunk Group Access Restriction

Network Class of Service

Incoming Calls are Restricted.

Lock period

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

ACDR NO YES

Comment

Activate CDR for authcodes.

There is no default.

ACLE

ALEN

(NO) YES Authorization Code Conditionally Last

Enhancement

1-4

1-7

Authcode Length (all authcodes are the same length).

Room Authcode

NAUT

Pack/Rel

cdr-1 nars-24 baut-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 967

LD 88: Authorization Code

Prompt Response

1-14 BAUT

AUTHCOD_ALRM

(OFF)

ON

AUTO YES NO

Comment Pack/Rel

basic-21

Disable Authcode Alarm

Enable Authcode Alarm

Automatically generate authcodes.

Prompted when Network Authorization Code

(NAUT) package 63 is equipped and REQ =

"NEW". ALEN must be a minimum of four digits.

naut-1

BRST 0-(10)

CAC_CIS 0-(3)-9

CLAS (0)-115

CODE

COS

CUST

X

<CR> xxxx

ALL

(CTD)

CUN

FR1

FR2

FRE

IPNA

IRGA

SRE

TLD

UNR xx

Number of initial bursts of tone to be given

CIS ANI category code nars-24 cist-24

Class code value assigned to authcode. Cycle continues with CODE. Prompted when SARC =

NO.

When TYPE = "AUT", enter X to have authcode be an exempt code. When this data is printed, the month in which authcode was deactivated is output. Default is "0" when adding authcode entries.

Exempt authcode

End of input baut-1

Authcode (number of digits must equal the ALEN response).

Delete all Authcodes if Network Authorization

Code (NAUT) package 63 is equipped and codes were automatically generated.

baut-1

Class of Service

Conditionally Toll Denied

Conditionally Unrestricted

Fully Restricted class 1

Fully Restricted class 2

Fully Restricted

Intercept Position

Interrogation set

Semi-Restricted

Toll Denied

Unrestricted baut-1

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15 esn-1

968 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

DAYS d...d

Comment Pack/Rel

Respond with a new set of days to be used d...d = maximum of seven entries in range of 1-7 sar-20

ICR

LOCK

NCOS

(NO) YES

(1)-8

0-99

Incoming Calls are Restricted.

Lock period sar-20 sar-20

NMBR 1-50000

Network Class of Service (enter the new NCOS that replaces the NCOS of the station).

baut-1

Number of authcodes to be generated automatically

To generate up to 50,000 authcodes, the maximum entry at NMBR is 5000 each time it is prompted.

baut-1

OFFP 1-8

RANR

RAN2

REQ

RTRY x...x

X x...x

X

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

(NO)

YES

Off-hour Period number

Go to ICR prompt.

sar-20

RAN route number for "Authcode Last" prompt

(NAUT), where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG

1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E

No RAN route naut-1

Route number for Authcode - last Retry RAN, where:

• x...x = 0-127 for Small system, CS 1000S, MG

1000B and MG 1000T

• x...x = 0-511 for Large system and CS 1000E dpna-21

Removes and deactivates Authcode-last Retry

RAN baut-1 Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create new data block

Delete existing data block

Print data block

Disable authcode - last Retry.

Enable authcode - last Retry.

dpna-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 969

LD 88: Authorization Code

Prompt Response Comment

Prompted with Direct Private Network Access

(DPNA) package 250.

SARC NO YES Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) Code is to be a Scheduled Access Restriction (SAR) authorization code.

Pack/Rel

sar-20

SCDR

SECR

SERV

SGRP

SPWD

STAR

STOP

(NO) YES Activate CDR for the SAR code feature.

0000-9999 Security password as entered during AUTO sequence

Prompted when CODE = ALL. Cycle continues with CODE.

SAR Service functions for SARC

(END) ENA Enable Denied Enable Allowed

(LKD) LKA Lock Denied Lock Allowed

(DSD) DSA Disable Denied Disable Allowed

(UND) UNA Unlock Denied Unlock Allowed

Up to four entries can be made at once.

0-999

ALL

<CR>

Scheduled Access Restriction group (SGRP) number

Authorization code is to be a customer SARC.

End of SAR changes, return to REQ.

xxxx hh mm

X hh mm

X sar-20 baut-1 sar-20 sar-20

Secure Data Password (same password as defined for DISA on a per customer basis in LD

15).

Prompt do not appear to user with a LAO password.

baut-1 sar-20 Start time

The current start time (hours and minutes) is printed individually after the prompt. Respond with the new start time.

Remove value and return to OFFP.

Stop time

The current stop time (hours and minutes) is printed individually after the prompt. Respond with the new stop time.

Remove value and return to OFFP.

sar-20

970 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response

TGAR 0-(1)-31

Comment

Trunk Group Access Restriction range

TYPE

AUB

AUT

RAUB

RAUT

SAR

Type of data block

Authcode data block

Authcode entries data block

Room Authcode data block (Hospitality

Management)

Room Authcode entries (Hospitality

Management) data block

Scheduled Access Restriction data block

Alphabetical list of prompts

Pack/Rel

baut-1 baut-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 971

LD 88: Authorization Code

972 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 46: LD 90: Electronic Switched

Network 3

Overlay program 90 allows data for network translation tables to be generated and administered.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only) on page 973

HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block on page 974

LOC: Location code data block (NARS only)

on page 974

NPA: Number Plan area code data block on page 975

NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block on page 976

NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block on page 976

SPN: Special Number Translation data block on page 977

HLOC: Home Location data block (NARS only)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

Response

a...a

xx

NET

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 973

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

TRAN

TYPE

HLOC

Response

aaa

HLOC xxx y..y

- DMI 1-255

Comment

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = HLOC (Home Location code)

Home Location code, where xxx = 3 digit home location code and y...y = extended code of 1-4 digits. The extended code is optional.

Digit Manipulation Index

HNPA: Home Number Plan area code data block

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

HNPA

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

HNPA xxx

1xxx

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = HNPA (Home Number plan area code transmission)

Home Numbering Plan Area code where xxx = 200 - 999

Home Numbering Plan Area code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 200 - 999.

LOC: Location code data block (NARS only)

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

LOC

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

LOC xxx y...y

- FLEN

- RLI

(0)-24 xxxx

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = LOC (Location code)

Location code, where x = home location code and y...y = extended code of 1-4 digits. The extended code is optional.

Flexible Length

Route List Index

974 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- NPA

- NXX

- ITOH

Response

xxxxxxx xxxxxxx

(NO) YES

- ITEI

- LDN xxx xx...xx

- DID (NO) YES

- - MNXX (NO) YES

- - SAVE 1-7

- - - OFFC xxxxxxx

- - RNGE 0000000-999999

9

Comment

maximum 7 digit NPA code allowed maximum 7 digit NXX code allowed

Inhibit Time Out Handler

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index

Listed Directory Number

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Multiple NXX

Saved digits

Office Code

Range

NPA: Number Plan area code data block

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

NPA

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

NPA xxx y..y z..z

- RLI

- SDRR

- - DENY xxxx a...a

x...x

- - DMI 1-255

- - - LDID x...x

- - LDDD

- - DID x...x

x...x

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = NPA (Number plan area code transmission)

Numbering Plan Area code translation, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits, and z..z = 1-4 digits. the y..y and z..z

entries are optional. Precede the xxx entry with the character "1" when using 1+ dialing.

Route List Index

Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =

ALOW, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or STRK)

Number to be denied within the NPA

Digit Manipulation Index

Local DID number to be recognized

Local DDD number to be recognized

Remote DID number to be recognized

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 975

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

- - DDD

- - ITED

- - ALOW

- ITEI

Response

x...x

x...x

x...x

xxx

Comment

Remote DDD number to be recognized

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits

Allowed codes

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index

NSCL: Network Speed Call List data block

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

- ITEI

NSCC

- SSCL

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

NSCL xxx xxx

0-253

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = NSCL (Network Speed Call List)

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Index

Network Speed Call access Code

System Speed Call List number

NXX: Central Office Code Translation data block

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

NXX

- RLI

- SDRR

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

NXX xxx y..y

xxxx a...a

- - DENY x...x

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = NXX (Central Office Code Translation)

Numbering Plan Exchange (Central Office)

Route List Index

Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =

ALOW, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or STRK)

Number to be denied within the NXX

976 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

- - DMI

- - - LDID

- LDDD

- - DID

- - DDD

- - ITED

- - ALOW

- ITEI x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

xxx

Response

1-255 x...x

x...x

Digit Manipulation Index

Comment

Local DID number to be recognized

Local DDD number to be recognized

Remote DID number to be recognized

Remote DDD number to be recognized

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits

Allowed codes

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion index

SPN: Special Number Translation data block

Prompt

REQ

CUST

FEAT

TRAN

TYPE

SPN

- FLEN

- - INPL

- ITOH

- RLI

- CLTP

Response

a...a

xx

NET aaa

SPN x..x

(0)-24

(NO) YES

(NO) YES xxxx a...a

- SDRR

- - DENY

- - DMI a...a

x...x

1-255

- - - LDID x...x

- - LDDD

- - DID x...x

x...x

Comment

Request (a...a = CHG, END, LCHG, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Customer number associated with this function

Feature = NET

Translator (aaa = AC1, AC2, or SUM)

Type = SPN (Special Number Translation)

Special Number translation

Flexible Length

International Dialing Plan

Inhibit Time-out Handler

Route List Index

Type of call that is defined by the special number (a...a =

(NONE), LOCL, NATL, INTL, SSER, or SERH)

Supplemental Digit Restriction or Recognition (a...a =

ALOW, ARRN, DDD, DENY, DID, ITED, LDDD, LDID, or

STRK)

Number to be Denied

Digit Manipulation Index

Local DID number to be recognized

Local DDD number to be recognized

Remote DID number to be recognized

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 977

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

- - DDD

- - ITED

- - ARRN

- - STRK

- - ALOW

- - - ARLI

Response

x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

0-1999

Comment

Remote DDD number to be recognized

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits

Alternate Routing Remote Number

Allowed codes for ADM/MDM

Allowed codes

Alternative Route List Index

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ALOW x...x

Response

ARLI

ARRN

0-255

0-999 0-1999 x...x

Comment

Allowed codes for ADM/MDM to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Pack/Rel

basic-22

Alternative Route List Index

Alternative Route List Index with Flexible

Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160.

The ARRN prompt is repeated after the

ARLI prompt until <CR> is entered (in response to ARRN).

fnp-16 basic-7.00

Alternate Routing Remote Number to be recognized within SPN.

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or 19-m for

SPN.

fnp-16

978 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

CLTP

CUST

DDD

DENY

(NONE)

LOCL

NATL

INTL

SSER

SERH xx x...x

<CR> x...x

Response Comment

Where: m = number of digits entered for

SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Pack/Rel

kd3-20 Type of call that is defined by the special number.

No call type

Local

National

International

Special Service

Special Service Hold

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15.

b/nars-1

Remote DDD number to be recognized within the NPA, NXX or SPN.

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Return to SDRR prompt.

b/nars-5

Number to be denied within the

NPA,NXX,SPN, or SDR.

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 979

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

DID

DMI

FEAT

<CR>

(NO) YES x...x

Response

<CR>

1-255

1-999 1-1999

Comment

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Return to SDRR prompt.

Pack/Rel

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

This location arranged for DID

Remote DID number to be recognized within the NPA,NXX or SPN.

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Precede with X to remove.

Return to SDRR prompt.

bnars-1

Digit Manipulation Index

Digit Manipulation Index with Flexible

Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160

DMI is prompted only when the Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150 is equipped and SDRR = LDID.

dnxp-13 basic-7.00

Feature nars-1

980 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

NET

FLEN

HLOC

HNPA

INPL

ITED

(0)-24 xxx xxx y..y

xxx

1xxx

(NO) YES x...x

Comment

Network translation tables

Pack/Rel

Flexible Length (the number of digits the system expects to receive before accessing a trunk and outpulsing these digits) fnp-20

Flexible Length range

Home Location code xxx = 3 digits

Extended Home Location code, where xxx

= 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. The space between the xxx and y..y digits is optional.

nars-1

Home Numbering Plan Area code (a leading zero is not allowed)

Response for Home Numbering Plan Area code, where xxx = 200-999. A leading zero is not allowed.

Response for Home Numbering Plan Area code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 200-999.

Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".

nanp-19

International Dialing Plan for special number

Default to North American operation when

FLEN = 0. Prompted with Flexible

Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160, FLEN

= 0 and SPN = 0, 00, 01, 011, 411, 611, 911,

800, 1800.

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits

(number to be restricted within the NPA for the excluded trunk group)

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-1

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 981

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

ITEI

ITOH

LDDD

LDID

<CR>

(0)-127

(0)-255

(NO) YES x...x

<CR> x...x

Response Comment

the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Return to SDRR prompt

Pack/Rel

BARS Incoming Trunk group Exclusion

Index

NARS Incoming Trunk group Exclusion

Index

Inhibit Time-Out Handler b/nars-5 fnp-16

Local DDD number to be recognized within the NPA, NXX, or SPN

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or: b/nars-5

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Return to SDRR prompt

Local DID number to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact b/nars-5

982 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

LDN

LOC

MNXX

NPA

NSCC

NXX

<CR> xx...xx

x...x

xxx y..y

xxx xxx y..y z..z

xxx

Response

(NO) YES

1xxx

1xxx y..y z..z

xxxxxxx

Comment

same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Return to SDRR prompt

Pack/Rel

Listed Directory Number

Up to 20 digit listed directory number, including NPA.

Location code, where xxx = 3 digits

Location code, where x = home location code and y..y = extended code of 1-4 digits.

The extended code is optional. Separate x and y codes with a space.

nars-1

Multiple NXX codes and ranges

This prompt should not be used with NARS

DPNSS1.

b/nars-5

Numbering Plan Area code translation

Area code translation, where xxx = 3 digits.

A leading zero is not allowed.

nanp-19

Extended NPA code translation. An extended NPA code can be from 4 to 10 digits, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits and z..z = 1-4 digits. Separate xxx, y..y and z..z entries with a space.

Area code translation using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 3 digits. Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".

Extended NPA code translation 1+ dialing.

An extended NPA code using 1+ dialing can be from 5 to 11 digits, where xxx = 3 digits, y..y = 1-3 digits and z..z = 1-4 digits.

Separate xxx, y..y and z..z entries with a space. Note that the xxx entry must be preceded with the character "1".

Numbering Plan Area Code basic-25 up to 7 digits are allowed when TYPE

= LOC

One to three-digit Network Speed Call access Code

Numbering Plan Exchange nars-1 b/nars-1

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 983

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

xxx

Response

1xxx

OFFC

REQ

RLI xxx y..y

1xxx y..y

<CR> xxxxxxx xxxxxxx

CHG

END

LCHG

NEW

OUT

PRT

0-127

0-255

0-999 0-1999

Comment

Office code translation, where xxx = 3 digits.

A leading zero is not allowed.

Office code translation using 1+ dialing, where: xxx = 3 digits. The xxx entry must be preceded with the digit "1".

Extended NXX code, where xxx = 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. Separate the NXX code

(xxx) and the extended

Pack/Rel

Extended NXX code using 1+ dialing, where xxx = 3 digits and y..y = 1-4 digits. Separate the NXX code (xxx) and the extended code

(y..y) with a space. The xxx entry must be preceded with the digit "1".

Return to REQ.

Public Network Exchange Code basic-25 up to 7 digits are allowed when TYPE

= LOC

Office Code (in North America, the NXX of the DID number)

Prompted if MNXX = YES.

b/nars-5

Note:

All OFFC entries must be the same length.

Request.

Change existing data block.

Exit Overlay program.

Print date and time that each data group was last changed (data groups include:

LOC, HLOC, NPA, HNPA, NXX, SPN and

NSCL)

Create new data block.

Delete existing data block.

Print data block.

esn-1

BARS Route List Index

NARS Route List Index

Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Route List

Index

Must be in the range specified by prompt

MXRL in LD 86, (example, 0 ² RLI <

MXRL).

esn-20 basic-7.00

984 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

RNGE

Response

0000000

9999999

SAVE

SDRR

SPN

SSCL

STRK

1-7

ALOW

ARRN

DDD

DENY

DID

ITED

LDDD

LDID

STRK

<CR> x...x

0-4095 x...x

Comment Pack/Rel

Type a range with a lower and upper limit for the DID number range.

Enter the same number of digits as the number of trailing digits to be saved. For example, if SAVE is four digits, then the range must be four-digit number range, such as RNGE 1000 1999.

b/nars-1

Saved digits (number of trailing digits to be saved in dialed extension number - DID only).

b/nars-1

Supplemental Digit Restriction or

Recognition

Allowed codes

Alternate Routing Remote Number

Recognized remote Direct Distance Dial codes

Restricted codes

Recognized remote Direct Inward Dial codes

Incoming Trunk group Exclusion Digits

Recognized Local Direct Distance Dial codes

Recognized Local Direct Inward Dial codes

For ADM/MDM trunk groups

Return to SPN b/nars-5

Special Number.

Enter a carriage return or <CR> to return to the REQ prompt.

b/nars-1

Special Number translation

Enter the SPN digits in groups of 3 or 4 digits, separated by a space (e.g., xxxx xxx xxxx). The SPN can be up to 19 digits long.

The maximum length no longer depends on whether or not the first digit of the SPN is a

"1". That restriction has been removed.

The maximum number of groups allowed is

5.

nars-1 System Speed Call List number

Allowed codes for ADM/MDM to be recognized within the NXX, NPA or SPN

The maximum number of digits to be entered must be the lesser of 10 or:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 985

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

Prompt

TRAN

TYPE

AC1

AC2

SUM

ALL

HLOC

HNPA

LOC

NPA

NSCL

NXX

SPN

Response Comment

• 7-m (8-m for 1 + dialing) for NXX

• 10-m (11-m for 1 + dialing) for NPA

• 19-m for SPN

Where: m = number of digits entered for

NPA, NXX, or SPN.

These numbers do not have to be leftwise unique. For non leftwise unique numbers, the longer number takes precedence over the shorter number. However, the exact same numbers (not leftwise unique and the same length) are still blocked.

Pack/Rel

Translator

Access Code 1 (NARS/BARS)

Access Code 2 (NARS)

Summary of Network Translations (allowed when REQ = PRT) b/nars-1

Type of data block

If REQ = PRT, all of the following types is printed

ESN Home Location Code translation data block (NARS only)

Home NPA translation code (Should not be used on DPNSS1) esn-1

ESN Location Code translation data block

(NARS only)

Numbering Plan Area code translation data block (Should not be used on DPNSS1)

Network Speed Call List data block

Central Office Code Translation data block

(Should not be used on DPNSS1)

Special code translation data block basic-4.00

Note:

With ESN Location Code Expansion, the system allows printing of partial matches of translation codes. If a partial translation code is entered for HLOC,

HNPA, LOC, NPA, NSCC, NXX, or SPN, all entries with initial match of the entered value are printed. For example, if LOC =

986 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt Response

Alphabetical list of prompts

Comment

3, all Location Codes beginning with 3 are printed.

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 987

LD 90: Electronic Switched Network 3

988 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 47: LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

Overlay program 93 is used to enable and administer the Multi-Tenant Service feature. It is used to configure or change assignments and print data for Attendant Console groups, Tenant-to-Tenant groups,

Tenant-to-Route groups, Tenant-to-Attendant Console groups, and Route-to-Attendant Console groups.

Prompts and responses

REQ

Prompt

TYPE

ECDN

ICDN

ICPS

- ICPR

ACC

DENY

ALOW

AGNO

CUST

CPG

CPGS

ROUT

TEN

MBGS

SGRP

NTBL

ANUM

NAGN

Response

aaa a...a

xx

1-63

(NO) YES

0-511

1-511

(0)-65535

(0)-999 x...x

x...x

aaa

0-<NIPN> aaaa

1-511 1-511

1-511 1-511

0-63

(0)-63

1-63 1-63

0-63

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block (a...a = ACG, CPG, CPGP, RACC,

RACG, RCPG, TACC, TACG, TCPG, TENS, or TGEN)

Customer number associated with this function

Console Presentation Group number

Customer Presentation Group Services

Route number

Tenant number

Multi-location Business Group Subgroup

Scheduled Access Restriction Group number

External Call DN

Internal Call DN

Intercept Computer Printer Search [(CIR) or COM]

Intercept Computer Printer number

Access (aaaa = ALOW or DENY)

Access denied tenant numbers

Access allowed tenant numbers

Attendant Console Group Number

NAS routing Table

Add Attendant Console Numbers

Night Attendant Console Group Number

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 989

LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

AQTT

AODN

CWCL

CWTM

CWBZ

EFLL

FRRT

- FRT

SRRT

- SRT

WAIT

- MURT

RICI

TIM1

NIT2

TIM2

NIT3

TIM3

NIT4

TIM4

ICI

Prompt

LDN0

LDN1

LDN2

LDN3

LDN4

LDN5

NIT1 hh mm x...x

hh mm x...x

hh mm x...x

hh mm xx aaa x...x

x...x

x...x

x...x

Response

x...x

x...x

x...x

Comment

Listed DN 0

Listed DN 1

Listed DN 2

Listed DN 3

Listed DN 4

Listed DN 5

First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN

Time for first NTOD DN

Second NTOD DN

Time for second NTOD DN

Third NTOD DN

Time for third NTOD DN

Fourth NTOD DN

Time for fourth NTOD DN

Incoming Call Indicators (ICI)

0-(30)-255 xxxx

Attendant Queuing Threshold

Attendant Overflow DN

(0)-255 (0)-255 Call Waiting Call Limit

(0)-511 (0)-511 Call Waiting Time

(NO) YES

(0)-8064

0-511

0-(20)-2044

Call Waiting Buzz

Efficiency Factor Loading Level

First RAN Route number

First RAN Time threshold

0-511

0-(20)-2044 aaa

0-511

(NO) xx

Second RAN Route number

Second RAN Time threshold

Wait time treatment (aaa = (RGB), MUS, or SIL)

Music Route number if WAIT = MUS

Recorded overflow announcement on ICI keys

990 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ACC

AGNO

ALOW

ANUM

AODN

AQTT

CPG

Response

DENY

ALOW

Comment

Access

Denied tenants are to be entered.

Sets with TEND Class of Service can access all routes. Sets with TENA can only access routes if tenant to route access is allowed for that set's tenant. When REQ = PRT, print access denied tenants.

Allowed tenants are to be entered.

Sets with TEND Class of Service can access all routes. Sets with TENA can only access routes if tenant to route access is allowed for that set's tenant. When REQ = PRT, print access allowed tenants.

Pack/Rel

tens-7

0-63 Attendant Console Group Number

AGNO 0 always exists and contains all

Attendant Consoles that are configured for the customer. AGNO is initially specified for all tenants. When TYPE = CPG, AGNO cannot be zero.

tens-7 tens-7 1-511 1-511 Access allowed tenant numbers

Prompted when ACC = ALOW.

ALL

<CR>

Access allowed all tenants

Stop ALOW prompt.

1-63 1-63

<CR>

Add Attendant Console Numbers.

Stop prompt.

Precede with X to remove.

tens-7 xxxx aop/ cpg-15

0-(30)-255

1-63

Attendant Overflow DN

Precede with X to remove.

Attendant Queuing Threshold

Console Presentation Group number

Use <CR> to print all configured CPG data blocks for the customer.

aop/ cpg-15 cpg-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 991

LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

Prompt

CPGS

CUST

CWBZ

CWCL

CWTM

Response

(NO)

YES

Comment

Disable Customer Presentation Group level

Services

Enable Customer Presentation Group level

Services

Prompted with Console Presentation Group

(CPG) package 172.

Pack/Rel

cpg-15 xx

<CR>

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15

Print specified data for all customers when

REQ = PRT tens-7

(NO) YES (NO) YES

Call Waiting Buzz

First field: Provide 2 second buzz on exceeding upper CWCL or CWTM threshold.

Second field: Buzz on first call entering queu cpg-15

(0)-255 (0)-255

Lower and upper thresholds for Call Waiting

Call Limit

The call waiting lamp starts flashing when number of calls in the queue meets or exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the number of calls in queue is less than the lower threshold.

Enter 0 0 to disable this feature.

cpg-15

(0)-1000 (0)-1000

Lower and upper thresholds defined as a percentage of the active consoles when OPT =

FACA in LD 15

When the FACA/FACD option is changed in LD

15, a new value for CWCL must be set or the default values are used. The CWCL values for the tenant-level are set equal to the customerlevel values. (CWCL is also given in LD 15).

(0)-511 (0)-511

Lower and upper thresholds (in seconds) for

Call Waiting Time

The Call Waiting lamp starts flashing when the call in the queue meets or exceeds the upper threshold. The lamp continues to flash until the wait time is less than the lower threshold.

Enter 0 0 to disable this feature.

cpg-15

992 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DENY

ECDN

EFLL

FRRT

FRT

ICDN

ICI

Response Comment

1-511 1-511 Access denied tenant numbers

Prompted when ACC = DENY.

ALL

<CR>

Access denied all other tenants

Stop DENY prompt.

x...x

Pack/Rel

tens-7

External Call DN, where: x...x = up to 13 digits

DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and multi-tenant is not on intercept position.

The DN is used for intercept treatment for external calls.

Prompted with Intercept Computer Interface

(ICP) package 143.

icp-16

(0)-8064

0-511

Efficiency Factor Loading Level

Prompted with Network Attendant Service

(NAS) package 159.

First RAN Route number

Precede with X to remove.

nas-18 roa/cpg-15

0-(20)-2044 First RAN Time threshold xxxx Internal Call DN, where: x...x = up to 13 digits

DN used for intercept transfer when the FDN and multi-tenant is not on intercept position.

The DN is used for intercept treatment for internal calls.

roa/cpg-15 xx aaa Incoming Call Indicators (ICI). Where:

• xx = key number (0-19)

• aaa = Call type**** aaa is any of the following:

• CAx = Station Category (x = 1-7)

• CFB = Call Forward Busy

• CFN = Call Forward No Answer

• DF0 = Dial 0 Fully Restricted

• DL0 = Dial 0

• IAT = Inter-Attendant call cpg-20

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 993

LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

Prompt

ICPR

ICPS

LDN0

LDN1

LDN2

LDN3

Response

0-<NIPN>

(CIR)

COM xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx

Comment

• IEN = Idle Extension Notification

• INT = Intercept

• LCT = Lockout intercept

• LD0 = Listed DN 0

• LD1 = Listed DN 1

• LD2 = Listed DN 2

• LD3 = Listed DN 3

• LD4 = Listed DN 4

• LD5 = Listed DN 5

• MWC = Message Waiting Calls

• NUL = remove ICI appearances

• RLL = Recall

• Rxxx Rxxx = Routes (0-511). Enter one or more routes.

Pack/Rel

Intercept Computer Printer number

NIPN is defined in LD 15. Prompted when ICPS

= COM.

icp-10

Intercept Computer Printer Search (when more than one console is used)

Circular search

One common printer for all consoles icp-10 cpg-15 Listed DN 0

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

Listed DN 1

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

cpg-15

Listed DN 2

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

Listed DN 3 cpg-15 cpg-15

994 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

LDN4

LDN5

MBGS

MURT

NAGN

NIT1

NIT2

NIT3

Response Comment

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

xxxx xxxx

Listed DN 4

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

Listed DN 5

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

(0)-65535

0-511

0-63 xxxx

Multi-location Business Group Subgroup for tenant. Where:

• 0 = no indication

• 1-65535 = Subgroup (tenant) identifier

As with the ISDN Private Network Identifier

(PNI), the entries to this prompt must be coordinated with the far- end to ensure all features function correctly within a network.

Music Route number if WAIT = MUS

Precede with X to remove.

Night Attendant Console Group Number xxxx xxxx

Pack/Rel

nldn-20 nldn-20 tens-16 roa/ cpg-15

First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN

DN can be defined as a PLDN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

cpg-15 cpg-15 Second NTOD DN

DN can be defined as a PLDN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

Third NTOD DN

DN can be defined as a PLDN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

cpg-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 995

LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

Prompt

NIT4

NTBL

REQ

RICI

ROUT

SGRP

SRRT

SRT

TEN

TIM1

Response

xxxx

Comment

Fourth NTOD DN

DN can be defined as a PLDN

Up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory

Number Expansion (DNXP) package 150.

Precede with X to remove.

(0)-63

Pack/Rel

cpg-15

NAS routing Table to be used for calls directed to this Attendant Console Group (ACG)/

Console Presentation Group (CPG).

nas-16

CHG

END

NEW

Request

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program

Create the Multi-Tenant Service data block.

If REQ = NEW and <CR> is entered for all prompts, then all parameters default to the customer data block (LD 15) values except

LDN0-3, ICI, RICI and AQTT.

Remove the Multi-Tenant Service data block.

Print the data block specified by TYPE.

tens-7

OUT

PRT

(NO) xx ... xx Recorded overflow announcement on ICI keys

0-19

Precede with X to remove.

0-511

<CR>

Route number

Print all routes for the specified type when REQ

= PRT.

roa/ cpg-15 tens-7

(0)-999 Scheduled Access Restriction Group number.

Prompted when TYPE = TGEN sar-20 roa/ cpg-15 0-511 Second RAN Route number

Precede with X to remove.

0-(20)-2044 Second RAN Time threshold

1-511

<CR> hh mm

Tenant number

Print specified data for all tenants of CUST when REQ = PRT.

Time for first NTOD DN. Where:

• hh = 0-23

• mm = 0-59 roa/ cpg-15 tens-7 cpg-15

996 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TIM2

TIM3

TIM4

TYPE

WAIT

Response

hh mm

Comment

Time for second NTOD DN hh mm hh mm

Time for third NTOD DN

Time for fourth NTOD DN

CPG

CPGP

RACC

RCPG

TACC

TCPG

TENS

TGEN

(RGB)

MUS

SIL

Pack/Rel

cpg-15 cpg-15 cpg-15

Type of data block

Console Presentation Group data block.

If REQ = NEW and <CR> is entered for all prompts, then all parameters default to the customer data block (LD 15) values except

LDN0-LDN3, ICI, and RICI which are cleared.

Use <CR> to print all configured CPG data blocks for the customer.

Console Presentation Group level parameters

Tenant-to-Route Access data block

Route-to-Attendant Presentation Group data block

Tenant-to-Tenant Access data block

Tenant-to-Attendant Console Group data block

Multi-Tenant Service data block

Tenant SAR data block tens-7

Wait time treatment

Ring Back

Music

Silence roa/ cpg -15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 997

LD 93: Multi-Tenant Service

998 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 48: LD 94: Multifrequency

Signaling

Overlay program 94 allows the implementation and administration of R2 and L1 Multifrequency Compelled

Signaling (MFC) and Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) tables.

Contents

Section

Overlay program 94 allows the implementation and administration of R2 and L1

Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) and Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel (MFE) tables.

MFC Information:

Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on

page 1000

Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table

on page 1002

Table 18: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) outgoing table on page 1003

MFE Information:

Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on page 1003

Table 20: MFE DID default incoming table

on page 1004

Table 21: MFE DOD default outgoing table

on page 1004

2 of 5 and 2 0f 6 Information:

Table 22: 2 of 5 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables

on page 1005

Table 23: 2 of 6 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables

on page 1005

L1 Signaling information:

Table 24: Programmable signals for all 6 L1 signaling levels on page 1006

Table 25: MFC default (standard) incoming tables for L1 signaling

on page 1009

Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling on page 1012

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 999

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Prompts and responses

- NTT

EECD

SMFC

SCNT

CNDR

LVNO

DFLT

RECV

ICOG

MAXT

TBNO

CACD

- SET

- ATT

- TIE

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

XMIT

Response

aaa aaaa

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, NEW, OUT, or PRT)

Type of data block (aaaa = L1MF, MFET, MFK5, MFK6, R2MF or R2MFC)

Incoming/Outgoing (aaa = ICT or OGT) aaa

(1)-127 Maximum Number of Tables

1-127 <CR> Table Number

(NO) YES

(1)-10

(1)-10

1-(6)-10

Category Code Default

Set category code

Attendant category code

TIE category code

1-(6)-10 Non-TIE category code

1-127 <CR> End-to-End Signaling Code

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

Send MFC

Switch CNI on Next

(NO) YES

1-6

Calling Number Display Restriction

Level Number

0-127 Default Table number

1-15 mmmm Receive signal number and mnemonic (MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6)

1-15 NUL Remove signal number and mnemonic (MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6) mmmm 1-15 Transmit signal mnemonic and number (MFC, MFE or MFK) mmmm 0

IDCT n

Remove signal mnemonic and number (MFC, MFE or MFK)

Idle Call Trace Signal number

Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables

Group Description of mnemonic

Forward Level 1 Group I

Function mnemonic

DGT1 Digit 1 -

1000 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Group

Backward Level 1 Group A

Forward Level 2 Group II

Prompts and responses

CCNI

TFST *

TNM1 *

TNM2 *

TNM3 *

TNXT *

VACO *

OPER

NOPR

COMP

CONG

FAIL

NEXT

SCAT

SCNI

TERM

PRIO *

REST

RICA *

TOBI *

TOLL

Function mnemonic

DGT9

DGT0

HTDM

ECNI

EODL

Description of mnemonic

Digit 9

Digit 0

H tandem signal. Sent before the called party DN if DN is in the Special Service

List (SSL). The International

Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 must be equipped.

CNI (Calling Number Identification) not available

End of Dialing End of CPN (Calling Party

Number) Request not accepted.

Send category. Send first CNI digit.

Send next CNI digit.

Address Complete, next group

Congestion

Call Failure

Send Next digit (fixed value)

Send Category

Send first CNI digit; send next CNI digit

Terminated

Tandem, send first digit

Send last but one digit

Send last but two digits

Send last but three digits

Tandem, send next digit

Vacant Office

Operator/attendant

Subscriber No Priority

Subscriber with Priority

Restricted Station

Route Incoming Call to Attendant

Toll Operator Break-In

Toll call

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1001

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group

Backward Level 2 Group B

Function mnemonic

BUBA **

BUBN **

BUSY

CONG

FAIL

IDCT

IDLE

OUTT

VACC

* Function is transmitted (Receive only)

** Function is received (Transmit only)

Description of mnemonic

Busy (break in allowed after TOBI)

Busy (break in not allowed after TOBI)

Station Busy

Congestion

Failure

Idle Call Trace

Station Idle

Station Out-of-Order

Vacant number

Note:

Signal numbers not listed in Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables

on page 1000 default to NUL (no assigned function).

Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table

Group

Receive Level 1 Group I

Transmit Level 1 Group A

Receive Level 2 Group II

Transmit Level 2 Group B

Signal number

1 - 9 10 11 12 12

13 15 15

Function mnemonic

DGT1 - DGT9 DGT0 11 ASTX (CNDR)

ECNI 12 DPAL (CNDR) 13 POND

(CNDR) EODL 15 DPDN (CNDR)

1 3 4 5 6 9 11 12

13 15 15

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13

2 3 4 5 8 9

NEXT COMP CONG SCAT TERM SCNI

ASTX 11 (CNDR) DPAL 12 (CNDR)

POND 13 (CNDR) FAIL DPDN 15

(CNDR)

NOPR PRIO NOPR OPER NOPR

REST NOPR PRIO OPER NOPR

NOPR NOPR

IDLE BUSY CONG VACC OUTT FAIL

Note:

Signal numbers not listed in Table 17: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) incoming table on

page 1002 default to NUL (no assigned function.)

1002 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Table 18: MFC DID/TIE default (standard) outgoing table

Group

Transmit Level 1 Group I

Signal number Function mnemonic

1 - 9 10 12 15 DGT1 - DGT9 DGT0 ECNI EODL

Receive Level 1 Group A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 15

NEXT TNM1 COMP CONG SCAT

TERM TMN2 TNM3 SCNI TFST TNXT

FAIL

Transmit Level 2 Group II; Receive Level 2 Group B

1 5 7 2 3 4 5 8 9 NOPR OPER REST IDLE BUSY CONG

VACC OUTT FAIL

Note:

In Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables on page 1003, for

incoming tables the signals which are received are forwarded signals, MFE tables have no

Level 2 forward signals. Level 1 values for function xxxx range from DGT0 to DGT9 (Digits

0 - 9).

Note:

Multiple function assignment allowed (same function to different signals).

Note:

Signals transmitted in the case of incoming tables, are backward signals.

Table 19: MFE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables

Group I

Forward Level 1

Backward Level 1

Function mnemonic

DGT1-9

DGT0

Description of mnemonic

Digits 1-9

Digit 0

ACOC

ACSS

SACD

SEND

Access code for a call to other installation

Access code for a call to special services

Send Access Code and Digits

Send remaining digits (plus last digits if preceded by TRAN)

COMP

TRAN

FAIL

CONG

Address Complete, change to Level 2 congestion

Transit connection

Failure, new attempt

Congestion

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1003

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group I

Backward: Level 2

Function mnemonic

IDLE

Description of mnemonic

Station Idle, charge call

BUSY

CONG

OUTT

VACC

Station Busy

Congestion

Out-of-Order

Vacant number

Table 20: MFE DID default incoming table

Group I

Receive Level 1

Transmit Level 1

Transmit Level 2

Signal number

1-9 10

2 3 -

1 3 3 3 3

Function mnemonic

DGT1-DGT9 DGT0

SEND COMP CONG

IDLE BUSY CONG OUTT VACC

Table 21: MFE DOD default outgoing table

Group I

Transmit Level 1

Receive Level 1

Receive Level 2

3

4

1

2

8

9

3

6

7

8

5

6

1

2

1

5

Signal number

1-9

10

COMP

TRAN

FAIL

CONG

IDLE

IDLE

BUSY

IDLE

Function mnemonic

DGT1-DGT9

DGT0

ACOC

ACSS

SACD

SEND

IDLE

IDLE

BUSY

BUSY

1004 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Group I Signal number

9

10

BUSY

BUSY

Function mnemonic

Table 22: 2 of 5 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables

Group

Forward Group I

Forward Group II

Backward Code A

Backward Code B

Function mnemonic

DGT0-9

LOCB

SERB

NATB

INTB

GRPA

CCAL

GRBC

SALL

GRPC

COMP

CONG

FMTR

CONG

BUSY

OUTT

EOSL

Description of mnemonic

Digits 0-9

Regular subscriber

Special Services inside the province

National

International

Send Group a digits

Send Class of Call

Send Group bc digits

Send All the digits

Send Group c digits

Change to code "b"

Congestion

Subscriber free with Metering

Congestion

Subscriber Busy

Line dead

End of Selection without line state reached

Table 23: 2 of 6 MFK signal functions ; Incoming and outgoing route tables

Group

Forward Group I

Forward Group II

Function mnemonic

DGT0-15

LOCB

LOCL

NATB

Description of mnemonic

Digits 0-15

Provincial-regular subscriber (charging by block)

Provincial-regular subscriber (charging by line)

National-regular subscriber (charging by block)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1005

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group

Backward Code A

Backward Code B

Function mnemonic

NATL

INTB

INTL

SERB

SERL

GRBC

SALL

SORG

CCAL

CONG

COMP

FMTR

CONG

BUSY

OUTT

EOSL

Description of mnemonic

National-regular subscriber (charging by line)

International-regular subscriber

(charging by block)

International-regular subscriber

(charging by line)

Special services (charging by block)

Special services (charging by line)

Send Group BC digits

Send All the digits

Send Origination subscribers number -

All Digits

Send Class of Call

Congestion

Change to code "B"

Subscriber free with Metering

Congestion

Subscriber Busy

Line dead

End of Selection without line state reached

Table 24: Programmable signals for all 6 L1 signaling levels

Group

Forward Level 1

Function mnemonic

DGT1 -

DGT9

Description of mnemonic

Digit 1 -

Digit 9

DGT0

UREJ

GOEN

EODL

Digit 0

Level 1 signal rejected (Abort call)

Change to a Supplementary Service

(SS) level. New level is Level 6 when terminator has a Backward

Supplementary Service (BSS).

Otherwise, the new level is Level 5.

End of Dialing. No more digits to send.

Aborts call when no digits have been received.

1006 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Group

Backward Level 1

Forward Level 2

Backward Level 2

Forward Level 3

Prompts and responses

Function mnemonic

NEXT

Description of mnemonic

Send Next digit in destination address

TNFS

COMP

FAIL

SCAT

TERM

CONG

EINF

Tandem encountered. Send digits again starting from the first digit.

Address Complete (Terminate signaling)

Call Failure (Abort call)

Send calling party category (always rejected)

Address complete (Terminate signaling)

Congestion (Abort call)

ELV2

ENO1

TNTX

OLNE

OPER

NETW

Request change from Level 1 to Level 6 for BSS activity. Enhanced signal set is implied.

Address complete. Change to Level 2.

Signaling also uses Level 3 or higher.

Request next digit in destination address. Implies using at least Level 3 signaling.

Tandem encountered (Send next digit)

Originator is a subscriber without priority

Originator is an attendant

Network call for Ring Again (RGA). Call is not intended for termination at a station.

Restricted circuit LSIG*

BUSY

FAIL

VCOT

IDLE

CONG

SOTI

SIIN

SUPL

NOSS

Destination is busy

Call has failed. Abort.

Call has terminated on a vacant DN

Destination is idle

Congestion (Abort call)

State of Termination undetermined

Simple call (No restrictions)

Request a Forward Supplementary

Service (FSS)

No further SS activity

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1007

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group

Backward Level 3

Forward Level 4

Backward Level 4

NEXT

Forward Level 5 and Backward Level 6

DGT1

DGT2

DGT3*

DGT4**

DGT5**

DGT6*

DGT7*

DGT8*

DGT9*

DGT10*

DGT11**

DGT12**

DGT13*

DGT14*

Function mnemonic

TERM

Description of mnemonic

Call complete (Terminate signaling)

FAIL

SUPL

SCNI**

NEXT

Call has failed (Abort)

Request BSS activity

Request Call Number Indicator (CNI)

Send FSS digit

DGT1 -

DGT9

DGT0

LFSS

CNI digit 1 -

CNI digit 9

CNI digit 0

Change to Level 1 when CNI is complete.

EODG

DGT1 -

DGT9

DGT0

KEND

No more CNI digits.

CNI digit 1 -

CNI digit 9

CNI digit 0

Changing to Level 6. Preceded by a

LFSS signal.

Send next CNI digit

FSS digit 1

FSS digit 2

FSS digit 3

FSS Digit 4

FSS Digit 5

FSS Digit 6

FSS Digit 7

FSS Digit 8

FSS Digit 9

FSS Digit 10

FSS Digit 11

FSS Digit 12

FSS Digit 13

FSS Digit 14

1008 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Group Function mnemonic

DGT15*

Description of mnemonic

FSS Digit 15

Backward Level 5 and Forward Level 6

KEND

FEND

KMFC

SS successful (Terminate signaling)

SS failed (Terminate signaling)

SS successful (Signaling continues at a slower rate)

FMFC SS failed (Signaling continues at a slower rate)

Request next SS digit NEXT

* Function is transmitted (Receive only)

** Used for Ring Again (RGA)

Table 25: MFC default (standard) incoming tables for L1 signaling

Group Signal number Function mnemonic

This table indicates the default signal tables for L1 signaling. The transmit sets indicate only those signals that can be sent. The receive sets must have duplicate signals to accept signals that must be mapped to another signal for processing.

Receive Level 1 Group I 1 DGT1 -

9

10

12

13

DGT9

DGT0

UREJ

GOEN

Transmit Level 1 Group A

5

6

3

4

15

1

2

9

10

11

12

EODL

NEXT

TNFS

COMP

FAIL

SCAT

TERM

CONG

EINF

ELV2

ENOI

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1009

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group

Receive Level 2 Group II

Transmit Level 2 Group B

Receive Level 3 Group III

SUPL

SUPL

SUPL

SUPL

SIIN

SIIN

SUPL

SUPL

NOSS

SIIN

SIIN

SIIN

SIIN

VCOT

IDLE

CONG

SOTI

TNXT

OLNE

LSIG

OLNE

OPER

OPER

OPER

OPER

NETW*

OLNE

UREJ

OLNE

BUSY

FAIL

9

10

11

12

15

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

14

5

6

Signal number

14

1

5

7

2

4

3

4

12

13

10

11

8

9

Function mnemonic

1010 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Group

Transmit Level 3 Group C

Receive Level 4 Group IV

Transmit Level 4 Group D

Receive Level 5 Group V

Transmit Level 5 Group E

Receive Level 6 Group VI

Transmit Level 6 Group F

Prompts and responses

KMFC

FMFC

NEXT

KEND

FEND

KMFC

FMFC

NEXT

DGT1

DGT2

NEXT

DGT1 -

DGT9

DG10 -

DG15

KEND

FEND

TERM

FAIL

SUPL

SCNI*

NEXT

DGT1 -

DGT9

DGT0

LFSS

EODG

DGT1 -

DGT9

DGT0

KEND

12

13

14

15

1

2

13

14

15

11

15

11

12

15

1 -

9

10 -

Signal number

1

4

15

1 -

8

9

1 -

9

10

11

9

10

11

15

Function mnemonic

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1011

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group Signal number

4

13

DGT4

DG13

Function mnemonic

* Not included unless Ring Again (RGA) is included for L1 signaling.

Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling

Group Signal number Function mnemonic

This table indicates the default signal tables for L1 signaling. The transmit sets indicate only those signals that can be sent. The receive sets must have duplicate signals to accept signals that must be mapped to another signal for processing.

Transmit Level 1 Group I 1 -

9

DGT1 -

DGT9

Receive Level 1 Group A

10

12

13

15

1

DGT0

UREJ

GOEN

EODL

NEXT

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

TNFS

COMP

FAIL

SCAT

TERM

RUID

ALFS

CONG

Transmit Level 2 Group II

2

5

14

1

10

11

12

13

EINF

ELV2

ENOI

PSNX

TNXT

OLNE

LSIG

OPER

1012 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Group

Receive Level 2 Group B

Signal number

10

3

6

9

4

5

10

11

12

13

BUSY

IDLE

BUSY

IDLE

14 SOTI

Transmit Level 3 Group III; Receive Level 3 Group C

1

5

SIIN

SUPL

NETW*

BUSY

FAIL

VCOT

IDLE

CONG

Function mnemonic

Transmit Level 4 Group IV

13

14

15

1 -

9

9

10

11

12

7

8

4

5

2

3

15

1

NOSS

TERM

TERM

TERM

FAIL

TERM

SUPL

SUPL

SCNI*

SUPL

SCNI*

SCNI*

SUPL

SCNI*

NEXT

DGT 1 -

DGT9

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1013

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Group

Receive Level 4 Group D

Transmit Level 5 Group V

Receive Level 5 Group E

Transmit Level 6 Group VI

Receive Level 6 Group F 1 -

9

10

11 -

12

13

14

15

14

15

11

12

11

12

13

6 -

9

10

11

4

5

1 -

3

Signal number

10

11

15

1 -

9

10

11

15

FEND

KMFC

FMFC

NEXT

DGT 1 -

DGT9

DGT0

DG11 -

DG12*

KEND

FEND

KMFC

FMFC

NEXT

KEND

DGT1 -

DGT3

DGT4*

DGT5*

DGT6 -

DGT9

DGT0

DG11*

DGT0

LFSS

EODG

DGT 1 -

DGT9

DGT0

KEND

NEXT

Function mnemonic

1014 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Group Signal number

15 DG15

Function mnemonic

* Not included unless Ring Again (RGA) is included for L1 signaling.

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

ATT

CACD

CNDR

DFLT

EECD

ICOG

LVNO

MAXT

NTT

RECV

Response

(1)-10

Comment

Attendant category code Category code for attendants

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-127

1-127

<CR>

ICT

OGT

1-6

Pack/Rel

mfc-10

Category Code Default Change category code default. Prompted when TYPE = R2MF opcb-14 basic-24 Calling Number Display Restriction

Set the table for CNDR CLID feature

Default table number mfc-10 mfc-18 End-to-End Signaling code

Default to TBNO response when REQ = NEW otherwise leave TBNO as assigned.

Incoming/Outgoing

Incoming table

Outgoing table mfc-10 mfc-10 Level Number

• 1-2 for TYPE = R2MF, MFK5, MFK6

• 1-6 for TYPE = L1MF

Precede with X to remove.

(1)-127

1-(6)-10

Maximum number of TablesPrompted when

REQ = NEW

Non-TIE category code

Category code for non-TIE trunks mfc-10 mfc-14

1-15 mmmm Receive signal number and mnemonic (MFC or,

MFE, MFK5 or MFK6)

Signal number range is: mfc-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1015

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

Prompt

REQ

SCNT

SET

SMFC

TBNO

TIE

Response

1-15 NUL

<CR>

Comment

• 1 - 10 if TYPE = MFK5

• 1 - 15 if TYPE = MFK6

Remove signal number and associated function mnemonic.

Stop RECV prompts

Refer to Tables

Table 16: MFC DID/TIE signal functions: Incoming and outgoing route tables

on page 1000 through Table 26: MFC default (standard) outgoing tables for L1 signaling

on page 1012 for function mnemonics.

Pack/Rel

CHG

END

NEW

OUT

PRT

(NO)

YES

(1)-10

Request

Change existing data.

Exit Overlay program.

Add new data to the system.

Remove data block.

Print data.

mfc-10

Switch CNI on Next.

When the NEXT signal is received during CNI transmission on Level 1, the system continues sending the calling number.

When the NEXT signal is received during CNI transmission on Level 1, the system switches to called number and sends the next called number digit.

mfc-18

Set category code.

Category code for SL-1 and 500/2500 sets.

mfc-10

(NO)

YES

1-127

<CR>

1-(6)-10

Send MFC

Backward signals are stopped when the forward signal is recognized as having stopped.

Backward signals are sent (incoming calls) pulsed for 150 ms or received (outgoing calls) pulsed 150 ms +/- 20%.

mfc-18 mfc-10 Table Number

MFC or, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 table number

Print all MFC, MFE, MFK5 or MFK6 tables.

TIE category code mfc-10

1016 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TYPE

XMIT

Response Comment

Category code for TIE trunks

Pack/Rel

L1MF

MFET

MFK5

MFK6

R2MF

Type of data block.

L1 MFC data block

Must have X08 to X11 Gateway (L1MF) package

188.

MFE data block

2/5 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

2/6 Spanish KD3 MF Signaling

R2 MFC data block mfc-10 mmmm 1-15 Transmit signal mnemonic and number (MFC,

MFE or MFK) mmmm 0

IDCT n

<CR>

• 1 - 10 if TYPE = MFK5

• 1 - 15 if TYPE = MFK6

Remove function mnemonic mmmm and associated signal number

Any undesired function in the default transmit tables should not be removed, but instead assigned a different signal number.

LNVO is prompted following a null entry for

XMIT. If nothing is entered in response to LVNO then, provided that there is a level one, the table is stored.

Idle Call Trace signal number (Default is the same as the IDLE signal) Where: n = signal number and 0 = close

Stop XMIT prompts.

Refer to Tables 18 through 28 for the function mnemonics.

mfe-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1017

LD 94: Multifrequency Signaling

1018 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 49: LD 95: Call Party Name Display

Overlay program 95 is used to define, change, remove or print information for the Call Party Name Display

(CPND) data block and name assignment, on a per customer basis.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by task:

Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND)

on page 1019

Add Calling Party Name Display name on page 1020

Change Calling Party Name Display name on page 1021

Remove Calling Party Name Display name on page 1021

Print Calling Party Name Display data and names on page 1022

Create or Change Calling Party Name Display (CPND)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CNFG

MXLN

STAL

Response aaa

CPND xx aaaa

5-(17)-27

(NO) YES

Comment

Req = NEW or CHG

Type = CPND (Calling Party Name Display)

Customer number associated with this function

Configuration (aaaa = (ALON), REMO, or LOCL)

Maximum Length

Static Allocation of name storage

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1019

LD 95: Call Party Name Display

- DFLN

DES

RESN

- CFWD

- CFNA

- HUNT

- NITC

- PKUP

- XFER

- AAA

5-(13)-27

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

(F) aaaa

(N) aaaa

(B) aaaa

(NI) aaaa

(P) aaaa

(T) aaaa

(A) aaaa

Default Length

Designator for Multiple Appearance DNs allowed

Display of Reason for redirecting calls allowed

Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display

Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display

Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display

Mnemonic for Call Forward Non Intercom Call

Mnemonic for Call Pickup display

Mnemonic for Call Transfer display

Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering display

Add Calling Party Name Display name

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CPND_LANG

DIG

- LANG

- NAME

- XPLN a...a

xx

DISPLAY_FMT aaaa

DN

- LANG

- NAME x...x

aaa a...a

- XPLN

ENTR

- NAME

- XPLN xx x xxxx xx

- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa

Response

NEW

NAME xx aaa

0-253 0-99 aaa

Comment

Req = NEW

Type = NAME (CPND Name)

Customer number associated with this function

CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Dial Intercom Group

Language (aaa = (ROM), KAT, or ALL)

CPND Name in ASCII characters

Expected Length

Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)

Directory Number

Language (aaa = (ROM), KAT, or ALL)

CPND Name in ASCII characters

Expected Length

Entry Number (Null to exit)

Group name

Expected Length

Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)

1020 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

DCNO

- IDC

- NAME

0-254

0-254 a...a

Digit Conversion table Number

Incoming DID Digit Conversion number

CPND Name in ASCII characters

Prompts and responses

Change Calling Party Name Display name

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

Response

CHG

NAME xx

CPND_LANG aaa

DIG

- NAME

- DN

0-253 0-99 a...a

x...x

- NAME

ENTR

- NAME a...a

x xxxx

- XPLN xx

- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa

DCNO 0-254

- IDC

- NAME

0-254 a...a

Comment

Req = CHG

Type = NAME (CPND Name)

Customer number associated with this function

CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Dial Intercom Group

CPND Name using ASCII characters

Directory Number

CPND Name in ASCII characters

Entry Number (Null to exit)

Group name

Expected Length

Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)

Digit Conversion table Number

Incoming DID Digit Conversion number

CPND Name in ASCII characters

Remove Calling Party Name Display name

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CPND_LANG

Response

OUT

NAME xx aaa

Comment

Req = OUT

Type = NAME (CPND Name)

Customer number associated with this function

CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1021

LD 95: Call Party Name Display

DIG

DN

0-253 0-99 x...x

x...x y...y

ALL

0-254 DCNO

- IDC 0-254

ARE YOU SURE? (YES) NO

Dial Intercom Group

Remove Directory Number x...x

Remove range of DN-defined names

Remove all DN-defined names

Digit Conversion table Number

Incoming DID Digit Conversion number

(Confirm) or remove operation

Print Calling Party Name Display data and names

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CPND_LANG

LANG

Response

PRT

NAME xx aaa aaa

(NO) YES PAGE

DIG

SHRT

- DN

SHRT

DCNO

- IDC

SHRT

ENTR

- NAME

0-2045 0-99

(NO YES x...x

x...x y...y

x/xx/xxx

ALL

(NO) YES

0-254 nnn

ALL

(NO) YES x xxxx

Comment

Req = PRT

Type = NAME (CPND Name)

Customer number associated with this function

CPND Language (aaa = (ROM) or KAT)

Language choice for name display (aaa = ROM or

KAT)

Page headers and numbers printed (or not) if the

Multiple DN/DIG is specified.

Dial Intercom Group

Short form

Print single Directory Number x...x

Print range of Directory Numbers

Print all DNs starting with x, xx, or xxx

Print all DNs

Short form

Digit Conversion table Number

Incoming DID Digit Conversion number

All names defined are printed

Short form

Entry Number (Null to exit)

Group name

1022 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

- XPLN xx

- DISPLAY_FMT aaaa

Alphabetical list of prompts

Expected Length

Display Format (aaaa = (LAST) or FIRST)

Alphabetical list of prompts

AAA

Prompt Response

aaa

Comment

Attendant Alternative Answering display mnemonic Default = A

Pack/Rel

cpnd-10

ARE YOU SURE?

(YES) NO (Confirm) or remove operation. The default response is YES.

cpnd-1

CFNA xxxx

CFWD

CNFG xxxx

(ALON)

REMO

LOCL

Call Forward No Answer display mnemonic

Default = N cpnd-10 cpnd-10 Call Forward All Calls display mnemonic

Default = F

Configuration

Standalone CPND configuration

Interwork with a remote directory system

Interwork with a local (inboard) system cpnd-10

CPND_LANG cpnd-19

CUST

DCNO

DES

DFLN

(ROM)

KAT xx

CPND language. Prompted when FTR =

CPND.

Roman CPND language

Katakana CPND language

Customer number associated with this function as defined in LD 15

Digit Conversion table Number 0-254

(NO) YES Designator for Multiple Appearance DNs allowed

Prompted when ODAS is equipped.

5-(13)-27 Default character string Length

Default to 13 or MXLN, whichever is less.

Prompted when STAL = YES cpnd-10 dnis-17 odas-10 cpnd-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1023

LD 95: Call Party Name Display

DIG

Prompt

ENTR

DISPLAY_FMT

DN

HUNT

Response

gg mm

Comment

Existing Dial Intercom Group number followed by member number (optional), where: gg

ALL

<CR>

• gg = 0-2045

• mm = 0-99

Existing DIG Group number

Without member number specified, ALL members within this Group are printed.

Print all Dial Intercom Groups.

Prompts DN

If CPND Name already exists, an error message is returned. Prompted when DIG is equipped.

Pack/Rel

di-10 x basic-5.00

(LAST)

FIRST xxxx

Group name configuration for an entry number to a CLID data block.

Display format for CPND name

Last name, First name (Doe, John)

First name, Last name (John Doe) cpnd-19 x...x y...y

ALL x/xx/xxx

<CR> xxxx

Directory Number (Existing eligible DN or

Partial DN). The DN can be up to 4 digits, up to 7 digits with Directory Number Expansion

(DNXP) package 150.

Valid DN types are Single or Multiple line prime DN, trunk DN, attendant DN or ACD

DN. If Partial DN, all possible DNs are printed.

Range of DN-defined names are deleted/ printed. This entry is valid when REQ = OUT/

PRT.

All names defined are deleted/printed. ALL is a valid entry when REQ = OUT/PRT.

DNs starting with x, xx, or xxx are printed.

This entry is valid when REQ = PRT.

To re-prompt DCNO

If the CPND name is already defined, an error message is returned.

cpnd-10

Call Forward No Answer display mnemonic cpnd-10

1024 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

IDC

PKUP

REQ

Prompt

LANG

MXLN

NAME

NITC

PAGE

Response

0-254

ALL

Comment

Default = B

Incoming DID Digit Conversion number

Existing complete or partial IDC number

All Names defined

Pack/Rel

dnis-17

(ROM)

KAT

ALL

<CR>

5-(17)-27 Maximum allowable CPND character string

Length

Once an MXLN is entered, it cannot be changed to a lower value via the CHG prompt.

cpnd-10 a...a

<CR> xxxx

Language choice for name for CPND screen and set display. Allowed only if REQ = OUT.

English display (Roman characters)

Non-English display (Katakana characters)

Remove ALL names from CPND data block for the DN or DIG selected.

Roman (English) display cpnd-16

CPND Name using ASCII characters If STAL

= YES, then Name size < XPLN If STAL =

NO, then Name size = number of characters entered. DIG is reprompted to DN prompt

Group Name corresponding to a CLID data block cpnd-19 basic-5.00

(NI) aaaa Non intercom call

NITC indicates that an intercom call terminated as a normal call.

(NO)

YES

Page headers and numbers not printed if the

Multiple DN/DIG is specified.

Page headers and numbers printed if the

Multiple DN/DIG is specified.

Page headers (date and page number) are not printed if a single DN/DIG is specified.

cpnd-10 xxxx

END

NEW

Call Pickup display mnemonic. Default = P.

cpnd-10

Request.

Change existing data block

Exit Overlay program cpnd-10

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1025

LD 95: Call Party Name Display

Prompt

RESN

SHRT

STAL

TYPE

XFER

XPLN

Response

OUT

PRT

Comment

Create CPND data blocks and/or name strings

Remove existing name or data block

Print an existing Name or data block from the data base

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES Display of Reason for redirecting calls allowed

(NO)

YES

Prints one DN or IDC per single line. (long form)

Prints several DNs or IDCs on a single line.

(one-line form)

Prompted when DN = ALL, Range or Partial

DN to be specified.

cpnd-19 cpnd-10

(NO) YES Static Allocation of Name storage

In a Hotel/Motel environment with

Background Terminal facilities, STAL must be YES.

STAL = YES is recommended whenever

CPND Names change frequently, for efficient use of available memory (example, when a guest checks in).

cpnd-10

CPND

NAME

Type of data block

CPND data block

CPND Name data block

Allowed only if CPND data block is already defined.

cpnd-10 xxxx xx

Call Transfer display mnemonic

Mnemonic for call transfer display in Network

Call Redirection (NCRD). One to four characters are accepted.

Default = T. Prompted if ISDN = YES in LD

15 ncrd-16

Expected Length

Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN, or it default to DFLN.

This value should be set to a sufficient length to allow for current and future names to be entered.

When REQ = NEW, the XPLN prompt defines the maximum name length for that particular entry. The XPLN for a DN cannot cpnd-10

1026 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response

<CR>

Comment

be changed without deleting that name entry.

This sets the XPLN to the input length, or

DFLN whichever is greater. Re-prompts

DIG.

Prompted when STAL = YES

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1027

LD 95: Call Party Name Display

1028 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 50: LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Overlay program 97 is used to specify several system parameters for XPE and other related equipment.

These parameters include the minimum flash timing to download to the XPE packs when required.

Loss and Level Plan information may also be specified. Refer to Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182 for information regarding Loss and Level Plans prior to making any changes to the parameters defined in this Overlay.

Prompts and responses

Contents

Section

Prompts and responses by data block:

DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block

on page 1030

DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block on page 1031

FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets

on page 1031

FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block

on page 1033

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block on page 1033

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED) on page 1034

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)

on page 1034

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)

on page 1034

SUPL: Superloop parameters data block

on page 1035

SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card on page 1036

SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment

on page 1037

XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block on page 1038

XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block

on page 1038

Other Information:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1029

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Section

Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves on page 1039

BTD: Busy Tone Detection data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

BTDT

BCAD

BTDD

FREQ_0

Response

aaa

BTD

(0)-7 x...x x...x

a...a

350 - 655

FREQ_1

FDLT

350 - 655

10 - 315

FLVL_MAX 0 - 15

FLVL_MIN 20 - 35

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)

Type = BTD (Busy Tone Detection)

Busy Tone Detection Table

Busy Tone Cadence (ON and OFF cycles)

Busy Tone Detection Direction (a...a = (BOTH) or INC)

Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 0

Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 1

Frequency delta

Maximum Frequency Tone level to be detected.

Minimum Frequency Tone level to be detected.

DTD: Dial Tone Detection parameters data block

For all DTD parameters, if a value is entered between two valid responses, the lowest valid response is stored for downloading to the XTD card. The stored value is also echoed to the craftsperson.

The type for the DTMF parameters is DTR.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

XTDT

DFQ

MDL

MVT

BRK

CAD

Response

aaa

DTD

(0)-7

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)

Type = DTD (Dial Tone Detection)

Extended Tone Detection Table

0-(4)-15

10-(20)-40

Dial Tone Frequency band for 1st dial tone

Minimum Detect Level for 1st Dial Tone

100-(400)-1600 Minimum Validation Time for 1st Dial Tone

(0)-240 Break Duration (maximum) for 1st Dial Tone

(0)-15 Cadence type for 1st Dial Tone

1030 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

SSC

Response

(0)-15

Comment

Second Stage Configuration

DTR: Digitone Receiver parameters data block

For all DTR parameters, if a value is entered between two valid responses, the lowest valid response is stored for downloading to the XTD/DTR card. The stored value is also echoed to the craftsperson.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

MINL

Response

aaa

DTR

3-(42)-48

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)

Type = DTR (Digitone Receiver)

Minimum accept Level for Digitone receiver

FDL: Flash Download for M3900 sets

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

FDTP t

Response

CHG PRT

FDL

FDTM

- FDAY

(NO)

YES d n

Comment

Change or Print

Flash Download for M3900 sets.

M3900 set selected for download.

Where t = (NONE) No M3900 flash download 3902 - M3902 sets 3903 - M3903 sets 3904 - M3904 sets 3905 - M3905 sets ALL - all M3900 sets

Time interval restriction for Flash Download.

No change to time intervals

Change time intervals

Note:

Flash download is automatically paused one hour before virtual midnight (refer to TODR in Ovl 17) to allow midnight routines to run. This option is not applicable to reporting.

Day and number of time intervals for download. Prompted only if FDTM = YES.

d = (0-6) Day of week, Sunday to Saturday n = (0-4)

Number of time intervals where 0 = no download for that day.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1031

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

-- FINT

FTNR

- FSTN

- FETN

FDNR

- FDDN

FRCE

Response Comment

s l

Note:

If two or more intervals are specified, they must be non overlapping, non consecutive and in increasing order.

Day is re-prompted until <CR> is entered.

Starting hour and length for a time interval. Prompted n times if n>0.

Where: s = (0-23) Starting hour using 24 hour format l = (1-24)

Length of interval in hours

TN range restriction option for Flash Download.

NO YES <CR> No TN restriction Specify TN range No change to TN range restrictions l s c u c u l s c u c u

NO YES <CR> DN range or list restriction option for Flash Download. No

DN or list restriction Specify DN range No change to DN range restrictions

Flash Download Prime Directory Number range. Prompted only if FDNR = YES c d1 d2

Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompted only if FTNR = YES

TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit TN format: c u = card, unit

Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download. Prompted only if FTNR = YES

TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit TN format: c u = card, unit

Where: c = Customer number d1 = starting prime DN d2 = ending prime DN

System-wide flash download control option.

(NO)

YES

Conditional. System-wide flash download (via FDLS in

OVL 32) applies to only a M3900 set whose flash firmware version is different from version currently found on the system disk.

Forced. Force system-wide flash download to all the specified M3900 sets regardless of their current flash firmware versions.

Note:

Use this option with caution! Once the download tree is built (after FDLS in OVL 32) this option is automatically reverted to NO (conditional). Not applicable to reporting.

1032 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

FVER

Response

(0)-99

Comment

Flash firmware version specified for full report.

Where:

(0) = Report all Flash firmware version 1-99 = Selected

Flash firmware version

FIRP: Fiber Remote Parameters Data Block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

SUPL

Response

CHG PRT

FIRP x...x

NNDC

XSMN

5-(7)-8

(0)-63

Comment

Change or Print

Fiber Remote Parameters

Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on

Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))

No-New-Data -Calls condition Threshold

XSM address on the remote shelf

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block

Loss and Level Plan information may also be specified. Refer to Transmission Parameters,

553-3001-182 for information regarding Loss and Level Plans prior to making any changes to the parameters defined in this Overlay.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

NATP

TTYP

- STYP

- DTYP

Response

aaa

LOSP

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa aaaa

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)

North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT

Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)

Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or

DISL)

Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =

(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1033

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = PRED)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

NATP

TTYP

- STYP

Response

aaa

LOSP

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa

- DTYP aaaa

- - TNUM xx

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Loss Plan Tables

North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT

Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)

Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or

DISL)

Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =

(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)

Table Number

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (STYP or DTYP = DISL)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

NATP

TTYP

- STYP

Response

aaa

LOSP

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa

- DTYP aaaa

PWD2 xxxx

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)

North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT

Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)

Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or

DISL)

Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =

(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)

Password 2

LOSP: Loss Plan Tables data block (DTYP or STYP = CSTM)

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

LOSP

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Type = LOSP (Loss Plan Tables)

1034 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

NATP

TTYP

- STYP

Response

(NO) YES aaaa aaaa

- DTYP

- T2WV

- T4WT

- T4WN

- T4WV

- PAGT

- RANR

- ALUS

- ALUL

PWD2

- COTS

- COTL

- DIDS

- DIDL

- T2WT

- T2WN aaaa xxxx

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

8-39 0-31

0-31

8-39

0-31 8-39

0-31 8-39

Comment

North American Transmission Plan for generic XFCOT

Table Type (aaaa = (STAT) or DYNM)

Static Loss Plan table type (aaaa = (PRED), CSTM, or

DISL)

Dynamic Loss Switching alternate table type (aaaa =

(PRED), CSTM, or DISL)

Password 2

Central Office Trunk Short line Class of Service

Central Office Trunk Long line Class of Service

Direct Inward Dial trunk Short line Class of Service

Direct Inward Dial Trunk Long line Class of Service

TIE trunk 2-Wire TRC Class of Service

TIE trunk 2-Wire NTC Class of Service

TIE trunk 2-Wire VNL Class of Service

TIE trunk 4-Wire TRC Class of Service

TIE trunk 4-Wire NTC Class of Service

TIE trunk 4-Wire VNL Class of Service

Paging Trunk

Recorded Announcement trunk

Analog Line card Unit Short line Class of Service

Analog Line card Unit Long line Class of Service

SUPL: Superloop parameters data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

SUPL

SLOT

SUPT

Response

aaa

SUPL x...x

a aaaa

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Type = SUPL (Superloop)

Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on

Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))

Network Card is in Left or Right Slot (x = (L) or R)

Superloop type (aaaa = (STD), CARR, FIBR, MSC or

IPMG)

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1035

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

XPE0

XPE1

XPEC

Response

x y z x y z

1-95

Comment

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 0 (STD)

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 1 (STD)

Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller (CARR or

FIBR)

- CE

- E1

- E

- CT

IPR0 nn.nn.nn.nn

IPMG_TYP0 aaa

ZONE0

DES0

0–255 0–8000

Shelf 0 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.

IPMG Type = (MGC), MGX or MGS

Shelf 0 IPMG cabinet zone number

No input. Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for MGC based IPMGs.

(CE) / d ..... d

(E1) / d ..... d

(E) / d ..... d

(CT) / d ..... d

Shelf 0 IPMG CE Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 0 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 0 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 0 IPMG CT Ethernet Port Designator.

- CE

- E1

- E

- CT

- T2

- T

- T2

- T

(T2) / d ..... d

(T) / d ..... d

IPR1 nn.nn.nn.nn

IPMG_TYP1 aaa

ZONE1

DES1

Shelf 0 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 0 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.

IPMG Type = (MGC) MGX, or MGS

0–255 0–8000 Shelf 1 IPMG cabinet zone number

No input. Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for MGC based IPMGs.

(CE) / d ..... d

(E1) / d ..... d

(E) / d ..... d

(CT) / d ..... d

(T2) / d ..... d

(T) / d ..... d

Shelf 1IPMG CE Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG CT Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port Designator.

Shelf 1 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.

SYSM: System Parameters for MSDL/MISP card

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

SYSM

Comment

Req = CHG or PRT

Type = SYSM (System parameters for MSDL/MISP cards)

1036 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompts and responses

Prompt

FDLC

Response

p1 p2 p3 p4

Comment

Fast Download Control parameters

SYSP: System parameters for Peripheral Equipment

INTN

CODE

CONT

CRCF

FLSH

TOHV

TDP

TID

REQ

TPF

Prompt

TYPE

TDPO

MFRL

MFLT0

MFLT1

P10R

P12R

P20R

INSO

- DEFS

Response

aaa

SYSP

(NO) YES

(0)-3

1-(4)-32767

1-(4)-32767

(120)-168

0-(250)-1275

(15)-1275

0-(150)-1275

- - DEF 2216 xx yy

- - DEF 2616 xx yy

Comment

Req = CHG or PRT

Type = SYSP (System parameters for Peripheral equipment)

International companding law

Quiet Code is used by Network Card firmware

Continuity

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Failures

Flash timing

Timer - Off-Hook Validation

Timer - Dial Pulse

Timer - InterDigit

15-(150)-1275 Timer - Dial Pulse On

0-(200)-1275 Timer - Post Flash

0-(2)-3

(0)-15

Multifrequency minimum Receiver Level

Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier 0 for

Small System and MG 1000E

(0)-15

(50)-70

(50)-70

(50)-70

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

- - DEF 2006 xx yy

- - DEF 2008 xx yy

Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier 1 for

Small System and MG 1000E

Primary Pulse 10 Ratio

Secondary Pulse 10 Ratio

Pulse 20 Ratio

Installation Options

Default sets

New default Model number, 2006 set

New default Model number, 2008 set

New default Model number, 2216 set

New default Model number, 2616 set

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1037

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

- - DEF 2000 xx yy

Response

- - DEF 500 xx yy

- - DEF 2500 xx yy

- - DEF I2002 xx yy

- - DEF I2004 xx yy

- - DEF I2050 xx yy

FNUM(wwww) zzzz

Comment

New default Model number, 2000 set

New default Model number, 500 set

New default Model number, 2500 set

Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP Phone

2002 set (where: xx is old default)

Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP Phone

2004 set (where: xx is old default)

Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP SoftPhone

2050 set (where: xx is old default)

First DN in the default numbering plan (wwww is the current value)

XCTP: Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

Response

aaa

XCTP

CPAD

DTMF

CFWT

INTU

P10P

S10P

20PP x

0-(14)-255

(NO) YES

(NO) YES

0-(30)-255

0-(31)-255

0-(32)-255

Comment

Request (CHG, END, PRT)

Type = XCTP (Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters)

Conference PAD (x = (0) or 1)

Dual Tone Multifrequency

Conference Warning Tone to be provided

Intrusion tone

Primary 10 Pulses per second

Secondary 10 Pulses per second

20 Pulses Per second

XPE: Extended Peripheral Equipment shelf data block

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

XPEC

Response

aaa

XPE

(0)-95

Comment

Request (aaa = CHG, END, PRT)

Type = XPE (Extended Peripheral Equipment shelves)

Extended Peripheral Equipment Controller

1038 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Prompt

LOC

MED

RGTP

Response

1-99 xxxxxx

(COP) x

Comment

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Location code for Peripheral Controller

Connection Media to Peripheral Controller

Ringing Generator Type (x = (8) or 16)

Alphabetical list of prompts

Print information on Superloop or Extended IPE shelves

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

SUPL

Response

PRT aaaa x...x

XPEC 1-95

0-252

Comment

Req = PRT

Type = SUPL or XPE

Superloop in multiples of 4 (SUPL responses begin on

Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...))

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

20PP

ACDN

AGNT

ALUL

Response Comment

0-(32)-255 20 Pulses Per second

Tone table index for primary 20 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 32 for North

American tones.

Tone tables are defined in LD 56.

Pack/Rel

xct-15

0-100

0-32767

0-1000

0-32767

Maximum number of ACD Directory Numbers

Maximum number of ACD Directory Numbers

Maximum number of ACD Agents

Maximum number of ACD Agents xpe-16 xpe-16

0-31 8-39 Analog Line card Unit Long line Class of

Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the 1st field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the 2nd field is the Transmit (D/A) entry. Prompted if

TTYP = STAT xpe-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1039

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

ALUS

AST

BCAD

BRK

Response Comment Pack/Rel

0-31 8-39 Analog Line card Unit Short line Class of

Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the 1st field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the 2nd field is the Transmit (D/A) entry. Prompted if

TTYP = STAT.

xpe-18 x...x

Maximum number of Associated Sets, where x...x is:

• 0-100 for Large Systems

• 0-32767 for Small Systems csl-16

Busy Tone Cadence

Determines the on phase length and the off phase length during the cycle.

0000-(350)-1500 0000-(350)-1500

PH1 (ON cycle) and PH2 (OFF cycle)

0000-(500)-1500 0000-(500)-1500

PH1 (ON cycle) and PH2 (OFF cycle) for

Japan (when Japan package 97 is enabled)

The values for each phase can be from 0 to 1.5

seconds (1500 ms) and are entered as milliseconds. The input values are rounded to the nearest multiple of 25 ms.

Entering all 0's indicates continuous tone.

(Continuous tones lasts for 3.2 seconds or longer) The smallest cadence is 50 ms even though 25 ms can be entered. The stored values is echoed.

xpe-16

(0)-240 Break Duration (maximum) for 1st Dial Tone.

Input is a multiple of 16 ms:

• 0 = 0 ms

• 16 = 16 ms

• 32 = 32 ms

• ...

• 240 = 240 ms

Input that is not a multiple of 16 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 16. Recommended country specific BRK values follow: xpe-16

1040 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

BTDD

BTDT

CAD

Response

(BOTH)

INC

(0) - 7

(0)-15

Comment

• Country BRK

• Denmark 000 ms

• France 030 ms

• Germany 000 ms

• Holland TBD

• New Zealand TBD

• Norway 000 ms

• Spain 000 ms

• Sweden 000 ms

• Switzerland 000 ms

• U.K. 33/50 000 ms

• U.K. 330/440 000 ms

Pack/Rel

Busy Tone Detection on both incoming and outgoing calls

Busy Tone Detection on incoming calls only xpe-16

Busy Tone Detection Table

Table 0 can be changed but cannot be removed. Table 0 always exists (when the BTD package is equipped) and is initialized to default values for China and Japan.

When creating alternate tables, table 0's values are used to fill the table and these can be changed.

If table 0 does not exist, the Japanese BCAD defaults (500 500) are used when creating it.

Enter X in front of the table number to remove the table.

btd-21

Cadence type for 1st Dial Tone. Where:

• 0 = no cadence or continuous tone

• 1 = Italian complex cadence

• 2-15 reserved for future use

Recommended country specific CAD values follow:

• Country CAD

• Denmark 00 xpe-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1041

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

CE

Prompt

CFWT

CODE

CONT

COTL

COTS

CPAD

Response Comment

• France 00

• Germany 00

• Holland 00

• New Zealand 00

• Norway 00

• Spain 00

• Sweden 00

• Switzerland 00

• U.K. 33/50 00

• U.K. 330/440 00

Pack/Rel

d ..... d

<CR>

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG CE Ethernet Port

Designator.

1-16 alphanumeric characters.

Default value

Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.

basic-5.00

(NO)

YES

(0)

1-(4)-32767

Conference Warning Tone is not provided

Conference Warning Tone is provided basic-21

Quiet Code is used by Network Card firmware

0 is the only valid entry. Entries 1-3 are for future use.

xpe-15 xpe-15

Continuity. Maintenance threshold for number of continuity faults per timeslot.

8-39 0-31 Central Office Trunk Long line Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 Central Office Trunk Short line Class of

Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

(0)

Conference PAD

Use software PAD values xct-15

1042 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

CT

Prompt

CRCF

1

Response Comment

Use PAD values defined by switch settings on card (NT8D17). The CNFC command in LD 38 do not do the attenuation testing when CPAD

= 1.

1-(4)-32767

Pack/Rel

xpe-15 d ..... d

<CR>

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Failures

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG CT Ethernet Port

Designator.

1-16 alphanumeric characters.

Default value of ‘CT'.

Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.

basic-5.00

DEF 500 xx yy

DEF 2000 xx

DEF 2006 xx yy yy

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 500 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2000 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2006 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

DEF 2008 xx yy

DEF 2216 xx

DEF 2500 xx

DEF 2616 xx yy yy yy

DEF I2002 xx yy

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2008 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2216 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2500 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for 2616 set

(where: xx is old default) xpe-16

Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP

Phone 2002 set (where: xx is old default)

For CS 1000S basic-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1043

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt Response

DEF I2004 xx yy

Comment

Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP

Phone 2004 set (where: xx is old default)

For CS 1000S

DEF I2050 xx yy Enter new default Model number (yy) for IP

SoftPhone 2050 set (where: xx is old default)

For CS 1000S

Pack/Rel

basic-2 basic-2

DEFS

DES0 / 1

DFQ

(NO) YES Default Sets

Header for the ELAN/TLAN designators for

MGC based IPMGs.

0-(4)-15 xpe-16 basic-5.00

Dial Tone Frequency band for 1st dial tone.

Input is frequency band as described below:

• 0 = 300-500 Hz

• 1 = 350-500 Hz

• 2 = 320-630 Hz

• 3 = 0-500 Hz

• 4 = 355-550 Hz

• 5-15 = reserved for future use

With UK package (190) default value for DFQ

= 0. Recommended country specific DFQ values follow:

• Country DFQ

• Denmark 1

• France 0

• Germany 1

• Holland TBD

• New Zealand 1

• Norway 1

• Spain 2

• Sweden 11

• Switzerland 4

• U.K. 33/50 3

• U.K. 330/440 0 xpe-16

1044 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

DIDL

DIDS

DSL

DTMF

DTYP

E

Response Comment

8-39 0-31 Direct Inward Dial (or Direct Outward Dial

[DOD]) trunk Long line Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

Pack/Rel

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 Direct Inward Dial (or Direct Outward Dial

[DOD]) trunk Short line Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

0-32767 Maximum number of Digital Subscriber Loops xpe-18

0-(14)-255 Dual Tone Multifrequency (Tone table index of the first DTMF digit to be used). Use 14 for

North American tones.

For MU LAW, the DTMF groups start at tone numbers 14 and 35.

For ALAW, the DTMF groups start at tone numbers 1, 89, 113, 138, 191, 218 and 234.

xct-15

(PRED)

CSTM

DISL

Predefined Dynamic Loss Switching Table

Customized Dynamic Loss Switching Table

(user is prompted to input required PORT

TYPE LI LO values)

Disable current active table (Disables Dynamic

Loss Switching)

If the DTYP was previously DISL then entering a Predefined Table number or Customized

Table ENABLEs the Dynamic Loss Switching feature.

Only 1 Dynamic Loss Switching table, either predefined or customized, exists within the system. When Dynamic Loss Plan Switch is

ENABLED then the Static Loss Plan Table is used as the "base level" table of values.

If an entry is customized, other entries in this table and in the Base Table (TTYP = STAT) should be re-examined in case possible adjustment is necessary. Dynamic Pad

Switching continues for non-B34 cards (EPE,

XUT, XEM).

xpe-18 d ..... d

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG E Ethernet Port Designator.

basic-5.00

1-16 alphanumeric characters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1045

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

E1

Prompt

FDAY

FDDN

FDLC

Response

<CR>

Comment

Default value

Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.

d ..... d

<CR>

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG E1 Ethernet Port

Designator.

1-16 alphanumeric characters .

Default value

Applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.

d n c d1 d2

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

Day and number of time intervals for download. Prompted only if FDTM = YES.

d = (0-6) Day of week, Sunday to Saturday n

= (0-4) Number of time intervals where 0 = no download for that day.

arie-25

Note:

If two or more intervals are specified, they must be non overlapping, non consecutive and in increasing order. Day is re-prompted until <CR> is entered.

Flash Download Prime Directory Number range. Prompted only if FDNR = YES Where: arie-25

• c = Customer number

• d1 = starting prime DN

• d2 = ending prime DN p1 p2 p3 p4 Fast Download Control parameters. Where p1 can be: xpe/msdl-15

1. (ALL) = All cards listed below

2. AML = Applications Module Link

3. BRIE = BRI Trunk Universal ISDN

Protocol Engine

4. BRIL = BRI Line cards

5. BRIT = Basic Rate Interface Trunk

6. DCH = D-channel cards

7. FNET = Fiber Network Card

(NT1P61)

8. FPEC = Fiber Peripheral Equipment

Controller card (NT1P62)

9. LCRI = Carrier Remote IPE

1046 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

FDLT

Response Comment

10. MISP = Multipurpose ISDN Signaling

Link cards

11. MSDL = Multipurpose Serial Data

Link cards

12. PRIE = Primary Rate Interface

Universal ISDN Protocol Engine

13. SDI = Serial Data Interface cards

14. XNET = Network cards

15. XPEC = Controller cards (includes

Carrier Remote IPE RCI)

16. XXXX = Data file for specific ISDN interface type (e.g. DQSG data file for

QSIG; DTCZ data file for TCNZ)

Where p2 can be:

1. (C) = Conditional download (only if there is a major fault in the firmware or after a power failure). "C" is the recommended setting.

2. F = Force download after initialization. Entering "F" applies to the first INIT following the entry only.

After the INIT, the system reverts to C

(conditional).

Where p3 can be:

1. (C) = Current version

2. L = Latest version

3. S = Specified version

Where p4 is : xx (version number, if p3 = S).

See LD 20-22 to print versions.

10 - 315

Pack/Rel

Frequency delta, gives the tolerance of the tone to be detected in +/- hertz. Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.

For dual Busy Tone Detection on card

(NT5D31), the same maximum and minimum levels applies to both tones.

btd- 23

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1047

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

FDNR

FDTM

FDTP

FETN

FINT

FLSH t

Response

NO

YES

<CR>

Comment

DN range restriction option for Flash

Download.

No DN restriction

Specify DN range

No change to DN range restrictions

(NO)

YES

Pack/Rel

arie-25

Time interval restriction for Flash Download.

arie-25

No change to time intervals

Change time intervals

Note:

Flash download is automatically paused one hour before virtual midnight (refer to

TODR in Ovl 17) to allow midnight routines to run. This option is not applicable to reporting.

M3900 set selected for download. Where t = arie-25

• (NONE) No M3900 flash download

• 3902 - M3902 sets

• 3903 - M3903 sets

• 3904 - M3904 sets

• 3905 - M3905 sets

• ALL - all M3900 sets

Ending Terminal Number for Flash Download.

Prompted only if FTNR = YES

General TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

Small System TN format: c u = card, unit arie-25 l s c u c u s l Starting hour and length for a time interval.

Prompted n times if n>0.

Where: s = (0-23) Starting hour using 24 hour format l

= (1-24) Length of interval in hours arie-25 xpe-15 (120)-768 Switchhook Flash timing

(SUPP package 131 not equipped).

Establishes Switchhook Flash time in milliseconds for 500/2500 sets (NT8D IPE only) xxx yyyy Switchhook Flash timing

1048 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment

(SUPP package 131 equipped)

Establishes minimum and maximum

Switchhook Flash timer in milliseconds for

500/2500 sets (NT8D IPE only), where:

• xxx = 20-(45)-768

• yyyy = xxx value-(896)-1275

The timing specified is used for extended peripheral equipment only. Non-extended peripheral equipment uses the FLSH specified in LD 15.

FLVL_MAX 0 - 15

FLVL_MIN 20 - 35

Pack/Rel

Maximum Frequency Tone level to be detected.

Valid entries is in multiples of 5dBm.

For dual Busy Tone Detection on card

(NT5D31), the same level applies to both tones.

btd- 23

Minimum Frequency Tone level to be detected..

Valid entries is in multiples of 5dBm

For dual Busy Tone Detection card (NT5D31), the same level applies to both tones.

btd- 23

FNUM (wwww) zzzz

FRCE

(NO)

YES

First DN in the default numbering plan (wwww is current value) xpe-16

System-wide flash download control option.

arie-25

Conditional. System-wide flash download (via

FDLS in OVL 32) applies only to a M3900 set whose flash firmware version is different from version currently found on the system disk.

Forced. Force system-wide flash download to all the specified M3900 sets regardless of their current flash firmware versions.

Note:

Use this option with caution! Once the download tree is built (after FDLS in OVL

32) this option is automatically reverted to

NO (conditional). Not applicable to reporting.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1049

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

FREQ_0

FREQ_1

FSTN

FTNR

FVER

Response Comment

350 - 655 Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 0 of a dual Busy Tone Detection to be detected in Hz.

Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.

Pack/Rel

btd- 23

350 - 655 Frequency of Busy Tone for Frequency 1 of a dual Busy Tone Detection to be detected in Hz.

Valid entries is in multiples of 5Hz.

For a single busy tone FREQ_1 must be set the same as FREQ_0.

btd- 23 l s c u c u

NO

YES

<CR>

(0)-99

Starting Terminal Number for Flash Download.

Prompted only if FTNR = YES arie-25

General TN format: l s c u = loop, shelf, card, unit

Small System TN format: c u = card, unit

TN range restriction option for Flash

Download.

No TN restriction

Specify TN range

No change to TN range restrictions arie-25

Flash firmware version specified for full report.

Where: arie-25

• (0) = Report all Flash firmware version

• 1-99 = Selected Flash firmware version

INSO

INTN

(NO)

YES

(NO)

YES

Installation Options

Do not modify installation options

Change installation options

?- International companding Law

A- International companding Law xpe-16 xpe-15

INTU

IPMG_TYP0

(NO) YES Intrusion tone (insert Intrusion tone in conferences) aaa xpe-16

Note:

To invoke any changes, the Small System must be initialized.

IPMG Type, Where:

(MGC) = Media Gateway Controller

MGX = MGXPEC

MGS = CPMG basic-5.00

basic-6.00

basic-7.00

1050 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt Response Comment Pack/Rel

KEY1

KEY2

KEY3

LOC

IPMG_TYP1

IPR0 / 1 aaa nn.nn.nn.nn

Note:

Existing superloops cannot be changed to or from the MGX IPMG type. They must be removed and then re-configured on the system.

IPMG Type, Where:

(MGC) = Media Gateway Controller

MGX = MGXPEC

MGS = CPMG basic-5.00

basic-6.00

basic-7.00

Note:

Existing superloops cannot be changed to or from the MGX IPMG type. They must be removed and then re-configured on the system.

basic-5.00

<CR>

X

Shelf 0 or 1 IPMG cabinet Uplink IP address.

Skip to IPR0/1 when configuring new superloop

Remove IPR0/1, ZONE0/1, and VXCT0/1 data

ISM (NO) YES License

ISM and all of its subprompts (prompts TNS through KEY3) are not prompted for Option

11C. To change the system License parameters on an Option 11C, the installation program must be used.

xpe-16

(xxxxxxxx)

(xxxxxxxx)

(xxxxxxxx) xxxxxx

8 digit security key 1 provided by NT

8 digit security key 2 provided by NT

8 digit security key 3 provided by NT

Location code for Peripheral Controller (0-6 characters)

Should be equal to the column number assigned to the System Monitor and the

Universal Equipment Module (UEM) that contains the Controller.

For example: CxxMy

Where: xpe-16 xpe-16 xpe-16 xpe-15

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1051

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

LTID

MDL

MED

MFLT0

Response

(0)-15

Pack/Rel

0-32767 Maximum number of Logical Terminal IDs xpe-18

10-(20)-40 Minimum Detect Level for 1st Dial Tone. Input is absolute value of the minimum detect level.

Input is a multiple of 2 dBm: xpe-16

• 10 = -10 dBm

• 12 = -12 dBm

• 14 = -14 dBm

• ...

• 40 = -40 dBm

Odd input is rounded down. With UK package

(190) default value for MDL = 30 (-30 dBm).

Recommended country specific MDL values follow:

• Country MDL

• Denmark -26 dBm

• France -24 dBm

• Germany -22 dBm

• Holland -26 dBm

• New Zealand TBD

• Norway -30 dBm

• Spain -32 dBm

• Sweden -28 dBm

• Switzerland -30 dBm

• U.K. 33/50 -30 dBm

• U.K. 330/440 -30 dBm

(COP)

Comment

• xx = column number

• y = UEM number

Connection Media to Peripheral Controller

(copper cabling) xpe-17

Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier

0 for Small System and MG 1000E. The code and level values listed below apply to MFLT0 and MFLT1.

basic-22 basic-4.0

1052 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

MFLT1

MFRL

MINL

Response Comment

• Codes Level Values

• 1 -11 dBmO

• 2 -12 dBm0

• 3 -13 dBm0

• 4 -14 dBm0

• 5 -15 dBm0

• 6 -16 dBm0

• 7 -31 dBm0

• 8 -4 dBm0

• 9 -5 dBm0

• 10 -6 dBm0

MF transmit level changes take effect on Card

0 only if the command ENLX 0 is entered in LD

34. For XMFC packs, MF transmit level changes take effect immediately.

(0)-15

0-(2)-3

Pack/Rel

Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier

1 for Small System and MG 1000E.

Refer to the MFLT0 prompt for a listing of codes and level values for MFLT1.

basic-22 basic-4.0

xpe-16 Multifrequency minimum Receiver Level for

XMFC/ XMFE (NT5K21) for only Meridian 1

(superloop)

• Codes Level Values

• 0 -28 dBm0

• 1 -32 dBm0

• 2 -36 dBm0

• 3 -40 dBm0

3-(42)-48 Minimum accept Level for Digitone receivers.

Input is a multiple of 3 dBm: xpe-16

• 3 = -3 dBm

• 6 = -6 dBm

• 9 = -9 dBm

• ...

• 48 = -48 dBm

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1053

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

MOPT

MVT

Response Comment

Input that is not a multiple of 3 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 3. With UK package (190) default value for MINL = 45 (-45 dBm).

Recommended country specific MINL values follow:

• Country MINL

• Denmark -45 dBm

• France -30 dBm

• Germany -30 dBm

• Holland -30 dBm

• New Zealand -45 dBm

• Norway -45dBm

• Spain -30 dBm

• Sweden -28 dBm

• Switzerland -30 dBm

• U.K. 33/50 -45 dBm

• U.K. 330/440 -45 dBm

Pack/Rel

0-11 Meridian Mail Option

100-(400)-1600

Minimum Validation Time for 1st Dial Tone

Input is a multiple of 100 ms:

• 100 = 100 ms

• 200 = 200 ms

• 300 = 300 ms

• ...

• 1600 = 1600 ms (1.6 sec)

Input that is not a multiple of 100 is rounded down to a valid multiple of 100. With UK package (190) default value for MVT = 300.

Recommended country specific MVT values follow:

• Country MVT

• Denmark 1200 ms

• France 1000 ms xpe-16 xpe-16

1054 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

NATP

NNDC

P10P

P10R

P12R

Response Comment

• Germany 0900 ms

• Holland 1200 ms

• New Zealand TBD

• Norway 1000 ms

• Spain 1000 ms

• Sweden 0300 ms

• Switzerland 0400 ms

• U.K. 33/50 0300 ms

• U.K. 330/440 0300 ms

Pack/Rel

(NO) YES North American Transmission Plan for generic

XFCOT xpe-18

5-(7)-8 No-New-Data-Calls condition Threshold

NNDC defines the bit error rate (BER) for

Signal Degrade, calculated by the loadware.

The actual range is 10-5 to 10-8. The value entered here is the absolute value to the power of 10 (logarithmic scale).

rem_ipe-22

0-(30)-255 Primary 10 Pulses per second

Tone table index for primary 10 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 30 for North

American tones.

(50)-70 xct-15

Primary Pulse 10 Ratio (make-break ratio for

10 PPS dial pulse dialing)

Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 30 ms and off for 70 ms producing the 100 ms cycle for one pulse.

To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P10 in LD 14. For either

XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or

Option 11C DTI2 trunks.

xpe-16

(50)-70 Secondary Pulse 10 Ratio (make-break ratio for 10 PPS dial pulse dialing)

Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 30 ms and off for 70 ms producing the 100 ms cycle for one pulse.

To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P12 in LD 14. For either xpe-16

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1055

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

P20R

PAGT

PWD2

RANR

REQ

RGTP

Response Comment

XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or

Option 11C DTI2 trunks.

(50)-70

0-31

Pack/Rel

Pulse 20 Ratio (make-break ratio for 20 PPS dial pulse dialing)

Range is 50% to 70%, in steps of 1. For example, at 70% the signal is on for 15 ms and off for 35 ms producing the 50 ms cycle for one pulse.

To use on individual XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks, set CLS to P20 in LD 14. For either

XUT, XUTJ and XEM trunks specified or Small

System DTI2 trunks.

xpe-16

Paging Trunk. Enter the coded Transmit (D/A)

Input/Output Relative Level.

xpe-18 xxxx

8-39

CHG

END

PRT

(8) 16

Password 2

Second Level Administration Password as defined in LD 17. This password is required to

"Disable" an active Table or "Create" a customized Table.

PWD2 is prompted if STYP or DTYP = CSTM or DISL, or if the user is not logged in using

Loss Planning Allowed password.

Recorded Announcement trunk

Enter the coded Receive (A/D) Input/Output

.

Relative Level xpe-18

Request

Modify existing data

Exit overlay

Print data block xpe-15

Ringing Generator Type (8 or 16 concurrent ringers; 16 requires NT6D42CA Ringing

Generator). This prompt determines the maximum number of 500/2500 telephones which can be in the active ringing state at the same time.

CAUTION: Do not set RGTP = 16 if you do not have the NT6D42 ringing generator.

Exceeding the ringer capacity may cause intermittent overload alarms on the ringing generator.

xpe-18

1056 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

S10P

SLOT

SSC

STYP

Response Comment

The value is not passed to the Peripheral

Controller card immediately after service change. That information is downloaded when the card is enabled.

Pack/Rel

0-(31)-255 Secondary 10 Pulses per second

Tone table index for secondary 10 pulses per second (pps) digit set. Use 31 for North

American tones. Tone tables are defined in LD

56.

xct-15

(L) R Network Card is in Left or Right slot

Enter L (left) if the Network Card is located in the lower numbered network pair. For example, in superloop 0, enter L if the Network

Card sits in the slot for network loops 0/1, enter

R (right) for 2/3.

xpe-15

(0)-15 Second Stage Configuration. Where:

• 0 = Second Stage Dial Tone Detection and uses same parameters as defined for first stage.

• 1-15 = Reserved for future use.

Recommended country specific SCC values follow:

• Country SSC

• Denmark 0

• France 0

• Germany 0

• Holland 0

• New Zealand 0

• Norway 0

• Spain 0

• Sweden 0

• Switzerland 0

• U.K. 33/50 0

• U.K. 330/440 0 xpe-16

(PRED) Predefined Static Loss Plan table xpe-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1057

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

SUPL

Response

CSTM

DISL

Comment

Customized Static Loss Plan table (user is prompted to input required PORT TYPE LI LO values)

Disable current active table (disables Static

Loss Plan downloading)

Only 1 Static Loss Plan table, either predefined or customized, exists within the system.

When Dynamic Loss Switching is ENABLED then the Static Loss Plan Table is used as the

"B34 DYNAMIC LOSS SWITCHING BASE

TABLE" of values.

If an entry is customized, other entries in this table and in the Alternative Table (TTYP =

DYNM) should be re-examined in case possible adjustment is necessary.

Dynamic Pad Switching continues for non-B34 cards (EPE, XUT, XEM).

0-156

Pack/Rel

Superloop in multiples of 4 (0,4,8,12...)

Superloop in multiples of 4, where:

• 0-15 = physical range of loops for Opt 51C

• 0-31 = physical range of loops for Opt 61C

• 0-159 = physical range of loops for Opt 81C

• 0-72 = physical range of loops for Small

Systems xpe-20

0-252

0-252

Note:

Loops 0-72 translates to cards 0-50 for TN mapping

Superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with

Fibre Network Fabric, where:

0-255 = physical range of loops for Opt 81C with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E basic-4.00

N0-N156

Note:

A superloop cannot have both phantom and virtual sets on it and therefore must be configured as either phantom or virtual.

Preceed with "N" to designate phantom and

"V" to designate virtual.

Phantom superloop in multiples of 4

1058 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

T

Prompt

SUPT

Response

N0-N252

N0-N252

N96-N112

Comment

Phantom superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with Fiber Network Fabric

Pack/Rel

Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E

Phantom superloop in multiples of 4 for Small

Systems basic-4.00

Note:

Loops 96-112 translates to cards 61-99 for phantom TN mapping on Small Systems.

V0- V156 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for Large

Systems without Network Capacity Expansion package.

V0- V252 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for systems with Fibre Network Fabric basic-25

V0-V252 Superloop in multiples of 4 for CS 1000E

V96- V112 Virtual superloop in multiples of 4 for Small

Systems and CS 1000S basic-4.00

basic-2.0

Note:

Loops 96-112 translates to cards 61-99 for virtual TN mapping on Small Systems.

(STD)

CARR

FIBR

IPMG d ..... d

<CR>

Note:

Nortel recommends programming Phantom and Virtual loops from the highest loop number backward to prevent moving phantom and virtual units if the system can be expanded in the future.

Standard Superloop type (normal copper cable connecting an XNET to XPEC)

Carrier Link Superloop type: this connects an

Local Carrier Interface (LCI) to a Remote

Carrier Interface (RCI) rem_ipe-21

Fiber Link [connects a Fiber Network NT1P61

Card (FNET) to a Fiber IPE Controller Card

NT1P62 (FPEC)]

MG 1000E superloop ipmg-4.0

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG T Ethernet Port Designator.

basic-5.00

1-16 alphanumeric characters.

default value

Applicable only to MGC based IPMGs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1059

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

T2

Prompt

T2WN

T2WT

T2WV

T4WN

T4WT

T4WV

TDP

Response

d ..... d

<CR>

Comment

Shelf 0 / 1 IPMG T2 Ethernet Port

Designator.

1-16 alphanumeric characters.

default value applicable to only MGC based IPMGs.

Pack/Rel

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire NTC (Non-Transmission

Compensated) Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire TRC (Transmission

Compensated) Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 2-Wire VNL (Via Network Loss)

Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire NTC (Non-Transmission

Compensated) Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire TRC (Transmission

Compensated) Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

8-39 0-31 TIE trunk 4-Wire VNL (Via Network Loss)

Class of Service

Enter the coded Relative Input/Output Levels; the first field is the Receive (A/D) entry; the second field is the Transmit (D/A) entry.

xpe-18

(15)-1275 Timer - Dial Pulse

Minimum time for dial pulse for Extended

Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.

Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds. CDP must be greater than Minimum Switchhook

Flash.

xpe-18

1060 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TDPO

TID

TNS

TNUM

Response Comment Pack/Rel

15-(150)-1275

Timer - Dial Pulse On

Maximum time for dial pulse for Extended

Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.

Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds. TDPO must be greater than or equal to TDP.

xpe-18

0-(150)-1275

Timer - InterDigit. Interdigit time for Extended

Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.

Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.

xpe-18

0-1000

0-32767 xx

Maximum number of Terminal Numbers

Maximum number of Terminals xpe-18

Predefined Table Number to be used.

Prompted if PRED is selected. There is no default. Where:

• xx = 1-27 when TTYP = STAT

• xxx = 1-5 when TTYP = DYNM

Following is the list of predefined tables.

A table noted as ETSI Mode of Operation should be used only on systems where all

Peripheral cards are equipped with the B34

Codec.

A table noted as Existing Mode of Operation should be used on systems where all

Peripheral cards are not equipped with the B34

Codec.

xpe-18

For TTYP = STAT, the predefined tables are:

TNUM

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

Country

Austria & Greece

Austria

Belgium

Belgium

Denmark

Denmark

Finland

Mode

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1061

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

25

26

27

TNUM

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

For TTYP = DYNM the predefined tables are:

TNUM

1

2

3

4

5

Prompt

TOHV

Response

0-(250)-1275

Country

Germany

Italy

Italy

Netherlands

Netherlands

Norway

Norway

Portugal

Greece & Portugal

Spain

Sweden

Switzerland

Switzerland

U.K.

France

France

New Zealand

Australia

China - hybrid

China - pure

Country

New Zealand

Australia

Italy

China

China

Mode

ETSI/Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI/Existing

ETSI/Existing

ETSI

Existing

ETSI/Existing

ETSI

Existing

Existing

Existing

EPE and IPE

IPE system

Mode

Existing

Existing

Existing

EPE and IPE

IPE system

Comment

Timer - Off-Hook Validation

Off-Hook Validation timer for Extended

Flexible Analog Line Card (XFALC)

Pack/Rel

xpe-18

1062 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

TPF

TTYP

TYPE

(STAT)

DYNM

BTD

DTD

DTR

FDL

FIRP

LOSP

SYSM

SYSP

Response

0-(200)-1275

SUPL

XCTP

XPE

Comment

NT5K02. Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.

Timer - Post Flash

Post Flash timer for Extended Flexible

Analog Line Card (XFALC) NT5K02.

Inputs in increments of 5 milliseconds.

Prompted with Multi-Party Operations

(MPO) package 141.

Pack/Rel

xpe-18

B34 Static Loss Plan Table Type to be installed/modified

B34 Dynamic Loss Plan Alternative Level

Table Type to be installed/modified

A B34 Static Loss Plan Table must be installed before B34 Dynamic Loss

Switching can be enabled. Therefore, if

TTYP= DYNM, and the existing STYP =

"DISL", then error message SCH5838 is printed, and TTYP is re-prompted.

xpe-18

Type of data block

When modifying IPE system parameters, the system must initialize for the changes to come into effect. The loop number for the NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card is defined by prompt XCT in LD 17.

Busy Tone Detection

Dial Tone Detection parameters

Digitone Receiver parameters

Flash Download for M3900 telephones

Fiber Remote Parameters

Loss Plan Tables

System parameters for MSDL/MISP cards.

System parameters. When modifying the

IPE system parameters, the system must initialize for the changes to come into effect.

Superloop parameters

Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters. The loop number for the

NT8D17 Conference/TDS/MFS card is defined by prompt XCT in LD 17.

Extended Peripheral Equipment shelves xpe/msdl-18

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1063

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

XNPD 28

Response

XPE

XPE0

XPE1

1-95

<CR>

1-99 x y z x y z

Comment

Network loop number for Extended

Network/ Peripheral equipment controller/ Digitone receiver (XNPD) card

The NT8D18 card contains a superloop and 8 Digitone Receivers. The Digitone

Receivers are defined in LD 13.

Pack/Rel

xpe-15

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller

All Extended Peripheral Equipment controllers

The output format for Peripheral

Controller data is:

SO S1 S2 S3 LOC DISRGTP xx yyy yyy yyy yyy zzz YES/NO rr

Where: xpe-15

• xx = Controller number

• yyy = superloop number for each segment

• zzz = location code entered with prompt LOC

• DIS = YES of NO (Peripheral

Controller disabled)

• RGTP = 8 or 16 (Ringing

Generator Type)

Systems with Fibre Network Fabric fnf-25

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 0

Peripheral Controller number, starting segment and ending segment

Define the superloop configuration, where:

• x = Controller number (1-95) for superloop's shelf 0

• y = starting shelf segment number (0-3)

• z = ending shelf segment number (0-3)

Enter: X to remove XPE0 or <CR> Return to REQ prompt.

xpe-15

Extended Peripheral Equipment controller 1 Peripheral Controller number, starting segment and ending segment xpe-15

1064 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of prompts

Prompt

XPEC

Response

(0)-95

1-95

Comment

Define the superloop configuration, where:

• x = Controller number (1-95) for superloop's shelf 1

• y = starting shelf segment number

(0-3)

• z = ending shelf segment number

(0-3)

Enter:

• X to remove XPE1

• <CR> Return to REQ prompt.

Pack/Rel

Extended Peripheral Equipment

Controller (assign Peripheral Controller numbers; 0 for automatic)

Block is built with segments of the peripheral shelf (RCI or FXPEC) which are associated with this SUPL (LCI or

FXNET)

Where:

0 = Automatically assign Controller numbers. The system assigns the next available Controller number. 0 cannot be assigned for XPND.

1-95 = Manually assign Controller numbers

Precede with X to remove. Remove all cards/TNs in the Controller shelf first.

XPEC is prompted if SUPT=CARR or

FIBR.

Extended Peripheral Equipment

Controller if SUPT = CARR or FIBR.

If SUPT = CARR, the superloop block is built with all segments (0-3) of the peripheral shelf (RCI) and associated with this SUPL (LCI). This ensures that one LCI is configured to only one RCI, and that all segments on the RCI are associated with the LCI.

If SUPT = FIBR, the superloop block is built with default Fiber remote parameters and all segments (0-3) of the peripheral shelf (FPEC) are associated with this

SUPL (FNET).

xpe-15 rem_ipe-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1065

LD 97: Configuration Record 2

Prompt

XSMN

XTDT

Response

(0)-63

(0)-7

Comment

XSM address on the remote shelf. (0) means not configured. XSMN applies only to Wall-Mounted remotes.

Pack/Rel

rem_ipe-22

Extended Tone Detection Table

XTDT table number in which all the following parameters are stored.

Table 0 can be changed but must not be removed. Table 0 always exists and is initialized to default values. With UK package (190) Table 0 defaults are:

Parameter Value

DFQ 0 MDL - 30 dBm

MVT 300 ms BRK 0 ms CAD 0 SSC 0

Without UK package (190) Table 0 defaults are: Parameter Value

DFQ 4 MDL -20 dBm

MVT 400 ms BRK 0 ms CAD 0 SSC 0 xpe-16

ZONE0 / 1 0-255 0–8000 Shelf 0 or 1 IPMG cabinet zone number

Note:

ZONEs used for IPMG purposes must be configured as SHARED so that other IP devices that are not in the same ZONE can gain access to the

IPMG devices.

basic-5.00

basic-7.00

1066 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 51: LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm

Management

This overlay has a command format that allows the administrator to:

• configure the Alarm Management feature

• identify all system alarms

• configure IP network interface addresses

• perform all IP network related maintenance and diagnostic functions

Both Administration and Maintenance commands appear in this overlay, therefore this overlay is present in both of the CS 1000 software reference NTPs Software Input Output Reference - Administration,

NN43001-611 and Software Input Output Reference - Maintenance, NN43001-711.

Command format

LD 117 uses a command line input interface (input parser) that has the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt):

=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD2 value)... (FIELDx value)]

LD 117 offers the administrator the following configuration features:

• Context Sensitive Help - Help is offered when "?" is entered. The Help context is determined by the position of the "?" entry in the command line. If you enter "?" in the

COMMAND position, Help text appears that presents all applicable command options. If you enter "?" in the OBJECT position, HELP text appears that presents all applicable

OBJECT options.

• Abbreviated Inputs - The new input parser recognizes abbreviated inputs for commands, objects and object fields. For example, "N" can be entered for the command "NEW" or

"R" can be entered for the object "Route".

• Optional Fields - Object fields with default values can be bypassed by the user on the command line. For example, to configure an object which consists of fields with default values, enter the command, enter the object name, press <return>, and the object is configured with default values. All object fields do not have to be specified. For CS 1000S systems both the optional fields <cab> and <port> refer to the MG 1000S number.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1067

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

• Selective Change - Instead of searching for a prompt within a lengthy prompt-response sequence, "Selective Change" empowers the administrator to directly access the object field to be changed.

• Service Change Error Message Consistency - The parser simplifies usage of service change error messages. LD 117 displays only SCH0099 and SCH0105.

Alarm Management capability

With the Alarm Management feature, all processor-based system events are processed and logged into a new disk-based System Event List (SEL). Events which are generated as a result of administration activities, such as SCH or ESN error messages, are not logged into the SEL.

Events which are generated as a result of maintenance or system activities, like BUG and ERR error messages, are logged into the SEL. Unlike the previous System History File, this new

System Event List survives Sysload, Initialization and power failures.

Feature packaging

With the exception of the Alarm Notification subfeature, the Alarm Management feature is optional. It is a major enhancement to the existing Alarm Filtering (ALRM_FILTER) package

243.

The Event Collector

The Event Collector captures and maintains a list of all processor-based system events. The

Event Collector also routes critical events to FIL TTY ports and lights the attendant console minor alarm lamp as appropriate. The System Event List (SEL) can be printed or browsed.

The Event Server

The Event Server consists of two components:

1. Event Default Table (EDT): This table associates events with a default severity. By using the CHG EDT command in LD 117, the EDT is overridden so that all events default to a severity of either INFO or MINOR. The EDT is viewed in LD 117. The

Default Table is stored in a disk file but is scanned into memory on start-up for rapid run-time access.

1068 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alarm Management capability

Table 27: Sample Event Default Table (EDT)

Error Code

ERR220

IOD6

BUG4001

Severity

Critical

Critical

Minor

Note:

Error codes which do not appear in the EDT is assigned a default severity of

MINOR.

2. Event Preference Table (EPT): This table contains site-specific preferences for event severities as well as criteria for severity escalation and alarm suppression.

The administrator configures the EPT to: a. override the default event severity assigned by the default table or b. escalate event severity of frequently occurring minor or major alarms.

Table 28: Sample Event Preference Table (EPT)

Error Code

ERR??? (see Note 1)

INI???

BUG1??

HWI363

Severity

Critical

Default

Minor

Major

Escalate Threshold

(events/60 sec.) (see Note 2)

5

7

0

3

Note:

The "?" is a wildcard. See the section below for explanation of wildcard entries.

Note:

The window timer length defaults to 60 seconds. However, this value can be changed by the Administrator. Read

Global window timer length

on page 1070 for more information.

Wildcards

The special wildcard character "?" can be entered for the numeric segment of an error code entry in the EPT to represent a range of events. All events in the range indicated by the wildcard entry can then be assigned a particular severity or escalation threshold.

For example, if "ERR????" is entered and assigned a MAJOR severity in the EPT, all events from ERR0000 to ERR9999 are assigned MAJOR severity. If "BUG3?" is entered and assigned

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1069

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management an escalation threshold of 5, the severity of all events from BUG0030 to BUG0039 is escalated to the next higher severity if their occurrence rate exceeds 5 per time window.

The wildcard character format is as follows:

• ERR? = ERR0000 - ERR0009

• ERR?? = ERR0010 - ERR099

• ERR??? = ERR0100 - ERR0999

• ERR???? = ERR1000 - ERR9999

Escalation and suppression thresholds

The escalation threshold specifies a number of events per window timer length that, when exceeded, causes the event severity to be escalated up one level. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. Escalation occurs only for minor or major alarms. Escalation threshold values must be less than the universal suppression threshold value.

A suppression threshold suppresses events that flood the system and applies to all events. It is set to 15 events per minute by default.

Global window timer length

Both the escalation and suppression thresholds are measured within a global window timer length. The window timer length is set to 1 minute by default. However, the window timer length can be changed by using the CHG TIMER command in LD 117.

TTY output format of events

TTY event output can be formatted or unformatted. Formatted output is also called fancy format. Output format is configurable in LD 117 using the CHG FMT _OUTPUT command.

Fancy format output

Formatted output appears in the following template:<severity> <report id> <date> <time>

<prim_seq_no> <cp_id> <cp_ad> DESCTXT: <descriptive text> OPRDATA: <operator data>

EXPDATA: <expert data>

Field

<severity>

<report id>

Description

"***" (critical); "**" (major); "*" (minor); " " (blank for info)

The report ID consists of an event category (e.g. BUG, ERR, etc.) and an event number (1200, 230, etc.). It is padded with blanks at the end to

1070 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alarm Management capability

<descriptive text>

Field

<date>

<time>

<cp_ad>

Description

ensure it is 9 characters long (4 characters maximum for category and 5 digits maximum for number). Examples of report IDs are: ACDxxxx,

ERRxxx and BUGxx, where x = 0-9.

DD/MM/YY

HH:MM:SS

<prim_seq_no> Primary sequence number of the event (length of 5 digits)

<cp_id> The Component ID is a 15 character string which indicates the ID of the subsystem generating the alarm

The Component address is a 15 character string which indicates the address of the subsystem generating the event

This is an optional string which describes an event

<operator data> This is an optional field which holds a 160 character string containing extra text or data to assist the operator in clearing a fault. This field contains any data output with a filtered SL-1 alarm (e.g. loop number, TN, etc.)

<expert data> This is an optional variable length character string which contains extra text or data for a system expert or designer.

The following are samples of fancy format output:

*** BUG015 15/12/95 12:05:45 00345

EXPDATA: 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EC6 05500EAA

BUG015 + 05500E72 + 05500E56 + 0550D96 + 055053A + 04D84E02 + 04D83CFC

BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7EFC 04F7E1B0

* ERR00220 15/12/92 12:05:27 00346

OPRDATA: 51

VAS0010 15/12/92 12:06:11 00347 VMBA VAS 5

Unformatted Output

Unformatted data consists of only the report ID and perhaps additional text. The following is a sample of unformatted output:

BUG015

BUG015 + 04BEF0FC 05500FBA 05500EE2 05500EAA 0550E8E

BUG015 + 05500E72 05500E56 05500D96 0550053A 04D84E02

BUG015 + 04D835CA 04D81BAE 04D7EABE 04F7EDF2 04F7E2FC 04&E1B0

BUG015 + 04F7E148

ERR00220 51

VAS0010

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1071

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

LD 117 is used to configure and manage an IP network interface. The large systems are hardware-equipped with an Ethernet controller on the I/O processor (IOP) card. Each IOP card is equipped with a Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet (LANCE) which is preconfigured with an unique Ethernet address.

The Small Systems and CS 1000S systems can be hardware-equipped with Ethernet daughterboards on the System Controller card. They support both Ethernet and Point-to-Point

Protocol.

For large systems, the unique 48-bit long physical address (Ethernet address) is a assigned to the Ethernet controller on the IOP. On a single CPU M1 system, there is only one IOP which contains one Ethernet interface and an IP address which must be configured. Single CPU systems use only a Primary IP address.

On a redundant or dual CPU M1 system, two IP addresses must be specified: Primary and

Secondary. A dual CPU M1 system operating normally uses the Primary IP address. A dual

CPU M1 system operating in split mode (the mode used only when upgrading software or hardware) uses the Secondary IP address.

Remote access to the switches is made possible with Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). LD 117 is used to configure IP addresses for Point-to-Point Protocol.

The large system Ethernet interface is provided by the IOP card with AUI cable on the back panel on Options 51C, 61C, 81 and 81C. The Small System provides an Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the main cabinet. The CS 1000S system provides an

Ethernet interface through an ethernet connection on the Call Server. The Point-to-Point

Protocol (PPP) is established via asynchronous connection to any system SDI port. The IP addresses for Ethernet and PPP interface are configured in Overlay 117, and defaults are available for all new installations and upgrades.

How to Configure Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

The following tables explain how to configure IP addresses for Ethernet and Point-to-Point

Protocol. These two tables are followed by examples.

Step

Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)

Action

1 Load Overlay 117

2

3

4

Create host entries

Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)

Set up Ethernet subnet mask

1072 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Ethernet and Point-to-Point Protocol

Step

Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)

Action

5 Set up routing entry

Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface (10BaseT)

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117

2

3

Create host entries

Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es)

Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)

Given: Primary IP address: 47.1.1.10 ; Secondary IP address: 47.1.1.11; Subnet mask:

255.255.255.0; Default Gateway IP: 47.1.1.1

Step

1

2

Action

Load Overlay 117

3

Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:

NEW HOST PRIMARY_IP 47.1.1.10

NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

NEW HOST GATEWAY_IP 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands:

CHG ELNK ACTIVE PRIMARY_IP

CHG ELNK INACTIVE SECONDARY_IP (for Dual CPU only)

Verify your IP address for Ethernet by entering the PRT ENLK command.

4

5

Note:

To reuse the active host entry and/or associated IP address, the existing entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing enty, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. Out the original host entry, then proceed to Step 2.

Set up Ethernet subnet mask. Enter the command:

CHG MASK 255.255.255.0

Verify subnet mask setting by entering the command: PRT MASK

Set up routing entry. Enter the command:

NEW ROUTE 0.0.0.0 47.1.1.1 (if connected to customer LAN)

Where: 0.0.0.0 = destination network IP and 47.1.1.1 = default gateway

IP

Note:

When more than one gateway exists, replace 0.0.0.0 with the destination network address for each entry of the routing table.

Verify default routing by entering the command: PRT ROUTE

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1073

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 1 Configure ELAN IP address for the Ethernet Interface (10BaseT)

Note:

For a single CPU machine, the secondary IP is not used.

Note:

The secondary IP is accessible only when a system is in split mode.

Note:

The subnet mask must be the same value used for the system Ethernet network.

Note:

The system private Ethernet (ELAN subnet) is used for system access and control. Use an internet gateway to isolate the system private Ethernet from the Customer Enterprise

Network.

Note:

Routing information is required if an internet gateway or router connects a system private network (ELAN subnet) to the Customer Enterprise Network. New routes use network

IPV4 classification to determine the whether the route is network or host based.

Note:

INI is required for the activation of subnet Mask.

Example 2 Configure ELAN IP address for the Point-to-Point Protocol Interface

(10BaseT)

Given: Local IP address: 172.1.1.1; Remote IP address 100.1.1.1

Step

1

2

Action

Load Overlay 117

3

Create host entries. Enter one of the following commands:

NEW HOST LOCAL_PPP 172.1.1.1

NEW HOST REMOTE_PPP 100.1.1.1 (this entry is optional)

Assign host to primary and/or secondary IP address(es). Enter one of the following commands:

CHG PPP LOCAL LOCAL_PPP 0 (always use interface #0)

CHG PPP REMOTE REMOTE_PPP 0 (this entry is optional)

Verify your IP address(es) for PPP by entering the PRT PPP command.

1074 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Command descriptions

Command descriptions

Command

****

BROWSE

CHG

DIS

ENL

Definition

Abort

Browse

Change

Disable

Enable

INV

GENERATE

Enable

INV MIDNIGHT Enable

INV PRT

NEW

OUT

PRT

RST

SET

STAT

STIP

TEST

UPDATE

Print

New

Out

Print

Reset

Set

Status

Status

Test

Update

Description

Abort overlay or Printing if it is printing an Inventory file

Browse an existing System Event List

Change/modify object configuration

Disable Point-to-Point Protocol

Enable Point-to-Point Protocol

Enable inventory

Set Midnight routine for inventory

Print out the status of the Inventory feature

Add and configure new object

Delete existing object

Print configuration of existing object

Reset Object

Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value

Display object statistics

Display resource locator module information

Test Object

Update INET database

Object descriptions

DBS

DNIP

EDT

Object Description

Database

IP address of IP Phone

Event Default Table: Table of default event entries and associated severities

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1075

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

ELNK

Object

ELNK ACTIVE

ELNK INACTIVE

EPT

FMT_OUTPUT

HOST

IPDN

IPR

IPM

LDAPSYNC

MASK

NDAPP

OPEN_ALARM

PPP

PPP LOCAL

PPP REMOTE

PTM

Description

Ethernet interface

Active Ethernet Link: Change the Primary IP address and host name

Inactive Ethernet Link: Change the Secondary IP address and host name

Event Preference Table: Table of customer's event entries with associated severities

Formatted Output: Determine if system events uses formatted (also called fancy) or unformatted output.

Host name

IP address of configured DN

IP connectivity configuration associated with specified port

IP connectivity configuration associated with main cabinet

LDAP server synchronization

Subnet mask

Name Directory application

Open Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps setting

Point-to-Point Protocol interface

Local Point-to-Point Protocol interface address

Remote Point-to-Point Protocol interface address

Point-to-Point Protocol idle Timer

ROUTE

SELSIZE

SEL

SUPPRESS

Configure new routing entry

System Event List Size: Number of events in System Event Log

System Event List

Number of times the same event is processed before it is suppressed.

SUPPRESS_ALARM Severity level that triggers sending of alarms.

TIMER Global window timer length

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

The following tables explain IP Connectivity set-up using Bootp and Manual Configuration. The tables are followed by examples.

1076 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Important:

CS 1000S does not support IP addresses of all zeros (0) or all ones (1).

Point-to-Point configuration - Call Server, Bootp is used

To configure Mac addresses for the MG 1000S 100BaseT daughterboard in a Point-to-Point configuration, use the following steps. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system is done on the Call Server side in OVL117. Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S.

Step

1

2

3

Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard.

Action

Load Overlay 117.

Configure MAC address.

Reboot Call Server.

Given:

Example 1 Configure MAC address for the 100BaseT daughterboard.

MAC address of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the MG 1000S:

00:90:cf:03:71:15 The MG 1000S is connected to the port number 1 of the Call Server.

Step

1

2

Action

Load Overlay 117.

3

Configure the MAC address. Enter the following commands:

CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15

Verify the MAC address by entering the PRT IPR command.

Reboot the Call Server.

Recommended BootP configuration for Layer 2 LAN configuration

- Call Server only

The following tables explain how to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 2 LAN configuration. Full IP connectivity configuration for the system occurs on the Call Server side in OVL117. The MG 1000S does not need to be configured.

Bootp protocol is used to automatically configure IP parameter on the MG 1000S. BootP is the recommended Layer 2 configuration procedure.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1077

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT ports.

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117.

2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.

3

4

Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT.

Reboot the Call Server.

Example 2 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server and MG 1000S TLAN

100BaseT ports.

Given: MAC address of the 100BaseT daughter board on the MG 1000S:

00:90:cf:03:71:15; IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT:

47.147.75.101; Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT:

255.255.255.0; IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100;

Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100Base: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S is connected to the slot number 1 of the Call Server.

Step Action

1

2

3

4

Load Overlay 117

Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES

Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1

Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0

Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1

Reboot the Call Server.

Manual Layer 2 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S

When using manual configuration the following steps are required for both the Call Server and

MG 1000S.

IP connectivity Layer 2 configuration for the Call Server side occurs in OVL117. These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer

2 configuration on the Call Server side:

1078 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask.

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117.

2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.

3

4

Configure the IP address on the Call Server 100BaseT.

Reboot the Call Server.

Example 3 Configure MAC and IP addresses for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports and subnet mask.

Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100; Subnet Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call

Server.

Step Action

1

2

3

4

Load Overlay 117.

Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.75.101 255.255.255.0 YES

Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1

Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPM 1 47.147.75.100 255.255.255.0

Verify by entering the command: PRT IPM 1

Reboot the Call Server.

The Layer 2 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side occurs during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure

IP address for the 100BaseT daughter board in a Layer 2 configuration on the MG 1000S side:

TTY needs to be connected to the MG 1000S.

Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.

Step Action

1 Choose Manual configuration option from the installation menu.

2

3

4

Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.

Configure the MG 1000S NetMask.

Configure the IP address of the Call Server.

Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.

Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.75.101;

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1079

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 4 Configure MAC and IP address for MG 1000S TLAN 100BaseT port.

Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0;

IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.75.100;

The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server.

Step

1

Action

IP parameters for this module are obtained by:

1. Automatically using BootP

2. Using Manual configuration

2 Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.75.101

Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0

Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.75.100

Note:

If the MG 1000S IP address is on a subnet different than the Call

Server IP address then the default MG 1000S Address (0.0.0.0) is required.

Manual Layer 3 configuration - Call Server and MG 1000S

The IP connectivity Layer 3 for the Call Server is configured in OVL117.

Note:

For Layer 3, manual configuration is mandatory.

These steps are followed to configure MAC and IP addresses for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the Call Server side:

Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN 100BaseT ports.

Step Action

1 Load Overlay 117.

2 Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.

3

4

5

Configure the IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT.

Configure routing entry between the Call Server and MG 1000S.

Reboot the Call Server.

Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN

100BaseT ports.

Given: IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT port 1: 47.147.10.100; Subnet

Mask of the Call Server 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0; Gateway address on

1080 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

How to configure IP Connectivity with CS 1000S

Example 5 Configure MAC and IP address and routing entry for the Call Server TLAN

100BaseT ports.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Call Server: 47.147.10.1; IP address of the MG 1000S 1: 47.147.20.101

The MG 1000S 1 is connected to the port number 1 of the 100BaseT daughterboard on the Call Server.

Action

Load Overlay 117.

Configure the MAC and IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPR 1 00:90:cf:03:71:15 47.147.20.101 255.255.255.0 YES

Verify by entering the command: PRT IPR 1

Configure IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT. Enter the following command:

CHG IPM 1 47.147.10.100 255.255.255.0

Verify by entering command: PRT IPM 1

Configure new route to reach IPR:

NEW ROUTE 47.147.20.0 47.147.10.1 0 1

Configure new route to reach IPM Local subnet:

NEW ROUTE 47.147.10.0 47.147.20.100 0 1

Reboot Call Server.

The Layer 3 IP connectivity configuration for the MG 1000S side is configured during system installation when Manual configuration has been chosen. These steps are followed to configure

IP address for the 100BaseT daughterboard in a Layer 3 configuration on the MG 1000S side:

Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN (100BaseT) port.

Step Action

1 Choose the Manual configuration option from the installation menu.

2

3

Configure the IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT.

Configure the IP MG 1000S NetMask.

4

5

Configure the IP address on the Call Server.

Configure the MG 1000S Routing address.

Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN

(100BaseT) port.

Given: IP address of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 47.147.20.101;

Subnet Mask of the MG 1000S 100BaseT: 255.255.255.0;

Gateway address for MG 1000S: 47.147.20.1;

IP address of the Call Server 100BaseT: 47.147.10.100;

The MG 1000S is connected to slot number 1 of the Call Server.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1081

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Example 6 Configure MAC and IP address and router entry for MG 1000S TLAN

(100BaseT) port.

Step Action

1

2

IP parameters for this module are obtained by:

1. Automatically using BootP

2. Using Manual configuration

Enter your selection: 2

Enter the MG 1000S IP address: 47.147.20.101

Enter the MG 1000S NetMask: 255.255.255.0

Enter the Call Server IP address: 47.147.10.100

Enter the MG 1000S Router/Gateway address: 47.147.20.1

Auto-Negotiate on 100BaseT ports

The Auto-Negotiation feature must be enabled on each Main Cabinet/Call Server and

Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S ethernet port to allow bandwidth negotiation of 100 Mbps full duplex.

Note:

These commands are executed on the Main Cabinet/Call Server side.

The commands for enabling auto-negotiation are:

• Main Cabinet/Call Server ports CHG AUTONEG IPM <port> <a...a>

• Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S port CHG AUTONEG IPR <port> <a...a>

To enable Auto-Negotiation with a Expansion Cabinet/MG 1000S configured on port one, enter the following commands:

CHG AUTONEG IPM 1 ON

CHG AUTONEG IPR 1 ON

Important:

When auto-negotiation is enabled, if a link is already up, a LINK DOWN message is reported on the TTY. This is normal because the data ports must perform the bandwidth negotiation protocol to obtain its required 100Mbps full duplex. This process takes 5 to 7 seconds. Once the process is complete, a LINK UP message is reported and the system is ready for normal operations.

To get the status of the auto-negotiation process, after process completion, enter the following commands:

STAT AUTONEG IPM

1082 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

STAT AUTONEG IPR

The following is a sample print out for the Main Cabinet/Call Server:

AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/CALL

SERVER PORTS

---------------------------------------------------

PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate

===================================================

IPM 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON

IPM 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

IPM 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON

IPM 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise

UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

The following is a sample print out for the MG 1000S:

AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS

---------------------------------------------------

PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate

===================================================

IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON

IPR 2 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON

IPR 4 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100 Mbps full duplex". Otherwise

UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating the 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

IP command descriptions

Command

CHG AUTONEG IPM

CHG AUTONEG IPR Change Auto-Negotiation for Expansion Cabinet port.

CHG AUTOSB <cab> <a...a> Change the automatic switch back option of a given

Expansion Cabinet.

CHG CACVT <Zone> <1–

(48)-255>

Description

Change Auto-Negotiation for Main Cabinet ports.

Configure the zone-to-zone record validity time interval.Where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(48)-255 = interval in hours

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1083

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

CHG CD <zone> <1–

(50)-100>

Command Description

Change the Cd coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone.Where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = Cd coefficient

CHG CPL <zone> <1–

(50)-100>

Change the Cpl coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone.Where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = Cpl coefficient

CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP

Address> <Echo Server Port>

Change Echo Server 1’s IP address and port number.Where:

• Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)

• Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000)

CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP

Address> <Echo Server Port>

Note:

Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the LTPS card.

Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number.Where:

• Echo Server 2 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)

• Echo Server 2 Port number = (10000)

Note:

Echo Server 2 IP address uses the node IP address on the node’s master card.

CHG IPM <port> <ip> [mask] Changes the IP connectivity configuration associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port.

CHG IPR <port> <mac> [ip]

[mask] [a...a]

Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port.Where: a...a = zeroBandwidth = (NO) YES

Default value for zeroBandwidth means that in a ’no traffic condition’ bandwidth is not brought down to zero. Use NO in a PTP configuration, when data units are configured on the Expansion Cabinet to avoid potential packet loss. Use

1084 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command Description

YES in a Layer 2 or Layer 3 configuration to bring the bandwidth down to zero in a no traffic condition.

CHG NKT

CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix>

<country_code> <npa> <ac1>

<ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>

<ttbl>

Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.

Where time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds.

Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>

CHG PDV <port> <delay>

CHG PPP LOCAL

<hostname> [cab]

CHG PPP REMOTE

<hostname> [cab]

Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone. Package

420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Set Packet Delay Variation (PDV) buffer size and delay.

Set CS 1000S local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address.

Set CS 1000S remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address.

CHG PTM <xxx> [cab] Change Point-to-Point Protocol Timer.

CHG SWOTO <cab> <x...x> Change the switch over time out timer of a given MG

1000S.

CHG SURV <cab> <a...a>

CHG ZACB <Zone> <AC1–

AC2> <AC1–AC2>

Change Survivable Capability of a given MG 1000S.

Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone.

CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a> Define a zone as a branch office zone.

CHG ZDES <Zone>

<ZoneDescription>

Assign the Zone a descriptive name (ZoneDescription).

CHG ZDID <numbering zone>

<matching string>

<replacement string>

[<description>]

CHG ZDP <Zone>

<DialingCode1>

<DialingCode2>

<DialingCode3>

Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone.

CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a

<StartMonth> <StartWeek>

<StartDay> <StartHour>

<EndMonth> <EndWeek>

<EndDay> <EndHour>

Specify whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1085

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

CHG ZESA <Zone>

<ESARLI> <ESAPrefix>

<ESALocator>

Description

Defines the emergency services access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the ESA package is enabled.

CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

<type> [<replacement string>]

[LEN <max length>]

[“<description>”]

Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber>

<intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy>

<interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy> <a...a>

Change the parameters of an existing Zone.Where:

• <zoneNumber> = 0–255

• <zoneNumber> = 0–8000

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network

Bandwidth Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than

255.

• <intraZoneBandwidth> = Intrazone available bandwidth

(0 to 10000000 Kbps)

• <intraZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy (BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)

• <interZoneBandwidth> = Interzone available bandwidth

(0 to 10000000 Kbps)

• <interZoneStrategy> = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy ((BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)

• <zoneResourceType> = type of zone (Shared or Private)

- Shared: The ethersets configured in Shared zones use

DSP resources configured in Shared zones. If all of the

Shared zones’ gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the shared zones’ channels

- Private: DSP channels configured in a Private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that Private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones are used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the

1086 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command Description

private zones’ channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is: i. channel from same private zone as etherset is configured ii. any available channel from the pool of shared zones’ channels

Note:

Current default zone type = Shared.

CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name>

<value>

CHG ZTDF <Zone>

<TimeDifferenceFrom

HeadOffice>

Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time.

DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC]

[ESA] [TIM]

Disable features of the branch office zone.

DWL DBS [cab]

Note:

All parameters must be re-entered when changing a zone.

Change the value of a ZBD numbering zone parameter.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Download 100BaseT database to the specified Expansion

Cabinet.

Enable features for the branch office zone.

ENL ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC]

[ESA] [TIM]

GEN ZONEFILE Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server.

IMPORT ZONEFILE

<fileName>

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist.

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1087

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

NEW HOST <hostname>

<IPaddress> [cab]

Description

range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Configure a new host entry (add host name and IP address to network host table). To reuse the active host entry and/ or associated IP address, the existing host entry must be removed. Prior to removing the existing host entry, you must first create a temporary host entry and make it active. OUT the original host entry and re-create your intended host entry.

NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix>

<country_code> <npa> <ac1>

<ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>

<ttbl>]

NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES

<zoneStartNumber>

<zoneAmount>

<intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy>

<interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy>

<zoneIntent>

<zoneResourceType>

NEW ROUTE <destination

IP> <gateway> [cab] [port]

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

Configure a new ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone

Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Create new bandwidth zones. This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting from

<zoneStartNumber>. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created.

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Configure a new routing entry (add new route to the network routing table).

NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

[<replacement string>] [LEN

<max length>] [<description>]

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

Configure a new ZBD numbering zone-based Flexible

Dialing Plan. Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

1088 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

NEW ZONE <ZoneNumber>

[<intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy>

<interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy>

<zoneIntent>

<zoneResourceType>]

OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone>

OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES

<zoneStartNumber>

<zoneAmount>

OUT ZDID <numbering zone>

<matching string>

OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

PRT AQOS <attribute>

<zone> / ALL>

PRT CAB [cab]

PRT DNIP <DN>

[<CustomerNo>]

Description

Create a new zone with parameters.

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

Remove a ZBD numbering zone. Package 420 (Zone

Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones. This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than

<zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted.

Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation.

Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL).

Print parameters and survivable capability of the specified

Expansion Cabinet.

Print a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN.

PRT ES1

PRT ES2

PRT ESS

PRT INTERZONE

PRT INTRAZONE

PRT IPDN <IPAddress>

Note:

A partial DN can be entered.

Print Echo Server 1’s IP address and port number.

Print the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number.

Print both Echo Servers IP address and port number.

Print interzone statistics for the range between the near and far zones.

Print intrazone statistics for all zones or for the specified zone.

Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address(es).

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1089

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

PRT IPM <port>

PRT IPR <port>

PRT NKT

PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone>

PRT NZDES <numbering zone>

PRT PDV <port>

PRT PPP [cab]

PRT PTM [cab]

PRT QOS <cab>

PRT SURV [cab]

PRT ZACB [<Zone>]

PRT ZBW [<Zone>]

PRT ZDES

[<DESMatchString>]

PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

Note:

Partial IP addresses can be entered with only the leading digits of the IP address (for example, 142.10), or as the

IP address with zeroes at the end (for example,

142.10.0.0)

Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Main Cabinet end of the specified port.

Print the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the Expansion Cabinet end of the specified port.

Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.

Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Print the current size of the PDV buffer and the number of

PDV underflows.

Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es).

Print Point-to-Point Protocol idle timer settings.

Print level of service based on system configured thresholds for selected Expansion Cabinet.

Prints the Expansion Cabinet Survivable capability for all, or specified Expansion Cabinets.

Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.

Print a table of zone bandwidth utilization.

Print a table of the zone description entries.

PRT ZDP [<Zone>]

PRT ZDST [<Zone>]

PRT ZESA [<Zone>]

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

Print a table of branch office zone emergency services access (ESA) entries.

1090 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command

PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

PRT ZONE ALL

PRT ZONE x...x

PRT ZPAGE [<zone number>

<zonesPerPage>]

PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]

PRT ZQOS <zone>

<attribute / ALL>

PRT ZTDF [<Zone>]

Description

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans.Package 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Print zone information for all zones.

Print zone information for a specific zone.

Print zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting at <zone number> zone.

Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.Package

420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL).

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

PRT ZTP [<Zone>]

PING ipAddress

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

Ping far end IP address.

• When IP (voice) link is UP:

PING to/from 100BaseT is ONLY enabled among the Call

Server and the Expansion Cabinets. They do not respond to PING from/to any other device in the data network.

• When IP (voice) link is DOWN:

PING command is enabled to/from entire data network.

STAT LINK APP

<applicationType>

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application.Where <applicationType> is:

• LTPS (Line TPS)

• VGW (Voice Gateway)

• H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk)

• GK (GateKeeper)

STAT LINK IP <IP address> Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified subnet.Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the

Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1091

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

STAT LINK NAME

<hostName>

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format

(e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name.Where <hostname> =

MAINSERVER

STAT LINK NODE <nodeID> Display the link information status of the specified node.Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999.

STAT LINK SRV

<serverType>

STAT SERV APP

<applicationType>

Note:

The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling

Server equipment.

Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type.Where <serverType> is:

• ITGP (ITG Pentium)

• SMC (Media Card)

• SS (Signaling Server)

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application.Where <applicationType> is:

• LTPS (Line TPS)

• VGW (Voice Gateway)

• H323 (H.323 Virtual Trunk)

• GK (GateKeeper)

• SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)

• MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

• SLG (SIP Line Gateway)

STAT SERV IP <IP address> Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP Address> = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media

Card.

STAT SERV NAME

<hostName>

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format

(e.g., "10.11.12.13" or "10.11").

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name.Where <hostname> =

MAINSERVER

1092 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

IP command descriptions

Command Description

STAT SERV NODE <nodeID> Display the link information status of the specified node.Where <nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway

Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.

STAT SERV TYPE

<serverType>

Display the server information of the specified server type.Where <serverType> is:

• ITGP (ITG Pentium)

• SMC (Media Card)

• SS (Signaling Server)

STAT SS Display the server information of the specified Signaling

Server.

STAT ZBR [<Zone>] Display status of branch office zones (displays which local dialing).

Display zone status table.

STAT ZONE [<Zone>]

STIP ACF

STIP ACF <status>

Displays status for all ACF calls.

Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) information.

STIP HOSTIP <IP address> Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP address> = the ELAN IP address of the

Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.

STIP NODE <nodeID>

STIP SIPLUA

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.

For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID.Where

<nodeID> = a number from 0 - 9999 identifying the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling Server equipment.

Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User

Agent string.

STIP TERMIP <IP address> Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net.Where <IP address> = the TLAN IP address of the

IP Phone or Voice Gateway Media Card.

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.

For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1093

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

STIP TN l s c u

STIP TYPE <aaa>

Description

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and cu parameters.

- 2002

- 2004

- 2007

- 2033

- 2050

- 2210

- 2211

- 2212

- 1140

- 1145

- 1150

- 1160

- 1210

- 1220

- 1230

- 2001

Note:

All codecs configured for the specified TN are listed in the format — <codec standard> and <bandwidth used for it>: CODEC(BW): G711a noVAD(1904), G711u noVAD(1904). The exact value of G.711 20ms codec BW usage is 190400 bps (or 190.4 kbps). However, the configured zone BW limit in the zone table is measured and configured in ‘kbps‘. The zone BW usage for a single call is counted in ‘kbps‘ and only in integer values. Zone

BW usage should be readable. The STIP commands in

LD 117 take BW value for IP codecs from the RLM table.RLM table stores the exact BW value and in the following format - 190400 bps divided to 100.

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type.Where <aaa> is:

• IP Phone type:

- 1110

- 1120

- 1130

1094 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Command

STIP ZONE <zone>

UPDATE DBS

NTP Command descriptions

Description

- MVC2050

• ISET = all IP Phones

• VGW = Voice Gateway resources

• IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks

Note:

Up to 3 types can be specified.

Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones.Where <zone> = any valid zone number (0 - 8000) in the system.

Rebuild INET database and download to all Expansion

Cabinets (update network database).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

Note:

To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using

Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the

Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

NTP Command descriptions

Note:

NTP commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and

Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Note:

To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1095

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

CHG NTP IPADDR

CHG NTP THRESH

CHG NTP SECURE

CHG NTP AUTHMODE

CHG NTP TIMEINT

CHG UTCOFFSET

ENL NTP

DIS NTP

STAT NTP

SYNC NTP

STOP NTP BACKGROUND

PRT NTP

Comment

Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and/or

Secondary NTP Servers.

Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels (Minimum,

Warning, Maximum).

Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or

Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation.

Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both, NTP servers.

Configure both the time interval for background NTP synchronization and the time offset from other background routines.

Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone.

Enable NTP.

Disable NTP.

Check Status of NTP.

Synchronize NTP servers manually or in background mode.

Stop background synchronization from running.

Display the current configuration parameters of NTP.

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

The commands listed below use the following general structure (where "=>" is the command prompt):

=> COMMAND OBJECT [(FIELD1 value) (FIELD 2 value)... (FIELDx value)]

In the following table, COMMANDS and OBJECTS are in bold typeface and fields are in regular typeface. Fields enclosed in brackets ( ) are default values.

Command

PRT BKPR ALL

Description Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Administer Accounts.

1096 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This prompt is available only when adding/modifying Level 2

(PWD2) user.

Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.

BANNERLOAD aa...a

basic-5.0

0

Login Banner. Input terminated with \n OR \r\n. Restricted to:

• 20 lines

• Up to 80 characters per line

• characters “a-z”, “A-Z”, ”0-9”, “,<.>/?;:’”[{]}‘~!@#$%^&*()_-+=|

\”

Note:

Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege loads the contents from the /u/pub/ banner.txt for use as the system login banner

An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/

VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.

BANNER LOAD

Load customized banner from banner.txt into memory.

BANNER RESET basic-5.0

0

BANNER SHOW

Reset banner contents with default value.

Note:

Available to users with the SEC_ADMIN privilege

An EDD is required to force all peripheral devices (SS/IPMG/

VGMC/Inactive Core) to update their login banners.

basic-5.0

0

Retrieves and displays the customized banner text from memory.

BROWSE SEL

Browse system event log by lines or string

BROWSE SEL UP n

Browse up n # of lines in System Event List (SEL).

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1097

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

BROWSE SEL DOWN n

Browse down n # of lines in SEL.

BROWSE SEL TOP

Browse to top of SEL.

BROWSE SEL BOT

Browse to bottom of SEL.

Pack/Rel

BROWSE SEL FIND xxx

Browse forward to find string xxx in SEL.

BROWSE SEL BFIND xxx

Browse backward to find string xxx in SEL.

BYRANGE

Return range of entries from embedded command

CHG ADMIN_COMM n aa...a

basic-4.0

0

Change SNMP community string for a given admin. group, where:

• n = a number from 1 to 3

• aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters, where:

- Default(1) = admingroup1 *

- Default(2) = admingroup2 *

- Default(3) = admingroup3 *

* = case-sensitive

These communities are used for accessing different SNMP objects on the Call Server, Signaling Servers, Voice Gateway

Media Cards and Media Gateway Controllers.

In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if administration group community strings are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an

"OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the

SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117

Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the

"ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

1098 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

CHG APPSRV

Description

Change the IP address of the application server for PD.

CHG BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy

Pack/Rel

Change a Backup Rule, where:

• xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system

• a...a = SCS, rule type that allows direct replication to another system

• b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system

• yy = (2)-10, the number of database versions to save on the destination system grprim-4

.00

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>]

[<name>]

Change backup rule to Fixed Media Device (FMD), where:

• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD

43).

• FMD = mnemonic for this rule type

• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device

• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed basic-4.5

0

Note:

The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS

1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> FTP <IP addr>

<login><pwd> <path> [<N of versions1-10>] [<name>]

Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where:

• <rule number> = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic Redundancy Database Replication

Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup basic-4.5

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1099

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43).

• FTP = mnemonic for this rule type

• IP addr = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data

• login = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters

• pwd = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters

• path = path on the FTP server where the backup data file (or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters

• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server

• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed

Pack/Rel

Note:

The only backup rule type which can be referenced from

GRDRC is SCS.

Note:

The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000

Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.

CHG BKPR <rule number1-100> RMD [<N of versions>]

[<name>]

Change backup rule to an Removable Media Device (RMD), where:

• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD

43).

• RMD = mnemonic for this rule type

• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device

• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed basic-4.5

0

1100 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS

1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

CHG BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP>

<FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>

Change a backup schedule, where:

• Rule for BKUP = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation

• FREQ = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where:

- M = monthly

- W = weekly

- D = daily

- A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A basic-4.5

0

Note:

When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR

DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ

= M, where:

- (SU) = Sunday

- MO = Monday

- TU = Tuesday

- WE = Wednesday

- TH = Thursaday

- FR = Friday

- SA = Saturday

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1101

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

- (1)- 31

Note:

When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month.

HOUR = 0-(3)-23

Pack/Rel

Note:

This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.

CHG CACVT <Zone> <1-(48)-255> zcac-4.5

0

Change the CAC record validity time interval in hours for CAC, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(48)-255 = interval in hours, default value is 48.

basic-7.0

0

CHG CD <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5

0

Change the CD coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the

Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = CD coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-7.0

0

CHG CJ <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5

0

Change the CJ coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the

Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = jitter coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-7.0

0

1102 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

CHG CPL <Zone> <1-(50)-100>

Description Pack/Rel

zcac-4.5

0

Change the CPL coefficient for CAC on the particular zone, in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the

Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = CPL coefficient, default value is 50.

zcac-7.0

0

CHG CQOS <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5

0

Change the CQoS coefficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = QoS coefficient zcac-7.0

0

CHG CQTH

Change the QoS warning and unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis

CHG CQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency>

<UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>

Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a per call basis, where: pvqm-4.0

• UnacpJitter = 5-(40)-500 msec

• UnacpLatency = 5-(100)-500 msec

• UnacpPacketLoss = 5-(70)-250 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1%

• UnacpRFactor = 20-(60)-94

Note:

Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the

Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

CHG CQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss>

<WarnRFactor>

Change VQ Warning thresholds on a per call basis, where: pvqm-4.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1103

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• WarnJitter = 5-(20)-200 msec

• WarnLatency = 5-(40)-100 msec

• WarnPacketLoss = 5-(20)-100 in units [1/10 of a percent] For example, 10 means 1%

• WarnRFactor = 20-(65)-94

Pack/Rel

Note:

Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the

Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

CHG CR <Zone> <1-(50)-100> zcac-4.5

0

Change the Cr co-efficient in the formula that determines how quickly an alarm reduces the Sliding Maximum bandwidth for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(50)-100 = Cr coefficient zcac-7.0

0

CHG EDT

Enable/disable the use of Event Default Table (EDT).

CHG EDT NORMAL alrm_filte r-21

Use Event Default Table (EDT) default severities.

CHG EDT INFO alrm_filte r-21

Override EDT; use INFO as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT).

CHG EDT MINOR

Override EDT; use MINOR as the default severity for all events except those specified in Event Preference Table (EPT)

CHG ELNK ACTIVE hostname

Set system active Ethernet interface IP address (set active

ELAN IP address).

alrm_filte r-21

1104 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG ELNK INACTIVE hostname

Set system inactive Ethernet interface IP address (set inactive

ELAN IP address)

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG EPT aa... a INFO x alrm_filte r-21

Change an Event Preference Table (EPT) entry to Information severity, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry

CHG EPT aa... a EDT x

Change EPT to NT-defined severity from EDT, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a MAJOR x alrm_filte r-21

Change an EPT entry to Major severity, where:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1105

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry

Pack/Rel

CHG EPT aa... a MINOR x

Change an EPT entry to Minor severity, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21

CHG EPT aa... a CRITICAL x

Change an EPT entry to Critical severity, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry alrm_filte r-21

CHG ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend>

<staticELIN> <osdn>]

Change an Emergency Response Location (ERL) table entry, where:

• <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier

Number in the range 1-65535.

• <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL

- RT = by route number

- RLI = by Route Line Index

• <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token)

- route number = as specified in LD 16

- route line index number = as specified in LD 86

• <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90 basic-5.0

0

1106 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls

• <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN)

• <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN

To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.

Pack/Rel

CHG ERLLOC <ERL#> <Location Description> basic-5.0

0

Assign a Location Description to an ERL.

CHG ERLSITE <ERL#> <Site Name> basic-5.0

0

Assign a Site Name to an ERL.

CHG ES1 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port> basic-4.0

0

Change the Echo Server 1 IP address and port number, where:

• Echo Server 1 IP Address = (0.0.0.0)

• Echo Server 1 Port number = (10000)

Note:

Echo Server 1 IP address uses the TLAN IP address of the

LTPS card.

CHG ES2 <Echo Server IP Address> <Echo Server Port> basic-4.0

0

Change the Echo Server 2 IP address and port number, where:

• Echo Server IP Address = (0.0.0.0)

• Echo Server Port = (10000)

Note:

Echo Server 2 default IP address uses the node IP address on the node's master card.

CHG FMT_OUTPUT OFF alrm_filte r-21

Turn off formatted output

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1107

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

CHG FMT_OUTPUT ON

Description Pack/Rel

alrm_filte r-21

Turn on formatted output

CHG GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc

Change current Geographic Redundancy Data Replication

Control (GRDRC) block, where:

• xxx = Backup Rule number.

• aaa = how the automatic database replication to the destination system occurs. Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD:

- SCHD - according to defined backup schedule

- (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation

- MIDN - after midnight data dump only

- NO - not allowed

• yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>.

• bbb = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic restore operation on the secondary system

• ccc = (YES) NO, Allow or deny automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system grprim-4

.00

Note:

ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES

CHG GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>]

Change GR N-way backup schedules, where:

• FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where:

- M = monthly

- W = weekly

- D = daily

• DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ

= M, where:

- (SU) = Sunday

- MO = Monday basic-5.0

0

1108 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

- TU = Tuesday

- WE = Wednesday

- TH = Thursday

- FR = Friday

- SA = Saturday

- (1)-31

When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR.

• HOUR = 0-(3)-23

• MINUTE = (0)-59

• DELAY = (3)-60

The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups.

The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and modifies a

BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.

Pack/Rel

CHG GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a

grprim-4

.00

Change current Geographic Redundancy State Control (GRSC) block, where:

• xxx = (1)-10% x (Basic IP User License + IP User License), the number of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the ACTIVATING state

• yyy = (5)-600, Short Term Failure Timer in minutes

• zzz = (5)-180, Failure Clearance Timer in minutes

• a..a = (AUTO) MAN, Secondary system Deactivation Mode, where:

- (AUTO) = Automatic

- MAN = Manual

CHG HSP_MASK <subnet mask> basic-4.5

0

Modify the manually-configured HSP subnet mask, if it exists; otherwise, the subnet mask to the Call Server is added.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1109

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

CHG IPR

Description

Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for IPMG.

CHG IPR x mac ip mask

Change the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the IP (Intelligent Peripheral) Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where:

• x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected

• mac = xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx, MAC address obtained from the sticker on the IP daughterboard mounted on the IP Expansion

SSC, where: x is a hexidecimal digit in the range 0-F

• ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0–255

• mask = x.x.x.x , subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0–255

Pack/Rel

CHG IPM

Change current 100BaseT IP configuration data for Call

Server.

CHG IPM x ip mask

Change the IP connectivity configuration associated with the main cabinet end of the specified port, where:

• x = 1-4, port number of the main cabinet to which the expansion cabinet is connected

• ip = x.x.x.x, Internet Protocol address, where: x is an integer in the range 0–255

• mask = x.x.x.x, subnet mask, where: x is an interger in the range 0–255

CHG L3ELAN x ACTIVE <address> basic-5.0

0

Define physical active ELAN address: Where:

• x = 0 OR 1 Core

• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

1110 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

CHG L3GW x <address>

Description Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Define physical ELAN default gateway address: Where:

• x = 0 OR 1 Core

• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG L3HSP <side> <address> basic-5.0

0

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where:

• Side = 0 OR 1 Core

• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG L3HSPGW <side> <address> basic-5.0

0

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where:

• Side = 0 OR 1 Core

• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG L3HSPMASK <side> <mask> basic-5.0

0

Change Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where:

• Side = 0 OR 1 Core

• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG L3MASK <side> <mask> basic-5.0

0

CHG L3PRIV active | inactive <address>

Define the IP address of the virtual ACTIVE / INACTIVE ELAN:

Where:

Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

basic-5.0

0

CHG LCL

Change the mask of the side specific ELAN port. Where:

• Side = 0 OR 1 Core

• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1111

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Change the Local Core Location Loop and Shelf values

(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

Pack/Rel

CHG LDAPSYNC <ldapsync> [<timeOfDay> [<ldapserver>

<userid> < password> [<security> [<secure port>

[insecure port>] ]]]]

Enable/disable the scheduled synchronization of the Unicode

Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data, or change the parameters for the scheduled synchronization task.

Where:

• <ldapsync> = disable/enable scheduled synchronization of the Unicode Name Directory data with the CND LDAP server data

- 0 = disable

- 1 = enable

• <timeOfDay> = the time of day for scheduled LDAP synchronization

Format = hh:mm

• <ldapserver> = IP address or FQDN of the CND LDAP server

• <userid> = username required for access to the CND LDAP server

• <password> = password required for access to the CND

LDAP server

• <security> = enable/disable secure SSL connection to the

CND LDAP server

• <secure port> = port used for secure SSL connection to CND

LDAP server.

Default port = 636.

• <insecure port> = port used for insecure connection to CND

LDAP server.

Default port = 389.

basic-6.0

0

Note:

<userid> and <password> must always be specified as a pair.

CHG MASK nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Change subnet mask.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications

1112 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NAV_SITE aa... a

Pack/Rel

basic-4.0

0

Change the navigation site name (MyCity, for example), where:

• aa...a = a string with maximum length of 32 characters

• default = Navigation Site Name

Note:

Use a single X to clear the field.

In CS 1000 Release 6.0, if the navigation site name is modified in LD117, it is stored in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area pending activation. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

CHG NBWMM IP

Set the IP address of the Primary NBWM Master.

CHG NBWMM STATE

Change the IP Peer System state.

CHG NBWMMA IP

Set the IP address of Alternate NBWM Master.

CHG NDAPP <ndAppValue> [<ndLkupTimer>] basic-6.0

0

Enable/disable the Name Directory Application.

Where:

• <ndAppValue> = 0, 1, OFF, ON

- 0 or OFF = disabled

- 1 or ON = enabled

• <ndLkupTimer> = 500-10000

If not specified, a default value of 3000 msec is used.

CHG NKT basic-4.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1113

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Change NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router, where: time out setting = 0-(30)-60 seconds

Pack/Rel

CHG NTP AUTHMODE <Secure | Insecure> <Primary |

Secondary | All>

Configure the security mode for the Primary, Secondary, or both,

NTP servers.

basic-5.0

0

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP IPADDR <primary_ip_addr> <secondary_ip_addr> basic-5.0

0

Configure the IP addresses for the Primary and Secondary NTP

Servers.

Note:

When you are configuring the IP address for the secondary

NTP server, enter the IP address of the primary NTP server, followed by the IP address of the secondary NTP server.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP MODE CS basic-5.0

0

Configure Router as the mode of communication between the

NTP server and the CS.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP MODE SS basic-5.0

0

Configure Signaling Server as the mode of communication between the NTP server and the CS.

1114 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP SECURE <primary_ip_add> <secondary_ip_addr>

<key_id>

Configure the parameters used by the Primary and/or

Secondary NTP servers in secure mode of operation.

Where:

• <primary_ip_add> = IP address of primary NTP server

• <secondary_ip_addr> = IP address of secondary NTP server

• <key_id> = private key with values = 1 - 4294967295.

The system prompts for the private key if not entered.

basic-5.0

0

Note:

For security reasons, the private key does not show in the command line as you enter it.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NTP THRESH <Minimum> <Warning> <Maximum> basic-5.0

0

Configure the 3 NTP threshold levels.

Where:

• <Minimum> = (0)-5 seconds

• <Warning> = (6)-15 seconds

• <Maximum> = (16)>15 seconds

Note:

Enter values for all three threshold levels when you use this command.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM CP PMserver). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1115

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

CHG NTP TIMEINT <time interval in hours> <offset in minutes>

Configure both the time interval for background synchronization and the offset from other background routines.

Where:

• <time interval in hours> = 1, 2, 6, 12, (24), 30

• <offset in minutes> = 15, (30), 45

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG NUMZONE <numbering zone> <site_prefix>

<country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>

<ttbl>

Change the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number

A number from 1-1023.

• ZBD zone parameters:

- <site_prefix> = site prefix

A number from 0-9999.

- <country_code> = country code

A number from 0-9999.

- <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)

A number from 0-9999.

- <ac1> = trunk access code 1

A number from 0-99.

- <ac2> = trunk access code 2

A number from 0-99.

- <natc> = national dial code

A number from 0-9999.

- <intc> = international dial code

A number from 0-9999.

- <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call

A number from (0)-1.

- <ttbl> = tone table

A number from (0)-32.

zbd-6.00

1116 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

CHG NZDES <numbering zone> <description>

Change the description of a ZBD numbering zone.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <description> = 1-128 characters

Description of numbering zone.

CHG PDBAK

Change parameters for remote backup of PD

CHG PDV

Change PDV value in milliseconds

CHG PPP LOCAL hostname

Set Meridian 1 local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address

CHG PPP REMOTE hostname

Set Meridian 1 remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address

CHG PTM 0-60

Change Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to specified value, where:

0-60 = value in minutes

Pack/Rel

zbd-6.00

CHG RCL

Change the Remote Core Location Loop and Shelf values

(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

CHG SELSIZE 5-(500)-2000

Change System Event List Size, where:

5-(500)-2000 = number of events in SEL

CHG SNMP_SYSCONTACT aa... a basic-4.0

0

Change the contact person name for this system element

(machine).

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1117

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters.

Default = "System Contact".

Note:

Use a single X to clear the field.

CHG SNMP_SYSLOC aa...a

Pack/Rel

basic-4.0

0 basic-4.0

0

Change the defined physical location for this system element

(machine).

Where aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 100 characters.

Default = "System Location".

basic-4.0

0

Note:

Use a single X to clear the field.

CHG SNMP_SYSNAME aa...a

basic-4.0

0

Change the system name assigned to this system element

(machine).

Where aa...a = a system name string with a maximum length of

100 characters.

can include a %hostname% variable that allows the system to configure the physical hostname as a component of the system element name

Default = "System Name".

basic-4.0

0 basic-5.5

0

Note:

Use a single X to clear the field.

CHG SQOS <SamplePeriod> <SampleRateWindow>

<MinSampleCnt>

Change VQ sampling parameters, where:

• SamplePeriod = 5-(30)-60 seconds

• SampleRateWindow = 60-(300)-3600 seconds

• MinSampleCnt = 50-(100)-1000 pvqm-4.0

1118 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

CHG SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask> <ERL> <ECL> "<Location

Description>"

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Change a subnet entry where:

• IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

• Mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

• ERL and ECL = 0-65535

• Location Description = 20 alphanumeric characters withn quotation marks.

Note:

Only the location fields (ERL, ECL, and Location Description) can be changed.

CHG SUPPRESS 5-(15)-127 alrm_filte r-21

Change global suppress for events, where:

5-(15)-127 = number of occurrences before event is suppressed

CHG SUPPRESS_ALARM [n] basic-4.0

0

Changes the minimum alarm severity threshold of the alarms that are sent.

Where [n] is:

• 0 = All

• 1 = Minor

• 2 = Major

• 3 = Critical

SYNC SNMPCONF basic-6.0

0

Update the "ACTIVE Configuration" (current) SNMP parameters on the CS with "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP parameters, and propagate the updated SNMP parameters to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the

CS.

SYNC SYS Propagates Dbconfig and QOS parameters on the CS to all system elements that have an established pbxlink with the

CS.

basic-5.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1119

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

CHG SYSMGMT_TRAP_COMM <aaa...a>

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Configure the SNMP community string

CHG SYSMGMT_RD_COMM n aa...a

basic-4.0

0

Change the system management read-only community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters

CHG SYSMGMT_WR_COMM n aa...a

Change the system management read / write community name string, where: aa...a = a string with a maximum length of 32 characters basic-4.0

0

CHG TIMER (1)-60 alrm_filte r-21

Change global timer window length, where:

(1)-60 = time in minutes

Note:

See

Global window timer length on page 1070 for more

information.

CHG UTCOFFSET <Time Offset>> basic-5.0

0

Configure the time offset (from UTC) for the local time zone.

Where <Time Offset> = +/-hh:mm (+00:00).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

CHG VPNKEY <key> basic-5.0

0

Define the VPN pre-shared key. Where: key = 8 to 64 Alphanumeric characters

1120 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

CHG VPNMASK <mask>

Description Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Change the VPN mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG VPNNET <ip address> basic-5.0

0

Change the VPN network IP address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG VPNROUTER <side> <address type> <address>

Configure interface of VPN Router Where:

• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

• Address type = ‘PUBLIC’ / ‘PRIVATE’ VPN Router interface

• Address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

CHG ZACB <Zone>[ALL] [<AC1...AC2> <AC1...AC2>]

Define the access codes used to modify local calls in the branch office zone, where:

• ALL = both AC1 and AC2 receive digit manipulation and no re-translation occurs

• AC1 = the first Access Code parameter defines which NARS

Access Code to consider as the source of local calls

• AC2 = the second Access Code parameter defines which

NARS Access Code to send the modified number to for retranslation.

basic-5.0

0

Note:

If NARS is configured as recommended in the NTPs, this would be AC2 for local call and AC1 for retranslation.

CHG ZALT <zone> <ALTPrefix> [<All_calls>] basic-4.5

0

Change Alternate Prefix number for zone, where:

• zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• ALTPrefix = digit string of up to 7 digits that is added to the start of dialed number if the call do not be routed through the basic-7.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1121

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

WAN due to lack of bandwidth, poor QoS or feature is configured for all calls.

• All_calls = Allow or Deny Alternative Routing for all calls, where:

- (NO) = deny

- YES = allow

Pack/Rel

CHG ZAST <zone> [<AlarmSuppressTime>] basic-4.5

0

Changes ACR settings for particular zone, where:

• zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• AlarmSuppressTime = 0-3600, time in seconds basic-7.0

0

CHG ZBRN <Zone> <a...a>

Define a zone as a branch office zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• a...a = Yes or No basic-7.0

0

CHG ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>

<replacement string> [<description>]

Change a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string

Unique inside a numbering zone.

• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string

If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>

= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.

If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.

• <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry

If not specified, the ZDID table entry remains unchanged.

zbd-6.00

1122 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

CHG ZDES <Zone> <ZoneDescription>

Assign a descriptive name to make the zone numbers more meaningful, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• ZoneDescription = descriptive name that is used only in the data display and status commands

Pack/Rel

basic-7.0

0

CHG ZDP <Zone> <DialingCode1> <DialingCode2>

<DialingCode3>

Define the dialing plan for the branch office zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• DialingCode1 = Prefix, represents the access code for long distance or international access. In North America, it is "1" for long distance access and "011" for international access.

Outside North America, it is "0" for national access and "00" for international access.

• DialingCode2 = The country code or trunk code. Normally

NPA when calling from within North America, and "1" when calling from outside North America.

• DialingCode3 = Destination network code. Normally not used in North America. Outside North America, it is a combination of region, city, or district codes.

basic-7.0

0

CHG ZDST <Zone> a...a <StartMonth> <StartWeek>

<StartDay> <StartHour> <EndMonth> <EndWeek> <EndDay>

<EndHour>

Specifies whether the branch office zone observes daylight savings time, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• a...a = Yes or No, During daylight saving time, the clock automatically advances one hour forward.

• StartMonth = start month of year (1-12)

• StartWeek = start week in month (1-5)

• StartDay = start day in week (1-7)

• StartHour = start hour of day (1-23) of the start of DST basic-7.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1123

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• EndMonth = end month of year (1-12)

• EndWeek = end week in month (1-5)

• EndDay = end day in week (1-7)

• EndHour = end hour of day (1-23) of the end of DST.

Pack/Rel

Note:

In North America, DST normally starts on the 1st Sunday in

April at 2am and ends on the last Sunday in October at

2am.

The digit 5 is the last week of the month irrespective of number of weeks this month. For example: StartWeek = start week in month (1-5) [1st-5th, 5 is the last week of the month]

CHG ZESA <Zone> <ESARLI> <ESAPrefix> <ESALocator>

Defines the Emergency Services Access (ESA) parameters for the branch office zone. These parameters are used only if the

ESA package is enabled, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• ESARLI = the route to use to send emergency calls to the branch office Gateway by way of the VTRK

• ESAPrefix = a digit string of up to 15 digits that is added to the start of the ESDN before it is sent to the route indicated by the

ESARLI. This allows the Gatekeeper to differentiate the different destinations for otherwise identical ESDN's

• ESALocator = the DID phone number to be sent for use by the

PSAP to locate the source of the emergency call basic-7.0

0

CHG ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type>

[<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>]

["<description>"]

Change a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string

Unique inside a numbering zone.

• <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts zbd-6.00

1124 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified:

- If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/

AC2+replacement string.

- If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string.

- If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC

+replacement string.

- If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string.

- If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC

+ZNPA+replacement string

- If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/

AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string

- If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/

AC2+replacement string

- If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string

- If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string

• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string

If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>

= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.

If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.

• [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match

If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches.

• [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry

If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZONE <ZoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy> <a...a>

Change the parameters of an existing Zone, where:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1125

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

• zoneNumber = 0–255

• zoneNumber = 0–8000

Description

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

• intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to

10000000 Kbps)

• intraZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Intrazone preferred strategy

(BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)

• interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to

10000000 Kbps)

• interZoneStrategy = BQ or BB, Interzone perferred strategy

(BQ for Best Quality or BB for best Bandwidth)

• a...a = type of zone, where:

- (Shared) = current default zone type. The ethersets configured in shared zones use DSP resources configured in shared zones. If all of the shared zones' gateway channels are used, the caller receives an overflow tone and the call is blocked. The order of channel selection for the gateway channels is:

• channel from same zone as etherset is configured

• any available channel from the shared zones' channels

- Private = This zone type is introduced by IPL 3.0. DSP channels configured in a private zone are used only by ethersets which have also been configured for that private zone. If more DSP resources are required by these ethersets than what are available in the zone, DSPs from other zones is used. However, ethersets configured in shared zones cannot use the private zones' channels. The order of selection for the gateway channels is:

• channel from same private zone as etherset is configured

• any available channel from the pool of shared zones' channels

Pack/Rel

basic-7.0

0

CHG ZONE <zoneNumber> <intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy> [<zoneIntent>

<zoneResourceType>] basic-4.5

0

1126 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Change the parameters of an existing Zone. All parameters must be re-entered, where:

• zoneNumber = 0–255

• zoneNumber = 0–8000

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

• intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:

- BQ = Best Quality

- BB = Best Bandwidth

• interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:

- BQ = Best Quality

- BB = Best Bandwidth

• zoneIntent = type of zone, where:

- MO = Main Office zone

- BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone

- VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone

• zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:

- (shared) = shared DSP channels

- private = private DSP channels

Pack/Rel

basic-7.0

0

Note:

With release 4.50 the zones that were described with BMG designator stay with BMG one, all the other zones are provided with the MO designator. It is possible to update

ZoneIntent using CHG ZONE command.

CHG ZPARM <numbering zone> <parameter name> <value> zbd-6.00

Change the value of a ZBD numbering zone parameter.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <parameter name> = name of numbering zone parameter

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1127

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Where:

- PREF = site prefix

- CC = country code

- NPA = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)

- AC1 = trunk access code 1

- AC2 = trunk access code 2

- NATC = national dial code

- INTC = international dial code

- DAC = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call

- TTBL = tone table

• <value> = new value for specified parameter

- If <parameter name> = PREF, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = CC, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = NPA, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = AC1, <value> = 0-99.

- If <parameter name> = AC2, <value> = 0-99.

- If <parameter name> = NATC, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = INTC, <value> = 0-9999.

- If <parameter name> = DAC, <value> = (0)-1.

- If <parameter name> = TTBL, <value> = (0)-32.

Pack/Rel

CHG ZQNL <level>

Change the Notification Level for all zones, where: level = 0-(2)-4, where:

- Level 0 = All voice quality alarms are suppressed.

- Level 1 = Allow zone-based Unacceptable alarms.

- Level 2 = Allow all level 1 alarms PLUS zone-based Warning alarms.

- Level 3 = Allow all level 1 and 2 alarms PLUS per-call

Unacceptable alarms.

- Level 4 = Allow all level 1, 2, and 3 alarms PLUS per-call

Warning alarms.

pvqm-40

1128 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

CHG ZQNL <ZoneNumber> <level>

Change the Notification Level for the specified zone, where:

• ZoneNumber = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• level = 0-(2)-4

Pack/Rel

pvqm-40 pvqm-7.0

0

CHG ZQRT <Zone> <1-100> zcac-4.5

0

Change ZQRT which is Response time increase by percentage.

It is the amount by which the Sliding Maximum is increased for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(10)-100 = increase value in percentage zcac-7.0

0

CHG ZQRTI <Zone> <1-120> zcac-4.5

0

Change the QoS Response Time Interval while alarms are not coming to increase the Sliding Maximum for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(5)-120 = Interval in minutes zcac-7.0

0

CHG ZQUAT <Zone> <1-99> zcac-4.5

0

Change the QoS Unacceptable Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(75)-99 = threshold value zcac-7.0

0

Note:

When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is presented as being deactivated. This value must be below the value of

ZQWAT.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1129

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

CHG ZQWAT <Zone> <1-99>

Description

Change the QoS Warning Alarm Threshold value for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• 1-(85)-99 = threshold value

Pack/Rel

zcac-4.5

0 zcac-7.0

0

Note:

When the zone-to-zone QoS value drops below this value, this alarm is presented. When the zone-to-zone QoS value transitions above this value, this alarm is reported as deactivated. The value for ZQWAT must be higher than the value of ZQUAT.

CHG ZQWTH <WarnJitter> <WarnLatency> <WarnPacketLoss>

<WarnRFactor>

Change VQ Warning thresholds, where: pvqm-4.0

• WarnJitter = 0-(20)-100%

• WarnLatency = 0-(20)-100%

• WarnPacketLoss = 0-(20)-100%

• WarnRFactor = 0-(20)-100%

Note:

Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the

Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

CHG ZQUTH <UnacpJitter> <UnacpLatency>

<UnacpPacketLoss> <UnacpRFactor>

Change VQ Unacceptable thresholds on a zone basis, where:

• UnacpJitter = 0-(2)-100%

• UnacpLatency = 0-(2)-100%

• UnacpPacketLoss = 0-(2)-100%

• UnacpRFactor = 0-(2)-100% pvqm-4.0

Note:

Changes to threshold values are not propagated to the

Signaling Server or the Voice Gateway Media card until a data dump is performed.

1130 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

CHG ZTDF <Zone> <TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice>

Specify the time difference between the Main Office and the branch office when both are not in Daylight Saving Time, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• TimeDifferenceFromHeadOffice = -1380 to 1380 minutes

(Minus 23 hours to plus 23 hours), time difference in minutes basic-7.0

0

CLR CACR <Near Zone> {<Near VPNI>} {<Far Zone>} {<Far

VPNI>} zcac-4.5

0

Clear zone-to-zone record for near (VPNI-Zone) per far (VPNI-

Zone), where:

• Near Zone = 0–255

• Near Zone = 0–8000

• Near VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier

• Far Zone = 0–255

• Far Zone = 0–8000

• Far VPNI = 1-16282, Virtual Private Network Identifier zcac-7.0

0 zcac-7.0

0

DIS SHELLS SECURE basic-4.5

0

Disables all secure shells in the system, includes SSH, SFTP, and SCP sessions.

Warning:

Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX.

SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.

DIS SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5

0

Disables all insecured shells in the system, includes TELNET,

RLOGIN, and FTP sessions.

Warning:

Disabling the shells causes telephony applications on external devices to stop communicating with the PBX.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1131

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

DIS TRANSFERS INSECURE

Description Pack/Rel

basic-6.0

0

Disable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system.

Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.

Note:

SFTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time.

Note:

Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

DIS TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0

0

Disable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol). Call server sends a related message through pbxLink to all connected devices and

IPMG devices.

Important:

SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.

Note:

FTP must be enabled. FTP and SFTP cannot both be disabled at the same time.

Note:

Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

ECNT CARD Print all registered IP Phones with associated card.

basic-4.5

0

ECNT CARD l s c [<customer>] basic

4.50

Print the number of IP Phones registered, where:

• l s c = loop, shelf, card

• customer = customer number associated with this command

Note:

Partial TN are allowed

1132 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

ECNT FW

Description

Print all registered IP Phones for each available firmware ID

Pack/Rel

basic-4.5

0 basic-4.5

0

ECNT FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>]

Print the number of IP Phones, where:

• XX = firmware ID

• A = major version designator

• BB = minor version designator

• FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where:

- (==) = equal to

- != = not equal to

- < = less then

- > = greater then

ECNT MODL Print the number of registered IP Phones with model name basic-4.5

0 basic-4.5

0

ECNT MODL <MMMM>

Print the number of registered IP Phones, where:

MMMM = IP Phone model name, where:

- 2001P2 = IP Phone 2001 Phase 2

- 2002 = IP Phone 2002

- 2002P2 = IP Phone 2002 Phase 2

- 2004 = IP Phone 2004

- 2004P2 = IP Phone 2004 Phase 2

- 2033 IP Phone 2033 Conference Phone

- 2210 IP Phone 2210 Wireless Handset

ECNT NODE Print registered IP Phones for all nodes

ECNT NODE <nodeNum>

Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: nodeNum =the specified node basic-4.5

0 basic-4.5

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1133

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

ECNT PEC Print the number of registered IP Phones by PEC

ECNT PEC <PEC>

Pack/Rel

basic-4.5

0 basic-4.5

0

Print the number of IP Phones, where:

PEC = Product Engineering Code

ECNT SS Print the number of registered IP Phones for all signaling servers basic-4.5

0

ECNT SS <hostName> basic-4.5

0

Print the number of registered IP Phones, where: hostName = host name assigned to signaling server

Note:

If the hostName variable contains an underscore (_), then an

NPR001 error message is returned. An underscore is considered to be an invalid character.

ECNT ZONE Print the number of registered IP Phones for all zones basic-4.5

0

ECNT ZONE <zoneNum> <customer> basic-4.5

0

Print the number of registered IP Phones, where:

• zoneNum = specified zone

• customer = customer number associated with this command

ENL / DIS ERL <ERL>

Enable / Disable specified ERL.

ENL / DIS L3VPN basis-5.0

basic-5.0

0

Enable / Disable the VPN tunneling (on both sides).

ENL / DIS NTP basic-5.0

0

Enable / Disable NTP.

1134 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

These commands are blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Note:

To apply Network Time Protocol configuration to all system elements, ensure the configuration is done using Element

Manager. CLI commands only configure the Call Server, and may lead to inconsistent NTP operation at the system level.

ENL / DIS RFC2833PRT basic-5.0

0

Enable / Disable the info message printing.

ENL SHELLS SECURE basic-4.5

0

Enables all secure shells.

ENL SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5

0

Enables all unsecured shells.

ENL SYSTEM RESTORE basic-6.0

0

Allow TM system restore functionality for one usage.

ENL TRANSFERS INSECURE basic-6.0

0

Enable FTP (insecure File Transfer Protocol) on the system.

Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.

Note:

Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

ENL TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0

0

Enable SFTP (secure File Transfer Protocol) on the system. Call server sends message through pbxLink to all connected devices and IPMG devices.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1135

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description Pack/Rel

Important:

SFTP is required in regular operation of the CS 1000. Do not disable SFTP on VxWorks unless you have to troubleshoot a problem, if any.

Note:

Command cannot be issued within 5 minutes of a previously issued ENL TRANSFERs or DIS TRANSFERS command.

EXPORT a The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).

basic-4.0

0

EXPORT EDT basic-4.0

0

The EPT file stored on the hard disk (/u/db/ smpserv.db) is copied to the floppy/PC Card drive (a:/smpserv.db).

EXPORT EPT basic-6.0

0

FLTH 0 -

9

IMPORT

EPT

Store Event Preference Table file to disk/PCMCIA

Failed log in threshold (in minutes)

The EPT file stored on the floppy / PC Card (a:/smpserv.db) drive is copied to the hard drive (/u/db/smpserv.db).

GEN ZONEFILE <fileName> basic-5.0

0 basic-4.0

0 basic-7.0

0

Generate a CSV file that contains information for all configured zones on the Call Server. You can use the <fileName> parameter to specify a file name and file path for the CSV file. If you do not specify a file name and file path, a file named zone.csv is created and stored in the /u/db directory. After you execute this command the location of the file is displayed.

Note:

The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range

0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

1136 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

IMPORT ZONEFILE <fileName>

Description Pack/Rel

basic-7.0

0

Read a CSV file and create new zones listed in the file, or apply updates contained in the CSV file for zones that already exist.

If you do not specify a file name and file path, an attempt is made to use the zone.csv file stored in the /u/db directory; otherwise the command will use the file name and file path that you specify.

The output for this command is the number of zones successfully added or changed.

Note:

The maximum length of the path/file name is 255 characters

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range

0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

INV ENTITY SETS <ON> (OFF) STATUS basic-4.0

0

Turn ON the inclusion of digital telephones and IP Phones in the

Entity MIB Turn OFF the inclusion of digital telephones and IP

Phones in the Entity MIB Display whether or not the digial telephones and IP Phones are included in the Entity MIB.

The output displays either ON or OFF.

INV GENERATE

Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL or ABORT

INV GENERATE ABORT

Abort any currently running Inventory generations.

INV GENERATE ALL

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating both the card and telsets Inventory file.

INV GENERATE CARDS

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the

Inventory file for all of the cards in the system. The generation produces an inventory file with all of the cards configured on the system. Those cards that are present in the system and have card ID are noted in the inventory file with their card type, TN,

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1137

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

and card ID. Those cards that do not have card ID or are not present in the system, is noted to be "Unavailable" in place of their card ID.

Pack/Rel

INV GENERATE SETS

Requests for the Inventory feature to begin generating the

Inventory file for the digital telsets with their telsets' IDs that have been configured in the system. Those telsets that are present in the system and have sets ID are noted in the inventory file with their sets type, TN, sets ID, DES, Primary DN. Those telsets that do not have sets ID or ar not present in the sytem is noted to be

"Unavailable" in place of their sets ID.

INV GENERATE ABORT basic-5.0

0

Abort the inventory generation for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT.

System message MAT055 is printed on the TTY when Inventory

Location Report is aborted.

INV GENERATE ALL basic-5.0

0

Inventory files for Cards, Sets and LOCRPT.

INV GENERATE LOCRPT basic-5.0

0

Inventory Location Report for all the IP Phones in the TN table.

The inventory file “locrpt.inv” is generated in the path [c:]/u/db/ inv/. System message MAT052 is printed on the TTY when the generation is complete.

INV MIDNIGHT

Generate inventory CARDS, SETS, LOCRPT, ALL, OFF or

STATUS (admin)

INV MIDNIGHT ALL

Scheduling for the Midnight to run both Card and Sets Inventory generations.

INV MIDNIGHT CARDS

Scheduling for the Midnight to run Card Inventory generation.

INV MIDNIGHT OFF

1138 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Turns off Midnight run off Card and Sets Inventory generations.

INV MIDNIGHT SETS

Scheduling for the Midnight to run Sets Inventory generation.

INV MIDNIGHT STATUS

Print out the state of the Midnight schedule of Inventory.

INV PRT

Refer to INV PRT STATUS command.

Pack/Rel

INV PRT

ALL

Requests for both the Card Inventory file and the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).

INV PRT CARDS

Requests for the Card Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY).

INV PRT LOCRPT basic-5.0

0

Print the generated Inventory Location Report file.

INV PRT SETS

Requests for the Sets Inventory file to be printed out to the output destination (example TTY)

INV PRT STATUS

Requests for the status of the Inventory feature. Result may look somewhat:

Inventory status:

Card file status is Ok

43 records; 18/03/1999 17:10:21

Sets file status is Ok

19 records; 18/03/1999 16:44:09

****

Abort overlay. This command can also be used to abort any

Inventory file printing.

LOCRPT

ALL

Print location report for all IP phones.

basic-5.0

0

LOCRPT DN x basic-5.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1139

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified DN (or partially-specified DN).

Pack/Rel

LOCRPT ECL x basic-5.0

0

Print location report for the IP phone(s) in the specified ECL.

LOCRPT ERL basic-5.0

0

Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified

Emergency Response Location (ERL).

LOCRPT HWID x basic-5.0

0

Print location report for the IP phone with the specified (or partially-specified) Hardware Identifier (HWID)

LOCRPT IP basic-5.0

0

Print location report for IP phones in RLM table with the specified

IP Address.

LOCRPT MANUALUPDATE/MU basic-5.0

0

Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are Manual-

Update (ManualUpdate=True).

LOCRPT NEEDUPDATE/NU basic-5.0

0

Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that need a location update (NeedsUpdate=True).

LOCRPT ROAMING basic-5.0

0

Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are not at home

(example their Current ECL is different from their Home ECL).

Note:

This applies only when the Home ECL is not unknown

(zero).

This does not apply to Manual Update phones, because by definition, they are always at home.

1140 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

LOCRPT TN x

Description

Inactivity timeout (in minutes)

NEW BKPR xxx a...a b...b yy

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Print location report for the IP phone(s) with the specified TN (or partially-specified TN).

LOCRPT UNALLOCATED/UNKNOWN basic-5.0

0

Print location report for IP phones in RLM table that are Auto-

Update and ERL=Unknown.

Note:

This is not the same as “LOCRPT ERL 0” – ERL 0 are Auto

Update phones.

LOCRPT UNREG basic-5.0

0

Print location report for the IP phone(s) that are unregistered but have a TN table entry.

LOUT 0 - (20) - 1440 basic-5.0

0 grprim-4

.00

Add a new Backup Rule, where:

• xxx = Backup Rule number ID = (1)-100. Currently, only one rule is required for replication to the secondary system.

• a...a = SCS. Currently, this is the only rule type that exists: it allows direct replication to another system.

• b...b = ELAN IP address of the destination system.

• yy = the number of database versions to save on the destination system = (2)-10.

NEW BKPR <rule number1-100> FMD [<N of versions>]

[<name>]

Change backup rule to an Fixed Media Device (FMD), where:

• rule number = 1-100, Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. FMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and basic-4.5

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1141

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from LD

43).

• FMD = mnemonic for this rule type

• N of versions = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device

• name = rule name, where: text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed

Pack/Rel

Note:

The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS

1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

NEW BKPR <rule number> FTP <IP addr> <login><pwd>

<path> [<N of versions>] [<name>]

Change backup rule to an external FTP server, where:

• <rule number> = 1-100

Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. These rules can be used by the Geographic

Redundancy Database Replication Control (GRDRC block as defined in LD-117), by the Backup Schedules for manual backup/restore operation (BKR/RSR commands activated from Ovl.43).

• FTP = mnemonic for this rule type

• <IP addr> = IP address of the FTP server to be accessed for storing (Backup) or retrieving (Restore) backup data

• <login> = login name to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters basic-4.5

0

• <pwd> = login password to access the FTP server, up to 32 characters

• <path> = path on the FTP server where the backup data file

(or files for incremental versions) is located, up to 64 characters

• <N of versions> = (1)-10 number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the FTP server

• <name> = rule name

Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed

Note:

The only backup rule type that can be referenced from

GRDRC is SCS.

1142 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

The <name> parameter is added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type introduced in CS 1000

Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy.

NEW BKPR <rule number> RMD [<N of versions>] [<name>] basic-4.5

0

Change backup rule to a Removable Media Device (RMD), where:

• <rule number> = 1-100

Up to 100 rules can be defined. Each rule is a pattern that can be further used. RMD rules can be used by the backup schedules or for manual backup and restore operation (BKR/

RSR commands activated from LD 43).

• RMD = mnemonic for this rule type

• <N of versions> = (1)-10

Number of incremental backup data versions preserved on the local removable media device.

• <name> = rule name

Text of up to 30 characters without white spaces is allowed

Note:

The <name> parameter is also added as optional when defining a new backup rule with SCS type (introduced in CS

1000 Release 4.0 Geographic Redundancy).

NEW BKPS <schedule number 1-10> <Rule for BKUP>

<FREQ> <DAY> <HOUR>

Add a backup schedule, where:

• <schedule number> = (1)-10

Up to 10 backup schedules can be defined.

• <Rule for BKUP> = number of the backup rule for scheduled backup operation

• <FREQ> = M/W/(D)/A - defines how often the scheduled backup takes place, where:

- M = monthly

- W = weekly

- D = daily

- A = automatically immediately after every EDD operation activated. There cannot be more than 1 schedule defined where FREQ = A.

basic-4.5

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1143

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

When <FREQ> = D, the next parameter is <HOUR> where:

• <DAY> = day of the week

Where:

- (SU) = Sunday

- MO = Monday

- TU = Tuesday

- WE = Wednesday

- TH = Thursaday

- FR = Friday

- SA = Saturday

- (1)- 31

Note:

Only applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ = M.

Note:

When FREQ = M and the day specified is greater than the number of days in the current month, the backup takes place on the last day of the current month.

• <HOUR> = 0-(3)-23

Pack/Rel

Note:

This rule type is not allowed if the GRPRIM/GRSEC package is equipped and the rule is used in GRDRC.

NEW / OUT ELIN <erl> <tn> basic-5.0

0

Associate / Disassociate specified TN to specified ERL.

Note:

The TN must already be configured to compose an ANI that is registered in the ALI database against this emergency location.

For Small System, the TN format is “c u”

For Large System, the TN format is “l s c u”.

NEW EPT aa... a INFO x alrm_filte r-21

Assign Information severity to new EPT entry, where:

1144 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry.

Pack/Rel

NEW EPT aa... a EDT x

Assign NT-defined severity from EDT to new EPT entry, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a MAJOR x

Assign Major severity to new EPT entry, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a MINOR x

Assign Minor severity to new EPT entry, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

NEW EPT aa... a CRITICAL x

Assign Critical severity to new EPT entry, where:

• aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• x = optional entry to escalate value of EPT entry from (0)-

Suppress value, as defined by default or your CHG

SUPPRESS entry.

alrm_filte r-21

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1145

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description Pack/Rel

NEW ERL <erl> [<RT_RLI> <route_rli> <ac> <prepend>

<staticELIN> <osdn>]

Add an ERL table entry, where:

• <erl> = Emergency Response Location (ERL) identifier

Number in the range 1-65535.

• <RT_RLI> = token identifying the emergency call routing mechanism for the ERL

- RT = by route number

- RLI = by Route Line Index

• <route_rli> = number of route or route line index (as indicated by <RT_RLI> token)

- route number = as specified in LD 16

- route line index number = as specified in LD 86

• <ac> = access code, as specified in LD 90

• <prepend> = prepended routing digits for emergency calls

• <staticELIN> = static Emergency Location Identification

Number (ELIN)

• <osdn> = On-Site Notification DN

To skip a field and set it to blank, use either a NULL or NONE token in its place. Any fields not specified at the end of the command are set to blank, as if you entered NULL or NONE for each one.

basic-5.0

0

NEW GRDRC xxx aaa yyy bbb ccc grprim-4

.00

Add a GRDRC block, where:

• xxx = Backup Rule number.

• aaa = how the automatic database replication to the secondary system occurs (Geographic Redundancy requires that this parameter be configured as SCHD):

- SCHD - according to defined backup schedule

- (IMM) - immediately after any data dump operation

- MIDN - after midnight data dump only

- NO - not allowed

• yyy = Backup Rule number used for the restore operation on the secondary system. If no rule number is entered, then this points to the <BKUP rule>.

1146 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• bbb = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic restore operation on the secondary system is allowed.

• ccc = (YES)/NO. Defines whether or not the automatic sysload after successful automatic restore on the secondary system is allowed. ccc = YES is allowed only if bbb = YES.

Pack/Rel

NEW GRSC xxx yyy zzz a..a

grprim-4

.00

Add a new GRSC block, where:

• xxx = the number (N) of IP phones that must register on the secondary system for the system to escalate to the

ACTIVATING state. If no value is entered, xxx = 1. The maximum value of xxx is: 10% x (Basic IP User License + IP

User License).

• yyy = Short Term Failure Timer, in minutes = (5) - 600

• zzz = Failure Clearance Timer, in minutes = (5) - 180

• a..a = Secondary system Deactivation Mode = (AUTO)/MAN

NEW GRNS <FREQ><DAY><HOUR><MINUTE>[<DELAY>] basic-5.0

0

Add a Survivable Remote Gateway Backup, where:

• FREQ = defines how often the backup takes place, where:

- M = monthly

- W = weekly

- D = daily

• DAY = day of the week, applicable when FREQ = W or FREQ

= M, where:

- (SU) = Sunday

- MO = Monday

- TU = Tuesday

- WE = Wednesday

- TH = Thursday

- FR = Friday

- SA = Saturday

- (1)-31

When FREQ = D, the next parameter is HOUR.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1147

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• HOUR = 0-(3)-23

• MINUTE = (0)-59

• DELAY = (3)-60

The interval in minutes between two consecutively scheduled backups.

The system scans for backup rules of SCS type and creates a

BKPS for each of them and adjusts the start times according to the specified delayed value.

Pack/Rel

NEW HOST DEV_SIDE0_HSP <ip address> basic-4.5

0

Configure the HSP ip address

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Configure the HSP ip address

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW HOST <hostname> <IPaddress>

Configure a new host entry, where;

• host name must exist in the host table

• default setting for the Primary IP address is: 137.135.128.253

• default setting for Primary Host Name is: PRIMARY_ENET

• default setting for the Secondary IP address is:

137.135.128.254

• default setting for the Secondary Host Name is:

SECONDARY_ENET.

Note:

Host Name Syntax: A host name can be up to 16 characters in length. The first character of a host name must be a letter of the alphabet. A character can be a letter, number, or underscore(_). A period is used as a delimiter between domain names. Spaces and tabs are not permitted. No distinction is made between upper and lower case.

1148 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW NUMZONE <numbering zone> [<site_prefix>

<country_code> <npa> <ac1> <ac2> <natc> <intc> <dac>

<ttbl>]

Configure a new numbering zone with specified (optional) ZBD zone parameters.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = new numbering zone number

A number from 1-1023.

• ZBD zone parameters:

- <site_prefix> = site prefix

A number from 0-9999.

- <country_code> = country code

A number from 0-9999.

- <npa> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)

A number from 0-9999.

- <ac1> = trunk access code 1

A number from 0-99.

- <ac2> = trunk access code 2

A number from 0-99.

- <natc> = national dial code

A number from 0-9999.

- <intc> = international dial code

A number from 0-9999.

- <dac> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call

A number from (0)-1.

- <ttbl> = tone table

A number from (0)-32.

zbd-6.00

Note:

Default values (hard-coded) are used for the ZBD numbering zone parameters, if they are not specified.

NEW RANGE_OF_ZONES <zoneStartNumber> <zoneAmount>

<intraZoneBandwidth> <intraZoneStrategy>

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1149

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

<interZoneBandwidth> <interZoneStrategy>

<zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>

Create new bandwidth zones.

This command creates a range of new bandwidth zones starting from

<zoneStartNumber>

. The number of existing bandwidth zones must be less than 8001. If the number of existing bandwidth zones is greater than or equal to 8001, no bandwidth zones are created.

Where:

• zoneStartNumber = Zone number [0–8000]

Pack/Rel

basic-7.0

0

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

• zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be created [1-8001]

• intraZoneBandwidth = Intrazone available bandwidth (0 to

10000000 Kbps)

• intraZoneStrategy = Intrazone preferred strategy (Best

Quality (BQ) or Best Bandwidth (BB))

• interZoneBandwidth = Interzone available bandwidth (0 to

10000000 Kbps)

• interZoneStrategy = Interzone preferred strategy (BQ or BB)

• zoneIntent = MO (default), BMG, or VTRK

• zoneResourceType = shared or private

NEW ROUTE <network IP address> <gateway IP address>

Configure a new routing entry

<IP address>= valid IP address

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

NEW SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> <ERL> <ECL>

"<Description>"

Add a subnet entry where: basic-5.0

0

1150 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• ip address = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

• mask = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

• ERL and ECL = 0-65535

• Description = 20 alphanumeric characters within quotation marks.

Pack/Rel

NEW ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>

<replacement string> [<description>]

Configure a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation table entry.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = 1-16 digit “best match” numeric string

Unique inside a numbering zone.

• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string

If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>

= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.

If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.

• <description> = 1-32 character textual description for the numbering zone-based call translation (ZDID) table entry

If not specified, the ZDID table entry has no textual description.

zbd-6.00

NEW ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string> <type>

[<replacement string>] [LEN <max length>]

["<description>"]

Create a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan table entry.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits

Unique inside a numbering zone.

• <type> = values specified in the LD 15 AC1 and AC2 prompts

After stripping the matching string, save the CLID type and take the following actions depending on <type> specified:

- If <type> = INTL (International E.164 number), insert AC1/

AC2+replacement string.

zbd-6.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1151

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

- If <type> = LOC (UDP Location Code), insert AC1/AC2+ replacement string.

- If <type> = REG1 (Regional Level 1), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC

+replacement string.

- If <type> = NPA (North American NPA), insert AC1/AC2+1, then replacement string.

- If <type> = REG2 (Regional Level 2), insert AC1/AC2+ZCC

+ZNPA+replacement string

- If <type> = NXX (North American NXX), insert AC1/

AC2+ZCC+ZNPA+replacement string

- If <type> = SPN (Special Number), insert AC1/

AC2+replacement string

- If <type> = CDP (Coordinated Dial Plan), insert replacement string

- If <type> = ESDN (Emergency Service DN), insert replacement string

• [<replacement string>] = string that replaces the matching string

If <type> = SPN, CDP or ESDN, 1-16 numeric digits; if <type>

= INTL, LOC, REG1, NPA, REG2 or NXX, 1-16 alphabetic characters.

If <replacement string> is not specified, the matching string is deleted and not replaced.

• [LEN <max length>] = maximum number of dialed digits expected to match

If not specified, default is to match digits for all multiple matches.

• [<description>] = textual description of the numbering zonebased flexible dialing plan (ZFDP) table entry

If not specified, the ZFDP table entry has no textual description.

Pack/Rel

NEW ZONE <zoneNumber> [<intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]

Create a new zone with the following parameters:

• zoneNumber = 0–255 zone number

• zoneNumber = 0–8000 zone number basic-7.0

0 basic-4.5

0 basic-7.0

0

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the

1152 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

• intraZoneBandwidth = 0-10000000 Kbps

• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:

- (BQ for Best Quality

- BB for Best Bandwidth)

• interZoneBandwidth = 0-10000000 Kbps

• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:

- (BQ for Best Quality

- BB for Best Bandwidth)

- zoneIntent = type of zone, where:

• MO = Main Office zone

• BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone

• VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone

- zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:

• (shared) = shared DSP channels

• private = private DSP channels

NEW ZONE <x...x>

Create a new Zone with the following default bandwidth values:

• 10000000 Kbps for intraZoneBandwidth

• BQ for intraZoneStrategy

• 10000000 Kbps for interZoneBandwidth

• BQ for interZoneStrategy

NEW ZONE <x...x> aa

Create a new Zone, where: aa = one of the following bandwidths:

- intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

- intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:

• BQ = Best Quality

Pack/Rel

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1153

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• BB = Best Bandwidth

- interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

- interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:

• BQ = Best Quality

• BB = Best Bandwidth

Pack/Rel

NEW ZONE <zoneNumber> [<intraZoneBandwidth>

<intraZoneStrategy> <interZoneBandwidth>

<interZoneStrategy> <zoneIntent> <zoneResourceType>]

Configure a new zone, where:

• zoneNumber = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000 zcac-4.5

0 zcac-7.0

0

Caution:

Beginning in Release 7.0, Adaptive Network Bandwidth

Management provides bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–8000. If you are interoperating with an earlier release you must use bandwidth zone numbers in the range 0–255; call processing issues occur if you use bandwidth zone numbers greater than 255.

• intraZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

• intraZoneStrategy = intrazone preferred strategy, where:

- BQ = Best Quality

- BB = Best Bandwidth

• interZoneBandwidth = 0 to 10000000 Kbps

• interZoneStrategy = interzone preferred strategy, where:

- BQ = Best Quality

- BB = Best Bandwidth

• zoneIntent = type of zone, where:

- MO = Main Office zone

- BMG = Branch Media Gateway zone

- VTRK = Virtual Trunk zone

• zoneResourceType = resource Intrazone preferred strategy, where:

- (shared) = shared DSP channels

- private = private DSP channels

1154 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

OUT BKPR <rule number>

Description Pack/Rel

grprim-4

.00

Remove backup rule, where <rule number> = a rule number from 1-100.

If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are removed.

OUT BKPS <schedule number 1-10> basic-4.5

0

Remove backup schedule

OUT EPT <a...a> | ALL alrm_filte r-21

Delete an entry in the Event Preference Table (EPT)

Where:

• a...a = identifier of EPT table entry

• ALL = delete all EPT table entries

OUT ERL <ERL#>

Delete an ERL entry.

OUT GRDRC Remove current GRDRC Block

OUT GRNS

OUT GRSC

Remove all backup schedules that reference backup rules of type SCS.

Remove GRSC Block grprim-4

.00

basic-5.0

0 grprim-4

.00

OUT HOST nnn

Delete configured host entry (delete host from network host table).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

OUT HSP_MASK basic-4.5

0

Removes the configured HSP subnet mask from the Call Server and replaces it with the default HSP subnet mask

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1155

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

OUT RANGE_OF_ZONES basic-7.0

0

Remove a range of existing bandwidth zones.

This command deletes a range of existing bandwidth zones, starting from <zoneStartNumber>. If there are no bandwidth zones with a zone number greater than <zoneStartNumber>, then no bandwidth zones are deleted.

Where:

• zoneStartNumber = Zone number [0–8000]

• zoneAmount = Number of zones that must be deleted [1-8001]

OUT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

Remove a ZBD numbering zone, where <numbering zone) = a number from 1-1023.

zbd-6.00

OUT ROUTE nn

Delete configured routing entry

OUT SUBNET <IP Address> <Mask Bits> basic-5.0

0

OUT ZDID <numbering zone> <matching string>

Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based call translation.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits

Unique inside a numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

OUT ZFDP <numbering zone> <matching string>

Delete a ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plan.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits

Unique inside a numbering zone.

zbd-6.00

1156 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

OUT ZONE <x...x>

Description

Remove an existing zone.

PDT (NO)/ PDT1 / PDT2

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

PDT Access.

Note:

Aavailable only when adding/modifying LAPW, Level 1

(PWD1) and Level 2 (PWD2) users.

PORT ACCESS CUSTOM

Configures a custom Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system.

Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:

1. Check to ensure a custom Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure.

If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted.

2. Displays a warning that enabling a custom Access

Restrictions rules file could possibly have detrimental effects on the system, and prompts the user to confirm the action (Y or N).

3. Check to ensure that the custom Access Restrictions rules file will load.

If not, an error is displayed and the command aborted.

4. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access

Restrictions feature is already enabled, disable the existing

Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access

Restrictions rules.

5. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access

Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enable it and set the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL.

Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared.

6. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file.

7. Load the custom Access Restrictions rules file.

If a problem is encountered when loading the custom

Access Restrictions rules file, the system displays an error, aborts the command, and returns the Access Restrictions feature to its previous state.

8. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to

Custom.

basic-6.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1157

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file.

9. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the mandatory and custom Access

Restrictions rules files version numbers.

An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a custom Access Restrictions rules file.

Pack/Rel

Note:

When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,

OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

PORT ACCESS DEFAULT

Configures the default Access Restrictions ruleset defining port access rules for the system.

Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:

1. Check to ensure a default Access Restrictions rules file exists in the appropriate directory structure.

It is not expected that any errors will occur when processing the default Access Restrictions rules file.

2. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access

Restrictions feature is already enabled, delete the existing

Access Restrictions rules, including mandatory Access

Restrictions rules.

3. If the VxWorks firewall state indicates that the Access

Restrictions feature is not already enabled, enables it and sets the default Access Restrictions rule to ACCEPT ALL.

Any old Access Restrictions statistics are cleared.

4. Load the mandatory Access Restrictions rules file.

5. Load the default Access Restrictions rules file.

6. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to

Default.

basic-6.0

0

1158 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file.

7. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros.

An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is operating with a default Access Restrictions rules file.

Pack/Rel

Note:

When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,

OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

PORT ACCESS OFF

Disables all Access Restrictions rules in the system.

Issuing this command results in the following actions by the system:

1. Disable all enabled Access Restrictions rules.

2. Deactivate the VxWorks firewall facility.

3. Change the VxWorks firewall state on the Call Server to

OFF.

An information message is logged on the Call Server indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational.

4. Send a VxWorks firewall state change message to all endpoints with the default and custom Access Restrictions rules files versions as zeros.

An information message is logged on each endpoint indicating that the Access Restrictions feature is not operational.

basic-6.0

0

Note:

When a PORT ACCESS command (CUSTOM, DEFAULT,

OFF) is entered, all other PORT ACCESS commands are suspended for a pre-determined or incremental amount of time depending on the number of endpoints, to allow sufficient time to propagate the state change to all endpoints.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1159

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

PORT ACCESS SHOW CUSTOM

Description Pack/Rel

basic-6.0

0

Display the Access Restrictions rules in the CUSTOM Access

Restrictions rules file in tabular format.

PORT ACCESS SHOW DEFAULT basic-6.0

0

Display the Access Restrictions rules in the DEFAULT Access

Restrictions rules file in tabular format.

PORT ACCESS STATUS [ALL] basic-6.0

0

Display the global state of the Access Restrictions feature.

If the [ALL] parameter is specified, the system polls all endpoints to determine their local Access Restrictions state:

• If there are any cards that don’t have matching file signatures, or that can’t be contacted, they are displayed.

A list of the possible failures is as follows:

- CS local state incorrect: <CS state>

- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> state not received

- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect state of <bad state>

- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default and custom file

- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect default file

- <endpoint IP> <endpoint type> has incorrect custom file

• If all cards have matching file signatures, a message is displayed indicating that all endpoints match.

PORT ACCESS VALIDATE basic-6.0

0

Validates the rules in a CUSTOM file and Prints out what is wrong with the file.

PRT ADMIN_COMM basic-4.0

0

Print the administration group read-only community name strings.

If administration group community strings have been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC

SNMPCONF command, the PRT ADMIN_COMM command basic-6.0

0

1160 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

prints the added and modified strings in an "OVLY 117

Configuration" area and the existing community strings in an

"ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

Pack/Rel

PRT APPSRV

Print the IP address of the application server for PD.

PRT AQOS <attribute> <zone / ALL>

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all zones with ALL). Where:

Attribute = 1 - 32

Defined in the Traffic Report 16 (see Traffic Measurement

Formats and Outputs Reference, NN43001-750), for example

"Interzone warning jitter count".

basic-4.5

PRT BKPR xxx grprim-4

.00

Print backup rule, where: xxx = a rule number ID 1-100

If no rule number is entered, then all backup rules are printed.

PRT BKPR <rule number 1-100> basic-4.5

0

Print backup rule, where: rule number = 1-100

PRT BKPS ALL basic-4.5

0

Print all backup schedules

PRT BKPS <schedule number 1-10> basic-4.5

0

Print backup schedule

PRT CAB

Prints all data related to survivability.

PRT DNIP <DN> [<CustomerNo>]

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1161

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Pint a list of IP addresses for each IP Phone registered with the specified DN.

Pack/Rel

Note:

A partial DN can be entered.

Sample output:

=> PRT DNIP 4000 0 (only search customer 0 for DN) CUST 00

DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone Status

------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002 03

SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR

47.11.215.39 000 REG => prt dnip 4000 (same DN in different customers) CUST 00 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP Address Zone

Status ------------------------------------------------------- 061-01 i2002

03 SCR 47.11.215.41 000 REG 061-00 i2004 00 SCR

47.11.215.39 000 REG CUST 01 DN 4000 TN Type Key IP

Address Zone Status -------------------------------------------------------

061-10 i2004 05 MCR 47.11.215.38 001 REG

PRT EDT aa... a alrm_filte r-21

Print a single Event Default Table (EDT) event, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

PRT EDT aa... a bb...b

alrm_filte r-21

Print a range of Event Default Table (EDT) events, where:

• aa... a = first entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• bb...b = last entry in EDT event range (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

PRT EDT <severity <eventID> <eventID> basic-4.0

0

The entries in the EDT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.

PRT ELIN [ALL] / <erl> basic-5.0

0

Print ELINs for ALL / specified ERL.

PRT ENABLE_TRAPS basic-6.0

0

1162 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Display the enabled/disabled parameter for all SNMP traps.

Pack/Rel

PRT ELNK Display active and inactive Ethernet interface IP addresses

(display active and inactive ELAN IP addresses).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT EPT aa... a alrm_filte r-21

Print a single Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where: aa... a = an event class with an event number (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025

PRT EPT aa... a bb...b

alrm_filte r-21

Print specific Event Preference Table (EPT) entry, where:

• aa... a = first entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

• bb...b = last entry in EPT event range (e.g. BUG1000,

ERR0025)

PRT EPT

ALL

Print all entries in Event Preference Table (EPT)

PRTS PRTS EDT alrm_filte r-21 basic-4.0

0

Print entries in Event Default Table by Severity

PRTS EPT severity <eventID> <eventID> basic-4.0

0

The entries in the EPT can be listed based on the severity field for all entries or the specified range of entries.

PRT ERL [ALL] basic-5.0

0

Print all ERL entries.

PRT ERL [<ERL #> [<+/-Count>]

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1163

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

PRT ES1

PRT ES2

Description

Print the specified ERL entry, or a “page” of ERLs starting from the specified ERL..

Pack/Rel

Print Echo Server 1's IP address and port number.

Print the Echo Server 2's IP address and port number.

basic-4.0

0 basic-4.0

0

PRT ESS Print both Echo Server's IP address and port number.

PRT FMT_OUTPUT basic-4.0

0 alrm_filte r-21

PRT GRDRC

PRT GRSC

Print formatted output string

Print GRDRC Block

Print GRSC Block grprim-4

.00

grprim-4

.00

PRT HOST Display network host table entries (enabled and disabled hosts).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT HSP_MASK

Retrieves the manually configured HSP mask from the Call

Server if it exists and outputs it to the screen, otherwise it prints the default HSP subnet mask (255.255.255.0)

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT INTERZONE {<nearZone>} {<farZone>} {<nearVPNI>}

{<farVPNI>}

Print interzone statistics between near (VPNI - Zone) and far

(VPNI - Zone), where: zcac-4.5

0

1164 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• NEAR END = ZONE and VPNI

• FAR END = ZONE and VPNI

• State = ENL/DIS

• Type= PRIVATE/SHARED

• Strategy = BB/BQ

• ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK

• QoS factor = %

• Bandwidth = number of Kbps

• Sliding Max = number of Kbps

• Usage = number of Kbps

• Peak = %

• Average = number of Kbps

• Alarms = Aph

Pack/Rel

Note:

The report rows are grouped as:

• First row = summary bandwidth usage per near zone

• Next rows = bandwidth usage per near (VPNI- Zone) and far

(VPNI - Zone)

• With release 4.50 the PRT ZONE command is not used.

Note:

The interzone command printout shows the Bandwidth usage for inter zone calls only.

PRT INTRAZONE {<zone>} zcac-4.5

0

Print intrazone statistics for all or for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

• State = ENL/DIS

• Type = PRIVATE/SHARED

• Strategy = BB/BQ

• ZoneIntent = MO/BMG/VTRK

• Bandwidth = number of Kbps zcac-7.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1165

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• Usage = number of Kbps

• Peak = %

Note:

The intrazone command printout shows bandwidth usage for both intra and inter zone calls.

PRT IPDN <IPAddress>

Print a list of DNs configured for the specified IP address.

Sample output for PRT IPDN 47.11.215.38:

IP 47.11.215.38

CUST 01 TN 061-10 TYPE i2004 ZONE 001 REG

Key DN CPND Name

---------------------------------------------

00 SCR 4010 I2004_1 VLN61-10

05 MCR 4000 i2004_cust1 vln61_10

Pack/Rel

Note:

An IP address can be specified with only the leading digits

(for example, 47.11). An IP address with zeroes at the end can be specified (for example, 47.11.0.0)

PRT IPR x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the

IP Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where x = 1-4.

supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all

IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)

PRT IPM x Prints the IP connectivity configuration data associated with the

Main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

PRT IPMG supl shelf IPMG supl shelf or <CR> to print information for all

IPMGs. If an IPMG supl shelf is not entered, all IPMGs are output, without their designator information. If an IPMG supl shelf is entered, a single IPMG is output, with the designator information (if MGC based IPMG)

PRT LCL

Prints the Local Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values

(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS) basic-6.0

0

1166 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

PRT L3ELAN [side / CR] [role / CR]

Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Mask of VPN Router Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

PRT L3MASK [side / CR]

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Display the physical addresses of the CS cores. Where:

• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

• Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.

PRT L3GW [side] basic-5.0

0

Display the default gateway for physical ELAN. Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

PRT L3HSP <side / CR> basic-5.0

0

Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Protocol of VPN Router Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

PRT L3HSPGW [side / CR] basic-5.0

0

Display Layer 3 Hot Standby Gateway of VPN Router Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

PRT L3HSPMASK [side / CR] basic-5.0

0 basic-5.0

0

Display the ELAN mask. Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

PRT L3PRIV [role] basic-5.0

0

Display the ELAN virtual ACTIVE and INACTIVE addresses.

Where:

• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

• Role = ACTIVE / INACTIVE.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1167

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

PRT LDAPSYNC

Description Pack/Rel

basic-6.0

0

Display the parameters of the Unicode Name Directory <-> CND

LDAP scheduled data synchronization task.

PRT MASK basic-5.0

0

Display subnet mask stored in database.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT MEDS

Print Mediation Server Selection feature

PRT MGMT_ALARM

Print MGMT SNMP traps setting

PRT MSEC ALL basic-5.0

0

Print System-wide media security configuration, and the media security CLS for all TNs.

PRT MSEC IP <ip_addr> basic-5.0

0

Print Media SECcurity class of service (CLS) for a specified IP address where:

<ip_addr> = full or partial IP address

PRT MSEC SYS basic-5.0

0

PRT MSEC TN

Print system wide Media SECurity configuration.

basic-5.0

0

Print Media SECurity CLS for a specified full or partial TN.

PRT NAV_SITE basic-4.0

0

1168 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Print the navigation site name

Pack/Rel

If the navigation site name has been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT NAV_SITE command prints the modified navigation site name in an "OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing navigation site name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the

"OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

PRT NAV_SYSTEM basic-4.0

0

Print the navigation system name

If the navigation system name has been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT NAV_SYSTEM command prints the modified navigation system name in an "OVLY 117

Configuration" area and the existing navigation system name in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" change is activated and becomes part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

PRT NBWMM CFG

Print CS Configuration table

PRT NBWMM REG

Print CS Registration Information table

PRT NBWMM STAT

Print CS Network status table

PRT NDAPP basic-6.0

0

Print the Name Directory application parameters.

=> PRT NDAPP

NDApplState=Enabled

NDlookupTimer=4000

PRT NKT Print NAT Mapping Keep Alive time-out setting of port mapping for devices behind a NAT router.

basic-4.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1169

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

PRT NTP

Description

Display the current configuration parameters of NTP.

Displayed parameters include:

• IP addresses of primary and secondary NTP servers

• values for the three threshold levels: Minimum, Warning, and

Maximum

• security mode: secure or insecure

• Key ID (if NTP is running in secure mode)

• time interval

• local time zone offset from UTC

• synchronization mode: manual or background

Pack/Rel

basic-5.0

0

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT NUMZONE <numbering zone)

Print a table of information for a ZBD numbering zone, where

<numbering zone> = 1-1023.

Output:

• <PREF> = site prefix

A number from 0-9999.

• <CC> = country code

A number from 0-9999.

• <NPA> = area code (used for dialing through ZFDP)

A number from 0-9999.

• <AC1> = trunk access code 1

A number from 0-99.

• <AC2> = trunk access code 2

A number from 0-99.

• <NATC> = national dial code

A number from 0-9999.

• <INTC> = international dial code

A number from 0-9999.

• <DAC> = flag to delete NPA for a local subscriber call

A number from (0)-1.

• <TTBL> = tone table zbd-6.00

1170 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

A number from (0)-32.

Description Pack/Rel

Note:

If <numbering zone> is not specified, all numbering zones are printed.

PRT NZDES [<numbering zone>]

Print the description for a specified ZBD numbering zone.

Note:

Descriptions for all numbering zones are printed if

<numbering zone> is not specified.

zbd-6.00

PRT OPEN_ALARM

Display SNMP open alarm trap settings.

If SNMP open alarm trap settings have been added or modifed in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command, the PRT OPEN_ALARM command displays the new

(not yet activated) SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "OVLY

117 Configuration" area, and the existing (currently active)

SNMP open alarm trap settings in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the

"OVLY 117 Configuration" open alarm changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

PRT PDBAK

Print parameters for remote backup of PD

Print the current PDV value PRT PDV

PRT PPP

PRT PTM

Print Point-to-point Protocol interface address(es)

Print current Point-to-point Protocol idle timer settings

PRT QOS Print the current and average QOS values

PRT QSTHS Print all VQ thresholds

PRT RCL Prints the Remote Core Location Loop, Shelf & Card values

(Applicable only to CP PM and Linux CS).

PRT ROUTE Display routing table entries stored in the database.

pvqm-4.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1171

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

PRT SEL [nn] [aaaa]

Print most recent record(s) in system event list, where:

• [nn] = 0-(20)-SELSIZE

• [aaaa] = category name (for example, BUG)

All categories are printed if not specified.

basic-4.5

PRT SELSIZE

Print System Event List size

PRT SNMP_SYSGRP basic-4.0

0

Print all parameters of the MIB-II system group.

If MIB-II system group parameters have been modified in LD117 since the last execution of the SYNC SNMPCONF command

(not activated), the PRT SNMP_SYSGRP command prints the modified MIB-II system group parameters in an "OVLY 117

Configuration" area and the existing MIB-II system group parameters in an "ACTIVE Configuration" area. When the

SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117

Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the

"ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

PRT SUBNET [ALL] basic-5.0

0

Print all subnet entries.

PRT SUBNET ECL <ecl> basic-5.0

0

Print all subnets that match the specified ECL.

PRT SUBNET ERL<erl> basic-5.0

0

Print all subnets that match the specified ERL.

PRT SUBNET <IP Address> basic-5.0

0

1172 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Print the specified subnet entry (or all entries that match a partially-specified IP address).

Pack/Rel

PRT SUBNET NTH <n-th> <count> basic-5.0

0

Print ‘count’ subnets starting from ‘n-th’ entry.

PRT SUPPRESS alrm_filte r-21

Print global suppress value

PRT SUPPRESS_ALARM basic-4.0

0

Prints the alarm suppression threshold value.

PRT SYSMGMT_COMM basic-4.0

0

Print the system management Read/Write/Trap community name strings

If system management read/write/trap community strings have been added or modified in LD117 since the last execution of the

SYNC SNMPCONF command (not activated), the PRT

SYSMGMT_COMM command prints the added and modified system management read/write/trap community strings in an

"OVLY 117 Configuration" area and the existing system management read/write/trap community strings in an "ACTIVE

Configuration" area. When the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" changes are activated and become part of the "ACTIVE Configuration" on the system.

basic-6.0

0

PRT TIMER Print global timer window length (in minutes). See

Global window timer length on page 1070for more information.

PRT VPNKEY alrm_filte r-21 basic-5.0

0

Display the pre-shared key:

PRT VPNNET basic-5.0

0

Display both VPN Network IP and Mask

PRT VPNROUTER <side / CR> <address type / CR> basic-5.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1173

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Display interface of VPN Router Where:

• Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

• Address type = ‘PUBLIC’ / ‘PRIVATE’ VPN Router interface

Pack/Rel

PRT ZACB [<Zone>]

Print branch office zone dialing plans, where <zone> = branch office zone.

If <zone> is not specified, print branch office zone dialing plans for all branch office zones.

PRT ZALT [<zone number>]

Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0–

255.

Print Alternative Prefix numbers, where <zone number> = 0–

8000.

If <zone number> is not specified, print Alternate Prefix numbers for all configured zones.

basic-4.5

0 basic-7.0

0

PRT ZAST Print Alarms Suppress time interval for the zone.

PRT ZBW [<Zone>]

Print zone bandwidth utilization, where <zone> = zone.

If <zone> is not specified, print zone bandwidth utilization for all configured zones.

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Dest Zone>] basic-4.5

0

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status for all zones, where:

• Source Zone = 0–255

• Source Zone = 0–8000

• Dest Zone = 0–255

• Dest Zone = 0–8000 basic-7.0

0 basic-7.0

0

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> ALL basic-4.5

0

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table for all zones, where,

• Source Zone = 1-255

• Source Zone = 1-8000

Table Output Fields are: basic-7.0

0

1174 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

• Source — Zone and VPNI

• Destination — Zone and VPNI

• QoS factor

• Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps)

• Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps)

• Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps)

• Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps)

Pack/Rel

PRT ZBWM <Source Zone> [<Destination Zone>]

Print a zone-to-zone QoS status table, where:

• Source Zone = 0–255

• Source Zone = 0–8000

• Destination Zone = 0–255, and

• Destination Zone = 0–8000

Output Fields are:

• Source — Zone and VPNI

• Destination — Zone and VPNI

• QoS factor

• Configured Interzone B/W (Kbps)

• Sliding Maximum B/W (Kbps)

• Actual instantaneous B/W used (Kbps)

• Calls/hour or average bandwidth (Kbps) basic-7.0

0 basic-7.0

0

PRT ZCAC {<zone>} zcac-4.5

0

Print CAC parameters for all or for the identified zone, where:

• Local Zone = 0–255

• Local Zone = 0–8000

• State = ENL/DIS

• CR =1-100

• CPL =1-100

• CD =1-100

• CJ = 1-100

• CQOS = 1-100 zcac-7.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1175

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description Pack/Rel

• ZQRT = 1-100

• ZQRTI = 10-120

• ZQUAT = 1-99

• ZQWAT =1-99

• CACVT = 1-255

PRT ZDES [<DESMatchString>]

Print a table of the zone description entries.

PRT ZDID [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>]

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based call translations.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

• <matching string> = “best match” string of 1-16 digits

Unique inside a numbering zone.

Only numbering zone-based call translations with the specified 1-16 digit numeric matching string are printed

If not specified, all numbering zone-based call translations are printed.

zbd-6.00

PRT ZDP [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone dialing plan entries.

PRT ZESA [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone EmergencyServices Access

(ESA) entries.

PRT ZDST

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

PRT ZFDP [<numbering zone>] [<matching string>] basic-6.0

0

Print a table of ZBD numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans.

Feature 420 (Zone Based Dialing) must be equipped.

Where:

• <numbering zone> = 1-1023

1176 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed.

• <matching string> = 1-16 digit numeric string

Unique inside a numbering zone.

Only numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans with the specified 1-16 digit matching string are printed.

If not specified, all numbering zone-based flexible dialing plans are printed.

PRT ZONE ALL

Print zone information for all configured zones

PRT ZONE <x...x>

Print zone information for a specific zone, where:

• ZoneNumber = 0–255

• ZoneNumber = 0–8000

Pack/Rel

pvqm-7.0

0

PRT ZPAGE

This commands prints zone information for <zonesPerPage> zones starting from zone number <zoneNumber>. Data is printed for the following categories:

• zone number

• intrazone bandwidth

• intrazone strategy

• interzone bandwidth

• interzone strategy

• resource type

• zone intent

• description

PRT ZPARM [<numbering zone>]

Print the parameters of a ZBD numbering zone, where

<numbering zone> = 1-1023.

zbd-6.00

Note:

When no numbering zone is specified, parameters for all ZBD numbering zones are printed.

PRT ZQNL <ZoneNumber> pvqm-4.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1177

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Print the Notification Level for the specified zone, where:

• ZoneNumber = 0–255

• ZoneNumber = 0–8000

Pack/Rel

pvqm-7.0

0

PRT ZQNL ALL

Print the Notification Level for all zones.

pvqm-40

PRT ZQOS <zone> <attribute / ALL>

Prints QoS records for specified attribute and zone (or for all attributes with ALL). Where attribute is defined in the Traffic

Report 16 (see Traffic Measurement: Formats and Outputs

Reference, NN43001-750), for example "Interzone warning jitter count".

basic-4.5

PRT ZTDF [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries

PRT ZTP [<Zone>]

Print a table of branch office zone time adjustment properties entries.

REGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE

Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for the element.

REGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM

Establish mutual trust with the Primary Security Server for all system elements

RELOAD EPT basic-4.0

0

The new/modified EPT file is loaded into memory from disk (/u/ db/smpserv.db).

Reset IP sets with specified DN RST DN

RST ELNK ACTIVE

Reset Meridian 1 active Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset active ELAN IP address to default).

1178 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

RST ELNK INACTIVE

Reset Meridian 1 inactive Ethernet interface IP address to default value (reset inactive ELAN IP address to default).

RST FW

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Print all scheduled reset times basic-4.5

0

RST FW <FWID> basic-4.5

0

Print all scheduled reset times by firmware ID

RST FW <FWID> START basic-4.5

0

Immedicate hard-reset all IP Phones, where:

FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones

RST FW <FWID> <START/STOP> <HH:MM> basic-4.5

0

Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where:

• FWID = firmware ID of IP Phones

• START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where:

- START = set reset time schedule

- STOP = cancel scheduled reset

• HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset

RST IPR x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the IP

Expansion cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1179

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

RST IPM x Restores the default IP connectivity configuration for the Main cabinet end of the specified port, where: x = 1-4

Pack/Rel

RST MASK Reset subnet mask to default

RST PPP LOCAL

Reset local Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value

RST PPP REMOTE

Reset remote Point-to-point Protocol interface IP address to default value

RST PTM Reset Point-to-point Protocol idle timer to default

RST TN Reset IP set with specified TN

RST ZONE Print all scheduled reset times

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> basic-4.5

0 basic-4.5

0

Print all scheduled reset times by zone

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> START basic-4.5

0

Hard-reset all IP Phones, where:

ZoneNumer = zone number

RST ZONE <ZoneNumber> <START/STOP> <HH:MM> basic-4.5

0

Schedule or cancel hard-reset all IP Phones, where:

• ZoneNumer = zone number

• START/STOP = IP Phones reset, where:

- START = set reset time schedule

- STOP = cancel scheduled reset

• HH:MM = hour and minute when IP Phones are reset

SECRET DEFAULT

1180 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Set the Secret to default value.

SECRET SET

Define the Secret

SECRET STAT

Print the Secret

SECURITY DOMAIN JOIN

Pack/Rel

basic-6.0

0

Establish mutual trust with the UCM Primary Security Server.

SECURITY DOMAIN LEAVE basic-6.0

0

Remove the UCM Primary Security Server mutual trust information from the device.

SECURITY DOMAIN MODE [MANUAL | USER | AUTO]

Configure the UCM security domain management mode on the

Call Server.

Where:

• MANUAL = all devices must join the UCM security domain using local CLI commands

• USER = the user is prompted with a list of all currently active devices and is asked to confirm their addition to the UCM security domain

• AUTO = The credentials for the user accounts assigned the necessary role are cached on the Call Server so that they can be sent at a later time to any device that the Call Server requires to join the UCM security domain basic-6.0

0

SECURITY DOMAIN STAT basic-6.0

0

Display the IP address and fingerprint of the UCM Primary

Security Server.

Display ESALO information

STAT

ESALO

STAT IPMG [<supl shelf>] basic-5.0

0 basic-5.0

0

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1181

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Display the detailed status of all/one IPMG(s) configured on the system

Pack/Rel

STAT IPMG SUMMARY basic-5.0

0

Display the summary status of all IPMGs configured on the system. .

STAT L3VPN [side] basic-5.0

0

Display the VPN tunneling state. Where:

Side = 0 / 1 (number of the core)

STAT NTP

Check status of NTP.

Status information displays in four categories—current NTP configuration, last NTP configuration, last synchronization error, and counters—and includes the following fields:

• NTP enabled or disabled (if disabled, the report includes no further information)

• IP addresses of the primary and secondary NTP servers

• local time zone offset from UTC

• time difference (delta) between system time and NTP server

• current threshold level: Minimal, Warning, Maximum

• secure mode of operation set to secure or insecure

• packets sent

• packets received basic-5.0

0

Note:

NTP status information also appears on the Date and Time page in Element Manager, under the Network Time Protocol field.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

STAT RFC2833 <TN>

Display RFC2833 capability for TN for selected <TN>.

basis-5.0

1182 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command

STAT SHELLS SECURE

Description Pack/Rel

basic-4.5

0

Indicates whether secured shell access is enabled or disabled.

STAT SHELLS INSECURE basic-4.5

0

Indicates whether unsecured shell access is enabled or disabled.

STAT SNMPCONF

Display the status of the SYNC SNMPCONF command. The result indicates whether the SNMP parameters configured through LD 117 ("OVLY 117 Configuration") are synchronized with the CS.

There are two possible results:

• SNMP Configuration is in progress

When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is not executed, the new SNMP parameters are pending activation.

• SNMP Configuration is completed

When SNMP parameters are added or modified in overlay 117 and the SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed (new

SNMP parameters are activated).

basic-6.0

0

STAT TRANSFERS INSECURE basic-6.0

0

Display the status of the insecure File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

STAT TRANSFERS SECURE basic-6.0

0

Display the status of the secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).

STAT UCM SYS basic-6.0

0

Show UCM registration status for all system elements.

STAT UCM SYS REFRESH basic-6.0

0

Request UCM registration status update from all devices.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1183

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

STAT UCMSECURITY

Description

Show the Primary Security Server IP address and fingerprint

STAT VOLO

Display the active VOLO TN information

STAT ZALT <zone>

Pack/Rel

basic-4.5

0

Display Alternative Routing Status, where: zone = bandwidth zone

STAT ZBR [<zone>]

Display status of branch office zones, where: basic-4.0

0 zone = bandwidth zone

Note:

With release 4.50 this command supports Alternative Routing for NBWM.

basic-4.5

0

SSH KEY ACTIVATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE basic-5.0

0

Activates / Inactivates the pending SSH key by restarting the

SSH server

SSH KEY ACTIVATE CABINET n/ALL basic-5.0

0

Activates the pending SSH key on Cabinet n or ALL Cabinet by restarting the SSH server

SSH KEY CLEAR basic-5.0

0

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

SSH KEY CLEAR ACTIVE/ INACTIVE basic-5.0

0

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

SSH KEY CLEAR CABINET n/ ALL basic-5.0

0

1184 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description

Clears all stored public keys from memory, allowing connections to known devices with new public keys.

Pack/Rel

SSH KEY GENERATE basic-5.0

0

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

SSH KEY GENERATE ACTIVE/INACTIVE basic-5.0

0

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

SSH KEY GENERATE CABINET n/ALL basic-5.0

0

Regenerate the keys on the specified device, if no device is specified then the system generates the key locally.

SSH KEY SHOW basic-5.0

0

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

SSH KEY SHOW ACTIVE/ INACTIVE basic-5.0

0

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

SSH KEY SHOW CABINET n/ ALL basic-5.0

0

Displays the key fingerprint for the specified device, and the date the key was generated. If no device is specified then the system shows the key finger print for the local device.

STIP DTLS <Node> <Connection_Type> <DTLS_Capability> basic-6.0

0

Display IP Phones based on signaling encryption related values, namely the type of connection currently in use by each IP Phone and their capability to make DTLS connections.

Where:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1185

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• <Node> = the node ID of the node the subject IP phones belong to, or “ALL” to omit node-based filtering

• <Connection_Type> = type of signaling encryption used

- INSECURE = no signaling encryption

- SECURE” = USec or DTLS

- DTLS = DTLS

- USEC = UNIStim Security

- ALL = all encryption types

• <DTLS_Capability> = capability to make DTLS connections

- YES = able to make DTLS connections

- NO = not able to make DTLS connections

- ALL = both capabilities

Pack/Rel

STIP FW Print the number of registered IP Phones with associated RLM data basic-4.5

0

STIP FW <XX> [<A>] [<BB>] [<FF>] basic-4.5

0

Print the RLM data for registered IP Phones, where:

• XX = firmware ID

• A = major version designator

• BB = minor version designator

• FF = filter to apply on firmware version, where:

- (==) = equal to

- != = not equal to

- < = less then

- > = greater then

STIP MODL <MMMM> basic-4.5

0

Print the RLM for all IP Phones, where:

MMMM = IP Phone model

STOP NTP BACKGROUND basic-5.0

0

Stop background synchronization from running.

1186 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Administration commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

You cannot stop a background synchronization if no background routine is running. Attempts to do so result in an error message.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

SYNC NTP <Manual | BACKGROUND> basic-5.0

0

Synchronize with NTP server in manual or background mode.

Note:

Manual synchronization places LD 117 on hold for 15 seconds. During that time, you cannot abort from the overlay.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). NTP configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn] basic-4.0

0

Generate an alarm.

Where:

• aaaa = any character sequence.

However, to test how an existing system message category

(for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message.

• (nnnn )= any numeric sequence

Defaults to 0000.

The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter.

The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and EPT.

Nonexistent system messages have a severity of Info .

The following items are found in the details section of the trap output:

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1187

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated

• commonMIBSeverity

= defined by the EDT and EPT or

Info(5)

• commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the

Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS

(component type)

• commonMIBNotificationID = 0

• commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call

Server

• commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN

• commonMIBAlarmType = 8 (indicating unknown)

• commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown)

• commonMIBAlarmData

= Contains textual description

The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.

Pack/Rel

UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY DEVICE

Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for the element.

UNREGISTER UCMSECURITY SYSTEM

Remove the Primary Security Server mutual trust information from system for all system elements.

UPDATE DBS

Rebuild INET database and renumber host and route entry ID

(update network database).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the Linux Base layer.

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Maintenance commands share the same entry format as Administration commands.

1188 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

DIS BUF

ALL

DIS BUF

CDR

Description

Disable buffering for all data types

Disable buffering for CDR data

DIS BUF

STN

DIS BUF

TRF

Disable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync

Disable buffering for TRF data

Pack/Rel

DIS DBK Display database disaster recovery's backup & restore

DIS DVLA IDLELOGOUT

Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones Logout is disabled

DIS HOST n

Remove a host from the run time host table, where n = host entry number.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

DIS MEDS Disable Mediation Server Selection feature

DIS PPP Disable Point-to-point Protocol access (this enables PPPD)

DIS ROUTE n

Remove a route from the run time routing table, where n = route entry number.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

DIS ZALT <zone>

Disable ACR for zone, where:

• zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000 basic-4.50

basic-7.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1189

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Note:

Branch Office is configured at the Main Office

DIS ZBR <Zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]

Disable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where:

• zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000

• ALL = all features

• LOC = Local Dialing Access

• ESA = Emergency Service Access

• TIM = Time Adjustment

• ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch

DIS ZCAC <Zone>

Disable Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

Pack/Rel

basic-4.00

basic-7.00

basic-4.50

zcac-4.50

zcac-7.00

Note:

Disables the feature on a zone by zone basis.

DIS ZONE <x...x>

Disable a Zone, No new calls is established inside the disabled zone, from or towards this Zone.

DVLA LOGOUTLIST <fileName>

Parses the specified file from /e/temp/ directory on Call

Server and logs out all DVLA IP Phones whose TNs are presented in the file.

The file must contain only the TN in string format (for example, 096 0 00 30) on each line.

basic-7.00

DVLA LOGOUTALL [<idleTime>]

Logs out all DVLA logged-on idle IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified).

basic-7.00

1190 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description

DVLA LOGOUTTN <loop><shelf><card><unit>

Logs out a specific DVLA IP Phone if it is logged in and idle.

ENL BUF

ALL

Enable buffering for all data types

ENL BUF CDR

Enable buffering for CDR data

ENL BUF STN

Enable DBA buffering for Station Fast Sync

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

ENL BUF TRF

Enable buffering for TRF data

ENL DBK Enable database disaster recovery's backup and restore

ENL DVLA

MIDNLOGOU

T nnnn

Enable Automatic DVLA IP Phones Logout during Midnight

Routine. DVLA IP Phone will be logged-out if it is inactive more then nnnn minutes, where: nnnn = 1- (30) - 1440 minutes basic-7.00

ENL HOST n

Add a host to run time host table, where n = host entry number.

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

ENL MEDS Enable Mediation Server Selection feature

ENL PPP

Enable Point-to-point Protocol access (Enables PPPD command)

ENL ROUTE n

Add a route to run time routing table, where n = route entry number .

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1191

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

ENL ZALT <zone>

Enable ACR for zone, where:

• zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000

Pack/Rel

basic-4.50

basic-7.00

Note:

Branch Office zone is configured at the Main Office

ENL ZBR <zone> [ALL] [LOC] [ESA] [TIM] [ALT]

Enable a Zone's Branch Office behaviour, if no specific features are specified, then ALL is assumed, where:

• zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000

• ALL = all features

• LOC = Local Dialing Access

• ESA = Emergency Service Access

• TIM = Time Adjustment

• ALT = Alternate Routing for Branch

ENL ZCAC <Zone>

Enables Call Admission Control (CAC) for the identified zone, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000

Note:

Enables the feature on a zone by zone basis.

ENL ZONE <x...x>

Enable a Zone

PING Ping an IP address to test the network settings.

basic-4.00

basic-7.00

basic-4.50

zcac-4.50

zcac-7.0

1192 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

PRT DVLA IDLELOGOUT

Print the status of Automatic Idle DVLA IP Phones logout

SET ENABLE_TRAPS (ON) | OFF

C Enable/disable the sending of SNMP traps.

Where:

• ON = enabled

• OFF = disabled basic-6.00

basic-6.00

SET

HSP_IP

Activates the HSP IP addresses and subnet mask

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

SET MASK

Set ELNK subnet mask to configured value (set runtime subnet mask to the configured value).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

SET MGMT_ALARM

Generate MGMT SNMP Traps

SET OPEN_ALARM <slot> <IP address> [<port>]

Add an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) trap destination.

Where: basic-4.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1193

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

• <slot> = 0-7

• <IP Address> = any valid value in an x.x.x.x format (TCP/

IP)

• <port> = destination port for the SNMP trap

Note:

When <port> is not specified, SNMP traps are routed to port 162 by default.

Pack/Rel

Note:

To clear an SNMP trap destination, specify appropriate

<slot> value and set <IP Address> = 0.0.0.0.

When SNMP open alarm trap destinations are added or modified in LD117, they are stored in an "OVLY 117

Configuration" area pending activation. When the

SYNC SNMPCONF command is executed, the "OVLY 117 Configuration" SNMP open alarm changes are activated and become part of the

"ACTIVE Configuration" (current) on the system.

basic-6.00

SET USN Set the unique system name for IP Peer System

STAT AUTONEG IPM

Display auto-negotiate status of Main Cabinet ports.

The following report is displayed:

AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS - MAIN/

CALL SERVER PORTS

----------------------------------------------------------

PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate

=================================

IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN

UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4

UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100

Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

STAT AUTONEG IPR

Display auto-negotiate status of Expansion Cabinet ports.

The following report is displayed:

AUTO-NEGOTIATE LINK PARTNER STATUS -

EXPANSION/MEDIA GATEWAY PORTS

------------------------------------------------------------------

1194 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description

PORT Bandwidth Duplex Mode AutoNegotiate

=================================

IPR 1 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN ON IPR 2 UNKNOWN

UNKNOWN IPR 3 100 Mbps full duplex ON IPR 4

UNKNOWN UNKNOWN

If the auto-negotiation process is successful, it returns " 100

Mbps full duplex". Otherwise UNKNOWN is reported, indicating a failure in negotiating 100 Mbps full duplex bandwidth.

Pack/Rel

STAT BUF Display buffer info (data type,% full, not ready)

STAT DBK Display status of disaster recovery (enabled, disabled)

STAT ELIN [ALL] / <erl>

Print current status of all ELINs in all / specified ERLs.

basic-5.00

STAT ELIN ACTIVE [<erl>]

Print active mappings for specified ERL, or all ERLs if none is specified.

basic-5.00

STAT HOST Display current runtime host table status (enabled hosts).

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

STAT IP

DTLS

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified UNIStim encr. and DTLS cap

STAT IP

FW

STAT IP

MODL

Display the Resource Locator Module information for

Ethersets with specified F/W ID(s)

STAT IP HOSTIP

Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified HOST IP

Display the Resource Locator Module information for

Ethersets of the specified Model Name

STAT IP

NODE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1195

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command

STAT IP SIPLUA

Description

Display the Resource Locator Module information for SIPL

TNs with matching User Agent ID

STAT IP TERMIP

Display the Resource Locator Module information corresponding to the specified Etherset IP

STAT IP

TN

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN or group of TNs

STAT IP TYPE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified TN type

STAT IP ZONE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified zone

STAT ISET ALL

Display the Resource Locator Module information for all nodes

STAT ISET NODE

Display the Resource Locator Module information for the specified node

STAT LINK APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType, where:

- LTPS = Line TPS

- VGW = Voice Gateway

- H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk

- GK = GateKeeper

- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

STAT LINK IP <IP address>

Pack/Rel

1196 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses of the specified subnet, where:

IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card

Pack/Rel

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.

For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".

STAT LINK NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host nam, where: hostName = MAINSERVER

STAT LINK NODE <nodeID>

Display the link information status of the specified node, where: nodeID = 0-9999

Note:

The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling

Server equipment.

STAT LINK SRV <serverType>

Display the link information status of the servers for the specified server type, where: serverType, is:

- ITGP = ITG Pentium

- SMC = Media Card

- SS = Signaling Server

- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

STAT PPP

Display Point-to-point Protocol connection status.

STAT ROUTE

Display host and network routing tables.

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1197

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Note:

This command is blocked for co-resident Call Server applications (Call Server and Signaling Server applications co-located on a CP PM server). Network configuration and management are controlled from the

Linux Base layer.

STAT SERV APP <applicationType>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified application, where: applicationType is:

- LTPS = (Line TPS)

- VGW = Voice Gateway

- H323 = H.323 Virtual Trunk

- GK = GateKeeper

- SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)

- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

- SLG = SIP Lines Gateway

STAT SERV IP <IP address>

Display the link information status of the server for the specified IP address, or IP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:

IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.

Pack/Rel

Note:

The IP address can be in full or partial IP address format.

For example, "10.11.12.13" or "10.11".

STAT SERV NAME <hostName>

Display the link information status of the servers based on the supplied host name, where: hostName = MAINSERVER

STAT SERV NODE <nodeID>

Display the link information status of the specified node, where:

1198 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description Pack/Rel

nodeID = 0-9999

Note:

The nodeID identifies the node number assigned to a group of Voice Gateway Media Cards and Signaling

Server equipment.

STAT SERV TYPE <serverType>

Display the server information of the specified server type, where: serverType is:

- ITGP = ITG Pentium

- SMC = Media Card

- SS = Signaling Server

- MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

STAT SS

Display the server information of the specified Signaling

Server.

STAT UCM SYS

Show UCM registration status for all system elements.

STAT UCM SYSREFRESH

Request UCM registration status update from all devices.

STAT ZBR [<Zone>]

Display status of branch office zones, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000 basic-6.00

basic-6.00

basic-7.00

STAT ZONE [<Zone>]

Display zone status table, where:

• Zone = 0–255

• Zone = 0–8000

STIP ACF Displays status for all ACF calls

STIP ACF <status> basic-7.00

basic-4.50

basic-4.50

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1199

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Displays Active Call Failover (ACF) status information, where:

• UNREG = unregistered calls

• HREG = half-registered calls

• REB = rebuilt calls

• HREB = half-rebuilt calls

• PREB = partial-rebuilt calls

Pack/Rel

STIP DVLA [<idleTime>]

Outputs information (TN, Prime DN, idle time) about loggedin DVLA IP Phones which are idle for more than idleTime minutes (if specified). Not more than 1000 records can be output at once. If more than 1000 records are collected, then

Info message SCH2376 is printed.

basic-7.00

STIP HOSTIP <IP address>

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified HOSTIP address, or HOSTIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:

IP address = the ELAN IP address of the Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card.

Note:

IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

STIP NODE <nodeID>

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified node ID, where: nodeID = 0-9999

Note:

The nodeID identifies the node number you have assigned to a group of VGMC and Signaling Server equipment.

STIP SIPLUA <UA string>

Display SIP Line Services TNs with the specified User Agent string.

basic-6.00

1200 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command

STIP TERMIP <IP address>

Description

Display information contained in the resource locator module table corresponding to the specified TERMIP address, or TERMIP addresses contained in the specified sub-net, where:

IP address = the TLAN IP address of the IP Phone or Voice

Gateway Media Card.

Pack/Rel

Note:

IP address can be in full or partial IP address format. For example, "10.11.12.13", or "10.11".

STIP TN <l s c u>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN, or group of TNs, as denoted by the l s c u and c u parameters.

STIP TYPE <aaa>

Display the resource locator module information for the specified TN type.

Where valid values for <aaa> are:

• I2002 = IP Phone 2002

• I2004 = IP Phone 2004

• I2050 = IP Phone 2050

• ISET = all IP sets

• VGW = Voice Gateway resources

• IPTI = Virtual Trunk and IP Trunks

• MC32S = 32 port Mindspeed VGMC

Where valid values for <aaa> are:

• 1210 = IP Phone 1210

• 1220 = IP Phone 1220

• 1230 = IP Phone 1230 basic 5-5

Note:

Up to 3 TN types can be specified.

STIP ZONE <zone>

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1201

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

Command Description

Display the resource locator module information for the specified zone number, or range of zones, where:

• zone = 0–255

• zone = 0–8000

Pack/Rel

basic-7.00

TEST ALARM [aaaa nnnn]

Generate an alarm.

Where:

• aaaa = any character sequence.

However, to test how an existing system message category (for example, BUG, ERR, INI) appears in an alarm browser, use an existing system message.

• (nnnn )= any numeric sequence

Defaults to 0000.

The output shown on the TTY is the system message used as the parameter.

The actual trap sent to the trap destination list has the same severity as an existing message defined in the EDT and

EPT. Nonexistent system messages have a severity of

Info

.

The following items are found in the details section of the trap output:

• commonMIBDateAndTime = the time when the test is generated

• commonMIBSeverity = defined by the EDT and EPT or Info(5)

• commonMIBComponentID = the configured value of the Navigation system name: Navigation site name: CS

(component type)

• commonMIBNotificationID = 0

• commonMIBSourceIPAddress = IP Address of Call

Server

• commonMIBErrCode = AAAA NNNN

• commonMIBAlarmType

= 8 (indicating unknown)

• commonMIBProbableCause = 202 (indicating unknown)

• commonMIBAlarmData = Contains textual description

The rest of the variable bindings are NULL.

basic-4.00

1202 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Alphabetical list of Maintenance commands

Command Description

TEST SUBNETLIS <IP address>

Return the location data for the subnet entry that matches the specified IP address.

Pack/Rel

basic-5.00

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1203

LD 117: Ethernet and Alarm Management

1204 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Chapter 52: Communication Server 1000

High Scalability System

Common Data

Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System (HS System) common data is a group of identically configured data blocks across multiple Communication Server 1000E High Availability Groups (HA

Groups) within the same HS System. Data that are common across multiple HA Groups are configured once and automatically propagated to all groups within the same HS System, so that the HS System appears as a single entity from a common data management perspective. For more information on HS

System common data, see Communication Server1000E High Scalability Installation and Commissioning,

NN43041-312.

With the exception of the following prompts

• the SPVC prompt in the ATT_DATA block of LD 15

• the ALDN and PREO prompts in the FTR_DATA block of LD 15

• the VNR prompt in the NET_DATA block of LD 15 all prompts in the data blocks listed in

Table 29: Default definition of common data

on page 1205 are included in the default definition of common data.

Table 29: Default definition of common data

14

Load Number

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

Data Block Type

IPTI

Description

IP TIE trunk data block

CDB

DEFAULT

AML_DATA

ANI_DATA

ATT_DATA

CAS_DATA

CCS_DATA

CDR_DATA

FCR_DATA

FFC_DATA

Customer data block

Default customer data block

Application Module Link options

Automatic Number Identification numbers

Attendant Console options (Except prompt SPVC)

Centralized Attendant Service options

Controlled Class of Service options

CDR and Charge Account options

New Flexible Code Restriction options

Flexible Feature Code options

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1205

Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

15

15

15

15

Load Number

15

15

15

15

CSA

DIC

DID

FEX

FGDT

IDA

ISA

MCU

RDB

AWR

CAA

CAM

CBCT

COT

MUS

PAG

R232

R422

RAN

RCD

RLM

RLR

Data Block Type

FTR_DATA

INT_DATA

LDN_DATA

MPO_DATA

NET_DATA

PWD_DATA

RDR_DATA

ROA_DATA

Description

Features and options (Except prompts ALDN and

PREO)

Intercept treatment options

Departmental Listed Directory Numbers

Multi-Party Options

ISDN and ESN Networking options (Except prompt

VNR)

Customer related Passwords

Call Redirection

Recorded Overflow Announcement options

Route data block and Meridian 911

Automatic Wake Up trunk block for RAN/Music

Common Control Switching Arrangement

Central Automatic Message Accounting trunk

Call by call master route cbc_pkg-23

Central Office Trunk data block

Common Control Switching Arrangement access

Dictation trunk data block basic-1

Direct Inward Dialing trunk data block

Foreign Exchange trunk data block basic-1

Feature Group D trunk fgd-17

Integrated Digital Access

Integrated Service Access route or Call-by-Call

Meridian Communications Unit port basic-18

Music trunk data block

Paging trunk data block basic-1

DAC for NT7D16 on RS-232 port basic-18

DAC for NT7D16 on RS-422 port basic-18

Recorded Announcement trunk data block

Emergency Recorder trunk data block

Release Link Main trunk data block

Release Link Remote trunk data block

1206 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

117

117

87

87

87

86

86

86

86

17

17

17

17

24

16

16

16

16

16

16

Load Number

DGT

ESN

ITGE

RLB

FCAS

FSNS

NCTL

NET

HNPA

LOC

NPA

NSCL

NXX

SPN

ERL

NumZone

Data Block Type

TIE

TIE ATL

TIE SEMI

TIE AUTO

TIE TONE

WAT

Description

TIE trunk data block

TIE ATL data block for Sweden supp-15

Semi-automatic TIE trunk data block opcb-14

Automatic TIE trunk data block opcb-14

Tone TIE trunk data block opcb-14

Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block basic-18

ADAN

CEQU

PARM

VAS

ESA

All input/output devices (includes D-channels) basic-19

Common Equipment parameters basic-19

System Parameters basic-19

Value Added Server

Emergency Services Access data block

Digit manipulation data block

ESN data block

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion data block

Route List data Block

Free Calling Area Screening

Free Special Number Screening

Network Control

Network translation tables

Home NPA translation code

ESN Location Code translation data block

Numbering Plan Area code translation data block

Network Speed Call List data block

Central Office Code Translation data block

Special code translation data block

Emergency response location

Numbering Zone

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1207

Communication Server 1000 High Scalability System Common Data

1208 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

Index

Special Characters

(LD 18) ......................................................................

585

Numerics

0-RT (LD 28) .............................................................

755

0+RT (LD 28) ............................................................

755

1RT (LD 28) ..............................................................

755

20PP (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

2DT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

3ANI (LD 19) .............................................................

595

500B (LD 17) ............................................................

500

500L (LD 73) .............................................................

862

A

A (LD 18) ..................................................................

585

A_FILTER (LD 17) ....................................................

500

A1MR (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AAA (LD 95) ............................................................

1023

AAAO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AACD (LD 10) ............................................................

90

AACQ (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

AACR (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

AACS (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

AADN (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

AANI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

AAT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

AATB (LD 16) ............................................................

399

AATO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ABAN (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

ABAN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ABCD (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ABDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ABOR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

ABR (LD 23) .............................................................

684

ABST (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ABTR ........................................................................

399

AC1 (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

AC2 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

AC2 (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

ACAA (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

ACC (LD 93) .............................................................

991

ACCD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ACDN (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

ACDN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

ACDR (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

ACFT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ACKW (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ACLE (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

ACMP (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ACNI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ACNO (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

ACNS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ACNT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

ACO (LD 73) .............................................................

862

ACOD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ACOD (LD 21) ..........................................................

656

ACPQ (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

ACPS (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

ACPT (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

ACRC (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

ACT_BUSY (LD 15) ..................................................

302

ACT_IDLE (LD 15) ...................................................

302

ACTN (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ADAN (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ADAY (LD 10) .............................................................

90

ADAY (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

ADAY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ADCP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ADD (LD 73) .............................................................

862

ADDG (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ADDG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ADDITIONAL_PORT (LD 17) ...................................

500

ADDP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ADFT (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

ADHT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 81) ........................

908

ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 22) ........................

668

ADJUST PAPER THEN cr (LD 20) ...........................

629

ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 82) .........................

928

ADJUST PAPER THEN CR (LD 83) .........................

931

ADLD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ADMIN_PORT (LD 17) .............................................

500

ADMN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

ADPD (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

AEFD (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AEHT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AENI (LD 23) ............................................................

684

AF_STATUS (LD 17) ................................................

500

AFBT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

AFCO (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1209

AFD (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

AFNT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

AFX (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

AGCD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

AGNO (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

AGNT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

AHNT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AHOL (LD 10) .............................................................

90

AHOL (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AHOL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AIA (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

AID (LD 23) ...............................................................

684

ALARM (LD 17) ........................................................

500

ALDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ALEN (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

ALL (LD 57) ..............................................................

823

ALOG (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

ALOW (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

ALOW (LD 49) ..........................................................

766

ALOW (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

ALOW (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

ALOW (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

ALOW_LAST_DIG_REPEAT (LD 24) .......................

711

ALPD (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

ALRM (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ALRM (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ALRM (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ALRM (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

ALRM (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

ALRM (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

ALST (LD 86) ............................................................

942

ALT (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

ALUL (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

ALUS (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

AML (LD 17) .............................................................

500

AML_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

ANAT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ANAT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ANDN (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ANDT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ANFA (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANFB (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANFT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ANI_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................

302

ANI2_CLID ...............................................................

399

ANIC (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ANIE (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

ANIE (LD 11) .............................................................

147

ANIE (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ANIE (LD 27) ............................................................

734

ANII (LD 19) ..............................................................

595

ANIT (LD 19) ............................................................

595

ANKP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ANLD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ANNS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANOF (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANQU (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

ANSR (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ANSZ (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ANTK (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ANUM (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

ANUM (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

ANXC (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

AOBT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

AOCS (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

AODN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

AODN (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

AOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

AOM (LD 11) .............................................................

147

APAD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

APL (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

APL (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

APPL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

APPL (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

APRT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

APVL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

AQTT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

AQTT (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

ARBK (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

ARDL (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

ARDL_ACCEPT (LD 15) ..........................................

302

ARDL_ATTEMPT (LD 15) .........................................

302

ARDL_RETRY (LD 15) .............................................

302

ARE YOU SURE .......................................................

711

ARE YOU SURE? (LD 95) ......................................

1023

AREM (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

ARLI (LD 90) .............................................................

978

ARRN (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

ART (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

ARTO (LD 10) .............................................................

90

ARTO (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

ASID (LD 20) ............................................................

629

ASID (LD 21) ............................................................

656

ASID (LD 23) ............................................................

684

ASPCT (LD 15) .........................................................

302

ASRC (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

AST (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

AST (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

AST (LD 14) ..............................................................

242

AST (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

AST (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

1210 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

ASTM (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ASTP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ASUM (LD 02) ......................................................

69

,

80

ASUM A (LD 02) ...................................................

69

,

80

ASUM E (LD 02) ...................................................

69

,

80

ASUP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ATAC (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ATAN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ATBL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ATCH (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ATDA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

ATDD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

ATDN (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

ATDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ATDN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ATGT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ATIM (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ATO (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

ATRC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ATRN (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ATRR (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ATT (LD 94) ............................................................

1015

ATT_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

ATVR (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AUDN (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

AUDT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

AUT (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

AUTB (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AUTH (LD 10) .............................................................

90

AUTH (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

AUTH (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AUTH (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

AUTH (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

AUTHCOD_ALRM (LD 88) .......................................

967

AUTM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

AUTO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AUTO (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

AUTO_AUDIT (LD 17) ..............................................

500

AUTO_BIMP (LD 14) ................................................

242

AUTR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

AUTR (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

AUXP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

AWU (LD 15) ............................................................

302

AWU_DATA (LD 15) .................................................

302

AWUA (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

AWUD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

AWUT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

AWUV (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

AXID (LD 15) ............................................................

302

AXQI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

AXQO (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

B

B (LD 18) ..................................................................

585

B1 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

B1CT (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

B2 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

B2CT (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

BAND (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BANR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

BATT (LD 17) ............................................................

500

BAUD (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

BCAD (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

BCAP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

BCAP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

BCH (LD 27) .............................................................

734

BCHI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

BCHL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

BCOT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BCST (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

BDCT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BDI (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

BDSP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BGTH (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

BILN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

BIMP (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

BIMP (LD 14) ............................................................

242

BIPC (LD 73) ............................................................

862

BIPV (LD 73) ............................................................

862

BITL (LD 17) .............................................................

500

BKGD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

BLEN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BLOC (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

BNE (LD 86) .............................................................

942

BNRA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

BNRD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

BNUM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

BOTO (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

BPS (LD 17) .............................................................

500

BPSS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

BPV (LD 73) .............................................................

862

BRIL (LD 73) .............................................................

862

BRIP (LD 16) ............................................................

399

BRIT (LD 73) ............................................................

862

BRK (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

BRSC (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

BRST (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

BRST PARM (LD 74) ................................................

898

BSCW (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

BSFE (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

BSGC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

BSRC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1211

BSRV (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

BSSU (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BTCG (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BTDD (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

BTDT (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

BTDT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

BTID (LD 14) ............................................................

242

BTT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

BTUA (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

BUID (LD 11) ............................................................

147

BUID (LD 20) ............................................................

629

BUSY (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

BUSY (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

BWTM (LD 02) ...........................................................

69

BYPS (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

BYPS (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

BYTH (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

C

C (LD 18) ..................................................................

585

C CLRB (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

C CLRB (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

C SUPO(S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

C6DS (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CAB (LD 17) .............................................................

500

CAB (LD 56) .............................................................

800

CAC (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

CAC (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CAC (LD 27) .............................................................

734

CAC_CIS (LD 10) .......................................................

90

CAC_CIS (LD 11) .....................................................

147

CAC_CIS (LD 16) .....................................................

399

CAC_CIS (LD 27) .....................................................

734

CAC_CIS (LD 88) .....................................................

967

CAC_CONV (LD 16) .................................................

399

CAC_MFC (LD 10) .....................................................

90

CAC_MFC (LD 11) ....................................................

147

CAC_MFC (LD 27) ...................................................

734

CAC0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC4 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC5 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC6 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC7 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC8 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CAC9 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CACC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CACC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CACD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CACD (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

CAD (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

CALB (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

CALB (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

CALB (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

CALP (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

CAMP (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

CANC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CARD (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

CAS (LD 15) .............................................................

302

CAS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

CAST (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

CAT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

CBCR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CBQ (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CBQ (LD 86) .............................................................

942

CBQ (LD 87) .............................................................

958

CBTL (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

CC0 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CC1 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CC2 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CC3 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CC4 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CCAN (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

CCAR (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

CCB (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CCB1 (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CCB2 (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CCBA (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CCBA (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

CCBA (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

CCBA (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

CCDO (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CCFD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CCFWDN (LD 15) .....................................................

302

CCGD (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

CCLS (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

CCNI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CCO (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CCRS (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CCS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

CDAN (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

CDCT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CDEN (LD 10) ............................................................

90

CDEN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CDEN (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

CDEN (LD 13) ..........................................................

234

CDEN (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

CDEN (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

CDN (LD 23) .............................................................

684

1212 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

CDNC (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

CDNO (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CDP (LD 86) .............................................................

942

CDPC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CDPC (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

CDPL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CDPR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CDR (LD 15) .............................................................

302

CDR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CDR (LD 27) .............................................................

734

CDR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

CDRB (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CDRC (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CDRX (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CDRY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CDSQ (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CDT (LD 56) .............................................................

800

CDTI2 (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

CDTO (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CE (LD 97) ..............................................................

1039

CEIL (LD 23) .............................................................

684

CEPT (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CEQP (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

CEQU (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CFBA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CFDD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CFDT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

CFHO (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CFLP (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

CFMW (LD 56) .........................................................

800

CFN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CFN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CFN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CFNA (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

CFSN (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

CFTA (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CFTN (LD 10) .............................................................

90

CFTN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CFWA (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CFWD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CFWD (LD 95) ........................................................

1023

CFWI (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CFWR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CFWS (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CFWT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

CFWT (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

CFWV (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CGPC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CH (LD 27) ...............................................................

734

CHANGE MAP? (LD 29) ..........................................

758

CHDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CHID (LD 14) ............................................................

242

CHLN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CHMN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CHRG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CHTY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CIC (LD 19) ..............................................................

595

CIS_ANI (LD 15) .......................................................

302

CIS_ENT (LD 15) .....................................................

302

CISFW (LD 73) .........................................................

862

CISR (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CIST (LD 14) ............................................................

242

CITM (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

CLAS (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

CLASS_FMT (LD 15) ...............................................

302

CLDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CLEA (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

CLEN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CLID (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CLID (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CLID (LD 17) ............................................................

500

CLIP (LD 27) .............................................................

734

CLK (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

CLK (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

CLKN (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

CLN (LD 56) .............................................................

800

CLOK (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

CLOK (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

CLR (LD 19) .............................................................

595

CLRB (R) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

CLRB (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

CLRF (R) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

CLRF (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

CLS (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

CLS (LD 14) ..............................................................

242

CLS (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

CLS (LD 27) ..............................................................

734

CLS1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CLS2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CLTP (LD 90) ............................................................

978

CMD (LD 29) ............................................................

758

CMF (LD 14) .............................................................

242

CMS (LD 17) .............................................................

500

CMS (LD 23) .............................................................

684

CNAT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CNCS (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CNDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CNDR (LD 94) ........................................................

1015

CNEG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CNEG (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CNF_NAME (LD 15) .................................................

302

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1213

CNFD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CNFFIELD (LD 15) ...................................................

302

CNFG (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

CNI (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

CNI (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

CNIE (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CNIP (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CNIT (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CNT (LD 56) .............................................................

800

CNTC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CNTL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CNTL (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

CNTL (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

CNTP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CNTR (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

CNTY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CNTY (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

CNV (LD 86) .............................................................

942

CNVT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CO_TYPE (LD 17) ....................................................

500

COAT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CODE (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CODE (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CODE (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

CODE (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

COLP (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

COLR (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

COND (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CONF (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CONF (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CONF (LD 79) ..........................................................

905

CONF_DSP (LD 15) .................................................

302

CONG (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CONN (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

CONN (R) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

CONN (S) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

CONT (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

CONT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

COPC (LD 02) ............................................................

69

COPN (LD 02) ............................................................

69

COPS (LD 02) ............................................................

69

COPT (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

CORT (LD 28) ...........................................................

755

COS (LD 24) .............................................................

711

COS (LD 88) .............................................................

967

COT (LD 56) .............................................................

800

COTL (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

COTR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

COTS (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

CPAC (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CPAD (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

CPAD (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

CPAR (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

CPAS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CPCI (LD 15) ............................................................

302

CPDC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

CPFXS (LD 16) .........................................................

399

CPG (LD 93) .............................................................

991

CPGS (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

CPNC (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

CPND (LD 10) ............................................................

90

CPND (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CPND (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

CPND_LANG (LD 10) ................................................

90

CPND_LANG (LD 11) ...............................................

147

CPND_LANG (LD 95) .............................................

1023

CPOQ (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

CPP (LD 16) .............................................................

399

CPP (LD 57) .............................................................

823

CPPO (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

CPRD (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CPRK (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CPTM (LD 50) ..........................................................

772

CPUB (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CRC (LD 17) .............................................................

500

CRC (LD 73) .............................................................

862

CRCF (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

CRCS (LD 10) ............................................................

90

CRCS (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

CRDAY (LD 15) ........................................................

302

CRHOL (LD 15) ........................................................

302

CRID (LD 16) ............................................................

399

CRID (LD 21) ............................................................

656

CRNO (LD 49) ..........................................................

766

CRQS (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CRT0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CRT1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CRT2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CRT3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CRTOD (LD 15) ........................................................

302

CSDN (LD 10) ............................................................

90

CSDN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CSDN (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

CSDN (LD 83) ..........................................................

931

CSHF (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CSQI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

CSQO (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

CT (LD 27) ................................................................

734

CT (LD 97) ..............................................................

1039

CTBL .................................................................

399

,

942

CTOC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CTON (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

1214 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

CTRC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CTVN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

CTYP (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CTYP (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

CTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CTYP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

CTYP (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

CTYP (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

CTYP (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

CUST (LD 10) .............................................................

90

CUST (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

CUST (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

CUST (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

CUST (LD 15) ...................................................

302

,

614

CUST (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

CUST (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

CUST (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

CUST (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

CUST (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

CUST (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

CUST (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

CUST (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

CUST (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

CUST (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

CUST (LD 26) ...........................................................

723

CUST (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

CUST (LD 28) ...........................................................

755

CUST (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

CUST (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

CUST (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

CUST (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

CUST (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

CUST (LD 79) ...........................................................

905

CUST (LD 81) ...........................................................

908

CUST (LD 82) ...........................................................

928

CUST (LD 83) ...........................................................

931

CUST (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

CUST (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

CUST (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

CUST (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

CUST (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

CUST (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

CWBZ (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CWBZ (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

CWCL (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CWCL (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

CWGA (LD 57) .........................................................

823

CWGD (LD 57) .........................................................

823

CWLF (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CWLW (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CWNC (LD 23) .........................................................

684

CWNT (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CWT (LD 56) ............................................................

800

CWTH (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CWTM (LD 15) .........................................................

302

CWTM (LD 93) .........................................................

991

CWTT (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

CWUP (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

CY45 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

CYCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

D

D (LD 18) ..................................................................

585

DACT_BUSY (LD 15) ...............................................

302

DACT_IDLE (LD 15) .................................................

302

DAL (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

DANI (LD 11) ............................................................

147

DAPC (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

DAPC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DAPC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DAPC (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

DASC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DATA_CORRECT (LD 17) ........................................

500

DATE (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DATE (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

DATE (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

DATE (LD 81) ...........................................................

908

DATE (LD 82) ...........................................................

928

DATE (LD 83) ...........................................................

931

DAY (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

DAY0 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DAY1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DAY2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DAY3 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DAYS (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

DAYS (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

DBA (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

DBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

DBK (LD 86) .............................................................

942

DBNC (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

DBRC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

DCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

DCD (LD 11) .............................................................

147

DCD (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DCDR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DCFW (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

DCH (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DCHI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DCHI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

DCHL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DCHR (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

DCLP (LD 10) .............................................................

90

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1215

DCMX (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

DCNO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DCNO (LD 49) ..........................................................

766

DCNO (LD 95) ........................................................

1023

DCO (LD 73) .............................................................

862

DCTI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DCUS (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

DDCS (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

DDCS (LD 74) ..........................................................

898

DDD (LD 90) .............................................................

978

DDGT (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

DDGT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

DDI (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

DDLY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DDMI (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DDO (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DDSL (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

DDSL (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

DDV ..........................................................................

942

DEAF (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

DEF 2000 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 2006 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 2008 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 2216 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 2500 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 2616 (LD 97) ...................................................

1039

DEF 500 (LD 97) .....................................................

1039

DEF I2002 xx (LD 97) .............................................

1039

DEF I2004 xx (LD 97) .............................................

1039

DEF I2050 xx (LD 97) .............................................

1039

DEFS (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

DEL (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

DEL (LD 87) ..............................................................

958

DELETE_VMB (LD 10) ...............................................

90

DELETE_VMB (LD 11) .............................................

147

DEM (LD 11) .............................................................

147

DEM (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DENS (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DENY (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

DENY (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

DENY (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

DENY (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

DENY (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

DENY (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

DES (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

DES (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

DES (LD 14) .............................................................

242

DES (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DES (LD 17) .............................................................

500

DES (LD 20) .............................................................

629

DES (LD 22) .............................................................

668

DES (LD 27) .............................................................

734

DES (LD 81) .............................................................

908

DES (LD 82) .............................................................

928

DES (LD 84_85) .......................................................

933

DES (LD 95) ...........................................................

1023

DES0 / 1 (LD 97) ....................................................

1039

DEST (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

DEXT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DFCL (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

DFDN (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

DFDN (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

DFLN (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

DFLT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DFLT (LD 18) ............................................................

585

DFLT (LD 56) ............................................................

800

DFLT (LD 73) ............................................................

862

DFLT (LD 94) ..........................................................

1015

DFLT_LANG (LD 15) ................................................

302

DFLT_SCPW (LD 15) ...............................................

302

DFN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DFN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DFN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DFNR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DFQ (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

DGRP (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DGRP (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

DGRP (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

DGTO (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

DGTP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DGTS (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

DGTS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

DI0 (LD 56) ...............................................................

800

DIAL (LD 56) .............................................................

800

DIALPLAN (LD 15) ...................................................

302

DIALPLAN (LD 21) ...................................................

656

DID (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

DID (LD 90) ..............................................................

978

DIDD (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DIDD (LD 17) ............................................................

500

DIDL (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

DIDN (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DIDS (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

DIDT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DIG (LD 10) ................................................................

90

DIG (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

DIG (LD 95) ............................................................

1023

DIGS (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DIND (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DISD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DISPLAY NEW MAP? (LD 29) ..................................

758

1216 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

DISPLAY_FMT (LD 10) ..............................................

90

DISPLAY_FMT (LD 11) .............................................

147

DISPLAY_FMT (LD 95) ...........................................

1023

DITI (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

DLAC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DLAT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

DLDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DLEN (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

DLNG (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DLNT (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

DLOP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DLT (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

DLTN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DLTN (LD 86) ............................................................

942

DMC (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

DMC (LD 20) ............................................................

629

DMEM (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

DMI (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

DMI (LD 87) ..............................................................

958

DMI (LD 90) ..............................................................

978

DMOD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DMPH (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

DMWM (LD 15) .........................................................

302

DN (LD 10) .................................................................

90

DN (LD 11) ................................................................

147

DN (LD 20) ...............................................................

629

DN (LD 22) ...............................................................

668

DN (LD 24) ................................................................

711

DN (LD 27) ...............................................................

734

DN (LD 82) ...............................................................

928

DN (LD 95) ..............................................................

1023

DNAM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DNAN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DNAN (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

DNAT (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

DNDA (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

DNDH (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

DNDI (LD 12) ............................................................

222

DNDL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DNDR (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DNDT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DNIC (LD 27) ............................................................

734

DNIS (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DNIS (LD 23) ............................................................

684

DNLG (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DNLN (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

DNPS (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

DNRI (LD 11) ............................................................

147

DNRO (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

DNRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

DNSZ (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DNSZ (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

DNUM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

DORG (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

DOW (LD 23) ............................................................

684

DPNS (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DPPI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DPPO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DPSD (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

DPVS (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

DRAT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DRNG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

DROL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DSAC (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

DSBL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DSC (Distant Steering Code) ...................................

942

DSC (LD 87) .............................................................

958

DSEL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DSET (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

DSL (LD 27) ..............................................................

734

DSL (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

DSP (LD 87) .............................................................

958

DSPD (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DSPL (LD 11) ............................................................

147

DSPT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DSPT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DSTL (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

DTAO (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DTCR (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

DTCS (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DTCS (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

DTD (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DTDF (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DTDT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DTI2 (LD 17) .............................................................

500

DTIB (LD 17) ............................................................

500

DTIC (LD 17) ............................................................

500

DTMF (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

DTMF (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

DTMK (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

DTO (LD 13) .............................................................

234

DTO (LD 73) .............................................................

862

DTOB (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DTOC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DTOS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DTPI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

DTPn (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

DTPO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

DTR (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

DTR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DTRB (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DTRK (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1217

DTSL (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

DTSL (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

DTT (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

DTYP (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

DUP (LD 11) .............................................................

147

DUP (LD 16) .............................................................

399

DUPX (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DUR5 (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

DURT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

DYNAMIC_ELIN_REUSE (LD 17) ............................

500

DYNAMIC_ELIN_TIMEOUT (LD 17) ........................

500

E

E (LD 97) ................................................................

1039

E CONN (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

E CONN (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

E SEZ (R) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

E SEZ (S) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

E_FILTER (LD 17) ....................................................

500

E1 (LD 97) ..............................................................

1039

EBLF (LD 12) ............................................................

222

ECC1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ECC2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ECDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ECDN (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

ECDR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ECHG (LD 10) ............................................................

90

ECHG (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

ECL ...........................................................................

147

ECL (LD 81) ..............................................................

908

EDGE (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

EECD (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

EES (LD 23) .............................................................

684

EESD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

EEST (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

EEST (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

EFCS (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

EFD (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

EFD (LD 27) .............................................................

734

EFLL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

EFLL (LD 93) ............................................................

991

EHNO (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

EHR (LD 23) .............................................................

684

EHT (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

EHT (LD 27) .............................................................

734

ELAN (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ELKA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

ELKD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

ELKP (LD 10) .............................................................

90

ELKP (LD 11) ............................................................

147

ELPL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

EMGY (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

EML (LD 16) .............................................................

399

EMRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

EMTY (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

EMULATED (LD 20) .................................................

629

ENBL (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

ENBS (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

END (LD 56) .............................................................

800

ENL (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

ENS (LD 15) .............................................................

302

ENTR ........................................................................

711

ENTR (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

ENTR (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

ENTRY (LD 15) .........................................................

302

EOS (LD 16) .............................................................

399

EOVR (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

EQA (LD 87) .............................................................

958

EQAR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ERDT (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

ERL ...........................................................................

147

ERL (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

ERL (LD 12) ..............................................................

222

ERL (LD 27) ..............................................................

734

ERL (LD 81) ..............................................................

908

ERR (LD 52) .............................................................

778

ERRM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

ERWT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

ERWT (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

ESA_APDN (LD 15) .................................................

302

ESA_HLCL (LD 15) ..................................................

302

ESA_INHN (LD 15) ...................................................

302

ESA_ONLY (LD 20) ..................................................

629

ESCALATE (LD 17) ..................................................

500

ESDI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

ESDN (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

ESN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

ESRT (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

ETOD (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

EXP (LD 86) .............................................................

942

EXT_NAME (LD 15) .................................................

302

EXT0 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

EXT1 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

EXTFIELD (LD 15) ...................................................

302

EXTR (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

EXTT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

F

FACN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FACY (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FADR (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FADT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

1218 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

FAEL (LD 52) ............................................................

778

FAER (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

FALT (LD 16) ............................................................

399

FALT (R) (LD 73) ......................................................

862

FALT (S) (LD 73) .......................................................

862

FAP (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

FCAF (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FCAR (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

FCAR (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

FCDR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

FCFT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FCI (LD 86) ...............................................................

942

FCI (LD 87) ...............................................................

958

FCNC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FCR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

FCSD (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

FCTB (LD 10) .............................................................

90

FCTB (LD 11) ............................................................

147

FCTB (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

FCTH (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FCWD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

FDAY (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

FDDN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FDID (LD 49) ............................................................

766

FDIS (LD 57) ............................................................

823

FDLC (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FDLT (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

FDN (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

FDN (LD 27) .............................................................

734

FDNR (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FDTM (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FDTP (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FEAT (LD 27) ............................................................

734

FEAT (LD 73) ............................................................

862

FEAT (LD 81) ............................................................

908

FEAT (LD 86) ............................................................

942

FEAT (LD 87) ............................................................

958

FEAT (LD 90) ............................................................

978

FEATID (LD 27) ........................................................

734

FEDC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FETN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FFC_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

FFCS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FFCT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

FFCT (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

FGNO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

FGNO (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

FINT (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

FLEN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FLEN (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

FLEN (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

FLOW (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

FLOW CNTL (LD 74) ................................................

898

FLOW_TYPE (LD 17) ...............................................

500

FLSH (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FLSH (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

FLTA (LD 17) ............................................................

500

FLTH (LD 17) ............................................................

500

FLVL_MAX (LD 97) .................................................

1039

FLVL_MIN (LD 97) ..................................................

1039

FMOP (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

FMT_OUTPUT (LD 17) ............................................

500

FNAD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FNAL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FNAT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

FNCF (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FNP (LD 15) .............................................................

302

FNUM (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

FOPT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FOR (LD 20) .............................................................

629

FORC (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

FORM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

FPC (LD 17) .............................................................

500

FR44 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

FRAN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FRCE (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

FRCE (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FREQ_0 (LD 97) .....................................................

1039

FREQ_1 (LD 97) .....................................................

1039

FRFW (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

FRIN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

FRL (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

FRL (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

FRL (LD 87) ..............................................................

958

FROA (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FROM (LD 49) ..........................................................

766

FRPT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

FRRC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FRRD (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FRRS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

FRRT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

FRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

FRRT (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

FRT (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

FRT (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

FRT (LD 93) ..............................................................

991

FSNI (LD 86) ............................................................

942

FSNI (LD 87) ............................................................

958

FSTN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FSVC (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

FTNR (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FTOP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1219

FTR (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

FTR_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

FTR_DATA (LD 21) ...................................................

656

FTYP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

FUNC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

FVER (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

FWTM (LD 02) ............................................................

69

FWTM (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

G

GBCS (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

GCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

GCR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

GHTA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

GHTD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

GKCF (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

GP03 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP04 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP05 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP06 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP07 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP08 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP09 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP10 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP11 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

GP12 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP13 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP14 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP15 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GP2 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

GPNO (LD 26) ..........................................................

723

GPXX (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

GRCL (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

GRD (LD 16) .............................................................

399

GRNO (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

GRNO (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

GRP (LD 17) .............................................................

500

GRP (LD 18) .............................................................

585

GRP (LD 20) .............................................................

629

GRP (LD 52) .............................................................

778

GRPC (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

GRPF (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

GRPx (LD 26) ...........................................................

723

H

HBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

HCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

HCC (LD 15) .............................................................

302

HCCT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

HDID (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

HDLC (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

HDLC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

HDOPT (LD 15) ........................................................

302

HDTM (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

HIDN (LD 57) ............................................................

823

HLCL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HLCL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

HLDC (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

HLOC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HLOC (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

HMDN (LD 10) ............................................................

90

HMDN (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

HMDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

HMDN (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

HMSB (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

HMTL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HNPA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HNPA (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

HNTN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HNTN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

HNXX (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HOL_OPT (LD 15) ....................................................

302

HOLD (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

HOLD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

HOML (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

HOSP (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

HOSP (LD 49) ..........................................................

766

HOST (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

HOT (LD 11) .............................................................

147

HOUR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

HOUR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

HOUR (LD 21) ..........................................................

656

HOWL (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

HPIB (LD 17) ............................................................

500

HPQ (LD 23) .............................................................

684

HRCL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

HREL (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

HRLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

HSID (LD 23) ............................................................

684

HSP_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

HTLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

HTNO (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

HTYP (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

HTYP (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

HUNT (LD 10) ............................................................

90

HUNT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

HUNT (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

HUNT (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

HWTT (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

1220 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

I

IABS (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IADN (LD 12) ............................................................

222

IADR (LD 17) ............................................................

500

IANI (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

IAPG (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

IAPG (LD 11) ............................................................

147

IAPG (LD 14) ............................................................

242

IBCS (LD 56) ............................................................

800

IC (LD 27) .................................................................

734

ICAD (LD 56) ............................................................

800

ICCR (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICDD (LD 23) ............................................................

684

ICDL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICDN (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICDN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ICDN (LD 93) ............................................................

991

ICDR (LD 12) ............................................................

222

ICFA (LD 57) .............................................................

823

ICFD (LD 57) ............................................................

823

ICFV (LD 57) ............................................................

823

ICI (LD 15) ................................................................

302

ICI (LD 93) ................................................................

991

ICIS (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

ICMM (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ICNP (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ICNT (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ICOG (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ICOG (LD 94) ..........................................................

1015

ICON (LD 17) ............................................................

500

ICP (LD 12) ...............................................................

222

ICP (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

ICP (LD 23) ...............................................................

684

ICP_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................

302

ICPA (LD 57) .............................................................

823

ICPD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICPD (LD 57) ............................................................

823

ICPO (LD 57) ............................................................

823

ICPP (LD 57) ............................................................

823

ICPR (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICPR (LD 23) ............................................................

684

ICPR (LD 93) ............................................................

991

ICPS (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICPS (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ICPS (LD 23) ............................................................

684

ICPS (LD 93) ............................................................

991

ICR (LD 88) ..............................................................

967

ICS (LD 73) ...............................................................

862

ICT (LD 10) .................................................................

90

ICT (LD 11) ...............................................................

147

ICT (LD 12) ...............................................................

222

ICTD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ICWN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ID (LD 16) .................................................................

399

ID (LD 52) .................................................................

778

ID (LD 86) .................................................................

942

ID1 (LD 56) ...............................................................

800

ID2 (LD 56) ...............................................................

800

IDBB (LD 86) ............................................................

942

IDBZ (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IDC (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

IDC (LD 95) .............................................................

1023

IDCA (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IDD (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

IDE (LD 56) ...............................................................

800

IDEF (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IDEF (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IDGT (LD 49) ............................................................

766

IDLB (LD 23) .............................................................

684

IDLE (R) (LD 73) .......................................................

862

IDLE (S) (LD 73) .......................................................

862

IDLE_DISP_CHAR (LD 17) ......................................

500

IDLE_DISP_STRING (LD 17) ...................................

500

IDLE_SET_DISPLAY (LD 17) ...................................

500

IDLP (LD 17) .............................................................

500

IDLT (LD 02) ...............................................................

69

IDLT 1 (LD 02) ............................................................

69

IDOP (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IDR (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

IDTB (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IDUB (LD 23) ............................................................

684

IEC (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

IFC (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

IFC (LD 17) ...............................................................

500

IFDN (LD 23) ............................................................

684

IFLS (LD 15) .............................................................

302

IFTO (LD 19) .............................................................

595

IHT (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

IIT (LD 19) ................................................................

595

IITP (LD 19) ..............................................................

595

ILIN (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

ILLR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

ILOU (LD 56) ............................................................

800

IMA (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

IMA (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

IMBI (LD 16) .............................................................

399

IMCB (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IMPH (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IMS (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

IMS (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

IMS (LD 57) ..............................................................

823

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1221

IMS_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

INAC (LD 16) ............................................................

399

INC (LD 14) ..............................................................

242

INC (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

INC_T306 (LD 16) ....................................................

399

INC_T306 (LD 17) ....................................................

500

INDMF (LD 16) .........................................................

399

INDX (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

INFO (LD 20) ............................................................

629

INIT (LD 19) ..............................................................

595

INIT (LD 49) ..............................................................

766

INPL (LD 90) .............................................................

978

INSO (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

INST (LD 16) ............................................................

399

INST (LD 57) ............................................................

823

INST (LD 86) ............................................................

942

INT (LD 11) ...............................................................

147

INT (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

INT (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

INT_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................

302

INT_NAME (LD 15) ..................................................

302

INTC (LD 15) ............................................................

302

INTC (LD 16) ............................................................

399

INTFIELD (LD 15) .....................................................

302

INTL (LD 15) .............................................................

302

INTL (LD 17) .............................................................

500

INTM (LD 58) ............................................................

836

INTN (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

INTR (LD 15) ............................................................

302

INTR (LD 19) ............................................................

595

INTR (LD 58) ............................................................

836

INTU (LD 56) ............................................................

800

INTU (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

INVC (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

INVN (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

INVS (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

IOHQ (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

IPCONF (LD 17) .......................................................

500

IPIE (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

IPMG (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

IPR0 / 1 (LD 97) ......................................................

1039

IPRI (LD 14) ..............................................................

242

IPTN (LD 14) ............................................................

242

IPUB (LD 16) ............................................................

399

IRFP (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IRFR (LD 15) ............................................................

302

IRNG (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ISAP (LD 23) ............................................................

684

ISAR (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ISDM (LD 86) ............................................................

942

ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) ...............

684

ISDN (LD 15) ............................................................

302

ISDN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ISDN_MCNT (LD 17) ................................................

500

ISDN_MCNT (LD 27) ................................................

734

ISET (LD 86) .............................................................

942

ISLM (LD 17) ............................................................

500

ISM (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

ITBP (LD 73) .............................................................

862

ITDN (LD 16) ............................................................

399

ITED (LD 90) ............................................................

978

ITEI (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

ITEI (LD 90) ..............................................................

978

ITEM (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

ITEM (LD 11) ............................................................

147

ITH1 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

ITH2 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

ITH3 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

ITHC (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

ITHS (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

ITNA (LD 11) .............................................................

147

ITOH (LD 87) ............................................................

958

ITOH (LD 90) ............................................................

978

ITOL (LD 16) .............................................................

399

ITPP (LD 73) .............................................................

862

ITXX (LD 57) .............................................................

823

IVMS (LD 23) ............................................................

684

IVR (LD 23) ...............................................................

684

J

JDGT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

JDMI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

K

K (LD 17) ..................................................................

500

KBA (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

KBD (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

KEEP_MSGS (LD 10) ................................................

90

KEEP_MSGS (LD 11) ...............................................

147

KEM (LD 11) .............................................................

147

KEM_RANGE (LD 20) ..............................................

629

KEMOFST (LD 11) ....................................................

147

KEY (LD 12) .............................................................

222

KEY1 (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

KEY2 (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

KEY3 (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

L

L2_RST (LD 74) .......................................................

898

1222 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

LA11 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA12 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA21 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA22 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA31 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA32 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA41 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA42 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA51 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LA52 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LAAC (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

LADN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LANG (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

LANG (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

LANG (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

LANGUAGE (LD 17) .................................................

500

LAPB (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

LAPD (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

LAPD (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

LAPW (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

LAST (LD 16) ............................................................

399

LCKT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LCLB (LD 73) ............................................................

862

LCMT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

LCN1 (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

LCN2 (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

LCNO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

LCTL (LD 17) ............................................................

500

LD 11 program ..........................................................

684

LDA0 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDA1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDA2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDA3 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDA4 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDA5 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LDAC (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

LDBZ (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDDD (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

LDID (LD 90) ............................................................

978

LDN (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

LDN (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

LDN (LD 27) .............................................................

734

LDN (LD 56) .............................................................

800

LDN (LD 90) .............................................................

978

LDN_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

LDN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN0 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN1 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN2 (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

LDN2 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDN3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN3 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDN4 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN4 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDN5 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDN5 (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

LDNT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LDOP (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

LDTT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LEC (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

LEC (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

LEND (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LEVL (LD 17) ............................................................

500

LFAC (LD 73) ............................................................

862

LFAL (LD 52) ............................................................

778

LFAL (LD 73) ............................................................

862

LFAR (LD 52) ............................................................

778

LFFD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

LGTH (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

LHK (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

LID (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

LILO (LD 57) .............................................................

823

LIMT (LD 56) ............................................................

800

LINK (LD 15) .............................................................

302

LINT (LD 52) .............................................................

778

LIS (LD 17) ...............................................................

500

LIST (LD 87) .............................................................

958

LLID (LD 17) .............................................................

500

LLT (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

LM0 (LD 52) ..............................................................

778

LM1 (LD 52) ..............................................................

778

LM2 (LD 52) ..............................................................

778

LM3 (LD 52) ..............................................................

778

LMNL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

LNAME_OPTION (LD 17) ........................................

500

LNRS (LD 10) .............................................................

90

LNRS (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

LOC (LD 90) .............................................................

978

LOC (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

LOCD (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

LOCK (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

LOCK (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

LOCL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

LOG (LD 23) .............................................................

684

LOGIN_NAME (LD 17) .............................................

500

LOOP (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

LOOP (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

LOOP (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

LOUT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

LOUT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1223

LPIB (LD 17) .............................................................

500

LPK (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

LPWD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

LSC (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

LSC (LD 87) ..............................................................

958

LSC (Local Steering Code) .......................................

942

LSNO (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

LSNO (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

LSNO (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

LSNO (LD 81) ...........................................................

908

LSSL (LD 74) ............................................................

898

LTEI (LD 27) .............................................................

734

LTER (LD 86) ............................................................

942

LTHR (LD 17) ............................................................

500

LTID (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

LTN (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

LVNO (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

M

M911_ABAN (LD 16) ................................................

399

M911_ANI (LD 16) ....................................................

399

M911_FORM (LD 16) ...............................................

399

M911_TONE (LD 16) ................................................

399

M911_TRK_TYPE (LD 16) .......................................

399

MAIN (LD 15) ............................................................

302

MAND (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

MANO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MANU (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MANU (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

MAP (LD 29) .............................................................

758

MARP (LD 10) ............................................................

90

MARP (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

MARP (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MAT (LD 17) .............................................................

500

MAT_READ_ONLY (LD 17) ......................................

500

MATT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

MAUT (LD 10) ............................................................

90

MAUT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

MAX (LD 16) .............................................................

399

MAXP (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MAXT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

MAXT (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

MAXU (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

MBG (LD 15) ............................................................

302

MBGA (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MBGA (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MBGS (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

MBNR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MBXR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MBXR (LD 21) ..........................................................

656

MCAL (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

MCAN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MCCD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MCCL (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

MCDC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MCDT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

MCFD (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MCLR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MCM (LD 73) ............................................................

862

MCNT (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MCOM (LD 57) .........................................................

823

MCRT (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MCTM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MCTS (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MDID (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

MDL (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

MDMP (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MDTD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MED (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

MEMB (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

MFAC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

MFAO (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

MFC (LD 16) .............................................................

399

MFC_ENT (LD 15) ....................................................

302

MFCG (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MFCI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

MFCO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MFEA (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

MFED (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MFEI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

MFEO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MFF (LD 73) .............................................................

862

MFID (LD 15) ............................................................

302

MFKI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

MFKO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MFL (LD 14) .............................................................

242

MFLI (LD 14) ............................................................

242

MFLT0 (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

MFLT1 (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

MFPD (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

MFRL (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

MFRL (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

MFSD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MFSL (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

MFSS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

MFVN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MFVO (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MG_CARD (LD 17) ...................................................

500

MG_CARD (LD 27) ...................................................

734

MGCLK (LD 73) ........................................................

862

MGCONF (LD 17) .....................................................

500

1224 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

MGCR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MGTDS (LD 17) ........................................................

500

MHLD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MID ...........................................................................

942

MID_SCPU (LD 17) ..................................................

500

MIN (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

MINL (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

MINP (LD 73) ............................................................

862

MINT (LD 56) ............................................................

800

MISDIAL_DELAY (LD 24) .........................................

711

MISDIAL_PREVENTION (LD 24) .............................

711

MISP (LD 27) ............................................................

734

MLDN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MLDN (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MLIO (LD 57) ............................................................

823

MLNG (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

MLNG (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

MLPPSD (LD 15) ......................................................

302

MLPPSD (LD 87) ......................................................

958

MLWU_LANG (LD 10) ................................................

90

MLWU_LANG (LD 11) ..............................................

147

MMDN (LD 58) .........................................................

836

MNDN (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

MNG1 (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

MNG2 (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

MNOD .......................................................................

942

MNPI .........................................................................

942

MNT (LD 57) .............................................................

823

MNTC (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MNUM ......................................................................

942

MNXX (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

MOD (LD 11) .............................................................

147

MOD (LD 16) ............................................................

399

MODE (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MODE (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MODE (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

MODIFY (LD 17) .......................................................

500

MODL (LD 10) ............................................................

90

MODL (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

MODL (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

MODL (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

MON (LD 16) ............................................................

399

MONT (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

MOPT (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

MOTN (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

MOTN (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

MPED (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MPH (LD 15) .............................................................

302

MPH (LD 27) .............................................................

734

MPHC (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

MPHI (LD 11) ............................................................

147

MPHI (LD 20) ............................................................

629

MPL (LD 87) .............................................................

958

MPO_DATA (LD 15) .................................................

302

MPOP (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MPRI (LD 87) ............................................................

958

MQA (LD 23) ............................................................

684

MQAP (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MQAS (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MQC_FEAT (LD 16) .................................................

399

MQC_FEAT (LD 17) .................................................

500

MQCF (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MQUE (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MR (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

MRCD (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

MRPS (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

MRT (LD 11) .............................................................

147

MRT (LD 16) .............................................................

399

MSBA (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MSBD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MSCC (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

MSCD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSCL (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

MSDT (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MSEC (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MSG (LD 29) ............................................................

758

MSG1 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG10 (LD 15) ........................................................

302

MSG2 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG3 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG4 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG5 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG6 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG7 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG8 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSG9 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSRN (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSSC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MSSD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MTAR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

MTEI (LD 27) ............................................................

734

MTFM (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

MTGL (LD57) ............................................................

823

MTND (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MTO (LD 58) .............................................................

836

MTON .......................................................................

942

MTRC (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MTRN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

MTRO (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MTSP (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

MULT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

MULTI_USER (LD 17) ..............................................

500

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1225

MURT (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MURT (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

MURT (LD 50) ..........................................................

772

MURT (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

MUS (LD 15) .............................................................

302

MUS (LD 16) .............................................................

399

MUSR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MVSG (LD 25) ..........................................................

719

MVT (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

MWAN (LD 56) .........................................................

800

MWC (LD 23) ............................................................

684

MWDT (LD 56) .........................................................

800

MWFB (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

MWIF (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

MWIF (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

MWNS (LD 15) .........................................................

302

MWRA (LD 57) .........................................................

823

MWRT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

MWRT (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

MWTO (LD 16) .........................................................

399

MWTO (LD 17) .........................................................

500

MWUA (LD 57) .........................................................

823

MWUD (LD 57) .........................................................

823

MWUN (LD 10) ...........................................................

90

MXDM (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

MXFC (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

MXFS (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

MXIX (LD 86) ............................................................

942

MXLC (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

MXLN (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

MXRL (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

MXSC (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

MXSD (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

MXTI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

N

N1 (LD 17) ................................................................

500

N1 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

N2 (LD 17) ................................................................

500

N2 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

N200 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

N200 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

N201 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

N201 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

N2X4 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

N2X4 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

NACC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NACT (LD 20) ...................................................

629

,

734

NACT (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

NACT (LD 81) ...........................................................

908

NACT (LD 82) ...........................................................

928

NACT (LD 83) ...........................................................

931

NADT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

NAGN (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

NALT (LD 86) ............................................................

942

NAME (LD 10) ............................................................

90

NAME (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

NAME (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

NAME (LD 95) ........................................................

1023

NAS_ ACTV (LD 15) .................................................

302

NAS_ ATCL (LD 15) .................................................

302

NASA (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

NASA (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

NATC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NATL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

NATP (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

NAUT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

NBLK (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

NCDP (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

NCFW (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

NCG1 (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

NCG2 (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

NCNA (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NCNI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

NCOS (LD 10) ............................................................

90

NCOS (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

NCOS (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

NCOS (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

NCOS (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NCOS (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

NCOS (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

NCOS (LD 24) ..........................................................

711

NCOS (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

NCOS (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

NCOS (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

NCOS (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

NCPU (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

NCR (LD 17) .............................................................

500

NCRD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NCS1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NCS2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NCSD (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

NCTH (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

NCWL (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

NDFL (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

NDGT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NDGT (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

NDID .........................................................................

147

NDID (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NDIG (LD 16) ............................................................

399

1226 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

NDNO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NDP (LD 16) .............................................................

399

NDR1 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................

800

NDR1 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................

800

NDR2 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................

800

NDR2 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................

800

NDR3 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................

800

NDR3 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................

800

NDR4 BCS (LD 56) ..................................................

800

NDR4 PBX (LD 56) ...................................................

800

NDRI (LD 16) ............................................................

399

NEDC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NET_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

NEW DATA PLANNED? (LD 29) ..............................

758

NEWTYP ..................................................................

147

NFCR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NFNS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NGRP (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

NHTN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

NINV (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NIPN (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NIPR (LD 56) ............................................................

800

NIT (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

NIT_DATA (LD 15) ....................................................

302

NIT1 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NIT1 (LD 93) .............................................................

991

NIT2 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NIT2 (LD 93) .............................................................

991

NIT3 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NIT3 (LD 93) .............................................................

991

NIT4 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NIT4 (LD 93) .............................................................

991

NIT5 (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NITC (LD 95) ..........................................................

1023

NITE (LD 14) ............................................................

242

NITR (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NMAP (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

NMBR (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

NMME (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

NMNL (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NMSG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NMUS (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

NND (LD 52) .............................................................

778

NNDC (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

NNT (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NODE (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NOLS (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

NOOS (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

NOTI (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NOUT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

NPA (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

NPA (LD 19) ..............................................................

595

NPA (LD 87) ..............................................................

958

NPA (LD 90) ..............................................................

978

NPI (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

NPID (LD 16) ............................................................

399

NPID_TBL_NUM (LD 16) .........................................

399

NRAC (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

NRCV (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

NRDY (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

NRES (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NRMT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

NRNG (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

NRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

NRT (LD 16) .............................................................

399

NRT (LD 23) .............................................................

684

NRWU (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

NSC (LD 87) .............................................................

958

NSCC (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

NSCP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

NSF (LD 16) .............................................................

399

NSO (LD 15) .............................................................

302

NSTO (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

NT2 (LD 74) ..............................................................

898

NTBL (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

NTC (LD 73) .............................................................

862

NTCD (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

NTN (LD 27) .............................................................

734

NTN1 (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

NTN2 (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

NTNO (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

NTOF (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

NTOL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

NTT (LD 94) ............................................................

1015

NUID (LD 11) ............................................................

147

NUMZONE (LD 10) ....................................................

90

NUMZONE (LD 11) ...................................................

147

NUMZONE (LD 12) ..................................................

222

NUMZONE (LD 20) ..................................................

629

NUMZONE (LD 83) ..................................................

931

NWIF (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

NWT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

NXX (LD 19) .............................................................

595

NXX (LD 87) .............................................................

958

NXX (LD 90) .............................................................

978

NZON (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

O

OABS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

OACn (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

OAL (LD 16) .............................................................

399

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1227

OAN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OAS_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

OBKT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

OBPT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

OBSC (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

OBTN (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

OC (LD 27) ...............................................................

734

OCB1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

OCB2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

OCB3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

OCBA (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

OCBD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

OCBV (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

OCLI (LD 15) ............................................................

302

OCN (LD 23) .............................................................

684

ODN0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN4 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN5 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN6 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN7 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN8 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ODN9 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

OFFC (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

OFFP (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

OGDN (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OGIS (LD 16) ............................................................

399

OGNP (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OGNT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OGPS (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OHAS (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

OHID (LD 10) .............................................................

90

OHID (LD 11) ............................................................

147

OHQ (LD 16) ............................................................

399

OHQ (LD 56) ............................................................

800

OHQ (LD 86) ............................................................

942

OHQ (LD 87) ............................................................

958

OHQT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OHT (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OHTD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OHTL (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

OHTT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

OMPH (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

ONP (LD 73) .............................................................

862

OOSC (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

OPA (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OPCB (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

OPD (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OPDL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

OPE (LD 11) .............................................................

147

OPE (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OPER (LD 19) ..........................................................

595

OPER (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

OPP (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OPR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

OPR (LD 20) .............................................................

656

OPRI (LD 14) ............................................................

242

OPT (LD 15) .............................................................

302

OPT (LD 27) .............................................................

734

OPT (LD 29) .............................................................

758

OPX (LD 73) .............................................................

862

ORUR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

OSDN (LD 24) ..........................................................

711

OSG1 (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

OSG2 (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

OSGD (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

OTBF (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

OTCR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

OTH (LD 56) .............................................................

800

OTL (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

OUT_T306 (LD 16) ...................................................

399

OUT_T306 (LD 17) ...................................................

500

OUTS (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

OVBU (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

OVDN (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

OVFL (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

OVFL (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

OVLA (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

OVLL (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

OVLP (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

OVLR (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

OVLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

OVLS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

OVLS (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

OVLT (LD 16) ............................................................

399

OVLT (LD 17) ............................................................

500

OVLY (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

OVRD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

OVRD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

OVTH (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

P

P BRLS (R) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P BRLS (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P BURS (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P BURS (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P CALL (R) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P CAS (R) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

P CAS (S) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

P DIGT (R) (LD 73) ...................................................

862

1228 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

P DIGT (S) (LD 73) ...................................................

862

P EOS (R) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

P EOSB (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P EOSF (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P ESNW (R) (LD 73) ................................................

862

P ESNW (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P FRLS (R) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P FRLS (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P METR (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P NXFR (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P NXFR (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P OPCA (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P OPRC (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P OPRS (R) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P RCOD (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P RCTL (R) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P RCTL (S) (LD 73) ..................................................

862

P RRC (S) (LD 73) ....................................................

862

P WNKS (R) (LD 73) ................................................

862

P WNKS (S) (LD 73) .................................................

862

P10 (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

P10P (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

P10R (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

P12R (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

P20R (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

PADL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

PADT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PAGE (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

PAGE (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

PAGE (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

PAGE (LD 81) ...........................................................

908

PAGE (LD 82) ...........................................................

928

PAGE (LD 83) ...........................................................

931

PAGE (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

PAGEOFST (LD 11) ..................................................

147

PAGT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

PANI (LD 15) .............................................................

302

PANN (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

PANS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PAR (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

PAR (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

PARM (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PARY (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PATH (LD 58) ............................................................

836

PATI (LD 56) .............................................................

800

PBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

PBDO (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

PBDO (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

PBLK (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PBUZ (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PBXH (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PCA (LD 15) .............................................................

302

PCA (LD 21) .............................................................

656

PCAD (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

PCDL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PCDR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PCDS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PCID (LD 16) .....................................................

380

,

399

PCID (LD 21) ............................................................

656

PCMC (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PCML (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

PCML (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PCML (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

PCMM (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

PCMR (LD 52) ..........................................................

778

PCWT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

PDCA (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

PDCA (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

PDCA (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

PDCH (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PDT ..........................................................................

500

PECL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PELK (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PER (LD 86) .............................................................

942

PERS (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

PFAN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PFNA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PFX1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

PFX2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

PGAP (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

PGBY (LD 29) ...........................................................

758

PGIP (LD 57) ............................................................

823

PGMM (LD 29) .........................................................

758

PGPN (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

PGPN (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

PGSP (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

PH (LD 27) ................................................................

734

PHDT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PHIP (LD 15) ............................................................

302

PICP (LD 15) ............................................................

302

PII (LD 16) ................................................................

399

PINT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

PINX_CUST (LD 17) ................................................

500

PINX_DN (LD 15) .....................................................

302

PKND (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PKUP (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

PLAT (LD 18) ............................................................

585

PLDN (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

PLDN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

PLEV (LD 10) .............................................................

90

PLEV (LD 11) ............................................................

147

PLEV (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1229

PMCR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PMIN (LD 17) ............................................................

500

PMSI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

PNDL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PNI (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

PNI (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

PNNC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

PNNC (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

PNPS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

POLR (LD 13) ...........................................................

234

PONW (LD 57) .........................................................

823

PORT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PORT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

POS (LD 11) .............................................................

147

POST (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

POST (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

PPID (LD 14) ............................................................

242

PPM_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

PPMD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PPMD (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

PR_RTN (LD 16) ......................................................

399

PR_RTN (LD 17) ......................................................

500

PR_TRIGS (LD 16) ...................................................

399

PR_TRIGS (LD 17) ...................................................

500

PRBK (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

PRCS (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

PRDL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PRDN (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

PRE (LD 18) .............................................................

585

PRED (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

PREF (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PREF (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

PREF CC0 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

PREF CC1 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

PREF CC2 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

PREF CC3 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

PREF CC4 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

PREM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

PREM (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

PREO (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PRES (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

PRES (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

PRES (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

PRET (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

PRFX (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

PRI (LD 10) ................................................................

90

PRI (LD 11) ...............................................................

147

PRI (LD 17) ...............................................................

500

PRI (LD 27) ...............................................................

734

PRI (LD 73) ...............................................................

862

PRI_CH (LD 27) .......................................................

734

PRI2 (LD 17) .............................................................

500

PRI2 (LD 73) .............................................................

862

PRID (LD 27) ............................................................

734

PRIM (LD 17) ............................................................

500

PRIM (LD 23) ............................................................

684

PRIO (LD 14) ............................................................

242

PRIO (LD 23) ............................................................

684

PRIV (LD 16) ............................................................

399

PRIV (LD 74) ............................................................

898

PRM (LD 11) .............................................................

147

PRMT (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PRNG (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PROCEED ................................................................

147

PROG (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

PROG (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PROM (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

PRTD (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

PRTY (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PSAL (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

PSDS (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

PSDS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PSEL (LD 11) ............................................................

147

PSEL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PSIZ (LD 27) .............................................................

734

PST (LD 18) ..............................................................

585

PSTN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PTMR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PTTY (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

PTUT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

PUDN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

PUGR (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

PULS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

PURN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

PVC (LD 27) .............................................................

734

PVCN (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

PWD (LD 17) ............................................................

500

PWD_DATA (LD 15) .................................................

302

PWD2 (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

PWD2 (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

PWD2 (LD 22) ..........................................................

668

PWD2 (LD 29) ..........................................................

758

PWD2 (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

PWnn (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

PWTP (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

Q

QCHID (LD 17) .........................................................

500

QDIS (LD 12) ............................................................

222

QREC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

QTHM (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

1230 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

QUE (LD 86) .............................................................

942

R

R_ENTRY (LD 15) ....................................................

302

R_SIZE (LD 15) ........................................................

302

R2BN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

R2ED (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

R2MD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RACD (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RADR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

RADT (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

RAGT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

RAIE (LD 73) ............................................................

862

RALL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

RALM (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

RAN (LD 23) .............................................................

684

RAN1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RAN2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RAN2 (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

RANC (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

RANE (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

RANF (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RANG (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

RANH (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RANR (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

RANR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RANR (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

RANR (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

RANR (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

RANR (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

RANX (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RAO (LD 23) .............................................................

684

RATE (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

RATE (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

RATS (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

RBCS (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

RBTD (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

RCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

RCAL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RCAL (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

RCAL (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

RCAP ........................................................................

500

RCFA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RCFD (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RCFV (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RCLE (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RCLS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RCNT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RCO (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

RCO (LD 11) .............................................................

147

RCRG (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

RCTI (LD 58) ............................................................

836

RCVP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

RCY1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RCY2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RDLN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RDNA (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

RDNE (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

RDNL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RDR_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

RDSN (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

RDST (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RECA (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

RECD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

RECV (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

REF (LD 16) .............................................................

399

REF0 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

REF1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

REF2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

REF3 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

REMD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

REMO (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

REMQ (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

REP (LD 16) .............................................................

399

REP (LD 57) .............................................................

823

REPL PARM (LD 74) ................................................

898

REPT (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

REQ (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

REQ (LD 11) .............................................................

147

REQ (LD 12) .............................................................

222

REQ (LD 13) .............................................................

234

REQ (LD 14) .............................................................

242

REQ (LD 15) .............................................................

302

REQ (LD 16) .............................................................

399

REQ (LD 17) .............................................................

500

REQ (LD 18) .............................................................

585

REQ (LD 19) .............................................................

595

REQ (LD 20) .............................................................

629

REQ (LD 21) .............................................................

656

REQ (LD 22) .............................................................

668

REQ (LD 23) .............................................................

684

REQ (LD 24) .............................................................

711

REQ (LD 25) .............................................................

719

REQ (LD 26) .............................................................

723

REQ (LD 27) .............................................................

734

REQ (LD 28) .............................................................

755

REQ (LD 29) .............................................................

758

REQ (LD 49) .............................................................

766

REQ (LD 50) .............................................................

772

REQ (LD 52) .............................................................

778

REQ (LD 56) .............................................................

800

REQ (LD 57) .............................................................

823

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1231

REQ (LD 58) .............................................................

836

REQ (LD 73) .............................................................

862

REQ (LD 74) .............................................................

898

REQ (LD 79) .............................................................

905

REQ (LD 81) .............................................................

908

REQ (LD 82) .............................................................

928

REQ (LD 83) .............................................................

931

REQ (LD 86) .............................................................

942

REQ (LD 87) .............................................................

958

REQ (LD 88) .............................................................

967

REQ (LD 90) .............................................................

978

REQ (LD 93) .............................................................

991

REQ (LD 94) ...........................................................

1015

REQ (LD 95) ...........................................................

1023

REQ (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

RESN (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

RETC (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

RETT (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

RFRQ (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

RGAA (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

RGAB (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

RGAD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

RGAI (LD 23) ............................................................

684

RGAR (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

RGAV (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RGBK (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

RGFL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RGNA (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

RGTP (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

RICI (LD 15) .............................................................

302

RICI (LD 93) .............................................................

991

RING (LD 56) ............................................................

800

RLA (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

RLCR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RLDN (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

RLI (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

RLI (LD 86) ...............................................................

942

RLI (LD 87) ...............................................................

958

RLI (LD 90) ...............................................................

978

RLNO ........................................................................

942

RLS (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

RLS (LD 50) ..............................................................

772

RLSM (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RMOV (LD 26) ..........................................................

723

RMST (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

RNGE (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

RNGE (LD 21) ..........................................................

656

RNGE (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

RNPG (LD 10) ............................................................

90

RNPG (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

RNPG (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

RNPI .........................................................................

942

ROA_DATA (LD 15) ..................................................

302

ROLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

ROPT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

ROPT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

ROUT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

ROUT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

ROUT (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

RPA (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

RPA (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

RPAN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RPAR (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

RPAW (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

RPAX (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RPAX (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

RPCT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

RPEB (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

RPF (LD 52) .............................................................

778

RPNS (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RPPM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RPRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

RPTO (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

RR (LD 15) ...............................................................

302

RRBS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RRPA (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

RSAC (LD 28) ...........................................................

755

RSND (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

RTCL (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

RTIM (LD 15) ............................................................

302

RTIM (LD 58) ............................................................

836

RTMB (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

RTMR (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

RTN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

RTNO (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

RTON ........................................................................

942

RTPC (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

RTQO (LD 23) ..........................................................

684

RTQT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

RTRY (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

RTS (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

RTSA (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

RTXX (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

RTYP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RUCF (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RUCS (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RURC (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

RVDL (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

RVSD (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

RWTA (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

RXMT (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

1232 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

S

S_ENTRY (LD 15) ....................................................

302

S_SIZE (LD 15) ........................................................

302

S10P (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

S2 (LD 74) ................................................................

898

SAC (LD 19) .............................................................

595

SACP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SADS (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SAEN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SALK (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SAMM (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

SARC (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

SASU (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

SAT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

SAT (LD 74) ..............................................................

898

SATD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SATN (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SATT (LD 73) ............................................................

862

SAUN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SAVE (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

SAVE NEW MAP? (LD 29) .......................................

758

SBA_ADM_INS (LD 17) ...........................................

500

SBA_USER (LD 17) .................................................

500

SBLF (LD 15) ............................................................

302

SBN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

SBOC (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

SBUP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SCBQ (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

SCCI (LD 86) ............................................................

942

SCCT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SCDL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SCDR (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

SCDT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

SCFT (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SCI (LD 10) ................................................................

90

SCI (LD 11) ...............................................................

147

SCNO (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

SCNT (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

SCNV (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

SCOD (LD 24) ..........................................................

711

SCPC (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SCPL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SCPW (LD 10) ............................................................

90

SCPW (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

SCPW (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

SCR (LD 16) .............................................................

399

SCTL (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SDA (LD 18) .............................................................

585

SDCH (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

SDFL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SDID (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SDID (LD 49) ............................................................

766

SDNB (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SDRR (LD 90) ..........................................................

978

SDST (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SDTA (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SDTT (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

SECOND_DN (LD 10) ................................................

90

SECOND_DN (LD 11) ..............................................

147

SECR (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

SECU (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SEIZ (LD 14) .............................................................

242

SEIZ (LD 16) .............................................................

399

SEMT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SER (LD 50) .............................................................

772

SERV (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

SET (LD 94) ............................................................

1015

SETN (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

SEVERITY (LD 17) ...................................................

500

SEZA (R) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SEZA (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SEZD (R) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SEZD (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SEZV (R) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SEZV (S) (LD 73) .....................................................

862

SFAC (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SFDN (LD 10) .............................................................

90

SFDN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

SFEX (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

SFLT (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

SFLT (LD 11) ............................................................

147

SFMT (LD 10) .............................................................

90

SFMT (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

SFNB (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

SFNB (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

SFNB (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SFRB (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

SFRQ (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SGL (LD 16) .............................................................

399

SGRP (LD 10) ............................................................

90

SGRP (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

SGRP (LD 12) ..........................................................

222

SGRP (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

SGRP (LD 27) ..........................................................

734

SGRP (LD 81) ..........................................................

908

SGRP (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

SGRP (LD 93) ..........................................................

991

SHAN (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

SHCD (LD 25) ..........................................................

719

SHORT (LD 20) ........................................................

629

SHR (LD 23) .............................................................

684

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1233

SHRT (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

SHSG (LD 25) ..........................................................

719

SICA (LD 14) ............................................................

242

SICA (LD 73) ............................................................

862

SID (LD 16) ...............................................................

399

SID (LD 17) ...............................................................

500

SIDE (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SIDE (LD 17) ............................................................

500

SIDE (LD 74) ............................................................

898

SIGL (LD 14) ............................................................

242

SIGL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SIGL (LD 74) ............................................................

898

SIGO (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SIND (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SIPD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

SIPL_ON (LD 15) .....................................................

302

SIPU (LD 11) .............................................................

147

SITM (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

SIZE (LD 15) .............................................................

302

SIZE (LD 17) .............................................................

500

SIZE (LD 18) .............................................................

585

SIZE (LD 21) .............................................................

656

SL1B (LD 17) ............................................................

500

SLCT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

SLIS_NAT_PRIV_IP .................................................

500

SLLC (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SLOT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

SLP (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

SLV3 (LD 19) ............................................................

595

SLV6 (LD 19) ............................................................

595

SMAS (LD 14) ..........................................................

242

SMEM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

SMFC (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

SNUM (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

SOHQ (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

SOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SOPC (LD 02) ............................................................

69

SOPN (LD 02) ............................................................

69

SOPS (LD 02) ............................................................

69

SORTBY (LD 20) ......................................................

629

SOS (LD 73) .............................................................

862

Source Timed Local Flow-in queue ..........................

684

Source Timed Overflow queue .................................

684

SPAR (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

SPCC (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SPCE (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SPCL (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SPCP (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SPCT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

SPCU (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SPDN (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

SPID (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

SPID (LD 11) .............................................................

147

SPID (LD 27) ............................................................

734

SPN (LD 16) .............................................................

399

SPN (LD 87) .............................................................

958

SPN (LD 90) .............................................................

978

SPRE (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SPRI (LD 87) ............................................................

958

SPTO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

SPVC (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SPWD (LD 10) ............................................................

90

SPWD (LD 11) ..........................................................

147

SPWD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

SPWD (LD 20) ..........................................................

629

SPWD (LD 24) ..........................................................

711

SPWD (LD 88) ..........................................................

967

SRAN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SRC (LD 25) .............................................................

719

SRC (LD 56) .............................................................

800

SRC1 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC2 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC3 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC4 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC5 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC6 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC7 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRC8 (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SRCD (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

SRCH (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

SRCL (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

SREF (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

SREF (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

SREF CC0 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

SREF CC1 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

SREF CC2 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

SREF CC3 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

SREF CC4 (LD 73) ...................................................

862

SRIM (LD 73) ............................................................

862

SRMM (LD 73) ..........................................................

862

SRNT (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

SRPM (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

SRPT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SRRT (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

SRRT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

SRRT (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

SRT (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

SRT (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

SRT (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

SRT (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

SRT (LD 93) ..............................................................

991

SRTK (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

1234 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

SRVC (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

SSC (LD 97) ...........................................................

1039

SSCL (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

SSDG (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

SSDT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SSHC (LD 02) ............................................................

69

SSHS (LD 02) .............................................................

69

SSID (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

SSL (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

SSL (LD 18) ..............................................................

585

SSLK (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SSPU (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

SSRC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SSRC (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

SSRV_ETSI (LD 27) .................................................

734

SSRV_N1 (LD 27) ....................................................

734

SST (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

SSU (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

SSU (LD 12) .............................................................

222

SSUC (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

SSUP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

STAD (LD 02) .............................................................

69

STAL (LD 95) ..........................................................

1023

STAR (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

STCB (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

STE (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

STEP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

STHC (LD 02) .............................................................

69

STHS (LD 02) .............................................................

69

STIO (LD 23) ............................................................

684

STND (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

STO (LD 58) .............................................................

836

STOP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

STOP (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

STOR (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

STOR (LD 26) ...........................................................

723

STRG (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

STRI (LD 14) ............................................................

242

STRK (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

STRK (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

STRL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

STRO (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

STRT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

STSG (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

STUN (LD 25) ...........................................................

719

STYP (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

STYP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

STYP (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

SUB (LD 19) .............................................................

595

SUPL_SVC (LD 27) ..................................................

734

SUPN (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

SUPPORTED_TEXT_ONLY (LD 17) ........................

500

SUPPRESS (LD 17) .................................................

500

SUPT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

SURV (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

SVFL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SWP (LD 16) ............................................................

399

SXS (LD 14) .............................................................

242

SYNC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

SYNM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

SZNI (LD 73) ............................................................

862

T

T (LD 97) .................................................................

1039

T_TN (LD 14) ............................................................

242

T1 (LD 17) ................................................................

500

T1 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

T10/T20 (LD 27) .......................................................

734

T100 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

T100 (LD 16) ............................................................

399

T11/T21 (LD 27) .......................................................

734

T12/T22 (LD 27) .......................................................

734

T13/T23 (LD 27) .......................................................

734

T2 (LD 17) ................................................................

500

T2 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

T2 (LD 97) ...............................................................

1039

T200 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

T200 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

T203 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

T203 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

T23 (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

T2WN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

T2WT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

T2WV (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

T3 (LD 17) ................................................................

500

T3 (LD 27) ................................................................

734

T310 (LD 17) ............................................................

500

T310 (LD 27) ............................................................

734

T4WN (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

T4WT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

T4WV (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

TABL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

TABL (LD 23) ............................................................

684

TABL (LD 56) ............................................................

800

TABT (LD 58) ............................................................

836

TARG (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TASK (LD 52) ............................................................

778

TAWU (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

TBL (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TBL (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

TBL (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

TBL (LD 86) ..............................................................

942

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1235

TBNO ........................................................................

942

TBNO (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

TBNO (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

TBNO (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

TBTR (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

TC (LD 27) ................................................................

734

TCFT (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TCPP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TCRS (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TDET (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TDET (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

TDG (LD 16) .............................................................

399

TDNS (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

TDP (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

TDPO (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

TDS (LD 17) .............................................................

500

TDSH (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TDST (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TDTA (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TEI (LD 27) ...............................................................

734

TEM (LD 20) .............................................................

629

TEMP (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

TEN (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

TEN (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

TEN (LD 17) .............................................................

500

TEN (LD 20) .............................................................

629

TEN (LD 93) .............................................................

991

TERD (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TERM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

TERQ (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TEST (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TFAS (LD 57) ............................................................

823

TFD (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

TFDR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TGAR (LD 10) ............................................................

90

TGAR (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

TGAR (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

TGAR (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TGAR (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

TGAR (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

TGAR (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

TGAR (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

TGLD (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TGLR (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

TGR1 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TGR2 (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

THIRD_DN (LD 10) ....................................................

90

THIRD_DN (LD 11) ...................................................

147

TID (LD 97) .............................................................

1039

TIDM (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIDY (LD 16) ............................................................

399

TIE (LD 56) ...............................................................

800

TIE (LD 94) .............................................................

1015

TIER (LD 16) ............................................................

399

TIM_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

TIM1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIM1 (LD 93) ............................................................

991

TIM2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIM2 (LD 93) ............................................................

991

TIM3 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIM3 (LD 93) ............................................................

991

TIM4 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIM4 (LD 93) ............................................................

991

TIME (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TIME (LD 73) ............................................................

862

TIMP (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

TIMP (LD 14) ............................................................

242

TIMR (LD 16) ............................................................

399

TIMR (LD 17) ............................................................

500

TIMR (LD 27) ............................................................

734

TITE (LD 17) .............................................................

500

TITH (LD 16) .............................................................

399

TITM (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

TKEY (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TKID (LD 14) ............................................................

242

TKTP (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TKTP (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

TLLC (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

TLP (LD 56) ..............................................................

800

TLPT (LD 56) ............................................................

800

TMAT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TMDI (LD 17) ............................................................

500

TMON (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

TMOT (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

TMRK (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

TN (LD 10) ..................................................................

90

TN (LD 11) ................................................................

147

TN (LD 12) ................................................................

222

TN (LD 13) ................................................................

234

TN (LD 14) ................................................................

242

TN (LD 17) ................................................................

500

TN (LD 20) ................................................................

629

TN (LD 22) ................................................................

668

TN (LD 27) ................................................................

734

TN (LD 50) ................................................................

772

TN (LD 84_85) ..........................................................

933

TN1 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TN2 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TN3 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TN4 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TN5 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

TN6 (LD 15) ..............................................................

302

1236 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

TNDM (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

TNDM (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

TNDN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

TNLS (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

TNS (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

TNUM (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

TO (LD 49) ................................................................

766

TOBO (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TOD (LD 86) .............................................................

942

TODR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TODS (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

TOFT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

TOGP (LD 26) ...........................................................

723

TOGR (LD 18) ..........................................................

585

TOHQ (LD 87) ..........................................................

958

TOHV (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

TOLL (LD 18) ............................................................

585

TOLL (LD 73) ............................................................

862

TOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TOLS (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

TOLT (LD 73) ............................................................

862

TON (LD 15) .............................................................

302

TONE (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TONE (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

TONES (LD 56) ........................................................

800

TOPC (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TOPN (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TOPS (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TORT (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

TOT4 (LD 23) ............................................................

684

TOTN (LD 10) ..............................................

90

,

222

,

234

TOTN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

TOTN (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

TOV (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

TOV (LD 16) .............................................................

399

TPDN (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TPDN (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

TPF (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

TPO (LD 17) .............................................................

500

TRAN (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

TRAN (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TRAN (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

TRAN (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

TRANS (LD 27) ........................................................

734

TRC (LD 73) .............................................................

862

TRCL (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TRCR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TRDN (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

TRDN (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

TRGT (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

TRIGGER (LD 17) ....................................................

500

TRLL (LD 17) ............................................................

500

TRMB (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

TRMD (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

TRMT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TRMT (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

TRNS (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TRNX (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TRO (LD 16) .............................................................

399

TRRL (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TRSH (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TRSH (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

TRVS (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

TSC (LD 87) .............................................................

958

TSET (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

TSFT (LD 23) ............................................................

684

TSHC (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TSHS (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TSID (LD 02) ..............................................................

69

TSO (LD 17) .............................................................

500

TST (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

TST_DATA (LD 15) ...................................................

302

TST0 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TST1 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TST2 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TST3 (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TSTL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TSUT (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TTA (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

TTAD (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TTBL (LD 15) ............................................................

302

TTBL (LD 16) ............................................................

399

TTHC (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TTHS (LD 02) .............................................................

69

TTY (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

TTY_TYPE (LD 17) ..................................................

500

TTYLOG (LD 17) ......................................................

500

TTYP (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

TUBO (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TW_INC_CLID (LD 16) .............................................

399

TW_ROUTE (LD 16) ................................................

399

TWSP (LD 58) ..........................................................

836

TYNM (LD 29) ..........................................................

758

TYPE (LD 10) .............................................................

90

TYPE (LD 11) ............................................................

147

TYPE (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

TYPE (LD 13) ...........................................................

234

TYPE (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

TYPE (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

TYPE (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

TYPE (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

TYPE (LD 18) ...........................................................

585

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1237

TYPE (LD 19) ...........................................................

595

TYPE (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

TYPE (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

TYPE (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

TYPE (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

TYPE (LD 24) ...........................................................

711

TYPE (LD 26) ...........................................................

723

TYPE (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

TYPE (LD 28) ...........................................................

755

TYPE (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

TYPE (LD 50) ...........................................................

772

TYPE (LD 52) ...........................................................

778

TYPE (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

TYPE (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

TYPE (LD 58) ...........................................................

836

TYPE (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

TYPE (LD 74) ...........................................................

898

TYPE (LD 79) ...........................................................

905

TYPE (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

TYPE (LD 87) ...........................................................

958

TYPE (LD 88) ...........................................................

967

TYPE (LD 90) ...........................................................

978

TYPE (LD 93) ...........................................................

991

TYPE (LD 94) .........................................................

1015

TYPE (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

TYPE (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

U

UAPR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

UBRI (LD 15) ............................................................

302

UCFS (LD 73) ...........................................................

862

UCST (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

UMG (LD 15) ............................................................

302

UMG (LD 23) ............................................................

684

UMT (LD 23) .............................................................

684

UPDT (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

USBM (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

USCR (LD 57) ..........................................................

823

USE (LD 57) .............................................................

823

USER (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

USER (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

USER (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

USER (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

USFB (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

USFB (LD 21) ...........................................................

656

USFB (LD 23) ...........................................................

684

USID (LD 27) ............................................................

734

USR (LD 17) .............................................................

500

UST (LD 15) .............................................................

302

UST (LD 23) .............................................................

684

USTA (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

UUI (LD 23) ..............................................................

684

UXID (LD 20) ............................................................

629

UXTY (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

V

V25 (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

V25 (LD 16) ..............................................................

399

VAS (LD 17) ..............................................................

500

VCNA (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

VCRD (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

VDCH (LD 86) ..........................................................

942

VDMI (LD 86) ............................................................

942

VHST (LD 22) ...........................................................

668

VLL (LD 11) ..............................................................

147

VMB (LD 10) ...............................................................

90

VMB (LD 11) .............................................................

147

VMB_COS (LD 10) .....................................................

90

VMB_COS (LD 11) ...................................................

147

VMB_STATE (LD 20) ................................................

629

VNDN (LD 79) ..........................................................

905

VNL (LD 73) ..............................................................

862

VNR (LD 15) .............................................................

302

VNS (LD 86) .............................................................

942

VNSC (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

VNSM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

VNSP (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

VO_ALO (LD 15) ......................................................

302

VO_ALOHR (LD 15) .................................................

302

VOLO_CALBK_TIM (LD 24) .....................................

711

VOLO_COUNT (LD 24) ............................................

711

VOLO_FIRST_TN (LD 24) ........................................

711

VOLR (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

VPNI (LD 15) ............................................................

302

VRAT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

VSID (LD 15) ............................................................

302

VSID (LD 17) ............................................................

500

VSID (LD 23) ............................................................

684

VSIG (LD 17) ............................................................

500

VSIT (LD 10) ..............................................................

90

VSIT (LD 11) .............................................................

147

VTLF (LD 57) ............................................................

823

VTLN (LD 57) ...........................................................

823

VTRK (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

VTRK (LD 86) ...........................................................

942

VTRO (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

VXCT (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

W

WAIT (LD 15) ............................................................

302

1238 Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011

WAIT (LD 16) ............................................................

399

WAIT (LD 93) ............................................................

991

WATR (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

WCAD (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

WDGT (LD 16) ..........................................................

399

WIRE (LD 11) ............................................................

147

WKDY (LD 15) ..........................................................

302

WRLS (LD 10) ............................................................

90

WRT (LD 18) .............................................................

585

WSIZ (LD 27) ............................................................

734

WTON (LD 56) ..........................................................

800

WTYP (LD 10) ............................................................

90

WUD (LD 15) ............................................................

302

X

X25P (LD 27) ............................................................

734

XCAD (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

XCT (LD 17) .............................................................

500

XDIC (LD 14) ............................................................

242

XEM (LD 73) .............................................................

862

XFER (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

XLAT (LD 18) ............................................................

585

XLST (LD 10) .............................................................

90

XLST (LD 11) ............................................................

147

XLST (LD 27) ............................................................

734

XMIT (LD 94) ..........................................................

1015

XNPD (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

XNUM (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

XPDN (LD 49) ...........................................................

766

XPE (LD 97) ............................................................

1039

XPE0 (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

XPE1 (LD 97) ..........................................................

1039

XPEC (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

XPLN (LD 10) .............................................................

90

XPLN (LD 11) ............................................................

147

XPLN (LD 95) .........................................................

1023

XPVC (LD 27) ...........................................................

734

XRFP (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

XRFR (LD 15) ...........................................................

302

XSM (LD 17) .............................................................

500

XSMN (LD 97) ........................................................

1039

XTDT (LD 13) ...........................................................

234

XTDT (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

XTDT (LD 97) .........................................................

1039

XTMR (LD 17) ..........................................................

500

XTON (LD 56) ...........................................................

800

XTRK (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

XTRK (LD 20) ...........................................................

629

XUT (LD 73) .............................................................

862

XXX (LD 87) .............................................................

958

Y

YALM (LD 17) ...........................................................

500

Z

ZBD (LD 15) .............................................................

302

ZBD (LD 21) .............................................................

656

ZONE (LD 11) ...........................................................

147

ZONE (LD 12) ...........................................................

222

ZONE (LD 14) ...........................................................

242

ZONE (LD 16) ...........................................................

399

ZONE0 / 1 (LD 97) ..................................................

1039

Nortel Communication Server 1000 April 2011 1239

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents